0% found this document useful (0 votes)
587 views442 pages

Volume 2B Specifications Civil

Uploaded by

Siva Prasath
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
587 views442 pages

Volume 2B Specifications Civil

Uploaded by

Siva Prasath
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 442

Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai.

UAE

PART – 2B

Specifications - Civil

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 1 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

PART 2B- CIVIL WORKS SPECIFICATIONS

DOC. NO. REV. SECTION TITLE


Sec. A 0 SECTION A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
C10 0 SPECIFICATION C10 SITE SURVEY
D20 0 SPECIFICATION D20 EXCAVATING AND FILLING
D40 0 SPECIFICATION D40 SHORING
D50 0 SPECIFICATION D50 DEWATERING
E05 0 SPECIFICATION E05 IN SITU CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION GENERALLY
E10 0 SPECIFICATION E10 MIXING, CASTING, CURING IN SITU CONCRETE
E20 0 SPECIFICATION E20 FORMWORK FOR IN SITU CONCRETE
E30 0 SPECIFICATION E30 REINFORCEMENT FOR IN SITU CONRETE
E40 0 SPECIFICATION E40 DESIGNED JOINTS IN SITU CONCRETE
E41 0 SPECIFICAITON E41 WORKED FINISHES TO IN SITU CONCRETE
E42 0 SPECIFICATION E42 ACCESSORIES CAST IN SITU CONCRETE
F10 0 SPECIFICATION F10 BRICK/ BLOCK WALLING
F30 0 SPECIFICATION F30 ACCESSORIES/ SUNDRY ITEMS FOR BRICK/ BLOCK/ STONE WALLING
G10 0 SPECIFICATION G10 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
H11 0 SPECIFICATION H11 CURTAIN WALL
H31 0 SPECIFICATION H31 METAL PROFILED/ FLAT SHEET CLADDING/ COVERING
H43 0 SPECIFICATION H43 METAL COMPOSITE PANEL CLADDING/ COVERING
J10 0 SPECIFICATION J10 CEMENTITIOUS MORTAR TANKING/DAMP PROOFING
J30 0 SPECIFICATION J30 LIQUID APPLIED TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING
J31 0 SPECIFICATION J31 LIQUID APPLIED WATERPROOF ROOF COATINGS
J40 0 SPECIFICATION J40 FLEXIBLE SHEET TANKING - DAMP PROOFING
J41 0 SPECIFICATION J41 REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOF COVERINGS
K10 0 SPECIFICATION K10 PLASTERBOARD DRY LININGS/ PARTIONS/ CEILINGS
K32 0 SPECIFICATION K32 PANEL CUBICLES
K40 0 SPECIFICATION K40 DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
K41 0 SPECIFICATION K41 RAISED ACCESS FLOOR
L10 0 SPECIFICATION L10 WINDOWS/ ROOFLIGHTS/ SCREENS/ LOUVRES
L20 0 SPECIFICATION L20 DOORS/ SHUTTERS/ HATCHES
L30 0 SPECIFICATION L30 STAIRS/ LADDERS/ WALKWAYS/ HANDRAILS/ BALUSTRADES
L40 0 SPECIFICATION L40 GENERAL GLAZING
M10 0 SPECIFICATION M10 CEMENT BASED LEVELLING/ WEARING SCREEDS
M12 0 SPECIFICATION M12 RESIN FLOORING
M20 0 SPECIFICATION M20 PLASTERED/ RENDERED/ ROUGHCAST COATINGS
M30 0 SPECIFICATION M30 METAL LATHING/ ANCHORED MESH REINFORCEMENT
FOR PLASTERED/ RENDERED COATINGS
M40 0 SPECIFICATION M40 STONE/ CONCRETE/ QUARRY/ CERAMIC TILING/ MOSAIC
M50 0 SPECIFICATION M50 RUBBER/ PLASTICS/ CORK/ LINO/ CARPET TILING/ SHEETING
M60 0 SPECIFICATION M60 PAINTING/ CLEAR FINISHING

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 2 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

M61 0 SPECIFICATION M61 INTUMESCENT COATINGS FOR FIRE PROTECTION OF STEELWORK

N10 0 SPECIFICATION N10 GENERAL FIXTURES/ FURNISHINGS/ EQUIPMENT

N13 0 SPECIFICATION N13 SANITARY APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS

N14 0 SPECIFICATION N14 GENERAL SIGNAGE SYSTEM

P10 0 SPECIFICATION P10 SUNDRY INSULATION/ PROOFING WORK

P12 0 SPECIFICATION P12 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEMS


P20 0 SPECIFICATION P20 UNFRAMED ISOLATED TRIMS/ SKIRTINGS/ SUNDRY ITEMS
P21 0 SPECIFICATION P21 DOOR/ WINDOW IRONMONGERY

P30 0 SPECIFICATION P30 TRENCHES/ PIPEWAYS/ PITS FOR BURIED ENGINEERING SERVICES
P31 0 SPECIFICATION P31 HOLES/ CHASES/ COVERS/ SUPPORTS FOR SERVICES
Q10 0 SPECIFICATION Q10 KERBS/ EDGINGS/ CHANNELS/ PAVING ACCESSORIES

Q20 0 SPECIFICATION Q20 GRANULAR SUB-BASES TO ROADS/ PAVINGS

Q24 0 SPECIFICATION Q24 INTERLOCKING BRICK/ BLOCK ROADS/ PAVINGS

Q40 0 SPECIFICATION Q40 FENCING


Q41 0 SPECIFICATION Q41 BARRIERS/ GUARDRAILS
Q50 0 SPECIFICATION Q50 SITE - STREET FURNITURE - EQUIPMENT

X12 0 SPECIFICATION X12 VERTICAL PLATFORM LIFT SYSTEMS

Z10 0 SPECIFICATION Z10 PURPOSE MADE JOINERY

Z11 0 SPECIFICATION Z11 PURPOSE MADE METALWORK

Z12 0 SPECIFICATION Z12 PRESERVATIVE/ FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT

Z20 0 SPECIFICATION Z20 FIXINGS/ ADHESIVES


Z21 0 SPECIFICATION Z21 MORTARS

Z22 0 SPECIFICATION Z22 SEALANTS


Z31 0 SPECIFICATION Z31 POWDER COATINGS

***End of Table of Content***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 3 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SECTION – A

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 4 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SECTION A – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 RELATIONSHIP OF SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATION

The Conditions of Contract, the Employers Requirements and Concept Drawings shall be
read in conjunction with the Technical Specifications and matters referred to, shown or
described in the former are not necessarily repeated in the latter.

Not withstanding the subdivision of the Specifications into various headings, every part is to
be deemed supplementary to every other part and the various parts are to be read with each
other, so far as it may practicable so to do, or when the context so permits.

Any item in any section of the Specification shall equally apply, wherever appropriate, to any
item in any other section.

In case of any ambiguity the matter shall be brought to the attention of the Employer, who
shall clarify the same and his decision shall be final.

1.2 STANDARDS

In various places throughout this Specification and the Bills of Quantities reference is made
to theStandards, Specifications and Bye Laws issued by the British Standards Institution and
other similar organizations. These references shall in every case be deemed to include the latest
edition or issue of such standards, Specifications and Bye Laws including all revisions,
amendments and addenda subsequently issued. Where materials are not specified to be to
British Standard and a standard exists in respect of such materials, then the materials shall in
all respects comply with the relevant and current British Standard. In such cases where British
Standards do not exist, the materials usedshall be of the best type available and shall generally
be to the Employers satisfaction.

Materials, goods and workmanship shall be of the best quality of their respective kinds and, as
far as applicable, shall comply in every respect with the requirements of the quoted Standards,
Codes of Practice and Specifications or any other national Standard approved by the
Employer. Preambles and descriptions of materials, goods and workmanship given in any one
section of the Specifications shall apply throughout the whole of these Specifications unless
otherwise described.

Where the quality of materials is not specified or a Nominated Supplier is not named, the quality
shall be the best obtainable and the workmanship shall be of the highest possible standard
to the satisfaction of the Employer.

The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Employer a list of names and addresses
of the manufacturers and trademarks or names of all the various types of materials and goods
he proposes to use in the Works. This list shall include reference to the Specifications Clause or
Article to which the materials and goods apply.
No orders for materials and goods shall be placed until approval has been obtained for
the materials and goods from the Employer.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

The Contractor shall design and obtain all NOCs and permits and construct the Work in
strict accordance with tender documents supplied by the Employer in conformity with all
authority regulations and shall comply with all written instructions and directions given from
time to time by the Employer. The work shall be designed and carried out in accordance

with B.S., C.P., American standards, all related Regulations, local orders, technical guide lines
and Local Authority By-Laws and to the satisfaction of the Building Authorities empowered

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 5 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

to control the work. All reference documents shall be the edition current at date of tender.

The Contractor shall design and execute the work in accordance with the intent and meaning
of the entire tender documents taken together and supply all accessories and other items
essential for theproper execution of the Works and shall execute all work which may be
inferred whether or not specifically shown or described.

1.4 SITE OFFICES, LATRINES, ETC.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the site for the duration of the Contract the following:

One) A temporary office for the accommodation of his Agent/engineer and his Staff, including
allnecessary sanitary facilities. Such an office shall be open at all reasonable hours to receive
instructions, notices or other communications.

Two) All work areas such as workshops, stores, yards, mess rooms etc. constructed inside the
site boundary or at an adjacent land in positions approved by the Employer, if permitted
by the Authority having jurisdiction. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining necessary
NOCs from DDA, neighboring plot owners, RTA etc.

Three) Suitable and adequate temporary facilities shall be provided by the Contractor for the
soleuse of the Employer and their representatives and their staff and shall be as per Appendix
(A1) of this section.

The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Authority after submitting his mobilization plan
showing his temporary offices, working yards, fencing, sign boards, storage facility, access routes
etc.

1.5 HEALTH & SAFETY FACTOR

All relevant national and local regulations concerning safety, health and welfare shall be observed
at all times. All latest regulations of Dubai Municipality (especially DM circular 211 dated
17.01.16), DDA, master developers, RTA, Dubai Police and DCD shall be strictly complied with.
The contractor shall collect the code of construction safety practice and Technical guide lines
from the Authority having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to comply
with the requirements of these codes and guidelines.

1.6 LOCATING, PROTECTING, MAINTAINING & DIVERTING SERVICES AND PUBLIC UTILITIES

The Contractor shall ascertain the whereabouts of all existing services and public utilities such
as electrical cables, telephone lines, sewers, water supply lines, gas lines, pipes, wires, fences, etc.,
on the site and within the Contract limit, both above and below ground. Service and other
utilities may exist in certain locations but not indicated on drawings. Completeness or accuracy
of information given on the drawings is not guaranteed. It is the responsibility of the Contractor
to ascertain their whereabouts from the concerned service authorities before commencing any
works on site. The Contractor shall also obtain any re-routing requirements from the
concerned authorities and shall be responsible to carry out such works accordingly to the
satisfaction of the authorities and the Employer. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to
protect all existing services (if any) or divert the same (if required) within the plot limit and also
for areas covered under the Contract limit(e.g.: access
road tie in, blue collar bus drop off area etc)

All costs in connection with the above works shall be borne by the Contractor.

The Employer shall not be liable for any loss or injury in connection with any of the above works.

1.7 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND WATER FOR THE WORKS

The Contractor shall provide all necessary artificial lighting and power for the execution and

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 6 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

security of the Works and for protection, with all meters, temporary wiring and fittings, etc., pay
all charges, and alter, adapt and maintain the temporary work as necessary and remove
and make good atcompletion.

The Contractor shall provide water for the Works including that required by the sub-contractors,
pay all charges and provide all necessary temporary pipe work, pumps, storage tanks etc. and
remove on completion and make good all work disturbed to the satisfaction of the Employer.

1.8 FIRE PROTECTION

The Contractor shall comply with all safety regulation requirements of the Public Authorities
and relevant good engineering practices.

The Contractor shall make arrangements for periodical inspection by local fire authorities and
shallco-operate with the said Authorities to promptly carry out their recommendations.

1.9 PROTECTION OF WORKS

The Contractor shall take care to protect the Site at all time and shall insure that it is kept neat
and in an orderly condition and free from accumulations of waste materials and debris/garbage
duringthe entire construction period. The Contractor shall remove all crates, cartons and other
flammable waste materials or trash from the work areas at the end of each working day. Debris
disposal system shall comply with DM circular 211 dated 17.01.2016 and DDA regulations or
other relevant authority/master developer having jurisdiction.

All areas of the building in which painting and finished work is to be performed shall be cleaned
by the Contractor or his sub-contractor(s) thoroughly just prior to the start of the work, and these
areas shall be maintained in satisfactory condition for painting and finishing.

1.10 SECTIONAL COMPLETION OF WORKS

The Contractor shall comply with the phasing/sectional Completion of the Work and he shall
start,complete and handover each phase/section as required. Each phase/section shall be
complete in every respect and shall be able to use by the Employer for the intended purpose.
The phase/section and related part of the site shall be clean and free from refuse and rubbish
upon completion.

The Contractor shall ensure that continuation of works on other phase/section shall in no way
affect the functioning and operation of phase/section that got completed and taken over by the
Employer. Uninterrupted access, temporary hoarding for segregation, periodic cleaning of site
and access etc shall be arranged and provided by the contractor as part of their scope of works.

1.11 COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS

The Contractor is notified that Works on several other packages may be ongoing in the same
plot during the currency of the Contract. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to
coordinate and cooperate with contractors of all other packages for the successful completion of
the project. Access restriction and other hindrance, if any shall be ascertained by the Contractor
and shall allow for thesame in their Tender.

1.12 SETTING OUT

The Contractor shall be responsible for accurately setting out the Works to the specified
positions, dimensions, levels and Building Lines and also checking the site surveys for
dimensional and level accuracy and reporting any discrepancies before shoring works and
earthwork commences. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the necessary
demarcation and re-demarcation certificate from the authority having jurisdiction. Services of
a third party survey agency shall be utilized, where necessary to obtain the Demarcation
Certificate and carrying out the setting out.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 7 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

The Contractor shall provide the Employer with all facilities, equipment and labour to enable him
to check the setting out and levels of the work at all times. The checking of any setting point,
line or level by the Employer shall not in any way relives the Contractor of his responsibility.

All setting point, benchmarks, site rails, pegs and other survey points shall be clearly marked
and protected from damage or disturbance during the execution of the works.

1.13 SHOP DRAWINGS


Shop drawings shall be produced for the purpose of explaining how the various components
of theworks are to be fabricated, assembled and installed. Shop drawings shall be submitted
for the various trades as specified under the respective works or as and when called for by
the Employer, for the approval of the Employer. Shop drawings are mandatory for setting out,
shoring, earthworks, thermal and moisture protection, pre-cast, post tension, structural steel,
cladding, reflected ceiling layout, floor and wall tiles, coordinated services, ID works, façade,
doors and windows, docking installations, external works, bar bending schedule, partition
walls, metal works, pantry cabinets, counters, builders work, landscape &irrigation, garbage
chutes, façade lighting, specialist lighting and complete MEP trades.

The Contractor shall not proceed with the Works unless the Employer approves the shop drawings.

1.14 AS BUILT DRAWINGS

All prints of the Drawings shall be corrected by the Contractor to show the works as executed
andsubmitted to the Employer for approval as the works proceed. Upon the completion of
the works,

the Contractor shall prepare a completely new set of Drawings for the project as executed
and submit them in duplicate to the Employer for approval. When approved by the
Employer, the Contractor shall submit three copies of all drawings duly marked “As-Built” along
with five set of soft copy in a format approved by the Employer. The final payment shall not be
made until all approved As Built drawings, warranties and O&M manuals are duly submitted
to the Employer in required numbers. The contractor shall comply with Employer’s
requirements and guideline while preparing and submitting O&M Manual and As- Built
Drawings.

The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra payment or extension of time for the
correction, preparation and supplying of the drawings.

1.15 MATERIALS

MATERIALS GENERALLY

The whole of the materials shall be new and of the appropriate quality and in perfect condition
allto the approval of the Employer. All materials shall be obtained from approved sources and
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions where relevant. In the
absence of any specification all material shall comply with the appropriate B.S or
other standards as specified/approved by the Employer. The Employer may order the
removal of materials which he has not approved. All material and equipment used shall comply
with Dubai Municipality/DDA green building regulation and specification and must be
certified/accredited by DCL, DM andDCD where relevant.

The percentage of recycled content in building and the percentage availability of building materials
regionally shall be in accordance with current green building regulations of DM/DDA.

The Contractor shall furnish for approval, with reasonable promptness, samples for all materials
and workmanship. The Employer shall check and approve such samples with reasonable

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 8 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

promptness only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and for compliance with
the information given in the Contract Documents

The Employer may at any time request that samples of any materials used in the works
may be taken from site and tested to ensure conformity with this Specification, such testing
to be carried out by an independent laboratory approved by the Employer. The results of all
such tests are to be faxed directly from the independent laboratory to the Employer. All
such testing being at the Contractor’s cost and due allowance for such tests and
investigations shall be included and identified as such in his tender.

All Materials or manufactured items that are labeled and shall be delivered in the original
package,containers, etc., bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand.

Materials or manufactured items shall be carefully loaded, transported, unloaded and stored
in an approved manner, protected from damage and exposure to weather or dampness during
transit and after delivery to the site.

1.16 SUB-CONTRACTORS
All sub-contractors are subject to specific approval from the Employer. Sub-contractors should
possess valid commercial licenses issued by Dubai Department of Economic Development.
Sub- contractors must be licensed by Dubai Municipality for the design or execution of the works
they are intending to carry out and are not permitted to carry out any work not listed in
their licensedactivities. The main contractor shall submit/or produce for verification, copy of
the sub-contract agreement to Dubai Municipality and Dubai South if required. The Main
contractor shall fully comply with the Dubai Municipality requirements for registration and
approval of subcontractors working on construction sites in the Emirate of Dubai.

1.17 SITE PROGRESS MEETINGS

During the course of the Work, Site progress meetings shall be held at regular intervals, at least
once in every week, in the presence of the Employer for the purpose of coordinating the
Contractor's Works and to ensure that full compliance with the various sequences of the
Contract are maintained. The Employer’s will record minutes of such Site meetings and copies
will be distributed to all persons concerned and full effect shall be given to all instructions
contained therein.

Prior to such meetings (at least 24 Hrs. in advance) the Contractor shall give to the
Employer's Representative details in writing of that portion of the Works he proposes to
construct during the coming two weeks with details of the plant and methods he proposes to
employ. These proposals shall be discussed at the meeting and no work based on such
proposals shall proceed without the approval of the Employer's Representative.
The Contractor shall have no claim against the Employer for costs incurred by him in changing
themethod of working or in the provision and use of other additional plant.

1.18 SAFETY OF ADJOINING EXISTING BUILDINGS, ROADS, SERVICES, ETC.

The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for the safety of the adjoining existing
buildings, roads, footpaths services, etc., and the sufficiency of all temporary or
permanent shoring, underpinning, strutting, piling, etc.

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions during the excavation for the Works
particularly those excavations which are adjoining existing buildings, roads, footpaths, services,
etc., and shall protect such buildings, roads, services, etc., from damage or collapse by means
of temporary or permanent shoring, strutting, sheet piling or secant pile walls or underpinning
or excavations in short lengths and/or other methods to suit that dictates of the situation
and as approved by the Employer. He shall properly support all foundations, trenches, walls,
floors, etc. affecting the safety of the adjoining existing buildings, roads, services, etc.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 9 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

The Contractor shall alter, adapt and maintain all such Works described above for the whole
periodof the Contract and shall finally clear away and make good all damage done and
reinstate thesurface to its original condition.

1.19 SITE PROGRESS REPORTS

The contractor shall submit at the beginning of every working day a report indicating details
of plant, equipment and manpower available on site. The daily report should also indicate the
works which are in progress as well as the works which will be taken up in hand.

The contractor shall submit a weekly report in a format acceptable to the Employer every week.
The weekly report shall be submitted at least one day in advance of the scheduled site progress
meeting.

The contractor shall submit monthly report with progress photographs in a format acceptable
to Employer by 3rd of every month.

1.20 SITE ACCESS

Access to and within the site for construction traffic shall be agreed with the Roads and
Transport Authority, DM, DDA, master developer and Employer before use. The Employer may
at any time withdraw approval for the use of any route until such widening, strengthening or
repair as heconsiders necessary has been carried out to his satisfaction.

Existing roads, accesses and new roads, whether part of the Works or not, used by the
Contractor's traffic for the construction of the Works shall be kept clean of all dirt and other
material. The Contractor shall provide and use suitable mechanical road sweepers solely for
this purpose, to theapproval of the Employer.

It is to be noted that the Site is currently located within the Free Zone area and necessary
gatepasses and permits may be applicable. The Contractor shall comply with DDA security
guidelines and regulations in this regard.

1.21 PROJECT SIGN BOARDS


The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain illuminated project sign boards on the site to
theapproval of Employer and Authority having jurisdiction. The board shall be to an approved
size and shall be sign written by a skilled sign writer, in Arabic and English and the overall size
and contentshall comply with the Employer’s Requirements and authority regulation.

1.22 TEMPORARY SITE HOARDINGS

The Contractor shall provide temporary corrugated steel hoarding around the perimeter of the
plot within which his activities shall contain. Overall height of hoarding shall be 2.65 m from
existing ground and the gap at bottom of hoarding not exceeding 250mm and gap
between panels notexceeding 50mm. Hoarding shall be painted and logos inserted as per
Employer’s approval and Authority approval. Contractor shall comply with all regulations of
the authority (especially DM circular 211 dated 17.01.16), DDA and master developer while
providing the temporary hoarding, maintaining the same during the currency of Contract
and removing the same upon Completion of the project.

1.23 SURVEILLANCE CAMERAS

Surveillance camera system shall be fixed at the project site in accordance with DM circular
211 dated 17.01.16 and DDA requirements.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 10 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

1.24 COMPLIANCE WITH THE AUTHORITY REGULATIONS

The Contractor will be required to comply with all current regulations of all authorities ( Dubai
Municipality, DEWA, ETISALAT, DU, RTA, DCL, Dubai Civil Defense, Dubai Police, DACC,
master developer but not limited to) having jurisdiction and deemed to have made due
allowance for the same in the Tender. Moreover the Contractor shall be responsible to
obtaining the following registration/approvals/permits from the authority (but not limited to):-

a) Contractor and their consultant registration with DDA.


b) Preliminary design approval from DDA.
c) Design NOCs from all service authorities (DCD, DEWA, Dubai civil
aviation, DDA/master developer, Smart world, South energy, RTA,
ETC/du etc)
d) Final design approval from DDA.
e) Design revisions approvals and annual renewal of Building Permit.
f) Full Building permit and approved drawings from DDA.
g) All specialist design approval from Authority(structural steel, pre-cast/post tension
works, tower crane, soil improvement etc if required )
h) Site access permit from DDA/DM/RTA/master developer.
i) Plot Demarcation and Re-Demarcation certificate from DDA.
j) Permit for use of other plots for temporary facilities (if required).
k) Permit for Road Traffic Diversion.
l) Mobilization permit and sign board approval.
m) Demolition NOC (if applicable).
n) Construction NOCs from Authorities.
o) De watering permits (with specialist design, if required).
p) Shoring/enabling work permit/NOC (with specialist design, if required).
q) Requisite permits for any temporary works including design.
r) Excavation permit from Authority, where required.
s) Routine inspection and approvals from DDA, DCD, DEWA etc.
t) LV and HV design approval from DEWA.
u) Night work permit or permit to vary hours of work (if required).
v) Building Completion inspections by DDA, DCD, DEWA, master developer etc
w) Building Completion Certificate.
x) Permanent utilities approval and its connection.

Contractor shall use only Dubai Civil Defense approved products/systems in the project and
shall beresponsible for obtaining DCD approval for all site installations. Also contractor shall be
responsible for arranging inspection by DCD approved House of Expertise on site installation
at 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 100% and submit reports for each stage(for Aluminium
composite panels, curtain wall, glazing, EIFS, GRC etc as applicable) for Civil Defense
submission.

Contractor’s attention is drawn to DWC planning regulations and development guidelines,


DWC Free Zone- Planning and Permission fees, DWC penalties for violations related to
planning and
permission, Smart world-Telecommunication infrastrure Guidelines, Master developer’s
guidelines, South Energy regulations, DACC guidelines and Green building department’s
requirements. Design and Build Contractor shall ensure full compliance with all Authority
regulations and guide lines.

1.25 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

1.25.1 PRE TAKING OVER INSPECTION

30 days prior to the expected completion / Taking Over date, notified by the Contractor, a
joint site inspection shall be undertaken with a view to producing:-

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 11 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 A list of outstanding works to complete by the Taking Over date.


 A list of defects / snagging Works at the date of the Pre Taking Over Inspection to
completeby the Taking Over date. (Including photographs of same).

1.25.2 TAKING OVER INSPECTION

On or about the expected Completion / Taking Over date, notified by the Contractor, a
joint inspection shall be undertaken with a view to producing:-

 A list of essential outstanding works which will substantially affect the use of the Works
or Section of the Works for their intended purpose.
 A list of essential outstanding snagging Works which will substantially affect the use of
the Works or Section of the Works for their intended purpose.
 A List of non-essential outstanding works and snagging works items that may be
completed assoon as possible but not later than within the period accepted by the
Employer from theTaking Over date.

All approved As built drawings and O&M Manuals shall be handed over at the time of taking
over of works.

1.25.3 INSPECTION PRIOR TO END OF CONTRACT PERIOD

On or about 30 days prior to the due date of the end of the Contract Period, a Site Inspection
shallbe undertaken with a view to producing: -

 A List of outstanding works to be completed by the end date of the Contract Period.
 A List of outstanding snagging works to be completed by the end date of Contract
Period.(NB: This list should include any outstanding end user calls / complaints in respect
of defective works).

1.25.4 END OF CONTRACT PERIOD INSPECTION

On or about the due date of End of Contract Period, a Final Handing inspection shall be
undertaken with a view to producing:-

 A List of outstanding works, if any, to be completed within 21 days from the set end
date of the Contract Period.
 A List of Outstanding Snagging Works, if any, to be completed within 21 days from
the set end date of the Contract Period.

1.25.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS (As-Built Drawings)

A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect
Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project
Record Documents
for Employer’s reference during normal working hours. Employer’s Facility
Management requirements shall be fully complied with while preparing and submitting
the As Built shop drawings.

B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue or black line white prints of
ContractDrawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from
approved building permit drawings.
2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil, Use other colors to distinguish

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 12 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

betweenchanges for different categories of the Work at the same location.


3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
4. Identify and date each Record Drawings: include the designation “AS BUILT
DRAWING” in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project’s Specifications, including addenda


and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where
installation varies from that indicated in Contract Specifications.

D. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one
set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that
indicated in Product Data.

1. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes
in manufacturer’s written instructions.
2. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings and Record Specifications, where
applicable.

E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other


Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with
actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each,
ready for continued use and reference.

1.25.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as
follows:

1. Operation Data:
i) Emergency instructions and procedures.
ii) System, subsystem and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
iii) Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal and weekend operations.
iv) Description of controls and sequence of operations.
v) Details of design elements, construction features, component function and maintenance
requirements to permit effective start-up, operation, maintenance, repair,
modification, extension and expansion of any portion or feature of the installation.
vi) Drawings, data, and as built shop drawing that are finally approved by the Employer.

2. Maintenance Data:

i) Manufacturer’s information.
ii) List of spare parts and consumables as recommended by manufacturer to cover an
operation period of two years.
iii) Name, address and telephone number of installer or local supplier.
iv) Maintenance and troubleshooting procedures
v) Maintenance and service schedules of preventive and routine maintenance.
vi) Maintenance record forms.
vii) Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
viii) Copies of maintenance service agreements
ix) Copies of warranties and bonds.

B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy duty, 3 ring, vinyl covered, loose leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets.
Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title “OPERATION AND

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 13 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

MAINTENANCE MANUAL”, Project name, and subject matter of contents.

1.25.7 WARRANTIES

Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Employer for designated portion of the
work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

A. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within I5 days of completion


of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Employer
duringconstruction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy duty, 3 ring, vinyl covered, loose leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic covered tabs for each separate warranty.
Mark tab to identify, the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the
product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address,
and telephone number of installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
“WARRANTIES”, Project name, and name of Contractor.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.25.8 CLEAN UP

(i) In preparation for the completion of the Work, the following is a minimum to
permit the Employer’s Representative to issue a Taking-Over Certificate.
(ii) The complete removal from the site, of all materials and equipment and the rough
gradingto indicate levels required for the complete removal of the retention system.
(iii) The complete removal from the site of all materials and equipment required by all
other trades identified herein.
(iv) Final cleaning.
(a) When the work is Substantially Performed, remove surplus products,
tools, construction machinery and equipment not required for the
performance of the remaining work.
(b) Remove waste materials and debris from the site at regularly scheduled
times. Do not burn waste materials on site.
(c) Leave the work broom clean before the inspection process commences.
(d) Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt form the work, clean and polish
glass and mirrors.
(e) Vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles and screens
(f) Prepare floor finishes, as recommended by the manufacturer
(g) Broom clean and wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces.
(h) Remove dirt and other disfigurations from exterior surfaces.
(v) Documents
(a) Collect reviewed submittal and assemble documents executed by sub-
contractors, suppliers and manufacturers.
(b) Submit Operation and Maintenance data, As Built drawings.
(c) Provide warranties fully executed.
(vi) Meet with nominated sub-contractor and hand-over completed work in a
manner thatpermit a smooth transit from an aspect of the work to the next.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 14 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

APPENDIX “A1”

EMPLOYER / EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE


FACILITIES

INDEX

General Preambles 1.26.1

Schedule of Offices 1.26.2

Schedule of Fittings 1.26.3

Schedule of Survey Equipment 1.26.4

1.26.1 GENERAL PREAMBLES

The contractor shall provide, maintain and keep clean, temporary site offices with all
associated equipment and services for the exclusive use for Employer/Employer’s
representative and his staff,from commencement until completion of the whole of the Works.
The temporary site offices shall be either prefabricated portable unit(s) or alternatively of
some other form of weatherproof design and construction to the approval of the
Employer/Authority.

The offices shall have full partitions and room sizes shall be as shown in the attached Schedule
of Offices. All rooms shall have individual entrance doors.

Corridor and entrance areas shall be additional to the office sizes.

The offices shall be air conditioned (decorative split unit) with the exception of the toilet, shower
& kitchen areas which shall be mechanically ventilated.

All rooms shall have glazed windows complete with fly screens & venetian blinds.

Adequate fitted hardware, electrical switches, sockets, lighting & plumbing fittings, sanitary ware
and fittings & fixtures etc. shall be provided as necessary for the different areas.

The electrical installation shall provide for simultaneous use of all electrical appliances.

The contractor may either arrange for a temporary power supply to the offices or alternatively
provide and maintain adequate diesel generator sets. All electricity bills shall be paid by the
contractor.

The contractor may either arrange for a temporary mains water supply or alternatively provide
tankered water supply. All water bills shall be paid by the contractor.

Two telephone lines with required extensions shall be provided for the offices as shown
in the Scheduled of Fittings and one cell phone with SIM shall be provided for the
Employer’s Representative and the contractor shall pay all installation and rental charges and call
charges within the U.A.E. Separate fax connection and high speed internet connections shall be
provided.

Covered car parking areas shall be provided adjacent to the offices.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 15 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

The contractor shall submit any necessary drawings and calculations for the construction of
the offices for the Employer’s Representative approval before commencing construction and
shall be responsible for ensuring that the offices are structurally sound. The Employer’s
Representative may request alterations at this stage. The drawings shall be approved in writing
by the Employer’s Representative before installation/construction shall commence.

The offices shall be complete and all the equipment shall be provided within 15 days from
Date of Commencement.

The contractor shall provide all items listed in the attached schedule.

Throughout the duration of the contract, the contractor shall ensure an uninterrupted supply of
gas, water, sewage disposal and electricity to the offices.

1.26.2 SCHEDULE OF OFFICES / FACILITIES

The contractor shall provide the following site offices / facilities for the Employer/Engineer
under this contract.

Room No. Description Size

1. Employer & RE 5 m x 3.7m– 2


(With attached toilet) Nos.

2. MEP engineer 5 mx 3.7m- 1 Nos

3. Conference Room (12 persons) 8 m x 3.7m- 1 Nos


4. Civil &MEP Inspectors (3 no) 5 mx 3.7m- 1 Nos

5. Quantity surveyor 5 mx 3.7m-1 Nos

6. Document Controller 5 m x 3.7m -1 Nos

7. Architect & Struct Engr 5 mx 3.7m- 1 Nos

8 Kitchen As required

9 Sample room As required

10. Toilets As required

11. Covered car park for 10 cars 3m x 6m for each car


(Employer & Engineer)

12. Fully equipped laboratory forTesting


purpose.

Note: Above given details are the minimum requirements and number of staff may get increased (2
or 3) and the Contractor shall provide additional office facilities as and when required.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 16 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

1.26.3 SCHEDULE OF FITTINGS

The fittings required under this contract for the site offices indicated in the Schedule of Offices shall be
to the Employer’s approval and are as follows: -

Room No. & Quantity

Item Description Unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Executive desk + side table with two -


a. locking drawings and executive high back No. 2 - - - - - - -
chair and 3 seater sofa.
-
b. Conference table for 12 persons No. - - 1 - - - - -

-
c. Desk with two locking drawers & chair No. - 1 - 3 1 1 2 -
-
d. Cushioned chair for visitors No. - 2 12 2 2 2 2 -
-
e. Inclined plan table for drawings No. 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -

Drawing hanger W/handle & top loading -


f. No. 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
trolley(A0 size)
2
g. Samples cupboard No. - - - - - - - -
-
h. Four drawers steel filing cabinet No. 2 1 - 1 1 1 - -

i Shelving and pin boards No. As reqd on Site for all staff

j. In/Out tray, 4 tier filing tray No. As reqd on Site for all staff
-
k. Waste paper basket No. 2 1 2 3 1 1 2 -
-
m. Telephone hand set/intercom/internet No. 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 -

- -
n. Fax Machine (A4 size) No. - - - 1 - -
1
Desktop Computer intel i7 3.8 GHz, 2 TB -
HDD, Nvida Display 2GB, with 23” monitor
o 16GB RAM, DVD (HP) including internet No. - 1 - 1 1 1 1 -
connection & (original Autodesk 2016 &
micro soft office package)
Laptop Computer intel i7 3.5 GHz, 1 TB -
HDD, Nvida Display 2GB, 8GB RAM, DVD
p. (HP) including internet connection & No 2 - - - - - - -
(original Autodesk 2016 & micro soft office
package)
q. -
HP Colour Laserjet printer No 1 - - - - - - -

r Network Laserjet printer (A3, A4) with -


No - - - - - 1 - -
colour scanner.
1
s. Portable dry powder fire extinguisher No. 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 17 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Item Description Unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


-
t Maximum –minimum thermometer No. - - - - - 1 - -

Refrigerator 6 cubic feet & microwave -


u No. - - - - - - - 1
oven (required for kitchen)
v -
Water filter(required for kitchen) No. - - - - - - - 1
w -
Sink Unit (required for kitchen) No. - - - - - - - 1
-
x Electric kettle (required for kitchen) No. - - - - - - - 1

y Heavy duty Photocopier with feeder and -


sort facilities No. - - - - - 1 - -

z Digital Camera -
No. 1 - - - - - - -
(Maximum cost – Dhs. 800.00 per no)

aa Refreshments As Reqd. on Site

 Visitors chair and conference chairs shall be suitable good quality, comfortable fabric cladded. The rest of
the room shall have good quality comfortable chairs.
 Office floor finish to be 600 x 600 PVC tile or welded sheet.
 Provide toilet and wash room facilities to standard requirements including one shower unit.
 Maintenance, stationary, photocopy/fax/printer, paper & CDs, software shall be at Contractor’s cost
 Offices, furniture, PCs and equipment shall become contractor’s property and can be taken back oncethe
Works are completed, BCC/TOC issued and de snagging completed and statement at Completion finalized

1.26.4 SCHEDULE OF SURVEY EQUIPMENT FOR THE EMPLOYER’s REPRESENTATIVE:

Equipment to be provided

i) The contractor shall provide the following equipment to enable the Employer’s Representative to check the
setting out of the works. The instruments shall be new or checked and re-conditioned as necessary by
authorized personnel immediately prior to the commencement of the works.
ii) In addition to this equipment, the contractor shall provide pegs, brushes, paint and other similar items as
required.

Survey equipment for the Employer’s Representative

a) Intelligent Total Station SOKKIA SET 2C (or approved equiv.), 1 set.


3 no. Target Reflections with tripods electronic field book, 2 nos.
memory card with card reader, communication software SDRMAP
or approved equiv.

b) Theodolite, Wild TIA or similar c/w tripod 1 no.

c) Automatic Level, Wild or similar c/w tripod 1 no.

d) Plump Bob & Line 1 nos.

e) 4m Levelling Staff 1 no.


Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 18 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

f) 30m Fiberglass Tape in case 1 no.

g) 30m Steel Tape in case 1 no

h) 100m Steel Tape in case 1 no.

j) 5m Steel Pocket Tape 3 nos.

k) 2.5 m Ranging Rod 2 nos.

l) Spirit Level 1m long with 4 plump & 2 level tubes 1 set

m) 1 no. Universal Straight Edge 3m with edge gauge 1 no

n) Safety Helmets, jackets, safety shoes, umbrellas For all site staff

p) Safety helmets, jackets For all visitors

q) Weatherproof rubber cased torch 1 no.

r) Manhole lifting keys (HD,MD and light duty) 2 no

s) One copy of all standards referred to in the specifications

***End of Section - A***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 19 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION C10
SITE SURVEY

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 20 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

C10 SITE SURVEY


To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with work in connection with
surveying the surface of a site and Contract limit prior to development, to establish its dimensions,
contours and levels and the positions, levels and dimensions of salient features. Also included is
determining the location, nature and condition of services over, under and on the site. Also included is the
setting of Works at every stage and preparing certified plans.

GENERAL

110 EXTENT OF SURVEY

 Location: within plot boundaries and outside the plot boundaries as required or as shown on
contract drawing.
 Scope: contractor’s site setting out and verification of existing ground levels as required for the
successful completion of the Contract. Plot Demarcation and re- demarcation as per Authority
and Employer’s requirements. Maintaining the correct lines, levels and alignment of all
architectural, structural, MEP, external works and services including all works below grade.
 Objectives: To proceed with the construction works in accordance with the Contract.

150A BENCH MARKS

 Follow the bench marks and other survey information provided by the Authority concerned. If
not available the Contractor shall obtain the same from DM/DDA survey department or
other Authority having jurisdiction or the Master Developer.
 Contractor shall follow up and coordinate with the Authority for all information.

160 UNFORESEEN HAZARDS

Unrecorded hazards and hazardous materials: Give notice when found. Do not disturb.

170A SURVEY INSTRUMENTS

 Equipment calibration: In accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.


 Site use calibration: To BS 7334.
 Calibration: Use only persons accredited by the relevant accreditation agency.
 Calibration compliance: Submit evidence prior to use.

180A WORKMANSHIP

 Operatives: Appropriately qualified and registered Surveyor for the type of work. Services of a
third party agency shall be used where found necessary or as per Authority regulation.
 Qualifications of operatives: Submit evidence prior to commencement and get approval.
 Contractor is fully responsible for the true and proper setting out of the whole of the Works.

SURVEY WORKS

240A SETTING OUT/ CONTROL SURVEY

 Prior to commencing the Works, Surveyor shall confirm and establish as reference, existing
and representative grade elevations in the vicinity of the Works.
 Locate, confirm and protect control points prior to starting site works. Preserve permanent
reference points till the completion of the Works.
 Establish minimum two permanent working bench marks on the site, referenced to
established DM bench marks by Survey Control points.
 Contractor shall demarcate the plot corners and shall obtain Demarcation Certificate from the
Authority having jurisdiction. Re-Demarcation, as necessary also shall be done.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 21 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Establish lines and levels, locate and layout using high precision instrumentation.
 Verify accuracy of site dimensions shown on the drawings and verify accurately final
underground locations on site of all UG services.
 Establish stakes for grading, fill placement, paving and landscape.
 Establish foundation and column locations and floor elevations.
 Establish lines and levels of mechanical and electrical works.
 Establish and ensure vertical plumb of columns, walls, parapets and other components.
 Monitor and record suspended slab levels and ensure that completed Works is within the
specified tolerance.

COMPLETION

910A DOCUMENTATION

 Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses.
 On completion of foundations, slab on grade, erection of structural steel, floor slab, roof slab and
major site improvements, prepare a certified plan of survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles and elevations of works.
 Submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering works.
 Submit Demarcation and re-Demarcation Certificates from the Authority.

***End of Section c10***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 22 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION D20

EXCAVATING AND FILLING

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 23 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

D20 EXCAVATING AND FILLING


To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions

112A GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION


 D&B Contractor shall be responsible for Geotechnical investigation and topographical
survey, carried out through an independent agency, for the Site.
 The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself as to the character of the Site and
all the various materials, strata, ground water level, etc. and of all items and things liable to
affect or be encountered in the excavation and earthworks
 The Contractor is entirely responsible for informing himself of the conditions of the Site and
for carrying out such investigations at his own cost as he may consider necessary for
completing his detailed design and authority approvals prior to submitting his tender or
during the course of construction of the Works

150A EXISTING SERVICES, FEATURES AND STRUCTURES (IF APPLICABLE)

 Services: Obtain NOCs and drawing from service authorities and master developer/DDA.
Also take necessary trial pits and establish existing services, if any.
 Site features to be retained: Nil.
 Structures to be retained: Nil.
 Protection of existing services: The Contractor shall protect all existing services in
accordance with the requirements of concerned Authority.

CLEARANCE/EXCAVATING

168A SITE CLEARANCE


 Timing: Before topsoil stripping, if any.
 General: Clear site of rubbish, debris and vegetation.

170 REMOVING SMALL TREES, SHRUBS, HEDGES AND ROOTS

 Identification: Clearly mark trees to be removed.


 Small trees, shrubs and hedges: Cut down
 Roots: Grub up and dispose of without undue disturbance of soil and adjacent areas
 Safety: Comply with HSE/ Arboriculture and Forestry Advisory Group safety leaflets and DM
horticulture department’s guide lines and regulation.

220A STRIPPING TOPSOIL

 General: Before beginning general excavation or filling, strip topsoil from areas where
therewill be regrading, buildings, pavings/ roads and other areas required as per design.
 Depth:
- Remove to an average depth required as per design or as per soil investigation report
subject to Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Handling: Handle topsoil for reuse or disposal as per DM regulation.
 Site storage: Keep separate from excavated sub-soil.

225A HANDLING TOPSOIL

 Standard: To BS 3882.
 Contamination: Do not mix topsoil with:
- Subsoil, stone, hardcore, rubbish or material from demolition work.
- Other soil or material containing aggressive weeds, sharps, plastics and non- soil forming
materials and notifiable animal or plant diseases.
- Oil, fuel, cement or other substances harmful to plant growth.
- Other classifications of topsoil.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 24 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Multiple handling: Keep to a minimum.

240 ADJACENT EXCAVATIONS


 Requirement: Where an excavation encroaches below a line drawn at an angle from the
nearest formation level of another higher excavation, the lower excavation, all work within
it and backfilling thereto, must be completed before the higher excavation is made.
 Angle of line below horizontal: 45o for stable soils.
 Backfill material: compacted general suitable filling as clause 515.

244 EXCAVATIONS ADJACENT TO EXISTING FOUNDATIONS

 Prior to commencing excavation:


- Excavate trial pits adjacent to existing foundations to determine
extent and formation levels.
- Allow for inspection of trial pits.
- Allow time for amendment of details if
required.Time period: 5 working days
Backfill material to new excavation: As clause 248.

246 EXCAVATIONS ADJACENT TO PILE SUPPORTED STRUCTURES

 Proximity: When the formation level of an excavation will be lower than the pile cut off
level and the distance between the near faces of the pile cap/ ground beam and the
excavation is less than the difference in depth between the pile cap and the excavation
formation.
- Complete all work within the excavation and backfilling before casting
the pile cap/ ground beam, or
- Delay the adjacent excavation until 2 days after casting the pile cap / ground beam.

248 BACKFILL TO EXCAVATIONS LOWER THAN FOUNDATION FORMATION LEVEL

 Critical level:
- Distance between near faces of foundation and lower excavation less
than 1 m: 150mm above foundation formation.
- Otherwise: 150mm above level at which the line defined in clause 240
cuts near face of lower excavation.
 Backfill material:
- Below critical level: lean mix concrete.
- Above critical level: compacted general suitable filling as clause 515.

250A PERMISSIBLE DEVIATIONS FROM FORMATION LEVELS


 Beneath mass concrete foundations: ±25 mm.
 Beneath ground bearing slabs and R.C. foundations: ±10 mm.
 Embankments and cuttings: ±50 mm.
 Ground abutting external walls: ±50 mm, but such as to ensure that finished level is not
less than or shown on the contract drawings.

260A INSPECTING FORMATIONS

 Give notice: Make advance arrangements for inspection of all formations for foundations,
service trenches, roads and paving.
- Notice (minimum): 24 hours unless agreed otherwise.
 Preparation: Compacted to give a field density not less than 95% of MDD and material
shall have a CBR greater than 15% unless mentioned otherwise on drawings.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 25 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Trim to required profiles and levels.


- Loose material: Remove.
 Seal: Within 24 hours of inspection, seal formations with blinding concrete or
other specified materials.
 Testing: Refer to clause 760.

270 FOUNDATIONS GENERALLY

 Give notice if:


- A natural bearing formation of undisturbed subsoil is not obtained at
the depth shown on the drawings.
- The formation contains soft or hard spots or highly variable material.

275A FOUNDATION BEARING

 Requirement: Foundations are designed to bear on:


- Strata: D&B contractor shall check and confirm the strata.
- Safe bearing capacity (minimum): D&B Contractor shall check and confirm the SBC.
 Verification: Contractor shall carryout plate load tests by an independent laboratory to
verify the SBC at founding strata. Minimum fiver (05) tests shall be carried out for the
project.

283A FORMATIONS FOR PILE SUPPORTED STRUCTURES

 Excavate: To the design formation level.


 Compact: As necessary to achieve a field density not less than 95% of MDD.
 Blinding to formation: As per design.

285 STEPS IN FOUNDATION FORMATIONS

 Depth of formation below ground level (minimum):


- Existing ground level: As per design.
- Finished ground level: As per design.
 Step dimensions:
- Distance between steps (minimum): Contractor to propose.
- Height of step (maximum): contractor to propose.
- Length of overlap (minimum): Not applicable.

310A UNSTABLE GROUND

 Generally: Ensure that the excavation remains stable at all times.


 Take action: If instability is likely to affect adjacent structures or roadways, take
appropriate action. The sides of excavations shall be adequately supported to prevent slips
or subsidence and shall be close-sheeted where necessary to prevent the entry of running
sand, mud etc. subject to the approval of Employer’s Representative.

320 RECORDED FEATURES

 Recorded foundations, beds, drains, manholes, etc: Break out and seal drain ends after
notifying the Employer’s Representative.
 Contaminated earth: Remove and disinfect as required by local authority.

330 UNRECORDED FEATURES

 Give notice: If unrecorded foundations, beds, voids, basements, filling, tanks, pipes, cables,
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 26 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

drains, manholes, watercourses, ditches, etc. not shown on the services NOCs and
drawings or not revealed in the trail pits are encountered.

360A EXCESS EXCAVATION


 Excavation taken wider than required:
- Backfill: As clause 515.
 Excavation taken deeper than required:
- Backfill: with well graded granular material or lean mix concrete.
Thecompacted layer thickness shall not be more than 150mm.

DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS

410 EXCAVATED TOPSOIL STORAGE & REMOVAL


Storage: Stockpile in temporary storage heaps and disposed off to approved tip as per
DM/DDA regulation.

441A SURPLUS SUBSOIL

 Excavated material: Stockpile in temporary storage heaps, if required for future use.
 Retained material: Use for backfilling depending on the suitability of material.
 Remaining material: Remove from site and disposed off to approved tip as per DM/DDA
regulation.

450 WATER

 Generally: Keep all excavations free from water until:


- Formations are covered.
- Below ground constructions are completed.
- Basement structures and retaining walls are able to resist leakage,
water pressure and flotation.
 Drainage: Form surfaces of excavations and fill to provide adequate falls.
 Removal of water: Provide temporary drains, sumps and dewatering system as necessary.
Do not pollute watercourses with silt laden water.

FILLING

500 PROPOSED FILL MATERIALS

 Details: Submit full details of proposed fill materials to demonstrate compliance


with specification, including:
- Type and source of imported fill.
- Proposals for processing and reuse of material excavated on site.
- Test reports as required and specified elsewhere.
 Timing: At least 14 days before starting filling.

510A HAZARDOUS, AGGRESSIVE OR UNSTABLE MATERIALS

 General: Do not use fill materials which would, either in themselves or in combination with
other materials or ground water, give rise to a health hazard, damage to building
structures or instability in the filling, including material that is:
- Frozen or containing ice.
- Organic (BS 1377 Part 3, method 3) containing greater than
2% stumps and other perishable material.
- Contaminated or noxious.
- Susceptible to spontaneous combustion.
- Likely to erode or decay and cause voids.
- With excessive moisture content, slurry, mud or from marshes or bogs
(moisture content more than (OMC+5%) when tested in accordance with BS
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 27 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

1377 part 2, clause3).


- Cohesive materials of liquid limit exceeding 25% (BS 1377 Part 2, method 4.5)
and or plasticity index exceeding 6% (BS 1377 part 2, method 5.4)
- Material containing more than 5% of water soluble salts by weight of dry soil
determined in accordance with BS 1377 part 3, method 7 & 5 for chloride and
sulphate respectively.
- Any other material which the Employer’s Representative may deem unsuitable for
earth works.

515 SUITABLE FILL MATERIAL

 General: Suitable material shall comprise all material that is acceptable in accordance with the
Contract for use in the Works. Suitable material for earthworks shall be approved non-plastic soil
obtained from excavations within the Works, or from borrow pits approved by the Employer’s
Representative. It shall not contain an excess of fines or organic matter, and shall have the
following properties:-

- Soaked CBR (96 hours) at least 15% at 95% MDD according to BS 1377 Part 4 Test 7 for
general back filling and 30% at 95% MDD for the top 250mm sub base below grade slab,
external pavement and road base.
- Liquid limit less than 25% according to BS 1377 Part 2 ,Test 4.5
- Plasticity Index less than 6% according to BS 1377 Part 2, Test 5.4
- The water soluble salts shall be less than 5% by weight of dry material when tested for
Chlorides and Sulphates respectively according to BS 1377 Part 3 Test 7 and Test 5
- Maximum particle size shall be 60mm
- Maximum passing sieve Size 0.075mm shall not exceed 20% when determined according
to BS 1377 Part 2 Clause 9.2.
- Organic matter content (BS 1377 Part 3, Method 3 shall be less than 2%

517 SWEET SOIL


 Sweet soil shall be fertile, friable soil obtained from well drained arable land and shall be
free-draining, non-toxic and capable of sustaining healthy plant growth. Sweet soil shall
be obtained from Dubai Municipality borrow pits at Al Khawaneej or from other
approved sources. The Contractor shall be responsible for liaising with Dubai
Municipality, loading at borrow pit and transportation to the site

525A TESTING OF SUITABILITY OF FILL MATERIALS


 Laboratory: Approved independent laboratory having accreditation from Dubai Central
Laboratory.
 Submit report to: Employer’s Representative.
- Timing: 14 days before starting filling and during the course of earth works.
 Samples: Deliver to laboratory as required.
 Tests and frequency: As noted below:

- Particle size analysis and BS 1377 Part 2 3 tests for every


determination of soil constants 1,000m3 of
material.
- Atterberg limits (LL, PL & PI) BS 1377 Part 2 3 tests for every
1,000m3 of material.
- Sand equivalent ASTM D 2419 3 tests for every
1,000m3 of material.
- Chlorides and Sulphates BS 1377 Part 3 3 tests for every
1,000m3 of material.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 28 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Moisture – density relations of soil BS 1377 Part 4 Every 1,500m3 of


using 4.5 kg rammer, 457mm drop material
method D
- California bearing ratio test BS 1377 Every 1,500m3 of
material

530A PLACING FILL

 Surfaces of excavations and areas to be filled: Free from loose soil, topsoil, organic
material, rubbish and standing water.
 Layer thickness: Fill material shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 250mm in
depth and compacted to 95% of Maximum Dry Density. Maximum compacted layer
thickness immediately below the grade slab and blinding concrete shall not exceed
150mm.
 Moisture content: Each layer of material shall be moistened or dried as required to
achieve moisture content of +/-2% of Optimum Moisture Content.
 Adjacent structures, membranes and buried services:
- Do not overload, destabilise or damage.
- Submit proposals for temporary support necessary to ensure stability during filling.
- Complete curing and water proofing works and obtain approval before
backfilling against in situ concrete structures.
 Layers: Place so that only one type of material occurs in each layer.
 Earthmoving equipment: Vary route to avoid rutting.

535A COMPACTION GENERALLY

 General: Compact fill using approved compaction plant until a density of at least 95%
of the maximum dry density has been achieved, unless mentioned other wise on drawing.
 After compaction: Surface of each layer must be well closed, showing no movement
under compaction plant, and without cracks, holes, ridges, loose material and the like.
 Defective areas: Remove and recompact to full thickness of layer using new material.

540 BENCHING IN FILL

 Adjacent areas: If, during filling the difference in level between adjacent areas of filling
exceeds 600 mm, cut into edge of higher filling to form benches 600 mm minimum width
and height equivalent to depth of a layer of compacted filling.
 New filling: Spread and compact to ensure maximum continuity with previous filling.

550 GEOTEXTILE SHEET

- Product reference: 200gr/m2.


 Type: Non Woven.
 Polymer type: Polypropylene with thermally bonded continuous filaments.
 Recycled content: Permitted as per Green building regulation.
 Jointing: overlap: 300mm minimum.
 Preparation of subgrade: Before laying sheet, remove humps and sharp projections, fill
hollows.
 Protect from:
- Exposure to light.
- Contaminants.
- Materials listed as potentially deleterious by geotextile manufacturer.

560 POLYTHYLENE SHEETS

 Product reference: 1000 gauge (250 microns).


Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 29 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Type: Heavy duty manufactured from 100% prime, first grade quality resin.
 Other requirements: Shall be UV stabilized, shock proof, pierce-resistant, very low
permeability to water, and shall offer high degree of resistance to corrosive effects of
sulphate and chlorides of sub soil and ground water.
 Jointing: overlap: 300mm minimum.
 Preparation of subgrade: Before laying sheet, remove humps and sharp projections, fill
hollows.
 Technical properties:
- Density @23o C (ASTM D 1505):- 0.915- 0.92
- Tensile Strength (BS EN ISO 527-3):- 12-14 N/mm2 MD
- Elongation (BS EN ISO 527-3):- 400% MD
- Impact Strength (BS-2782 Part3):- 400 grams
- Tear Resistance(BS-2782 Part3):- 300 Gram Force
- Wind uplift.

610 COMPACTED FILLING FOR LANDSCAPE AREAS

 Fill: Material capable of compaction by light earthmoving plant.


 Filling: Layers not more than 200 mm thick. Lightly compact each layer to produce
a stable soil structure.

615 LOOSE TIP FILLING FOR LANDSCAPE AREAS

 Filling: Do not firm, consolidate or compact when laying. Tip and grade to
approximate levels in one operation with minimum of trafficking by plant.

616 SUBBASE UNDER GRADE SLAB AND ROAD BASE

 General: Granular sub base material comply with clause 211A of Section Q20, but with a
CBR > 30%.
 Location: Under the grade slab and under road base layer of road, yard and paving
works, unless mentioned otherwise on drawing.
 Layer thickness: Maximum 150mm of the compacted layers.
 Testing: As per clauses 525A and 760.

619 ROAD BASE

 General: Aggregate Road base material, where shown on drawings or required as per
design, shall be in accordance with section Q20, clause 235.
 Required compaction: 98% of maximum dry density.

 Maximum depth of compacted layer: Not more than 200mm.


 Testing: As per clauses 525A and 760.

627 COMPACTED GENERAL FILL

 Suitable material: As per clause 515 with CBR > 15%.


 Excavated material: Select suitable material and keep separate.
 Filling: Spread and level material in layers. As soon as possible thoroughly compact each
layer using the approved compaction plants.
 Required compaction: 95% of the maximum dry density.
 Proposals: Well in advance of starting work submit details of proposed:
- Materials to be used, including quantities of each type.
- Type of plant.
- Maximum depth of each compacted layer (shall not exceed 250mm).
- Minimum number of passes per layer.
 Testing: As per clause 525A and 760.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 30 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

650 PROTECTION OF COMPACTED FILLING

 Temporary protective filling: Before allowing construction traffic, raise level of


compacted cohesive soil filling at least 150 mm above formation level using properly
compacted temporary filling.
 Removal: Remove temporary protective filling from site before permanent construction.

700 BACKFILLING AROUND FOUNDATIONS

 Under oversite concrete and pavings: Suitable fill as clause 515.


 Under grassed or soil areas: Material excavated from the trench, laid and compacted in
250 mm maximum layers.

720 PRE-CONSTRUCTION TERMITE PROOFING

 The pre-construction treatment of filled / compacted ground for the prevention of termite
attack shall be provided in all areas below building foundations and floor slabs, expansion /
contraction joints and structures in contact with the ground. A continuous horizontal and
vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone shall be established around and under building
construction.
 Application rate shall be for the maximum concentration allowed for each specific use
according to manufacturer’s printed instruction but subject to the following minimum rates:-
- Slab on grade/raft slab horizontal barrier: 4.1 liters/m2
- Foundation vertical barrier: 5.0 liters/Rm for each 300mm of depth
- Crawl spaces vertical barrier: 5.0 liters/Rm for each 300mm of depth
- Hollow masonry voids: 2.5 liters/Rm
- Slab penetrations: 5.0 liters/Rm

 The material / chemical to be used shall comply fully with recognized Dubai Municipality
regulations concerning the use of Termiticides. (The material shall be Pyrethriod based or
Fipronil based or Nicotinoid based or approved equivalent). The method of application and
the Pest Control Company applying the chemical must be approved by Dubai
Municipality/DDA. Under no circumstances will Contractor’s be allowed to apply the Termiticide
in-house unless they are a registered and approved Pest Control Company.
 Contractors are to submit the required Pest Control check list Performa to the concerned
authority for approval prior to carrying out any Termiticide spraying.
 Anti Termite treatment shall be guaranteed for a period of 20 years from the date of issue of
Taking over Certificate.

730A BLINDING

 Surfaces to receive sheet overlays or concrete:


Blind with:
- Concrete where shown on drawings; or
- Sand, fine gravel, or other approved fine material applied to fill
interstices. Moisten as necessary before final rolling to provide a flat,closed,
smooth surface.

 Sand for blinding: To BS EN 12620, grade 0/4 or 0/2 (MP).


 Permissible deviations on surface level: +0 -10 mm.

760 TESTING OF COMPACTED SURFACE AND FORMATION

 Laboratory: Approved independent laboratory with accreditation from Dubai Central


Laboratory
 Timing: Upon completion of each layer and prior to the commencement of subsequent

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 31 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

construction.
 Samples: Deliver to laboratory as required after Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Tests: Sieve analysis, atterberg limits, sand equivalent, chloride and sulphate content,
MDD, CBR, in situ density.
 Frequency:
- Sieve analysis, atterberg limits, sand equivalent, chloride and sulphate content,
MDD, CBR as per 525A.
- In situ density of soil, as noted below:

For Trenches BS 1377 One test of every 250m2 area /


layer but in no case less than 3
tests per day operation.
For walk ways BS 1377 One test of every 250m2 area /
layer but in no case less than 3
tests per day operation
Pavement layer (sub BS 1377 One test of every 250m2 area /
grade, sub base and layer but in no case less than 3
road base) tests per day operation

775 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EXCAVATION AND FILLING

 Prior to the commencement of any excavation or earthworks, the contractor shall


furnish the Employer’s Representative for his approval, drawings and / or schedule
indicating the existing site levels on a suitable grid.
 Where excavation meets the water table, detailed records of ground water levels,
including any tidal variations shall be maintained.
 Prior to commencing excavation work the contractor shall ascertain from the
concerned Authorities whether any mains or services are diverted or cut off.
 All plant and equipment used for earthworks shall be maintained in good working
condition for the duration of the works. The contractor shall supply adequate quantities
and types of plant and equipment for the proper execution of the works in an
expeditious manner.
 Excavation shall be carried out to such lengths, widths, depth and profiles as are
specified, or shown on the drawing plus any necessary allowance for working space for
temporary works.
 Where excavated level forms the formation level for subsequent construction, the
surface shall be suitably compacted to 95% of MDD, tested and approved prior to the
commencement of subsequent construction.
 Blasting (if required) will only be permitted with the prior written approval of the
authority, and Employer’s Representative. The contractor shall be responsible for
obtaining the prior written approval of all relevant Authorities.
 The bottom of all excavations shall be probed and any poor bearing areas shall be
rectified as per the recommendation of designer and geo technical agency. Soft spots
shall be cut out and filled with either approved compacted fill or concrete as directed
by the geo technical agency/designer.
 Excavations shall only be back filled after the permanent works therein are approved
by the Employer’s Representative and after removal of any building debris or
deleterious material from the excavations.

 The installations of cable ducts for services entries and service pipe work shall be
completed before preparation of the fill to receive ground slabs and the site services
ducts must be protected as per the authority guide lines and Employer’s
Representative’s instructions.
 All specified tests to ascertain the suitability of fill material and to determine the degree
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 32 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

of compaction for sub grade, sub base and road base shall be carried out by contractor
through an approved independent testing agency. Compacted layers which fail to meet
the specification shall be reconstructed to the contractor’s own expense to the
satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative.
 Anti-termite treatment shall be carried out on the formation and shall be immediately
covered with 1000 gauge polythene and shall proceed with the subsequent
construction within the time limit in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.

***End of Section D20***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 33 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION D40

SHORING WORKS

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 34 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

D40 SHORING WORKS


To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

1100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHORING

1110 SUPERVISING OFFICER

The supervising officer is to be the Employer’s Representative.

1111 LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF THE SITE

1112 NATURE/ SCOPE OF THE WORKS

The works comprise the design, authority approval and installation of suitable shoring system (if
required) as approved by the authority. The Contractor shall design the shoring system into account the soil
parameters and in full compliance with the requirements of authority having jurisdiction. It is to be noted
that the contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the authority approval and therefore shallallow for
all requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. The proposed size, length and embedment
depth of the temporary retaining wall together with the temporary anchorage are to be submitted by the
Contractor to the Employer’s Representative along with his tender. Contractor shall also design and
execute the dewatering system (if required) and continue the same until the ground floor slab is cast or
as decided by the designer. Contractor’s scope will also include relocation of existing services, buried existing
concrete or construction debris, existing tie back anchors, if any found during shoring and excavation
works.
Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary authority permits, construction NOCs and
Completion Certificate for the dewatering and shoring works.

Please also refer to General requirement, site survey, excavation, filling, and dewatering specifications
sections

1113 SEQUENCE OF THE WORKS

To be submitted by the Contractor along with Tender.

1114 OTHER WORKS PROCEEDING AT THE SAME TIME

To be ascertained by the Contractor during site visit

1120 SUBMISSION OF INFORMATION

Submit the following:

 Proposals for monitoring noise, vibration or ground movements.


 Method of penetrating obstructions presented by man-made detritus left in the ground
 Methods for locating and avoiding critical services. The Contractor is liable for any damage to
services occasioned by or arising out of his work on site
 Methods of controlling embedded retaining wall operations to ensure compliance with design
including setting out.
 Details of special equipment to be used to determine the depth and verticality of the excavation.
 Details of the method of transporting and placing piles and concrete panels.
 Details of size and weight of plant to be used
 Details of how the construction level tolerance will be achieved

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 35 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Method of stabilising excavations in the event of delay in inserting panels.


 Proposals for protection of adjacent facades.
 Proposals for working close to existing facades.
 Confirmation that the installation of piles will not damage adjacent structures/services.
 Typical record sheets
 Details of sequence of construction of walls
 Comments on information required to achieve specified water exclusion requirements.

1125 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DESIGN

The Contractor shall Design and construct the shoring system in compliance with the regulation of
authority having jurisdiction and recommendation of geo technical engineer and structural designer The
Contractor is to state design assumptions and restrictions dependent on subsequent operations such as
anchorage, etc as well as confirm that the wall meets the permissible movement limits.

The Contractor shall submit the proposed method of installation to achieve the design parameters
including:

 Details of equipment.
 Programme showing sequence and resources

1135 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

Design of the anchorage shall be undertaken to ensure compatibility with the secant pile solution.
Prior to commencing work the Contractor shall examine and note all existing cracks or other damage in
adjacent structures and road and bring them to the attention of the Employer’s Representative and the owner
of the affected property. During the course of construction the adjacent structure and roads shall be monitored
for any cracks or movement and necessary corrective actions shall be taken to prevent any movements
or cracks.

Prior to commencing work, records of drains, cables, ducts and other services shall be made by the
Contractor, to ensure that no damage is caused to these services. Where found necessary the
contractor shall relocate the existing services after taking permission from the service authorities
concerned.

1136 DESIGN CRITERIA

Possible propping system: Shall be designed by the Contractor In

accordance with BS 8002 clause 3.2.2.2, allow for:

 Over excavation in front of the wall


 Surcharge loading on surface of retained soil: 20kPa/100kPa from road side + loading
representing the structural loading of the existing structures

1137 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA FOR MOVEMENT UNDER LATERAL LOADS

Shall conform to DM Circular No.141.

1140 WATER EXCLUSION

Sub structure should be kept dry by dewatering (if required) until ground floor slab is cast. Dewateringto
be continued until written instruction is issued by the Employer’s Representative.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 36 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

1150 PERMISSIBLE LIMITS ON GROUND MOVEMENT

Shall comply with DM Circular No. 141.

1152 PERMISSIBLE LIMITS DURING EXCAVATION AND CONSTRUCTION

During excavation and construction wall movement/positional tolerance shall not exceed 25mm at any
instances (BS 8002:1994, Section 4.4.7.5.1).

Shall also comply with DM Circular No. 141

1155 PERMISSIBLE DAMAGE CRITERIA FOR EXISTING CRITICAL STRUCTURES

No damage of existing structures is permitted. The Contractor shall protect the water-proofing on the
adjacent existing structure by suitable means such as timer planks, etc. This shall be included in the
proposal for the tender. Any damage to the water-proofing on the adjacent existing structure shall be
repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the owner of the building at no adverse implications to the
Contract.

1160 DETAILS OF GROUND INVESTIGATION REPORTS

Contractor may refer to geo technical investigation report.

1162 ADDITIONAL GROUND INVESTIGATION

Contractor shall carry out any additional ground investigation if deemed necessary by him at no extra
cost to the Employer.

1165 SITE DATUM AND SITE GRID

As per design.

1167 COMMENCING SURFACE

As per design

1171 CONCRETE GENERALLY

Standards to BS 8500-2 and BS EN 206-1 and DM regulations. The mix shall be designed to provide
the necessary structural strength for the precast lagging panels.

1175 REINFORCEMENT GENERALLY

Steel reinforcement to BS4449, grade 460B.

 Cutting and bending to BS8666 Suppliers: A valid Certificate of Approval for manufacture and/or
fabrication to be submitted to the Employer’s Representative for approval. All reinforcement used shall
have approval from DCL and the certificate shall be produced.
 Testing shall be carried out by an independent laboratory (with accreditation from DCL) to verify
mechanical and chemical properties of reinforcement. One set of tests shall be carried out for each bar
diameter at the start of the job and every 100 tons of steel delivered to site. Tests shall be carried
out for yield strength, ultimate strength, elongation at maximum force, elongation at fracture, mass
per meter, nominal cross sectional area, bending, re-bending, surface geometry, chemical
composition (minimum 4 elements) and carbon equivalent all in accordance with BS EN 10080.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 37 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

1180 SUPPORT FLUID

The use of support fluid is permitted, if found necessary.

1190 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

Disposal of the excavated material shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall
remove from the site and dispose of all excavated material, discarded bentonite, and redundant
temporary works in accordance with the regulations of the local controlling authority.

Where excavated material is required to be stockpiled for future use by main contractor, such quantity of
suitable excavated material shall be stored suitably to the approval of Employer’s Representative.

1195 OTHER PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS

 All shoring work shall comply with the requirements of the latest versions SPERW, clause B1.18, DM
regulation and BS 8004: Foundations, except that where a conflict arises between these requirements
and this Specification, the requirements of local authority and this specification shall apply. Reference shall
be made to BS 5930: Site Investigations and BS 1377: Soils for Civil engineering Purposes.
 Workmanship -Works that fail to comply with the Specification or the Drawings, in any respect, may be
condemned by the Employer’s Representative, and the substandard work shall be repaired or replaced as
deemed necessary. In extreme cases this may involve redesign and modification of as necessary at the
Contractor's own expense.
 Preliminary Works -A working platform and guide walls shall be established and approved by the
Employer’s Representative prior to the start of permanent works. These works shall be suitable for the
purpose they are intended.
 Groundwater Control and Panel Stability - The level of the supporting fluid shall be maintained at not less
than 1.0 m above the maximum hydrostatic level of the ground water.
 Obstruction or Changes in Condition -The Contractor shall inform the Employer’s Representative
immediately when unforeseen underground obstructions are encountered and shall not resume work
until approval to continue has been obtained.
 Concreting- The placing of concrete shall not commence until approved by the Employer’s
Representative.
 Records :–
a) From the commencement of work, the Contractor shall maintain records in an agreed format. The
records shall be maintained continuously and shall be available to the Employer’s Representative at all
times.
b) The Contractor shall supply one copy of the records to the Employer’s Representative within 24
hours of the completion of any excavation for or concreting. A further two copies shall be supplied
within seven days of the completion of the pile.
c) The Contractor shall prepare the complete as built records and shall obtain approval for the same
from authority.

*****End of Section D40****

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 38 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION D50

DEWATERING

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 39 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

D50 DEWATERING
To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORKS

Scope of works includes design, obtaining authority approval, installing and maintenance of
dewatering system(if required) to keep excavations for foundation and substructure dry, safe and to
prevent damage to the building and surrounding areas during construction due to hydrostatic pressure
and removal of the dewatering system when no longer required, and making good existing ground.
Work of this section shall be considered as Specialist work and shall be executed if found necessary.
Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all requisite permits and NOCs from the authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

All dewatering system for the Works shall be performed and monitored by a single specialist-
dewatering Subcontractor. The Contractor shall not divide the responsibility for dewatering between
several trades. Design and execution of dewatering works shall comply with the requirements of BS
8004: 2015 Code of practice for foundations, CIRIA guidelines, recommendation in soil investigation
report and DM regulations or other relevant authority having jurisdiction.

1.3 REFERENCES

Reference shall be made to the concept drawings prepared by the Employer’s Representative,
Specifications and soil investigation report. Data in the soil report about subsurface conditions are not
intended as representations of warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly
understood that the Employer and Employer’s Representative will not be responsible for
interpretations or conclusions drawn there from by Contractor. Additional test borings and other
exploratory operations may be made by the Contractor at no extra Time and cost to the Employer.
1.4 PROTECTION

Contractor should ensure that no damage occurs to adjacent buildings, structures and property.

2.0 MATERIALS

All materials shall be as described in the Contractor’s proposed drawings and documents subject to the
Employer’s Representative’s and authority approval.

3.0 EXECUTION

i. Contractor should install and maintain the dewatering system to complete the construction of the
Works, if found necessary.

ii. Contractor should ensure that dewatering system is in accordance with local authority’s
requirements for water discharge, standby pumps, and noise control levels.

iii. Water table shall be kept low enough to prevent hydrostatic pressure from being applied to the
basement structure until such time as directed by the Employer’s Representative, and at minimum until
all concrete work up to and including the Ground floor slab is completed.

iv. Accumulation of water in excavations shall not be permitted. Bottom for excavation shall be kept dry
and suitable for other trades.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 40 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

v. Softening of foundations bottoms, undercutting footings and changes to rock and soil detrimental to
stability of sub-grades and foundations, shall be prevented.

vi. Contractor shall provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and
other dewatering system components necessary. Provide standby equipment (pumps, etc.) to take over
dewatering in the event of primary equipment failure.

vii. Contractor shall establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside
excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collection or run- off
areas. Use of trench excavation as temporary drainage ditches, shall not be permitted.
Contractor shall obtain necessary NOC from authorities’ in this regard.

viii. On completion of the need for the dewatering system all components of the system shall be
removed and any resulting voids created for the system shall be in filled by the Contractor using
suitable material, to the approval of the Employer’s Representative and authority.

*** END OF SECTION D50 ***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 41 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION E05

IN SITU CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION


GENERALLY

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 42 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

E05 IN SITU CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION GENERALLY


To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.

SCOPE OF SECTION

110 ARRANGEMENT OF INFORMATION:

The different parts of in situ concrete construction are specified in separate sections as follows: E10
Mixing/Casting/Curing
E20 Formwork
E30 Reinforcement
E40 Designed joints
E41 Worked finishes / Cutting
Clauses dealing with particular aspects of certain types of construction may thus be dispersed over
several sections.

225 TEMPERATURE RECORDS

 Requirement: Throughout period of concrete construction record:


- Daily: Maximum and minimum atmospheric Shade temperaturers.
- Under adverse temperature conditions: Temperature at commencement and end of
placing.
 Equipment: Calibrated maximum and minimum thermometer or an electronic measuring
device.
Location: In the shade, close to the structure.

235 OPENINGS, INSERTS AND FIXINGS


 Requirement: Collate all information.
 Submit: Details where openings, inserts and fixings can only be accommodated by
adjustments to reinforcement.
 Locate reinforcement: To ensure specified minimum cover at openings and inserts and to be
clear of fixing positions.

300A LEVELS OF STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FLOORS:

As indicated on General Arrangement drawings or as per detailed design prepared by the


Contractor.

310A SURFACE REGULARITY OF STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FLOORS:

In general: Sudden irregularities not permitted. When measured with slip gauges to BS 8204-1 or -2
(or equivalent) the variation in gap under a straightedge (with feet) placed anywhere on the surface
to be not more than +/-3mm for 3 m straight edge.

For ware house grade slab: the surface tolerance shall be FM2, for locations as stated in
Employer’s Requirements, as per UK concrete society Technical Report TR34 Fourth edition 2013
and slab shall be cast as Large Bay Joint less. Please refer to clause 615 for grade slab details.

410 WATERTIGHT CONCRETE:

The following clauses in other sections relate specifically to watertight concrete construction:
Concrete mix: E10/132
Timing of placing: E10/620A
Curing periods: E10/822A
Temperature during curing: E10/830
Formwork ties: E20/361
Construction joints: E40/130 Flexible
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 43 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

water-stops: E40/310A
Ties and dowels: E40/410,420,430
Sealant: E40/530

420A WATER RESISTANT CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

 Description: Basement raft, retaining walls, lift pit, swimming pool, underground manholes and
water tanks etc as relevant.
 The above work to be designed in accordance with BS 8110 and BS 8007.
 Testing: Construct the work so that it is watertight when tested in accordance with clause 450.
 If the work fails to meet the specified tests, carry out remedial work by pressure grouting or
other approved means necessary to make the work watertight, and repeat the specified test for
water-tightness, all at contractor’s own cost.

430 SURFACE CRACKING OF VISIBLE CONCRETE AND WATERTIGHT CONCRETE.

 Method of means: Graduated magnifying devices.


 Critical crack width: 0.2mm.
 Action: Should cracks occur that are wider than the critical crack width.

450 INSPECTION OF WATER EXCLUDING STRUCTURES

 Notification: Give not less than seven days notice before inspection.
 First inspection:
- Purpose: To identify any defects that may lead to water penetration or damp
patches.
- Timing: As soon as possible after completion of the work and before backfilling.
 Final inspection:
- Purpose: To identify any points of water penetration or damp patches.
- Timing: After backfilling, when the ground water table has returned to normal
level.
 Requirement: No water penetration or damp patches and surface remain apparently dry.

460 TESTING OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

 Timing: To be agreed.
 Recording: Maintain accurate test records at all stages.
 Preparation for testing:
- Fill completed and clean structure to capacity with water at a uniform rate not
exceeding 2 m depth in 24 hours.
- Maintain level by adding more water for an agreed stabilizing period.
 Filled level: Accurately mark and record.
 Permissible drop in level after allowing for evaporation and rainfall (maximum): 10mm.
- Test period: 7 days.
Intervals for recording drop in level: 24 hours.

470 TESTING OF ELEVATED WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

 Requirements in addition to clause 460: During the test period, the exposed faces of the
structure must show no signs of leakage and must remain apparently dry.

510 EXPOSED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION:

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 44 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

The following clauses in other sections relate specifically to exposed concrete: -


E20/361, E20/630A

510A DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES:

The concrete work shall be constructed to an accuracy, which shall permit the proper assembly of
components and installations and shall be compatible with the finish. The accuracy of the work shall
be within the tolerance stated on the drawings or specified elsewhere and in the absence of any other
requirements, shall comply with the following: -

 All setting out dimensions +/- 5mm


 Sections of concrete members +/- 5mm
 Foundations
Surface against ground (underside) +20 / -50mm
Top surface of bases and piers +5/-10mm
 Floor slabs(except W/H grade slab)
Surface level (3m straight edge) +/-3mm
Level difference of adjacent panels +/- 2mm
Surface level to datum +/-
10mm
Position of slab edges +/-5mm
 Columns and walls
Plumb in storey height (3.3m typical) +/-3mm
Plumb in any 20m height +/-
10mm
Plumb in any height greater than 20m 1:2000 but not greater than +/-50mm
Cross diagonal distortion in storey +/-7mm
Height (3.3m typical) between adjacent
Columns & walls
Inside faces of lift shafts in storey height +/-
5mm Inside faces of lift shafts in full height +/-
10mm
 Dimensions and positions of openings +/-5mm
 Holding down bolt assemblies +/-5mm
 Position of embedded items +/-5mm
 Building vertical alignment (foundation to roof) +/-50mm

Special Notes:
1. The thickness of a slab shall not be less than 95% of the nominal thickness specified.
2. Where stated on the drawings, slabs shall be laid to the specified falls.
3. Gaps and slots for sealant shall satisfy the requirements specified elsewhere.
4. Positions of slab edges, grade slab levels, openings and embedded items are relative to a local grid
established at a particular level. All other tolerance relate to main setting out lines.

610 SPECIALLY CONSTRUCTED SAMPLE

 Location: W/H grade slab.


 Description: Formed finish, construction joints, arrises, chamfers, fixing devices.
 Placing, compaction and curing of the concrete is identical to that proposed for the element or
part of the building.
 Inspection of samples: Give notice.
 Commencement of related parts of the Works: Do not proceed until instructed.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 45 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

615 GRADE SLAB FOR WAREHOUSE

The warehouse floor slab shall be designed by a floor specialist consultant in accordance with the
guidance given in Concrete Society Technical Report No.34 (TR 34 Fourth Edition, 2013) and the
work shall be carried out by a specialist flooring contractor under the supervision of floor
consultant. The specialist shall submit design calculations and construction drawings for
Employer’s Representative’s approval. The specialist floor contractor shall demonstrate minimum

10 years of proven experience in the GCC in the successful design and execution of large panel
joint less floor slab as specified hereunder.

The floor slab shall be constructed as large area laser screed so that the surface regularity (flatness
and levelness) is within the tolerances as defined in TR34- FM2 for areas as stated in Employer’s
requirements. Upon completion a full digital profilograph slab survey shall be carried out as per TR34
through an approved independent 3rd party agency.

The slab to be joint less with no sawn induced contraction joints (the minimum joint spacing shall be
30.0m) and designed so as to minimize vertical movement across the joint. Joint layout shall be
coordinated with racking and column layout to maximize the efficiency of the floor. Slab panels
shall be within a length/width ratio of 3:2 where possible to minimize differential shrinkage
cracking. The slab to be isolated from the column bases with 20mm wide isolation material and
no joint shall be within 100mm of the corner of a column. Isolation to the outside walls and edge
beams may be achieved by continuing the slip membrane from under the slab upthe face of the wall
or edge beam. Construction joints where possible shall be located away from areas of high traffic
but care will be taken to avoid horizontal movement eventually to be accommodated by joint
opening. Ideally to position the joints underneath racking as close to the racks as possible. All formed
free movement joints (construction joints) subject to traffic by mechanical handling equipment
shall be provided with suitable steel armored joints fixed strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s
instruction. Cosinus slide joints shall be used across the racking aisleways were VNA or reach trucks
operate. Cosinus slide joints should also be used in marshalling areas were the joints are calculated
to open more than 10mm. Other joints which are parallel to the direction of traffic movement can
be steel armoured Tera joints and shall followcolumn grids for uniformity. Tera joints can be used
at loading bays, as the panel sizes are small therefore the joint will only open 5mm to 8mm and
under the racking (Tera joint should not be used across the aisles where the VNA fork lifts
operate).. Door thresholds, both internal and external, where butting up to a concrete slab or
beam and around the dock must have a load transfer detail incorporated and details of the same
shall be submitted for approval.

The surface of the floor shall have a minimum abrasion resistance of AR1 in accordance with Table
4 of BS 8204-2, 2002. One abrasion test shall be carried out for each 4,000 sqm of slab or part
thereof, in accordance with BS EN 13892-4-2002 to confirm that appropriate abrasion
resistance has been achieved. Tests shall be carried out by an approved independent agency not

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 46 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

sooner than 2 months after construction.

The floor slab thickness and reinforcement detail shall be as per the specialist design to achieve
minimum joints as shown in the concept drawing. The slab is to be designed for the most
onerous loads as specified in the Employer’s Requirements. The floor loading shall be further
coordinated with racking details and reconfirmed during the detailed design stage

Prior to concreting the slab, all roof and wall sheeting and loading doors must be fixed to provide
protection from wind and rain. If due to programme restraints this cannot be achieved, then
temporary sheeting must be used to seal all openings. Walls and columns of the building shall be
protected from concrete splashes with 1 meter high plastic sheeting taped to walls.

The ground floor slabs will be constructed on a 1000 gauge(250 microns) polythene damp proof
membrane lapped a minimum 150mm and taped with 100mm wide jointing tape and sealed
around penetrations laid on a layer of compacted(to minimum 95% of MDD) granular material
having minimum CBR of 30% with a minimum thickness 250mm. The sub base shall be well
closed at the surface and capable of carrying construction traffic without significant deformation. The
surface tolerance of the sub base will be within +0 mm and -10 mm and average 0 mm. Plate
load test s( 1 test per 5,000 m2) shall be carried out on the slab formation by an approved
independent agency to verify the K value of surface.

The floor shall be poured in large bays and dry shake topping material at a dosage of up to
4Kg/m2 shall be applied (by a mechanical topping spreader) to the surface after the concrete has been
placed and initially leveled. When the concrete has hardened sufficiently to support the weight of
men and machine, power floating shall be done with several passes until a smooth, shining finish,
free of all noticeable ridges is achieved. After the final power flotation operation, the floor slabs will
be sprayed with an acrylic based, curing, sealing and hardening agent- BASF Masterkure 181 or
approved equivalent. The following morning the floor shall be first covered inwater and one layer of
1000 gauge plastic sheeting applied to further enhance the curing regime.The plastic sheeting is to
remain in place for at least 7 days. The surface of the floor shall be continually wetted for a
minimum of 7 days. After application cement spills shall be removed from adjacent panels and
newly poured panels shall be fenced off with red tape to avoid trespassing for a minimum of
7 days. The floor shall not be trafficked for a minimum of seven days following the sealing
operation and shall not be loaded for 28 days. Until the Taking over Certificate is issued, the
permitted movement shall be as per written confirmation from the floor specialist consultant.

All efforts shall be made in the construction and detailing of the floor to reduce the possibility of random
cracking. If cracks do occur, they must be grouted with a suitable low viscosity epoxy resin.

Internal floor markings shall be carried out as per Employer’s and authority requirements.

The specialist flooring consultant/contractor and main contractor will upon completion of the slab
warrant his works for a period of 10 years against defects including but not limited to,random

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 47 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

cracking, damage at movement joint arris, moisture ingress through movement joints, surface
delamination, tolerances within the flatness specification and abrasion resistance. The floor shall
be insured by the specialist including consequential loss for a minimum period of 10 years and
proof of insurance shall be submitted to the Employer.

620 CONCRETE SLAB FOR YARD

The service yard shall be designed and constructed with reinforced concrete on compacted road
base of 200mm thick on a granular subbase layer. The design calculation and construction
drawings shall be submitted for Employer’s approval. The same specialist consultant/contractor
engaged for the warehouse grade slab shall carry out the design and execution of the service
yard as well. Slab thickness and reinforcement details shall be finalized based on the loading
condition, exposure category and the type of traffic. Joints in external slabs shall be galvanized
steel armoured joints with divider plates minimum 2mm thick, plastic sleeves and 8mm plate
dowels at maximum 600mm centers and 10mm wide miothane foam.

***End of Section E05***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 48 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION E10

MIXING/CASTING/CURING IN SITU
CONCRETE

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 49 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

E10 MIXING/CASTING/CURING IN SITU CONCRETE


To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.

CONCRETE MIXES

132C NORMAL DESIGNED MIX FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.

 To the relevant clauses of BS 8500-1, BS8500-2 and BS EN 206-1 and current regulations of
DM, DDA and DCL.
 Grade: As per final design and authority approval
 Normal maximum size of aggregate:
- 20mm for columns, walls, slabs and beams.
- 10mm for structural topping.
 Aggregate(s):
- Coarse: To BS EN 12620 and DM advisory note number 001.
- Sand: To BS EN 12620 and DM advisory note number 001.
- Special requirements: maximum dry shrinkage when tested to BS 812 Part 120 0.05%.
 Cement: CEM 1
 Minimum cement/combination content: 380 kg/m3(or as per final design and authority
approval)
 Minimum GGBS content: 36% to 65% (or as per final design and authority approval)
 Maximum free water/cement ratio: 0.35(or as per final design and authority approval)
 Maximum cement/combination content: As per approved mix design.
 Admixtures: Refer to clause 415A.
 The maximum total percentage of chloride ion by mass of cement: 0.2%.
 The total content of acid soluble sulphates shall not exceed 3% by weight of cement.
 Minimum rate of sampling for comprehensive strength testing (subject to DM/DCL regulation):
- For critical structures like cantilever etc: - one set (at least 6 cubes) every 10m3 , but not
less than one set for each day of use.
- For other structures: - one set (at least 6 cubes) every 50m3, but not less than one set for
each day of use.
 The alkali content (Na 2 O and K 2 O) of the concrete shall not exceed 3 kg/m3.
 Information to be provided by the producer: As BS 8500-1 and BS 8500-2.
 Other requirements: Shall comply with DM circular #225 issued vide ref:
812/02/02/1/1809792.
Note: Concrete grade and constituent materials, finally approved in the building permit by authority shall prevail and
the Contractor shall allow for the same.

132D NORMAL DESIGNED MIX FOR: BLINDING

 To the relevant clauses of BS 8500-1, BS8500-2 and BS EN 206-1.


 Grade: C20
 Normal maximum size of aggregate: 10mm
 Aggregate(s):
- Coarse: To BS EN 12620 and DM advisory note number 001.
- Sand: To BS EN 12620 and DM advisory note number 001
- Special requirements: maximum dry shrinkage when tested to BS 812 Part 120 0.05%
 Cement: CEM 1
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 50 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Minimum cement/GGBS content: Total 280 kg/m3( with 36% GGBS)


 Maximum free water/cement ratio: 0.55
 Maximum cement content: As per approved mix design.
 The maximum total percentage of chloride ion by mass of cement: 0.2%
 The total content of acid soluble sulphates shall not exceed 3% by weight of cement.
 Minimum rate of sampling for compressive strength testing: one set (at least 6 cubes) every 50
m3, but not less than one set for each day of use.
 The alkali content (Na 2 O and K 2 O) of the concrete shall not exceed 3kg/m3.
 Information to be provided by the producer: As BS 8500-1 and 8500-2.
 Other requirements: Shall comply with DM circular #225 issued vide ref:
812/02/02/1/1809792.
Note: Concrete grade and constituent materials, finally approved in the building permit by authority shall prevail and
the Contractor shall allow for the same.

180 MIXES FOR SUNDRY TYPES OF IN SITU WORKS

 Mixes for sundry types are specified in other sections of this specification as follows:
Refer to respective sections.
Mixes specified in this section which are equivalent to or better than the above may be used in
lieu, subject to approval.

182 TRIAL MIXES:

 The Contractor’s mix proposals for each mix require the Employer’s Representative’s approval.
Existing data provided as evidence of satisfactory previous performance shall include the
workability and water / cement ratio. During production the Contractor shall inform the
Employer’s Representative of all changes in sources of materials or cement content. Trial mixes
shall be made initially as well as before any substantial change is made. Lab trial mix and plant
trail mix shall be carried for each approved concrete mix. No changes shall be made without the
Authority’s and Employer’s Representative’s approval.

195 PERFORMANCE TESTING OF TRIAL MIXES:

The following testing shall be carried out at the trial mix design stage and periodically during
production to verify the mix design.
 Workability and Segregation of Self Compacting concrete.
The workability shall be verified by slump flow in accordance with ASTM C1611. The
acceptable range for this test is between 650 to 750mm.
The proportion of the ingredients of the concrete, including the water, shall be so chosen thatthe
concrete will be workable enough to be fully compacted and not be prone to segregation or
bleeding.
Segregation of aggregates in Self-compacting concrete shall be verified using the V-funnel test
in accordance with European Guidelines for SCC. The acceptable range for results is 6 to 10
seconds.

 Workability normal concrete:

For normal concrete the workability shall be measured by slump cone in accordance with BS EN
12350-2. Workability shall be sufficient to suit the methods of transport, placing and
compaction which are to be used. The slump of the final agreed mix shall be the control slumpfor
concrete to be incorporated into the works. For mixes with slump in excess of 150mm, a flow
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 51 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

table shall be used in place of the slump cone, in accordance with EN 12350-5. Slumpshall
be not less than 25mm nor more than 75mm (or not more than 150mm for pumped concrete)
unless permitted otherwise by the Employer’s Representative.
 Segregation and Bleeding:

The proportion of the ingredients of the concrete, including the water, shall be so chosen thatthe
concrete will be workable enough to be fully compacted and not be prone to segregation or
bleeding.

The mix shall be such that there will not be excess water on the top surface after compaction. It
may be necessary to reduce the water content of batches at the top of deep lifts to
compensate for water gain from the lower levels, but this should be avoided by designing the
mix, checking with preliminary trials and accurately controlling the mix proportions throughout the
work.

Trial mixes shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C232-90 (bleeding test). Segregation or
bleeding shall not be greater than 1.5% for concrete generally and 0.5% for concrete with
micro silica. Testing shall be carried out on all trial mixes and on every 1,500m 3 of concrete
produced.

 Durability Test:
The following tests shall be carried out on all trial mixes, and on every 1,500m3 concrete produced:

Chloride Permeability to ASTM C1202


Type of Concrete Maximum Charge Pass (Coulombs) Age 28 days
Suspended beams and slabs, all above ground 3,000
Columns & walls not in contact with ground and/or water 3,000
Pile-caps, footings, grade slab, retaining walls & water tank walls 1,500

Water Permeability to BS EN 12390-8


Type of Concrete Maximum Penetration (mm) Age 28 days
Suspended beams and slabs, all above ground 20mm
Columns & walls not in contact with ground and/or water
20m
mPile-caps, footings, grade slab, retaining walls & water tank walls 15mm

Initial Surface Absorption to BS 1881-208


Type of Concrete Maximum ISAT at 28 days: 10 minute
testSuspended beams and slabs, all above ground 0.30 ml/m/sec
Columns & walls not in contact with ground and/or water 0.30 ml/m/sec
Pile-caps, footings, grade slab, retaining walls & water tank walls 0.20 ml/m/sec

30 Minute Absorption to BS 1881 Part 122


Type of Concrete Maximum Penetration (mm) Age 28 days
Suspended beams and slabs, all above ground 3.0 %
Columns & walls not in contact with ground and/or water 3.0 %
Pile-caps, footings, grade slab,retaining walls & water tank walls 2.0 %

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 52 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Strength Tests:

For each mix of concrete the Contractor shall prepare three separate batches of concrete on
separate days using the materials, which have been approved, and the mixing plant, which he
proposes to use for the Permanent Works. Targeted mean strength shall exceed the
characteristic compressive strength by a margin of 1.64 times the standard deviation expected
from the concrete plant except that no SD less than 3.5N/mm2 shall be used as basis for
designing a mix. Unless otherwise approved a SD of 7 N/mm2 shall be used for initial mixes.

Six test cubes shall be cast from each batch.

The making, curing and testing of all test cubes shall comply with the requirements of BS EN
12390-3. The workability test of the concrete carried out in accordance with BS EN 12350-2
shall be recorded for a range of mixing temperature and at various times after mixing. The
mixing temperature shall be the temperature after the water has been added. Slump control
graphs shall be prepared for use on site.

Two cubes from each batch shall be tested for compressive strength at 7 days three at 28 days and
one cube shall be kept as spare.

The density of all the cubes shall be determined before the cubes are crushed.

Compliance with the specified characteristic compressive strength is assumed if the conditions given
in (a), (b) and (c) are met:
(a) The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results exceeds the
specified characteristic compressive strength by 0.5 times the current margin. (The current
margin for the plant shall be 1.64 times the standard deviation).
(b) The strength determined from any individual test results is not less than the specified
characteristic compressive strength minus by 3 N/mm2.
(c) Number of individual results in the sample below specified CCS is not more than one.

MATERIALS, BATCHING AND MIXING


215A READY-MIXED CONCRETE
Ready mixed concrete complying with this specification and BS EN 206-1 and BS 8500-2 must be
used for designed mixes and must be obtained from a plant having minimum five years of relevant
experience in the UAE, which holds current certification meeting the requirements of the quality
system for Ready Mixed Concrete (QSRMC) Technical Regulations and complying with Dubai
Municipality advisory notes number 005. Each mix must be obtained from only one source unless
otherwise approved. Confirm name and address of depot(s) to Employer’s Representative before
any concrete is delivered. Retain all delivery notes for inspection. Batching plant shall have a valid
accreditation from authority having jurisdiction.
Do not add water to concrete on site.

220 CHEMICAL DRUM WASH SYSTEMS

Chemical drum wash systems for ready-mixed concrete may be used when covered by an
appropriate Agreement certificate. Keep records of the deliveries and where they have been
incorporated.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 53 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

255A CEMENTS:

 The following abbreviations apply:


- CEM 1/PC42.5: Portland cement, Class 42.5 (in lieu of OPC), complying with BS EN 197-
1 but containing not less than 6% and not more than 10% by weight of tri-calcium
aluminate (C3A)
- SRPC: Sulphate resisting Portland cement, complying with BS 4027, but containing not
more than 4% by weight of tri-calcium aluminate (C3A)
- MSRPC: Cement complying with ASTM C150 Type II but containing not less than 4% and
not more than 8% by weight of tri-calcium aluminate (C 3 A). In either case the cement
shall not contain more than 2.7% by weight of sulphur trioxide (SO 3 )
- GGBS: Ground granulated blast furnace slag, complying with BS EN 15167-1 and BS EN
15167-2.
- PFA: Pulverized fuel ash, complying with BS EN 450-1.

 Cements, GGBS and PFA must comply with the relevant British Standards. Portland
cements must have cement certification meeting the requirements of the Ready Mixed
Concrete (QSRMC) Technical Regulations for product conformity. Cement should also
conform to DM advisory note number 002.

For cement to be used in permanent works the acid soluble alkali level measured as
(Na 2 O+0.658K 2 O) shall not exceed 0.6% by weight.

The heat of hydration at 7 days in accordance with ASTM C-186 shall not exceed 290kJ/kg
and the fineness (specific surface) in accordance with BS 4550 shall not be less than
280m2/kg.

Cement shall be free flowing and free of lumps. It shall be supplied in the manufacturer's
sealed and unbroken bags or in bulk.

Cement, which has become hard or lumpy or fails to comply with this Specification in any way
shall be removed from the site.

High alumina cement shall not be used.

 Cement delivery and Marking:

Cement shall be obtained from a manufacturer or supplier approved by the Employer’s


Representative and delivered to the site whether in bulk or sealed bags.

When cement is delivered in bags the following particulars should be marked on each bag,
both in English and Arabic.

a) Type of cement
b) The number and date of the standard the cement conforms
c) The net weight of cement contained therein
d) The trade name of the manufacturer
e) The country of origin
f) The date of manufacture.

Similar information shall be provided in the invoice documents accompanying the shipmentof
bulk cement.

Cement in bags shall be transported in vehicles provided with effective means of ensuring that

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 54 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

it is protected from wet weather and high humidity. Bulk cement shall be transported in containers
built and equipped for the purpose.

 Testing of Cement:

Sample from site delivery shall be tested in an approved independent laboratory to ensure
compliance with specification (for strength class, specific surface, heat of hydration and
chemical composition). At least 3 samples shall be tested during the course of construction
i.e. at a frequency of average 4 months.
305A NATURAL AGGREGATES FOR DESIGNED/PRESCRIBED MIXES:

To give a drying shrinkage of concrete not exceeding 0.05% when tested to BS 812-120 / BS EN
1367-4. Provide samples of proposed aggregates for approval. Aggregate shall confirm to BS EN
12620 and DM advisory note number 001.

 Refer to table 1 for frequency of tests on aggregate and table 2 for chemical and mechanical
properties for aggregate.

315A AGGREGATES FOR EXPOSED WORK:

To BS EN 12620 and DM advisory note number 001, of consistent colour, free from absorbent
particles which may cause 'popouts', and other particles such as coal and iron sulphide which may
be unsightly or cause unacceptable staining. Obtain from one source, and ensure that adequate
supplies can be maintained throughout the contract. Colour of aggregate shall be consistent and
sample shall be submitted on request.

TABLE 1 - FREQUENCY OF ROUTINE TESTS ON AGGREGATE

Sr. No. Kind of Requirement - Test Methods Test Frequency Rate

1. Grading - BS 812 Part 103 At start and per every 500m3 concrete
delivered.

2. Material finer than 0.075mm - do -


BS 812 Part 103

3. Clay lumps and friable particles At start and each month


ASTM C142

4. Organic impurities – BS 1377 Test 8 At start and each month

5. Water absorption - ASTM C128/C127 At start and twice a month

6. Specific Gravity - ASTM C128/C127 - do -

7. Shell content - BS 812 Part 106 Each two months or per 500m3 whichever is
more frequent

8. Particle shape - BS 812 Parts 105.1, 105.2 - do -

9. Acid soluble chlorides, C1


Qualitative - BS 812 Part 117 App A/B At the start and every three months.
Quantitative - BS 812 Part 117 App C

10. Acid soluble sulphates, SO3 - do


Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 55 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

–the BS 812 Part 118

11. Soundness, mgSO4 (5 cycles) - ASTM C88Each two months

12. Mechanical strength


10% fines or impact value - BS 812 Each two months
parts 111, 112
Los Angles abrasion - ASTM C131/C535 - do -

13. Moisture variation in sand by Three times daily


Moisture Meters

NOTE: Drying shrinkage (EN 1367-4) and potential reactivity (ASTM C289, C227) of aggregates shall
be determined initially at the start of the project or whenever there is a change in the source of
supply.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 56 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

TABLE 2 - LIMITS OF PHYSICAL, CHEMICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF AGGREGATE


FOR CONCRETE

Test Permissible Limits


S.
Kind of Requirement BS 812 Method
No. Fines Coarse
s ASTM

1. Grading Part 103 -- Standard Standard

2. Material finer than 0.075mm Part 103 --


Natural, uncrushed/crushed Max 3% Max 1%
Crushed rock Max 7% Max 1%

3 Clay lumps and friable particles -- C142 Max 1% Max 1%

4. Light weight pieces -- C123 Max 0.5% Max 0.5%

5. Organic impurities, Test 8 of BS 1377 -- -- Max 0.05% --

6. Water absorption -- C128/C127 Max 2.3% Max 2%

7. Specify gravity (apparent) -- C128/C127 Min 2.6 Min 2.6

8. Shell content in aggregate Part 106 -- -- --

- Coarser than 10mm -- -- -- Max 5%

- Between 5mm and 10mm Max 15%

- Between 2.36mm and 5mm -- -- Max 10% --

- Finer than 2.36mm -- -- Note 1 --


9. Particle shape

- Flakiness index Part 105.1 -- -- Max 25%

- Elongation index Part 105.2 -- -- Max 25%


10 Acid soluble chlorides, C1 For reinforced concrete Part 117, -- -- --

made with

- SRPC cement -- -- Max 0.03% Max 0.01%

- OPC and MSRPC cements -- -- Max 0.05% Max 0.02%

For mass concrete made with

- SRPC cement -- -- Max 0.01% Max 0.01%

- OPC and MSRPC cements -- -- Max 0.01% Max 0.01%

For prestressed concrete and steam cured concrete -- -- Max 0.01% Max 0.01%

11. Acid soluble sulphates, SO3 Part 118 -- Max 0.3% Max 0.3%

12. Soundness, mgso4 (5 cycles) -- C88 Max 12% Max 12%

13. Mechanical strength

- 10% fines value part111 & EN -- Min 100 kn

1097-2

or Impact valve Part 112 -- Max 30%

- Los Angles abrasion -- C131/C535 Max 30%

14. Drying shrinkage BS EN 1367-4 -- -- Max 0.05%

15. Potential reactivity

- of Aggregates, chemical method -- C289 Innocuous Innocuous

- of Cement -aggregate combination -- C227 six month expansion --


0.10% Max

Note: 1. There is no requirement of shell content in sands passing 2.36mm size sieve.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 57 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

325 EXPOSED CONCRETE:

Obtain approval before altering constituent materials or proportions of concrete which will be
exposed in the finished work.

355A RISK OF ALKALI-SILICA REACTION IN DESIGNED PRESCRIBED MIXES:

Take one of the precautions specified for designated mixes in BS 8500-1, 8500-2 and EN 206-1.
Inform Employer’s Representative if this necessitates a change in specification. Submit evidence of
compliance to Employer’s Representative before making concrete for use in the Works.

415A ADMIXTURES FOR DESIGNED/PRESCRIBED MIXES:

 To BS EN 934-2, BS 3892 1-3, BS EN 480 & EN 934 and DM advisory note no.003.
 Certification of compliance with appropriate British Standard shall be provided by the
Contractor
 Use only if specified or approved.
 Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.
 Ensure that admixtures are compatible with all other materials, including other admixtures.
 Employer’s Representative to be provided with details of on site technical services.
 Air entrainment agents shall be such that the air content can be maintained within the limits
specified even if the mixing time is extended to 30 minutes.
 If two or more admixtures are proposed to be used in any one mix the manufacturers of
each shall be consulted and their advice regarding compatibility passed to the Employer’s
Representative.

420 WATER FOR CONCRETE:

 Water shall be clean and free from salt and other impurities to the satisfaction of the
Employer’s Representative.

 Water used for mixing and curing of concrete shall have a pH value in the basic range of 7to
9 and the soluble solids shall not exceed the following limits:

Total dissolved ions 2000 mg/l to ASTM D 1888


Chlorides (Cl) 250 mg/l to ASTM D 512
Sulphate (SO3) 350 mg/l to ASTM D 516
Alkali Carbonates & Bicarbonates 500 mg/l to ASTM D 513

 Water for concrete making shall be kept shaded from the sun and appropriate measures
shall be taken to ensure that the water temperature is kept as low as possible. Where
flaked or crushed ice is added to the water for concreting, it shall have completely melted
prior to the addition of the water to the concrete mix. Such ice shall be sampled and
tested in accordance with BS EN 1008 or ASTM C94 for compliance with the above criteria.

 Water shall be tested in accordance with BS EN 1008 or ASTM C94. At least 3 samples (for
the whole project) shall be tested in an approved independent laboratory to ensure
compliance with specification. Testing shall be carried out on an average frequency of 4
months to verify pH value, chloride content, sulphate content, alkali carbonates &
Bicarbonates and total dissolved ions.

435 CONDENSED SILICA FUME (CSF):

 The CSF shall originate from approved ferrosilicon or silicon plants where the silicon
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 58 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

content of the primary alloy produced (not the CSF) is greater than 85%. Silica Fume for
concrete shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 13263-1:2005

 Frequency of Supplier testing: the manufacturer shall maintain a testing frequency at the
production plant at least once every 100 tons of CSF produced.

 Compositional analysis: The CSF shall have the following minimum and maximum
composition in its powder form.

Min Max
SiO 2 85% -
Fe2 03 - 1.5%
SO 3 - 1.0%
Na2 O+K2 O - 2.0%
C1 - 0.05%
C - 1.5%
Loss on ignition - 2.0%

Coarse particles>44microns ASTM C311 - 1.5%


Moisture content ASTM C311 - 1.5%
BET Fineness m2/kg DIN 66132 20,000 -

 Documentation: the Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative authentic


original documents relating to:-

a) The origin of the microsilica by country and location of plant.


b) The silicon content by percentage of the primary alloys produced at the
nominated plant and any variations during the supply period.
c) Method of shipment
d) The compositional analysis with every delivery of CSF to the project.

 Storage: the Contractor shall store the CSF as follows:-

a) Dry CSF powder in bags shall be stored under shaded cover and be isolated from
the ground or floors by pallets.

b) Dry CSF powder shall be stored in clean dry rust free silos and protected from
contamination

 Addition to Concrete: method of addition to concrete is as follows:-

a) CSF powder shall be slurrified into a 50% (by weight) water slurry before addition
to the fresh concrete mix.

b) The slurry shall be accurately dispensed into the concrete mix either manually or by
automatic equipment designed for the purpose to an accuracy of + or -3%.

c) The addition of powder directly to the concrete mix shall be approved - only at the
discretion of the Employer’s Representative.

 Curing:

Wet curing shall be maintained for a minimum period of 10 days after placement. Under no
circumstances shall the concrete be allowed to dry out during the wet curing period.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 59 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

490 PROPERTIES OF FRESH CONCRETE:

Properties of fresh concrete to be determined by the Contractor in consultation with the


concrete supplier to suit the on-site circumstances and methods, but in all respects maintaining
compliance with this Specification.

TESTING/CERTIFICATION
510A SAMPLING:

 To test for workability: Tests specified in clause 195 shall be carried out on one sample
taken at the point of placing for each 10 cu.m of concrete batched or for each truck loadof
readymix concrete delivered. For each 50m³ of concrete produced, an additional sample
shall be taken for comparison purposes at the point of batching.
 To test for strength: Rate of sampling depends on the location in which the concrete is
used. A set should consist of 2 cubes at 7 days, 2 cubes at 28 days and 2 spares. Refer to
corresponding designed mix specifications for details.
 To test for bleeding and durability: Tests specified in clause 195 shall be carried out as per the
frequency specified therein.

510B RECORDS:

Complete correlated records must be maintained for each Designed and Prescribed mix
including:
 Information in accordance with BS 8500-1 Annex B and BS EN 206-1 Annex B.
 All sampling, site tests and identification numbers of all specimens tested in the
laboratory.
 The location of the part(s) of the structure represented by each sample.
 The location in the structure of the batch from which each sample is taken.

520A TEST LABORATORY:

All specified testing of concrete to be carried out by one of the specified and Dubai Central
Laboratory Accredited laboratory. Submit the name of the selected laboratory to Employer’s
Representative for approval as soon as possible and in any case before making trial mixes of
concrete for use in the Works.

530A TEST REPORTS:

2 copies of reports to be dispatched to Employer’s Representative within one day of completion of


each test.
Keep a complete set of reports on site.

550A BROKEN CUBES:

Keep separately the pieces of each cube which fails to meet the compliance requirements for
individual results. Obtain agreement of the Employer’s Representative before discarding.

570 EARLY AGE STRENGTH TESTING:

A regime of accelerated or normal curing and early testing which is capable of predicting the 28 day
strength of Designed mixes may be used for determining compliance, subject to prior approval.
If such a regime is adopted, two additional cubes must be made from each sample and cured
normally so that, in the event of non-compliance, they can be tested at 28 days to provide
information, which will help in deciding the action to be taken.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 60 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

580A FAILURES:

 If a concrete sample fails to achieve specified criteria or to pass specified tests, inform the
Employer’s Representative without delay and submit:
- Confirmation of the validity of the test results, and/or
- Proposals for further tests to assess the strength of the concrete in the structure, as set
out in BS 6089, BS EN 13791, and/or
- Proposals for rectification.
 Obtain approval of all such evidence and proposals before proceeding. The Employer’s
Representative may issue instructions for the work to be stopped or delayed until reasonsfor
the failure have been established; possible consequences assessed and appropriate
preventative and remedial measures taken.
 Wherever the specified sampling, testing and compliance procedures show that a
concrete mix is not in accordance with the specification (even if the work is eventually
accepted), and measures are taken in establishing whether or not the work is acceptable,
such measures:
- will be at the expense of the Contractor, and
- will not be considered as grounds for extension of time for completion or any other
claims.

590A OTHER TESTING:

 Tests: Static Modulus of Elasticity to ASTM C 469-94


Sampling: see contract drawings for any requirement for mixes to be tested. Four tests for each
mix consisting of a Modulus test, a 28 day cube test and cube test at same age as theModulus
test if not carried out at 28days.

PLACING AND COMPACTING

620A TIMING OF WATERTIGHT CONSTRUCTION:

On hot and/or sunny days, either suspend placing of watertight concrete, or carry out placing
during the late afternoon or evening. Other methods of keeping the concrete within an
acceptable maximum temperature may be agreed with Employer’s Representative.

630 PREMATURE WATER LOSS:


 Requirement: Prevent water loss from concrete laid on absorbent substrates.
- Underlay: Select from: (unless mentioned otherwise in drawings)
Polyethylene sheet: 250 micrometres thick.
Building paper: To BS 1521, grade B1F.
Installation: Lap edges 150 mm.

640A CONSTRUCTION JOINTS:


 Submit details of proposed locations and obtain approval before proceeding.
 Carefully brush and spray surface while concrete is still green to remove surface laitance
and expose aggregate finish. Obtain approval for any alternative method.
 Surface to be clean and damp when fresh concrete is placed against it.

650 CLEANING:

At time of placing ensure that all surfaces on which concrete is to be placed are clean, with no
debris, tying wire clippings, fastenings or free water.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 61 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

660A INSPECTION:

Inform Employer’s Representative before each pour of concrete to allow inspection of


reinforcement and surfaces against which concrete is to be placed. Agree with Employer’s
Representative the period of notice to be given (minimum 24 hours).

670A TRANSPORTING:

 Avoid contamination, segregation, loss of ingredients, excessive evaporation and loss of


workability. Protect concrete during heavy rain.
 Clean equipment immediately after use and whenever cement or aggregate is changed.
 Use suitable walkways and barrow runs for traffic over reinforcement and freshly placed
concrete.

680A PLACING:

 Record time, date and location of all pour.


 Place as soon as practicable after mixing and while sufficiently plastic for full compaction.
After discharge from the mixer do not add water or retemper mixes.
 Ensure that temperature of concrete is not more than 32 °C at the time of placing.
 Place in final position in one continuous operation up to construction joints. Avoid
formation of cold joints.
 Do not discharge from an excessive height or through reinforcement or other obstructions in
a way which may cause uneven dispersal, segregation or loss of ingredients or adversely affect
the formwork or formed finishes. Use suitable chutes or trunking where necessary.
 Place in layers no thicker than can be effectively compacted with the equipment being used,
without delay between layers. Merge together by compaction.
 Do not use vibrators to make concrete flow horizontally into position, except where
necessary to achieve full compaction under void formers and cast in accessories.
 Do not place concrete if the ambient temperature is above 40 °C, or is expected to reach
such a level during concreting and 3 hours after placing, without special permission from the
Employer’s Representative.
 Rate of placing shall be in accordance with the design pressure of form work.

690 COMPACTING:

 General: Fully compact concrete to full depth to remove entrapped air. Continue until air
bubbles cease to appear on the top surface.
- Areas for particular attention: Around reinforcement, under void formers, cast-in
accessories, into corners of formwork and at joints.
 Consecutive batches of concrete: Amalgamate without damaging adjacent partly
hardened concrete.
 Methods of compaction: To suit consistence class and use of concrete.

700 LIGHTWEIGHT AGGREGATE CONCRETE:

 Placing and compacting: Prevent flotation of coarse aggregate and formation of excessive
blowholes.

720 VIBRATORS:

 General: Maintain sufficient numbers and types of vibrator to suit pouring rate,
consistency and location of concrete.
External vibrators: Obtain approval for use

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 62 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

730 PLASTIC SETTLEMENT:

 Settlement cracking: Inspect fresh concrete closely and continuously wherever cracking is likely
to occur, including the top of deep sections and at significant changes in the depth of
concrete sections.
- Timing: During the first few hours after placing and whilst concrete is still capable
of being fluidized by the vibrator.
 Removal of cracks: Revibrate concrete.

CURING AND PROTECTION

810 CURING GENERALLY:

 Requirement: Keep surface layers of concrete moist throughout curing period, including
perimeters and abutments, by either restricting evaporation or continuously wetting
surfaces of concrete.
- Surfaces covered by formwork: Retain formwork in position and, where necessary to
satisfy curing period, cover surfaces immediately after striking.
- Top surfaces: Cover immediately after placing and compacting. If covering is
removed for finishing operations, replace it immediately afterwards.
 Surface temperature: Maintain above 5°C throughout the specified curing period or four
days, whichever is longer.
 Records: Maintain details of location and timing of casting of individual batches, removalof
formwork and removal of coverings. Keep records on site, available for inspection.

811A COVERING FOR CURING:

 Sheet coverings: Suitable impervious material (Damp Hessian cloth and Polythene sheet).
 Curing compounds: Selection criteria:
- Curing efficiency: Not less than 90%.
- Colouring: Fugitive dye.
- Application to concrete exposed in the finished work: Readily removable without
disfiguring the surface (by light, even grit blasting).
- Application to concrete to receive bonded construction/ finish: No impediment to
subsequent bonding.
 Interim covering to top surfaces of concrete: Until surfaces are in a suitable state to receive
coverings in direct contact, cover with impervious sheeting held clear of the surface and
sealed against draughts at perimeters and junctions.

812 PREVENTING EARLY AGE THERMAL CRACKING:

 Deep lifts or large volume pours: Submit proposals for curing to prevent early age
thermal cracking, taking account of:
- Temperature differentials across sections. For all concrete pours in excess of 1m
thickness the contractor shall ensure that the differential temperature between the core
and external surfaces or adjacent pours shall not be greater than 20 degrees Celsius
and that the temperature does not exceed 70 degrees Celsius. Thermo couples
shall be provided to monitor the differential temperature.
- Coefficient of thermal expansion of the concrete.
- Strain capacity of the concrete mix (aggregate dependent).

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 63 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Restraint.

815 ADDITIONAL CURING REQUIREMENT - WATER CURING:

 Commencement of water curing: As soon as practicable after placing and compacting


concrete.
- Surfaces covered by formwork: Expose to water curing as soon as practicable.
- Top surfaces: Cover immediately with impermeable sheeting to prevent
evaporation before commencement of water curing.
 Water curing: Wet surfaces continuously throughout curing period.
- Select methods from:
Mist spray.
Wet hessian covered with impermeable sheeting.

820A CURING PERIODS:

 Concrete shall be cured for a minimum of seven days. For concrete incorporating
cement replacements such as GGBFS, PFA or CSF, this period shall be increased to 10
days minimum. For concrete sections in excess of 1m thickness special measures will be
required and the curing period increased to 14 days for sections 1m to 2m and 21 days
for sections in excess of 2m section. If a change in curing method is made during this
period, it shall only be done after the concrete is 3 days old.

830 TEMPERATURE OF WATERTIGHT CONCRETE:

 Prevent the build-up of high temperatures and steep temperature gradients during the
first 24 hours after casting, particularly in hot weather,
 Prevent rapid changes in temperature during the first 7 days after casting.
 Submit proposals designed to achieve these objectives (taking into account the nature of
the design, the mix specification and the prevailing climatic conditions).
840 PROTECTION:

 Prevent damage to concrete, including:


- Surfaces generally: From rain, indentation and other physical damage.
- Surfaces to exposed visual concrete: From dirt, staining, rust marks and other
disfiguration.
- Immature concrete: From thermal shock, physical shock, overloading, movement
and vibration.
- In cold weather: From entrapment and freezing expansion of water in pockets, etc.

***End of Section E10***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 64 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION E20

FORMWORK FOR IN SITU


CONCRETE

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 65 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

E20 FORMWORK FOR IN SITU CONCRETE


To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

GENERALLY/ PREPARATION

110 LOADINGS
 Requirement: Design and construct formwork to withstand the worst combination of the
following:
- Total weight of formwork, reinforcement and concrete.
- Construction loads including dynamic effects of placing, compacting and
construction traffic.
- Wind and snow loads.

120 FORMWORK DETAILS


 Provide the following:
- Construction Joints – Position and types
- Panel Joints – layout where exposed to view.
- Permanent Form work
- Sealing method – at panel joints, from tie holes and construction
- Surface of forms, form liners and other means of obtaining specified finish
- Tie holes – layout where exposed to view void formers.

132 PROPPING
 General: Prevent deflection and damage to the structure. Carry down props to bearings
strong enough to provide adequate support throughout concreting operations.
 Method statement: Submit proposals for prop bearings and sequence of propping/
repropping and backpropping.
- Timing of submission: 3 weeks prior to start fixing formwork at site.

145 PERMANENT FORMWORK


 Location and materials: Submit proposals.

160 CAMBERS
 Application of specified upward cambers: To the concrete immediately before formwork is
struck.
- Formwork: Allow for deflection under weight of fresh concrete.
- Top surfaces of concrete: Camber to maintain the required structural depths and
profiles.
 Checks after striking of formwork and removal of props: Levels to determine extent of any
residual camber. Submit results.
 Upward cambers: Construct forms to achieve the following:
- Where shown on drawings.

170 WORK BELOW GROUND GENERALLY


 Casting vertical faces against faces of excavation: Not Permitted.
 Casting walls against faces of excavation: Use form work on both sides.

215 UNDERSLAB INSULATION


 Type: Extruded polystyrene as per DM/DDA regulation and DCL approval.
 Recycled content: Permitted as per green building requirements.
 Thickness:
- Under slab: Min 50mm or as per green building plan and DM
regulation.
- To edge of slab: Min 50mm or as per design.
- Compressive strength (minimum): 100Kpa at 1% compression or as per design.
- Density (Average): 35Kg/m3 or as per design.
- Thermal conductivity (maximum): As per green building plan and Dubai
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 66 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Municipality/DDA Standard.

 Installation generally: Lay tightly butted and fully supported on firm, even substrate.

230 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR FORMWORK


 The design of formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor for all insitu and precast
elements.
 The contractor shall, if required, supply to the Employer’s Representative drawings and
calculations for the form work he proposes to use.
 The formwork shall be so arranged as to be readily dismantled and removable from the cast
concrete without shock, disturbance or damage.
 Supports shall be carried to construction which is sufficiently strong to afford the necessary
support without injury to any portion of the structure. This may mean in some cases that it be
carried down to the foundations or other suitable bases.
 Props and bracing shall be provided for temporary support to any precast composite
construction where necessary.
 Except where noted otherwise on the approved design drawings, all arises in concrete shall be
eased with 10mm x 10 mm chamfers.
 No part of the concrete works shall be drilled or cut away without being approved by the
Employer’s Representative.
 Where in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative any piece of formwork is damaged,
deformed, worn or otherwise incapable of producing an acceptable finished concrete surface he
may declare such form work defective. Such form work shall be repaired to the satisfaction
of the Employer’s rep or discarded.
 Immediately before the concrete is placed in any section of the form work the interior of the
section shall be completely cleared of all extraneous materials including water.
 Where a certification is mandatory as per the requirement of Authority the contractor shall
provide such third party certificate.

310 ACCURACY
 General requirement for formwork: Accurately and robustly constructed to produce finished
concrete in the required positions and to the required dimensions.
 Formed surfaces: Free from twist and bow (other than any required cambers).
 Intersections, lines and angles: Square, plumb and true.

315 SUBSTRUCTURE FORMWORK AND UNDERSLAB INSULATION


 Cutting: Neat and accurate to edges, and around penetrations and downstands.
 Laying: Tightly butted and fully supported on firm, even substrate.
 Vertical faces: Stiffen as necessary to act as shutter.
 Formwork/ insulation surfaces: Protect from indentation by spacers and other items.
 Joints in formwork/ insulation and with edge structure and penetrations: Seal to prevent
penetration of concrete.
 Concrete placement: Restrain formwork/ insulation against movement.

320 JOINTS IN FORMS


 Requirements including joints in form linings and between forms and completed work:
- Prevent loss of grout, using seals where necessary.
- Prevent formation of steps. Secure formwork tight against adjacent concrete.

330 INSERTS, HOLES AND CHASES


 Positions and details:
- Dimensioned on drawings provided on behalf of the Employer’s Representative: Do
not change without consent. Dimensioned drawings are contractor’s responsibility.
- Undimensioned or from other sources: Submit proposals.
 Positioning relative to reinforcement: Resolve any conflicts well in advance of placing
concrete.
 Method of forming: Fix inserts or box out as required. Do not cut hardened concrete without
approval.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 67 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

340 KICKERS
 Method statement: Submit proposals including means of achieving quality of concrete
consistent with that specified for the column or wall. Kicker shall be provided for all columns and
walls.
- Kicker height: 100mm.

350 FORM TIES


 Metal associated with form ties/ devices: Prohibited within cover to reinforcement.Compatible
with reinforcement metal. Contractor shall use purpose made PVC tubes and cones to fix form
ties ensuring full removal of ties. All form ties holes shall be filled with non shrink cementitious
grout.

351 PROHIBITION OF FORM TIES


 Do not use ties in the following work:
Fair faced concrete surfaces.

361 FORM TIES FOR WATER RESISTANT CONCRETE


 General: Maintain water resistance of construction.
 Tie type and sealing system: Submit proposals.

380 VOID FORMERS


 Manufacturer: submit proposal.
- Product reference: Fire retardant polystyrene or other suitable material that
conforms to DM/DCL regulation.
- Compressive strength: Min 100Kpa at 1% compression or as per design.
- Crack breaking strength: Average 350 Kpa or as per design.
- Shear strength: Average 17 Kpa or as per design.
- Density: Average 35 Kg/m3 or as per design.
- Others: Shall comply with DM/DDA and Dubai civil defense regulation.

390 COFFER UNITS


 Manufacturer: submit proposal.
- Product reference: contractor’s choice subject to Employer’s Representative’s approval.

400 TROUGH UNITS


 Manufacturer: submit proposal.
- Product reference: contractor’s choice subject to Employer’s Representative’s approval.

405 COLUMN SHUTTERS


 Manufacturer: submit proposal.
- Product reference: contractor’s choice subject to Employer’s Representative’s approval.

470 RELEASE AGENTS


 Use: All form work wherever necessary.
 General: Achieve a clean release of forms without disfiguring the concrete surface.
 Product types: Compatible with formwork materials, specified formed finishes and
subsequent applied finishes. Use the same product throughout the entire area of any one
finish. Reebol WB from Fosroc or Rheofinish 225 D from BASF or ReForm W from Conmix or
approved equivalent.
 Protection: Prevent contact with reinforcement, hardened concrete, other materials not part of
the form face, and permanent forms.

480 SURFACE RETARDERS


 Use: Obtain approval.
 Reinforcement: Prevent contact with retarder.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 68 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

STRIKING

510 STRIKING FORMWORK


 Timing: Prevent any disturbance, damage or overloading of the permanent structure.

521A MINIMUM PERIOD FOR RETAINING FORMWORK/ TEMPORARY


SUPPORTS IN POSITION
 The minimum period before striking shall be as noted below:
- Beam sides, walls and columns : 24 hours
- Slab soffits (from work props undisturbed) : 7 days
- Form work props of slabs : 14 days
- Beam Soffits (formwork props undisturbed) : 10 days
- Form work props to beam : 21 days
 Notwithstanding the periods given above, formwork, shuttering, props or any other means of
temporary or semi permanent support shall not be removed from the concrete until the
concrete is sufficiently strong to carry safely the load (dead and temporary).
 The contractor shall inform the Employer’s Representative when he is ready to strike the
formwork, or remove any form of temporary support, and shall obtain his consent before
proceeding.
 The final responsibility of striking the formwork rests solely with the contractor and designer.

FORMED FINISHES

602 FINISHED CONCRETE SURFACES


 Where no particular finish is indicated on the drawings, the formed surface shall have fine
smooth finish as clause 630.

605 CONTROL SAMPLES


 Sample areas that are part of the finished work: For fair faced concrete surface, grade slab,
construction joints, chamfers and tie holes and filling.
 Approval of appearance: Obtain before proceeding with remainder of the work.

610 BASIC FINISH


 Requirements: Face fully compacted and to tolerance, without voids, honeycombing and
segregation.
 Use: Faces below ground level unless mentioned otherwise on drawing.

615 FINISH TO RECEIVE ASPHALT TANKING


 Finish: Even and suitable to receive asphalt.
 Permissible deviation of surfaces:
- Sudden irregularities (maximum): 3 mm.
- Gradual irregularities when measured from underside of a 1m straightedge, placed
anywhere on surface (maximum): 3 mm.
 Surface blemishes:
- Permitted: Blowholes less than 10 mm in diameter.
- Not permitted: Voids, honeycombing, segregation and other large
defects.
 Projecting fins: Remove.
 Formwork tie holes: Filled with non shrink cementitious mortar.

620 PLAIN SMOOTH FINISH


 Finish: Even with panels arranged in a regular pattern as a feature of the surface.
 Permissible deviation of surfaces:
- Sudden irregularities (maximum): 5 mm.
- Gradual irregularities when measured from the underside of a 1 m straightedge,
placed anywhere on surface (maximum): 5 mm.
 Variations in colour:
- Permitted: Those caused by impermeable form linings.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 69 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Not permitted: Discoloration caused by contamination or grout


leakage.
 Surface blemishes:
- Permitted: Blowholes less than 10 mm in diameter and at an agreed frequency.
- Not permitted: Voids, honeycombing, segregation and other large defects.
 Formwork tie holes: In a regular pattern and filled with non shrink cementitious mortar.

630 FINE SMOOTH FINISH


 Finish: Smooth and even. Panels to be as large as is practicable and arranged in a regular
pattern as a feature of the surface.
 Permissible deviation of surfaces:
- Sudden irregularities (maximum): 2 mm.
- Gradual irregularities when measured from the underside of a 1 m straightedge,
placed anywhere on surface (maximum): 2 mm.
 Variations in colour:
- Permitted: Those caused by impermeable form linings.
- Not permitted: Discoloration caused by:
Contamination or grout leakage.
Replacement of formwork panels.
 Cover spacers: submit proposals.
 Surface blemishes:
- Permitted: Blowholes less than 3 mm in diameter and at an agreed frequency.
- Not permitted: Voids, honeycombing, segregation and other defects.
 Formwork tie holes: In a regular pattern and filled with non shrink cementitious grout.

650 RIBBED FINISH


 Forms or form linings: Splayed timber battens secured to plywood backing.
- Finished size of battens: Submit proposal.
- Centres of battens: Submit proposal.
- Fixing to plywood backing: Adhesive and screws.
- Finish: Smooth with clean, sharp arrises at junctions with backing. Prevent
penetration of grout behind battens.
 Cover spacers: Submit proposals
 Surface blemishes:
- Permitted: Blowholes less than 5 mm in diameter and at an agreed frequency.
- Not permitted: Voids, honeycombing, segregation and other defects.
 Formwork tie holes: In a regular pattern and filled with non shrink cementitious mortar.

750 ARRISES, MARGINS AND JUNCTIONS


 Requirements:
As shown on contract drawings or agreed as per approved shop drawings.

***End of Section E20***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 70 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION E30

REINFORCEMENT FOR IN SITU


CONCRETE

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 71 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

E30 REINFORCEMENT FOR IN SITU

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

110 QUALITY ASSURANCE:


 All steel reinforcement specified/proposed to comply with BS 4449 or BS 4483 and cut and bent to
BS 8666 is to be obtained from firm(s) holding a valid certificate of approval for product
conformity issued by the UK Certification Authority for Reinforcing Steels (CARES). The
contractor shall submit in respect of each consignment of steel reinforcement supplied to the site
a manufacturers certificate stating that the steel reinforcement complies with relevant standards.
All steel reinforcement shall be obtained from DM/DCL approved manufacturer andsuppliers.

120A TESTING OF REINFORCEMENT


 For each delivery of reinforcement corresponding certificates shall be supplied to site showing the
reinforcement meets the strength, ductility and material requirements of BS4449. All
reinforcement delivered to site must have DCL marking on the same.
 One set of tests shall be carried out in an approved independent laboratory for each bar
diameter at the start of the job and every 100 tons of steel delivered to site. Testing Frequencycan
be increased to 200 tons if the reinforcement steel is manufactured by CARES or equivalent
accredited certification body approved mill. This can be further increased to 400 tons if the
reinforcement steel is manufactured and processed by CARES or equivalent accredited
certification body approved mill and cutting and bending companies.
 Tests shall be carried out for yield strength, ultimate strength, elongation at maximum force,
elongation at fracture, mass per meter, nominal cross sectional area, bending, re-bending, surface
geometry, chemical composition (minimum 4 elements) and carbon equivalent all in accordance
with BS EN 10080.

140 PLAIN BAR REINFORCEMENT: To BS 4449, Grade 250.

150 DEFORMED BAR REINFORCEMENT: To BS 4449, Grade 460, hot rolled high yield type 2.

165A GALVANIZED REINFORCEMENT: As per design requirement

170A STAINLESS STEEL BAR REINFORCEMENT: As per design requirement.

210 FABRIC REINFORCEMENT: To BS 4483.

240A PREFABRICATED SHEAR REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM: As per the requirement of post


tensioned specialist contractor’s design.

270 SPACER BLOCKS


 Spacer blocks shall be of such materials and design as will be dense durable, not lead to
corrosion of the reinforcement, and not cause spalling of the concrete cover. Spacer blocks
made from cement, sand and aggregate shall match the mix proportions and appearance of the
surrounding concrete and shall have compressive strength, durability of not less than the
surrounding concrete.
 They shall adequately support the reinforcement, resist displacement, not cause indentation of the
formwork.
 Plastic spacers shall be perforated to at least 75% of their area.
 Concrete spacer blocks made on site are not permitted
 Spacers will not be permitted against a concrete face which will be exposed in the finished works.

DETAILING AND SCHEDULING

280 BAR SCHEDULES


 The Contractor shall schedule the reinforcement in accordance with BS 8110 and BS 4466 and

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 72 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

the information on the Drawings, this Specification and subsequent instructions.


 The Contractor shall include for all necessary chairs and spacers, and his price and rates for steel
thus shown shall include for these.
 The Contractor shall prepare reinforcement detail drawings and other relevant shop drawings to
the following scales:

Raft Layouts 1:100


Isolated Footings 1: 50
Columns, Floor slabs, raft slab and beams 1:25

Sketches will not be acceptable. Detailing should be carried out in accordance with Institution of
Structural Engineers' detailing manual

 These drawings shall show all openings for services, upstands or plinths for equipment and cast- in
items.
 Bending schedules and reinforcement detail drawings shall be submitted for the Employer’s
Representative's approval. Two weeks shall be allowed for his consideration of this initial
submission.
 The Contractor shall correct these schedules and resubmit as reasonably required to ensure a
high standard of work. He shall programme his work and submit schedules for approval allowing
time for such verification, rectification and resubmission as necessary. Such approval shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the accuracy of such schedules.
 No concreting shall be allowed to proceed until such a time that the drawings and bending
schedules for that particular section of works are approved. Any delay incurred in obtaining
approval shall be the Contractor's responsibility.

WORKMANSHIP

310A CUT AND BEND:


 Cut and Bend reinforcement to schedules and to BS 8666. Do not bend when below 5 degrees
without approval. Do not rebend bars without approval. Tag bundles of reinforcement with
labels to BS 8666

317 MECHANICAL DAMAGE:


 Reinforcement must not be roughly handled, dropped from a height, or subjected to shock
loading or mechanical damage.

322 HANDLING AND STORAGE


 The Contractor shall ensure that reinforcement left exposed in the Permanent Works shall not
suffer distortion, displacement or other damage.

 Reinforcement shall be stored on site in racks within a building enclosure at a minimum of


300mm above the ground and shall be protected from wind-blown dust, sand and sea salts.

 Reinforcement shall also be protected from the weather. Any reinforcement which has become
corroded or pitted to an extent which in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative will
substantially affect its properties or its long-term durability shall be removed from site.

325A CLEANLINESS:
 At time of placing concrete, reinforcement to be clean and free of corrosive pitting, loose
millscale, loose rust, ice, oil and other substances which may adversely affect the reinforcement,
concrete, or bond between the two.
 Cleaning shall be done by wire brushing or grit or sand blasting to the Employer’s
Representative's satisfaction. If blasting is required the blasting medium shall be clean and salt
free. If at any time the Employer’s Representative is not satisfied with the result of mechanical cleaning
he may require the Contractor to adopt an alternative method.
 Water cleaning of reinforcement to remove chloride contamination shall be carried out at the
Employer’s Representative's discretion prior to pouring of concrete.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 73 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

330 ADJUSTMENTS:
 Provide on site facilities for hand bending to deal with approved minor adjustments.

360A PROJECTING REINFORCEMENT:


 Grade 250 bars may be bent to radii not less than BS 8666, Table 3. Grade 460 bars diameters
16mm and above must not be bent or straightened without approval.

Starter bars shall be protected from wind blown dust, sand and sea salts by wrapping with
polythene sheets or other approved means. Purpose made plastic end caps shall be provided for
exposed starter bars to prevent injury to workmen.

410 LAPS OR SPLICES:


 As per detailed design.

420 LAPS in nominal bar reinforcement to be not less than 300 mm.

421 LAPS in fabric reinforcement, where not detailed, to be not less than 250 mm. Where necessary
seek instructions to avoid a four layer build-up at corners.

435A STRUCTURAL WELDED JOINTS


 Reinforcement shall not be welded except where required by the Contract or agreed by the
Employer’s Representative. If welding is employed, the procedures shall be as set out in BS EN
1011-1 and1011-2 for metal arc welding. Full strength butt welds shall only be used for steel
complying with BS 4449. If high yield deformed bars are to be welded they shall have a carbon
equivalent of the steel less than 0.51% and a nitrogen content less than 0.007%.
 Submit full details including joint type(s), location(s) and conditions of working. Accept
responsibility for cost of checking by the Employer’s Representative and for any third party
supervision and testing.

445A MECHANICAL JOINTS


 Source: Obtain from a manufacturer holding a valid Technical Product Approval certificate issued
by the UK Certification Authority for Reinforcing Steels (CARES) or equivalent.
 The mechanical splice shall have at least 125 % of the yield strength of the bar.

451A FIXING GENERALLY:


 Unless otherwise permitted fix reinforcement in position before placing concrete general in
accordance with BS 7973-1 and 2. In addition to any spacers and chairs shown on drawings or
schedules, provide adequate support, tie securely and maintain the specified cover. Comply
generally with Concrete Society Report CS 101 'Spacers for reinforced concrete'.
 Unless otherwise specified tie using 16 swg annealed tying wire. Ensure that tying wire does
not intrude into the concrete cover and remove loose ends. Do not tack weld unless
authorised by the Employer’s Representative and recommended by the reinforcement
manufacturer.
 Do not fix or place reinforcement in contact with nonferrous metals.
 Reinforcement shall be rigidly fixed so that no movement can occur during concrete placing. Any
fixings made to the formwork shall not be within the space to be occupied by the concrete being
currently placed.

470 TOLERANCES ON COVER:


 Not less than the nominal cover minus 5 mm.
 Where reinforcement is located in a particular direction in relation to only one face of a
member, not more than the nominal cover plus:
5 mm on bars up to and including 12 mm size.
10 mm on bars over 12 mm up to and including 25 mm size.
15 mm on bars over 25 mm size.
 Before concreting check thoroughly that the specified cover dimensions have been obtained.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 74 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

491 SPACERS to formed concrete finishes, if permitted to be approved type(s).

500 DAMAGE:
 Prevent damage to and disfigurement of forms, form linings and adjacent work.

510 RUST STAINING:


 Prevent rust staining of surfaces of concrete which will be exposed to view in the finished
work, caused by, e.g. rust stained formwork or unprotected projecting reinforcement.

521A CHECKING COVER:


The Contractor shall provide and maintain fully charged, for the sole use of the Employer’s
Representative, an approved magnetic induction digital display type cover meter calibrated in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use of cover meter shall be in accordance with
BS 1881-204 and manufacturer’s printed instruction as appropriate to yield accurate results.

***End of Section E30***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 75 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION E40
DESIGNED JOINTS IN SITU
CONCRETE

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 76 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

E40 DESIGNED JOINTS IN IN SITU CONCRETE


To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.

120 CONSTRUCTION/ MOVEMENT JOINTS GENERALLY


 Accuracy: Position and form joints accurately, straight, well-aligned and truly vertical or
horizontal or parallel with setting out lines of the building.
 Modifications to joint design or location: Submit proposals and obtain approval from
authority and Employer’s Representative where required.
 Placing concrete to form movement joints:
- Maintain effectiveness of joints. Prevent concrete entering joints or penetrating or
impregnating compressible joint fillers.
- Do not place concrete simultaneously on both sides of movement joints.

132 ADDITIONAL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS


 Joints additional to those required by designer:
Not permitted.
 Approval of additional joints: Submit proposals.

210 FORMED JOINTS


 Forms/ stop ends generally: Rigid and grout tight.
 Forms/ stop ends for projecting continuity reinforcement: To accommodate bars or fabric
without temporary bending or displacement.

211 FORMED JOINTS IN CONCRETE WEARING SURFACES


 Temporary forms: Square edged with a steel top surface.
 Placing concrete: Compact thoroughly at edges to give level, closely abutted joints with no
lipping.

230 PREPARATION OF CONSTRUCTION JOINTS


 Roughening of joint surfaces: Select from:
- Brushing and spraying: Remove surface laitance and expose aggregate finish while
concrete is still green. Surfaces of fresh concrete at horizontal construction joints
shall be rough floated sufficiently to thoroughly consolidate the surfaces and
intentionally left in a roughened condition
- Other methods: Submit proposals.
 All vertical joints shall be constructed with shear keys. Shear keys shall consist of formed
depressions in the surface covering approximately one third of the contact surface. The
forms for keys shall be levelled so that removal will not damage the concrete.
 Condition of joint surfaces immediately before placing fresh concrete: All construction joints
shall be cleaned of surface laitence, curing compound and other foreign materials before
fresh concrete is placed against the surface of the joint. Abrasive blast or other approved
methods shall be used to clean horizontal construction joints to the extent that clean
aggregate is exposed. All construction joints shall be flushed with water and allowed to dry to
a surface dry condition and coated with an acrylic emulsion bonding agent immediately
prior to placing concrete.

310 FLEXIBLE WATERSTOPS


 Product reference: High grade PVC extruded profiles to give excellent flexibility and
longevity characteristics, with minimum 4 valves/bulbs suitable for internal and external
fixing for construction and expansion joints. Minimum width shall be 250mm. Average
thickness of bulb shall be 22mm. PVC water stop shall have a tensile strength of
14MN/m2 and an elongation break of 300% and shall be capable of withstanding
hydrostatic head up to 100m.
 Junctions and angles: Use factory formed junction pieces.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 77 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Placing concrete: Fully compact concrete around waterstops with no voids or porous areas.
 Reinjectable hose: Reinjectable hose shall be provided in every construction joint in
substructure (for basement and retaining structures).

520 SHEET JOINT FILLER FOR EXPANSION AND ISOLATION JOINTS


 Product reference: Bitumen impregnated fibre board. It shall be compressible and non-
extruding and shall conform to the requirement of UK department of transport
specification for highway work series 1000, clause 1015. Shall comply with following
properties:-
 Solid content :100%
 Recovery :Pass(ASTM D1751)
 Weathering test :No disintegration
 Extrusion :Pass(ASTM D1751)
 Distortion :Pass(ASTM D994)
 Brittleness :Does not crack or shatter(ASTM D994)
 Joints finished with sealant: Leave sufficient space for sealant by using temporary
formers.

530 SEALANT FOR EXPANSION AND ISOLATION JOINTS


 Product reference: Multi-component joint sealant, based on a liquid polysulphide polymer,
which when mixed and applied, cures to form a tough, rubber like seal. Shall comply with
the following technical properties:-
 Compliance with standard: BS 4254 and BS 6920(for gun grade)
 Movement accommodation factor (BS6093): 25% for Butt joint and 50% for
lapjoint.
 Application temperature: 5 to 50 degrees
 Hardness Shore “A” 25 digress: 15 to 23
 Biological resistance: Resistant to aerobic conditions
 Solid content: 100%
 Density: 1.60 to 1.70 Kg/liter
 Chemical resistance: Resistant to dilute acids, dilute alkalis, petrol, aviation fuel,
diesel, kerosene, white spirit, lubricating oils
 Shall comply with Green Building regulations.

 Colour of surfaces exposed to view: To Employer’s Representative’s selection.


 Preparation and application: As section Z22.

590 INSPECTIONS OF TIED AND PARTIALLY TIED JOINTS


 Purpose: To determine whether shrinkage is concentrated at occasional joints.
 Timing: At intervals from one month after casting of slab for duration of works.
 Joints that have opened significantly more than the average: Submit proposals for
rectification.

***End of Section E40***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 78 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION E41

WORKED FINISHES TO IN
SITU CONCRETE

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 79 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

E41 WORKED FINISHES TO IN SITU CONCRETE


To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

145 CONTROL SAMPLES


 Sample areas that are part of finished work: For wearing screed trowelled finish, concrete slab
finished with slip resistant epoxy coating, concrete slab finished with epoxy resin coating,
power floated grade slab, fair faced concrete floor slab for an area of 10m 2.
 Location: As agreed with the Employer’s Representative.
 Approval of appearance: Obtain before proceeding with remainder of the work.

150 FINISHING
 Timing: Carry out at optimum times in relation to setting and hardening of concrete.
 Prohibited treatments to concrete surfaces:
- Wetting to assist surface working.
- Sprinkling cement.

240 WOOD FLOATED FINISH


Surface on completion: Slightly coarse, even texture with no ridges or steps.

310 SMOOTH FLOATED FINISH


 Surface on completion: Even with no ridges or steps.

330 TROWELLED FINISH FOR WEARING SURFACES


 Surface on completion: Uniform and smooth, free from trowel marks and blemishes. Power
floating shall be continued with several passes until a smooth, shining finish, free of all
noticeable ridges is achieved.

510 DRYSHAKE FLOOR HARDENER FOR GRADE SLAB


 Manufacturer: BASF, FOSROC, or approved equivalent.
- Product reference: Emery based monolithic surface hardening compound for
concrete floors. Nitoflor Emeritop from FOSROC or approved equivalent.
 Condition of substrate prior to application: As soon as the laser screed has levelled and
compacted the surface and Base concrete has stiffened to the point when light foot traffic leaves
an imprint of about 3-6mm.
 Application: By a mechanical topping spreader at a dosage of up to 4Kg/m2.
- Additional applications: As manufacturer’s recommendations.
 Technical properties:
 Shall be monolithic
 Shall be non-metallic and rust free dynagrip aggregate.
 Aggregate impat value of 8.0(BS 812 part 112)
 Value not less than 9 on Mohs original scale.
 Abrasion resistance of concrete to be increased by 300%(ASTM C779-89a)
 Typical 28 days compressive strength not less than 70N/mm2.(BS 1881 Part116)

515 SURFACE HARDENER


 Manufacturer: BASF, FOSROC, or approved equivalent.
- Product reference: Aqueous solutions based on metallic fluorosilicates or sodium
silicates plus wetting agents. Master top 20 from BASF or approved equivalent.
 Condition of substrate prior to application: Cured, clean and free from surface
contaminants.
 Application: Evenly to dry surfaces. After absorption, wash surface immediately with clean
water.
- Additional applications: As manufacturer’s recommendations.
 Solutions and wash water: Do not discharge to drains. Store and dispose of safely.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 80 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

520 SURFACE SEALER


- Product reference: Acrylic, epoxy, or polyurethane resins in solvents.
 Substrate:
- Moisture content: As recommended by sealer manufacturer. Test relative humidity to
BS 8203, Annex A where required to verify suitability.
- Condition prior to application: Cured, clean and free from contaminants.
 Primer: As manufacturer’s recommendations.
 Application: Evenly to dry surfaces to form an effective seal but without a glossy finish.

*** End of Section E41***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 81 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION E42

ACCESSORIES CAST IN SITU


CONCRETE

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 82 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

E42 ACCESSORIES CAST INTO IN SITU CONCRETE

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

GENERAL

110 ACCESSORIES SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE


 Item/ location: Refer to relevant section or drawing or as required per design.

PRODUCTS

310 HOLDING DOWN SYSTEMS


 Bolts: Holding down bolt.
- Specification: Hexagonal headed to BS 7419 or as per approved design.
- Grade: 4.6 or as per design requirement.
- Diameter: As per design.
- Coating: Galvanized.
 Bolt box: None.
 Anchorage: As per design.
 Other requirements: Provide keep flat welded to underside of anchorage to prevent bolt
rotation during tightening. Any exposed part shall be suitably covered and concealed.

330 ANCHOR BOLTS


 Material: Grade 4.6 or as per design requirement.
 Manufacturer: Submit proposals.
- Product reference: To suit design and authority requirement.

380 DUCTS THROUGH BEAMS & SLABS


 Material: PVC-U to BS EN 1401-1.
 Shape generally circular, but rectangular in detailed locations.
- Size: As required.
 Location: Submit proposals.
 Other requirements: None.

390 GALVANIZED COATINGS


 Standard: To BS 7371-6.
 Galvanizing: Applied and passivated by component manufacturer.
 Threaded items tappedafter galvanizing.

EXECUTION

610 HOLLOW ACCESSORIES


 Filling/ sealing: Temporally fill or seal accessory to prevent ingress of grout during concreting.
Leave filling/ seals in position until accessory is used.

620 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS


 Location: Provide to hold accessories for casting into unshuttered surface of concrete, set at a
level that will not adversely affect finish of concrete surface remote from accessory.
 Rigidity: Sufficiently robust and well anchored to prevent lateral movement or rotation of
accessory during concreting.

630 PROTECTIVE COATINGS


 Inspect: Immediately prior to casting concrete.
 Damage to coatings:
- Minor: Submit proposals for coating repair.
- Significant: Replace accessory.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 83 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

640 INSTALLATION

 Cleanliness: At time of casting, surfaces in contact with concrete to be free from contaminants
which may adversely affect accessory, reinforcement, concrete, or bond between accessory and
concrete.
 Position: Hold accessory firmly in position at right angles or other specified angle to concrete
surface, preventing displacement during concreting.
 Other requirements: The day after casting, check that anchorage bolts in bolt boxes are free to
move out of perpendicular.

***End of Section E42***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 84 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION F10
BRICK/ BLOCK WALLING

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 85 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

F10 BRICK/ BLOCK WALLING

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section covers the laying of bricks and blocks of
clay, concrete and calcium silicate in courses on a mortar bed to form walls, partitions, chimneys,
plinths, seating, etc

TYPES OF WALLING

350A CONCRETE COMMON BLOCKWORK SUPERSTRUCTURE:


Location as per approved design drawing

 Blocks: To BS EN 771-3 and Dubai Municipality advisory note 007 and local order no.44.
- Manufacturer: (blocks shall be sourced from a manufacturer certified bythe local
authorities and should have COC from Dubai Municipality).
Product reference: Precast concrete masonry blocks.
- Type: Hollow.
- Average compressive strength (minimum): 7.5 N/mm².
- Individual compressive strength (minimum): 6.0 N/mm².
- Density: 2,100 kg/m3.
- Work sizes (length x height x thickness): 400 x 200 x 100 mm, 400 x 200 x 150 mm, 400
x 200 x 200 mm, 400 x 200 x 250 mm or as per approved design drawings.
- Special shapes: As per design requirement.
 Mortar: As section Z21.
- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.
- Mix: 1:4 Portland cement: sand. Mortar class M6.
- Additional requirements: Mortar shall be mixed by approved mechanical mixers only.
 Bond: Half lap stretcher.

352 CONCRETE COMMON BLOCKWORK TO SUBSTRUCTURE:


Location as per approved design drawing.

 Blocks: To BS EN 771-3 and Dubai Municipality advisory note 007 and local order no.44.
- Manufacturer: (blocks shall be sourced from a manufacturer certified bythe local
authorities and should have COC issued by Dubai Municipality).
Product reference: Precast concrete masonry blocks.
- Type: Solid.
- Average compressive strength (minimum): 12.5 N/mm².
- Individual compressive strength (minimum): 10.0 N/mm².
- Density: 2,100 kg/m3.
- Work sizes (length x height x thickness): 400 x 200 x 100 mm, 400 x 200 x 150 mm, 400
x 200 x 200 mm or as per approved design drawings.
- Special shapes: As per design requirement.
 Mortar: As section Z21.
- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.
- Mix: 1:4 Portland cement: sand. Mortar class M6.
- Additional requirements: Mortar shall be mixed by approved mechanical mixers only.
 Bond: Half lap stretcher.

370 THIN JOINT AUTOCLAVED AERATED CONCRETE (AAC) COMMON BLOCKWORK:


Location as perapproved design drawing.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 86 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Blocks: To BS EN 771-3 and Dubai Municipality advisory note 007 and local order no.44.
- Manufacturer: (blocks shall be sourced from a manufacturer certified bythe local
authorities and should have COC issued by Dubai Municipality).
Product reference: Autoclaved aerated concrete blocks.
- Configuration: Solid.
- Mean compressive strength (minimum): 3.2
N/mm². Category: I
- Dry Density: 480-550 kg/m3
- Thermal conductivity K value (maximum): 0.11 to 0.14 W/mK. But in any case, U value
of external wall shall not exceed the value as per DM green building regulation.
- Fire resistance: 4 hours
- Work sizes (length x width x height): 550 x 250 x 100 mm, 550 x 250 x 150 mm, 550x
250 x200 mm, 550 x 200 x 250 mm, 550 x 200 x 300 mm or as per approved design
drawings.
- Special shapes: As per design.
- Additional requirements: As clause 696.
 Thin layer mortar: To BS EN 998-2.
- Manufacturer: As recommended by the block manufacturer subject to the
Employer’s Representative's approval.
Product reference: Proprietary pre-mixed thin bed mortar suitable for autoclaved aerated
concrete blocks. Average thickness 3mm.
 Bond: Half lap stretcher.

380 INSULATED CONCRETE BLOCK WORK TO WALLS:


Location as per approved design drawing.

 Blocks: To BS EN 771-3 and Dubai Municipality advisory note no.007 and local order no.44.
- Manufacturer:(blocks shall be sourced from a manufacturer certified bythe local authorities
and should have COC issued by Dubai Municipality).
Product reference: Precast concrete masonry thermo blocks.
- Type: Polystyrene sandwiched block, where the polystyrene is integrally locked symmetrically
into the concrete structure resulting in excellent thermal insulation and bonding. Min thickness
of polystyrene insert shall be 60mm and density 25Kg/m3 and as approved by Dubai
Municipality and Dubai civil defense. Insulation shall conform to BS EN 13163.Thickness
of insulation shall be increased, if required to achieve the required U value and MEP
designrequirements.
- Compressive strength (minimum): Average 7.5 N/mm² and individual 6.0N/mm2.
- Density: Min 1,250 kg/m3.
- Work sizes (length x height x thickness): 400 x 200 x 200 mm, 400 x 250 x 200 mm or as
perapproved design drawings.
- Special shapes: None, but suitable blocks shall be used at the openings.
- Thermal transmission U value (max.): 0.35 W/m2 oC or less if required as per design or current
authority Green building regulation.

TESTING

410A COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MORTAR FOR EACH WALLING TYPE


 Testing authority: An approved independent laboratory.
 Test method: To BS 5628-1 and BS EN 1015-11.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 87 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Preliminary tests procedure: As follows:


- Specimen types: Six 40 x 40 x 100 mm prisms or 70.7 mm or 100 mm cubes prepared at
least six weeks before walling commences.
- Specimen testing: Half of specimens at 7 days. Remainder at 28 days.
Retarded mixes: Extend curing periods to include retardation period.
- Response to result: If mean compressive strength at 28 days is not within the range
givenbelow repeat tests with more suitable sand or next higher designation of mortar.
 Site tests procedure: As follows.
- Number of specimens: Six per 500m² of walling or per storey whichever the more frequent.
- Specimen types: As preliminary test, but prepared during construction.
- Specimen testing: Half of specimens at 7 days. Remainder at 28
days. Retarded mixes: Extend curing periods to include retardation
period.
 Required test mean compressive strength at 28 days (N/mm²): To be within the range indicated
in BS 5628-1 for each type of mortar.
 Results: Submit.

415A FRESH MORTAR CEMENT CONTENT


 Test method: BREMORTEST in accordance with Building Research Establishment
InformationPaper 8/89.
 Test specimens: Test mortar for the following wall types: All types of walling specified in
thissection and applicable to the project.
 Results: Submit.

WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

440 CONDITIONING OF CONCRETE BRICKS/ BLOCKS


 Autoclaved concrete bricks/ blocks delivered warm from manufacturing process: Do not use.
 Age of non-autoclaved concrete bricks/ blocks: Do not use until at least four weeks old.
 Avoidance of suction in concrete bricks/ blocks: Do not wet.
- Use of water retaining mortar admixture: Submit details.

460 MORTAR GROUPS


 Mix proportions: For a specified group select a mix design from the following:

Group 1 2 3 4

PC*: lime: sand with or without air entraining additive

1:0-0.25:3 1:0.5:4-5 1:1:5-6 1:2:8-9

Masonry cement: sand containing PC* and lime in approx ratio 1:1, and an air entraining additive
- 1:3 1:3.5-4 1:4.5

Masonry cement: sand containing PC* and inorganic materials other than lime and air
entrainingadditive
- 1:2.5-3.5 1:4-5 1:5.5-6.5

PC*: sand and air entraining additive


1:3 1:3-4 1:5-6 1:7-8

PC* = Portland cement

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 88 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Batching: Mix proportions by volume.


 Mortar type: Continuous throughout any one type of masonry work.

461 THIN BED MORTAR


 Manufacturer: As recommended by the block manufacturer subject to the
Employer’s
Representative's approval.
 Product reference: Proprietary pre-mixed thin bed mortar suitable for autoclaved aerate
concrete blocks.
 Binders: Hydraulic and organic.
 Filler: Precisely graded quartz.
 Additives: Plasticizing agents, adhesion promoting agents and water retaining agents.
 Consumption: 1.7 kg/m²/mm.
 Mixing: 12 to 14 litres of water for every 50 kg of mortar.
 Other requirements: Mix the mortar thoroughly with the recommended amount of water using
a high-speed mixer or a hand agitator for 3 to 5 minutes. Let the material stand for 5 minutes
priorto application.

500 LAYING GENERALLY


 Mortar joints: Fill vertical joints. Lay bricks, solid and cellular blocks on a full bed.
 Bond where not specified: Half lap stretcher.
 Vertical joints in facework: Even widths. Plumb at every fifth cross joint.

520 ACCURACY
 Courses: Level and true to line.
 Faces, angles and features: Plumb.
 Permissible deviations:
- Position in plan of any point in relation to the specified building reference line and/ or point at
the same level ± 10 mm.
- Straightness in any 5m length ± 5 mm.
- Verticality up to 3m height ± 10 mm.
- Verticality up to 7m height ± 14 mm.
- Overall thickness of walls ± 10 mm.
- Level of bed joints up to 5m
(Brick masonry) ± 11 mm.
- Level of bed joints up to 5 m
(Block masonry) ± 13 mm.

535 HEIGHT OF LIFTS IN WALLING USING CEMENT GAUGED OR HYDRAULIC LIME MORTAR
 Quoins and advance work: Rack back.
 Lift height (maximum): 1.2 m above any other part of work at any time.
 Daily lift height (maximum): 1.5 m for any one leaf.

540 HEIGHT OF LIFTS IN WALLING USING THIN JOINT MORTAR GLUE


 Quoins and advance work: Rack back.
 Lift height (maximum): 1.3 m above any other part of work at any time.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 89 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

585 LAYING CELLULAR BLOCKS


 Orientation: Cavities downwards

595 LINTELS
 Bearing: Ensure full length masonry units occur immediately under lintel ends.

610 SUPPORT OF EXISTING WORK


 Joint above inserted lintel or masonry: Fully consolidated with semidry mortar to support
existingstructure.

615 BRICKWORK TO RECEIVE ASPHALT DPC


 Substrate: Mortar bed finished flush, smooth and level.

635 JOINTING
 Profile: Consistent in appearance.

645 ACCESSIBLE JOINTS NOT EXPOSED TO VIEW


 Jointing: Struck flush as work proceeds.

665 POINTING GENERALLY


 Joint preparation: Remove debris and dampen surface.
 Mortar: As section Z21.
- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.
- Mix: 1:3-4 masonry cement: sand (mortar class M6)
- Additional requirements: None.
 Profile: Bucket handle.

671 FIRE STOPPING


 Avoidance of fire and smoked penetration: Fit tightly between cavity barriers and masonry.
Leave no gaps.

690 ADVERSE WEATHER


 General: Do not use frozen materials or lay on frozen surfaces.
 Air temperature requirements: Do not lay bricks/ blocks:
- In cement gauged mortars when at or below 3°C and falling or unless it is at least 1°and
rising.
- In hydraulic lime: sand mortars when at or below 5°C and falling or below 3°C and rising.
- In thin joint mortar glue when outside the limits set by the mortar manufacturer.
 Temperature of walling during curing: Above freezing until hardened.
 Newly erected walling: Protect at all times from:
- Rain and snow.
- Drying out too rapidly in hot conditions and in drying winds.

695 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BLOCKWORK IN GENERAL


 Works shall be designed and carried out in accordance with the requirements of CP12, BS
5628 and BS 8000.
 All design and/ or detailing of blockwork by the contractor shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for approval.
 Blocks shall be free from loose particles, dust, grease and oil.
 All block works below ground to be SRC solid block work.
 Cope, cut and split concrete masonry units with power, driven abrasive discs only.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 90 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Concrete blocks shall be wet before laying in thick bed mortar.


 First course of block work on concrete slabs to be of solid block.
 A damp proof course (DPC) shall be laid horizontally beneath the alignment of the block on
amortar bed for all external and internal walls located on the ground slab and all wet areas on
all floors. The DPC shall meet the requirements of section F30.
 The mortar is to be applied to the horizontal and vertical joints. Thickness of joints shall be 12mm
average.
 Joints shall cover the full width of the block.
 Over spilled mortar shall be removed when still wet.
 Block work around windows and doors to be of solid block work except for sills and lintels which
must be of R.C concrete. Cut block dimension of blocks around the openings shall not be less
than 200mm.
 Joint reinforcement to the requirements of section F30 shall be provided in the first two courses
and after that at every other course.
 At openings, the joint reinforcement shall be provided at two courses below the opening and
at two courses above the opening. This reinforcement shall be extended 600mm (minimum)
from either side of the opening.
 Concrete block walls shall be tied into existing masonry or columns by means of wall ties or wall
starters/ connectors to the requirements of section F30. Wall tie shall be fixed over the first layer
and thereafter on every second layer at 400mmc/c.
 Concrete block walls shall be tied to other concrete block walls by masonry bonding or by means
of flat strap connectors to the requirements of section F30 and placed at every joint.
 Concrete block walls shall be restrained at the top course by means of sliding anchors to
therequirements of section F30.
 Movement joints shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of BS 5628-3.
 Chasing in completed walls shall be carried out only after the blockwork has set hard and after
obtaining a written approval from the Employer’s Representative. Chasing shall be carried out
in accordance with the requirements of BS 5628-3 and BS 8000-3.
 Tops of non-load-bearing walls shall be filled to the requirements of section F30.
 Proprietary fixings suitable for concrete blockwork shall be used to fix wooden and metallic items
to concrete block walls.
 Metal panel cladding shall not be fixed directly to walls made of hollow concrete blocks. The
contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply and fixing of alternative fixing methods to
the Employer’s Representative's approval.
 Dry fixed stone cladding shall not be fixed directly to walls made of hollow concrete blocks. The
contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply and fixing of alternative fixing methods to
the Employer’s Representative's approval.
 Curing is required to be done after laying concrete block. After overnight drying, moisten the joints
with a fine spray water. The mortar joints on walls shall be moistened thrice a day for at least three
(03) days.

696 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THIN JOINT BLOCKWORK


 Works shall be designed and carried out in accordance with the requirements of CP12, BS
5628 and BS 8000.
 All design and/ or detailing of blockwork by the contractor shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for approval.
 Blocks shall not be used until at least four weeks old.
 Blocks shall be free from loose particles, dust, grease and oil.
 Autoclaved aerated concrete blocks do not need to be wet before laying in thin bed mortar.
However, in very hot weather, the surfaces receiving mortar shall be brushed with water
immediately prior to the application of the thin bed mortar.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 91 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 A damp proof course (DPC) shall be laid horizontally beneath the alignment of the block on
amortar bed for all external and internal walls and wet areas on all floors to the requirements
of section F30.
 The first course of blocks shall be laid in a thick bed mortar made of 1:3 cement: sand mixed with
water and a bonding agent at 10%. The thick bed mortar acts as a levelling pad for the first
course of blocks. Care must be taken at this stage to ensure that the blocks are plumb and level.
 Subsequent courses shall be laid in a thin bed mortar.
 The thin bed mortar is to be applied to the horizontal and vertical joints with a ribbed
profiletrowel.
 Joints shall be 3mm thick approximately when the blocks are laid.
 Joints shall cover the full width of the block.
 Over spilled mortar shall be removed when still wet.
 Joint reinforcement to the requirements of section F30 shall be provided in the first two courses
and after that at every other course.
 At openings, the joint reinforcement shall be provided at two courses below the opening and
at two courses above the opening. This reinforcement shall be extended 600 mm (minimum)
from either side of the opening.
 Autoclaved aerated concrete block walls shall be tied into existing masonry or columns by means
of wall ties or wall starters/ connectors to the requirements of section F30.
 Autoclaved aerated concrete block walls shall be tied to other autoclaved aerated concrete block
walls by masonry bonding or by means of flat strap connectors to the requirements of section
F30 and placed at every joint.
 Autoclaved aerated concrete block walls shall be restrained at the top course by means of sliding
anchors to the requirements of section F30.
 Movement joints shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of BS 5628-3.
 Chasing in completed walls shall be carried out only after the blockwork has set hard and after
obtaining a written approval from the Employer’s Representative. Chasing shall be carried out
in accordance with the requirements of BS 5628-3 and BS 8000-3.
 Tops of non-load-bearing walls shall be filled to the requirements of section F30.
 Proprietary fixings suitable for autoclaved aerated concrete blockwork shall be used to fix wooden
and metallic items to autoclaved aerated concrete block walls.
 Metal panel cladding shall not be fixed directly to walls made of aerated concrete block. The
contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply and fixing of alternative fixing methods to
the Employer’s Representative's approval.
 Dry fixed stone cladding shall not be fixed directly to walls made of aerated concrete blocks. The
contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply and fixing of alternative fixing methods to
the Employer’s Representative's approval.
 Curing is required to be done just once after laying autoclaved aerated concrete block. After
overnight drying, moisten the joints with a wet sponge or with fine spray water. The mortar joints
on walls shall be moistened thrice a day for two (02) days.

***End of Section F10***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 92 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION F30
ACCESSORIES/ SUNDRY ITEMS FOR BRICK/
BLOCK/ STONEWALLING

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 93 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

F30 ACCESSORIES/ SUNDRY ITEMS FOR BRICK/ BLOCK/ STONE WALLING

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with proprietary components,
accessories and items which are common to work in section: F10 Brick/ block walling.

REINFORCING/ FIXING ACCESSORIES


220 WALL TIES JUNCTIONS OF MASONRY WALLS WITH DISSIMILAR SURFACES
- Product reference: Complying with BS EN 845-1, masonry heavy duty type.
 Material/ finish: Hot dipped Galvanized steel. Galvanizing shall conform to BS EN 10346, Fe
Po2G quality coating.
 Sizes: L-shaped with pre-opened holes in short leg. 25mm wide and 2.5mm thick and
minimum length of long leg shall be 250mm.

241 WALL STARTERS/ CONNECTORS


- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative approval.
 Material/ finish: Hot dipped galvanized mild steel, Galvanizing conforms to BS EN 10346 Fe
Po2G quality coating, for internal walls and stainless steel conforms to BS EN 10088 grade
1.4301 for external walls
 Sizes: To suit the wall thickness.

250 SLIDING ANCHOR RESTRAINT SLIP TIES TO TOPS OF MASONRY WALLS


- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative approval.
 Material/ finish: Hot dipped galvanized mild steel, Galvanizing conforms to BS EN 10346 Fe
Po2G quality coating, for internal walls and stainless steel conforms to BS EN 10088 grade
1.4301 for external walls
 Sizes: To suit the wall thickness.

270 MESHWORK JOINT REINFORCEMENT FOR MASONRY WALLS


 Standard: To BS EN 845-3.
- Product reference: Expanded metal type to the Employer’s Representative approval.
 Type: Expanded metal with minimum intensity of 1.60 kg/m2.
 Material: Galvanized steel (BS EN 10244-2) for internal walls and austenitic stainless steel (BS
EN 10088-3) for external walls.
 Width: Approximately 40-50 mm less in width than wall or leaf.
 Placement: Lay on an even bed of mortar in a continuous strip with full laps at angles. Keep
back 20 mm from face of external work, 12 mm back from face of internal work a finish joint to
normal thickness.
- Lap length (minimum): 225 mm.

281 LATERAL RESTRAINT NON PROPRIETARY SLIP TIES FOR MOVEMENT JOINTS GNERALLY
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative approval.
 Material/ finish: Galvanised steel for internal walls and stainless steel for external walls
 Fixing centres: Alternate courses.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 94 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

291 SPECIAL FIXINGS GENERALLY


 Type: Submit proposals.
 Material: To BS 5628-3 clause 4.5.
 Performance: Of type, size, strength and number necessary to resist loads likely to occur during
the life of the building, and prevent lateral displacement or pulling apart of construction.
 Placement: Fill pockets with bedding mortar finished flush where exposed to view.

FLEXIBLE DAMP PROOF COURSES/ CAVITY TRAYS

310 DAMP PROOF COURSE - BITUMEN BASED


 Standard: To BS 6398.
- Class: B (fiber base).
 Product reference: Durable, high performance, elastomeric damp proof membrane using
polymer modified bitumen coated on to a tough fiber base, laminated with special polyolefin foil.
The elastomeric nature of the synthetically modified coating shall be a homogeneous mixture of
special bitumen and selected quality type SBS elastomer. Technical properties shall be:-
 Thickness (min): 3mm
 Width: To suit full wall thickness
 Weight(min): 3.4 Kg/m2

INSTALLATION OF DPCS/ CAVITY TRAYS

415 HORIZONTAL DPCS


 Placement: In continuous lengths on full even bed of fresh mortar, with 100 mm laps at joints
and full laps at angles.
 Width: At least full width of leaf unless otherwise specified. Edges of DPC not covered with
mortar or projecting into cavity.
 Overlying construction: Immediately cover with full even bed of mortar to receive next
masonry course.
 Overall finished joint thickness: As close to normal as practicable.

425 GROUND LEVEL DPCS


 Joint with damp proof membrane: Continuous and effectively sealed.

435 STEPPED DPCS IN EXTERNAL WALLS


 External walls on sloping ground: Install DPCs not less than 150 mm above adjoining finished
ground level.

JOINTS

610 MOVEMENT JOINTS WITH SEALANT GENERALLY


 Joint preparation and sealant application: As section Z22.
 Filler: Compressed wood fibreboard impregnated with bitumen emulsion or compressed sheet of
cork granules bonded with bitumen/ synthetic resins to achieve the specified fire resistance and/ or
sound insulation.
- Thickness: To match design width of joint.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 95 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Product reference: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s


Representative approval.
- Placement: Build in as work proceeds with no projections into cavities and to correct depth
to receive sealant system.
 Sealant:
- Designation: ISO 11600-F-20LM.
Product reference: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer subject to the
Employer’s Representative approval. Product shall comply with DM green building
regulation.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.

612 FIRE RESISTANT MOVEMENT JOINT WITH SEALANT GENERALLY


 Fire resistant filler: Nonflammable mineral wool(min 60 Kg/m3) or PE backing rod 35Kg/m3 or fire
stop foam as recommended by sealant manufacturer to achieve the required fire rating for the
system.
- Thickness: To match design width of joint.
- Fire resistance period: As per design/authority requirement for each wall.
- Manufacturer: Fujairah rock wool, fischer FZE, General Electric Co, Dow corning corp, Hilti Ltd,
Tremco or approved equivalent.
Product reference: Product shall be certified in accordance with BS476 part 20:87 and
approved by DCD.
- Placement: Build in as work proceeds with no projections into cavities and to correct depth
to receive sealant system.
 Sealant:
- Designation: ISO 11600-F-20LM.
- Manufacturer: fischer FZE, Dow corning corp, Hilti Ltd, Tremco, fischer or approved
equivalent.
- Product reference: Flexible, low VOC with movement capability +/- 25% and halogen and
solvent free and with excellent acoustic properties. Shall be suitable for porous and non-
porous substrates and the seal shall withstand movement in constant service throughout a
wide range of temperatures. Product shall be certified in accordance with BS476 part 20:87,
and approved by DCD
- Fire resistance period: As per design/authority requirement for each wall.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.

615 MOVEMENT JOINTS WITHOUT SEALANT GENERALLY


 Filler: Polyurethane foam.
- Thickness: To match design width of joint.
- Product reference: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s
Representative approval.
- Placement: Build in as work proceeds filling the joint but without projecting into cavities.

616 FIRE RESISTANT MOVEMENT JOINTS WITHOUT SEALANT GENERALLY


 Fire resistant filler:
- Thickness: To match design width of joint.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 96 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Fire resistance period: As indicated on the contract drawings for each wall.
- Manufacturer: fischer FZE, General Electric Co, Dow corning corp, Hilti Ltd, Tremco, fischer or
approved equivalent.
- Product reference: As recommended by the filler manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative approval. Product shall be certified in accordance with BS476 part 20:87, and
approved by DCD(Nonflammable mineral wool with min 60Kg/m3 density or fire stop foam)
- Placement: Compress and insert into place in open joint.
- Adhesives and accessories: Types recommended by filler manufacturer.

630 UNEXPOSED CONTRACTION JOINTS


 Formation: Close butt as work proceeds.

650 POINTING IN FLASHINGS


 Joint preparation: Free of debris and lightly wetted.
 Pointing mortar: As for adjacent walling.
 Placement: Fill joint and finish flush. 670
TOPS OF NON- L O A D BEARING WALLS
 Restraints: To BS 5628-3.
- Fixing: Secure to soffit.
 Joint filler: Compressed wood fibre board with bitumen emulsion or compressed sheet cork
granules bonded withe bitumen/ synthetic resins to achieve the specified fire resistance and/or
sound insulation.
- Placement: Full, no gaps.

PROPRIETARY SILLS/ LINTELS/ COPINGS/ DRESSINGS

735 PRECAST CONCRETE LINTELS


 Standard: To BS EN 845-2.
 Manufacturer: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s Representative
approval.
- Product reference: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s
Representative approval.
 Types: As indicated on the design drawings.
 Sizes: As indicated on the design drawings.
 Additional requirements: As indicated on the design drawings.
 Placement: Bed on mortar used for adjacent work.
- Bearing length (minimum): As indicated on the design drawings or 200mm UMO.

755 PREFABRICATED STEEL LINTELS


 Standard: To BS EN 845-2.
 Manufacturer: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s Representative
approval.
- Product reference: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s
Representative approval.
 Types: As indicated on the design drawings and shall be limited to opening width upto
600mm.
 Material/ finish: Galvanized steel (BS EN 10143, Z275) used for internal walls only. For external
side stain less steel (EN 10088) shall be used.
 Sizes: As indicated on the design drawings.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 97 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Additional requirements: As indicated on the design drawings.


 Placement: Bed on mortar used for adjacent work.
- Bearing length (minimum): As indicated on the design drawings or 200mm UMO.

MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

830 BUILDING IN FRAMES


 Preparation: Remove horns and provide support.
 Fixing cramps: Fully bed in mortar.

840 OPENINGS FOR FRAMES


 Formation: Use accurate, rigid templates to required size.

850 WALL PLATES


 Placement: On full bed of mortar to correct horizontal level.

***End of Section F30***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 98 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION G10
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 99 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

G10 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ INFORMATION

110 DESIGN AND DETAILING OF STEEL WORK BASED ON CONTRACTOR’S DESIGN


 Design concept: As per concept structural drawing and Employer’s requirement.
 Design standard: The structural steelwork shall be designed to AISC-2005, ASCE-2005, UBC97,
DDA regulation, DCD regulation or other applicable standard subject to authority approval.
 Supplementary requirements:
- As required to suit design requirements, base build specification and Employer’s requirements.
- Steel frame shall support all dead load, live load, solar panel loads( not less than 25 Kg/m2), man
safe/fall arrest and other loads as applicable.
- Bracing shall not hinder door/window opening or access or operation of the facility. X (vertical)
bracings are not permitted.
- All required structural supports (primary as well as secondary) for MEP pipes and equipment
shall be provided.
- All required frames for the dock leveler, dock shelter, wheel guides and overhead doors
including that for the future (if any) shall be provided.
- Access arrangements for roof from inside and outside shall be provided.
- Racking load and multitier shelving load shall be considered as applicable.
- Steel Bollards shall be provided as required for column and door protection.
- All required provisions for conveyor belts (conveyor belts by others) shall be provided.
 Contractor’s design: Design and detail connections to AISC-2005.
- Loading requirements: As per basic concept drawing, Employer’s requirement and authority
regulations.
 Design parameters: Bolt category as per detailed design.
 Fixings to foundations/ walls: As per detailed design and authority approval.
- Other requirements: Detailed design and fabrication drawings shall be prepared and
submitted to authority as well as Employer’s Representative along with structural calculations,
models and other requisite documents and approval shall be obtained by the specialist steel
contractor and main contractor.

115 DESIGN CONSTRAINTS - GENERAL


 Members forming bracing systems or girders of lattice construction: Unless detailed or instructed
otherwise, position so that their lines of action intersect at a point. X bracings not permitted.
 Bolts / Screws:
- Diameter (minimum): As per approved detailed design drawing.
- Number per connection (minimum): Two, unless otherwise indicated.
- Other requirements: Chose bolt dimensions to ensure that threads do not occur in shear plane
of joint.
 Punching of bolt holes: Not permitted.
 Welds: At least 6mm fillet.
 Other constraints: Specialist design shall be submitted to Authority and obtain approval.

123 DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS PREPARED BY CONTRACTOR


 Information required: All necessary data and design assumption etc. Also a detailed compliance
statement with the Employer’s Requirements shall be submitted.
 General arrangement drawings: Submit before preparing calculations. Clearly identify:
- Individual steel members.
- Conflicts with other work.
- Proposed changes to concept/Employer’s requirement.
 Member and joint calculations: Submit before preparing fabrication drawings.

125 SPECIFICATION STANDARD


 Standard: Comply with latest edition of National Structural Steelwork Specification (NSSS).
- Additional requirements: Shall comply with authority regulation.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 100 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Document availability: For the duration of the work, at fabrication shop and on site.

130 GENERAL STEEL SECTIONS AND PLATES FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS
 Standard: As per approved detailed design and authority approval.
 Grade: As per approved detailed design.
- Options: Submit proposal.
 Source: Obtain steel from a source accredited to a national or internationally accepted quality
standard.
 Other requirements: Mill certificates shall be submitted and testing shall be done as specified.

135 HOLLOW STEEL SECTIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS


 Standard: As per approved detailed design and authority approval.
 Grade: As per approved detailed design.
- Options: Submit proposal.
 Source: Obtain steel from a source accredited to a national or internationally accepted quality
standard.
 Other requirements: Mill certificates shall be submitted and testing shall be done as specified.

COLD FORMED MATERIALS

170 COLD-FORMED GALVANIZED STEEL PURLINS AND SIDE RAILS


 Manufacturer: Arabian profiles, TSSC, Kingspan, Baglaz Al Zafer metal industries or approved
equivalent.
- Product reference: As per approved detailed design.
 Material: Galvanized steel sheet to BS EN 10326, unless mentioned otherwise on drawing
- Thickness: As per approved detailed design.
 Designation: As per approved detailed design.

176 PROFILED SHEET FOR SHUTTERING/ COMPOSITE FLOOR SLABS


 Nature of permanent supports: Steel or as per approved detailed design
 Manufacturer: Contractor’s proposal subject to Employer’s Representative’s approval.
- Product reference: As per approved detailed design.
 Material: Galvanized steel sheet to BS EN 10326, unless mentioned otherwise on drawings.
- Thickness: As per approved detailed design drawings.
- Designation: As per approved detailed design drawings.
 Metal accessories: Provided by sheet manufacturer unless otherwise indicated:
- Finish: As for sheet.
 Seam stitching:
- Fixings/ centres: 4.8mm diameter self drilling screws at 800mm c/c.
 Coating applied by manufacturer: Galvanized.

178 FIXING PROFILE SHEET TO STEEL WORK


 End supports:
- Length of sheet bearing onto support (minimum): 50mm.
- Fixing type/ size: 6.3mm diameter stainless steel self drilling screws.
 Coating applied by manufacturer: Cadmium plated.
 Location: in trough of sheet.
- Number/ centers of fixings: Every trough at end of sheet and alternate troughs at internal
supports.
 Distance from end of sheet (minimum): 20mm.
 Distance from edge of support (minimum): 20mm.
 Side supports:
- Width of sheet bearing onto support (minimum): 50mm
- Fixing type/ size: 6.3mm diameter stainless steel self drilling screws.
 Coating applied by manufacturer: Cadmium plated
- Centers of fixings (maximum): 600mm.
 Distance from edge of sheet (minimum): 20mm
 Distance from edge of support (minimum): 50mm

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 101 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Other requirements: Install temporary supports before fixing sheets to permanent supports.

FABRICATION

180 NOTIFICATION OF COMMENCEMENT


 Notice: Give notice before fabrication is due to start.
 Period of notice (minimum): Three working days.

190 MARKING
 Identifying and recording materials and components: Submit details of proposed methods.
 Location of marks:
- Generally: Visible for checking after erection.
- Weathering steel: On surfaces not exposed to open view in the completed work.
 Steel to be blast cleaned, pickled, and metal sprayed or galvanized: Marked so that subsequent
treatment cannot obliterate the marking.

195 HARD STAMPING


Usage: Not permitted.

200 FAYING SURFACES FOR FRICTION GRIP CONNECTIONS


 Location: As per approved detailed design drawings
 Steel 25 mm thick or over: Check faying surfaces for deformities that may reduce slip factor to
below design limit.
- Remedial measures: Submit proposals.
 Preparation/ treatment: To BS 5950-1.

210 END CONNECTIONS


 Angle cleats: Project 10 mm beyond ends of simply supported members.

215 HOLLOW SECTIONS


 Insides of sections: Debris and moisture removed before sealing ends and openings.

220 ACCESS/ VENTILATION HOLES IN BASE PLATES


 Base plates larger than 1 m²: Make 25 mm diameter holes as necessary for pressure grouting,
escape of entrapped air or direct compaction of filling/ bedding material.

225 STEELWORK TO BE GALVANIZED


 Cutting, drilling and shop welding: Complete before galvanizing.
 Vent and drain holes: Provide as necessary.
- Locations: Submit proposals.
 Sealing: Not required.

235 SHOP INSPECTION


 Give notice: For raw material, sampling, weld testing, after completion of fabrication, after grit
blast, after under coat, intermediate coat, final coat and final inspection before delivery.
 Period of notice (minimum): 12 hrs.

240 TRIAL SHOP ASSEMBLY


 Component: Main frames
 Give notice: Before commencing trial assembly.
 Period of notice (minimum): 24 hours

WELDING

250 SPECIAL WELDING PROCEDURES


 Location: As shown in design drawing (if any).
 Requirement: submit procedure

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 102 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

255 SITE WELDING


 Usage: Permitted only where approved in writing by Employer’s Representative.
 Working conditions: Suitable and safe. Do not weld when surfaces are wet or when ambient
temperature is below 0°C.

270 ADDITIONAL WELDS


 Welds (including tack welds) not indicated on drawings: Not permitted without approval.

290 FINISHED WELDS


 Finished welds: Carefully dressed to remove slag without deforming surface of weld.

BOLT ASSEMBLIES

302 NON-PRELOADED BOLT ASSEMBLIES


 Designation: As per approved detailed design
- Threading: To suit design criteria.
 Nuts and washers: To suit grade of bolt, as NSSS, clause 2.3.
 Coating applied by manufacturer: As per approved detailed design.
 Other requirements: Use spring washers and ensure tightness with torque wrench.

303 PRELOADED BOLT ASSEMBLIES


 Designation: As per detailed design
 Coating applied by manufacturer: As per design.

305 PROPRIETARY ANCHORS


 Manufacturer: Contractor to propose to suite design requirement.
- Product reference: To Employer’s Representative’s selection
 Anchor type: Bonded anchor.
 Material: Carbon steel, if not mentioned otherwise in design drawing.

315 HOLDING DOWN SYSTEMS


 Bolts:
- Standard: Hexagonal headed to BS 7419
- Type: Round neck.
- Grade: as per design
- Diameter: As shown on approved detailed design drawings.
- Coating: Hot dipped galvanized to 305 gm/m2
 Bolt boxes: None, bolt cast solidly into concrete.
 Anchorage: As detailed on approved detailed design drawing.
 Other requirements: Submit technical data, samples and arrange for testing of the bolts. Provide
double nuts and single washer. Keep flat welded to underside of anchorage to prevent bolt
rotation during tightening. Exposed bolt portion shall be suitably covered to conceal the same to suit
the location of usage.

335 SPRING WASHERS


Standard: To BS 4464.

370 GALVANIZED COATING TO BOLT ASSEMBLIES


 Standard: To BS 7371-6.
 Galvanizing: Applied by fastener manufacturer. Passivated and lubricated if no additional coatings
are specified. Nuts tapped after galvanizing.
Use/location: Shop and site connections.

380 ZINC PLATED FINISH TO BOLT ASSEMBLIES


 Standard: To BS EN ISO 4042.
- Designation: As shown on design drawing.
 Zinc plating: Applied by fastener manufacturer. Clear passivated if no additional coatings are
specified. Nuts tapped after plating.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 103 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Use/ location: Shop and site connections.


390 SEALED HOLLOW SECTIONS
 Holes: Sealed to prevent access of moisture.
Method of sealing: Submit proposals.

ERECTION

405 OUTLINE METHOD OF ERECTION


 Generally in accordance with the approved method statement and authority guide lines.
 Authority inspection and approval for erected steel work shall be obtained prior to start installingthe
false ceiling works.

410 PRE-ERECTION CHECKS


 Scope: At least 7 days before proposed erection start date, check the following:
- Foundations and other structures to which steelwork will be attached: Accuracy of setting
out.
- Holding down bolts: Position, protruding length, slackness and condition.
 Inaccuracies and defects: Report without delay.
Permission to commence erection: Obtain.

420 SETTING OUT


 Permissible deviations: In addition to the requirements of the NSSS, comply with the following:
Type of dimension and location Permissible Deviation
Between Column + 5mm

425 MODIFICATIONS
 Steelwork: Do not modify without approval.
Temporary fabrication/ erection attachments: Remove once the base plate grouting is completed.

432 TEMPORARY SUPPORT


 Permanent bracing system:
- Vertical: As per design.
- Horizontal: As per design.
 Temporary bracing/ restraints: Provide as necessary until permanent bracing system is complete
and sufficiently mature to carry loads and all connections have been made to the permanent
system.
 Elements to be supported: All main Columns and frames
 Forces and moments in temporary supports: Make an independent assessment by Contractor.

440 COLUMN BASES


 Levels: Adjust using steel shims or folding wedges no larger than necessary.
 Location of shims/ wedges: Position symmetrically around perimeter of base plate. Do not use a
single central pack.
 Give notice: If space beneath any column base is outside specified limits for bedding thickness.
 Accuracy of erection: Check, and correct errors before filling and bedding beneath bases and
carrying out other adjacent work.

443 PROPRIETARY FILLING/ BEDDING OF COLUMN BASES


 Bedding thickness range: 50mm or as per approved design.
 Preparation: Concrete surfaces scarified to provide a good mechanical key.
 Bolt pockets and spaces beneath base plates: Completely filled with non shrink cementitious
grout with 28 days compressive strength > 55N/mm2.
 Product: Conbextra GP from Fosroc or approved equivalent from BASF, Emirates speciality, Euro
build.

445 MOVEMENT JOINTS


 Joint type: Submit proposals
- Requirements: As per design requirement.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 104 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Appearance and fit: Bolts centered in slotted holes. Joints free to move.
447 BONDED ANCHORS
 Holes: Clean and free from dust at time of installing anchor.
 Permeable sleeves: Use in conditions where otherwise the loss of bonding agent would be
unacceptably high.
 Other requirements: None

TESTING

465 TESTING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTIONS AND BOLTS


 Testing: Arrange the following tests. Prepare test pieces as necessary.
 Test: To verify mechanical properties (tensile test, elongation, dimension, weight per meter) and
Chemical properties (minimum four elements) of Structural Steel members and bolts.
- Testing authority: Independent testing agency approved by the Authority and Employer’s
Representative.
- Frequency/ Number: At least one sample from each type of sections and bolts for the same
mill test certificates. Further test required if mill certificate is different.
- Level of acceptability: In accordance with relevant BS and ASTM standards.
- Other requirements: Comply with DM/DDA regulations. Sample to be selected by
Employer’s Representative.
 Test and examination results: Submit two copies.

466 TESTING OF WELDS


 Testing: Arrange the following tests. Prepare test pieces as necessary.
 Test: Visual examination, Ultrasonic scanning and magnetic particle inspection.
- Testing authority: Independent testing agency approved by the authority and Employer’s
Representative.
- Frequency/ Number: 100% (hundred) visual examination on all welded joints. 100%
(hundred) ultrasonic scanning of all full strength butt welds. 25% (twenty five) MPI on all fillet
welds.
- Level of acceptability: As per the recommendation of testing agency subject to Employer’s
Representative’s approval.
- Other requirements: Provide 12 hrs notice for witnessing the test.
 Test and examination results: Submit two copies immediately when they are available.

467 TESTING OF WELDERS


 Welder’s qualification: Submit welder’s qualification.
 Testing Authority: Independent testing agency
 Other Requirements: Only certified welder shall be engaged on the Works.

475 PRODUCTS
Steel: Submit test certificates.

PROTECTIVE COATINGS

521 ALTERNATIVE MANUFACTURERS


 Short list of manufacturers: Obtain coating materials from one only of the following: M/s Jotun,
Hempel, Sigma, and Al Gurg paints or approved equivalent.
 Selected manufacturer: Submit details before ordering materials.

523 COMPATIBILITY OF SHOP PRIMER WITH SITE APPLIED INTUMESCENT COATING


 Intumescent coating: Where applicable as per design or required as per authority regulation or as
per fire safety consultant report.
 Primer: Compatible with coating under general and fire conditions.
 Manufacturer's recommendations and test evidence: Submit before priming. Include fire test data
to BS 476-20 and -21, or BS EN 1363-1 and BS EN 1365-2, -3, and/or -4 as appropriate.

535 INSPECTION OF COATING WORK

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 105 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Work in progress: Permit coating manufacturer to inspect and take samples of products.
 Notice: Give notice of dates for:
- Start of surface preparation and coating.
- Coated members or components leaving the works.
 Period of notice (minimum): 2 working days.

PROTECTIVE COATING SYSTEMS

610 GALVANIZING TO CHEMICALLY CLEANED STEEL


 Use/ location: Where shown on drawing.
 Preparation: Chemical cleaning.
 Galvanizing: To BS EN ISO 1461.
 Minimum mean coating thickness: 85 micrometers.

620 GALVANIZING TO BLAST CLEANED STEEL


 Use/ location: Where shown on drawing.
 Preparation: Blast cleaning to BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade Sa2½ using chilled angular
iron grit grade G24 to give a coarse surface profile, followed by chemical cleaning.
 Galvanizing: To BS EN ISO 1461.
 Minimum mean coating thickness: 140 micrometers.

630 GALVANIZING PLUS SITE APPLIED EPOXY PRIMER AND POLYURETHANE FINISH
 Use/ location: Where shown on drawing.
 Shop preparation: As per paint manufacturer recommendation.
 Galvanizing: To BS EN ISO 1461.
- Minimum mean coating thickness: 25 micrometers.
 Paint manufacturer: M/s Jotun, Hempel, Sigma, and Al Gurg paints or approved equivalents.
 Pretreatment primer: As per paint manufacturer recommendation.
 Site intermediate coat: Epoxy based MIO.
- Dry film thickness: As recommended by paint manufacturer, subject to minimum 100
microns.
 Site top coat: Polyurethane
- Dry film thickness: As recommended by paint manufacturer subject to minimum 40 microns.
- Color: To Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Special requirements: Stripe intermediate coat to external angles.

640 SHOP PAINTING WITH 2 PACK CHEMICAL RESISTANT SYSTEM WITH TOTAL 3 COATS
(SK3 ofBS5493)
 Use/ location: All Structural steel works(except galvanized purlins and girts) where fire proofing is
not required
 Paint manufacturer: M/s Jotun, Hempel, Sigma, and Al Gurg paints or approved equivalent.
 Shop preparation:
- Generally: Blast cleaning to BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade Sa 2½
- Welds/ edges/ areas with surface imperfections: To BS EN ISO 8501-3, preparation grade P3.
 Shop primer: Zinc Phosphate.
- Dry film thickness: 75 micrometers.
 Shop intermediate coat: Epoxy based MIO
- Dry film thickness: 145 micrometers.
 Shop top coat: Polyurethane
- Dry film thickness: 50 micrometers.
- Colour: As per Employer’s Representative’s approval
 Special requirements: Total DFT shall not be less than 270 micrometers. Coating system shall
comply with Green building regulations. Coating system shall have a life expectancy of minimum 10
years.

645 SHOP PAINTING WITH PRIMER AND SITE/SHOP PAINTING WITH FIRE PROOF COATING
 Use/ location: Structural steel works where fire proofing is required as per design or fire safety
consultant report or as per authority regulation.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 106 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 For detail please refer to Section M61.

PREPARATION FOR PAINTING

710 OFFSITE PREPARATION AND PAINTING


 Working area: Covered and properly lit, heated and ventilated.
 Sequence of working: Select from the following and submit proposals:
- Fabricate, blast clean, prime.
- Blast clean, fabricate, remove flash rust with a light overall sweep blast, prime.
- Blast clean, apply weldable prefabrication primer, fabricate, prime.
 Prefabrication primer (option 3): Type recommended by manufacturer of post fabrication primer.
- Thickness of post fabrication primer coat: May be reduced if and as recommended by
manufacturer.
 Surfaces inaccessible after assembly: Apply full treatment and coating system including, if
necessary, local application of site coatings.

740 BOLTED JOINTS (OTHER THAN FRICTION GRIP JOINTS)


 Steelwork to be shop painted: Apply full shop specification to joint faces.
 Steelwork to be erected with mill finish then site painted: Before erection, prepare and prime
joint faces and allow to dry.
 Bolted joints in externally exposed steelwork:
- Immediately before assembling, apply a further coat of primer and bring surfaces together
while still wet.
- After assembling and before applying site coatings, seal crevices to bolts and joint perimeters
with a compatible sealant.

745 FAYING SURFACES OF FRICTION GRIP JOINTS


 Protection: Immediately after blast cleaning and before coating surrounding areas, mask faying
surfaces to protect from contamination and deterioration.
- Paint systems comprising more than one coat: Step each coat 30 mm back from edge of
preceding coat and away from masked areas.
 Removal of protection: Immediately before bolting, remove masking. Check faying surfaces are
free from adhesive. Clean with solvent if necessary.

750 FRICTION GRIP JOINTS IN SHOP PAINTED STEELWORK


 Post assembly treatment of bolts and surrounding areas: After final tightening of bolts and
inspection of joints:
- Thoroughly degrease and clean uncoated areas including bolts.
- Prime without delay.
- Apply full shop coating specification.
 Direct tension indicators: Seal measuring gap to prevent ingress of moisture.

760 GALVANIZED FASTENERS


 Treatment: After steelwork erection and before applying site coatings, thoroughly degrease and
clean. Etch prime.

765 SITE PREPARATION OF SHOP PAINTED STEELWORK


 Preparation: Touch in shop coats, as necessary, and allow to dry. Before applying site coats (when
specified), abrade surfaces or wash down or both, as recommended by paint manufacturer.

770 SITE PREPARATION OF GALVANIZED SURFACES FOR PAINTING


 Preparation: Thoroughly degrease. Remove white corrosion products. Wash off and allow to dry
before applying etching wash or primer.

PAINTING

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 107 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

810 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS


 General requirements prior to starting coating work:
- Surfaces: Unaffected by moisture or frost.
- Steel temperature: At least 3°C above dew point, with conditions stable or improving, and
not high enough to cause blistering or wrinkling of the coating.
 Relative humidity: Below 85%.

815 COATINGS
 Surfaces to be coated: Clean, dust free and suitably dry. Previous coats to be adequately cured.
 Multiple coats of same material: Use different tints to assist checking of complete coverage.
 Penultimate coat: Colour recommended by paint manufacturer to suit top coat colour.
 Finish required: Smooth and even, of uniform thickness and colour, free from defects.

820 FILM THICKNESS

 Wet film thickness: During application, check thickness of each coat with a wheel or comb gauge
used in accordance with BS EN ISO 2808.
 Accumulated dry film thickness: After each coat has dried, check total accumulated film thickness.
- Method: Magnetic or electromagnetic meter.
- Number and position of measurements: As directed.
- Validation: Measurements to be independently witnessed.
- Meter calibration: Check against standard shims and recalibrate regularly against a smooth
steel reference plate.
 Average dry film thickness:
- At least specified thickness over any square metre.
- No reading to be less than 75% of specified thickness.
 Top coat dry film thickness: Sufficient to give an even, solid, opaque appearance.

825 STRIPE COAT


 External angles, nuts, bolt heads, rough weld seams, and areas difficult to coat: Apply an additional
stripe coat of primer and under coat.

***End of Section G10***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 108 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION H11
CURTAIN WALLING

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 109 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

H11 CURTAIN WALLING

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with proprietary (standard or
nonstandard) nonloadbearing walls of glass and other sheet and panel materials supported on
framing, fixed to a supporting structure, designed and fixed as an integrated assembly complete
with opening lights, doors, ventilators, etc.

TENDERING

10A INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH TENDER

 Submit the following curtain walling particulars:


- Typical plan, section and elevation drawings at suitable scales.
- Certification, technical information and calculations demonstrating compliance with
specification of proposed curtain walling including all proposed products and finishes.
- Proposals for connections to and support from the building structure and building
components.
- Proposals for amendments to primary supporting structure and for secondary supporting
structure additional to that shown on preliminary design drawings.
- Examples of standard documentation from which project quality plan will be prepared.
- Preliminary fabrication and installation method statements and programme.
- Schedule of products and finishes with a design life expectancy not less than that specified in
clause 440, with proposals for frequencies and methods of replacement.
- Proposals for replacing damaged or failed products.

TYPES OF CURTAIN WALLING

112 CURTAIN WALLING SYSTEM (Refer to drawings for location)

 Supporting structure: As per approved detailed design drawing.


 Curtain walling system: Structural double glazing system supported with super durable powder
coated aluminium mullions and stainless steel fixing. The curtain walling system shall include all
products, fixings, fire and smoke seals between fire compartments and all necessary interfaces to
complete the fabrication and installation of the work.
 Framing members: Thermally improved curtain wall series from Alumill, US Aluminium,
Reyner’s or approved equivalent.
 Finish: Super Durable Powder coated.
 Vision area: 24mm thick hermetically sealed double glazed unit comprising of 6mm thick body
tinted glass on outer face; 12mm cavity and 6mm thick clear float glass in inside face with ‘Low
–E coating on surface. Properties of glass shall comply with DM/DS green building regulation,
Employer’s requirement and MEP design requirement. In any case the thermal transmission
coefficient U value shall not exceed 1.8 W/m2 K, shading coefficient shall not exceed 0.30 and
minimum light transmittance shall be 0.35. Toughened glass shall be used where required.
 Spandrel area:
- Type: Shadow box type consisting of monolithic glass (or other finish as approved), 50mm
(min.) air space, 1.5mm electro-galvanized steel back pan with super durable powder
coating finish and 50mm thick foil faced mineral wool insulation.
- Glazing: 24mm thick hermetically sealed double glazed unit comprising of 6mm thick body tinted
glass on outer face; 12mm cavity and 6mm thick clear float glass in inside face with‘Low –E
coating on surface. Properties of glass shall comply with DM/DS green building regulation,
Employer’s requirement and MEP design requirement. In any case the thermaltransmission
coefficient U value shall not exceed 1.8 W/m2 K, shading coefficient shall not exceed 0.30 and
minimum light transmittance shall be 0.35. Toughened glass shall be used where required.
- Thermal insulation: As clause 780.
 Other requirements:
- The curtain wail shall incorporate the principle of drain joint pressure equalisation.
- The application of structural silicone shall be carried out in a controlled environment.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 110 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Curtain walling system shall comply with Dubai Municipality circular No#215 concerning fire
protection and prohibited use of combustible material in building facades.
- Contractor shall use only Civil Defense approved products/systems in the project and shallbe
responsible for obtaining DCD approval for all site installations. Also contractor shall be
responsible for arranging inspection by DCD approved House of Expertise on site
installation at 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 100% and submit reports for each stage for
Civil Defense submission.

- Provide all fins, accessories, louvres, caps, etc. as required.


- Where indicated on the drawings, provide doors (sliding or hinged) matching the curtain
wall in appearance and achieving the performance requirements indicated in other clauses of
this specification.
- Where indicated on the drawings, provide windows (sliding or hinged) matching the
curtain wall in appearance and achieving the performance requirements indicated in other
clauses of this specification.
- Where provided, doors and windows shall be provided with multi-point locking
mechanisms.
- Where provided, hinged doors and windows shall be provided with stainless steel friction
hinges.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK

210 DESIGN

 Curtain walling and associated features: Complete the detailed design. Submit before
commencement of fabrication.
 Related works: Coordinate in the detailed design.

220 SPECIFICATION

 Compliance standard: The Centre for Window and Cladding Technology (CWCT) 'Standard for
curtain walling'.
 Reference information: For the duration of the contract, keep a copy of the CWCT 'Standard for
curtain walling' at the design office, workshop and on site.

221 WARRANTIES

 Submit a written warranty in a form acceptable to the Employer, jointly signed by the main
contractor and the specialist contractor for the work, warranting against defective materials,
products, workmanship, watertightness, design, performance and glass breakage, due to
defective engineering, fabrication and installation, for a period of ten (10) years following thedate
of Taking over of the Works.
 The ten (10) years warranty shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
- Complete watertightness and airtightness of the work within the specified tolerances.
- Structural soundness and freedom from distortion within the elastic deflection limits
specified.
- Assurance against breakage or "popping" of the glass panels and snap-on of mullion
covers from frames due to design wind loads, expansion or contraction movements, or
structural loading.
- Guarantees that the metal finish will not crack, peel, pit, corrode, or dis-colour.
- Freedom from deterioration, oxidation or dislocation due to sunlight and weather
conditions of all sealants and gaskets.
- Freedom from rattles, wind whistles, and noise due to thermal and structural movements
and wind pressure for the entire installation.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 111 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

223 QUALITY ASSURANCE

 Work shall be engineered by licensed professional engineers.


 Submittals, proposals, samples, shop drawings, calculations, certifications, proposed
substitutions shall bear the seal and signature of licensed professional engineers and shall be
submitted to the Employer’s Representative for approval.
 Fabrication and installation of work shall be inspected and certified by licensed professional
engineers.

224 SOURCES

 The following items shall originate from one manufacturer and their respective supply sources
only:
- Automatic doors, entrance screens, doors and windows: All metal components.
- Finishes: One manufacturer authorised applicator for all the work herein (unless otherwise
permitted by the Employer’s Representative).
- Glazing: As specified.
 The plants shall have the required capacity, equipment and work force to supply the specified
work and quality.

230A INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN STAGE

 Submit the following curtain walling particulars:


- A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment.
- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from the curtain walling to the structure.
- Proposed fixing anchor details relevant to structural design and construction.
- A detailed testing programme in compliance with the Main Contract master programme.
- A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with the Main Contract
master programme.
- Proposals to support outstanding applications for Building Regulation consents or
relaxations.

231 SUBMITTALS

 Product data:
- Submit the manufacturer's specifications, fabrication requirements, and installation
instructions, with amendments to fulfill the requirements of this section of the
specifications.
- Include erection and glazing details.
- Furnish data clearly describing re-glazing techniques.
- Furnish maintenance and cleaning instructions.
 Calculations:
- Submit calculations (in metric), showing the following:
a. Design load assumptions.
b. Detailed engineering of mullions.
c. Detailed engineering of anchorage hardware, clip angles, washers, anchor bolts, welds,
torque pressures.
d. Materials proposed and their allowable sheer and bending stresses.
e. Deflections, expansions and contractions.
- Prepare the calculations in a clear, comprehensive manner to permit easy review.
- All calculations shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant British Standards.
 Shop drawings
 Schedules
 Samples

235 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF TESTING OR

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 112 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

FABRICATION OF CURTAIN WALLING

 Submit the following curtain walling particulars:

- Detailed drawings to fully describe fabrication and installation.


- Detailed calculations to prove compliance with design/ performance requirements.
- Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements.
- Certification for incorporated components manufactured by others confirming their
suitability for proposed locations in the curtain walling.
- Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.
- Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of products.

240 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF STRUCTURAL


SEALANT GLAZING

 Submit structural bonding sealant manufacturer's project specific approval for:


- Compatibility and adhesion of products and finishes.
- Full details of structural sealant glazing design.
- Structural sealant dimensions.
- Project specific sealant application method statement.

250 PRODUCT SAMPLES

 General: Before commencing detailed design, submit labeled samples of:


- Glass: 300 x 300mm of each type.
- Extrusions: 300mm long.
- Sheets: 300 x 300mm of each type.
- Sealants: 150mm bead strips applied to a metal sheet showing colours.
- Gaskets and tapes: 150mm long section of each type.
- Fasteners: All types.

270 FABRICATION SAMPLES

 General: During detailed design, submit samples of: All components specified in this section and
other related sections.
- Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.

280 MOCK-UP

 General: Construct during detailed design work in an approved location. Obtain approval of
appearance before proceeding. Retain undisturbed until completion of curtain walling
installation.

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

305 CWCT 'STANDARD FOR CURTAIN WALLING’

 General: Comply with Section 2 - Performance Criteria unless specified or agreed otherwise.
 Project performance requirements specified in this subsection: Read in conjunction with CWCT
performance criteria.

312A INTEGRITY

 Requirement: The curtain walling must resist wind loads, dead loads and design live loads, and
accommodate deflections and movements without damage.
 Temporary imposed loads: contractor to ascertain.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 113 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

320 DEFLECTION UNDER DEAD LOADS

 Requirement: Framing members parallel to the curtain walling plane must not:

- Reduce glass bite to less than 75% of design dimension.


- Reduce edge clearance to less than 3 mm between members and immediately adjacent
glazing units, panel/ facing units or other fixed units.
- Reduce clearance to less than 2 mm between members and movable components such as
doors and windows.

330A GENERAL MOVEMENT

 Requirement: Curtain walling must accommodate anticipated building movements as follows:


- Simply supported or continuous spans: Span/500 but not more than 20 mm.
- Cantilever spans: Span/250 but not more than 20 mm. These deflections apply after
installation of the curtain walling system and are due to the effects of live load and creep
under dead load.
 Curtain walling design and detailing shall make allowances for the anticipated movements ofthe
structure as given on the structural contract drawings or required as per design.

332 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

 The profiles used shall be of the required appearance to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
 All glass units of each type shall be the same and shall have a consistent, uniform colour and
appearance.
 Installed glass components shall be free of oil canning and pillowing.
 Exposed metal components shall be of uniform colour, sheen and appearance, within
components and from component to component and shall match approved samples and
mock-ups.
 All extruded flat surfaces shall conform to a flatness of 0.1mm in 25mm.
 All panel flat surfaces shall conform to a flatness of 0.5mm in 500mm.
 Grain and rolling direction of unpainted metal sheets and plates when installed on the building faces
shall run in the same direction.
 Grain and rolling direction of unpainted braked formed trims, sills and reveals and the
extruded direction of unpainted metal reveals, trims, sills, when installed on the building faces shall
run in the same direction.
 Engineer the design and installation of glass units so that each glass unit can be removed
without removing the adjacent glass units and metal panels.
 Engineer and install metal panels so that each panel can be removed without removing the
adjacent metal panels and glass units.
 Accurately size mullions at intersecting joints to obtain minimal joints just wide enough to permit
thermal expansion and contractions so no damages and distortions to the work occur due to
thermally induced movements.
 Conceal securement devices. Should it be demonstrated satisfactorily to the
 Employer’s Representative's approval of some exposed securement devices are necessary, they
shall be of the same finish and colour as the members in which they occur.
 Provide a continuous fire and smoke seal at junctions between edges of suspended concrete
slabs and building envelope to prevent passage of fire and smoke from floor to floor and from
floor to roof as well as between compartments of the same floor.
 Ensure components and assemblies drain to building exterior.
 Ensure components are designed, fabricated and installed to prevent build-up of sand within the
cladding cavities and glazing pockets which could cause blockages to air pressure
equalization and to drainage of water.
 Where water drains to the outside, discharges of water shall not cause noticeable staining on
the cladding.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 114 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 No mill finish at edges of aluminium shall be visible when the installation is complete, unless
approved by the Employer’s Representative.
 The depth of structural mullion sections should be maintained constant wherever possible. Any
variations shall be agreed with the Employer’s Representative in advance.

342 AIR PERMEABILITY

- Requirement: Permissible air leakages rates of 1.5 m3/hr/m2 for fixed lights and 2.0
m3/hr/lin. m for opening lights must not be exceeded when the curtain walling is subjected to
the peak test pressure.

350 WATER PENETRATION

Requirement: Moisture must not penetrate to internal surfaces or into cavities not designed to be
wetted when the curtain walling is subjected to a peak positive test pressure 600 Pascal.

360 WIND RESISTANCE/ SERVICEABILITY

 Glazed units in framing member tests must have all edges supported.

361 GLAZING

 All glazing in areas where there is a risk of human impact must conform to BS 6262.
 Engineer the glazing system to allow for characteristics of framing and effects of connections,
sealant and frame connections.
 Pressure plates and other glass retaining devices shall apply uniform, continuous pressure to
glass to prevent the following:
- Distortion, oil canning and pillowing of glass.
- Pressure points on the glass which could contribute to stress breakage.
 Metal in direct contact with glass shall not be permitted.
 Insulating glass units must not have their seals in contact with water and shall be set within the
system to ensure adequate ventilation.

362 THERMAL MOVEMENT

 The stainless steel/aluminium framework and glazing assemblies shall be constructed and
installed with sufficient tolerance and, where necessary, expansion joints incorporated within the
couplings, to provide for expansion and contraction as will be caused by the climatic
conditions and temperature changes, winter to summer, day to night, without buckling,
distortion of joints, damage to the sealants or other detrimental effects over the ambient
temperature range of 12°C to 50°C and the surface temperature range of 12°C to 60°C.
 The design shall accommodate, noiselessly, the thermal movement within the combination
units and the curtain walling without distortion. Details shall be prepared based upon the
dimensions at 22°C and take account of the ambient temperatures at the time of assembly and
installation.

380 SOLAR AND LIGHT CONTROL

 Glass panes/ units in curtain walling: Must have:


- Total solar energy transmission of normal incident solar radiation (maximum): As per
DM/DS latest green building regulation (as a minimum standard) and also to suit HVAC
design requirements.
- Total light transmission (minimum): As per DM/DS latest green building regulation(as a
minimum standard) and also to suit HVAC design requirements

381 UV AND HEAT RESISTANCE

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 115 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 All materials exposed to atmospheric heat and exposed to sunlight including materials
exposed through glass shall be formulated not to lose properties due to exposure to heat and
due to exposure to ultra-violet radiation.

385 THERMAL STRESS IN GLAZING

 Glass panes/ units: Must have adequate resistance to thermal stress generated by orientation,
shading, solar control and construction.

411 ACOUSTIC PROPERTIES

 Airborne sound insulation:

The complete curtain walling construction including glazing and opaque areas, shall provide the
following minimum sound reduction indices (in dB) when measured in a laboratory
complying with EN ISO 140-3. Any openable doors or windows are to be shut during testing. A
sample size of at least 10m2 shall be used and shall include the interface with the floor
junction.

Octave Band Centre Frequency Sound reduction indices (minimum)


125 Hz 20 dB
250 Hz 23 dB
500 Hz 20 dB
1000 Hz 20 dB
2000 Hz 21dB
4000Hz 19dB

430 FIRE STOPPING

 Locations: At junctions of curtain walling with compartment walls and floors.


 Materials and methods of fixing: To ensure fire resistance not less than that specified for
compartment walls and floors.

435 OPENING LIGHTS

 Fasteners: Concealed multipoint, operated by an internal handle.


 Integral locks: To be provided.

440 DESIGN LIFE OF CURTAIN WALLING

 Duration (minimum): 50 years.


 Maintenance: Submit a schedule for maintenance and for replacement of secondary
components.

450 SAFETY

 Finished surfaces of curtain walling: Accessible internal and external areas must not:
- Have irregularities capable of inflicting personal injury.
- Release irritant or staining substances.

460 STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING REQUIREMENTS

 Structural sealant glazing units: Installable, removable and replaceable without site application of
structural bonding sealant.
 Structural sealant glazing design: Must limit design tensile stress of sealants to 138 kPa.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 116 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

TESTING

520 PROJECT TESTING

 Test results and reports: Before installation of general areas of curtain walling, submit proof of
compliance with this specification.
 Air permeability (infiltration and exfiltration) to CWCT clause 8.6 water penetration test to
CWCT clause 8.7.1

635 WATERTIGHTNESS - HOSE SITE TEST

 Requirement: To CWCT 'Standard for curtain walling', clause 3.11.3.


- Joints to be tested: 100% of the overall curtain wall area.

660 STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING TESTS

 Product samples: Provide the structural bonding sealant manufacturer with framing profiles,
glass, gaskets, assembly/ weathering sealants and other curtain walling products that are
proposed for contact with structural bonding sealant.
 Testing: By sealant manufacturer to determine compatibility and adhesion of structural bonding
sealant under specified design loadings.
 Modification of product to enable compliance with test criteria: Details must be recorded in the
sealant manufacturer's project specific approval.

PRODUCTS

710 ALUMINIUM ALLOY FRAMING SECTIONS

 Standard: To relevant parts of BS EN 515, BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020.


 Alloy, temper and thickness: Suitable for the application and specified finish.
 Structural members: To BS 8118-2.

712 ALUMINIUM ALLOY SHEET

 Standards: To relevant parts of BS EN 485, BS EN 515 and BS EN 573.


 Alloy, temper and thickness: Suitable for the application and specified finish.

715 CARBON STEEL FRAMING SECTIONS/ REINFORCEMENT

 Standards: To relevant parts of BS 7668, BS EN 10029, and BS EN 10210.


 Thickness: Suitable for the application, and for galvanizing or other protective coating.

717 MILD STEEL SHEET

 Standards: To relevant parts of BS 1449-1, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS EN 10111, BS


EN 10131, BS EN 10132, BS EN 10139, BS EN 10140, BS EN 10149, BS EN 10209 and
BS EN 10268.
 Grade and thickness: Suitable for the application, and for galvanizing or other protective coating.

720 STAINLESS STEEL SHEET

 Standards: To relevant parts of BS EN 10029, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS EN 10095,


BSEN ISO 9445.
 Grade: To BS EN 10088-2, austenitic 1.4301 (304) generally, 1.4401 (316) when used
externally or in severely corrosive environments.
 Thickness: Suitable for the application.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 117 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

730 MECHANICAL FIXINGS

 Stainless steel: To BS EN ISO 3506, grade A2 generally, grade A4 when used in


severely corrosive environments.
 Mild steel: To BS 4190 and suitable for galvanizing or other protective coating.
 Aluminium brackets, rivets and shear pins: To relevant parts of BS EN 755.

731 SCREWS, BOLTS, WASHERS, NUTS AND OTHER FASTENING DEVICES

 Material: Grade 316 stainless steel.


 Slip washers: nylon, nylatron or polypropylene.

732 ADHESIVES

 General: Not degradable by moisture or water vapour.

735 FIXING ANCHORS

 Dimensions: Not less than recommended by their manufacturers.


 Adjustment capability: Sufficient in three dimensions to accommodate building structure and
curtain walling fabrication/ installation tolerances.

747 GLASS EDGE CONDITION FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING

 Bonded, unframed outer edges: Flat ground with a small arris suitable for open jointing or for
weatherseal jointing.

750 INFILL PANELS/ FACINGS

 Tolerances:
- Deviation in size (maximum): ± 1 mm.
- Deviation in flatness from plane per 2 m length (maximum): ± 1 mm.
 Rigidity: Adequate to comply with design/ performance requirements.

760 GASKETS

 Material:
- Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1.
- Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509.
 Continuity: Outer gaskets of single front sealed curtain walling systems and inner gaskets of
drained and ventilated or pressure equalized curtain walling systems must be formed in a
complete frame with sealed joints. Vulcanized rubber gaskets must have factory moulded
corner joints.
 Durability: Resistant to oxidation, ozone and UV degradation.

765 WEATHERSTRIPPING OF OPENING UNITS

 Material:
- Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1.
- Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509.
- Polypropylene woven pile, silicone treated.
 Attachment: Fixed in undercut grooves in framing sections using preformed corners, with any
joints in the length.
770 GENERAL SEALANTS

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 118 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Selection: In accordance with BS 6213 from:


- Silicone.
- One part polysulfide.
- Two part polysulfide.
- One or two part polyurethane.
 Classification and requirements: To BS EN ISO 11600.

771 SEALANTS

 General: Non-bleeding type, capable of supporting their own weight. Sealants, primers and
backing rods to be sourced from one manufacturer to ensure compatibility.
 For concealed non-moving static joints and fixing device penetrations: One component butyl
rubber or polyurethane.
 For moving working joints and exposed locations: One component silicone or polyurethane,
U.V. resistant, non-discolouring, formulated not to attract airborne dirt and pollutants, as
Section Z22 (Type of Sealant to be agreed with the Employer’s Representative).
 Sealants, cleaning solvents, fills and primers: Compatible with each other.
 Colours for sealants: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's
standard range.
 Primers: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
 Cleaning material Xylol, methyl-ethyl-ketone, Isopropyl Alcohol or as recommended by the
sealant manufacturer.
 Filler strips for back-up of sealants: Chemically compatible rod stock of PVC, EPDM, butyl or
neoprene, or non-absorbent closed cell foam polyethylene of a diameter sized 25% greater than
the joint width before application.

772 CURTAIN WALLING JOINT ASSEMBLY SEALANTS

 Material: One part, low modulus silicone to BS EN ISO 11600,, type F or G, neutral curing
where in contact with or close proximity to other products that may be adversely affected by
acetoxy curing.
- Product reference: As recommended by the manufacturer to DCD and Employer’s
Representative's approval.

775 BONDING SEALANTS FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING

 Material: Silicone, neutral curing, designed and manufactured for bonding of structural sealant
glazing. Compatible with contact and close proximity products and finishes.
- Product reference: As recommended by the manufacturer to DCD and Employer’s
Representative's approval.

777 WEATHERSEALING FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING

 Material: Silicone, one or two part, neutral curing. Designed and manufactured for
weathersealing of structural sealant glazing. Compatible with contact and close proximity
products and finishes.
- Product reference: As recommended by the manufacturer to DCD and Employer’s
Representative's approval.
 Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range.

780 THERMAL INSULATION

 Material: Aluminium foil faced mineral wool with a density of 80kg/m2 (min.).
- Properties: Durable, rot and vermin proof and not degradable by moisture or water
vapour and approved by DCD/DM.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 119 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Fixing: Attached to or supported within the curtain walling so as not to bulge, sag, delaminate or
detach during installation or in situ during the life of the curtain walling.

785 VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER

 Acceptable materials:
- Aluminium alloy: As clause 712.
- Mild steel: As clause 717, galvanized or protective coated.
- Stainless steel: As clause 720.
- Reinforced membranes: Foil, plastics or rubbers, protected both sides by rigid facings/
linings.
 Location: Warm side of thermal insulation.
 Integrity: Continuous, free from gaps and sealed at joints.

FINISHES

805 FINISHES GENERALLY

 Steel at building interior and not exposed to exterior environmental conditions shall be
primed with primer.
 Steel at building exterior or within exterior assemblies shall be galvanised.
 Paint welded, galvanised items where galvanising has been removed for welding.

 Make good corrosion protection using two coats of touch-up primer suitable for galvanised steel.
Make good corrosion protection on prime painted steel using the same primer.
 Unless otherwise indicated, all aluminium exposed or concealed to the inside and outside of the
building shall receive a SUPER DURABLE POLYESTER POWDER COATING applied by an
approved applicator under the supervision of the coating manufacturer.
 All exposed aluminium members colour finish to be approved by the Employer’s
Representative.

810 PROTECTIVE COATING OF MILD STEEL FRAMING SECTIONS/REINFORCEMENT

 Treatment: One of the following to all surfaces:


- Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.
- An appropriate equivalent coating to BS 5493, BS EN ISO 12944 or BS EN ISO 14713.

820 PROTECTIVE COATING OF MILD STEEL MECHANICAL FIXINGS

 Treatment: One of the following to all surfaces:


- Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.
- Sherardized to BS 4921, class 1 coating thickness and passivated.
- Zinc plated to BS EN 12329, coating designation Fe//Zn//C for an iridescent (yellow
passivate) chromate conversion coating or Fe//Zn//D for an opaque (olive green) chromate
conversion coating.

830 POWDER COATING

 Requirement: As section Z31.

QUALITY CONTROL

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 120 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

870 ENGINEER'S QUALITY CONTROL

 The Employer’s Representative shall have the right to reject the work and any of its
components if it fails to meet quality stipulations established here and based on his selection and
approval of samples and field mock-ups.

FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

911 FABRICATION GENERALLY

 As far as practical, execute fitting and assembly in the shop with the various parts or assemblies
ready for erection at the building site.
 Take field measurements and levels required to verify or supplement those shown on the
drawings for the proper layout and installation of the work.
 Co-ordinate dimensional tolerances in adjacent building elements and confirm prior to the
commencement of the work. Commencement of installation floor by floor shall be construedas
acceptance of building conditions. Work shall not deviate from the tolerances specified.
 Accurately machine, fit and securely frame together all joints, corners, miters.
 Location of exposed joints to approval.
 Make exposed work free of machine marks and dimpling.
 Fabricate components to avoid force fitting to obtain alignment with adjacent components.
 Weld aluminium with inert metal arc equipment. Make exposed welds continuous and flush with
the adjacent surfaces. Do not mar surface finishes with welds in back of exposed aluminium.
Do not deform the exposed metal and finish in any way by welding.
 Welded joints of steel members shall be of adequate strength and durability with joints tightand
flush. Where it is necessary to weld components already galvanised, remove galvanising for
50mm around weld and paint over welds where galvanising is removed.
 Reinforce all frames by concealed means as necessary to meet the specified design
requirements.
 Provide steel brackets and support framing to fasten frames in place in openings.
 Provide slotted connections as required to accommodate deflection of opening components.
 Seal hairline joints at junctions of frame members.
 Gun-inject sealant from inside ensuring a continuous seal of the joint.
 Ensure that bead in the glazing space does not impair sealing of glazing materials.
 Remove excess sealant which is forced onto face of frame assembly.
 Where frame members are lapped, the faces exposed to the weather shall be in full, tight
contact.
 Allow minimal clearance for snap-on components.
 Where mullions are extended and connected to the underside of the building structure above,
provide slotted connections to accommodate the structure deflection.
 Fabricate corner pieces and filler pieces of thick plate aluminium to the profiles shown, by
welding prior to application of finish.
 Provide concealed clips for fastening plate assemblies in place.

912 METALWORK

 Requirement: As section Z11, unless specified otherwise in this section.

915 GLAZING

 Requirement: As section L40, unless specified otherwise in this section.


 Directional patterned/ wired glass: Generally fix parallel to surround and align adjacent panes
where seen together at close quarters.

917 FIXINGS/ ADHESIVES APPLICATION

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 121 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Requirement: As section Z20, unless specified otherwise in this section.

920 SEALANT APPLICATION

 Requirement: As section Z22, unless specified otherwise in this section.

925 STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING

 Working conditions: Prepare for and apply structural bonding sealant in a favourable workshop
environment.
 Curing: Do not transport units until structural bonding sealant has adequately cured for the
period stated in the project specific approval.

930 ASSEMBLY

 General: Carry out as much assembly as possible in the workshop.


 Joints (other than movement joints): Rigidly secured, reinforced where necessary and fixed
with hairline abutments.
 Displacement of components in assembled units: Submit proposals for reassembly on site.

955 FIXING ANCHOR INSTALLATION

 Site drilling or cutting into structure: Submit proposals for positions other than shown on
detailed drawings.
 Concrete supporting structure:
- Cast-in inserts: Provide detailed location information. Protect cavities in inserts from entryof
concrete.
- Edge fixing distances: Not less than recommended by fixing anchor manufacturers.
 Corrective fabrication: Minimize. Where necessary, submit proposals.

970 CURTAIN WALLING INSTALLATION

 Securing to fixing anchors: Through holes formed during fabrication only.


 Tightening mechanical fasteners: To manufacturer's recommended torque figures. Do not
overtighten fasteners intended to permit differential movement.
 Protective coverings: Remove only where necessary to facilitate installation and from surfaces
that will be inaccessible on completion.

975 WELDING

 In situ welding: Not permitted.

980 INTERFACES

 Flashings, closers, etc: Locate and form correctly to provide weathertight junctions with the
curtain walling.

982 IRONMONGERY

 Assembly and fixing: Accurately, using fasteners with matching finish supplied by ironmongery
manufacturer.
 Completion: Check, adjust and lubricate as necessary to ensure correct functioning.

988 MAINTENANCE

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 122 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Prepare a maintenance manual in accordance with CWCT “Standard and Guide to Good
Practice for Curtain Walling", section 10.
 Unless otherwise instructed or agreed the manual must be completed and handed over to the
Employer’s Representative upon Taking over of Works.

****END OF SECTION H11****

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 123 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION H31
METAL PROFILED/ FLAT SHEET CLADDING/
COVERING

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 124 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

H31 METAL PROFILED/ FLAT SHEET CLADDING/ COVERING

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This


section deals with: -
• Steel, aluminium and other metal flat, corrugated and other profiled sheet single skin and
insulated double skin roof covering and vertical cladding, including factory applied finishes.
• Transparent and translucent plastics/polycarbonate sheets incorporated into areas of metal
profiled/flat sheet roof covering and wall cladding.
• Over purlin and outside rail sheet lining.
 Roof gutters, safety signs, flashing and other items.

TYPES OF CLADDING/ COVERING SYSTEM

120A METAL COVERING TO ROOF (Insulated composite panel).


 Support structure: Steel structure.
- Bearing width (minimum): 50mm or as per approved detailed design.
- Pitch: Minimum 4 degrees.
 External sheets: Min 0.5mm thick AZ150 steel.
- Product reference: 45/250 trapezoidal with cover width 1,000mm or approved equivalent as
recommended by cladding system specialist subject to Employer’s Representative’s approval.
- Material: Hot-dip zinc coated G90 steel to ASTM 653 or Steel AZ150 alloy coated to ASTM 792
or approved equivalent.
- Thickness: 0.5mm nominal.
- Finish side 1 (outer): Average 60 microns Durabond coating or 40 microns, 3 coat PVDF coating
system with a warranty of 20 years for the coating system. 50% of the color fading should not
happen in first 10 years.
 Colour: To Employer’s Representative’s approval and with SRI greater than 78%.
- Finish side 2 (inner): Polyester lacquer 7 microns average.
 Colour: To Employer’s Representative’s approval.
- Additional requirements: As shown on the concept drawings or Employer’s requirement, if any.
 Accessories:
- High threaded Self-tapping screws 6.5mm diameter stainless steel grade 304 with 19mm dia SS
bonded washer.
- Matching color coated saddle washer with EPDM rubber
- Bulb tite and POP rivets with aluminium body
- Permanently elastic poly butyl tape, Class A, ref NFRC TB36
- Purlin tape, where required
- Matching color caps
- Extruded aluminium alloy/galvanized GI Z spacers
- Fabricated metal flashing, crimped ridge piece, curved eaves, sill flashings, insulated roof gutter etc
- All other accessories as required to complete installation complete weather tight.
 Primary cladding / covering sheet fasteners: High threaded Self-tapping screws 6.5mm diameter
stainless steel grade 304 with 19mm dia SS bonded washer.
- Fastener profile location: on crown with saddle washers.
- Number of fasteners per sheet width: On every crown for laps, eaves, ridge and alternate
crowns for intermediate.
- Eaves and end laps: On every crown.
- Intermediate supports: Alternate crowns.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 125 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 End laps size (minimum): 200mm.


 Sealing laps:
- End laps: With three rows of 6x5mm butyl rubber sealant tape and self-tapping screws on every
crown
- Side laps: With one row of 6x5mm butyl rubber sealant tape and stitched with blind POP rivets at
300 mm c/c
- Internal face of panel to be air sealed along the full length by an unbroken run of 8mm
diameter butyl rubber sealant, class A.
 Stitching laps:
- End laps: With self-tapping screws on every crown
- Side laps: with blind POP rivets at 300mmc/c
 Spacers: As per manufacturer’s recommendation
- Fasteners: As per manufacturer’s recommendation.
 Breather membrane: Provide, if required.
 Thermal insulation: Min 75mm thick PIR foam insulation of average density 38kg/m3, having
certification from DCL and approved by Dubai civil defense. Thickness of insulation must satisfy the U
value requirement as per green building requirements, authority regulation and MEP design
requirement and thickness shall be increased (if required). In any case U value of roof shall not
exceed 0.3 W/M2 K.
 Vapor control layer: Provide, if required.
 Acoustic insulation: Provide, if required.
 Internal Lining sheets:
- Material: Hot-dip zinc coated steel to ASTM 653 or Steel AZ alloy coated to ASTM 792 or
approved equivalent.
- Thickness: 0.4mm nominal and lightly ribbed.
- Finish side 1 (outer): Average 25 microns polyester coated.
Colour: To Employer’s Representative’s approval.
- Finish side 2 (inner): Polyester lacquer 7 microns average.
Colour: To Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Additional requirements:
- The roof cladding system proposed by the Contractor must comply with all current regulations of
the Authorities having jurisdiction. Valid test certificate should be available for the panel from
any one of the DCD approved laboratory. Contractor shall use only Civil Defense approved
products/systems in the project and shall be responsible for obtaining DCD approvalfor all site
installations. Also contractor shall be responsible for arranging inspection by DCD approved
House of Expertise on site installation at 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 100% and submit reports
for each stage for Civil Defense submission.
- All required provisions for the roof mounted solar panel shall be provided (supply and
installation of solar panel by others).
- Structural movement joints shall be provided as design requirements.
- Roof mounted man safe/fall arrest system shall be provided.

120B METAL COVERING TO ROOF (Insulated Standing seam panel)-


 Drawing reference(s): Tender drawings
 Supports: Galvanized Mild Steel Purlins at not more than 1.5meter centers
- Bearing width: Refer to approved shop drawings.
- Pitch: Refer to Contract drawings. Minimum 1.5° built up.
 External sheets: Mechanically Zipped Aluminium Secret Fixed Standing Seam Roofing System.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 126 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Material: Aluminium Alloy- EN AW-3004 AIMn1Mg1. Ultimate tensile strength - min 225
N/mm². 0.2% Proof stress - min 200 N/mm². Modulus of elasticity - 70,000 N/mm².
- Profile reference: King Zip with 65mm standing seam or approved equivalent from other
specified manufacturers.
- Nominal thickness/gauge: 0.9mm
- External Finish/Colour: 3-coat, 40 microns thick PVDF coating with a warranty of 20 years for
the coating system. Color to Employer’s approval in compliance with green building regulation.
- Other requirements: Sheets to be in one length as much as possible to avoid horizontal laps.
Sheets shall be supplied in one length, naturally laid to fall, avoiding a ridge condition.
- System shall be certified to FM 4471 Class 1 and UL 580 Class 90 ratings and DCD/
DMapproved.
 Internal Liner sheet: Liner sheet shall be 0.7mm thick profiled AZ150 Alu Zinc or grade G90
galvanized steel finished with two coat, minimum 25 microns thick polyester coating. Profile WA200
liner from Kingspan or approved equivalent.
 Flashing: Aluminium alloy or galvanised/alloy coated steel, gauge/thickness and finish to match roof
cladding system’s external/internal sheet, as applicable
 Accessories: Fix extruded Aluminium Alloy (EN AW-6082) 245 halters and steel lining sheet to
galvanised mild steel purlins with stainless steel fasteners. Thickness of sub-purlin and bracket to be
determined based on length of sheet but a minimum of 1.6mm. Polyamide thermal barrier
pads to halter base.
- Extruded Aluminium Alloy Halters 245 mm
- Polyamide Thermal Barrier Pads
- Pressed Aluminium Alloy Channel Verge Cap
- Pressed Aluminium Alloy Ridge Support
- Ridge Closure Zed
- Pressed Aluminium Alloy Drip Angle 40 x 20mm
- Fabricated Aluminium Alloy (AA3004) Flashings – Material and finish as per Cladding sheets or
as per Employer’s Representative’s approval.
- Side Laps: To be mechanically seamed with zipping machine.
 Primary cladding sheet fasteners: Carbon steel self-drilling screws complete with 19mm diameter
stainless steel/EPDM bonded washers – thread type and length to suit construction. Minimum 2 no
fixings per clip as supplied by cladding manufacturer.
 End laps: None, unless absolutely required by design
 Thermal Insulation:
- Material: Rockwool acoustic blanket at 40kg/m³ density with one side aluminium foil facing
 Thickness: Minimum 140mm thick supplied in 2 layers with at least one layer having
aluminium foil facing, compressed during installation to 128mm to achieve a net thermal
transmittance ‘U’ value of 0.30W/m 2K (net value considering heat gain through
fixing/connections)
 Install and secure as the work proceeds ensuring continuity and leaving no gaps. Keep dry.

 Vapour Control Layer


- Manufacturer and reference: As proposed by Cladding manufacturer and subject Employer’s
Representative’s approval.
- Material and reference: VCL 170 – A multi-layer composite membrane comprising PE core, with
cross link polypropylene reinforcement.
- Sealant Tape – 2.5 x 9mm x 15m butyl tape.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 127 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Minimum water Vapour Resistance: 336 MNs/g.


- Maximum water Vapour Permeability: 0.61g/m2/day.
- Origin : UK or approved equivalent
 Lay as work proceeds ensuring continuity.
 Lap sides and ends of sheets not less than 50mm and seal with one row of polybutyl
sealant tape.
 Seal with two rows of sealant tape to perimeter and to pipes, ducts, structural members
etc., which pass through – ensuring a full bond over the width of the sealant tape.
 Carefully check for tears and punctures and seal them with sealant tape before covering.
 Other requirements
- Operatives must be fully trained and conversant with system manufacturers’ methods for fixing
and specifications.
- Standing seam sheets shall be roll-formed on site using mobile roll-forming production unit.
- Supplier of roofing system shall have at least 5 years’ experience of manufacturing the system
locally.
- All required provisions for the roof mounted solar panel shall be provided (supply and
installation of solar panel by others).
- Structural movement joints shall be provided as per design requirements.
- Contractor shall supply and install fall arrest system over the roof cladding.
- Contractor shall use only Civil Defense approved products/systems in the project and shall be
responsible for obtaining DCD approval for all site installations. Also contractor shall be
responsible for arranging inspection by DCD approved House of Expertise on site installation at
20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 100% and submit reports for each stage for Civil Defense
submission.

120 D METAL COVERING TO WALLS (Insulated micro-ribbed panel system)


 Support structure: Steel structure or as per approved detailed design.
- Bearing width (minimum): Min 50 mm or as per approved detailed design drawings.
 External sheets: Micro ribbed with cover width 1,000mm.
Product reference: Micro ribbed architectural wall panel or approved equivalent as
recommended by cladding system specialist subject to Employer’s Representative’s approval
- Material: Hot-dip zinc coated G90 steel to ASTM 653 or Steel AZ150 alloy coated to ASTM 792
or approved equivalent.
- Thickness: 0.5mm nominal.
- Finish side 1 (outer): Average 60 microns Durabond coating or 40 microns, 3 coat PVDF coating
system with a warranty of 20 years for the coating system. 50% of color fading should not
happen in first 10 years.
Colour: To Employer’s Representative’s approval .
- Finish side 2 (inner): Polyester lacquer 7 microns average.
Colour: To Employer’s Representative’s approval.
- Additional requirements: As shown on the concept drawings or Employer’s Requirements, if
any.
 Accessories:
- Concealed panel clips and fasteners
- Girt tape, where required
- All other accessories as required to complete the installation complete weather tight.

 Primary cladding / covering sheet fasteners:

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 128 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Self-tapping screws stainless steel grade 304 with SS bonded washer.


- Each panel fixed to each support using not less than one fastener located through tongue
section.
- For panel bearer: Fix each one using two fasteners.
- For flashing/trims: Fix to each support using one fastener.
 Vertical Joints:
- Type: Panel joint and push in gasket (metal turned around panel terminations).
- PIR insulation board with any gaps between board and panels finished fire rated gun applied
canister urethane insulation.
- Vertical panel joint to have EPDM 95x10mm self-adhesive air seal bubble gasket applied to
vertical supporting steel work and lapped over drip flashing.
 Male/female panel joint:
- Factory applied weather seal set in rebate.
- Filler and neutral cure silicone seal and tape applied at the end of each panel where flashing
pass over the joint.
- Neutral cure silicone seal to male joints.
 Spacers: As per detailed design and manufacturer’s recommendation.
- Fasteners: As per manufacturer’s recommendation.
 Breather membrane: Provide, if required.
 Thermal insulation: Min 75 mm thick PIR foam insulation of average density 38kg/m3, having
certification from DCL and approved by Dubai civil defense. Thickness of insulation shall be verified and
increased if required in compliance with green building project plan, authority regulation and MEP
design requirement. In any case U value of wall shall not exceed 0.30 W/M2 K.
 Vapor control layer: Provide, if required.
 Acoustic insulation: Provide, if required.
 Internal Lining sheets:
- Material: Hot-dip zinc coated steel to ASTM 653 or Steel AZ alloy coated to ASTM 792 or
approved equivalent.
- Thickness: 0.4mm nominal and lightly ribbed.
- Finish side 1 (outer): Average 25 microns polyester coated.
Colour: To Employer’s Representative’s approval.
- Finish side 2 (inner): Polyester lacquer 7 microns average.
Colour: To Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Additional requirements: The micro-rib panel system proposed by the Contractor must comply with all
current regulations of the Authorities having jurisdiction. Valid test certificate should be available for the
panel from any one of the DCD approved laboratory. Contractor shall use only Civil Defense approved
products/systems in the project and shall be responsible for obtaining DCD approval for all site
installations. Also contractor shall be responsible for arranging inspection by DCD approved House of
Expertise on site installation at 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 100% and submit reports for each
stage for Civil Defense submission.

127 POLYCARBONATE TRANSLUCENT ROOF SKYLIGHT


 Support structure: Galvanized cold rolled purlins or as per detailed design.
 System type: Energy efficient, thermally broken system with arched aluminium and PVC profile
structure. Arcade plus Roof light from King Span or approved equivalent from Brett martin or other
approved manufacturers.
- Material: Co-extruded, multi-walled polycarbonate rigid thermoplastic roof light. To
comply with Euro class B internally and Euro class BROOF (t4) externally. Product to
achieve a minimum classification of B-s2, d0 when tested to EN 13501-1:2007

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 129 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Profile: Aluminium and PVC profile to suite the roof cladding.


- Length: As per drawing.
- Cover width: 500mm
- Build up: Multi-walled polycarbonate consists of 2 layers of 8 mm thick.
 Bearing width: Intermediate and panel ends- Minimum 60mm
 Finish/ Colour: translucent/clear.
 Fire properties: Shall comply with local Authority regulations.
 Safety: As per Authority requirement / relevant standards.
 Accessories: As recommended by the manufacturer. Thermally broken head, base and jamb
aluminium extrusion polyester powder coat finish.
 Primary sheet fasteners: SS self-tapping screws grade 304 SS with 15mm diameter SS washers.
- Fastener profile location: As recommended by manufacturer.
- Number of fasteners for Klick: Each fix key bracket fixed to each intermediate support
using not less than two fasteners.
 End laps: To be air sealed with film backed butyl tape or gun grade sealant.
 Side laps stitching: With 5.2mm bulb- tite rivets at 300mm c/c.
 Sealing laps: As clause 550 and as follows:
- Sheets overlapped by metal sheets: 2 rows of butyl tape.
- Sheets under lapped by metal sheets: 2 rows of butyl tape.
- Sheets lapped by plastics sheets: Not applicable.
 Thermal properties: Shall satisfy design and Authority requirements and green building regulations.
 Other requirements:
- Product/system shall be fully compliant with UAE fire and Life Safety Code and Dubai
Green Building regulations.
- Roof light shall be a system requiring minimum site assembly.
- Shall be compatible with safety and fall through protection systems.
- Internal face to be air sealed into head, base and jamb extrusion by use of seals.
- Factory made pre-formed extrusion mitre corners.
- Manufacturer’s 20 years product guarantee to be submitted.
- PVC barrier tape to be used to avoid bi-metallic corrosion.

127A POLYCARBONATE TRANSLUCENT WALL CLADDING


 Support structure: Cold rolled girts or as per detailed design.
 System type: Double skin with spacers to suit the roof cladding.
- Material: Co-extruded, multi-wall polycarbonate rigid thermoplastic wall light. To comply with Euro
class B internally and Euro class BROOF (t4) externally. Product to achieve a minimum
classification of B-s2, d0 when tested to EN 13501-1:2007
- Profile: To suite the roof/wall cladding profile.
- Length: As per drawing.
- Cover width: 500mm, multi-wall polycarbonate thickness 40mm.
 Bearing width: Intermediate and panel ends- Minimum 60mm
 Finish/ Colour: translucent/clear.
 Fire properties:
 As per Authority regulations.
 Safety:
- As per Authority requirement / relevant standards.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 130 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Accessories: As recommended by manufacturer.


 Thermally broken head, base and jamb aluminium extrusion polyester powder coat finish.
 Primary sheet fasteners: SS self-tapping screws grade 304 SS with 15mm diameter SS washers.
- Fastener profile location: As recommended by manufacturer.
- Number of fasteners for Klick: Each fix key bracket fixed to each intermediate support using not
less than two fasteners.
 End laps: To be air sealed with film backed butyl tape or gun grade sealant.
 Side laps stitching: With 5.2mm bulb- tite rivets at 300mm c/c.
 Sealing laps: As clause 550 and as follows:
- Sheets overlapped by metal sheets: 2 rows of butyl tape.
- Sheets under lapped by metal sheets: 2 rows of butyl tape.
- Sheets lapped by plastics sheets: Not applicable.
 Thermal properties: To satisfy design and Authority requirements, but in any case U value shall not
exceed 0.99W/m2 K.
 Other requirements:
 Product/system shall be fully compliant with UAE fire and Life Safety Code and Dubai Green
Building regulations.
 Wall light shall be a system requiring minimum site assembly.
 Internal face to be air sealed into head, base and jamb extrusion by use of seals.
 Factory made pre-formed extrusion mitre corners.
 Manufacturer’s 20 years product guarantee to be available.
 PVC barrier tape to be used to avoid bi-metallic corrosion.

150 GRP DOUBLE SKIN TRANSLUCENT SHEET WALL CLADDING


 Support structure: As per final design drawing.
 System type: Double skin with spacers to suit the wall cladding.
- Material: GRP to BS 4154-1 manufactured by Filon, UK, Trilite range from Brett Martin or
approved equivalent.
- Profile: As per drawing and to suite the wall cladding profile. External skin and up stand shall
have min 1.5mm thick and thickness of liner sheet shall be min 1mm.
- Length: As per drawing.
- Cover width: As per drawing.
 Light diffusion: 60 to 70% transmission of light.
 Finish/ Colour: translucent with enhanced UV protection against weathering, UV degradation and
chemical attack.
 Life Expectancy: 20 years minimum.
 Fire properties:
 As per Authority regulations.
 Safety:
- Non fragility (impact resistance): Class B to ACR(M) 001:2005
 Accessories: As recommended by the manufacture to ensure 100% weather tightness and non
fragile.
 Primary sheet fasteners: SS self-tapping screws 6.5mm diameter.
- Fastener profile location: As per manufacturer’s written recommendation.
- Number of fasteners per sheet width at end laps and intermediate supports: As per
manufacturer’s written recommendation.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 131 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 End laps size (minimum): 150mm.


 Side laps stitching: With bulb tite rivets at 300mm c/c.
 Sealing laps: As clause 550 and as follows:
- Sheets overlapped by metal sheets: 2 rows of butyl tape.
- Sheets under lapped by metal sheets: 2 rows of butyl tape.
- Sheets lapped by plastics sheets: Not applicable.
 Thermal properties: To satisfy design and Authority requirements. U value, VLT and SHGC shall be as
per local authority regulation.
 Special features: As shown on the contract drawing, if any.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

170 DESIGN
 Cladding/ covering system: Complete detailed design and submit before commencement of
fabrication.
- Standard: To BS 5427-1.
- Air leakage rate of less than 10m3/hr/m2 at 50 Pa.
 Related works: Coordinate in detailed design.

172 THERMAL PERFORMANCE/ BRIDGING


 Requirement: Complete the thermal design of the cladding/ covering system to avoid excessive
thermal bridging. Junctions between the roof panel system and walls/penetrations shall be insulated with
PIR board insulation and gaps filled with suitable fire rated gun applied canister urethane insulation.
- Standard: MCRMA Technical Paper 14.
- Also coordinate with HVAC design requirements and authority regulations.

175 PRODUCT SAMPLES


 General: Before commencing detailed design, submit labeled samples of the following: -
- All products specified in this section and applicable to the project.

176 FASTENER SAMPLES


 General: During detailed design, submit labeled samples of each type of fastener.

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

185 PERFORMANCE COMPLIANCE


 Verification: Before commencing fabrication, submit evidence based on laboratory testing or
computer modeling. The Cladding system shall have independent accreditation for long-term
thermal performance, structural performance, air leakage, weather tightness, condensation risk and
durability.
- Verifying authority: As approved by local authority having jurisdiction or a reputed independent agency
as approved by the Employer’s Representative.

187 DEFLECTION OF METAL CLADDING/ COVERING


 Roof covering: Maximum permitted deflection under distributed loads as a multiple of span and
due to:
- Dead load: L/500.
- Dead and imposed loads: L/200.
- Dead and wind loads: L/90.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 132 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Wall cladding: Maximum permitted deflection under distributed loads as a multiple of span and due to:
- Dead and wind loads: L/120.

195A INTEGRITY OF CLADDING/ COVERING


 Requirement: Determine profiles, sizes and thicknesses of sheets, the sizes, number and spacing of
fixings, configuration and location of spacer systems and incorporation of other accessories and
fittings to ensure cladding/ covering system will resist factored dead, imposed and design live loads, and
accommodate deflections and thermal movements without damage, in accordance with BS 5427 - 1.
 Wind loads: Calculate to BS 6399-2, Standard Method and BS 5427-1 appropriate to location,
exposure, height, building shape and size, taking account of existing and known future adjacent
structures.
- Basic wind speed (Vb): As indicated on the structural drawings.
- Altitude factor (Sa): 1
- Direction factor (Sd): 1
- Seasonal factor (Ss): 1.
- Probability factor (Sp): 1.
- Terrain and building factor (Sb): Variable
- External and internal size effect factors (Ca): 1.
- External pressure coefficients (Cpe): As determined from BS 6399 -2, clauses 2.4 and 2.5.
- Internal pressure coefficients (Cpi): As determined from BS 6399 -2, clause 2.6.
- Dominant opening: Services doors to be considered as open.
 Imposed roof load: As determined from BS 6399 -3 and BS 5427 -1.
 Permanent imposed roof loads: To consider man safe/fall arrest system. To consider roof access. To
consider solar panel loading.
 Temporary imposed roof loads: Maintenance access equipment and personnel.

198 WATER PENETRATION


 Requirement: Under site exposure conditions, moisture must not penetrate onto internal surfaces, or
into cavities not designed to be wetted.

200A AVOIDANCE OF INTERSTITIAL CONDENSATION


 Requirement: Determine interstitial condensation risk of cladding/ covering system using the method
described in BS 5250 . If necessary, provide a vapor control layer to ensure that damage and nuisance
from interstitial condensation does not occur.

202 AVOIDANCE OF SURFACE CONDENSATION


 Requirement: Determine surface condensation risk of cladding/ covering system using the method
described in BS EN ISO 13788. If necessary, revise thermal insulation to provide satisfactory
temperature factor (fmin). Ensure that damage and nuisance from surface condensation does not
occur.

FIXING CLADDING/ COVERING

215 PAINTING STRUCTURE


 Sequence: Paint outer surface of supporting structure before fixing cladding/covering.

219 FASTENERS
 Unspecified fasteners: Recommended for the purpose by the cladding/ covering manufacturer.

221 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES


 Unspecified fittings and accessories: Recommended for the purpose by the cladding/ covering
manufacturer.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 133 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

223 PREVENTION OF ELECTROLYTIC ACTION


 Isolating tape: Type recommended by cladding/ covering manufacturer.
- Location: To contact surfaces of supports and sheets of dissimilar metals.

234 GUTTERS TO ROOFS

- Product reference: As recommended by the cladding manufacturer subject to the Employer’s


Representative's approval.
 Sizes: As indicated on the contract drawings.
 Material: Aluminium sheet.
- Gauge/ Thickness: Min 1 mm unless otherwise indicated on the concept drawings.
- External finish: To match the adjacent panels in colour and performance.
 Insulation: Min 75 mm thick aluminium foil faced mineral wool or to suit the U value of roof and wall
cladding whichever is more stringent. Ensure that the insulation complies with DM/DCD regulation.
 Internal liner sheet: 0.7 mm thick galvanized mild steel to BS EN 10147 with zinc coating
designation 275 and 20 micrometer white polyester paint finish to both faces.
 Jointing method: As recommended by the specialist contractor subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval. However a minimum 4 lines of rivets shall be required.
 Fixing method: As recommended by the specialist contractor subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
 Accessories: Proprietary stop ends and drainage outlets. Out let shall be provided for both inside
and outside skins.
 Waterproofing: Liquid applied waterproofing shall be provided for all joints extending at least 400mm
on either sides of joint with Roof guard from M/s Jotun or approved equivalent. Laminatedsystem of
roof guard/glass fiber mats/roof guard shall be used at all joints, junctions of stop ends and outlets.
Each coat of roof guard shall have a minimum thickness of 400 microns DFT.

300 PROFILE FILLERS GENERALLY


 Material: EPDM faced closed cell cross linked polyethylene foam.
 Manufacturer: As recommended by the cladding/ covering system specialist subject to the
Employer’s Representative's approval.
- Product references: As recommended by the cladding/ covering system specialist subject to the
Employer’s Representative's approval.
 Colour: Black.
 Thickness: 30 mm subject to recommendation by the cladding system specialist.
 Fixing method: As recommended by the cladding/ covering system specialist subject to the
Employer’s Representative's approval.
- Requirement: To close cavities/ regulate air paths within the external envelope and also closeoff
corrugation cavities from the inside and outside of the building. Tight fit with no
unintended gaps to ensure air tight.

410 FIXING SHEETS GENERALLY


 Cut edges: Clean true lines.
 Penetrations: Openings to minimum size necessary.
- Edge reinforcement: Aluminium sections to details.
 Sheet orientation: Exposed joints of side laps away from prevailing wind
 Sheet ends, laps and raking cut edges: Fully supported and with fixings at top of lap.
 Fasteners: Drill holes. Position at regular intervals in straight lines, centered on support bearings.
- Position of fasteners in oversized drilled holes: Central.
- Fasteners torque: Sufficient to correctly compress washers.
 Debris: Remove dust and other foreign matter before finally fixing sheets.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 134 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Completion: Check fixings to ensure air and water tightness and those sheets are secure.
 Cut edges: Paint to match face finish.

470 STRUCTURAL MOVEMENT JOINTS


 Type: Cover flashing fixed on one side over gap between sheets.
 Location: Coincident with structural movement joint.
 Width of gap: To match structural movement joint requirements.
 Requirement: Weather tight.

480 FLASHINGS/ TRIMS GENERALLY


 Lap joint treatment:
- Vertical and sloping flashings/ trims: End laps to be same as for adjacent sheeting.
- Horizontal flashings/ trims: End laps to be 150 mm, sealed and where possible arranged with
laps away from prevailing wind.
 Method of fixing: To structure in conjunction with adjacent sheeting. Otherwise to sheeting.
- Fasteners: As recommended by the cladding/ covering system specialist subject to the
Employer’s Representative's approval. Rivets (if used) shall be bulb tite rivets.

481 FLASHINGS/ TRIMS


 Locations: As per drawing or required as per design.
 Fasteners: As per drawing or required as per design.

482 BUTT JOINTED FLASHINGS/ TRIMS


 Locations: As required.
 Butt straps: 300 mm wide and made from sheet of same material and finish.
 Butt joints: Seal.

540 ABUTMENTS
 Junctions with flashings: Weather tight and neatly dressed down.

550 SEALING LAPS ON EXTERNAL SHEETS


 Sealant tape: Types recommended by sheet manufacturer.
- Position: Below fixing positions in straight unbroken lines, parallel to and slightly back from
edge of sheet.
 Seal quality: Effective, continuous, not over compressed and permanently elastic poly butyl.
 End laps: Sealant tape positions:
- Single line tape: Immediately below line of fasteners.
- Second line tape: Slightly set back from edge of external sheet.
- Third line tape: As per manufacturer’s instruction.
 Side laps: Sealant tape positions:
- Single line tape: Outside line of fasteners.
- Second line tape (where specified): On other side of fasteners.

556 WARRANTY AND ROOF WATER TEST


 Insulation core’s thermal and structural performance shall be guaranteed for 25 years.
 Cladding skin coating system shall be guaranteed for the period as stated in the respective clauses.
 The whole of the roof and wall cladding shall be tested for drainage and leaks by flushing with
water to ensure water tightness. Water test shall be carried out in the presence of the Employer’s
Representative in accordance with approved method statement.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 135 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 The whole works under this section shall be covered by a written warranty, against leakage and
material defect, valid for ten (10) years from the date of Taking over of the project, supported by the
manufacturer's product warranty for the same period of time.

560 SAFETY SIGNS


 Fixing locations of signs: Where required as per design and authority regulation.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Material: Aluminium with polyester powder coated base colour, screen printed graphics and
lettering.
 Signs description:
Hazard sign as BS 5499-5, code 8.C.0072 with supplementary text sign lettering 'DANGER fragile
roof'. General sign with mandatory instruction to BS 5499-5 code 44.A.0103 with supplementary
text sign, lettering 'Use crawling boards'.

561 MOCK UPS


 Prepare a panel of minimum 25sq.m of cladding as a mock up for Employer’s Representative’s
approval. If accepted the mock up will form part of permanent works.

***End of Section H31***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 136 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION H43
METAL COMPOSITE PANEL CLADDING/
COVERING

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 137 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

H43 METAL COMPOSITE PANEL CLADDING/ COVERING

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. Manufacturer shall be required to have no less
than five years' experience manufacturing metal composite cladding panels, of equivalent type, size
and complexity to that required by the plans and specifications of this contract. The entire metal
composite panel system shall carry a manufacturer's warranty for 20 years from the date of Taking
over of the Works

This section deals with Steel, aluminium and other metal flat, corrugated and other profiled sheet,
insulated double skin composite and semi-composite panel roof covering and vertical cladding,
including factory applied finishes.

120A METAL COMPOSITE PANEL COVERING

 Support structure: As indicated on the concept drawings or as per detailed design.


- Bearing width: As indicated on the concept drawings or as per detailed design.
- Pitch: As per design requirement or manufacturer’s recommendation.
 Panels:
- Manufacturer: Refer approved/ equivalent.
- Product reference: Factory assembled 4 mm thick panels composed of 100% non-
combustible and fire retardant mineral core sandwiched between two skins of
aluminium/steel sheet (the specialist contractor shall determine if 4 mm thick panels are
suitable for the anticipated wind loading, thermal performance and tolerances). Ref
ALUCOPANEL USA FR A2 or approved equivalent. ACP cladding system shall be in
accordance with the following:-
i) Class A2 when tested as per DIN 4102 & EN 13501-1 or ISO 9705
ii) Class A as per ASTM E84
iii) Noncombustible when tested to ASTM E136 or other equivalent standards.
iv) Fully comply with the current regulation of DCD and Dubai Municipality.
- External facing material: 0.5 mm thick aluminium sheet/steel sheet.
- Finish: Factory applied KYNAR 500 based PVDF (The top coated surface shall comply with
the "specification for coated coil for exterior building applications" issued by ECCA
"European Coil Coating Association" or AAMA "American Architectural Manufacturers
Association" to achieve the quality level for each association). Coating shall have a very
high UV resistance.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range including metallic colours.
- Internal facing material: 0.5 mm thick aluminium sheet/steel sheet.
Finish: Polyester based wash coating to protect against possible corrosion problems.
Colour: As proposed by the panel manufacturer.
 Core insulation: Min 3 mm thick 100%non-combustible and fire retardant mineral filler or
other material approved by authority.
 Panel thickness: Min 4 mm.
 Panel characteristics:
- Specific gravity: 1.75-1.95
- Panel weight: Min 7.5 Kg/m2
- Bond Integrity - ASTM D1781-76 and ASTM C481 Cycle B-shall be a min.
of 178mm N/mm peel strength
- Thermal expansion: 1.2 mm/m/50°C when tested to ASTM D 969
- Apparent thermal conductivity: 0.39 Kcal/m.hr.°C when tested to ASTM D 976 or as per
fire safety consultant report or DCD regulation whichever is more stringent.
- Deflection temperature: 116°C when tested to ASTM D 648
- Tensile strength: 4.5 kg/mm2 when tested to ASTM E 8
- Yield strength: 4.5 kg/mm2 when tested to ASTM E 8
- Elongation: 5% when tested to ASTM E 8
- Flexural elasticity: 4060 kg/mm2 when tested to ASTM C 393
- Yield strength of the aluminium skin: 15.5 kg/mm2 when tested to ASTM E 8

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 138 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Flexural elasticity of the aluminium skin: 7000 kg/mm2 when tested to ASTM C 393
- Sound transmission class: STC 26 when tested to ASTM E 413
 Min 3-hr fire rated when tested to ASTM E 119 or fire rating as per DCD regulation or per fire
safety consultant report.
 Joint type: Butt joint with silicone sealant as section Z22 (the specialist contractor shall provide all
necessary accessories to achieve a weather tight joint).
 Accessories: The finished surface shall be protected with a self-adhesive peel-off protective film
with two layers (white and black), tested to withstand at least six month exposure to local weather
conditions without losing the original peel-off characteristic or causing stains or other damage.
 Primary fasteners: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval. Shall be stainless steel non- corrosive grade.
- Number and location of fasteners: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to the
Employer’s Representative's approval.
 Panel Tolerances:
- Width: ±2 mm.
- Length: ±4 mm.
- Thickness: ±0.2 mm.
- Bow: Maximum 5% of the length and/ or width.
- Squareness: Maximum 5 mm.
 Special features/requirements:

- Aluminium composite materials and its core both shall be tested, certified and approved by
Dubai Civil Defense. Contractor shall use only Civil Defense approved products/systems in the
project and shall be responsible for obtaining DCD approval for all site installations. Also
contractor shall be responsible for arranging inspection by DCD approved House of Expertise
on site installation at 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 100% and submit reports for each
stage for Civil Defense submission.
- Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Dubai Municipality circular #215
concerning fire protection and prohibited use of combustible materials in building and
façade cladding.
- Waterproofing to the backing walls shall be as specified in section J30.
- Thermal insulation to the backing walls shall be as specified in section P10.
- Aluminium composite panel cladding shall not be fixed directly to walls made of aerated
concrete blocks or hollow concrete blocks or gypsum board. The specialist contractor shall be
responsible for the design, supply and fixing of alternative fixing methods to the
Employer’s Representative's approval.
- For covering panels with "solid colours", a two-coat, two bake coating system shall be
applied. The total dry film thickness shall be 25 microns (minimum) and shall consist of a
conversion coat, an inhibitive primer and PVDF colour coat.
- For covering panels with "metallic colours", a three-coat, three bake coating system shall be
applied. The total dry film thickness shall be 35 microns (minimum) and shall consist of a
conversion coat, an inhibitive primer, metallic and clear PVDF coat.
- The panel surface shall not have any irregularities such as roughness, buckling or other
visual imperfection that exceed the specification guidelines of visual inspection.
- Aluminium or stainless steel rivets, bolts and/ or screws, and several adhesives and two-
sided adhesive tapes shall be used to join the panels to different kinds of metals.
- All fixing accessories shall be stainless steel non corrosive grade.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

170 DESIGN

 Cladding: Complete detailed design of the cladding system and submit before commencementof
fabrication.
- Standard: To BS 5427-1 and local authority regulations.
 Related works: Coordinate in detailed design.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 139 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

172 THERMAL PERFORMANCE/ BRIDGING

 Requirement: Complete thermal design of the cladding/ covering system to avoid excessive
thermal bridging.
- Standard: MCRMA Technical Paper 14 and DM green building regulation.

175 PRODUCT SAMPLES

 General: Before commencing detailed design, submit labeled samples of the following:
All products specified in this section and applicable to the project

176 FASTENER SAMPLES

 General: During detailed design, submit labeled samples of each type of fastener.

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

185 PERFORMANCE COMPLIANCE

 Verification: Before commencing fabrication, submit evidence based on laboratory testing or


computer modeling.
- Verifying authority: An independent testing laboratory approved by Dubai civil defense.

187 DEFLECTION OF METAL CLADDING/ COVERING

 Roof covering: Maximum permitted deflection under distributed loads as a multiple of span
and due to:
- Dead load: L/500.
- Dead and imposed loads: L/200.
- Dead and wind loads: L/90.
 Wall cladding: Maximum permitted deflection under distributed loads as a multiple of span
and due to:
- Dead and wind loads: L/120.

193A SOUND TRANSMITTANCE OF CLADDING/ COVERING SYSTEM - FREQUENCY SPECIFIC

The complete cladding/ covering system including cladding/ covering panel, thermal insulation,
waterproofing, backing walls and internal finishes, shall provide the following minimum sound
reduction indices (in dB) when measured in a laboratory complying with EN ISO 140-3.

A. Elevations facing cooling towers or other mechanical equipment:


Octave Band Centre Frequency Sound reduction indices (minimum)
125 Hz 25 dB
250 Hz 35 dB
500 Hz 41 dB
1000 Hz 48 dB
2000 Hz 49 dB
4000Hz 47 dB

B. Other elevations:
Octave Band Centre Frequency Sound reduction indices (minimum)
125 Hz 20 dB
250 Hz 23 dB
500 Hz 20 dB
1000 Hz 20 dB
2000 Hz 21dB
4000Hz 19dB

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 140 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Other requirements:

- Testing shall be carried out by the main contractor.


- Any openable doors or windows are to be shut during testing.
- A sample size of at least 10m2 shall be used and shall include the interface with the floor
junction.

195A INTEGRITY OF CLADDING/ COVERING

 Requirement: Determine profiles, sizes and thicknesses of panels and sheets, the sizes, number and
spacing of fixings, and incorporation of other accessories and fittings to ensure cladding/covering
system will resist factored dead, imposed and design live loads, and accommodate deflections
and thermal movements without damage, in accordance with BS 5427-1.
 Wind loads: Calculate to BS 6399-2, Standard Method and BS 5427-1 appropriate to location,
exposure, height, building shape and size, taking account of existing and known future
adjacent structures.
- Basic wind speed (Vb): As indicated on the structural contract drawings.
- Altitude factor (Sa): 1.
- Direction factor (Sd): 1.
- Seasonal factor (Ss): 1.
- Probability factor (Sp): 1.
- Terrain and building factor (Sb): Variable.
- External and internal size effect factors (Ca): 1.
- External pressure coefficients (Cpe): As determined from BS 6399-2, clauses 2.4 and 2.5.
- Internal pressure coefficients (Cpi): As determined from BS 6399-2, clause 2.6.
- Dominant opening: Service doors to be considered as open.
 Imposed roof load (no access): As determined from BS 6399-3 and BS 5427-1.
 Permanent imposed roof loads: As indicated on the architectural, structural and MEP contract
drawings.
 Temporary imposed roof loads: Maintenance access equipment and personnel.

198 WATER PENETRATION

 Requirement: Under site exposure conditions, moisture must not penetrate onto internal
surfaces, or into cavities not designed to be wetted.

200A AVOIDANCE OF INTERSTITIAL CONDENSATION

 Requirement: Determine interstitial condensation risk of cladding system using the method
described in BS 5250 . If necessary, provide a vapour control layer to ensure that damage and
nuisance from interstitial condensation does not occur.
 Outdoor psychrometric conditions (notional): To BS 6229, table 6 as follows:
Winter Summer
- Temperature 10°C 32°C
- Relative humidity 100% 89%
- Vapour pressure 1.227 kPa 4.207 kPa
 Indoor psychrometric conditions (notional): As follows:
- Temperature: 24 °C.
- Relative humidity: 55 %.
- Vapour pressure: 1.660 kPa.

202 AVOIDANCE OF SURFACE CONDENSATION

 Requirement: Determine surface condensation risk of cladding system using the method
described in BS EN ISO 13788. If necessary, revise thermal insulation to provide satisfactory
temperature factor (fmin). Ensure that damage and nuisance from surface condensation and
does not occur.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 141 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

FIXING CLADDING/ COVERING

215 PAINTING STRUCTURE

 Sequence: Paint outer surface of supporting structure before fixing cladding/ covering.

219 FASTENERS

 Unspecified fasteners: Recommended for the purpose by the cladding/ covering manufacturer.

221 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

 Unspecified fittings and accessories: Recommended for the purpose by the cladding/ covering
manufacturer.

223 PREVENTION OF ELECTROLYTIC ACTION

 Isolating tape: Type recommended by cladding/ covering manufacturer.


- Location: To contact surfaces of supports and sheets of dissimilar metals.

234 GUTTERS TO ROOFS

 Refer to Section H31 of this document

275 CONTINUITY THERMAL INSULATION

 Material: Mineral wool insulation as section P10.


- Manufacturer: Fujairah rock wool and Saudi rock wool.
Product reference: As recommended by the facade cladding manufacturer subject to theauthority
approval.
 Installation: Secure and continuous with cladding/ covering insulation.

300 PROFILE FILLERS GENERALLY

 Material: Closed cell ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) synthetic rubber.
 Manufacturer: Plastazote, Paulamar UK, kingspan or approved equivalent.
- Product references: Density 45Kg/m3 to suit the profile to Employer’s Representative’s
approval. Shall be weather resistant and UV resistant.
 Colour: Black.
 Thickness: 50 mm.
 Fixing method: Self-adhesive tape and riveted to avoid fall.
- Requirement: To close cavities within the external envelope. Tight fit with no unintended
gaps.

410 FIXING PANELS AND SHEETS GENERALLY

 Cut edges: Clean true.


 Penetrations: Openings to minimum size necessary.
- Edge reinforcement: Aluminium sections to details.
 Orientation: Exposed joints of side laps away from prevailing wind unless shown otherwise on
drawings.
 Panel and sheet ends, laps and raking cut edges: Fully supported and with fixings at top of lap.
 Fasteners: Drill holes. Position at regular intervals in straight lines, centered on support
bearings.
- Position of fasteners in oversized drilled holes: Central.
- Fasteners torque: Sufficient to correctly compress washers.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 142 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Debris: Remove dust and other foreign matter before finally fixing panel and sheets.
 Completion: Check fixings to ensure water tightness and that panels and sheets are secure.
 Cut edges: Paint to match face finish.

470 STRUCTURAL MOVEMENT JOINTS

 Type: Cover flashing fixed on one side over gap between panels.
 Location: Coincident with structural movement joint.
 Width of gap: To match structural movement joint requirements.
 Requirement: Weather tight.

480 FLASHINGS/ TRIMS GENERALLY

 Lap joint treatment:


- Vertical and sloping flashings/ trims: End laps to be same as for adjacent panels.
- Horizontal flashings/ trims: End laps to be min 150 mm, sealed and where possible
arranged with laps away from prevailing wind.
 Method of fixing: To structure in conjunction with adjacent panels. Otherwise to panels.
- Fasteners: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.

482 BUTT JOINTED FLASHINGS/ TRIMS

 Locations: As indicated on the contract drawings.


 Butt straps: 300 mm wide and made from sheet of same material and finish.
 Butt joints: Seal.

540 ABUTMENTS

 Junctions with flashings: Weather tight and neatly dressed down.

550 SEALING EXTERNAL LAPS

 Sealant tape: Types recommended by panel/ sheet manufacturer.


 Position of tape: Below fixing positions in straight unbroken lines, parallel to and slightly back
from edge of panel/ sheet.
 Seal quality: Effective, continuous and not over compressed.
 End laps: Sealant tape positions:
- Single line tape: Immediately below line of fasteners.
- Second line tape (where specified): Slightly set back from the edge of external sheet.
 Side laps: Sealant tape positions:
- Single line tape: Outside line of fasteners.
- Second line tape (where specified): On other side of fasteners.

560 SAFETY SIGNS


 Fixing locations of signs: As per design in compliance with Employer’s Requirements.
 Manufacturer: As recommended by the specialist contractor subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
- Product reference: As recommended by the specialist contractor subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
 Material: Aluminium with polyester powder coated base, screen printed graphics.
 Signs description:
Hazard sign as BS 5499-5, code 8.C.0072 with supplementary text sign, lettering 'DANGER
fragile roof'.
General sign with mandatory instruction to BS 5499-5, code 11.A.0103 with supplementary
text sign, 'Use crawling boards'.

***END OF SECTION H43***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 143 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION J10
CEMENTITIOUS MORTAR TANKING/ DAMP
PROOFING

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 144 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

J10 CEMENTITIOUS MORTAR TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING

TO BE READ WITH PRELIMINARIES/ GENERAL CONDITIONS

TYPES OF TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING

110 PROPRIETARY FLEXIBLE WATERPROOF COATING (To shower area walls)


 Substrate: Plastered block work surface or as per approved detailed design.
- Product reference: Two component acrylic reinforced Cementitious, flexible waterproof
coating that requires only on site mixing to form the ideal product to waterproof
concrete, masonry and most other construction materils.
 Properties:
- To provide a flexible low permeability surface.
- Excellent resistance to ingress of water.
- Slip resistant amd waterproof to substrate.
- Excellent adhesion to concrete, block work, stones and ceramic tiles.
- Excellent resistance to chloride ion diffusion and carbon dioxide.
- Purpose made, factory prepared and preblended and ready to use.
- Non toxic.
- Breathable.
- Density: Min 1,900Kg/m3.
- Standards: DIN 1048 part 5, BS 8102, BS1881 part 208, BS 6920, BS 476 part 6.
 Coats (excluding dubbing out):
- Number (excluding keying mixes): Minimum 2 coats.
- Thickness: Minimum 2mm.
 Finish: Suitable to receive the wall finishes.
 Other requirements: Proprietary factory prepared preblended powder mix and
environmentally friendly acrylic emulsion shall be mixed at site as per manufacturer’s instruction .

MATERIALS AND MAKING OF MORTAR

310 CEMENTS FOR SITE BATCHED AND MIXED MORTAR (If applicable)
 Cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked.
- Types: Portland cement, CEM I.
- Portland slag cement, CEM II/S.
- Portland fly ash cement, CEM II/V or W.
- Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5.
 Sulfate resisting Portland cement: To BS 4027 and
Kitemarked. Strength class: 42.5.

315 SAND FOR SITE BATCHED AND MIXED MORTAR (If applicable)
 Standard: To BS EN 13139.
- Grading: 0/2 or 0/4 (CP or MP); category 2 fines.
 Procurement: Obtain from one
source. Colour and texture:
Consistent.

320 ADMIXTURES FOR SITE BATCHED AND MIXED MORTAR


Admixtures other than proprietary waterproofing admixture: Do not use.

330 MOVEMENT JOINT SYSTEM


 Manufacturer: Submit proposal for approval.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 145 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Product reference: Submit proposal for approval.


Application: As section Z22.

340 SEALANTS
- Product reference: As recommended by the manufacturer for intented usage.
 Colour: To Employer’s Representative’s
approval. Application: As section Z22.

350 MIXING
 Site batched constituents: (If applicable)
- Batching: By volume. Use clean and accurate gauge boxes or buckets.
- Mix proportions: Adjust to suit moisture content of sand.
 Factory-made preblended constituents: Mix using methods recommended by the
coatingmanufacturer.
 Mixes: Of uniform consistency and free from
lumps. Free-fall drum mixers: Do not use.

360 COLD WEATHER


 General: Do not use frozen materials or apply coatings to frozen or frost-bound substrates.
 Air temperature requirements: Do not apply coatings when at or below 5°C and falling,
or below 3°C and rising.
- Temperature of work: Maintain above 5°C until coatings have hardened sufficiently.

PREPARING SUBSTRATES

410 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES


 Preparation generally: To tanking mortar/ admixture manufacturer's recommendations.
 Stability and soundness: Free from movement, and loose or weak areas that will cause failure
of tanking.
 Key: To achieve firm adhesion of tanking.
 Contamination: Free from previous coatings and contaminants including dirt, dust, efflorescence,
mould, oil, paint and plaster.
 Cracks, porous patches and other defective areas subject to water pressure and liable to admit
water: Control and seal using waterproof mortar recommended by the tanking mortar
manufacturer.
- Holes/ Recesses for fixings (where permitted): Prepared to receive fasteners.
- Openings and chases: Prepared, including sleeves for pipe penetrations and chases
to receive waterproofing compounds/ sealants.

420 PREPARATION OF MORTAR JOINTS AND CAVITIES


 Mortar joints: Rake out to a depth of 12 mm (minimum).
- Debris: Remove and flush out with water.
- Fill: Repoint with waterproof mortar to the tanking mortar manufacturer's recommendations.
 Blow holes, cavities, cracks, etc: Remove loose material and fill flush using waterproof
mortar recommended by the tanking mortar manufacturer.

430 TANKING INTEGRITY


Penetrations for fixings, services, etc: Shall be 100% waterproof.

EXECUTION

510 APPLICATION GENERALLY


 Application methods and coating sequence: As recommended by the tanking mortar/
admixturemanufacturer to achieve a water resistant structure.

520 JOINTS/ JUNCTIONS AND PENETRATIONS


 Abutments, joints and active cracks: Sealed and watertight.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 146 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Movement joints: Centred over joints in substrate and extended through waterproof
coatingand finishes.
- Daywork joints in successive coatings: Staggered and lapped.
- Angled joints: Not
permitted.Penetrations:
Watertight.

530 APPEARANCE OF TANKING


 Render/ Screed coatings: Even and consistent. Free from rippling, hollows, ridges, cracks
and crazing.
- Accuracy: A true plane, to correct line and level. Walls and reveals plumb and square
with neat arrises
 Thin slurry coatings: Consistent and free from hollows, cracks and crazing. Suitable to
receive specified finish.

540 FLATNESS/ SURFACE REGULARITY OF TANKING SCREEDS


 Measurement method: From the underside of a 3 m straightedge (between points of
contact) placed anywhere on surface and using a slip gauge to BS 8204-1 or -2 (or equivalent).
 Deviation of surface: Sudden irregularities not permitted.
 Maximum permissible deviation: To comply with the tolerance specified for tiled surface .

550 CURING AND DRYING


 General: Prevent premature setting, uneven drying and cracking of each coat.
 Curing coatings: Prevent evaporation from surface.
 Curing period (minimum): 3 days. Do not flood or expose to water until the surface is
completely cured.

560 PROTECTION
 Mechanical damage: Prevent impact and abrasion.
 Application of protective coatings/ linings: After completion of curing.

600 WARRANTY
 Works under clauses 110 shall be covered by a written warranty valid for ten (10) years starting
from the date of Taking over of the Works, supported by the manufacturer's product warranty
for the same period of time.
 The warranty shall be insurance backed and shall be signed by the applicator agreeing to repair
failure of waterproofing due to defects in material or workmanship.

***End of Section J10***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 147 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION J30
LIQUID APPLIED TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 148 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

J30 LIQUID APPLIED TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with liquid bituminous or resin
based materials applied to floors and walls to exclude ground water and dampness. Also deals with damp
proof coating on substrate behind external wall cladding and GRP lining on various surface.

TYPES OF TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING

140 COLD APPLIED DAMP PROOFING TO WET AREAS


(Bath, Shower, ablution, kitchen, FHCs, shaft floor,eye wash, cooler/water dispenser, battery
charging, servery, ablution etc)
 Substrate: In situ concrete or as per detailed design.
 Primer: Type and application as recommended by coating manufacturer.
 Coating material:
 Product reference: Single-component superior quality, elastomeric, liquid applied bitumen
membrane blended with special ingredients, meeting or exceeding the performance requirements of
ASTM C836-81, UEAtc. Product shall also comply with Green building requirements where
applicable.
- Grade: Self-levelling consistency for use on horizontal decks and trowel consistency for vertical
applications (i.e. upstands or planter walls).
- Number of coats: Two coats to achieve a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mm Coverage per
coat (minimum): 1.4 L/m², 1.5 mm wet film thickness.

 Performance Requirements:
- Highly effective waterproofing capability.
- Recommended for interior, exterior and protected roofing applications, does not age or harden.
- Applicable and bonds perfectly onto concrete and wood substrates.
- High elastic regain.
- High flexibility at high temperature. Can bridge cracks up to 2.00 mm width.
- Resistant to fungi and bacteria.
- Resistant to salts and diluted acids.
- Permeable to water vapor.
 Properties
- Specific Gravity (ASTM D70): 0.95 kg/L at 25 ºC, minimum.
- Solids Content: 55% minimum to ASTM D2939-03
- Elongation: 400% minimum to ASTM D638-95.
- Tensile strength (ASTM D638-95): Min 12N/cm2.
- Adhesion to Concrete Substrates: 0.50 N/mm2 to BS 1881 P207
- Puncture resistant (ASTM E154): 50 N @180mm Deflection.
- Water permeability(BS EN12390) @ 5 bars: Nil
- For inner waterproofing of planters, submit documentation that formed waterproofing
membrane is root proof.

 Reinforcement: As clause 240.


 Blinding: Apply clean sharp sand to final coat as clause 270.
 Other requirements:
- Concrete surfaces shall have a light steel trowel finish which is dry and free of dust, oil and
other contaminants.
- All preparatory work shall be cured for 12 hours (minimum) and cleaned with Xylol prior
to installation of damp proofing.
- Damp proofing shall be applied to all vertical penetrations (walls, columns, up stands, stacks,
above bath tubs etc.) up to 300 mm above finished floor level and top of bath tub.
- For the adjoining walls of shower areas, a cementitious water proofing coating shall be applied
up to 1.8m from the finished floor level. Please refer to section J10 for the details.
- A layer of metal lathing shall be provided over the wall area covered by membrane before
applying plaster on the walls.
- Carry out a flood test with a minimum of 25 mm of water for 48 hours. Drains should be

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 149 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

plugged and barriers placed to contain the water.


- Where assurance against damage by subsequent contractors is not possible, leveling screed as
section M10 shall be cast immediately after complete curing and testing of damp proofing.
Other trades shall be allowed in these areas only after completion of screed.
- If punctured, the waterproofing membrane shall be repaired and re-tested in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations subject to the Employer’s Representative's approval.
- When applied onto concrete containing micro silica, the damp proofing manufacturer shall
confirm in writing the compatibility of his product with concrete containing micro silica.

141 COLD APPLIED DAMP PROOFING TO EXTERNAL CONCRETE AND BLOCKWORK BACKING WALLSTO
CLADDING
 Substrate: The exterior face of external concrete and block work backing walls on which cladding to
be installed.
 Primer: Type and application as recommended by coating manufacturer.
 Coating material:
Product reference: Two component polymer modified cementitious, elastomeric water proof coating
with inherent crack-bridging ability. When cured the coating shall form an elastomeric and
impermeable protective coating membrane. Product shall comply with DCD regulations and Green
building requirements.
- Number of coats: Apply two brushes or spray coat.
- Coverage per coat (minimum): Not less than 1.9 Kg/m 2 at a wet film thickness of 1mm for each
coat.

 Performance Requirements:
- Resistant to positive and negative water pressure
- UV resistant
- Prevents coated surfaces absorption of saline solutions.
- Chemical resistant.
- Non-sagging.
- Produces seamless membrane of excellent adhesion to substrate.
- Non-Flammable.
- Class A in accordance with ASTM E84 in terms of flame spread index and smoke developed
index.
- Product shall be suitable for use in the external facade and shall comply with all regulatory
requirements of DCD and DCL.
 Reinforcement: Not required.
 Blinding: Not required.
 Other requirements: Surface preparation, mixing, application and curing shall be strictly in
accordance with manufacturer’s printed instruction and Employer’s Representative’s approval. When
applied onto concrete containing micro silica, the damp proofing manufacturer shall confirm in
writing the compatibility of his product with concrete containing micro silica.

142 COLD APPLIED DAMP PROOFING TO POOLS AND WATER FEATURES


 Substrate: Cement sand levelling screed as section M10 or cement sand plaster with waterproofing
additives as section M20.
 Primer: Type and application as recommended by coating manufacturer.
 Coating material:
Product reference: Fabric reinforced, load bearing waterproofing system. The system consists of self
curing liquid rubber polymer and an integral reinforcing fabric which, combined, form a seamless
waterproofing membrane meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM C627. Product shall also
comply with DM Green building requirements where applicable.
- Number of coats: Two coats to achieve a film thickness of not less than 0.5 mm after curing.
- Coverage per coat (minimum): 1 L/m², 0.5 mm wet film thickness.
 Reinforcement: Anti fracture fabric as recommended by coating manufacturer.
 Blinding: Not required.
 Properties
- Breaking strength: 16.5 MPa to ANSI A118.10(M-4.3).

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 150 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Shear strength: 1.9 MPa to ANSI A118.10(M-5.6)


- Elongation: 20 to 30% to ASTM D751-89.
- Service Temperature: Up to 80 ºC.
- Crack suppression: 3 mm to ANSI A118.12.5.4
- Hydrostatic Resistance: 820 KPa to ASTM D751
 Other requirements:
- All construction shall comply with L/360 maximum allowable deflection.
- Gypsum or asphalt based levelling compounds should not be used to prepare floors or walls
prior to application of the membrane.
- Precut the reinforcing fabric allowing for an overlap of 50 mm at ends and sides.
- Roll up the reinforcing fabric so that each piece can be placed when ready.
- Spread a layer of waterproofing liquid at joints and cracks. Imbed a 150 mm wide strip of
reinforcing fabric into the liquid and spread a coat of liquid over the fabric to seal it.
- Use a paint roller to apply a liberal coat of the waterproofing liquid to the floor or wall slightly
wider than the fabric width. Include joints and coves which have previously been reinforced.
While the surface is still wet, unroll a precut piece of reinforcing fabric into it. Then use a brush
to imbed the fabric and smooth out any wrinkles. As the fabric is imbedded, the liquid must
bleed through.
- Immediately apply a liberal coat of waterproofing liquid to completely cover the fabric.
- Make a final application of waterproofing liquid to the entire surface to completely seal the
membrane.
- Allow the membrane to cure fully for 5 to 7 days before flood testing.
- Finishes shall be fixed directly to the waterproofing membrane with adhesive as section M40.
The adhesive shall be compatible with the waterproofing membrane.
- If punctured, the waterproofing membrane shall be repaired in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations subject to the Employer’s Representative's approval.
- When applied onto concrete containing micro silica, the damp proofing manufacturer shall
confirm in writing the compatibility of his product with concrete containing micro silica.

143 DAMP PROOFING TO THE INNER SURFACE OF SEWAGE/INDUSTRIAL HOLDING TANKS AND
MANHOLES

 Substrate: In situ concrete.


 Primer: Primed with a resin mix to 0.2 to 0.3mm thick.
 Lining material:
Manufacturer: DSM.BASF, NCS Resins, Scott Bader, Akzo chemie, Ventrolex or approved equivalent.
Product shall also comply with Green building requirements where applicable.
Product reference:
- Resins: Two types, the gel coat and lay out mix. Both types are pre-accelerated by the addition
of cobalt. Just before application the resin mix to be catalyzed by adding methyl etyl ketone
peroxide. Thixotropic agent shall be added to minimize drainage from vertical surfaces. The gel
coat and lay up resin mix may be pigmented as required (Synolite 0999-1-2 from DSM BASF,
Ultraset 985PA from NCS resins, crystic gel coat 65E from Scott bader and butonix LPT from
Akzochemie or approved equivalent).
- Fiber glass: 450g/m2 chopped strand mat to be used as fiberglass reinforcement for laminate
made from E-glass chopped strands. (Chopped strand mat for hand lay-up from vetrolex or
approved equivalent).
 Thickness of GRP lining: Minimum 4mm and thickness shall be increased if required depending on the
type and usage of manholes and holding tanks.
 Application:
- Surface shall be primed with a resin mix. The primer coat shall seal all the pores.
- After the primer has gelled lay the required number of layers of chopped strand mats to
achieve the required thickness.
- Once the above is gelled apply final gel coat with 5% solution on paranfix wax in styrene.
 Other requirements:
- Concrete surface shall be smooth, hard and free from barrs and nests. It shall not be slippery and
no flaking or crumbling sections.
- Structural defects such as cracks, faulty construction joints and honeycombing shall be routed

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 151 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

out to sound concrete and repaired.


- Prior the application of the GRP lining, concrete surface shall be dry and certified by the
applicator for compliance with manufacturer’s requirements regarding the suitability of surface
to receive the lining.
- The coating thickness shall be checked in accordance with BS EN ISO 2808, four readings per m2
per coat.
- The GRP lining shall be cleaned with cleaning agents for the purpose as approved by the GRP
manufacturer.
- Testing of the waterproofing system shall be carried out prior to any finishing works in the
adjacent areas.
- Shall comply with DDA regulations.

143A GRP LINED DAMP PROOFING TO THE INNER SURFACE OF CONCRETE WATER TANKS
 Substrate: In situ concrete.
 Primer: Primed with a resin mix to 0.2 to 0.3mm thick.
 Lining material:
Manufacturer: DSM.BASF, NCS Resins, Scott Bader, Akzo chemie, Ventrolex or approved equivalent.
Product shall also comply with Green building requirements where applicable.
Product reference:
- Resins: Two types, the gel coat and lay out mix. Both types are pre-accelerated by the addition
of cobalt. Just before application the resin mix to be catalyzed by adding methyl etyl ketone
peroxide. Thixotropic agent shall be added to minimize drainage from vertical surfaces. The gel
coat and lay up resin mix may be pigmented as required (Synolite 0999-1-2 from DSM BASF,
Ultraset 985PA from NCS resins, crystic gel coat 65E from Scott bader and butonix LPT from
Akzochemie or approved equivalent).
- Fiber glass: 450g/m2 chopped strand mat to be used as fiberglass reinforcement for laminate
made from E-glass chopped strands. (Chopped strand mat for hand lay-up from vetrolex or
approved equivalent).
 Thickness of GRP lining: Minimum 6mm.
 Application:
- Surface shall be primed with a resin mix. The primer coat shall seal all the pores.
- After the primer has gelled lay the required number of layers of chopped strand mats to
achieve the required thickness.
- Once the above is gelled apply final gel coat with 5% solution on paranfix wax in styrene.
 Other requirements:
- Concrete surface shall be smooth, hard and free from barrs and nests. It shall not be slippery and
no flaking or crumbling sections.
- Structural defects such as cracks, faulty construction joints and honeycombing shall be routed out
to sound concrete and repaired.
- Prior the application of the GRP lining, concrete surface shall be dry and certified by the
applicator for compliance with manufacturer’s requirements regarding the suitability of surface
to receive the lining.
- The coating thickness shall be checked in accordance with BS EN ISO 2808, four readings per m2
per coat.
- The GRP lining shall be cleaned with cleaning agents for the purpose as approved by the GRP
manufacturer.
- The manufacturer / applicator shall submit a certificate confirming that the applied GRP lining is
suitable for the storage of potable water from DEWA supply.
- Water tanks shall not be filled before 7 days after completion of curing.
- Testing of the waterproofing system shall be carried out prior to any finishing works in the
adjacent areas.

144 COLD APPLIED WATERP R O O F COATING


(To sub structure in contact with soil and located above water table except UG water tank, external
and internal manholes and lift pit)
 Substrate: In situ concrete and solid pre-cast concrete block works as per detailed design.
 Primer: Type and application as recommended by coating manufacturer.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 152 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Coating material:
 Product reference: Rubber reinforced, bitumen emulsion, single component liquid which dries to
form a flexible coating.
- Number of coats: 3 coats to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 600 microns for
horizontal and vertical application.
- Coverage per coat: Minimum 1 liter per m² at maximum 200 microns per coat.

 Performance Requirements:
- Prevents coated surfaces absorption of saline solutions.
- Chemical resistant.
- Non-sagging to ASTM D2939-03.
- Produces seamless membrane of excellent adhesion to substrate.
- Non-Flammable.
 Properties
- Specific Gravity: 0.95 kg/L at 25 ºC, minimum.
- Solids Content: 55% minimum to ASTM D2939-03
- Rubber Content: Not less than 10% in dry membrane.
- Service Temperature: Up to 50 ºC.
- Adhesion to Concrete Substrates: 0.50 N/mm2

 Reinforcement: Not required.


 Blinding: Not required.
 Other requirements:
- All surfaces must be clean, dry and free from dirt, dust, oil and grease.
- Application shall be by brush or squeegee to prepared surfaces.
- Ensure there is no material slag.
- For multiple coat application, the successive coats should be applied at right angles to the first.
- Ensure the membrane is not punctured or damaged during subsequent applications.
- All applications should be continued up verticals to the existing damp proof course, unless
mentioned otherwise.

PERFORMANCE

165 WARRANTY
 Works under clauses 140, 142, 143 & 143A shall be covered by a written warranty valid for ten (10)
years starting from the date of Taking over of the Works, supported by the manufacturer's product
warranty for the same period of time.
 The warranty shall be insurance backed and shall be signed by the applicator agreeing to repair
failure of waterproofing due to defects in material or workmanship.

170 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS


 The waterproofing works under clauses 140, 141, 142, 143 & 143A shall be carried out by a specialist
firm having not less than five (5) years of continuous and proven experience in the installation of the
specified systems for projects of similar size.
 The specialist firm shall be franchised as approved applicator by the waterproofing system's
manufacturer.
 The applicator's representative shall confirm the suitability of the substrate prior to
commencement of waterproofing works.
 Products shall be delivered to site undamaged and with labels intact, showing batch numbers,
manufacturing and expiry dates where applicable.
 Products shall be stored and protected as required by the manufacturer until due for installation.
 Damaged and rejected materials shall be removed from site promptly.

180 SUBMITTALS
 Submittals shall be made in accordance with the general conditions of the contract.
 The specialist applicator's qualification documents shall be submitted to the Employer’s
Representative for approval.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 153 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Submit standard product samples as required by the Employer’s Representative.


 Submit the manufacturer's data sheets and technical documentation as required by the Employer’s
Representative.
 Submit test reports confirming the compliance of all proposed products with the requirements of
the specifications.
 Submit method statements for carrying out the works specified in this section.
 Submit shop drawings showing all the waterproofing details. Shop drawings shall be prepared at a
suitable scale as instructed by the Employer’s Representative.

EXECUTION

205 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATE


 Substrates generally:
- Smooth, even textured, clean, dry and frost free.
- Within tolerances for level and surface regularity.
- Vertical and horizontal surfaces: Correctly prepared and free from irregularities.
 Curing period of concrete substrates (minimum): As specified under respective sections.
 Moisture content and stability of substrate: Must not impair integrity of finished tanking/
damp proofing.
 Preliminary work: Complete including:
- Chases.
- External angles.
- Formation of upstands and kerbs.
- Movement joints.
- Penetrations/ Outlets.

207 PRIMERS
 Application: Uniform, continuous coverage.

COATINGS

210 COATING APPLICATION


 Adjacent surfaces exposed to view in finished work: Protect.
 Coatings:
- Apply in dry atmospheric conditions when primer is completely dry.
- Uniform, continuous coverage. Do not allow to pool in hollows.
- Firmly adhered to substrate and free from imperfections.
- Prevent damage to finished coatings.
 Penetrations: Impervious.
 Final covering: Apply as soon as possible after coating has hardened.

220 COLD APPLIED COATINGS


 Thinning: Not permitted unless recommended by manufacturer.
 Successive coats:
- Allow to dry before applying next.
- Apply at right angles to previous.

230 BITUMINOUS COATINGS


 Surfaces treatment: Lightly dampen
 Air and surface temperatures (minimum): 5°C.
 Weather conditions: Do not apply if there is a risk of rain during application and drying
unless effective temporary cover is provided over working area.

235 MODIFIED COATINGS


 Air and surface temperatures: Do not apply if below minimum recommended by coating
manufacturer.
 Curing: Keep dry until fully cured.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 154 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

240 REINFORCEMENT
 Laying: Laid into second coat with third coating applied locally over fabric.
 Edge overlap (minimum): 75 mm
 Finish: Smooth and free from imperfections.

250 HOT APPLIED COATINGS


 Application:
- Heat to minimum temperature required for coating to pour easily.
- Discontinue if frothing occurs.

260 JUNCTIONS WITH DPCS


 DPCs: Clean, all edges fully exposed.
 Coverage: Fully coat DPC and overlap adjacent surfaces by 50 mm.

270 BLINDING
 Coatings: Blind whilst wet.
 Surplus material: Remove when coatings are completely dry.

COMPLETION

310 INSPECTION
Interim and final inspections: Inspection for each coat shall be arranged and submit reports. Inspection
by product manufacturers also shall be arranged.

330 PROTECTION OF COATINGS


 Coated surface: Clean and free from contaminants. Permanent protection with board is required for
external membrane type water proofing. For other surface suitable temporary protection shall be
provided while backfilling and compaction to avoid puncturing the coated surface.
 Product reference: High quality, semi flexible bituminous board for use as protection course to
waterproofing against long term exposure, back fill and damage caused by construction traffic,
concreting and other subsequent works. Board shall be manufactured with a mix of bitumen
compounds, stabilizers and modifiers and strengthened with a rot proof fabric reinforcement,
providing superior puncture resistance and low deflection coefficient. Shall comply with the following
properties:-
- Thickness: 3 mm unless mentioned otherwise on drawing.
- Nominal weight: 4.0 Kg/m2
- Coating: Polymer modified bitumen
- Softening point(ASTM D36) : 150 degrees C
- Heat Resistance, 2 hrs@120 degree C(UAE tc): No flow
- Flexibility at 25 degree C(UAE tc): Flexible
- Water Absorption (ASTM D570): Less than 0.4 %

 Placement: Bond protection board to coating with double- sided tape.


- Edges: Butt joined and taped.
- Perimeter treatment: As per board manufacturer’s instruction.
 Contact with coating: Secure and continuous.

340 BACKFILLING
Timing: Carry out as soon as possible after tanking and protection are complete.

***End of Section J30***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 155 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION J31
LIQUID APPLIED WATERPROOF ROOF COATINGS
(COMBO ROOFSYSTEM)

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 156 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

J31 LIQUID APPLIED WATERPROOF ROOF COATINGS (COMBO ROOF


SYSTEM)

To be read with Preliminaries/General

Conditions. SCOPE OF SECTION

This section deals with combo roof system that includes spray applied Polyurethane foam, brush/spray applied
liquid UV resistant elastomeric coating, Geo textile filter membrane, bitumen impregnated fiber board,
protective screed concrete, sealant and acrylic waterproof solar reflective coating.

SUBMITTALS

100 TENDER SUBMITTAL:

 Product data for proposed materials


 List of tests included.
 Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/systems.
 Preliminary method statement.
 Preliminary quality plan.

102 POST CONTRACT SUBMITTAL AND SAMPLE

 Shop Drawings.
 Product Data on materials and components for use.
 Supplementary Product Literature: Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design
life of the system.
 Statement of manufacturer’s review confirming suitability of specified materials.
 MSDS
 Samples of all section materials including model

103 CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS

 Warranties
 Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Include component list with manufacturer’s reference
numbers, descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes; and
cleaning frequency.
 As built Drawings

PERFORMANCE AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

210 ROOF PERFORMANCE

 General: Firmly adhered, free draining and weather tight.

215 QUALITY ASSURANCE

 Standards:
 Comply with the requirements of National Federation of Roofing Contractors and the
FlatRoofing Alliance publications

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 157 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Comply with the requirements of Dubai Central Laboratory (DCL-mark), according to


ASTM C-1029 for rigid cellular spray polyurethane foam.

 Contractor’s Qualifications: A specialist who has at least 5 years’ experience performing similar
work and approved/licensed installer of the Combo-Roof System Applicator of the specified
system. The specialist shall be certified to BS EN ISO 9001-2008 or operate a similar quality
system acceptable to the Employer’s Representative.

 Prepare mock-ups and establish quality benchmark prior to proceeding with the application.

 Pre-construction Testing/Reports:

 Submit reports of independent tests demonstrating that the products and systems comply
with the specified performance requirements.
 Where test results for a material or product are not available, undertake testing to show
compliance with the Specification at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the
Employer’s Representative.
 The provision of testing data or the carrying-out of tests does not relieve the Contractor
ofhis responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or service life
requirements, etc.

220 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

 Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers or packages fully identified


with name and qualifying information
 Storage: Store materials in a clean, dry area protected from water and direct sunlight. Store
materials away from excessive heat. Do not exceed the allowable structural capacity of the
storage area. Observe manufacturer’s recommended temperature limits (MSDS)
 Handling: Handle in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Replace materials that
are damaged, contaminated or otherwise unfit for use. Do not open packaging or remove labels
until just prior to installation.

225 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

 Do not proceed with the work during inclement weather, when the temperature is below 28ºC,
the wind speed is in excess of (0.5-1.0)m/s, or when the weather forecasts are unfavorable,
unless suitable procedures have been agreed with the manufacturer.
 Surfaces to receive the polyurethane foam shall be free from dust, sand, completely dry and free
of entrapped moisture detrimental to the installation.

230 WARRANTIES

 Jointly with the applicator of Combo-Roof System, provide a warranty for the complete work for
a period of 25 years, undertaking to repair failures arising from defects in design, materials or
workmanship. Include in warranty a confirmation that the installation has been inspected and
completed in accordance with the warranty requirements. Include for performing repairs at the
convenience of the Employer.
 Failures shall include water penetration, dampness on the inside face of the supporting
or abutting structure originating from defects in the waterproofing system.

PRODUCTS
320 SOURCE OF SUPPLY

 Obtain products from manufacturers having at least 5-10 years’ experience of producing similar
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 158 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

materials and components. Henkel Polybit or approved equivalent


 Products visible in the finished work shall be obtained from or under the direction of the
manufacturer.

325 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 General: All components shall be covered by a single source warranty, fully guaranteed by the
supplier
 Components: Spray applied polyurethane foam, brush/spray applied liquid UV resistant
elastomeric coating, Geo-textile filter membrane 120 gm/sqm, bitumen impregnated filler board,
protective screed concrete, polyurethane sealant and acrylic waterproof solar reflective coating
 Product reference: COMBO ROOF System or approved equivalent.
 Surface preparation: As recommended by the manufacturer.
 Color: As advised by the Employer’s Representative.

330 SPRAY APPLIED POLYURETHANE FOAM

 Grade: Spray applied


 Density: Average 45-50 Kg/m3
 Thermal Resistance: 1.9533 (Km2)/W(Min)
 Thermal Conductivity: 0.0231(max)
 Compressive Strength: Average 275 Kpa
 Water Absorption: 0.69% of vol (max).
 Water Vapor Permeability: 0.57 perms(max)
 Response to thermal and Humid Aging – 2.2% (max)
 Tensile strength: Average 349 Kpa
 Closed Cells – 98%
 Thickness: Minimum 70mm(thickness shall be increased if required to satisfy authority
regulation and HVAC design requirement)

333 LIQUID UV RESISTANT ELASTOMERIC PROTECTIVE COATING

 Grade: Roller/spray Applied


 Thickness:500-800 microns
 Density: 1.2 gm/cc
 Colour: Black
 Solid Content: 60%
 Toxicity: non-toxic
 Elongation at break: 200-300%

335 GEO TEXTILE FILTER MEMBRANE

 Grade: Filter Membrane


 Mass: 120 g/m2
 Colour: White
 Thickness: 1.2mm
 Elongation – 50%

337 BITUMEN IMPREGNATED FIBER BOARD

 Grade: Compressible , non-extruding bitumen Impregnated fiber Board


 Density: 220 kg/m3
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 159 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Thickness: 12mm
 Water Absorption: 0.69% of Vol.
 Asphalt Content: 25%

339 CONCRETE SCREED

 Grade: Pouring
 Density: 2.5 kg/Ltr
 Cement Type: CEM 1
 Cement Content: 300 Kg/m3(Min)
 Strength: 25 N/mm2(Min)
 Minimum Thickness: 40mm
 Average Thickness: 85mm
 Recommended fall: 1:20

341 POLYURETHANE SEALANT

 Grade: Gun grade


 Colour: Grey
 Solid Content: 100%
 Specific Gravity: 1.4
 Elongation at break: 400%
 Movement Accommodation Factor: +/- 25%
 Temperature Resistance: (-20oC to 120 oC)

343 SOLAR REFLECTIVE COATING

 Grade: Roller/spray applied


 Thickness: 800-1200 microns
 Water Penetration: Nil
 Color: White or as approved by the Employer’s Representative. SRI value shall comply with
the bench mark set by green building regulation.

357 PIPE COLLARS

 Manufacturer: Submit proposal


- Product reference: Stainless steel non corrodible grade.
 Size: To suit the pipe diameter
359 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

 All materials shall meet the specified standards for the work, suitable to the local
climateconditions and in accordance with the requirements the building code requirements.
1. ASTM D-1622 Method of testing sprayed density.
2. ASTM C-518:2004 Method of testing thermal resistance.
3. ASTM D-1621 Method of testing compressive resistance.
4. ASTM C-209:1998 Method of testing water absorption.
5. ASTM D-2126 Method of testing response to thermal and humid aging.
6. ASTM C-209 Method of testing water vapor permeance.
7. ASTM D-1621 Method of testing tensile strength.
8. ASTM D-6226 Method of testing closed cell content.
9. ASTM E-84 Method of testing surface burning characteristic.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 160 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

EXECUTION GENERALLY

410 ADVERSE WEATHER

 Do not apply coatings:


- In wet conditions or at temperatures below 5°C, unless otherwise permitted by
coating manufacturer.
- In high winds (speeds > 7 m/s), unless adequate temporary windbreaks are
erected adjacent to working area.
 Unfinished areas of roof: Keep dry.

420 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATE

 Substrates generally:
- Secure, clean, dry, smooth, free from frost, contaminants, loose material, voids,
protrusions and organic growths.
- Compatible with coating system.
 Preliminary work: Complete, including:
- Formation of upstands, kerbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases and expansion joints.
- Fixing of battens, fillets and anchoring plugs/ strips.
- Substrate shall be blown clean using an air compressor to remove any remaining loose debris
 Moisture content and stability: Must not impair integrity of roof.

422 PREPARATORY WORKS

 General: Upon casting and complete curing of roof slab, manufacturer’s representative shall visit
the site to inspect the roof for waterproofing and heat insulation works.
 A preliminary site inspection shall be carried out and any further preparation work if required
shall be brought to the attention of the Contractor. Prior to commencement of roof
waterproofing works, Contractor shall make sure following conditions are met.
 All joints existing between roof slabs other than expansion joints provided shall be filled
with approved non-shrink grout.
 All electrical conduit and other service entries to slab shall be tied to the slab with wire tie and
nail.
 Rain water pipes shall be placed with cover at specified height as per approved slope.
 Vertical parapet wall shall be plastered to the required height as per approved slope.
 Roof door threshold shall be in place.
 AC or water pipe sleeves shall be in place at a minimum height of 400mm.
 All other works on the roof shall be completed prior to commencement of waterproofing works.
 All holes, cracks, defective joints and other defects in surfaces shall be made good,
including removing dirt, laitance, grease, rust and loose material.
 Adjacent surfaces, exposed to view, shall be protected.
 Protection: Cover or otherwise protect adjoining surfaces from damage or soiling during
theexecution of the work.
 Setting Out: accurately set out the works, particularly in relation to interfaces with other adjacent
or related works.

INSTALLATION OF ROOF WATERPROOFING SYSTEM

610 APPLICATION OF COMBO ROOF SYSTEM

 On acceptance of roof from the Contractor and approved by the Employer’s Representative,
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 161 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

application crew of the approved manufacturer shall visit the site to commence mechanized
cleaning operations using compressed air to free the entire substrate from dust and any other
loosely lying particles.
 On completion of cleaning works, other preparatory works shall be undertaken like covering
of parapet wall and other utilities fixed on the roof to avoid the risk of over spray.
 Upon completion of preparatory works polyurethane foam shall be spray applied over the entire
area including the vertical up stands to a minimum height of 200 mm. Minimum thickness
offoam shall be 70mm. The spray applied system shall form an impermeable waterproofing
cum insulation layer with high thermal resistance, closing all pores and cracks that exist in the roof
slab

 Once PU application is completely finished, acrylic liquid elastomeric coating shall be spray/roller
applied over entire foam including up stands to form a uniform coating of thickness 500-
800microns.
 Once acrylic coating is completely cured for min 48 hours, manufacturer’s representative shall
visit the site to inspect the works completed and carry out flood test for 48 hours. On successful
completion of flood test a test report shall be prepared and submitted to Employer’s
Representative.
 Upon successful completion of flood test, water shall be removed and geo-textile membrane
shall be laid as a protection layer over the entire roof area prior to commencement of screeding
works.
 Level marking shall be made for screeding at site and shall commence the paneling work using
bitumen impregnated expansion joint filler board and pre-mixed cementitious adhesive mortar
to attain the desired slope as indicated in the approved shop drawing.
 Protective screed shall be laid in panels and angle fillets done after application of PVA bonding
agents to the corner surface and being on tack free conditions of size 100x100mm and cured.
 Once screed is completely cured, all construction joints shall be opened and treated using heavy
duty polyurethane sealant and backing rod for accommodating movement of the concrete
during expansion and contraction.
 Once sealant is completely cured, solar reflective coating shall be spray/brush applied over entire
screed including up stands to form a uniform coating of thickness 800-1200 microns.
 Once final coat is completely cured for min 72 hours, manufacturer’s representative shall visit the
site for final inspection and a guarantee of 25 years shall be issued.

SITE QUALITY CONTROL

710 ADHESION TESTS

 Requirement: Carry out a trial coating to determine priming requirements and/ or


system suitability.
 Test results: Submit manufacturer’s report.

740 MOVEMENT JOINTS IN SUBSTRATE

 De-bonding tape: Apply over movement joints.


 Reinforcement strip: Apply over debonding tape.
- Bedding: Preliminary coating application.
- Joints: Lap in length.
- Bond: Continuous over whole surface, with no air pockets.
- Condition at completion: Smooth.

750 PRELIMINARY LOCAL REINFORCEMENT

 Reinforcement strip: Apply to junctions at upstands, penetrations and outlets, joints and fixings

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 162 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

in discontinuous unit substrates.


- Bedding: Preliminary coating application.
- Joints: Lap in length.
- Bond: Continuous over whole surface, with no air pockets.
- Condition at completion: Smooth.

760 APPLICATION OF ROOF COATINGS

 Thickness: Monitor by taking wet/ dry film thickness readings.


 Minimum 30 readings shall be taken for polyurethane foam application.
 Minimum 30 readings shall be taken for liquid elastomeric UV resistant coating.
 Screed thickness shall be verified while making level marking for the panels.
 Minimum 30 readings shall be taken for solar reflective coatings.
 Continuity: Maintain full thickness of coatings around angles, junctions and features.
 Rainwater outlets: Form with watertight joints.
 Drainage systems: Do not allow liquid coatings to enter piped rainwater or foul systems.
 Edge trims: Apply coatings over horizontal leg of trim and into recess.

770 SKIRTINGS AND UPSTANDS

 Top edges of coatings: Where not protected by flashings, apply into chases cut to a
minimum depth of 10 mm.
 Completion of chases: When coatings are fully cured, prepare chase and apply sealant as
section Z22.

COMPLETION

910 INSPECTION
 Coating surfaces: Check when cured for discontinuities.
- Defective areas: Apply another coating.
 Inspection for each stage of the waterproofing works shall be arranged by the
Employer’s Representative.

930 FLOOD TEST

 Condition of roof prior to testing:


- Coating: Complete to a stage where integrity can be tested.
- Surface: Clean.
 Outlets: Externally cover and seal. Protect against damage from water pressure using
temporary kerbs. Do not use plugs to seal outlets.
 Flood levels: Submit proposals. In no case higher than existing kerbs.
 Flood duration: 48 hours
 Inspection: Regular to detect leaks.
 Completion of test: Slowly drain roof. Do not overload or flood outlets.
 Test results: Submit.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 163 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

940 COMPLETION

 Roof areas: Clean.


- Outlets: Clear.
- Flashings: Dressed into place.
 Work necessary to provide a weathertight finish: Complete.
 Storage of materials on finished surface: Not permitted.
 Completed coatings: Protect against damage.
 Inspection by manufacturer: Manufacturer’s representative shall inspect and submit a report
to Employer’s Representative.

****END OF SECTION J31****

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 164 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION J40
FLEXIBLE SHEET TANKING / DAMP PROOFING

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 165 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

J40 FLEXIBLE SHEET TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING


To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

TYPES OF TANKING / DAMP PROOFING

190 SELF-ADHESIVE BITUMEN DAMP PROOFING/ TANKING


 Substrate: As per detailed design drawing.
 Primer: Required, refer Clause 335.
 Manufacturer: Duproof, Servicised or approved equivalent
- Product reference: Duseal FP, Bituthene 8000 HC or approved equivalent.
 Number of layers: One.
 Thickness/ Gauge: 1.5.mm
 Bonding: Full. Smooth out to exclude air.
 Joints:
- Surfaces to be joined: Clean and dry beyond full width of joint.
- Laps (minimum): Side and end, 50mm and 100mm respectively.
- Sealing: Roll to fully adhere.
 Accessories: All accessories required for the successful installation including protection
board.

220 FULLY BONDED BITUMEN DAMP PROOFING FOR SUBSTRUCTURE


(For any substructure at or within 300mm or below water table. However required for
underground domestic water tank, all holding tanks, all manholes & lift pit irrespective of water
table)
 Substrate: Blinding or concrete surface or gunitted shoring surface (if any) as per detailed
design. Cleaning the shoring pile surface, make good, prepare and level the vertical surface
with gunitting and all such preparatory works shall be carried out (where applicable) prior to
receive water proofing membrane. Where required solid block work with necessary structural
reinforcement shall be constructed by the contractor to receive vertical waterproofing
membrane.
 Primer: Solvent based bituminous primer as per manufacturer’s recommendation and
complying with ASTM D41, applied at a minimum rate of 5-6 m2/lit and allows drying. Non
volatile and volatile weight shall be Min 40% and Max 45% respectively when tested to
ASTM D 2369. Viscosity (say bolt)@250C shall be 25-125.
 Bitumen sheet:
-Type: High quality polymer rich SBS modified bituminous torch on membrane with a
core of spun-bound non –woven polyester mat. Membrane shall have minimum 4mm
thick and contains minimum 200g/m2 polyester mat as carrier. Membrane shall conform and
exceed the requirements of ASTM D6164, UEAtc. Membrane shall have rot resistance
properties. Product shall also comply with Green building requirements where applicable.

 Properties
- Penetration at 25 0 C: 25-35 dmm to ASTM D5.
- Softening point: Up to 120 ºC to ASTM D 36
- Water Absorption: <0.4% to ASTM D570
- Tensile strength(L/T): 900/700 N/5cm to UEA tc
- Elongation (L/T): 45/50% to UEA tc.
- Tear resistance(L/T): 230/245 N to UEA tc N/mm2

 Weight (nominal): 4.5 kg/m2.


- Number of layers: Minimum One (1). More layers shall be provided if required.
 Bonding: Torch bond.
 Joints: Side and end laps, minimum 100 mm and 150 mm respectively.
 Sealing: Fully bond.
 Accessories: Membrane on horizontal blinding shall be protected with 1000 gauge
polythene and 50mm thick protection screed. Membrane on vertical surface shall be
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 166 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

protected with 3 mm thick high quality semi rigid asphaltic protection board.
PERFORMANCE

300 WARRANTY
 Works under this section shall be covered by a written warranty valid for Ten (10) years
starting from the date of Taking over of the Works, supported by the manufacturer's
product warranty for the same period of time.
 The warranty shall be insurance backed and shall be signed by the applicator/main
contractor agreeing to repair failure of waterproofing due to defects in material or
workmanship.

305 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS


 The waterproofing works shall be carried out by a specialist firm having not less than five
(5) years of continuous and proven experience in the installation of the specified systems for
projects of similar size.
 The specialist firm shall be franchised as approved applicator by the waterproofing
system's manufacturer.
 The applicator's representative shall confirm the suitability of the substrate prior to
commencement of waterproofing works.
 Products shall be delivered to site undamaged and with labels intact, showing batch
numbers, manufacturing and expiry dates where applicable.
 Products shall be stored and protected as required by the manufacturer until due for
installation.
 Damaged and rejected materials shall be removed from site promptly.

WORKMANSHIP

310 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY


 Condition of substrate:
- Clean and even textured, free from voids and sharp protrusions.
- Preparatory works including gunitting to shoring surface and construction of block work
to support the membrane etc.(where found necessary)shall be in main contractor's
scope of works.
- Moisture content: Compatible with damp proofing/ tanking.
 Air and surface temperature: Do not apply sheets if below minimum or above maximum as
recommended by membrane manufacturer.
 Condition of membrane at completion:
- Neat, smooth and fully supported, dressed well into abutments and round intrusions.
- Completely impervious and continuous.
- Undamaged. Prevent puncturing during following work.
 Permanent overlying construction: Cover membrane as soon as possible. Do not expose to
direct sunlight for long.

320 INSPECTION
Give notice: Before covering any part of membrane with overlying construction. Also inspection
shall be arranged for each stage of application.

335 PRIMERS
 Manufacturer: same as membrane manufacturer
- Product reference: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
 Coverage per coat (minimum): 5 to 6 m2 per liter
 Curing: Allow to dry thoroughly before covering.

345 COLD APPLIED BONDING COMPOUNDS


Type and application: As recommended for the purpose by the membrane manufacturer.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 167 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

350 ANGLES IN BONDED DAMP PROOFING/ TANKING


 Preformed rot proof fillet to internal angles:
- Size (minimum): 50 x 50 mm, splay faced.
- Bedding: Bitumen mastic or bonding compound.
 Reinforcing strip to all angles:
- Material: As damp proofing tanking.
- Width (minimum): 300 mm.
- Timing: Apply before main sheeting.
 Dressing of main sheeting onto adjacent surfaces (minimum): 100 mm.

360 JUNCTIONS WITH PROJECTING DPCS/ CAVITY TRAYS


 Adjoining surfaces: Clean and dry.
 Dpcs/ Cavity trays: Lap and fully bond/ seal with sheeting.
- Laps (minimum): 150mm
 Bonding/ Sealing: Bonding compound or Torching as appropriate.

365 JUNCTIONS WITH FLUSH DPCS/ CAVITY TRAYS


 Adjoining surfaces: Clean and dry.
 Dpcs/ Cavity trays:
- Expose edge where concealed.
- Lap and fully bond/ seal sheeting to wall.
- Dressing of sheeting beyond dpc/ cavity tray (minimum): 50 mm.
 Bonding/ Sealing: Bonding compound or Torching as appropriate.

370 PREFORMED COLLARS FOR PIPES, DUCTS, CABLES, ETC.


 Manufacturer: submit proposal for approval.
- Product reference: to Engineer’s approval.
- Sealing: Fully bonded to penetration and sheeting.
 Completed junctions: Impervious.

380 PROTECTION BOARDS FOR DAMP PROOFING/ TANKING


 Manufacturer: DuboardSR, Armoproof, Servipack, Silcart or approved equivalent.
 Product reference: High quality, semi flexible bituminous board for use as protection course to
waterproofing against long term exposure, back fill and damage caused by constructiontraffic,
concreting and other subsequent works. Board shall be manufactured with a mix of bitumen
compounds, stabilizers and modifiers and strengthened with a rot proof fabric reinforcement,
providing superior puncture resistance and low deflection coefficient. Shall comply with the
following properties:-
- Thickness: 3 mm unless mentioned otherwise on drawing.
- Nominal weight: 4.0 Kg/m2
- Coating: Polymer modified bitumen
- Softening point(ASTM D36) : 150 degrees C
- Heat Resistance, 2 hrs@120 degree C(UAE tc): No flow
- Flexibility at 25 degree C(UAE tc): Flexible
- Water Absorption (ASTM D570): Less than 0.4 %

 Application: Membrane surface clean and free from contaminants.


- Bonding: Taped.
- Board joints: Butted and taped.
- Board contact with membrane: Secure and continuous.
 Backfilling: carryout when tanking, loading, protection and inspection are complete.

***End of Section J40***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 168 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION J41
REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOF
COVERINGS

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 169 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

J41 REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOF COVERINGS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with roof coverings of multiple
layers of reinforced bituminous membranes laid and jointed in bitumen or similar compounds. It also
deals with roof coverings of single layer reinforced bituminous membranes laid in bonding
compounds or mechanically fixed. It includes vapour control layers, insulation and surface protection
of chippings, tiles, slabs, stone or ballast. This section also includes clauses for repair or renewal of
roofs.

TYPES OF COVERING

125 SINGLE LAYER REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANE INVERTED ROOF COVERING (If used)
 Substrate: Lightweight foam concrete to slope (Density of foam concrete to be average 700
kg/m3).
- Preparation: Primer as clause 320.
 Waterproof covering:
Product reference: High quality polymer rich SBS modified bituminous torch on membrane with a
core of spun-bound non –woven polyester mat. Membrane shall have minimum 4mm thickness
and contains minimum 200g/m2 polyester mat as carrier. Membrane shall conform and exceed
the requirements of ASTM D6164, UEAtc. Product shall comply with Green building requirements
where applicable. Top polymeric foil/sand and bottom polyethylene foil finished for concealed
application and mineral faced surface shall be used for exposed application. Membrane shall
exhibit the following properties:-

 Penetration at 25 0 C: 25-35 dmm to ASTM D5.


 Softening point: Up to 120 ºC to ASTM D 36
 Water Absorption: <0.4% to ASTM D570
 Tensile strength(L/T): 900/700 N/5cm to UEAtc
 Elongation (L/T): 45/50% to UEAtc.
 Tear resistance(L/T): 230/245 N to UEAtc N/mm2

- Attachment: Partial bonding as clause 730.


- Flashings and detail work: Additional layer of SBS modified bituminous membrane, mineral
surfaced.
 Insulation: As per Section P10. Extruded polystyrene board density 32 kg/m 3, Min.100mm thick
and approved by local Authority and having necessary Certification. Thickness shall be increased, if
required to satisfy authority regulation and MEP design requirements.
 Filter layer: Geotextile fabric 140gr/m2 (non woven polypropylene). .
 Surface protection/ Securement: as indicated on the concept drawings.
 Accessories: Provide all necessary ancillary products and accessories in order to achieve a complete
watertight roofing system.

PERFORMANCE

210 ROOF PERFORMANCE


 General: Secure, free draining and weather tight.

230 INSULATION
 Requirement: Determine type and thickness of insulation and integral or separate overlay
to satisfy the following criteria:
- Thermal transmittance of roof (maximum): As per authority regulation and MEP
design requirement.
- Finished surface: Suitably even, stable and robust to receive the covering.
- Insulation compliance: To relevant British Standard, or Agreement certified and
authority regulation.

240 ATTACHMENT OF ROOF COVERING

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 170 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Requirement: Determine methods of attachment to resist wind loads. Provide for relative
movement of materials and effects of vapor pressure. Do not reduce performance of vapor control
layer.

241 WARRANTY
 Works under this section shall be covered by a written warranty valid for ten (10) years starting
from the date of Taking over of the project, supported by the manufacturer's product warranty
for the same period of time.
 The warranty shall be signed by the applicator agreeing to repair failure of waterproofing due to
defects in material or workmanship.

242 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS


 The waterproofing works shall be carried out by a specialist firm having not less than Five (5)
years of continuous and proven experience in the installation of the specified systems for projects
of similar size.
 The specialist firm shall be franchised as approved applicator by the waterproofing system's
manufacturer.
 The applicator's representative shall confirm the suitability of the substrate prior to
commencement of waterproofing works.
 Products shall be delivered to site undamaged and with labels intact, showing batch numbers,
manufacturing and expiry dates where applicable.
 Products shall be stored and protected as required by the manufacturer until due for installation.
 Damaged and rejected materials shall be removed from site promptly.
 The material for water proofing system shall comply with the requirements of Local Authority
andshall carry necessary certification.

243 SUBMITTALS
 Submittals shall be made in accordance with the general conditions of the contract.
 The specialist applicator's qualification documents shall be submitted to the Employer’s
representative for approval.
 Submit standard product samples as required by the Employer’s representative:-
- 300-by-300-mm square of sheet roofing, including side and end lap seam.
- 300-by-300-mm square of roof insulation.
- Full-size concrete roof paver in each color and texture required.
- 300-mm length of termination bars.
 Submit the manufacturer's data sheets and technical documentation as required by the
Employer’s representative.
 Submit method statements for carrying out the works specified in this section.
 Submit shop drawings showing all the waterproofing details. Shop drawings shall be prepared at a
suitable scale as instructed by the Employer’s representative. Shop Drawings for roofing system
shall include plans, elevations, sections, details, drain outlets and attachments to other Work
including base flashings and membrane terminations, tapered insulation, slopes etc.

PRODUCTS

320 PRIMER
 Type:
- As recommended by bitumen sheet manufacturer, or
- Manufactured from a special bitumen and solvent based. Properties when tested to ASTM:-
 Volatile solvent content: 45% to ASTM D-2369.
 Viscosity (Say bolt at 25°C): 25 Sec.
 Density @25°C: 0.8-0.95 Kg/Liter to ASTM D-70

325 BONDING COMPOUND


 Type: Oxidized bitumen to BS 3690-2, grade as recommended by bitumen membrane
manufacturer.
 Restriction: For heat sensitive insulation materials, use cold bonding compounds.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 171 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

335 ANGLE FILLETS


 Material: 1:3 cement: sand mortar.
- Size (minimum): 50 x 50 mm, triangular in section.
 Restriction: Fillets under torch-on bitumen sheets to be non-combustible.

340 PREFORMED SLEEVES, ETC


 Type: Preformed flanged sleeve.
 Manufacturer: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s representative's
approval.
- Product reference: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s
representative's approval.
 Colour: To the Employer’s representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range.
 Size: To suit the purpose.

385 FILTER LAYER


 Type: Geotextile fabric (non woven polypropylene).
 Grade: 140gr/m2

440 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE (XPS) INVERTED ROOF INSULATION

 Refer clause 257 of section P10.

460 STONE BALLAST


 Type: Washed, round aggregate.
 Supplier: Submit for approval.
 Size: Graded 16–32 mm, free from fines and sharps.
 Colour: To the Employer’s representative's selection.

470 PAVING TILES


 Type: White aggregate concrete tiles with minimum SRI 78%.
 Manufacturer: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s representative's
approval.
- Product reference: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s
representative's approval. Minimum thickness shall be 40mm.
 Colour/ finish: To the Employer’s representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
 Size: As indicated on the contract drawings.

480 PIPE COLLARS


 Manufacturer: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s representative's
approval.
- Product reference: Stainless steel non corrodible suitable for external application.
 Size: To suit the pipe.

EXECUTION GENERALLY

515 ADVERSE WEATHER


 General: Do not lay coverings in high winds, wet or damp conditions or in extremes
of temperature unless effective temporary cover is provided over working area.
 Unfinished areas of roof: Keep dry. Protect edges of laid membrane from wind action.

520 INCOMPLETE WORK


 End of working day: Provide temporary seal to prevent water infiltration.
 On resumption of work: Cut away tail of membrane from completed area and remove from roof.

530 APPLYING PRIMERS


Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 172 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Coverage per coat (minimum): As recommended by bitumen sheet manufacturer.


 Surface coverage: Even and full.
 Coats: Fully bond. Allow volatiles to dry off thoroughly between coats.

540 APPLYING BONDING COMPOUNDS


 Roof sited boilers: Permitted.
 Temperature of compound: Suitable to achieve bond over whole surface. Do not overheat.
 Heat sensitive insulation materials: Use cold bituminous adhesive or overlays recommended by
the insulation manufacturer.
 Application: Using materials and method recommended by bitumen membrane manufacturer.

550 CONTROL SAMPLES


 Type of covering: All types of covering specified in this section and applicable to the project.
 Sample area (minimum): 2 m².
- Location: As agreed with the Employer’s representative.
 Approval of appearance: Obtain before proceeding.

610 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES


 Substrates generally: Secure, clean, dry, smooth, free from frost, contaminants, voids and
protrusions.
 Preliminary work: Complete including:
- Grading to correct falls.
- Formation of upstands, kerbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases and expansion joints.
- Fixing of battens, fillets and anchoring plugs/ strips.
- Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that
roof drains are securely clamped in place.
- Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
- Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system
manufacturer has passed.
- Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture
by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
- Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components
to roof deck have been removed.
 Moisture content and stability of substrate: Must not impair roof integrity.

WATERPROOF COVERINGS/ ACCESSORIES

710 LAYING REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANES GENERALLY


 Direction of laying: Unrolled up the slope.
- Where practicable, install so that water drains over and not into laps.
 Side and end laps: 100 mm. Seal using materials and method recommended by bitumen
membrane manufacturer.
 Head and side laps: Offset.
 Intermediate and top layer/ cap sheet: Fully bond.
 Successive layers: Apply without delay. Do not trap moisture.
 Strips of bitumen membrane for 'linear' details: Cut from length of roll.
 Completed coverings: Firmly attached, fully sealed, smooth, weather proof and free draining.

730 PARTIAL BONDING OF REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANE


 Venting first layer: Loose lay, align and cut to length. Do not carry up angle fillets and
vertical surfaces or through details.
- Long edges: Overlap minimum 100 mm.
- Ends: Butt together.
 Intermediate layer: Fully bond to first layer and through to substrate.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 173 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

735 POUR AND ROLL BONDING OF REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANE


 Bonding compound:
- Hot and fluid when bitumen membranes are laid.
- Application: Spread evenly so that a small quantity is squeezed out at each edge.
 Bond: Full over whole surface, with no air pockets.
 Excess compound at laps:
- First and intermediate layers: Spread out.
- Top layer/ Cap sheet: Remove.

740 TORCH-ON BONDING OF REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANE


 Bond: Full over whole surface, with no air pockets.
 Excess compound at laps of top layer/ cap sheet: Leave as continuous bead.

745 COLD APPLIED ADHESIVE BONDING OF REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANES


 Bond: Full over whole surface, with no air pockets.

747 SELLF-ADHESIVE BONDING OF REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANES


 Bond: Full over whole surface, with no air pockets

750 LAYING MINERAL FACED REINFORNCED BITUMEN MEMBRANES


 Lap positions and detailing of ridges, eaves, verges, hips, abutments, etc: Submit proposals.
 Setting out: Neat, with carefully formed junctions.
 Lap bonding: Carry out only at pre-finished margins or prepared 'black to black' edges.
 Excess bonding compound at laps: Remove whilst still warm.

765 WELDED JOINTING OF SINGLE LAYER REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANES


 Side and end joints:
- Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces for full width of joint.
- Sealing: Hot air welded.

775 SKIRTINGS AND UPSTANDS


 Angle fillets: Fix by bitumen bonding or nailing.
 Venting first layer of bitumen membrane: Stop at angle fillet. Fully bond in bitumen for 300 mm
strip around perimeters. Overlap onto up stand with strips of BS 8747, Class S1P1 bitumen
membrane, fully bonded.
 Other layers of bitumen membrane: Carry in staggered formation up stand, with each layer fully
bonded. Where practicable, carry top layer over top of up stand.
 Up stands:
- At ends of rolls: Form with bitumen membrane carried up without using separate strip.
- Elsewhere: Form with matching strips of bitumen membrane, maintaining laps.
- Additional fixing of bitumen membranes: Not required.

785 FIXING PERIMETER TRIMS


 First/ intermediate layers bitumen membrane: Lay over roof edge up stand. Project free edge
25 mm from wall or fascia.
 Trim:
- Setting out: 3 mm (minimum) clear from wall or fascia.
- Fasteners: 50 mm stainless steel countersunk wood screws to BS 1210.
- Fixing: 30 mm from ends and at 300 mm (maximum) centres.
- Jointing sleeves: Fix one side only.
- Corner pieces: Purpose made.
 Completion:
- Contact surfaces: Prime.
- Joints: Cover with 150 mm long pads of bitumen membrane, bonded to trim.
 Completion of bitumen membrane:
- Top layer/ Cap sheet: Butt joint to rear edge of trim.
- Cover strip: Fully bond to trim and top layer/ cap sheet of bitumen membrane. Carry
over roof edge up stand and lap 75 mm onto roof.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 174 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Cover strip material: As top layer/ cap sheet bitumen membrane.

SURFACING

810 LAYING INVERTED ROOF INSULATION


 Condition of substrate: Clean.
 Setting out: Loosely lay board insulation units over roofing membrane, with long joints of
insulation in continuous straight line and with end joints staggered between rows. Abut edges
and ends between units. Install to achieve required insulation thickness over roofing membrane.
Cut and fit to within 19 mm of projections and penetrations.
- Install specified 100 mm thick insulation in one layer
- Joints: Butt together.
- Install protection mat over insulation, overlapping edges and ends at least 300 mm. Do not
lap ends of fabric sheets within 1800 mm of roof perimeter. Extend fabric 50 to 75 mm
above ballast at perimeter and penetrations. Apply additional protection mat layer around
penetrations to prevent aggregate from getting between penetrations and insulation. Do
not cover drains or restrict water flow to drains.
 Projections, upstands, rainwater outlets, etc: Cut insulation cleanly and fit closely around.
 Completion:
- Boards must be in good condition, well fitting and stable.
- Cover as soon as practicable to prevent wind uplift and flotation.

820 LAYING STONE BALLAST


 Condition of substrate: Clean.
 Gravel guards: Fit to outlets.
 Laying: Spread evenly. Do not pile to excessive heights.
- Depth (minimum): As shown in diagrams.
 Previously laid materials: Protect during laying of ballast.

860 LAYING PAVING TILES


 Condition of substrate: Clean.
 Setting out: Minimize cutting.
 Primer: Not required.
 Bonding compound: Fully bed tiles. Avoid excess compound being squeezed over tile face.
 Joints: 3 mm generally, 25 mm between bays.
 Bays:
- Bay area (approximate): 9 m².
- Bay joint locations: Submit proposals.
 Tiles at up stands and perimeters: Stop short of angle fillets by 50 mm.

COMPLETION

910 INSPECTION
 Interim and final roof inspections: Submit roof covering manufacturer's reports.

930 FLOOD TEST


 Condition of roof before testing: Complete to a stage where integrity of bitumen
membrane covering can be tested.
 Outlets: Externally cover and seal. Protect against damage from water pressure using temporary
kerbs. Do not use plugs to seal outlets.
 Flood levels: Submit proposals. In no case higher than kerbs.
 Flood duration: Three days.
 Inspection to detect leaks: Regular. Subject to Employer’s representative’s approval.
 Completion of test: Slowly drain roof. Do not overload or flood outlets.
 Test results: Submit on completion of testing.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 175 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

940 COMPLETION
 Roof areas: Clean.
 Outlets: Clear.
 Work necessary to provide a weather tight finish: Complete.
 Storage of materials on finished surface: Not permitted.
 Completed membrane: Do not damage. Protect from chemicals, traffic and adjacent or high level
working.

***End of Section J41***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 176 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION K10
PLASTER BOARD DRY LININGS / PARTITIONS /
CEILINGS

Page 177 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

K10 PLASTERBOARD DRY LININGS/ PARTITIONS/ CEILINGS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with gypsum plasterboard dry
linings fixed to timber framing, metal framing or solid substrates. It includes:
 Metal framing for partitions, wall linings and suspended ceilings.
 Fibre reinforced gypsum board linings.
 Dry lining (seamless) jointing techniques.
 Plaster skim coat finishing as an alternative to dry linings.
 Encasements to beams, columns and ducts.
 Access units integrated with dry lining system.

TYPES OF DRY LINING

115 METAL STUD PARTITION SYSTEM GENERALLY

 Partition type: Single row studs.


 Partition height: As per approved detailed design.
 Head condition: As per approved detailed design.
- Deflection allowance: Up to ± 15 mm.
 Structural performance:
- Strength grade to BS 5234-2: Medium.
- Additional tests: Not required.
- Air pressure and deflection: If applicable.
- Other requirements: None.
 Fire resistance of complete partition assembly: As per fire and life safety report or approved
detailed design or as per authority regulation.
 Airborne sound insulation of complete partition assembly:
- Weighted sound reduction index Rw (minimum) to BS EN ISO 717-1: Approximately 43
dB.
 Metal framing: Type recommended by board manufacturer to complete the partition assembly
and achieve specified performance.
 Insulation: Mineral wool to BS EN 13162 and complying with local regulation; density not less
than 25 kg/m³.
- Thickness: 75 mm or more if required.
 Linings: 12.5 mm thick plasterboard as clause 401 to each side unless required otherwise as
per detailed design.
 Finishing: Jointing as clause 670.
- Primer/ Sealer: As recommended by the board manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
- Accessories: Angle beads, trims as clause 692.
 Other requirements: Nil.

116 FIRE RATED METAL STUD PARTITION SYSTEM GENERALLY

 Drawing references: Approved detailed design drawings.


 Partition type: Staggered studs.
 Partition height: As per approved detailed design drawings.
 Head condition: As per approved detailed design drawings.
- Head deflection allowance: Up to ± 15 mm.
 Structural performance:
- Strength grade to BS 5234-2: Medium.
- Additional tests: Not required.
- Air pressure and deflection: Not required.
 Fire resistance of complete partition assembly to BS 476-20 and -22:
- Integrity/ insulation: 60 or 120 minutes as per approved detailed design or fire and life
safety report or as per authority regulation.
 Sound insulation of complete partition assembly:

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 178 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Weighted sound reduction index Rw (minimum) to BS EN ISO 717-1: Approximately 44


dB.
 Metal framing: As recommended for the purpose by the board manufacturer, fabricated from
galvanized mild steel sheet to BS EN 10142.
- Coating designation: DX51D+Z275-N-A-C.
 Linings: One or Two layers of 15 mm thick plasterboard as clause 404 to each side. Or as
required to achieve the required fire rating.
 Cavity insulation: 75 mm thick mineral wool to BS EN 13162 and complying with authority
regulation; density not less than 25 kg/m³.
 Finishing: Jointing as clause 670.
- Primer/ sealer: As recommended by the board manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
 Accessories: Angle beads, trims as clause 692.
 Other requirements: Nil.

145 WALL LINING SYSTEM (METAL STUDS) GENERALLY

 Cavity between wall and studs: As per approved detailed design drawings.
 Wall lining height: As per approved detailed design drawings.
- Intermediate bracing: As recommended by the board manufacturer subject to the
Employer’s Representative's approval.
 Head condition: As per approved detailed design drawings.
- Deflection allowance: Up to ± 15 mm maximum.
 Structural performance:
- Strength grade to BS 5234-2: Medium.
- Additional tests: Not required.
- Air pressure and deflection: If applicable.
- Other requirements: None.
- Fire resistance of complete wall lining assembly: To BS 476-20 and 22, 30/30 minutes
(Integrity/ Insulation). Or as per fire and life safety report or as per authority regulation.
 Thermal resistance (R) of complete wall lining assembly (excluding surface resistances): As per
DM/DDA green building regulation.
 Metal framing: Type recommended by board manufacturer to complete the partition system
and achieve specified performance.
 Insulation: As per fire and life safety report or where applicable as per detailed design.
- Thickness: As per design requirement.
 Moisture vapor resistance (minimum): Not less than 150 MNs/g.
 Linings: 12.5 mm thick plasterboard as clause 403 or as per detailed design requirement.
 Access units: To provide as per MEP requirement, if any.
 Finishing: Jointing as clause 670.
- Primer/ Sealer: As recommended by the board manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
- Accessories: Angle beads, trims as clause 692.
 Other requirements: Nil.

215 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM GENERALLY

 Structural soffits: As per detailed design drawings.


 Grid type: Double grid with primary channels.
 Structural performance: The ceiling system must safely support loads including services fittings.
- Subject to wind/ upward pressure: As applicable.
- Uniformly distributed loads (maximum): 0.6 kN/m².
- Additional loads/ pressures: Lighting, fire detection, firefighting, air conditioning and other
building services accessories as per approved detailed design.
- Deflection (maximum) of grid between points of support: Span ÷ 400 mm.
Test standard: To BS 8290-2

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 179 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Fire performance:
- Fire resistance of complete floor and ceiling assembly: To comply with DCD regulation.
- Ceiling resistance: As per DCD regulation.
- Protection to structural beams: As per DCD regulation.
 Airborne sound insulation performance:
- Sound insulation of complete floor and ceiling assembly. Weighted sound reduction index,
Rw (minimum) to BS EN ISO 717-1: Not less than 50 dB.
- Other requirements: None.
 Suspension system: As recommended by the board manufacturer to complete the ceiling
system and achieve specified performance.
- Material: Galvanized mild steel sheet to BS EN 10142.
- Coating designation: DX51D+Z275-N-A-C
 Linings: 12.5 mm thick plasterboard as clause 401 unless required otherwise as per detailed
design.
 Insulation: Provide if necessary to achieve the required acoustical properties.
- Thickness: Submit proposal for approval.
 Access units: Provide proprietary access panels set flush with the ceiling surface (size as
required for proper access to the ceiling services subject to approval).
 Finishing: Jointing as clause 670.
- Primer/ Sealer: As recommended by the board manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
- Accessories: Angle beads, trims as clause 692.
 Integrated services fittings: Provide noggings, trims and cut-outs as required for the installation
of the building services accessories.
 Other requirements: Provide perimeter shadow trims.

216 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM IN WET AREAS

 Drawing references: As per detailed design drawings.


 Structural soffits: As per approved detailed design drawings.
 Ceiling type: Double grid with primary channels.
 Structural performance: The complete suspended ceiling must safely support loads including
services fittings.
- Loads:
Wind/ upward pressure: As applicable.
Uniformly distributed loads: Maximum 0.6 kN/m².
Additional loads/ pressures: Lighting, fire detection, firefighting, air conditioning and other
building services accessories as per approved detailed design drawings.
- Deflection (maximum) of suspension grid between points of support: Span 400 mm.
Test: To BS 8290-2
 Fire performance:
- Contributing to overall fire resistance of floor construction, to BS 476-21 (stability/
integrity/insulation): To comply with DCD regulation and fire and life safety report.
- Ceiling resistance, to BS 476-22, (integrity/ insulation): To comply with DCD regulation.
- Protecting structural beams, to BS 476-23: To comply with DCD regulation.
 Airborne sound insulation performance:
- Contributing to overall sound insulation of floor assembly: Weighted sound reduction
index, Rw (minimum) to BS EN ISO 717-1: 50 dB.
- Other requirements: Nil.
 Suspension system: Grids, hangers, perimeter channels, fixings, etc. as recommended for the
purpose by the board manufacturer.
- Material: Galvanized mild steel sheet to BS EN 10142.
- Coating designation: DX51D+Z275-N-A-C.
 Linings: 12.5 mm thick plasterboard as clause 403 unless required otherwise as per detailed
design drawing.
 Insulation: Provide if necessary to achieve the required acoustical properties.
 Access units: Provide proprietary access panels set flush with the ceiling surface (size as
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 180 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

required for proper access to the ceiling services subject to approval).


 Finishing: Jointing as clause 670.
- Primer/ sealer: As recommended by the board manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
 Accessories: Angle beads, trims as clause 692.
 Integrated services fittings: Provide noggins, trims and cut-outs as required for the installation of
the building services accessories.
 Other requirements: Provide perimeter shadow trims as indicated on the contract drawings.

255 ENCASEMENT SYSTEM (METAL FRAMING) TO STEEL COLUMNS AND BEAMS

- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.


 Structural members: As per approved detailed design drawings.
- Extent of protection: Columns: Four sides/ Beams: Three sides.
 Fire performance:
- Protection to structural steel: To comply with DCD regulation.
 Framing system: Sizes and spacing of framing and fixings as recommended by the board
manufacturer.
 Linings: Min 15 mm thick plasterboard first layer as clause 404 and 12.5 mm thick plasterboard
face layer as clause 404. Thickness and number of boards to be re confirmed with respect to
the required fire rating.
 Finishing: Jointing as clause 670.
- Primer/ Sealer: As recommended by the board manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
- Accessories: Angle beads, trims as clause 692.
 Other requirements: None.

GENERAL/ PREPARATION

305 COMPLIANCE WITH PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


 Testing/ Assessment: Submit UKAS accredited and DCD approved laboratory reports for the
following: Fire resistance of fire rated partitions/ ceilings where applicable.
 Materials, components and details: As used in testing/ assessment reports. If discrepancies
arise, give notice.

325 PREPARATION OF MASONRY TO RECEIVE WALL LININGS


 General: Suitable to receive lining system. Redundant fixtures and services removed. Cutting,
chasing and making good completed.
 Holes, gaps, service penetrations, perimeter junctions and around openings: Seal.
 Adhesive fixings: Prepare substrate to achieve effective bonding.
- Contaminants: Remove loose material, dirt, grease, oil, paper, etc.
- Absorption: Control by dampening, priming or applying bonding agents as necessary.

335 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS


 Framing: Accurately position and securely fix to give full support to:
- Partition heads running parallel with, but offset from main structural supports.
- Fixtures, fittings and service outlets. Mark framing positions clearly and accurately on
linings.
- Board edges and lining perimeters, as recommended by board manufacturer to suit type
and performance of lining.

375 NEW WET LAID BASES


 DPCs: Install under full width of partitions/ freestanding wall linings.
- Material: Bituminous sheet or plastics.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 181 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

395 CONTROL SAMPLES


 General: Complete areas of finished work and obtain approval of appearance before
proceeding.
 Type of dry lining: All types specified in this section and applicable to the project.
- Location/ Size: As agreed with the Employer’s Representative.

COMPONENTS

401 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD


 Type: To BS 1230-1, type 1.
- Core density (minimum): 650 kg/m³.
 Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified finish.

402 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD (VAPOUR CONTROL)


 Type: To BS 1230-1, type 1.
- Core density (minimum): 650 kg/m³.
- Moisture vapour resistance of backing layer (minimum): 60 MNs/g.
 Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified finish.

403 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD (MOISTURE RESISTANT)


 Type: To BS 1230-1, type 3 and 4.
- Core density (minimum): 710 kg/m³.
- Core: Moisture resistant.
- Paper facings: Moisture resistant.
 Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified finish.

404 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD (IMPROVED FIRE PROTECTION)


 Type: To BS 1230-1, type 5.
- Core density (minimum): 800 kg/m³.
- Core: Including fibres for improved cohesion.
 Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified finish.

406 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD (IMPROVED FIRE PROTECTION AND MOISTURE RESISTANT)


 Type: To BS 1230-1, type 3 and 5.
- Core density (minimum): 800 kg/m³.
- Core: Moisture resistant and including fibres for improved cohesion.
- Paper facings: Moisture resistant.
 Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified finish.

407 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD (IMPROVED FIRE PROTECTION AND VAPOUR CONTROL)


 Type: To BS 1230-1, type 5.
- Core density (minimum): 800 kg/m³.
- Moisture vapour resistance of backing layer (minimum): 60 MNs/g.
 Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified finish.

408 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD (IMPACT RESISTANT)


 Type: To BS 1230-1, type 5.
- Core density (minimum): 900 kg/m³.
- Paper facings: Heavy duty.
 Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified finish.

409 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD (IMPROVED SOUND INSULATION)


 Type: To BS 1230-1, type 1.
- Core density (minimum): 820 kg/m³.
 Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified finish.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 182 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

410 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD (IMPROVED SOUND INSULATION AND MOISTURE RESISTANT)


 Type: To BS 1230-1, type 3.
- Core density (minimum): 820 kg/m³.
- Core: Moisture resistant.
- Paper facings: Moisture resistant.
 Exposed surface and edge profiles. Suitable to receive specified finish.

412 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING


 Clips: Steel wire, minimum Z275 zinc coating, soft temper, 2.65-mm- diameter minimum.
 Hanger Attachments to Concrete: As follows:
- Post-installed Anchors: Provide torque-controlled expansion anchors, with capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in solid or
grouted unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete.
- Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class
Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild).
- Power-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from zinc coatedsteel
of the following minimum properties indicated below, with clips or other devices for attaching
hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equalto 10 times
that imposed by construction. Tensile Strength: 1,900 Mpa. Shear Strength:1,117
Mpa.
 Hanger: As follows:
- Wire Hangers: to BS EN 10218 and 10244 zinc coating, soft temper, 4.00-mm diameter
minimum. Load capacity Class 25 kg to Din 18168 T2
- Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, BS EN 10142, Z275 hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, furnish
complete with cleats and fasteners. Load capacity Class 40 kg to Din 18168 T2.
 Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.80 mm, a minimum
12.50-mm- wide flange, to BS EN 10142, Z275 hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. Depth: As
recommended by manufacturer.
 Furring Channels (Furring Members): Steel sheet to BS EN 10142, Z275, hot-dip galvanized
zinc coating. Cold Rolled Channels: 0.55-mm bare steel thickness minimum.
 Cross Connectors: Manufacturer’s standard fabricated from corrosion-resistant material

413 METAL FRAMING COMPONENTS


 Standard: Comply with requirements of BS 7364.
 Material: Galvanized Steel Sheets: Continuously hot-dip zinc-coated, low-carbon steel sheets to
BS EN 10142 as follows:

Steel Grade: DX51D


Coating material: Zinc (+Z)
Coating application: Immersing in a molten bath containing a zinc content of
at least 99%.
Coating finish: Best quality surface (C).
Coating designation: 275 (Coating mass minimum 275 gm/m2 including both
surfaces in triple spot test)
Surface treatment: Chemical passivation (C).
 Channels: 0.50 mm thick minimum, profile to details or hot-shaped if not indicated

414 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS


 General: Comply with requirements of BS 8212 and manufacturer’s recommendations.
 Jointing Compounds: For gypsum boards are to be proprietary drying-type factory-packaged
vinyl-based factory-mixed products complying with specified requirements for formulation and
intended use.
 Joint Tapes: Are to be pressure sensitive or staple attached proprietary reinforcing tapes,
compatible with and as recommended for particular purpose and application by jointing
compound manufacturer.

417 AUXILIARY MATERIALS


 General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 183 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

manufacturer's written recommendations.


 Steel Drill Screws: manufacturer’s standard self drill and self tapping steel screws black
phosphated for fixing plasterboards to metal framing, for use with:
- Lightweight metal up to 0.55 mm thick: to be tested to DIN 18182-2, 50021 and 50942.
- Metal profiles from 0.70 mm to 1.20 mm thick: to be tested to DIN 18182-2 and 50942.

430 ACCESS PANELS

 Provide access panels at locations selected by the Employer’s Representative and indicated on
approved shop drawings.
 Access panels are to comply with functional requirements and other sections.

INSTALLATION

435 DRY LININGS GENERALLY


 General: Use fixing, jointing, sealing and finishing materials, components and installation
methods recommended by board manufacturer.
 Cutting plasterboards: Neatly and accurately without damaging core or tearing paper facing.
- Cut edges: Minimize and position at internal angles wherever possible. Mask with bound
edges of adjacent boards at external corners.
 Fixings boards: Securely and firmly to suitably prepared and accurately levelled backgrounds.
 Finishing: Neatly to give flush, smooth, flat surfaces free from bowing and abrupt changes of
level.

445 CEILINGS
 Sequence: Fix boards to ceilings before dry lined walls and partitions.
 Orientation of boards: Fix with bound edges at right angles to supports and with ends
staggered in adjacent rows.
 Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.

455 METAL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS/ WALLS LININGS

 Setting out: Accurately aligned and plumb.


- Frame/ Stud positions: Equal centres to suit specified linings, maintaining sequence
- Additional studs: To support vertical edges of boards.
 Fixing centres at perimeters (maximum): 600 mm.
 Openings: Form accurately.
- Door sets: Use sleeved or boxed metal studs and/ or suitable timber framing to achieve
strength grade requirements for framing assembly and adequately support weight of door.
- Services penetrations: Allow for associated fire stopping.

465 STAGGERED STUD PARTITIONS


 Horizontal frame members (noggins, bearers, etc.) and boards: Fix between alternate studs and
not touching adjacent offset studs.

475 METAL FURRINGS FOR WALL LININGS


 Setting out: Accurately aligned and plumb.
- Vertical furring positions: Equal vertical centres to suit specified linings, maintaining
sequence across openings. Position adjacent to angles and openings.
- Additional vertical furrings: To support vertical edges of boards and at junctions with
partitions.
- Horizontal furring positions: To provide continuous support to edges of boards.
 Adhesive bedding to furrings:
- Dabs: Length 200 mm (minimum). Located at ends of furrings and thereafter at 450 mm
(maximum) centres.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 184 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Junctions with partitions: Continuous bed with no gaps across cavity.

485 SUSPENDED CEILING GRIDS

 Suspend ceiling hangers from building structures as follows:


- Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, counters playing, or other equally effective means.
- Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacing that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
- Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,eye
screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,and in
a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
- Secure flat and angle hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to
deteriorate or otherwise fail.
- Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
 Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for
panel attachment are level to within 3 mm in 3.6 m measured lengthwise on each member and
transversely between parallel members.
 Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
 Wire-tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for
assemblies indicated.
 Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacing indicated, but not less than
that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards.

505 INSTALLING MINERAL WOOL INSULATION


 Fitting insulation: Closely butted joints and no gaps. Use fasteners to prevent slumping or
displacement.
 Services:
- Electrical cables overlaid by insulation: Sized accordingly.
- Ceilings: Cut insulation around electrical fittings, etc.

510 SEALING GAPS AND AIR PATHS


 Location of sealant: To perimeter abutments and around openings.
- Pressurized shafts and ducts: At board-to-board and board-to-metal frame junctions.
 Application: To clean, dry and dust free surfaces as a continuous bead with no gaps.
- Gaps greater than 6 mm between floor and underside of plasterboard: After sealing, fill
with jointing compound.

530 CAVITY FIRE BARRIERS WITHIN PARTITIONS/ WALL LININGS


 Metal framed systems:
- Material: 12.5 mm plasterboard as clause 401.
- Installation: Form accurately and fix securely with no gaps to provide a complete barrier to
smoke and flame.
 Adhesive fixed wall lining systems:
- Material: Adhesive compound.
- Installation: Form in a continuous line with no gaps to provide a complete barrier to
smoke and flame.

545 CAVITY FIRE BARRIERS WITHIN SUSPENDED CEILINGS


 Type: As recommended by board manufacturer to meet the required performance.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 185 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Fire resistance: To BS 476-20, 30/15 minutes (Integrity/ Insulation), Unless required otherwise
per detailed design or required per DCD regulation.
 Ceiling void subdivision: Fix barriers as required.
 Fixing at perimeters and joints: Secure, stable and continuous with no gaps, to provide a
complete barrier to smoke and flame.
 Service penetrations: Cut and pack to maintain barrier integrity. Sleeve flexible materials.
Adequately support services passing through barrier.
 Ceiling systems for fire protection: Do not impair fire resisting performance of ceiling system.

555 FIRE STOPPING AT PERIMETERS OF DRY LINING SYSTEMS


 Material: Tightly packed mineral wool or intumescent mastic/ sealant.
 Application: To perimeter abutments to provide a complete barrier to smoke and flame.

560 JOINTS BETWEEN BOARDS


 Tapered edged plasterboards:
- Bound edges: Lightly butted.
- Cut/ unbound edges: 3 mm gap.
 Square edged plasterboards: 3 mm gap.
 Square edged fibre reinforced gypsum boards: 5 mm gap.

565 VERTICAL JOINTS


 Joints: Centre on studs.
- Partitions: Stagger joints on opposite sides of studs.
- Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.

570 HORIZONTAL JOINTS


 Surfaces exposed to view: Horizontal joints not permitted. Seek instructions where height of
partition/ lining exceeds maximum available length of board.
 Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers by at least 600 mm.
 Edges of boards: Support using additional framing.
- Two layer boarding: Support edges of outer layer.

590 FIXING PLASTERBOARD TO METAL FRAMING/ FURRINGS


 Partitions/ Wall linings: Fix securely and firmly at the following centres (maximum):
- Single layer boarding: To all framing at 300 mm centres. Reduce to 200 mm centres at
external angles.
- Multi-layer boarding: Face layer at 300 mm centres, and previous layers around perimeters
at 300 mm centres.
 Ceilings: 230 mm. Reduce to 150 mm at board ends and at lining perimeters.
 Position of screws from edges of boards (minimum): 10 mm.
- Screw heads: Set in a depression. Do not break paper or gypsum core.

592 FIXING INSULATION BACKED PLASTERBOARD TO METAL FURRINGS


 Fixing to furring: In addition to screw fixings apply continuous beads of adhesive sealant to
furring.

595 DEFLECTION HEADS


 Fixing boards: Do not fix to head channels.

FINISHING

650 LEVEL OF DRY LINING ACROSS JOINTS


 Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
 Joint deviations: Measure from faces of adjacent boards using methods and straightedges (450
mm long with feet/ pads) to BS 8212, clause 3.3.5.
- Tapered edge joints:
Permissible deviation (maximum) across joints when measured with feet resting on boards:

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 186 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

3mm.
- External angles:
Permissible deviation (maximum) for both faces: 4 mm.
- Internal angles:
Permissible deviation (maximum) for both faces: 5 mm.

670 SEAMLESS JOINTING TO PLASTERBOARDS


 Cut edges of boards: Lightly sand to remove paper burrs.
 Filling and taping: Fill joints, gaps and internal angles with jointing compound and cover with
continuous lengths of paper tape, fully bedded.
 Protection of edges/ corners: Reinforce external angles, stop ends, etc. with specified edge/
angle bead.
 Finishing: Apply jointing compound. Feather out each application beyond previous application to
give a flush, smooth, seamless surface.
 Nail/ screw depressions: Fill with jointing compound to give a flush surface.
 Minor imperfections: Remove by light sanding.

680 SKIM COAT PLASTER FINISH


 Plaster type: As recommended by the board manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
- Thickness: 2-3 mm.
 Joints: Fill and tape except where coincident with metal beads.
 Finish: Tight, matt, smooth surface with no hollows, abrupt changes of level or trowel marks.

692 RIGID BEADS/STOPS


 Internal: Galvanized steel to BS EN 13658-1.
 External: To BS EN 13658-2

695 INSTALLING BEADS/ STOPS


 Cutting: Neatly using mitres at return angles.
 Fixing: Securely using longest possible lengths, plumb, square and true to line and level,
ensuring full contact of wings with substrate.
 Finishing: After joint compounds/ plasters have been applied, remove surplus material while
still wet from surfaces of beads exposed to view.

725 REPAIRS TO EXISTING PLASTERBOARD


 Filling small areas with broken cores: Cut away paper facing, remove loose core material andfill
with jointing compound.
- Finish: Flush, smooth surface suitable for redecoration.
 Large patch repairs: Cut out damaged area and form neat hole with rectangular sides. Replace
with matching plasterboard.
- Fixing: Use methods to suit type of dry lining, ensuring full support to all edges of existing
and new plasterboard.
- Finishing: Fill joints, tape and apply jointing compound to give a flush, smooth surface
suitable for redecoration.

***End of Section K10***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 187 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION K32
PANEL CUBICLES

Page 188 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

K32 PANEL CUBICLES

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with proprietary panel
cubicles assembled on site from factory finished kits of parts including, panels, doors, privacy
screens, framing, stiffening, connecting and fixing devices, door ironmongery, coat hooks, toilet roll
holders, benches and other accessories.

120 PANEL CUBICLES GENERALLY

 Manufacturer: Refer approved / equivalent.


- Product reference: To the Employer’s representative's selection.
 Panels/ Doors: 12mm thick high pressure solid compact laminate.
- Core material: Layers of wood-based fibers impregnated with thermosetting resins.
- Finish: To the Employer’s representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
- Colour: To the Employer’s representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
- Edge treatment: Chamfered and finished without trim.
 Head rails: Polyester powder coated aluminium.
 Legs: Grade 316 satin finished stainless steel
 Ironmongery/ Accessories: Nylon coated/stain less steel (handle, locks, hinges, coat hooks etc)
 Other requirements:
- Continuous fixing channel at wall
- All accessories to be of bacteria resistant nylon.
- Shall comply with regulations of local fire department.

140 LAMINATE PANEL DOORS TO TOILET/ SHOWER CUBICLES

 Manufacturer: Refer approved / equivalent.


- Product reference: To the Employer’s representative's selection.
- Frame/ Supports: Proprietary nylon brackets
- Finish: To the Employer’s representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
- Colour: To the Employer’s representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
 Panels/ Doors: 12mm thick high pressure solid compact laminate.
- Core material: Layers of wood-based fibers impregnated with thermosetting resins.
- Finish: To the Employer’s representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
- Colour: To the Employer’s representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
- Edge treatment: Chamfered and finished without trim.
 Ironmongery/ Accessories: Nylon coated/stain less steel (handle, locks, hinges, coat hooks etc).
 Other requirements:
- All accessories to be of bacteria resistant nylon.
- Shall comply with the regulations of local fire department.

210 SAMPLES

 General: Before placing orders submit representative samples of the following:


- Panel material and complete colour chart.
- All ironmongery/ accessories.
 Delivered materials/ products: To match samples.

220 CONTROL SAMPLES

 General: Complete samples as part of finished work and obtain approval of appearance before
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 189 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

proceeding.
 Types: All items specified in this section and applicable to the project.
- Locations: As agreed with the Employer’s representative.

250 INSTALLATION

 Programming: Do not install cubicles before building is weather tight, wet trades have finished their
work, wall and floor finishes are complete, and the building is well dried out.
 Accuracy: Set out to ensure frames and/ or panels and doors are plumb, level and accurately
aligned.
 Modifications: Do not cut, plane or sand prefinished components except with approval from
the Employer’s representative
 Fixing: Secure using methods and fasteners recommended by the cubicle manufacture.
Prevent pulling away, bowing or other distortions to frames, panels and doors.
- Moisture and thermal movement: Make adequate allowance for future movement.

***END OF SECTION K32***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 190 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION K40
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS

Page 191 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

K40 DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section includes suspended ceilings of dry
construction comprising a membrane of tiles, panels, trays, boards or fabric, supported by exposed or
concealed suspended metal grids. Components are usually factory finished. Lighting, ventilation, fire
prevention and other services shall be integrated with the suspended ceilings.

TYPES OF CEILING SYSTEM

110 UNIT SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM WITH GYPSUM TILES

 Structural soffits: As per approved detailed design drawing.


 Ceiling system manufacturer:
- Product reference: Prefinished white gypsum ceiling tiles to the Employer’s Representative's
selection. Core shall be certified gypsum board to EN520, BS1230.
 Ceiling type:
- Grid form: Interlocking unless otherwise indicated on the concept drawings.
- Grid exposure: Exposed unless otherwise indicated on the concept drawings.
 Main Tees : Shall be double web design consisting of a rectangular bulb, 24mm exposed flange witha
rolled cap, with cross tee holes at 150mm on center.
 Cross Tees: Shall be double web design consisting of a rectangular bulb, 24mm exposed flange with a
rolled cap, web extending to form a positive interlock with main Tee and the lower flange
extended and offset.
 Access: Infill units fully demountable.
 Ceiling module: 600 x 600 x 9 mm unless otherwise indicated on the concept drawings.
 Ceiling soffit above finished floor level: As per approved detailed design drawings.
 Components:
- Suspension system: As stated above and in clauses240, 245 and 250. All exposed grid members
shall be powder coated finish 60 µm thick.
- Perimeter trim: 0.6 mm thick, galvanised steel, L shaped profile with 10 mm wide shadow
groove (powder coating as section Z31 to a minimum thickness of 60 µm).
- Timber edge battens: If applicable.
- Infill units: Smooth finished gypsum tiles with 5 mm bevel at edges (ceiling tiles facing shall be
washable, scrub able and brush able and with good resistance to normal cleaning. Reverse side
having aluminium foil backing).
- Access units: If applicable.
- Insulation: Provide if required.
- Air plenum barriers: As clause 290 where required as per MEP design.
 Accessories: Provide all accessories required to install the system complete.
 Integrated services fittings: As clause 395.
 Other requirements:
- Allow for all necessary coordination with the building services.
- Generally the suspended ceiling system shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 13964.
- Shall comply the regulations of local fire department.

113 UNIT SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM WITH CALCIUM SILICATE TILES


 Structural soffits: As per approved detailed design drawing.
 Ceiling system
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Ceiling type:
- Grid form: Interlocking unless otherwise indicated on the concept drawings.
- Grid exposure: Exposed unless otherwise indicated on the concept drawings.
 Main Tees : Shall be double web design consisting of a rectangular bulb, 24mm exposed flange witha
rolled cap, with cross tee holes at 150mm on center.
 Cross Tees: Shall be double web design consisting of a rectangular bulb, 24mm exposed flange with
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 192 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

a rolled cap, web extending to form a positive interlock with main Tee and the lower flange
extended and offset.
 Access: Infill units fully demountable.
 Ceiling module: 600 x 600 mm unless otherwise indicated on the concept drawings.
 Ceiling soffit above finished floor level: As per approved detailed design drawings.
 Components:
- Suspension system: As stated above and in clauses 240,245 and 250. All exposed grid members
shall be powder coated finish 60 µm thick.
- Perimeter trim: 0.6 mm thick, galvanised steel, L shaped profile with 10 mm wide shadow
groove (powder coating as section Z31 to a minimum thickness of 60 µm).
- Timber edge battens: If applicable.
- Infill units: Vinyl faced calcium silicate tiles, minimum 6mm thick, as indicated on the concept
drawings.
- Access units: If applicable.
- Insulation: Provide if required.
- Air plenum barriers: As clause 290 where required as per MEP design.
 Accessories: Provide all accessories required to install the system complete.
 Integrated services fittings: As clause 395.
 Other requirements:
- Allow for all necessary coordination with the building services.
- Generally the suspended ceiling system shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 13964.
- Shall comply with the regulations of local fire department.

115 A UNIT SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM FOR CANTEEN, KITCHEN/SERVERY

 Structural soffits: In situ concrete/structural steel frame as per detailed design


 Ceiling system manufacturer: As approved by the Employer’s Representative.
- Product reference: Wall to wall sound absorbing ceiling system intended for environment where there
is a risk of slight contamination, where cleaning is required. Core can be high density glass wool
and a painted cleanable surface or approved equivalent.
 Ceiling :
- Type: 600X600mmX20mm suspended ceiling.
- Ceiling module: 600X600 mm.
 Grid:
- Form: Interlocking
- Exposure: Exposed grid system subject to approval
- Spacing: As recommended by ceiling system manufacturer
 Access: Infill units fully demountable.
 Accessories: Provide all accessories required to install the system complete and recommended by
manufacturer.
 Integrated services fittings: As clause 395.
 Noise levels: Not exceeding 45-50 db or as recommended by acoustic consultant.
 Other requirements: Allow for all necessary coordination with the building services.

GENERAL/ PERFORMANCE

205 COMPLIANCE WITH PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


 Testing/ assessment: Submit UKAS accredited laboratory reports for the following:
- Fire performance (where applicable).
- Electrical continuity and earth bonding (where applicable).
 Materials, components and details: Use those used in the test/ assessment reports. If discrepancies
arise, give notice.

210 ENVIRONMENT
 Environmental classification to BS 8290-1: Normal.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 193 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

220 STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE GENERALLY


 Loads: The ceiling system must safely support loads including services fittings.
- Ceiling system subject to wind pressure: As applicable.
- Uniform distributed loads: 0.6 kN/m² (maximum).
- Point loads: To assess as per detailed design.
- Additional loads/ pressures to be sustained by ceiling system: Lighting, fire detection, fire
fighting, air conditioning and other building services accessories as per final MEP design.
 Deflection (maximum) between points of support:
- Span under 1200 mm: Span/400.
- Span 1200-1800 mm: Span/500.
- Span over 1800 mm: Span/600.
 Test standard: To BS 8290-2

COMPONENTS

240 SAMPLES
 General: Submit representative samples of the following: All components for all ceiling systems
specified in this section and applicable to the project.

245 STANDARDS
 Components: To BS 8290-2.
- Aluminium sheet, strip and plate: To BS EN 485.
- Aluminium bars, tubes and sections: To relevant parts of BS EN 515, BS EN 573, BS EN 755
andBS EN 12020.
- Metal ceiling furring channel: Galvanized sheet steel conforming to BS EN 10143, FE PO2 Z
G450 , 20mm high with 13mm flanges for secondary furring member
- Metal runner channel: Galvanized sheet steel conforming to BS EN 10143, FE PO2 Z G450 ,
38mm high with 20mm flanges for primary furring or horizontal stiffener or bracing.
- Rigid Metal hanger angles: Galvanized sheet steel conforming to BS EN 10143, FE PO2 Z G450 ,
with 25mm flanges.
- Hanger rods: Min 2.76mm diameter, galvanized mild steel pencil rods
- Adjustable hanger: Four(4) component adjustable type hangers fabricated of min 2.76mm
diameter, galvanized mild steel pencil rods and 1.6mm thick connector components made from
galvanized sheet steel conforming to BS EN 10143, FE PO2 Z G450
- Tie wire: 1.2mm diameter, soft annealed steel wire having Class 1 zinc coating and conforming to
ASTM A641.
- Furring clips: Spring steel wire type furring clips designed to flanges from 6mm to 25mm wide
and subject to Employer’s Representative's approval.

250 SUSPENSION SYSTEM GENERALLY


 Extent of system: Include hangers, fixings, main runners, cross members, primary channels, perimeter
trims, splines, noggings, clips, bracing, bridging, etc., which are necessary to complete the ceiling
system and achieve performance.
 Materials: Galvanised steel. However all exposed surface shall be powder coated finished.
 Top fixings: Anchor bolts 7mm diaX32mm long drill in, grade 316 SS expansion anchors conforming
to BS 3111, Part 2 . Hilti Kwik-Bolt or approved equivalent.
 Hangers: Adjustable rigid hangers to the Employer’s Representative's approval.
 Grid type: 24 mm wide T sections for exposed grids and clip-in profiles for concealed grids.
 Finish: Powder coating as section Z31, minimum 60 µm thick (applicable for exposed grids only).
 Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range
(applicable for exposed grids only).

265 INFILL UNITS


 Type: Refer Clauses 110, 113
- Product Reference: Refer Clauses 110, 113.
 Fixing:

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 194 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Fastener: Refer Clauses 110, 113


- Fixing center (maximum) : Refer Clauses 110, 113

285 INSULATION GENERALLY


 Type: Mineral wool pads with approval from local fire department.
- Thickness: 50 mm.
- Density: 45 kg/m3.
- Facings/ wrappings: Aluminium foil to back (facing void) and edges, white glass fibre tissue to
front.

290 AIR PLENUM BARRIERS GENERALLY


 Material: Rigid or semi-rigid non porous sheets with smooth non-dusting surfaces.
 Fire spread rating: As for ceiling materials exposed within the ceiling void.

EXECUTION

302 CONTROL SAMPLES


 General: Complete areas of the finished work in the following locations: As agreed with the
Employer’s Representative.

305 SETTING OUT


 General: Accurate, continuous, even, and jointed at regular intervals.
- Soffits: Free from undulations, lipping and distortions in grid members.
 Infill and access units, integrated services: Fitted correctly and aligned.
 Edge/ perimeter infill units size (minimum): Half standard width or length.
 Corner infill units size (minimum): Half standard width and length.
 Grid: Position to suit infill unit sizes
- Permitted deviations from nominal sizes: Allow for permitted deviations from nominal sizes of
infill unit.
 Infill joints and exposed suspension members: Straight, aligned and parallel to walls.
 Suitability of construction: Give notice where building elements and features to which the ceiling
systems relate are not square, straight or level.

310 BRACING
 General: Secure, with additional bracing and stiffening to give a stable ceiling system resistant to
design loads and pressures.

315 PROTECTION
 Loading: Do not apply loads for which the suspension system is not designed.
 Ceiling materials: Remove and replace correctly using special tools and clean gloves, etc. as
appropriate.

320 TOP FIXING


 Building structure: Verify suitability.
- Concrete: Drill and insert suitable expanding anchors.
- Aerated concrete: Fix through from the top of the concrete unit and provide a system of
primary channels.
- Structural steel: Drill, or use suitable proprietary clips/ adaptors.
- Metal roof decking: Fix to sides of corrugations.
- Timber: Fix to side of joists at least 50 mm from bottom edge. If ceiling system is intended for
fire protection, fix into top third of joists.
- Hollow structural members: Submit fixing proposals.
 Cartridge or powder activated methods: Do not use.

325 INSTALLING HANGERS


 Wire hangers: Straighten and tension before use.
 Installation: Install vertical or near vertical without bends or kinks. Do not allow hangers to press

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 195 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

against fittings, services, insulation covering ducts/ pipes.


 Obstructions: Where obstructions prevent vertical installation, either brace diagonal hangers against lateral
movement, or hang ceiling system on an appropriate rigid sub-grid bridging across obstructions
and supported to prevent lateral movement.
 Extra hangers: Provide as required to carry additional loads especially for MEP installations.
 Fixing:
- Wire hangers: Tie securely at top with tight bends to loops to prevent vertical movement.
- Angle/ strap hangers: Do not rivet for top fixing.
 Spacings: As indicated in the relevant clauses.

335 INSTALLING PERIMETER TRIMS


 Jointing: Neat and accurate, without lipping or twisting.
- External and internal corners: Mitre joints.
- Intermediate butt joints: Minimize. Use longest available lengths of trim. Align adjacent lengths.
 Fixing: Fix firmly to perimeter wall or other building structure.
- Fixing centres: 450 mm.

340 EXPOSED GRIDS


 Grid fixings: As recommended by the ceiling manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
 Main runners: Install level. Adjust with supporting hangers taut. Do not adjust by kinking or bending
hangers.
- Spliced joints: Stagger.
- Wire hangers passing through main runners: Sharply bend and tightly wrap loops.
- Angle/ strap hangers: Do not rivet for bottom fixing.
- Angular displacement of long axis of one runner in relation to next runner in line with it: Not
visually apparent.
 Cross members supported by main runners or other cross members: Install to form a right angle with
intersecting runner.
 Cross tees: Flat and coplanar with flange of main runner after panel insertion.
- Cross tees over 600 mm long, cut and resting on perimeter trim: Provide an additional hanger.
 Holding down clips: Locate to manufacturer's recommendations.
- Fire protecting/ resisting ceiling systems: Use clip type featured in the fire test/ assessment.

345 CONCEALED GRIDS


 Grid fixings: As recommended by the ceiling manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
 Primary support channels: Install level. Adjust level with supporting hangers taut. Do not level by
kinking or bending hangers.
- Wire hangers wrapped around primary channels: Wrap twice and tightly form loops.
- Angle/ strap hangers: Do not rivet for bottom fixing.
 Splines: Locate between infill units to level adjacent units and to resist air movement at joints.
 Spring-tee grids: Do not omit primary channel.

355 INSTALLING INFILL UNITS


 General:
- Cut perimeter infill units: Trim to full space between last grid member and perimeter trim.
Prevent subsequent movement.
- Deeply textured infill units: Minimize variations in apparent texture and colour. In particular,
avoid patchiness.
 Concealed grids: Install infill units uniform, straight and aligned. Avoid dimension creep.
- Infill units around recessed luminaires and similar openings: Prevent movement and
displacement.

365 INSTALLING METAL INFILL UNITS


 Sound absorbing pads: Fit to prevent upward air movement through infill units. Cut or fold pads in
cut perimeter infill units to full unit size. Reseal cut pads.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 196 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Cut perimeter infill units: Firmly wedge into perimeter trim, or clip down.
 Removal: Do not damage infill units. Use tools designed for the purpose.

375 BOARD CEILING SYSTEMS


 Cut boards : Neat and accurate
 Fixing boards to grids:
- Fixing: Screw boards securely and firmly to grid members. Provide a flat surface free from
bowing and lipping. Set heads of screws below surface of boards and fill flush with surface.
- Movement joints: Provide as appropriate for the area of ceiling system and/ or to coincide with
movement joints in surrounding structure.
- Boards applied in two or more layers: Stagger joints.
- Board edges: Fully support. Screw to grid members.

385 UPSTANDS AND BULKHEADS


 Vertical ceiling systems: Support and brace to provide alignment and stability.
 High upstands: Provide support at base of upstand.

390 OPENINGS IN CEILING MATERIALS


 General: Neat and accurate. Suit sizes and edge details of fittings. Do not distort ceiling system.

395 INTEGRATED SERVICES


 General: Position services accurately, support adequately. Align and level in relation to the ceiling
and suspension system. Do not diminish performance of ceiling system.
 Small fittings: Support with rigid backing boards or other suitable means. Do not damage or distort
the ceiling.
- Surface spread of flame rating of additional supporting material: Match ceiling material.
 Services outlets:
- Supported by ceiling system: Provide additional hangers.
- Independently supported: Provide flanges to support ceiling system.

401 CEILING MOUNTED LUMINAIRES


 Support: Independent.
- Independently supported luminaires: Adjustable suspension to line and level of ceiling.
- Ceiling supported luminaires: Modifications and/ or extra support required: No.
 Surface mounted luminaires: Units installed so that in event of a fire the designed grid expansion
provision is not affected.
 Modular fluorescent recessed luminaires: Compatible with ceiling module. Extension boxes must not foul
ceiling system.
 Recessed rows of luminaires: Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units, unless mounted
above grid flanges. Retain in place with lateral restraint.
 Fire protecting/ resisting ceiling systems: Luminaires must maintain protection integrity of ceiling
system.
 Access: Provide access for maintenance of luminaires.

406 TRUNKING
 Recessed trunking: Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units, unless mounted above grid
flanges. Retain in place with lateral restraint.

411 MECHANICAL SERVICES


 Fan coil units:
- Inlet and outlet grilles: Trim ceiling grid and infill units to suit.
- Space beneath: Sufficient for ceiling system components.
- Suspension and connections: Permit accurate setting out and levelling of fan coil units.
 Air grilles and diffusers:
- Setting out: Accurate and level.
- Linear air diffusers: Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units. Retain in place with
lateral restraint.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 197 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Grille/ diffuser ceiling joints: Provide smudge rings and edge seals.
 Smoke detectors and PA speakers:
- Ceiling Infill units: Scribe and trim to suit.
- Independent suspension: Required.
- Flexible connections: Required.
 Sprinkler heads: Carefully set out and level.

415 INSTALLING INSULATION


 Fitting: Fit accurately and firmly with closely butted joints and no gaps.
 Insulation within individual infill units: Fit closely. Secure to prevent displacement when infill units are
installed or subsequently lifted. Reseal cut dustproof sleeving.
 Width: Lay insulation in the widest practical widths to suit grid member spacings.
 Services: Do not cover electrical cables that have not been sized accordingly. Cut insulation carefully
around electrical fittings, etc. Do not lay insulation over luminaires.
 Sloping and vertical areas of ceiling system: Fasten insulation to prevent displacement.

421 CEILING SYSTEMS INTENDED FOR FIRE PROTECTION


 Junctions of ceiling systems with perimeter abutments and service penetrations: Seal gaps with
tightly packed mineral wool or intumescent sealant to prevent penetration of smoke and flame.
 Ceiling system/ wall junctions: Maintain protective value of ceiling system.
- Fixings and grounds: Noncombustible.
- Metal trim: Provide for thermal expansion.
 Access and access panels: Maintain continuity of fire protection.

425 INSTALLING CAVITY FIRE BARRIERS


 Fire resistance to BS 476-20:
- Integrity/ insulation: 30/15 minutes unless required otherwise as per final design or authority
regulation.
 Material: Wire reinforced mineral wool at least 50 mm thick having approval from local fire
department.
 Ceiling void subdivision areas (maximum): As per final building services drawings.
 Fixing: As recommended by the ceiling manufacturer subject to the Employer’s Representative's
approval
- General: Fix barriers firmly to channels or angles at abutments to building structure.
- At perimeters and joints: Secure. Provide permanent stability and continuity with no gaps to
from a complete barrier to smoke and flame.
 Joints: Form to preserve integrity in fire.
 Service penetrations: Cut barriers neatly to accommodate services. Fit fire resistant sleeves around
flexible materials. Fill gaps around services to fire barrier manufacturer’s recommendations to
maintain barrier integrity. Adequately support services passing through the barrier.
 Ceiling systems intended for fire protection: Do not impair fire resisting performance of ceiling
system.
 Ceiling systems not intended for fire protection: Do not mechanically interlink barriers with ceiling
system.

431 INSTALLING SOUND BARRIERS


 Material: Mineral wool wire reinforced mat with aluminium foil facing.
 Setting out: Align accurately with partition heads.
 Fixing: Fix tightly and secure at perimeters and joints. Use methods recommended by the barrier
manufacturer, including steel support sections as appropriate. Provide permanent stability and
continuity with no gaps.
 Gaps at junctions with partition heads, ceiling system, structural soffit, walls, ducts, pipes, etc.: Seal with
mineral wool or suitable sealants.

435 INSTALLING AIR PLENUM BARRIERS


 Fixing: Fix tightly and secure at perimeters and joints. Use methods recommended by the barrier
manufacturer to ensure permanent stability.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 198 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Edges and joints: Seal effectively to prevent air leakage.

500 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY AND EARTH BONDING


 Substantial conductive parts of the ceiling system: Electrically continuous and fully earth bonded to carry
prospective earth fault currents.
- Standard: To BS 7671.
 Sequence: Complete earth bonding as soon as possible after completion of each independent area of
suspension system.
 Testing: After completion of the ceiling system, associated services and fittings, test conductive parts of
suspension system required to carry earth fault current, or used as bonding connections. Give notice
before testing.
- Electrical continuity: Measure from various distant conductive points of ceiling system and to
earth bar in distribution board serving the area.
- Test current: Sufficient to indicate probable electrical performance under fault conditions.
- Test instrument: Type providing a pulse of about 25 A at safe voltage for safe duration, and
indicating resistance in ranges 0-2 ohms and 0-20 ohms.
- Resistance of measuring conductors: Deduce from test instrument readings.
- Test readings: Record and certify. Add results to resistance of other parts of the path forming the
earth fault loop.

COMPLETION

505 TOOLS
 Access tools: At Practical Completion, supply one set of the following:

All tools required to provide access to the ceiling void as well as, all tools required to dismantle or re-
assemble the ceiling system should maintenance works be required in the future.

520 USER INSTRUCTIONS


 Contents: Include the following:
- Correct methods for removing and replacing infill units and other components.
- Cleaning methods and materials.
- Recommendations for redecoration.
- Ceiling systems intended for fire protection: Limitations placed on subsequent alterations and
maintenance procedures, to ensure that their fire performance is not impaired.
- Maximum number, position and value of point loads that can be applied to ceiling system after
installation.

530 SPARES
 General: At Practical Completion

***End of Section K40***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 199 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION K41
RAISED ACCESS FLOORS

Page 200 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

K41 RAISED ACCESS FLOORS

To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.

12 SCOPE OF SECTION

This section deals with raised access floor systems supported off the structural subfloor to form a
void for the distribution of services. The construction normally consists of floor panels supported on
a grid of pedestals that have a vertical height adjustment mechanism. Access to the void is through
removable floor panels.

TYPES OF RAISED ACCESS FLOOR

120 RAISED ACCESS FLOOR

 Standard: To BS EN 12825.
 Subfloor: Floated Reinforced Concrete Slabs or as per approved final design drawings.
- Preparation: Apply dust proofing sealer as clause 431.
 Floor panels: Refer to clause 315.
- Accessibility: Full.
 Pedestals: As clause 320.
 Structural load class/ performance: Class 6. Min floor live load for server room shall be 8Kn/m 2
and for point load carrying capacity more than12Kn. Contractor shall verify the loading and
reconfirmed as per design requirement and authority regulation.
 Installed mass of system (maximum): 45 kg/m2 (without covering at total height of 250mm).
 Height:
- Finished raised access floor height above subfloor: 300 mm for server and UPS room
unless otherwise indicated on the concept drawings.
- Under-floor void height: According to the manufacturer's details.
- Limits on maximum and minimum heights: As per detailed design.
 Fire performance: As clause 234.
 Acoustic insulation: As clause 239.
 Thermal conductivity: As per detailed design.
 Under-floor plenum air leakage: As clause 249.
 Floor covering: Either antistatic factory bonded vinyl finish or as shown in concept drawings.
For server room and data center the panel finish must be antistatic.
 Accessories: Provide all accessories required to install the system complete including panels,
understructure, adhesives, sealants etc.
 Manufacturer: Refer approved / equivalent.

GENERAL/ PERFORMANCE

209 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

 The contractor shall examine all other sections of the specifications for requirements which
affect or are affected by this section.
 The contractor shall coordinate all trades affected or affecting this section to assure steady
progress of all work.
 Levels to be set to match the adjoining finished areas.

214 WARRANTY

Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties for work under this section for a minimum
period of 10 years from the date of Taking over of Works. Such guarantees shall be in addition to
and not in lieu of all other liabilities which manufacturer and contractor may have by law or by other
provisions of the contract documents.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 201 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

216 SUBMISSIONS

 Submit shop drawings in accordance with the contract documents for the Employer’s
representative's approval. Shop drawing shall be fully coordinated with previously approved
composite services shop drawings.
 Submit manufacturer's literature describing each product.

219 GENERAL PERFORMANCE

 Completed installation: Clean and stable. Free from bounce and vibration. No lipping between
floor panels.

234 FIRE PERFORMANCE

 Reaction to fire:
- Standard: To BS EN 13501-1.
- Class: A1 or as per current authority regulation.
 Resistance to fire:
- Standard: To BS EN 13501-2.
- Period of resistance: Rr30 or as per current authority regulation.

239 SOUND TRANSMISSION

 Laboratory system test: In accordance with BS EN ISO 140-12.


- Airborne sound insulation: 40dB.
- Impact sound insulation: Vertical 20dB, horizontal 40dB.
- Test report: Submit.

COMPONENTS

310 SAMPLES

 General: Submit representative samples of the following:


Floor panels, pedestals, pads, stringers, grommets and all accessories.
- Purpose: Employer’s representative's Approval.

315 FLOOR PANELS GENERALLY

 Panel size: 600 x 600mm nominal square and 34mm thickness.


 Tolerances:
- Deviation: To BS 12825 Class 1.
Life expectancy, excluding coverings (minimum): 25 years.
 Casing material: Steel.
- Casing finish: Phosphate primed and epoxy powder coated or galvanized Z-275.
 Core material: Light weight cementitious compound or Chipboard.
 Perimeter edging material: Pressure-bonded all steel.
 Weight of removable panels: Not to exceed 20 kg (without floor covering).
 Floor panel fixing: Gravity.
 Floor panel location method: Positive.
 Labeling:
- Nonstandard panels: Identify for relocation purposes.
- Service identification labels: Provide self-adhesive labels to identify under-floor services and
their direction. Fix to the visible surface of the floor panel, and under carpet finish if any.

320 PEDESTALS GENERALLY

 Life expectancy (minimum): 50 years. Submit manufacturer's life expectancy.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 202 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Pedestal fixing: Adhesive fixing.


 Adhesive fixing:
- Selection of test specimens: Submit proposals.
- Test results: Submit.
- Adhesive: Compatible with subfloor finishing.
 Adjustability: Adjustable.
- Limits on adjustability: No requirements.
- Locking: Required.
 Additional pedestals: Where required.
 Pedestal materials: 1.6mm thick Galvanized/chromatized Steel plate of area not less than
25mm diameter tube with base area not less than 100cm2 . Pedestal assembly shall be capable of
supporting a 3,000Kg axial load.
Pedestal shall have sound and impact absorption rubber bush system.
Pedestal shall include twin lock nut system for height adjustment and to prevent loss of height due
to vibration.

325A STRINGERS GENERALLY

 Type: U profile 30 x 13mm and 1mm thick capable of carrying mid span load of 250Kg.
 Removable stringers: Bolted on top of pedestal.
 Life expectancy (minimum): 50 years.
 Materials: Galvanized/ chromatized Steel.
 Other requirements: Applicable only when the raised access floor is deeper than 100 mm. A
sound absorption and vibration proof gasket shall be provided on the stringers.

335G ACCESSORIES GENERALLY

 Service outlet boxes:


- Type: As per approved detailed design MEP drawings.
- Rate: As per approved detailed design MEP drawings.
- Size (length x width): 250 x 250mm.
- Number of power outlets per box: As per approved detailed design MEP drawings.
- Number of data outlets per box: As per approved detailed design MEP drawings.
- Number of phone outlets per box: As per approved detailed design MEP drawings.
- Number of ports per box: As per approved detailed design MEP drawings.
- Installation: Drop-in.
- Lids: Zinc alloy die-cast suitable for fixing of matching floor covering and provided with
proprietary cable management accessories.
- Frames: Zinc alloy die-cast suitable for fixing of standard size power, data and telephone
outlets.
- Structural capacity: Outlet boxes should have sufficient strength to withstand normal
"accidental" loads.
 Air handling accessories: As per approved detailed design MEP drawings.
- Manufacturer: As per MEP spec.
- Product reference: As per MEP spec.
- Adjustability of grilles: As per approved detailed design MEP drawings.
- Finish: As per Employer’s approval.
- Colour: As per Employer’s approval.
 Level change accessories: As clause 455.
 Other accessories: As required to complete the system.

INSTALLATION

410 CONTROL SAMPLES

 General: Complete areas of finished work in the following locations: 3.0 m2 including all
accessories where agreed with the Employer’s representative.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 203 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

421 PREPARATION

 Cleanliness: Clean before installation and keep clean during installation.


 Setting out: Before installation of services, indelibly mark pedestal positions.
 Fixtures: Before installation, complete the fixtures which floor panels are to be cut around or
which supports are to bridge.
 Bridging structures - supplementary supports: Where required, all in accordance with the
manufacturer's details.

425 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

 General:
- Dry, well ventilated, not subject to extremes of temperature or humidity, and free from
rapid variations of temperature or humidity.
- RH of air (maximum): 75%.
- RH of surrounding walls (maximum): 75%.
 Subfloors:
- RH (maximum): 75%. Test to BS 8201 using an accurately calibrated hygrometer.
- Temperature (minimum): 5°C.

431 DUSTPROOFING

 Sealer: Colour tinted. Recommended by raised access floor manufacturer. Compatible with
materials used to pack and/ or fix pedestals.
 Sealing:
- Extent: Concrete and masonry surfaces within raised access floor void.
- Preparation: Surfaces to be sealed must be clean, dry and free from dust, grease and other
contaminants.
- Number of coats: Two.
- First coat: Apply before pedestals are erected.
- Second coat: Different tint to first coat. Apply after completion of services and other
associated work.

435 CUT FLOOR PANELS

 Size (minimum): Half full width x half full length.


 Burrs and rough edges: Make smooth.
 Edge sealer: Class 0 spread of flame rated aluminium foil self adhesive tape.
 Edge sealing: Seal exposed cut edges of floor panels that have moisture sensitive or
combustible cores.

441 RAISED ACCESS FLOOR LEVELS

 Permissible deviations in level:


- Over set length: ±1.5mm over 3m.
- Overall: ±2.5mm.

445 PERIMETERS

 Expansion gaps:
- Size: 10 mm.
- Location: At abutments.
 Expansion gap filling:
- Filler type: Resilient closed cell.
- Filling: Before fixing skirtings and cover strips.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 204 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

451 CAVITY BARRIERS


 Construction:
- Material: PVC sleeved mineral wool.
- Fire resistance to BS 476-20:
Integrity/ insulation (minutes): Min 60 minutes or as required per authority regulation.
 Performance: Permanently stable, continuous, and an effective barrier to smoke and flame.
 Distribution:
- Centres (maximum): 20m.
- Subdivided areas (maximum): 60m2.
 Fixing: Fix securely to subfloor, at joints and as necessary.
 Floor panels: Firmly secure floor panels above cavity barriers.
 Gaps between cavity barriers and other elements: Seal with mineral wool or other suitable
material.
 Fire stopping: Give notice when fire stopping is complete.

455 LEVEL CHANGES

 Ramps and steps:


- Performance: Match performance of associated raised access floor.
- Proposals: Submit details.
 Balustrade structural and safety requirements: To BS 6180.

460 UNDER-FLOOR PLENUM AIR BARRIERS

 Material: Rigid or semi rigid nonporous sheets with smooth non dusting surfaces.
 Performance: Permanently stable, continuous and airtight.
 Fixing: Fix securely to subfloor, at joints and as necessary.
 Edges and joints: Seal.

465 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY AND EARTH BONDING

 Substantial metal parts of raised access floor: Electrically continuous and fully earth bonded.
- Standard: To BS 7671.
- Bonding methods: Submit proposals.
- Earthing methods: Submit proposals.
 Rooms used for electronic data processing equipment: As per design requirements.
 Earth bonding connection points: Determine number and location. Provide connectors.
 Total resistance of earth fault loop (maximum): Resistance required to operate earth fault
protection devices to BS 7671.
 Electrical continuity and earth bonding tests:
- General: Test complete raised access floor.
- Points for testing: Randomly selected pedestals, stringers, tops and bottoms of floor
panels.

470 INTEGRAL FINISHES ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE TESTS

 General: Test complete raised access floor.


- Location: All floors.
 Testing agent: Qualified agency subject to Employer’s representative’s approval.

480 PROTECTION OF WORK

 Ensure that no part of the floor installation is:


- Used as a platform for storage of equipment and materials.
- Subjected to static or dynamic loads which exceed those for which it is designed.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 205 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Adequate precautions, including the use of spreader plates, must be taken during
installation of equipment and any other elements, e.g. ceilings.
- Walked on within 48 hours following the use of adhesive to fix pedestals to the subfloor.
- Left unprotected prior to practical completion. Supply and lay a protective covering.

COMPLETION

510 TOOLS

 Floor panel lifting devices: At completion, supply one set of suitable devices for each type of
raised access floor finish installed. Train designated personnel in their use.
 Pedestal locking: At completion, supply one set of tools for releasing pedestal locking.

515 USER INSTRUCTIONS

 Manual contents: Include the following:


- Correct method for lifting and replacing floor panels and stringers.
- Servicing: Limitations on sequence, number and positions of floor panels and stringers that
can be removed safely at one time.
- Permissible loads: With guidance on use of spreader plates when shifting heavy
equipment and subsequent maintenance.
- Methods for installing cabling and ducts, to prevent damage to supporting structure.
- Cleaning methods: For floor panels and integral finishes.
- Floor panel covering renewal: Method for replacement of integral floor panel coverings.
- Pedestal adjustment and locking.
- Maintenance: Recommended methods and frequency. Minimum maintenance-free life of
raised access floor system. Minimum maintenance-free life of replaceable parts where this
differs from that of the whole system. Minimum period during which replaceable
components will be available.
- Installation instructions, including COSHH Assessment.

520 SPARES

 General: At completion,
525 CLEANING

 Subfloors: At completion, thoroughly clean accessible areas of subfloors and leave free of dust
and debris.
 Raised access floor: Before delivery of items carried by floor, clean thoroughly.

***END OF SECTION K41***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 206 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION L10
WINDOWS/ ROOF LIGHTS/ SCREENS/ LOUVRES

Page 207 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

L10 WINDOWS/ ROOFLIGHTS/ SCREENS/ LOUVRES

To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions. This section deals with components of wood,
metal and plastics, and with composite items combining these materials, usually fabricated off site, fixed
into openings to give light or ventilation or to see through. Devices offering solar shading (e.g. brises
soleil, awnings) are also included. Accessories and associated items are included as follows:-
 Architraves, trim, etc. where part of the component.
 Ironmongery where supplied with the component.
 Finishes where part of the component as delivered.
 Glazing where supplied with the component.
 Mechanical operating equipment where supplied with the component.
 Sealants.

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS

110 EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE


 Certification: Provide independently certified evidence that all incorporated components
comply with specified performance requirements.
 Wind Loads: Based on Local Order No. 3 of Dubai Municipality is to be to BS 6399 Part 1,
1995 or CP3: Chapter V: Part 2:1972, Basic wind Speed 45 m/sec.
 Dead Loads: Provide aluminium members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce
glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load.
 Live Loads: Provide aluminium systems, including anchorage, that accommodate the
supporting structures' deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated
without failure of materials or permanent deformation.
 Air Infiltration: Provide aluminium windows with permanent resistance to air leakage through
fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 1.5 m3/hr/m2 of wall area for fixed lights and
2.0 m3/hr/lin.m for opening sashes when tested in accordance with BS 5368-1 when subjected to
a peak positive test pressure of 600 Pa.

120 SITE DIMENSIONS


 Procedure: Before starting work on designated items take site dimensions, record on shop
drawings and use to ensure accurate fabrication.
 Designated items:
All items specified hereafter.

140 CONTROL SAMPLES


 Procedure:
- Finalise component details.
- Fabricate one of each of the following designated items as part of the quantity required
for the project.
- Obtain approval of appearance and quality before proceeding with manufacturer of the
remaining quantity.
 Designated items:
All items specified hereafter.

145 WARRANTY

 Submit a written special warranty signed by aluminium window manufacturer agreeing to repair
or replace components that fail in material or workmanship within the specified warranty
period. Failures include, but not limited to the following:-
 Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage or condensation.
 Faulty operation of hardware
 Deterioration of metal, metal finish and other materials beyond normal weathering
 Warranty Period shall be 10 years from the date of Taking over Certificate.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 208 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

PRODUCTS
335 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS
(Casement windows, sliding windows, top/bottom hinged windows and fixed windows)
 Standard: To BS 4873.
 Exposure category to BS 6375-1/ Design wind pressure: Refer clause 110.
 Operation and strength characteristics: To BS 6375-2.
 Thermal improvement: To comply with current green building regulations.
 Finish as delivered: Factory applied super durable polyester powder coating not less than 60
micron thick. (Colour to the Employer’s Representative's selection).
 Glazing details: As indicated on the concept drawings and Section L40.
 Framing System Gaskets: Manufacturers standard extruded or moulded gasket to
accommodate 24mm thick double glass unit. Moulded or extruded gaskets, complying with BS
4255-1 with elastomer EPDM, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight
seal.
 Ironmongery/ Accessories:
 Provide heavy-duty hardware units indicated in sizes, number, and type recommended by
manufacturer for uses indicated. Fabricate hardware units from extruded or cast
aluminium. Finish exposed parts to match window finish, unless otherwise indicated.
Furnish hardware complete with aluminium screws and other fixings of matching finish as
hardware where exposed.
 Provide Handles, stay arm, locking handle, face plates, weather sweeps, rollers, locking
system and keys etc.
 Manufacturer: Giesse- North America, Savio or approved equivalent.
 Fixing: Screwed to masonry reveal/ concrete as clause 782.
 Other requirements:
 Aluminum sections shall be heavy duty sliding window series 105mm architectural sections from
Gulf Extrusion, Al Jaber, Alumill or approved equivalent. Extruded sections and profiles
to comply with BS EN 755, alloy and temper 6063 T6 for elevations and 6063 T5 for Doors.
Framing members shall be 2.0 mm thick minimum.
 Corner cleats shall have a cross section which corresponds to the interior profile contours. At
the mitres a perfect sealing and gluing is required. In T joints the seeping of water into
construction shall be prevented by corresponding packing and permanently elastic sealing.
 Wire fabric insect screen to be fixed from inside. 1.1mm x 1.1mm mesh of 0.3mm
diameter coated aluminium wire complying with FS RR-W-365 Type VII.
 Provide shop drawings and section details for approval.
 Provide sealant as section Z22 to seal all gaps in jamb, head and sill

490 ROOF VENTILATORS (If applicable)


 Manufacturer: Submit details for approval
- Product reference: As per drawing.
 Type: Glazed
 Control: As per MEP drawing.
 Material: As per MEP drawing.
- Finish as delivered: As per the approved material submittal
 Seals: As per the approved material submittal.
 Guards: As per the approved material submittal.
 Accessories / Special features: As per the approved material submittal and cladding drawing.

650 METAL LOUVRES


- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection. Frame and blades to be
6063-T52 alloy, extruded section.
- Louver depth: 100mm unless otherwise indicated on drawing
- Blade nominal thickness: As required to comply with structural performance requirements,
but not less than 1.5 mm.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 209 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Mullion Type: Flush


- Free Area: Not less than 0.65 sqm
- Air performance: Not more than static pressure drop at 3.8 m/s free-area velocity.
 Performance:
- Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the wind loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of
louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or
permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act
on vertical projection of louvers
 Material: Extruded aluminium.
- Finish as delivered: Factory applied super durable polyester powder coating not less than 60
micron thick. (color to the Employer’s Representative's selection)).
 Fire resistance rating: N/A.

 Number of louver banks: As per approved shop drawing. All blades to be supported and lined
with gauge extruded aluminium blade braces, positively interlocked to each blade and
mechanically secured to structural angles by SS fastening. Structural supports to be minimum
50x50x6mm angles and designed to carry a wind load not less than as stated in clause 110.

 Louvre blade pitch and angle: As recommended by the manufacturer to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.

 Blanking panels: Insulated type where indicated on the contract drawings.

 Accessories/ Other requirements:


- Provide insect screens on the inner face of the louvred panels.
- Provide shop drawings for the Employer’s Representative's approval prior to fabrication.
- Provide sealant as section Z22 to seal all gaps in jamb, head and sill.
- Aluminum frame sections shall be heavy duty from Gulf Extrusion, Al Jaber, Alumill or
approved equivalent. Framing members shall be 2.0 mm thick minimum.
- Louvers for service rooms must comply with the requirements of respective Authorities
having jurisdiction.

 Fixing: As clause 782.

EXECUTION

710 PROTECTION OF COMPONENTS


 General: Do not deliver to site components that cannot be installed immediately or placed in
clean, dry floored and covered storage.

 Stored components: Stack vertical or near vertical on level bearers, separated with spacers to
prevent damage by and to projecting ironmongery, beads, etc.

730 PRIMING/ SEALING


 Wood surfaces inaccessible after installation: Prime or seal as specified before fixing
components.

740 CORROSION PROTECTION


 Surfaces to be protected:
- Copper alloys in contact with aluminium, iron, steel or zinc (including galvanizing).
- Aluminium in contact with timber treated with copper, zinc or mercury based
preservatives.
- Aluminium in contact with oak, sweet chestnut, Douglas fir and western red cedar, unless
well seasoned.
- Aluminium in contact with iron and steel unless galvanized.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 210 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Aluminium in contact with copper or copper alloys and rainwater which has run over them.
- Aluminium in contact with concrete, mortar, plasters or soil, especially when embedded.
- Aluminium in contact with paints containing copper or mercury based fungicides, graphite
or lead.
- Aluminium in contact with lead and stainless steel in heavily polluted atmospheres.

 Protective coating: Two coats of bitumen solution to BS 6949 or an approved mastic


impregnated tape.
- Timing of application: Before fixing components.

750 BUILDING IN
 General: Not permitted unless indicated on drawings.
- Brace and protect components to prevent distortion and damage during construction of
adjacent structure.

760 REPLACEMENT WINDOW INSTALLATION


 Standard: To BS 8213-4.

765 WINDOW INSTALLATION GENERALLY


 Installation: Into prepared openings.

 Gap between frame edge and surrounding construction:


- Minimum: 5 mm.
- Maximum: 10 mm.
- Shims: Aluminum shims and spaces and be finish coated with an organic or high
performance organic coating. Shims and spacers shall be flat, predrilled for the intended
application

 Distortion: Install windows without twist or diagonal racking.

782 FIXING OF ALUMINIUM FRAMES


 Standard: As section Z20.

 Fasteners: Stainless steel grade 316 screws with plugs.


- Spacing: When not predrilled or specified otherwise, position fasteners not more than 250 mm
from ends of each jamb, adjacent to each hanging point of opening lights, and at
maximum 600 mm centres.

810 SEALANT JOINTS


 Sealant:
Product reference: As recommended by the manufacturer to the Employer’s
Representative's approval. Also shall comply with green building regulation.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
- Application: As section Z22 to prepared joints. Finish triangular fillets to a flat or slightly
convex profile.

820 IRONMONGERY
 Fixing: Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using fasteners with matching finish suppliedby
ironmongery manufacturer. Do not damage ironmongery and adjacent surfaces.

 Checking/ adjusting / lubricating: Carry out at Completion and ensure correct functioning.

***End of Section L10***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 211 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION L20
DOORS/ SHUTTERS/ HATCHES

Page 212 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

L20 DOORS/ SHUTTERS/ HATCHES

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with ‘composite’ items or
components, usually fabricated off site, fixed into openings to give access to or exit from the
building or to parts of the building, or to subdivide spaces, and made from wood, metal, plastics,
rubber, glass, or any combination of these materials. Also deals with loading bay doors and docking
systems. Accessories and associated items are included as follows:-
 Architraves where part of the component, e.g. in door sets.
 Ironmongery where supplied with the component.
 Finishes where part of the component as delivered.
 Glazing where supplied with the component.
 Mechanical operating equipment where supplied with the component.
 Sealants.

22 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
 The contractor shall examine all other sections of the specifications for requirements which
affect or are affected by this section.
 The contractor shall coordinate with all trades affected or affecting this section to assure steady
progress of all work.
 The manufacturer shall be required to state the period of maintenance-free life of the door.The
manufacturer will be required to state the recommended methods of maintaining the door after
the end of defects liability period.
 Any part of the means of egress (doors, corridors, stairs, ramps) width shall not be less than
915mm and head room shall not be less than 2030mm as per DCD regulation.
 Doors in exit enclosure should swing in the direction of egress. Force to open door shall not
exceed 133N and force to operate latch shall not exceed 67N.
 Access controlled doors shall unlock upon loss of power.
 All doors must have rubber seals to prevent dust ingress and to minimize noise during closing.
 MDF or any type of sandwich panel/particle compressed board shall not be used in wet areas.
Inside facing of door shutter for wet areas shall be either UPVC finish or other waterproof
material.
 Threshold required for all wet areas and fixed at a minimum 4mm above FFL. Threshold shall
extent until the line of door frame and architrave. Wooden door frame and architrave shall touch
the threshold and not the wet area floor.
 All Aluminium sliding doors shall have fly nets fixed internally.
 Smoke-Control Door Assemblies shall Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784

32 GUARANTEES
 Doors and frames shall be covered by the manufacturer's standard guarantee, which shall be
presented to the Employer’s Representative in written form. The manufacturer shall guarantee all his
doors and frames against defects in materials and workmanship, including warping, for the life
of the original installation and shall replace all doors judged defective by the Employer’s
Representative.
 Submit a written warranty (signed by manufacturer, installer and Contractor) for the works of this
section for a minimum period of 10 years commencing from the date of Taking over of the Works.
Warranty of flush wood doors including replacement of door showing warping, bowing or cupping
in excess of 6mm, delamination of face veneer, telegraphing of core construction or any other
defects in door construction.
 Such warranty shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which the contractor may
have by law or other provision of the contract documents.

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS

110 EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE


 Certification: Provide independently certified evidence that all incorporated components comply
with specified performance requirements.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 213 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

115 FIRE RESISTING DOORS/ DOORSETS/ ASSEMBLIES


 Evidence of fire performance: Provide certified evidence, in the form of a product conformity
certificate, directly relevant fire test report or engineering assessment, that each door/ doorset/
assembly supplied will comply with the specified requirements for fire resistance if tested to BS 476-
22, BS EN 1634-1 or BS EN 1634-3 or other relevant standards in compliance with the
regulation of Dubai Civil Defense. Such certification must cover door and frame materials,
glass and glazing materials and their installation, essential and ancillary ironmongery, hinges
and seals.
 Door assembly for apartment entrance, stairs, corridors, service rooms, access panels and
elevator lobby (but not limited to) shall be fire rated in accordance with the current regulations of
Dubai Civil Defense.

125 FIRE CERTIFICATION


 All Fire resisting doors under this contract shall be provided with certificates from the Civil
Defence Authority.
 Doors shall comply with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated or required, based on
testing according to NFPA 252

150 SITE DIMENSIONS


 Procedure: Before starting work on designated items take site dimensions, record on shop
drawings and use to ensure accurate fabrication.
 Designated items:
All items specified hereafter.

170 CONTROL SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS


 Procedure:
- Finalize component details.
- Fabricate one of each of the following designated items as part of the quantity required for
the project.
- Obtain approval of appearance and quality before proceeding with manufacture of the
remaining quantity.
 Designated items:
All items specified hereafter including core, edge construction, louvers, corner sections and trim
for openings. Also to submit factory finishes applied to actual door face materials
approximately 200 by 250mm for each material and finish.
 Shop Drawings
- Shop drawings indicating location, size, hand of each door, elevation of each kind of door,
construction details, location and extent of hardware blocking, location of cutouts,
location of mortises and holes for hardware, veneer details, finish requirements and fire
rating etc shall be submitted for Employer’s Representative’s approval.

COMPONENTS

281 SINGLE LEAF STEEL DOORS


 Product reference: Refer clause 920 and as follows:-
- Exterior Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from minimum 1.6 mm thick, cold-rolled steel
sheet galvanized.
- Interior Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from minimum 1.0mm thick, cold-rolled steel
sheet galvanized, unless otherwise higher thickness is required to satisfy fire resistance
ratings indicated for interior steel doors
- Core Construction: Fabricate all flush steel doors with steel-stiffened-core (fire rated and
non-fire-rated) minimum 0.6-mm thick, hat-shaped steel vertical stiffeners extending
full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 152 mm apart,spot welded
to face sheets a maximum of 127 mm o.c. Spaces filled between
stiffeners with mineral-fiber insulation. Other shapes and of stiffeners may also be
accepted. Provide thermal-resistance-rated cores for exterior doors and interior doors
where doors separate air-conditioned building spaces from non-air-conditioned
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 214 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

spaces.
- Top and Bottom Channels: Minimum 1.6-mm- thick, steel channel spot welded, not
more than 152 mm on centers, to face sheets.
- Hardware Reinforcement for Hinges: Minimum 4.2 mm thick by 38 mm wide by 152
mm longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
- Hardware Reinforcement for Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders:
Minimum 2.3 mm thick.
- Hardware Reinforcement for all Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 1.7 mm
thick
 Finish as delivered: Galvanized and primer powder coated. (Colour to the Employer’s
Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range).
 Glazing details: As indicated on the concept drawings where applicable and as per DCD
regulation.
 Ironmongery: As section P21 and as per DCD regulation.
 Other requirements:
- Doors shall be 45mm thick made of galvanized steel sheets fully filled with mineral fiber
insulation (or approved equivalent) to achieve the specified fire rating.
- Mineral fiber insulation shall comply with ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 96- to 192-kg/cu.
m density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50
respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics
- Lippings shall be mechanically interlocked hairline seams on vertical edges and no
visible seams on faces. Top and bottom of door to be closed flush with 16 gauge steel
channels welded in place.
- Bottom gap to be coordinated with the door threshold detail where applicable.

282 DOUBLE LEAF STEEL DOORS


 Product reference: Refer clause 920 and as follows:-
- Exterior Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from minimum 1.6 mm thick, metallic-coated steel
sheet galvanized.
- Interior Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from minimum 1.0mm thick, cold-rolled steel sheet
galvanized, unless otherwise higher thickness is required to satisfy fire resistance ratings
indicated for interior steel doors
- Core Construction: Fabricate all flush steel doors with steel-stiffened-core (fire rated andnon-
fire-rated) minimum 0.6-mm thick, hat-shaped steel vertical stiffeners extending full-door
height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 152 mm apart, spot welded to face sheets
a maximum of 127 mm o.c. Spaces filled between stiffeners with mineral-fiber insulation.
Other shapes and of stiffeners may also be accepted. Provide thermal- resistance-rated
cores for exterior doors and interior doors where doors separate air- conditioned building
spaces from non-air-conditioned spaces.
- Top and Bottom Channels: Minimum 1.6-mm- thick, steel channel spot welded, not more
than 152 mm on centers, to face sheets.
- Hardware Reinforcement for Hinges: Minimum 4.2 mm thick by 38 mm wide by 152 mm
longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
- Hardware Reinforcement for Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders:
Minimum 2.3 mm thick.
- Hardware Reinforcement for all Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 1.7 mm
thick
 Finish as delivered: Galvanized and primer powder coated. (Colour to the Employer’s
Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range).
 Glazing details: As indicated on the concept drawings where applicable and as per DCD
regulation.
 Ironmongery: As section P21 and as per DCD regulation.
 Other requirements:
- Doors shall be 45mm thick made of galvanized steel sheets fully filled with mineral fiber
insulation (or approved equivalent) to achieve the specified fire rating.
- Mineral fiber insulation shall comply with ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 215 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 96- to 192-kg/cu. m
density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50
respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics
- Lippings shall be mechanically interlocked hairline seams on vertical edges and no visible
seams on faces. Top and bottom of door to be closed flush with 16 gauge steel channels
welded in place.
- Provide an overlapping astragal fixed on the inner side of the inactive leaf.
- Bottom gap to be coordinated with the door threshold detail where applicable.

290 ALUMINIUM DOORS


 Product reference: Minimum 45mm- thick doors with minimum 3.00mm thick, extruded
tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are
deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie-rods and complying with
following:-
- Wind Loads: Based on Local Order No. 3 of Dubai Municipality is to be to BS 6399
Part 1, 1995 or CP3: Chapter V: Part 2:1972, Basic wind Speed 45 m/sec.
- Dead Loads: Provide aluminium members that do not deflect an amount which will
reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load.
- Live Loads: Provide aluminium systems, including anchorage, that accommodate the
supporting structures' deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads
indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation.
- Air Infiltration: Provide aluminium doors with permanent resistance to air leakage
through fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 1.5 m3/hr/m2 of wall area for
fixed lights and 2.0 m3/hr/lin.m for opening sashes when tested in accordance with BS
5368-1 when subjected to a peak positive test pressure of 600 Pa.
- Water Penetration: There shall be no evidence through the entrance system when the
curtain wall is subjected to a peak positive test pressure of 600 Pa. Testing shall be
according to BS 5368-2 for static air pressure water penetration resistance.
- Thermal Movements: Provide aluminium entrances including anchorage, that
accommodate thermal movements of systems and supporting elements resulting from
the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without
buckling, damaging stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on
fasteners, failure of doors or other operating units to function properly, and other
detrimental effects. Temperature Change (Range): 40 deg C, ambient; 60 deg C, material
surfaces.
 Material:-
- Extruded aluminium profiles fabricated to form the entire door assembly with infill
panels as indicated on the concept drawings. Aluminum sections shall be heavy duty
sliding door series 125mm or hinged/swing door series 45mm from Gulf Extrusion, Al
Jaber, Alumill or approved equivalent. Extruded sections and profiles to comply BS EN
755, alloy and temper 6063 T6 for elevations and 6063 T5 for Doors.
- Aluminium Sheet: BS EN 485 and BS EN 515, alloy and temper as required for
forming as recommended by manufacturer.
- Minimum Wall Thickness: 3.00 mm at any location for main load-bearing aluminum
profiles (sticks and mullions) and 1.50 mm at any location for secondary non-load
bearing profiles.
- Framing System Gaskets: EPDM
- Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturers standard extruded or moulded gasket to
accommodate 24mm thick double glass unit. Moulded or extruded gaskets, complying
with BS 4255-1 with elastomer EPDM, and of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal
- Fasteners and Accessories, General: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-
staining, non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
- Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible weather stripping
designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and
completely concealed when sliding aluminium-framed glass door is closed. Weather-
Stripping Material shall be dense elastomeric gaskets, from molded EPDM complying

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 216 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

with BS 4255-1.
 Finish as delivered: Factory applied super durable polyester powder coating unless mentioned
otherwise on the concept drawings (colour to the Employer’s Representative's selection from the
standard RAL range).
 Glazing details: As indicated on the concept drawings where applicable and subject DM green
building and DCD regulations.
 Ironmongery: As section P21, and as per schedule in compliance with the following:-.
- General: Provide heavy-duty hardware units indicated in sizes, number, and type
recommended by manufacturer for uses indicated. Fabricate hardware units from
extruded or cast aluminium. Finish exposed parts to match door finish, unless
otherwise indicated. Furnish hardware complete with aluminium screws and other
fixings of matching finish as hardware where exposed.
- Ball-Bearing Butts: BS EN 1935 and 7352, Grade 1, 5-knuckle, 101.6-by-114.3-mm
ball-bearing butts. Provide non-removable pins at hinges exposed to door outside
and provide nonferrous hinges for applications exposed to weather. Provide 3 hinges at
each leaf for doors up to 914 mm wide and 2032 mm tall; provide 4 hinges at each leaf
for taller doors. Manufacturer Giesse, Savio or approved equivalent.
- Closers: As specified in section P21 or schedule
- Cylinder Guard: Manufacturer's standard hardened-steel security ring with retainer plate
for inside stile wall that protects lock cylinder from removal by wrenches, prying, or sawing.
- Locks: Thin-style locks as specified in section P21 or schedule
- Lockset Faceplates: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminium faceplate for lock
type indicated that lays flush with door stile.
- Pull Handles: As per Section P21 or schedule.
- Push Bars: As selected by Employer’s Representative from manufacturer's full range of
full-door-width, single-bar push bars.
 Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard weather sweep for application to exterior door
bottoms and with concealed fasteners on mounting strips
 Other requirements:
- Provide proprietary thresholds for all external doors.
- Provide shop drawings for the Employer’s Representative's approval prior to
fabrication.
- Provide sealant as section Z22 to seal all gaps in jamb, head and sill.
- Aluminium doors for the service rooms must comply with the requirement of
respective authority having jurisdiction.

291 ALUMINIUM LOUVRED DOORS


 Product reference: Min 45mm thick(Hinged louvered door series 45mm from Gulfex, Al Jaber,
Alumill or approved equivalent) stile-and-rail doors with fixed infill louver panels, single or
multiple leaf, complete with external door-set aluminum frames for fixing to openings jambs and
soffit and complying with following:-
- Wind Loads: Based on Local Order No. 3 of Dubai Municipality is to be to BS 6399 Part 1,
1995 or CP3: Chapter V: Part 2:1972, Basic wind Speed 45 m/sec.
- Dead Loads: Provide aluminium members that do not deflect an amount which will
reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load.
- Live Loads: Provide aluminium systems, including anchorage, that accommodate the
supporting structures' deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads
indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation.
 Door:
- Material: Extruded aluminium, 6063-T5 alloy.
- Provide sections for main (opening) frame of extended lipping onto external wall surfaceof
adjoining jamb to conceal separation between wall and frame
- Doors leaf frames are to be thin-stile (approximately 54.00 mm stile width)
- Minimum Thickness: 2.00 mm for main (opening) frame and door lead frame and
intermediate mullions and 1.50 mm wall thickness for louver panel frames and louver
blades
 Louvres:

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 217 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Material: 1.6mm thick extruded aluminium.


- Blade pitch angle: 45 degree.
- Pre-fabricated, panels comprising fixed horizontal Z-shaped fixed blades inclined to the
outside at 45 degrees at vertical intervals so as to obtain a minimum free area of 48%.
Provide bird screens fixed at interior face, square expanded mesh, 12.5 mm eye size,
constructed from aluminum wire 1.60 mm diameter.
 Finish as delivered: Factory applied super durable polyester powder coating unless mentioned
otherwise on the contract drawings (colour to the Employer’s Representative's selection from the
standard RAL range).
 Ironmongery: Heavy duty units fabricated from cast aluminum, unless otherwise specified
hereafter:-.
- Hinges: Exposed surface applied butt hinges (Manufacturer: Giesse, Savio or approved
equivalent).
- Al Drop: Manual surface Al drop designed to receive pad lock, located as indicated on
Drawings.
- Tower Bolts: Manual long brass tower bolts.
- Welded eye hocks to receive second pad lock.
- Pad Locks: Brass pad locks, big size complete with 3 keys per each lock.
- Handles: Vertical style, constructed of aluminum and of same finish as doors, for middle
door leafs (Manufacturer: Giesse, Savio or approved equivalent). .
- Locks: Narrow style aluminum locks specially manufactured for use in narrow aluminum
stiles comprising retractable latch and dead bolt.
- Cylinders: As specified in Section P21 “Door and window ironmongery”.
- Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard brackets and reinforcement that are compatible
with adjacent materials.
 Other requirements:
- Provide insect screens on the inner face of the louvred panels.
- Provide shop drawings for the Employer’s Representative's approval prior to
fabrication.
- Provide sealant as section Z22 to seal all gaps in jamb, head and sill.
- Doors for utility rooms and substations must comply with Authority regulations.

371 STEEL DOOR FRAMES


- Product reference: Min 2mm thick galvanized steel enclosed type prepared and
reinforced to receive architectural hardware. Refer clause 920 and details as follows:-
- Frames for doors: Welded.
- Hardware Reinforcement for Hinges: Minimum 4.2 mm thick by 32 mm wide by 254
mm long, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
- Hardware Reinforcement for Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers: Minimum 2.3 mm thick.
- Hardware Reinforcement for Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 2.3 mm thick
- Head Reinforcement: Minimum 2.3-mm- thick, steel channel or angle stiffener
- Jamb anchors: Post installed Expansion Type for in-Place Concrete or Masonry:
Minimum 9.5-mm diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe
spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each
anchor location.
- Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 1.7 mm thick,
Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners
- Ceiling Struts: Minimum 9.5-mm-thick by 50-mm- wide steel

 Perimeter seals: Smoke seal as section P21 and as per DCD regulation.
 Finish as delivered: Galvanized and primer powder coated. (Colour to the Employer’s
Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range).
 Fixing: Anchor type to Employer’s Representative’s approval.

380 ALUMINIUM DOOR FRAMES


- Product reference: Sliding door series 125mm or hinged door series 45mm from
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 218 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Gulfex, Al Jaber, Alumill or approved equivalent.


- Thermal breaks that are integral to extruded aluminum frames (external doors) shallbe
continuous polyamide nylon or continuous polyurethane. Minimum separation of
outdoor and indoor metal shall be 10 mm; increase separation as required to comply
with specified thermal performance.
 Material: Aluminium extrusions with 3.0mm wall thickness (Heavy duty) fabricated to form the
entire assembly.
 Perimeter seals:
- Weatherstrip as section P21 for external doors.
- Smoke/ sound proofing seals as section P21 for internal doors.
 Finish as delivered: Factory applied super durable polyester powder coating unless mentioned
otherwise on the contract drawings (colour to the Employer’s Representative's selection from the
standard RAL range).
 Fixing: Anchor type, Post-installed Anchor Bolts for Concrete and Masonry: Chemical anchors,
torque-controlled expansion anchors or undercut anchors made from stainless-steel
components complying with ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group A4 for bolts and nuts;
ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 316, for anchors, with capability to sustain, without failure,
a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed,for masonry.
 Other requirements:
- All breaks, angles and arises shall be uniform, straight, sharply defined and true.
- Corners shall be mitred, accurately fitted, welded, properly finished with smooth, rigid,
invisible joints.
- A bent steel plate adjustable clip bolted to frames and of a material as specified for
jambs on the floor shall be extended for proper anchorage at bottom of jambs and
secured with 10 x 50mm expansion bolts or shot-in studs.
- All frames shall be provided with temporary spreader channel at bottom.
- Frame reinforcement shall be aluminium as follows:
a) Hinge reinforcement shall be 10mm thick (min) at each hinge location.
b) Closer and holder arm reinforcement shall be 10mm thick (min).
c) Other reinforcement shall be 4mm (min) unless additional reinforcement

617 LOADING BAY DOORS AND DOCKING SYSTEM

 Manufacturer: .OH doors, Dock levelers, Dock shelter and associated mechanism, installations
and accessories shall be sourced from a single/same manufacturer.

I. Sectional Overhead Loading bay Door ( for HGV, Pick-ups and Vans)

 Model: ASSA ABLOY OH 1042P or approved equivalent


 Size and Quantity: As per drawing and schedule
 Qualifications
- Each sectional overhead door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer,
including electrical motor, sections, brackets, tracks, counterbalance mechanisms,
hardware, and installation accessories, to suit openings and headroom available and
mixing of different components from different manufacturers is not allowed.
- The supplier shall have a minimum of 10 years working experience in UAE for installation
and maintenance of sectional overhead doors. The supplier shall have an authorized
exclusive agreement with the manufacturer confirming the authorized representation in UAE
and availability of spare parts and factory trained technicians. The supplier must guarantee
in writing ready stock availability of parts and skilled technicians for 10 years.
- The manufacturer must be ISO 9001 & 14001 certified. The doors must be manufactured
in compliance with European standard E. N. 12445 and comply with CEN standards.
 Submittals

- Copies of manufacturer’s specifications and installation instruction for each type of overhead
door to show compliance with these specifications.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 219 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Samples of door sections.


- Detailed drawings of special components required for the proper installation including
anchoring and supporting systems.
- Six copes of the manufactures operation and maintenance manuals including parts lists and
all other information needed for proper operation and maintenance of sectional Over Head
Doors.

 Door Leaf
- The door leaf consists of process laminated, 42mm thick, 545mm high sections, Insulated
by means of CFC-free polyurethane. Skin thickness shall be minimum 0.45mm and skin
shall be GI sheet. The specific height of the Door is achieved by trimming the top section
(mixing up of different height sections not permitted). The sandwich panel has a micro
modern waffled design of steel sheet material, which is combined with a glossy finish to
ensure a modern and attractive appearance. The door has side, bottom top and section
joint seals.
- Exterior skin Pre-painted:- Embossed, Polyester 20 micron with 30% gloss over galvanizing
coat over 5micron primer for steel.
- Interior skin Pre-painted- Polyester coated 20 micron over galvanizing coat over 5micron
primer for steel.
- Panel also shall be primed 5 micron for inside and outside skin for the face in contact with
insulation.
- Surface colour: To be selected by the Employer.
 Wind Resistance
- The wind resistance is min. 700N/m2 according to norm pr EN 12424 class 3 for a closed
door with or without pass door. The door shall withstand a wind force of 45m/s.

 Insulation
- The U-value for a closed (5 x 5m) installed door without pass door is 1.0 W/m2 C,
according to norm pr EN 12428. The mean average U value of door section = 0.45 W/m2
C. Density of panel shall be minimum 46 Kg/m3.

 Water penetration
- Resistance to water penetration is 70PA according to norm pr EN12425 Class 3
(exceptional) for a closed door with or without pass door.

 Air Tightness
- At 50 Pa m3 is approximate 8.5m3/m2/h according to norm pr EN 12426.
 Track
- Track shall be min 75mm heavy gauge galvanized steel designed for stipulated clearances. Cut
ends of all tracks shall be treated with Zinc rich primer.
- Provide complete track including brackets, bracing and reinforcements for rigid support of the
track for the required door type and sizes. Aligning tracks at proper angle from vertical to ensure
light closure at jambs when the door is closed.
- Wall tracks and roof track shall be minimum 2.0mm thick.

 Reinforcement and supports;


- Provide galvanized steel track reinforcement and support members. Secure, reinforce, and
support tracks as required for size and weight of door to provide strength and rigidity, and to
ensure against sag, sway and detrimental vibration during opening and closing of door.
- Support and attach tracks at opening jambs with continuous angle in accordance to
manufactures specification for size and weight of door.
- Roof hanger to support horizontal tracks to be hot dip galvanized steel angle bolted to the
track for adjustments.

 Door Balancing system


- All doors shall be equipped with helical wound torsion springs that are tensioned as door

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 220 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

closes.
- Springs shall be made of high tensile steel wire (DIN 17223/C) protected against corrosion
by an aqua liquid layer.
- Springs shall be rated for min 20,000 full operations as standard.

 Torsion Shaft
- All doors shall be supplied with a Hex-shaped or round min. 35 mm steel shaft having a
continuous keyway for locking the spring retainer.

 Bottom Corner Brackets


- All bottom corner brackets shall be equipped with adjustable rollers (except when
equipped with reinforced heavy duty bottom corner brackets). All brackets shall feature
the safe locking of the lifting cable.

 Rollers
- Provide heavy duty, lubrication free rollers, with steel ball bearings. Extend roller shaft
through both brackets where double brackets are required. Provide Nylon roller tires to suit
size of track.

 Cable Drums
- Provide cable drums designed to receive the proper diameter of cable and the weight of the
door. The cable shall be attached to the drum by two extra safety turns and dual cable looking
screws.

 Door Plates
- Attach a permanent, corrosion-resistant doorplate stating the manufacturer’s name,
Telephone number and serial number on each unit.

 Step handles and shoot bolts


- Provide nylon cast recessed step plate on outside of door with attaching lift handle for inside
of door. Also provide shoot bolts on either side

 Lifting Cables
- Provide galvanized steel cables with a minimum safety factor of 5:1 for each cable.

 Hardware
- Provide heavy duty fully adjustable roller brackets attached to the integrated
reinforcement strip per manufacturer’s recommendation. The adjustable roller brackets are
to provide perfect adjustment of door to the jamb to achieve a proper sealing function.
Self-tapping fasteners shall be used to secure brackets to the door sections. Provide heavy
duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with galvanized fasteners, to suit type of door.

 Wall Angle
- The wall angle shall have provision to allow movements of the door sections due to the
temperature differences between inside and outside.

 Weather seals
- Doors shall be provided with intermediate sealing between the sections, top, bottom and
sides of EPDM rubber as follows. Average thickness of seal shall be 2mm.
- EPDM rubber tube seal with a tongue shall be fitted between the sections to prevent air
filtration.
- Top section of the door shall have EPDM rubber sealing strip to provide firm seal against
the weather when the door is in closed position.
- HD Polythene-jamb seal shall be provided on the wall angle to prevent direct contact to
sections and to reduce friction.
- EPDM rubber tongue shall be fitted to the jamb seal to form a weather-light seal towards
the outside skin of the door.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 221 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- EPDM Tube Bottom Sealing with double flanges shall confirm to minor irregularities in the
floor.

 Wind loading and trussing


- Doors shall be manufactured to meet a minimum wind load of 0.7KN/m2 (45m/s wind
speed). Higher ratings up to 1.2KN/m2 should be provided if required according to the
design requirements.
- Doors which are wider than 4.2 meters to be re-in forced by stiffener strips (truss) to resist
wind forces and counteract to deflection when the door is open. The wind stiffener is
fitted to the steel reinforcement strip integrated in the door panel.

 Safety
- Spring Break Device: - Doors to be provided with a spring break device, which will hold
the door in position, in the event of breakage of the balancing springs.
- Cable Break Device: - Doors to be provided with a cable break device, which will hold the
door in position, in the event of breakage of the lifting cables.
- R.P.M Control for motor: - No mechanical RPM control, instead there is an adjustable
current control system.
- Finger Pinch Protection:-The section joints to be designed to provide finger pinch
protection.
- Safety Pull Unit:-When the horizontal track is less than 600 mm above the opening, doors
must be provided with safety pull unit. (The weight of the door leaves vertical part is lowin
relation to the weight of the horizontal part when the door is fully open). The safety pull unit
comprises wires, which provide a force in the opposite direction to the doors lifting wires.
When the door is to be closed the safety pull unit pulls the door leaf downwards.
- Pneumatic Safety Edge:-Bottom section of the door shall be fitted with a pneumatic
device. Safety device shall be pneumatically working in conjunction with the operator
control. A compressible strip shall be mounted along the bottom section weather seal of
each sectional door. Strip shall compress, activating the electrical control that will
automatically stop and return the door to its fully raised position. Compressible strip shall also
serve as weather strip along the bottom of the door.

 Electric Power Operations


- Motor: - Doors shall be provided with an electrically operated motor and controls wired for
operation on voltage indicated on the electrical drawings complied with.
- The operator complies with the following safety standards: prEN12453, prEN12445 and
prEN 12978, EN 13241-1, EN 61000-6-2,EN 61000-6-3,EN 60335-2-103 and relevant
parts of EN 60204-1and DEWA regulations.
- Operator inside shall be 03 phase with 1phase 230V/50Hz input supply, IP 55 protected,
bracket mounted and connected directly to the balancing assembly by direct drive.
Indirect chain driving operators are not acceptable. Machinery input shall be 230V single
phase, which after rectification and filtration, operates on 03 phase AC motor fitted inside the
mechanical unit. Mechanical unit shall be single dose lubricated.
- Motor shall be heavy duty industrial standard type. Drive unit shall be connected with main
control through a 7 core cable.
- Operator shall be provided with a pulse counter(RPM Control) connected to a self-braking
worm gear which senses an obstruction in either downward or upward travel and stops the
door movement; this device shall override all other safety equipment.
- Operators shall be equipped with an auto/manual change over device, to quickly change to
manual operation in case of power failure.
- The motors shall have an optional facility to provide battery backup.
- Operating Environment- Temperature Range:-20 to +600C
- Chemical Environment: Appropriate for different industrial environments except for high
content of chlorine gas or sulphuric acid in the ambient air not prepared for explosive
environment.
- Space Requirements: As per separate description for different method of installation.
Installation Position :Left, Right or centre

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 222 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Hardware: External support bearings required on door shaft for door weights > 200Kg
(side positioned machinery).

- Limit Switches-Disengagement : The tensile force in the moment stay does not exceed 300
N (30Kg).Electronic Limit positions which automatically adjusts during programming.
- Controller: Doors shall be controlled by a momentary contact, 3-button pushbutton
station marked OPEN, CLOSE, STOP. Pushbutton stations shall be housed in BS 60529
enclosures. Enclosure class: IP 55.Electrical
- Safety: Complies with EN requirements for insulation and screen protection for
connection to mains cables with control electronics on circuit board. The control circuit
board shall be microprocessor based design with built in automatic closing, three button
operation, one button operation & open function as standard and safety features like rev
monitor, pinch guard, delay time interval and overload.
- Fire alarm integration: Sectional doors shall be provided with an additional function of FA
integration. All doors connected to FA system shall open automatically in case of FA
activation.
- Operators: Operators shall be designed to transmit motion to the door without shock.
Automatically release motor from drive unit to stalling, so as to prevent damage to unit
from overload. An efficient heat and current-sensing overload protective device, installed
integrally with the unit shall break the control circuit to eliminate damage to motor windings.
- Motor Power Rating:-Motor shall be as per manufacturer’s standard power, except motors
shall be not less than 0.37 KW. Electrical Motor shall have a minimum lifting capacity of
400Kg and opening speed of 0.20m/s.

 Emergency Manual Operation

- Chain hoist to be provided for manual operation


 Glazing(Vision Panel)
- All the sectional overhead doors shall be provided with double acrylic panes as per
drawing. Standard size glazing to be rectangular DARP (602 x 292mm).Number of panes
and location as indicated in concept drawings. Panes shall be locked to door section by a
black rectangular or oval plastic frame (DARP) to provide weather tightness.
 Finish
- Steel components shall be galvanized in accordance with BS 14713. Galvanized coating
shall be 275gm/m2.
- Shop coat with a rust inhibitive primer on galvanized and non-galvanized surfaces and
operating mechanisms.
- Finish coat to be Polyester or shop painted in synthetic paint 200um in gloss 60+/.2 (DIN
67530).

 Installation
- Install doors in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.
- Anchors and inserts for guides, brackets, motors, controls, switches and other work shall be
accurately located.
- Install counter balance mechanism with manufacturer’s fully adjustable ball bearing brackets
at each end of the shaft. Furnish torsion shaft centre support bearings as required for size and
weight of the doors.
- Fasten vertical track assembly to framing. Hang horizontal track from structural overhead
framing with angle or channel hangers bolt-fastened in place. Provide sway bracing,
diagonal bracing, and re-enforcing as required for rigid installation of track and door
operating equipment.
- Upon completion, doors shall be free from wrap, twist or distortion and shall be lubricated and
adjusted to operate freely acceptable to the Employer’s Representative.
 Cleaning and protection

- Protection: After installation, protect doors from damage during subsequent construction
activities.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 223 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Damage work will be rejected and shall be replaced with new work without any additional
cost to the Employer’s Representative.
- Upon completion, metal surfaces that are factory-finished shall be thoroughly cleaned and
touched up as recommended by the manufacturer.
- Do not use abrasives, caustic or acid cleaning agent.

 Manufacturer Services
- Furnish the services of the electric door operator manufacturer’s field service technician to
inspect each final installation and supervise initial operation of the units.
- Manufacturer’s certificate shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative prior to
testing the equipment.
- Furnish the services of the electric door operator manufactures trained representative for a
minimum 1 trip a day to instruct plant personnel on proper operation and maintenance
procedures.
- Manufacturer should ensure availability of spare parts and trained technicians for period of
minimum 10 years.
- Two (2) years manufacturer’s warranty shall be provided from the date of Taking over of
the Works

II. Electro hydraulic type telescopic dock leveler- Standard and Jumbo
 Model: ASSA ABLOY DL 6120T Telescopic standard or approved equivalent
 Size: 2,000x2, 500 x700 mm for standard and 2,000x3,500 x 800 mm for jumbo or approved
equivalent.
 Working range: above 430mm/below 370mm for standard and above 520mm/below 400mm
for jumbo ( or higher range, if required to suit the vehicle).
 Quantity: As per drawing and schedule
 Stationary dock leveler with telescopic lip with:-
- Integrated frame with wall anchors (T-frames)
- 800mm or above frame depth for maximum working range.
- Electro-hydraulic operation with two lifting cylinders with hard chromed pistons for platform
elevation and one for lip activation and control(single cylinder for lifting is not acceptable).
- Hydraulic cylinder adjusts platform to suited height and projects the lip.
- Automatic, free floating position
- One-button control unit with mains switch, including interlocking of leveler/door
- Hold-to-run button to position lip on the truck bed and to put the leveler back in parking
position
- Hydraulic emergency stop in any operating position
- Automatic mechanical locking in neutral position
- Lateral torsion flexibility
- Break valves to stop movement of the platform after max. 6% of nominal length of the
leveler.
- Side plates (toe guards) with warning signs both above and below dock level.
- Internal wiring, plug connection.
- Control Unit Protection Class IP 54.
- The dock leveler shall meet standard demands of most loading operations and fully
complies with rules and regulations of the European Standard EN 1398 and local
regulations.
- Load bearing capacity: 6,000 Kgs, Dynamic load. Rated load dynamic effects shall be
considered and it shall be calculated by multiplying the dynamic factor 1.4 and safety
factor 1.33.
- Surface painted in colour to Employer’s Representative’s selection , thickness 80 µm

 Lip bearing:
- Reinforced steel tear plate telescopic lip
- 500 mm telescopic lip with 5° bend, and tapered 125mm on either side.

 Hydraulics:
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 224 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Standard oil for temperature range -20° to +60° Celsius


- Hydraulic Unit: 0.75 K.W

 Control unit.
- Voltage 400V, cable harness length to suit site requirement subject to Min 7m.
- Display of error messages
- Service interval display
- Readout function / Memory function
- Emergency stop button

 Frame
- Surface painted in color to Employer’s Representative’s choice, thickness 80µm and Paint
class corrosive category C2 M acc.DIN EN ISO 12944-2.

 Buffers and Sealing


- EPDM gap sealing required on all 3 sides of the pit between the pit and dock leveler
platform.
- Provide rubber buffers as required to avoid damage to loading bay (At least one each on
either side of dock leveler shall be provided)
 Installation

- Contractor shall supply and install the complete dock leveler with frame, buffer and sealing
and carry out the testing and commissioning.
- Two (2) years manufacturer’s warranty shall be provided from the date of Taking over of
the Works.
- Manufacturer’s representatives shall certify the works and testing carried out in their
presence.
- 6 set operating and maintenance manual and drawings shall be submitted.
- Manufacturer and supplier shall ensure 24 hrs service and availability of all critical spare
parts for 10 years.

III. Aluminium Dock Plate for Vans

 Model: ASSA ABLOY DL6050 KBL Plate Special or approved equivalent


 Working range: above 70mm/below 126mm( or higher range, if required to suit the vehicle)
- Heavy duty aluminium dock plate manually operated via chain.
- Chain to bring dock plate to resting or working position.
- Locking device to be released by foot.
- Capacity 300 Kgs.
- 1250 mm W x 570 mm Long (front tip 870 mm)
- Special T shape design to cater small vans
- Platform designed for anti-slip properties

 Installation

- Contractor shall supply and install the complete dock plate and carry out the testing and
commissioning.
- Two (2) years manufacturer’s warranty shall be provided from the date of Taking over of
the Works.
- Manufacturer’s representatives shall certify the works and testing carried out in their
presence.
- 6 set operating and maintenance manual and drawings shall be submitted.
- Manufacturer and supplier shall ensure 24 hrs service and availability of all critical spare
parts for 10 years.

IV. Dock shelter- Non inflated type for HGV and Pick ups

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 225 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Model: ASSA ABLOY Curtain type- Special or approved equivalent.


 Size: 3,400x3,400mm or to suit the actual door size finally selected.
 Quantity: As per drawing and schedule
 Collapsible Curtain shelter:-
- Frame in extruded aluminium or steel sections. Roof frame shall be self-adjusting.
- Front and rear frame spring-loaded and connected with parallel bracing arms
- Continuous wall and roof cover
- Easily replaceable curtains
- Color subject to Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Curtain quality
- Top curtain /side curtains: Double-layered high quality polyester, coated on both sides.
Total weight approx. 3400 g/m².Flammability (DIN 75200).Tensile strength to DIN 53354
approx. 7000 N/5cm for longitudinal and 5000 N/5cm for transverse. Tear elongation to
DIN 53363 approx. 750 N for longitudinal and 900 N for transverse strength. Thickness of
curtain shall not be less than 3mm and shall have high wear and tear resistance.
- Continuous roof cover: One layer high quality polyester, coated on both sides. Total
weight approx. 600 g/m². Flammability (DIN 75200). Tensile strength to DIN 53354
approx. 2500 N/5cm for longitudinal and 2600 N/5cm for transverse. Tear elongation to
DIN 53363 approx. 250 N for longitudinal and 250 N for transverse strength.
- Top curtain with a slit in the main wear area to minimize contact pressure from the truck
- Installation height 4500 mm above outside yard level or to suit door height.
 Curtain shelter dimensions must be to suit the installed dock door, hydraulic dock leveler, typeof
operation and Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Other accessories/items:-
- Provide dock numbers on top curtain.
- Roof part of curtain shall be with integrated rain channel.
- Provide reinforced rubber flaps in the side curtain.
- Provide corner seals to prevent draft in lower areas of curtain shelter.
- Two (2) years manufacturer’s warranty shall be provided from the date of Taking over of
the Works.

V. Dock shelter- Non inflated type for Vans

 Model: ASSA ABLOY DS 6060P Curtain type- custom size or approved equivalent
 Size: 2,800mmx2,200mm or to suit the actual door size finally selected.
 Quantity: As per drawing and schedule
 Collapsible Curtain shelter:-
- Frame in extruded aluminium or steel sections.
- Front and rear frame spring-loaded and connected with parallel bracing arms.
- Continuous wall and roof cover.
- Easily replaceable curtains.
- Color subject to the Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Curtain quality
- Top curtain /side curtains: Double-layered high quality polyester, coated on both sides.
Total weight approx. 3400 g/m².Flammability (DIN 75200).Tensile strength to DIN 53354
approx. 7000 N/5cm for longitudinal and 5000 N/5cm for transverse. Tear elongation to
DIN 53363 approx. 750 N for longitudinal and 900 N for transverse strength.
- Continuous roof cover: One layer high quality polyester, coated on both sides. Total
weight approx. 600 g/m². Flammability (DIN 75200). Tensile strength to DIN 53354
approx. 2500 N/5cm for longitudinal and 2600 N/5cm for transverse. Tear elongation to
DIN 53363 approx. 250 N for longitudinal and 250 N for transverse strength.
- Top curtain with a slit in the main wear area to minimize contact pressure from the truck
- Installation height 2900 mm above outside yard level or to suit door height.
 Curtain shelter dimensions must be to suit the installed dock door, dock plate, type of
operation and Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Other accessories/items:-
- Provide dock numbers on top curtain.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 226 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Roof part of curtain shall be with integrated rain channel


- Provide reinforced rubber flaps in the side curtain
- Provide corner seals to prevent draft in lower areas of curtain shelter
- Two (2) years manufacturer’s warranty shall be provided from the date of Taking over of
the Works.

VI. Accessories for loading bay for HGV and Pick ups

- Buffers: 500x250x90mm rubber buffer with fixing plate.


- Dock Light : Provide dock light with telescopic arm .Powerful LED lights with shatterproof
polycarbonate lens cover
- Dock inn with sensor: Provide LED lights with sensor which serves as solution for parking
guide and traffic light. White guide lights to align the vehicle and red light activated via
sensor to alert the driver.
- Buzzer with relays and interlocking: Buzzer with relays and interlocking.
- Wheel guide: Provide heavy duty wheel guide galvanized finish ; Cast in type with bend
- Wheel choke with sensor: Provide provisions for heavy duty integrated type wheel choke
equipped with sensors connected via coily cables to be fixed next to docking station.
Connections to be made with buzzers and relays to alert the customer during
unauthorized or mishandling of wheel choke during loading operation. (wheel choke and
sensor will be provided by others)
- Rubber Curtain: Provide rubber curtain to cover tail lift access. Heavy duty type.
- Rubber flap under leveler: Reinforced rubber curtain full width with profiles

VII. Accessories for loading bay for Vans

- Dock Light : Provide dock light with telescopic arm .Powerful LED lights with shatterproof
polycarbonate lens cover
- Dock inn with sensor: Provide LED lights with sensor which serves as solution for parking
guide and traffic light. White guide lights to align the vehicle and red light activated via
sensor to alert the driver.
- Buzzer with relays and interlocking: Buzzer with relays and interlocking.
- Wheel guide: Provide heavy duty wheel guide galvanized finish ; Cast in type with bend
- Wheel choke with sensor: Provide provisions for heavy duty integrated type wheel choke
equipped with sensors connected via coily cables to be fixed next to docking station.
Connections to be made with buzzers and relays to alert the customer during
unauthorized or mishandling of wheel choke during loading operation. (wheel choke and
sensor will be provided by others)

630 HATCHES (If required)

 General: Roof hatches shall withstand specified Live load and Wind uplift at a temperature range
of 60o C without damage to unit or permanent deformation to seals
 Material:
- Thickness: metal thicknesses and mass are not specified in the following text. These will be
determined by the design criteria of the specific manufacturer subject to design
requirement.
- Steel sheet: regular quality alloy steel to ASTM A506.
- Galvanized steel sheet: commercial quality to ASTM A526M, with ASTM A525, Z275
designation zinc coating.
- Aluminum sheet: mill finish plain corrugated utility sheet.
- Aluminum: extruded sections of AA6063-T5 alloy, all components one piece without
splices.
- Copper sheet: to ASTM B370 soft temper.
- Gaskets: extruded resilient neoprene with full recovery after 50 % compression.
- Fasteners: stainless steel

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 227 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Sealants: as specified in other sections.


- Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint or epoxy solution.
 Hatch Cover:

- Cover-Type 1: Preformed metal insulated sandwich construction 65 mm overall nominal


thickness.
- Cover-Type 2: Double skinned post formed moulded sections of Thermoformed high
quality self-supporting Plexi Glass. Color to Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Curbed frame: Preformed metal curb 0.55 mm thick x 100 x 100 mm minimum high-insulated
sandwich construction with deck flange for attachment.
 Accessories
- Screws: stainless steel for curb to structure and for hatch lip frame to outer attachment.
- All bolting and fastening material shall be 316 stainless steel.
- Cast-in accessories to the inner and outer shell for fixing to steel structure.
- All sealing materials shall be approved by the specialist manufacturer to ensure
compatibility with the plexi glass material.
- Provide purpose built movable ladder for all domes to be used for cleaning and
maintenance purposes.
- Manufacture’s workmanship shall be such that the parts are accurately made and true to
dimension so that in erection of same, all parts will properly fit together.
- Hinges: type recommended by roof hatch manufacturer, heavy-duty pintle type of
aluminum.
- Latch: positive snap with turn handles inside and out and padlock hasps inside.
- Securing latch: hold open operating arm with metal grip handle to permit one-handed
release.
- Resilient gasket / seal to inner face of lid in contact with hatch lid support frame and to
skylight in contact with hatch lid.
- Heat and smoke venting units: equip with ULC listed thermal safety vent hardware, fusible link
activated spring operated, hold open device, with outside and inside cable release
mechanism.

INSTALLATION

710 PROTECTION OF COMPONENTS


 General: Do not deliver to site components that cannot be installed immediately or placed in
clean, dry, floored and covered storage.
 Stored components: Stacked on level bearers, separated with spacers to prevent damage by
and to projecting ironmongery, beads, etc.

730 PRIMING/ SEALING


 Wood surfaces inaccessible after installation: Primed or sealed as specified before fixing
components.

740 CORROSION PROTECTION


 Surfaces to be protected:
- Copper alloys in contact with aluminium, iron, steel or zinc (including galvanizing).
- Aluminium in contact with timber treated with copper, zinc or mercury based
preservatives.
- Aluminium in contact with oak, sweet chestnut, Douglas fir and western red cedar, unless
well seasoned.
- Aluminium in contact with iron and steel unless galvanized.
- Aluminium in contact with copper or copper alloys and rainwater which has run over them.
- Aluminium in contact with concrete, mortar, plasters or soil, especially when embedded.
- Aluminium in contact with paints containing copper or mercury based fungicides, graphite
or lead.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 228 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Aluminium in contact with lead and stainless steel in heavily polluted atmospheres.
 Protective coating: Two coats of bitumen solution to BS 6949 or an approved mastic
impregnated tape.
- Timing of application: Before fixing components.

750 FIXING DOORSETS


 Timing: After associated rooms have been made weathertight and the work of wet trades is
finished and dried out.
 Examine: Verify that sub frames or wood blockings have been fixed in place in compliance
with approved shop drawings.
 Adjusting: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

760 BUILDING IN
 General: Not permitted unless indicated on drawings.

770 DAMP PROOF COURSES ASSOCIATED WITH BUILT IN WOOD FRAMES


 Method of fixing: To backs of frames using galvanized clout nails.

780 DAMP PROOF COURSES IN PREPARED OPENINGS


 Location: Correctly positioned in relation to door frames. Do not displace during fixing
operations.

800 FIXING OF LOOSE THRESHOLDS


 Spacing of fixings: Maximum 150 mm from each end and at 600 mm maximum centres.

809 FIRE RESISTING AND/ OR SMOKE CONTROL DOORS/ DOORSETS

 Installation: By a firm currently registered under a third party accredited fire door installer
scheme in accordance with instructions supplied with the product conformity certificate, test
report or Engineering assessment. Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated
frames according to NFPA 80.
 Gaps between frames and supporting construction: Filled as necessary in accordance with
requirements for certification and/ or door/ door set manufacturer's instructions.
 Clearances: Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors
 Other requirements: Current regulation of Dubai Civil Defense shall be complied with.

820 SEALANT JOINTS


 Sealant:
Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's
standard range. Product shall also comply with Green Building regulations.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
- Application: As section Z22 to prepared joints. Triangular fillets finished to a flat or slightly
convex profile.

830 FIXING IRONMONGERY GENERALLY


 Fasteners: Supplied by ironmongery manufacturer.
- Finish/ Corrosion resistance: To match ironmongery.
 Holes for components: No larger than required for satisfactory fit/ operation.
 Adjacent surfaces: Undamaged.
 Moving parts: Adjusted, lubricated and functioning correctly at completion.

840 FIXING IRONMONGERY TO FIRE RESISTING DOOR ASSEMBLIES


 General: All items fixed in accordance with door leaf manufacturer's recommendations
ensuring that integrity of the assembly, as established by testing, is not compromised.
 Holes for through fixings and components: Accurately cut.
- Clearances: Not more than 8 mm unless protected by intumescent paste or similar.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 229 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Lock/ Latch cases for fire door requiring > 60 minutes integrity performance: Coated with
intumescent paint or paste before installation.

850 LOCATION OF HINGES


 Primary hinges: Where not specified otherwise, positioned with centre lines 250 mm from top
and bottom of door leaf.
 Third hinge: Where specified, positioned as recommended by the door leaf manufacturer to
the Employer’s Representative's approval.
 Hinges for fire resisting doors: Positioned in accordance with door leaf manufacturer's
recommendations.

860 INSTALLATION OF EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICES


 Standard: Unless specified otherwise, install panic bolts/ latches in accordance with BS EN
1125 and Dubai Civil Defense regulation.

ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

920 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES


 Hollow metal doors and frames to comply with the Steel Door Institute
"Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI 100).
 Sheet steel for door face shall be of commercial quality cold-rolled stretcher levelled steel free
from defects and galvanized finished.
 Steel for doors and frames shall be as follows:
- Hot rolled steel sheets and strips: ASTM A 568 and ASTM A 569.
- Cold rolled steel sheets: ASTM A 336 and ASTM A 568.
- Galvanized steel sheets: ASTM A 526 and ASTM A 642.
 Doors shall be built with all reinforcement required to suit the ironmongery specified in
Section P21.
 Glazed panels shall be provided where indicated including removable metal channel edging.
 Thoroughly protect all work from rust during fabrication.
 Carry out all joining, cutting, etc. to a hairline. All breaks, angles and arises shall be uniform,
straight, sharply defined and true.
 Hollow steel frames shall be 2mm thick (minimum) and shall be welded, primed and finished
before delivery to site.
 Jamb anchors for masonry walls and partitions shall be of 1.6mm thick steel having vertical
adjustment to fit the masonry joints and shall be provided at spacing not exceeding 600mm.
Anchors for partitions other than masonry shall be from the manufacturer's standard range to
suit the wall construction.
 Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack
welded to jambs and mullions.
 Deliver doors and frames palletized and wrapped to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic
 Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads up,
spaced by blocking, on minimum 100-mm-high, wood blocking. Avoid using non-vented plastic
or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber
 Frame reinforcement shall be as follows:
- Provide high frequency hinge reinforcement at each hinge location.
- Closer and holder-arm reinforcement shall be 6.4mm thick.
 All interior frames shall be fitted with pre-moulded door silencers securely attached to the frame
(location and quantity to the manufacturer's specifications).
 Install fire-rated steel doors and frames to comply with NFPA requirements
 All steel frames shall be filled with mortar. Comply with ASTM C 476, with a slump of 102 mm
for custom steel door frames built into concrete or masonry, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
 Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk heads for exposed screws and bolts. No
exposed fasteners will be accepted.
 After the doors are installed in their openings, provide adequate protection to prevent
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 230 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

damage due to other construction operations and movement of individuals, materials and
equipment through the door openings.
 Remove construction marks from finished or exposed surfaces.

925 TOLERENCE FOR STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

 Adjust non fire rated steel frame and door for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the
following tolerances:-
- Squareness frame: Plus or minus 1.6 mm, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
- Alignment frame: Plus or minus 1.6 mm, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to
plane of wall.
- Twist frame: Plus or minus 1.6 mm, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
- Plumpness frame: Plus or minus 1.6 mm, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from
head to floor.
- Jambs and Heads: 3 mm plus or minus 1.6 mm.
- Between Edges of Pairs of doors: 3 mm plus or minus 1.6 mm.
- Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 6 mm.
- Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 10mm.

 Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80

***End of Section L20***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 231 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION L30
STAIRS/ LADDERS/ WALKWAYS/ HANDRAILS/
BALUSTRADES

Page 232 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

L30 STAIRS/ LADDERS/ WALKWAYS/ HANDRAILS/ BALUSTRADES

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with:-


 Composite items or components, usually fabricated off site, providing pedestrian access to and
between different floors and levels of a building and also to ancillary spaces and installations.
 Handrails, balustrades, etc. to such accesses and to roof and floor edges and openings.
 Short, isolated lengths of wall-fixed handrail not associated with balustrades.
 Different components and items of purpose made joinery and metalwork may occur in several
different sections, as relevant.

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS

110 DESIGN
 Design standard: The following items shall be designed to BS 5395 where applicable:
- Stairs, ladders and walkways.
 Completion of design: Finalize details to meet structural and safety requirements of BS 5395.
 Type of activity/ occupancy category to BS 6399-1:
A Domestic and residential activities.
B Office and work areas not covered elsewhere.
C Areas where people may congregate.
D Shopping areas.
E Areas susceptible to the accumulation of goods.
F/G Vehicle and traffic areas.

130 SITE DIMENSIONS


 Procedure: Before starting work on designated items take site dimensions, record on shop
drawings and use to ensure accurate fabrication.
- Designated items: All items specified hereafter.

135 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

 Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings capable of
withstanding the structural loads to BS 6180:1995 and BS 6399 without exceeding allowable
design working stresses of materials for handrails, railings, anchors, and connections.
 Thermal Movements: Provide external handrails and railings that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the maximum change (range) 40 deg C, ambient; 67 deg C,
material surfaces by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss

COMPONENTS

410 STEEL LADDERS GENERALLY


- Production reference: As per final design requirements and details approved in shop
drawings.
 Standard: To BS 4211, Class A.
- Structural design: To BS 5950-1.
 Safety hoops: Required on all fixed ladders rising 2.5m above finished floor level. Distance
between two hoops shall not exceed 1500mm and distance between two uprights shall not
exceed 300mm.
 Platforms: Required for vertical climbs in excess of 6.0m.
 Finish as delivered: Galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 and painted as section M60.
 Fixing: Bolted to floors/ walls as indicated on the approved shop drawings, using stain less steel non
corrosive grade fixing anchors.
 Other requirements:
- Provide shop drawings and structural calculations for the Employer’s Representative's

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 233 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

approval prior to fabrication.


- Ensure that all edges are rounded and welding are ground and smooth.

411 STAINLESS STEEL LADDERS TO WATER TANKS


- Production reference: As per approved design and shop drawings.
 Standard: To BS 4211, Class A.
- Structural design: To BS 5950-1.
 Finish as delivered: Grade 316 S16 polished stainless steel.
 Fixing: Bolted to floors/ walls with grade 316 stainless steel anchor bolts.
 Other requirements:
- Provide shop drawings and structural calculations for the Employer’s Representative's
approval prior to fabrication.
- Ensure that all edges are rounded and weldings are ground and smooth.
- Ensure that the waterproofing integrity is maintained after fixing of ladders.

460 WALKWAYS/ CATWALKS GENERALLY.

 Component material, grade and finish as delivered:


- Flooring: 6mm thick mild steel checkered plate, galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 and
painted as section M60.
- Guarding: Mild steel pipes galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 and painted as section M60.
- Handrails: Mild steel pipes galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 and painted as section M60.
 Workmanship:
- Joinery: N/A.
- Metalwork: To section Z11.
 Other requirements:
- Provide 100mm high skirting.

555 PURPOSE MADE STAIN LESS STEEL HAND RAILING FOR OFFICE STAIRCASE

 Component material, grade and finish as delivered:


- Supporting/ fixing: Specialist contractor’s designed and fabricated Stainless steel members
grade 316 S16 fixed to reinforced concrete.
- Vertical post/guarding: 10mm thick 80mm wide (or 80mm diameter tube) Grade 316
stainless steel plate not more than 2000mm centers.
- Infill for guarding: Grade 316 Stainless steel cable railing (8mm diameter) not more than
100mm apart.
- Top rail: Grade 316 S16 to BS EN 10296-2 polished stainless steel tube min 80mm
diameter.
 Workmanship:
- Glazing: NA.
- Metalwork: As section Z11.
- Tubes are to be welded, assembled so as welds are inconspicuous.

 Fixing: To be designed by the contractor to fulfill the structural requirements and safety design
standards. Anchors of type and finish indicated below, for fixings handrails and railing
terminations to other construction, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry
and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
per ASTM E 488/ BS 5080-1 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
- Type: Expansion anchors
- Material and Finish: Stainless Steel, same grade as handrails or railings to be fastened, for
stainless steel railings
 Other requirements:
- Provide shop drawings and structural calculations for the Employer’s Representative's

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 234 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

approval prior to fabrication.


- Provide a full size sample where agreed with the Employer’s Representative for approval.
- Provide all necessary spacers/ shims/ gaskets to ensure proper alignment.
- Provide all necessary trims to conceal fixings.
- Shall comply with DDA and DCD regulations.

551 PURPOSE MADE BALUSTRADES TO STAIRCASE FOR FIRE EGRESS


 Component material, grade and finish as delivered:
- Guarding: Low carbon steel pipes complying with BS EN 10296-1 finished with alkyd base
paint system.
- Handrails: Low carbon steel pipes complying with BS EN 10296-1 finished with alkyd base
paint system.
 Workmanship:
- Joinery: N/A.
- Metalwork: As section Z11.

 Fixing: Bolted to floors/ walls as per approved shop drawings. Fixing to be designed by the
contractor to fulfill the structural requirements and safety design standards. Anchors of type and
finish indicated below, for fixings handrails and railing terminations to other construction, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a loadequal to six
times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times theload imposed
when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488/ BS 5080-1conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
- Type: Expansion anchors
- Material and Finish: Steel zinc plated to BS EN 12329, coating intensity according to
application, for steel handrails and railings.
 Other requirements:
- Provide all necessary capping rings and trims to conceal fixings: - Ensure that all edges are
rounded and weldings are smooth.
- Prepare a mock up sample for approval.
- Provide shop drawings and structural calculations for the Employer’s Representative's
approval prior to fabrication.
- Shall comply with DDA and DCD regulations.

553 PURPOSE MADE STEEL GUARDRAILS- AT RAMPS FOR FORKLIST MOVEMENT.


 Component material, grade and finish as delivered:
- Guarding: Low carbon steel pipes complying with BS EN 10296-1 finished with durable
powder coating.
- Handrails: Low carbon steel pipes complying with BS EN 10296-1 finished with durable
powder coating.
 Workmanship:
- Joinery: N/A.
- Metalwork: As section Z11.
 Other requirements:
- Provide all necessary capping rings and trims to conceal fixings. - Ensure that all edges are
rounded and weldings are smooth.
- Provide shop drawings and structural calculations for the Employer’s Representative's
approval prior to fabrication

 Fixing: Bolted to floors/ walls as indicated on the contract drawings. Fixing: To be designed by the
contractor to fulfill the structural requirements and safety design standards. Anchors of type and
finish indicated below, for fixings handrails and railing terminations to other construction, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a loadequal to six
times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times theload imposed
when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 /BS 5080-1conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
- Type: Expansion anchors
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 235 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

-Material and Finish: Steel zinc plated to BS EN 12329, coating intensity according to
application, for steel handrails and railings.
- Shall comply with DDA and DCD regulations.
554 PURPOSE MADE STAINLESS STEEL GUARDRAILS to ramps for people of determination

 Component material, grade and finish as delivered:


- Guarding: Grade 316 polished/ satin stainless steel pipes.
- Handrails: Grade 316 polished/ satin stainless steel pipes.
 Workmanship:
- Joinery: N/A.
- Metalwork: As section Z11.
 Other requirements:
- Provide all necessary capping rings and trims to conceal fixings.
- Ensure that all edges are rounded and weldings are smooth.
- Ensure that the guard railing system comply with local regulation regarding people with
determination (DUDC), DDA and DCD guide lines.

 Fixing: Bolted to floors/ walls as per approved shop drawings. Fixing: To be designed by the
contractor to fulfill the structural requirements and safety design standards. Anchors of type and
finish indicated below, for fixings handrails and railing terminations to other construction, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a loadequal to six
times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times theload imposed
when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 /BS 5080-1 conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
- Type: Expansion anchors
- Material and Finish: Steel zinc plated to BS EN 12329, coating intensity according to
application, for steel handrails and railings.

FABRICATION

560 FABRICATION
 General: Fabricate handrails and railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that
required to support structural loads.
 Assemble handrails and railings in the shop to greatest extent possible accuracy to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
 Form changes in direction of railing members as follows:
- As detailed.
- By inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.
- By any method indicated above, applicable to change in direction involved.
 Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature
for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member
throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed
surfaces of handrail and railing components.
 Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members by welding.
Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld connections continuously to comply with the following:
- Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
- Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
- Remove flux immediately.
- At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
 Non-welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings by connecting members with
concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 236 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.


 Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive where this is
manufacturer's standard splicing method subject to Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and
anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members to other work.
 Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings to concrete or
masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by
handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
 For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel not less than 150 mm long with inside
dimensions not less than 12 mm greater than outside dimensions of post, and steel plate
forming bottom closure.
 Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges.
 Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm, unless otherwise approved. Form
bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing the work.
 Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws, and
similar items.
 Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of handrailand
railing members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources.
 Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a watertight manner.
 Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
 Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of
returns, unless clearance between end of railing and wall is 6 mm or less.

INSTALLATION

610 MOISTURE CONTENT


 Temperature and humidity: Monitor and control internal conditions to achieve specified moisture
content in wood components at time of installation.

620 PRIMING/SEALING/PAINTING
 Surfaces inaccessible after assembly/installation: Before fixing components, apply full
protective/decorative treatment/coating system.

630 CORROSION PROTECTION OF DISSIMILAR MATERIALS


 Materials:
- Copper alloys in contact with aluminium, iron, steel or zinc (including galvanizing).
- Aluminium in contact with timber treated with copper, zinc or mercury based
preservatives.
- Aluminium in contact with oak, sweet chestnut, Douglas fir and western red cedar, unless
well seasoned.
- Aluminium in contact with iron and steel unless galvanized.
- Aluminium in contact with copper or copper alloys and rainwater which has run over them.
- Aluminium in contact with concrete, mortar, plasters or soil, especially when embedded.
- Aluminium in contact with paints containing copper or mercury based fungicides, graphite
or lead.
- Aluminium in contact with lead and stainless steel in heavily polluted atmospheres.
 Protective treatment:- Apply one of the following to contact surfaces before assembly/ fixing:
- Two coats of bitumen solution to BS 6949, type 1, class A.
- A suitable mastic impregnated tape.
640 FIXING GENERALLY
 Fasteners and methods of fixing: - To section Z20.
 Structural members: - Do not modify, cut, notch or make holes in structural members, except
as indicated on approved design drawings.
 Temporary support: - Do not use stairs, walkways or balustrades as temporary support or

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 237 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

strutting for other work.


 Anchoring posts by grouting: - Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for
installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and
sleeve with non shrink non metallic anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with
anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. Cover anchorage joint with flange of
same metal as post, attached to post
 Fixing with Post-installed Anchors: - Provide floor covers or flanges of suitable dimensions and
pre-set holes for pass of anchors. Diameter and length of anchors are to be sufficient to
transfer imposed straining actions to mounting floors, based on structural calculations from
anchor’s manufacturer. Minimum number of anchors per each post is to be 4.
 Anchoring railing ends: - Anchor railing ends into concrete and masonry with round flanges
connected to railing ends and anchored into wall construction with post installed anchors and
bolts.
 Attaching Handrails to Walls: - Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with
57-mm clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as
indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural load. Secure wall bracket
to building construction using drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts
 Tolerances: - Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m. Align rails so variations from
level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping
members do not exceed 5 mm in 3 m.

645 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS


 All rails, posts, brackets and elbows shall be formed from matching materials with required
thickness as specified by the manufacturer and approved by the Employer’s Representative.
 Wherever the egress path exceeds 800mm above finished floor level, guards and hand rail
shall be provided as per DCD regulations. Height of guards shall not be less than 1065mm
 All exposed components shall be finished by an approved specialist. Finish shall be guaranteedfor
a minimum of 5 years against wear and tear from the date of Taking over. All pipes and elbows
shall be placed individually to protect the specified finish.
 Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants prior to any painting, all to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
 All pipe cuts shall be circular and accurate for minimum joint gap. Cuts shall be clean and
straight. All holes shall be drilled and countersunk to the size required for a tight, flush fit of
rivets.
 Where protection is applied for prevention of dissimilar materials electrolysis, care shall be taken
to ensure that none of the protective materials is visible when the assembly is completed.
 Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement shall be factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining,
hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at project site to create
pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant
to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and
that is recommended by manufacturer for applications that may be subject to water or exterior
use.
 All posts grouted in concrete shall have one weep hole of 6mm minimum diameter.
 For all exterior installation, provisions shall be made to drain water from the railing system.
Accordingly, for interior installations subject to high humidity, provision shall be made to drain
water from the railing system.
 When posts are mounted into concrete or when bends, elbows occur at low points, weep holes of
6mm minimum diameter shall be drilled at the lowest possible elevations.
 The Contractor shall use all precautions necessary to protect the finish from all forms of damage
during storage, assembly and installation.

***End of Section L30***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 238 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION L40
GENERAL GLAZING

Page 239 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

L40 GENERAL GLAZING

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with:-


 Site fixing of glass and plastics glazing sheet using putty, bead and gasket glazing techniques.
 Requirements for safety, security, thermal insulation, sound insulation and fire resistance.
 Infill panels of materials other than glass or plastics, fixed using glazing techniques.
 Mirrors, glass partitions, parabolic mirrors that are to be fixed by a glazier.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

20 QUALIFICATIONS
 The glass processor/ fabricator shall be ISO 9001 certified.
 The glazing works shall be carried-out by a specialist firm that has specialised in this type of workfor
a continuous period of more than ten (10) years and also possess the necessary license/approval
from authority having jurisdiction. The contractor shall submit evidence of the above requirements
to the Employer’s Representative for approval.
 The glazing works shall be carried-out by operatives having a minimum of Five (5) years’
experience in this type of work and under the supervision of qualified and approved foremen.

30 GUARANTEES
 Attention is directed to provisions of the contract documents regarding guarantees and warranties of
work under this contract.
 The manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for the work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which
manufacturers and contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the contract documents.
 Double glazed units shall be guaranteed for ten (10) years (minimum) from date of Taking over,
not to develop material obstruction of vision as a result of dust or film formation on the internal glass
surface caused by any failure of the hermetic seal except failure caused in whole or in part by the
breakage of portion of the glass surface.
 Laminated glass shall be guaranteed for five (5) years (minimum) from date of Taking over, not to
develop material deterioration, edge separation or de-lamination which materially obstructs the
vision through the glass.
 Heat treated glass shall be guaranteed for ten(10) years(minimum) from date of Taking over, not to
break spontaneously due to the inclusion of nickel sulphide.
 Post temperable sputtered and pyrolitic coatings shall be guaranteed for ten (10) years (minimum) from
date of Taking over, not to develop peeling or deterioration in the metallic film under normal conditions.
 Manufacturer's Special guaranty for Silvered Mirrored Glass: Shall be guaranteed for Five (05) years
(minimum) from date of Taking over, against deterioration and defective performance.

40 STORAGE AND HANDLING


 All items furnished under this section shall be handled, delivered and stored in a manner to
prevent damage or deformation, all in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
These items shall also be properly protected from weather and construction activities.
 Delivery of items to site shall be in the manufacturer's fully identified containers with each piece of glass
properly labelled.

50 QUALITY AND LABELLING


 Each piece of glass shall bear the processor/ fabricator's label showing the type (single or insulated glass
unit), the thickness (total and individual), the class (substrate) and the kind (heat-treated or
laminated) of the glass. When glass is processed from stock by the local fabricator, a certificate
from the float manufacturer showing the standard, type of coating, thickness, condition, class and
kind of the glass shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative.
 All materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability and appearance including
defects stated in EN572, JIS R3202 or ASTM C1036. The minimum acceptable quality for all glass
types is q3 (glazing select) in accordance to ASTM.
 Except when otherwise indicated, the requirements for glazing and aluminium windows
terminology and standards of performance and fabrication workmanship, are those specified and

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 240 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

recommended in ANSI A 134.1, and the applicable general recommendations published by AAMA,
NAAM, AA, ASTM, British Standards, CEN, Agreement Board and the SMC.
 Windows glazed prior to shipment shall be corner of edge blocked in accordance to glass
manufacturer's recommendations. Windows shall be randomly inspected by the Employer’s
Representative on arrival at the job site to ensure the integrity of the glazing system.
 Glazing used for the Works shall pass all tests required as per Dubai Civil Defense regulations.

60 MOCK-UP AND PERFORMANCE TESTS


 Prepare a mock-up for the Employer’s Representative's visual examination and for checking the
compliance with the performance requirements. Use materials, fabrication and installation
methods identical to those required for the work.

111 PREGLAZING
 Pre-glazing of components: Permitted.
 Prevention of displacement: Submit details of precautions to be taken to protect glazing and
compound/ seals during delivery and installation.
 Defective/ displaced glazing/ compound/ seals: Re-glaze components in situ.

130 REMOVAL OF GLASS/ PLASTICS FOR REUSE


 Existing glass/ plastics and glazing compound, beads, etc: Remove carefully, avoiding damage to
frame, to leave clean, smooth rebates free from obstructions and debris.
 Deterioration of frame/ surround: Submit report on defects revealed by removal of glazing.
- Affected areas: Do not reglaze until instructed.
 Reusable materials: Clean glass/ plastics, beads and other components that are to be reused.

140A MATERIAL SAMPLES


 Representative samples of designated materials: Submit for approval before cutting panes.
- Sample size (minimum): 300 mm square.
- Designated materials: All items specified in this section and applicable to the project.

150 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY


 Glazing generally: To BS 6262.
 Integrity: Glazing must be wind and watertight under all conditions with full allowance made for
deflections and other movements.
 Dimensional tolerances: Panes/ sheets to be within ± 2 mm of specified dimensions.
 Materials:
- Compatibility: Glass/ plastics, surround materials, sealers, primers and paints/ clear finishes to be
used together to be compatible. Avoid contact between glazing panes/ units and alkaline
materials such as cement and lime.
- Protection: Keep materials dry until fixed. Protect insulating glass units and plastics glazing
sheets from the sun and other heat sources.

152 PREPARATION
 Surrounds, rebates, grooves and beads: Clean and prepare before installing glazing.

155 GLASS GENERALLY


 Standards: To BS 952 and relevant parts of:
- BS EN 572 for basic soda lime silicate glass.
- BS EN 1096 for coated glass.
- BS EN 1748-1 for borosilicate glass.
- BS EN 1748-2 for ceramic glass.
- BS EN 1863 for heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass.
- BS EN 12150 for thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass.
- BS EN 12337 for chemically strengthened soda lime silicate glass.
- BS EN 13024 for thermally toughened borosilicate safety glass.
- BS EN ISO 12543 for laminated glass and laminated safety glass.
 Performance of glass shall comply with Green Building regulations of local authority, Green

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 241 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Building project plan, project MEP design requirements and DCD regulations.
 Panes/ sheets: Clean and free from obvious scratches, bubbles, cracks, rippling, dimples and other
defects.
- Edges: Generally undamaged. Shells and chips not more than 2 mm deep and extending not
more than 5 mm across the surface are acceptable if ground out.

157 FLOAT GLASS


 Clear, transparent float glass to BS 952-1 and BS EN 572-2 of flat and parallel surfaces so that they
provide clear undistorted vision and reflection.

159 WIRED GLASS


 Polished Georgian wired glass to BS EN 572-3. Thickness is to be 6.0mm minimum.

162 FIRE RESISTANT WIRED GLASS


 Polished Georgian wired glass to BS EN 572-3. Thickness of glass is to be as recommended for
particular purpose by the glass manufacturer to suit window or door area and fire rating required.Fire
rated wired glass is to be labelled as rated for same fire resistance rating indicated on drawings
or in ironmongery schedule or door/window schedule.

163 COATED FLOAT GLASS


 Provide heat strengthened coated float glass in place of coated annealed glass where needed to
resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with
glass design requirements.
 Sputter coated float glass: Float glass with metallic oxide or metallic nitride coating deposited by
vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if any).
 Tinted reflective glass is to be high performance solar control glass complying with the
performance parameters specified under respective clauses.

165 HEAT SOAKING OF THERMALLY TOUGHENED GLASS


 Heat soaking regime: Glass to be fixed in designated locations must be subjected to a heat soaking
regime designed to reduce the incidence of failure due to nickel sulfide inclusions.
- Heat soaking period (minimum): To the requirements of EN14179.
- Mean glass temperature: 290 ±10°C.
- Fabrication process: By horizontal (roller- hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to
bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
- Toughened (fully tempered) glass shall comply with BS 952.
 Certified evidence of treatment: Submit.
 Designated locations:
- All fully tempered glass (monolithic or laminated, used in single version or as an external pane of
an IGU) facing the exterior with exposure to outside environmental conditions.

180 BEAD FIXING WITH PINS


 Pin spacing: Regular at maximum 150 mm centres, and within 50 mm of each corner.
 Exposed pin heads: Punched just below wood surface.

190 GLASS TO GLASS JOINTING


 Sealant: Clear silicone to BS EN ISO 11600 as recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer.
Also to comply with green building regulation.
- Joints:
 Width: Consistent and suitable to receive sealant.
 Gap between panes: Completely filled, leaving no voids or bubbles.
 Surplus sealant: Removed to leave a clean, neatly finished weathertight joint.

198 APPROVED DOUBLE GLAZING AND SPECIAL GLASS MANUFACTURER


 The contractor or his sub-contractor(s) does not have the right to substitute and add to this list
without approval from the Employer’s Representative.
 Special glass means wired glass, heat-strengthened/ tempered glass, fire resistant glass, tinted and

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 242 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

reflective glass, and shop front glass.


 In order to ensure uniformity of colour, appearance and performance of the glazing system, each
component of the system shall be from a single source.
 The glass substrate for each pane shall be provided from a single, uniform source for the entire
duration of the project.
 The glass coatings shall be applied by a single manufacturer / applicator for the entire duration of
the project. This manufacturer / applicator shall provide a separate guarantee for the coating.
 The assembly of the insulated glass units shall be carried out by a single specialist firm that has
specialized in this type of work for a continuous period of more than Ten (10) years and who shall
provide a warranty for the entire system.
 The contractor shall submit evidence of the above requirements to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.

TYPES OF GLAZING

370 BEAD FIXED INSULATING GLASS UNITS TO FRAMED DOORS, WINDOWS AND SCREENS
 Pane material: 24mm thick hermetically sealed insulating glass unit unless otherwise indicated on the
concept drawings.
- Inner pane: 6mm thick clear float glass with “Low-E coating” on surface.
- Outer pane: 6mm body tinted fully tempered glass unless otherwise indicated on the concept
drawings, complying with local authority latest regulations and Green building requirements.
Thermal transmission coefficient U value shall not exceed 1.8 W/m2 K, shading coefficient shall not
exceed 0.30 and minimum light transmittance shall be 0.35.
- Spacer: 12 mm dehydrated air interspace. The spacer tube shall contain moisture absorbing
material.
- Perimeter taping: Do not use.
- For any installation within height of 900 mm from finished floor level, are to be of same panel
make-up and performance requirements specified above but with the internal glass lite fully-
tempered and tested to have impact performance Class A to BS 6206
 Surround/ bead: Extruded aluminium unless otherwise as shown in approved design drawings.
- Bead location: Inside unless otherwise indicated on the approved shop drawings.
- Preparation: As recommended by the manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
- Bead fixing: As recommended by the manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
 Glazing system: Drained and ventilated.
 Glazing installation:
- Insulating unit: Located centrally in surround using setting and location blocks.
- Gaskets and beads: Installed as recommended by frame manufacturer.
- Gasket fit at corners: Tight, without gaps.
- Drainage and ventilation holes: Unobstructed.

450 SINGLE GLAZING INTO GROOVES FOR DOORS

 Pane material: 10mm thick clear fully tempered glass.


 Channel/ surround: Grade 316 stainless steel channels.
- Preparation: As recommended by the manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
 Beads:
- Material: Grade 316 stainless steel channels.
- Location: Inside and outside unless otherwise indicated on the approved shop drawings.
- Preparation: As recommended by the manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
- Fixing: As recommended by the manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's approval.
 Glazing system: Fully bedded.
 Glazing installation:
- Glass: Located centrally in grooves using setting blocks and distance pieces of appropriate

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 243 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

thickness.
- Backing strip: Expanded polyethylene, inserted at head and jambs, ensuring a tight fit and
allowing a minimum distance of 6 mm between strip and sight line.
- Sill beads: Fixed securely with backing strip between bead and glazing.
- Capping sealant: Applied to fill recesses on both sides of glass and finished to a smooth
chamfer.

455 SINGLE GLAZING INTO GROOVES FOR FRAMELESS MEETING ROOM PARTITIONS

 Pane material: 10mm thick clear fully tempered glass.


 Channel/ surround: Provide necessary support system in SS grade 316.
- Preparation: As recommended by the manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
 Beads:
- Material: Grade 316 stainless steel.
- Location: Inside and outside as per the approved shop drawings.
- Preparation: As recommended by the manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
- Fixing: As recommended by the manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's approval.
 Glazing system: Fully bedded.
 Glazing installation:
- Glass: Located centrally in grooves using setting blocks and distance pieces of appropriate
thickness.
- Backing strip: Expanded polyethylene, inserted at head and jambs, ensuring a tight fit and
allowing a minimum distance of 6 mm between strip and sight line.
- Sill beads: Fixed securely with backing strip between bead and glazing.
- Capping sealant: Applied to fill recesses on both sides of glass and finished to a smooth
chamfer.
 Other Requirements:
- Support frames/accessories shall be stainless steel grade 316.
- Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval.
- Privacy film shall be provided on the glass partition as per end user’s requirements.

550 GLASS MIRRORS GENERALLY

 Mirror material: Annealed, clear float glass with successive layers of chemically deposited silver,
electrically or chemically deposited copper, and manufacturer's standard organic protective coating
applied to second glass surface to produce a coating system to provide maximum reflection free
from tarnishing, scratches and other visible defects visible in the designed viewingconditions.
- Thickness: Minimum 6mm unless otherwise indicated on the concept drawings or required as
per design.
- Backing: Lead foil.
- Edge treatment: Arris edge to BS 952-2 with ground finish. Seal edges of silvered mirrored glass
after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. Require
mirrored glass manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately
after cutting to final sizes
 Background: As per approved shop drawing.
 Fixing method General:-
- Install mirrored glass units to comply with written instructions of mirrored glass manufacturer. Mount
mirrored glass accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.
- For wall-mounted mirrored glass units, install permanent means of support at bottom and top
edges with bottom support designed to withstand mirrored glass weight and top support
designed to prevent mirrored glass from coming away from wall along top edges. Install
mirrors to wall in a detail so as to prevent contact with alkali.
- Comply with GGF Manual data sheet 4.8 “Recommendations for fixing mirrors with suggested
applications”, of the Glass and Glazing Federation (GGF), UK
 Mechanical Fixing: Comply with following:-

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 244 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Provide space for air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of mounting
surface.
- Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with
anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backsof
mirrored glass units. Mechanical fasteners shall be stainless steel non corrosive grade.
- For metal clips, place a felt or plastic pad between mirrored glass and each clip to prevent
spalling of mirrored glass edges. Metal clips shall be brass nickel plated.
- Where indicated, install bottom and top clips symmetrically placed and evenly spaced.
- Fixed accurately and securely without over tightening fasteners, to provide a flat surface giving a
distortion free reflection.
 Mirrors Adhesive Fixing: Comply with following:-
- Wooden substrates, materials and workmanship, are to be erected to details shown on
approved shop drawings and requirements of Section Z10.
- Install mirrored glass units in accordance with the written instructions of the manufacturers of
mirrored glass and mastic adhesive material.
- Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by said manufacturers for
installations in areas of high moisture concentration similar to bathrooms and toilets.
- Apply mastic in spots for coverage rating recommended by manufacturer.
- Align mirrored glass units and press into place, ensure aligned edges of units and undistorted
reflection both within and between adjoining panes.
- Provide temporary supports at top and bottom edges of units to prevent units from coming
away from vertical substrates during time of adhesive.
- Clean face of mirrored glass from any material or adhesive mastic reached to it.
- After final setting of mastic, remove temporary supports and re-clean faces of mirrored glassas
necessary.
 Protection and cleaning:-
- Protect mirrored glass from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations.
- Do not permit edges of silvered mirrored glass to be exposed to standing water.
- Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent silvered mirrored glass from being
exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
- Wash mirrored glass not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections intended
to establish date for Taking Over by the Employer’s Representative

570 PARABOLIC MIRRORS IN CAR PARKS (If required)


- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Mirror type: Parabolic/ circular.
 Material: Impact proof/ vandal safe polycarbonate with aluminium foil backing.
 Dimensions: As per approved design drawings.
 Support: Proprietary fitting suitable for the type of application and the indicated mounting height.
- Material: Galvanised steel or as recommended by the manufacturer to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
 Fixing: Fix accurately and securely without over tightening.
 Other requirements:
- The mirror supporting fitting shall be adjustable in order to ensure proper angle and coverage.
- The mirror is to be fitted with a hexagonal layer reflex for dipped light.

575 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS


 All glazing within (900mm) of any given finished floor level shall be fully tempered.
 All glass thickness and strength mentioned are minimum and indicative only. Confirm glass
thickness by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size
openings in nominal thickness indicated, but not less than thickness and in strengths (annealed or
heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria, in compliance with BS6262 or
approved equivalent:-
- Design wind pressure: Consider basic wind speed of 45m/s
- Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more
than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action for load duration 60 seconds or less.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 245 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Maximum Lateral Deflection: For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads or for
insulating glass or for laminated-glass lites, supported on all four edges, provide thickness
required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length
or 25 mm, whichever is less.
- Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from
Temperature Change (Range): 40 deg C, ambient; 60 deg C, material surfaces temperatures acting
on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
- Performance of glass shall comply with local authority Green Building regulation, DCD
regulation, Green Building project plan and MEP design requirements.
- Glazing used for the Works shall pass all tests required as per Dubai Civil Defense regulations.
- Minimum glass thickness shall not be less than 6mm.
- Color of glass shall be to Employer’s Representative’s approval.

MATERIALS

710 GLAZING GASKETS


 Material:
- Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1. EPDM
- Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509. EPDM
 Continuity: Outer gaskets of single front sealed curtain walling systems and inner gaskets of drained
and ventilated or pressure equalized curtain walling systems must be formed in a complete
frame with sealed joints. Vulcanized rubber gaskets must have factory moulded corner joints.
 Durability: Resistant to oxidation, ozone and UV degradation.

720 GLAZING TAPES


 Where shown or indicated, tape shall be performed macro-poly-isobutylene with a continuous
integral shim of 40-60 Shore "A". Tape should compress to be shim without excessive force being
required to avoid pressure point or breakage. All as recommended by the glass manufacturer.
Colour to be to the Employer’s Representative's selection.

730 GLAZING SPACER SHIMS


 The material shall consist of at least 50% by weight of basic rubber hydrocarbon, and shall contain
no crude or reclaimed rubber. It shall be homogeneous, free from defects and shall be
compounded and cured to meet the requirements herein specified.
 Cured EPDM (Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer) or neoprene shall have the following
properties when tested to ASTM test slabs and compression set plugs:
- Hardness (± 5): 50 when tested to ASTM D-2000.
- Tensile Strength (N/mm2): 11.2 when tested to ASTM D-412.
- Elongation (%): 400 when tested to ASTM D-412.
- Heat Ageing: 10 when tested to ASTM D-865.

740 SETTING BLOCKS


Neoprene or EPDM 90 (± 0.5) Shore "A" durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with the
sealant used.

750 EDGE BLOCKS/ SPACERS


Neoprene or EPDM 60 (± 0.5) Shore "A" durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with the
sealant used.

760 COMPRESSIBLE FILLER RODS


Closed-cell polyethylene or waterproof-jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proved to
be compatible with sealants used, flexible and resilient, with 35-70Pa compression strength for 25%
deflection. Filler rods shall not to be used in the glazing rebate.

770 BUMPER CUSHIONS


Neoprene 90 Shore "A" durometer hardness, 75mm long, thickness as required to maintain a 3mm
nominal gap between glass and cushion.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 246 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

INSTALLATION

810 INSTALLATION GENERALLY


 Do not begin glazing until all cleaning and repair of the surrounding finished surfaces has been
completed.
 Do not begin glass installation until rebates and glazing stops have been primed and are
thoroughly dry. Do not install glazing when ambient temperatures are too extreme or when wind is
make the handling of glass difficult.
 All surfaces receiving glazing materials shall be thoroughly wiped with a clean cloth dampened with high
performance cleaners, as approved by the sealant manufacturer. Wipe dry using a clean cloth, changing
frequently. Special precautions must be taken in cold weather to ensure the surfaces are free from
frost.
 All windows/framed glazing units shall be checked prior to glazing. Make sure that the opening is
square, plumb and secure in order to maintain a uniform face and edge clearance. Make sure that all
butt, face and edge clearances are maintained. Inspect all butt and mitred joints. If these joints are
open, they shall be sealed prior to glazing.
 All openable units shall be properly adjusted. Maintain minimum face clearance between glass and sash
on both sides. Clearance shall be as recommended by the glass manufacturer.
 All glass shall be accurately cut to the required size from measurements taken at site.
 All operating sashes shall be glazed in a closed position and shall remain closed until the glazing
material has been properly cured.
 Locate setting blocks in the sill member as recommended by the glass manufacturer. On 180º
pivoting sashes, follow the manufacturer's recommendations. Setting blocks must be set
equidistant from the centre line of the glass edge and 1.5mm less than the full rebate width. These
shall be located high enough to provide the recommended bite and edge clearances.
 Glass shall be set without springing and with proper clearance at all edges and faces within rebates.
Tong marks of tempered glass shall be concealed within rebates.
 Install wired glass with any sag in wires turned so as to bow upwards.
 Edge cover and clearance for double glazing to be as recommended by the manufacturer.
 All materials shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
 Protect etched, sand blasted or ground glass from oil attack by treating edges before fixing and
cleaning surfaces after fixing all as recommended by the glass manufacturer.
 Glass panes with any displaced glass or compound or with defective seals to be re-glazed on site.

820 GASKET INSTALLATION


 The gasket shall be cut approximately 1.5mm per meter longer than the respective channel into
which it will be inserted. Cut ends of gasket at a 45º angle so that the top is longer than the base.
 In setting the gasket into the channel between the glass and removable stops, the horizontal strips (head
and sill) shall be set first, then the vertical strips (jambs).
 To avoid stretching of the gasket, first place the gasket into the corners and then into the channel. Push
the remaining gasket into the channel and finish with a roller. Roll from the centre towards one
corner. Return to the centre and roll toward the opposite corner.

830 SEALANT INSTALLATION


 A continuous extruded shim as described in the clauses above shall be inserted between the glassor
panel and glazing stop and should be of sufficient thickness so that all pressure on the glass or panel
is transmitted though the shim. The spacer shim shall also keep the glass or panel in
compression against tape. The spacer shim should be approximately 40 to 50 shore "A" hardness
and must be 6.4mm minimum below the sight line. The extrusion must be installed in four separate
sections, not to run continuously around corners. See glazing detail for configuration and
placement.
 The sealant cavity pocket, formed by setting of the glazing stop can then be filled to the sight linewith
sealant as section Z22 and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The cap bead
shall not exceed 1.5mm above the sight line onto the glass surface. Prime surfaces as required
by the sealant manufacturer, taking care to protect surfaces that do not require primer.
 Tool exposed surfaces of glazing sealants to provide a substantial "wash" away from the glass.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 247 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Ensure compatibility of the extrusion with the sealant at point of contact. Actual dimensions of the sealant
cavity will depend on the design. Consult the sealant manufacturer for recommendations.

840 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK


 If the work progress and programming requires that glazing is carried out prior to completing the
finishing works of adjacent surfaces, the contractor shall provide full protection to the glazed (and mirror)
surfaces.
 All glass shall be protected from damage until handing over of the building and if broken or
defective, it shall be removed and replaced with glass of the same type.
 The Contractor may, at his own option, carry glass breakage insurance, but failure to carry proper
insurance shall in no way relieve him of his responsibility in this regard.
 Do not mark "X" or other figures on glass. All glazed openings shall be identified with markers such
as tapes of flags that are not in contact with the glass, but which are held in position away from the glass
and attached to the framing members.
 All glass shall be examined on a monthly basis during the period of Defects Liability to detect any
formation of staining and/or etching. If staining or etching is noticeable, notify the Employer’s
Representative immediately for determination or proper remedial procedures. Plaster, mortar, paint
spatter or any other coating shall be removed immediately after contact and shall not be permitted
to collect or remain on the glass surface.
 Do not use paint or indicators on solar control or coloured glass.
 Failure to protect finished works shall always be the responsibility of the contractor.

850 CLEANING OF FINISHED WORK


 Cleaning of glass and mirror surfaces is the responsibility of the contractor. Cement and paint
debris on such surfaces which have not been protected in accordance to clause 840 are the
responsibility of the contractor. Cleaning shall be carried out strictly to the written cleaning
instruction of the manufacturer and the approval of the Employer’s Representative.
 Remove all labels excess glazing compounds, stains and spots from glass on completion of glazing.
 Remove all rubbish and debris from the site at the end of each working day. Clean compound
smears and stains from adjacent surfaces as the work progresses.
 At the completion of the entire job, all glass surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed by
professional window cleaners, using mild soap solution, soft bristle brushes and clean clear water.
 Remove dirt and grime from plastic (Polycarbonate) sheets using a tepid soap or detergent
solution. Remove fresh paint grease and glazing compounds using solvents recommended by the
sheet manufacturer.
 The Employer’s Representative reserves the right to order the removal and replacement of glass
and mirror panels which do not comply with clauses 840 and 850. The cost of such replacement
shall be borne by the contractor.

***End of Section L40**

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 248 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION M10
CEMENT BASED LEVELLING/ WEARING SCREEDS

Page 249 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

M10 CEMENT BASED LEVELLING/ WEARING SCREEDS

To be read with Preliminaries/General Conditions. This section deals with:-


 Cement based levelling screeds, cast on to new or existing structural floors and roofs to form
smooth and regular substrates for applied finishes.
 Concrete wearing screeds (sometimes called ‘toppings’) cast onto new or existing structural floors
and finished to form smooth wearing surfaces.

TYPES OF SCREED

115 CEMENT: SAND LEVELLING SCREEDS TO WET AREAS


 Base: Reinforced concrete slabs unless otherwise indicated on the approved final design drawing.
 Screed type: Unbonded on waterproofing membrane.
- Reinforcement for crack control: Use where required.
- Type of reinforcement: Wire Fabric Reinforcement to BS 4483, welded steel wire fabric, eye size
not more than 50 x 50 mm and wire diameter 2.00 mm minimum for screed more than 70mm
deep. Or Fibrous Reinforcement: 100 % virgin polypropylene, fibrillated fibers containing
no re-processed olefin materials and specifically manufactured to an optimum gradation for use
as concrete secondary reinforcement. Fibrous reinforcement shall have the following properties:
Specific gravity: 0.91; Tensile strength: 345 - 758 N/mm2 for screed less than 70mm deep.
 Nominal thickness: Variable to achieve the slopes indicated on the approved final design
drawings.
- Thickness (minimum): 30 mm.
 Mix:
- Aggregates: Standards as clause 305.
- Water: Potable grade
- Proportions (cement: sand): 1:3-4.5.
- Admixture: As clause 307.
- Compressive strength(28 days):250 kg/cm2 for screed with fine concrete mix (coarse
aggregate of maximum size of 10 mm is used) or 220 kg/cm2 for cement-sand screeds.
- Maximum slump: 125mm and water cement ratio 0.45(max)
- Mix design: Submit mix design for approval.
 In situ crushing resistance (ISCR): As clause 335.
- Mass of test weight: 4 kg
- Depth of indentation (maximum): 2.5 mm.
 Datum levels: Laid to falls as clause 350.
 Flatness/ Surface regularity: Maximum permissible deviation when measured as clause 355: SR1.
 Finish:
- Method: Trowelled as clause 540.
- To receive: Floor tiles as section M40.
 Other requirements:
- Joints as clause 406.
- Mix screed materials, admixtures and water in appropriate drum-type demountable mixer
according to manufacturer's written instructions.

150 PROPRIETARY LIGHTWEIGHT CEMENT SAND LEVELLING SCREEDS TO ROOFS


 Base: Reinforced concrete slabs unless otherwise indicated on the approved final design drawings.
- Product reference: Light weight concrete mix consisting of cement, sand and foaming agent.
The screed is mixed at site with clean potable water and is then applied to the selected
background.
 Screed type: Partially bonded as clause 270.
- Reinforcement for crack control: Use where required.
- Type of reinforcement: Fibrous Reinforcement: 100 % virgin polypropylene, fibrillated fibers
containing no re-processed olefin materials and specifically manufactured to an optimum
gradation for use as concrete secondary reinforcement. Fibrous reinforcement shall have the
following properties: Specific gravity: 0.91; Tensile strength: 345 - 758 N/mm2;

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 250 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Nominal thickness: Variable to achieve the slopes indicated on the approved final design
drawings.
- Thickness (minimum): 50 mm.
 Mix:
- Mix Ingredients: Cement, sand and foaming agent
- Aggregates: Standards as clause 305.
- Foaming agent: Formulation that produces entrapped air bubbles in hardened concrete mix.
- Water: Potable grade
- Fine aggregate: As per manufacturer’s recommendation.
- Proportions: Pre-blended.
- Cement; sand ratio: 1:2
- Unit Weight of Hardened Concrete: 800 kg/m3
- Compressive Strength after 28 Days: 5.2 MPa, minimum
- Mix design: Submit mix design for approval.
 Datum levels: Laid to falls as clause 350.
 Surfacing layer: Not required.
 Other requirements:
- Finish as clause 540.
- Joints as clause 406.
- Comply with manufacturer’s printed Instructions. Mix screed materials, admixtures and water in
appropriate drum-type demountable mixer.

GENERALLY/PREPARATION

205 DESIGN LIFE OF SCREEDS


 Duration: 50 years.
- Subject to reasonable wear and tear.
 Location: All areas.
 Condition of use: Subject to correct loading and traffic usage throughout duration.

210 SUITABILITY OF BASES


 General:
- Suitable for specified levels and flatness/ regularity of finished surfaces. Consider permissible
minimum and maximum thicknesses of screeds.
- Sound and free from significant cracks and gaps.
 Cleanliness: Remove plaster, debris and dirt.
 Moisture content: To suit screed type. New concrete slabs to receive fully or partially bonded
construction must be dried out by exposure to the air for minimum six weeks.

215 SURFACE HARDNESS OF BASES TO RECEIVE POLYMER MODIFIED WEARING SCREEDS


 General: Bases must restrain stresses that occur during setting and hardening of wearing screeds.
 Test for surface hardness: To BS EN 12504-2 using a rebound hammer with compliance values
selected from the following:
- Screed thickness Rebound hammer value

15 mm or less Greater than 25


Greater than 15 mm Greater than 30

 Report: Submit details of areas where base surface hardness does not comply with these values.

220 PROPRIETARY LEVELLING/ WEARING SCREEDS


 General: Materials, mix proportions, mixing methods, minimum/maximum thicknesses and
workmanship must be in accordance with recommendations of screed manufacturer.

230 CONTROL SAMPLES


 General: Complete areas of finished work and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 251 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Screed type: All types of screed specified in this section and applicable to the project.
- Location/ Size: As agreed with the Employer’s Representative/ 2 m x 2 m.

250 CONDUITS UNDER FLOATING SCREEDS


 Haunching: Before laying insulation for floating screeds, haunch up in 1:4 cement: sand on both
sides of conduits.

251 CONDUITS CAST INTO OR UNDER SCREEDS


 Reinforcement: Overlay with reinforcement selected from:
- 500 mm wide strip of steel fabric to BS 4483, reference D49, or
- Welded mesh manufactured in rolls from mild steel wire minimum 1.5 mm diameter to BS
1052, mesh size 50 x 50 mm.
 Placing reinforcement: Mid depth between top of conduit and the screed surface.
- Screed cover over conduit (minimum): 25 mm.

255 PIPE DUCTS/TRUNKING


 Preformed access ducts: Before laying screed, fix securely to base and level accurately in relation to
finished floor surface.

260 FULLY BONDED CONSTRUCTION


 Preparation: Generally in accordance with BS 8204-1.
 Removing mortar matrix: Shortly before laying screed, expose coarse aggregate over entire area of
hardened base.
 Texture of surface: Suitable to accept screed and achieve a full bond over complete area.
 Bonding coat: Slurry as clause 275.

270 PARTIALLY BONDED CONSTRUCTION


 Preparation: Generally in accordance with BS 8204-1.
 Base surface: Brushed finish with no surface laitance.
- Texture of surface: Suitable to accept screed and achieve a bond over complete area.
 Bonding coat: Slurry as clause 275.

275 CEMENT SLURRY BONDING


 Slurry type: SBR polymer modified cement.
 Application: Shortly before laying screed, thoroughly wash clean the surface and keep well wetted for
several hours. Remove free water then brush in cement slurry bonding coat of creamy
consistency.
 Screeding: While slurry is still wet.

280 UNBONDED CONSTRUCTION


 Separation: Lay screed over a suitable sheet dpm or a separating layer.
- Type: Polyethylene sheet, minimum 125 micrometres thick (500 gauge).
 Installation of separating layer: Lay on clean base. Turn up for full depth of screed at abutments
with walls, columns, etc. Lap 100 mm at joints.

295 FLOATING CONSTRUCTION (THIN SHEET IMPACT SOUND INSULATION)


 Base: Remove projections that may puncture the insulation.
 Insulation:
- Type: 5 mm extruded (closed cell) polyethylene foam, density 30-45 kg/m³.
- Installation: Lay on base. Turn up for full depth of screed at perimeter abutments. Lap 100
mm at joints and seal with tape.
- Perimeter: Maintain isolation of screed.

BATCHING/MIXING

305 CEMENT AND AGGREGATE STANDARDS


 Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1, class 42.5 or Portland blast furnace to BS 146, class 42.5.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 252 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Sand: To BS EN 13139.
- Grading limit: To BS 8204-1, table B.1: but with 100% passing sieve size 5.00 to BS 410.
 Coarse aggregate for fine concrete leveling screeds:
- Standard : To BS EN 12620
- Designation : 4/10
 Light weight aggregates: To BS 8204 – 1, Annex – A.

307 ADMIXTURE STANDARD


 Type: Water reducing to BS EN 934-2. Certified by manufacturer to contain no more than 0.1 %
water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and compatible with other
admixture and cementitious materials.
 Calcium chloride: Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. Use only liquid type
admixtures

310 BATCHING WITH DENSE AGGREGATES


 Mix proportions: Specified by weight.
 Batching: Select from:
- Batch by weight.
- Batch by volume: Permitted on the basis of previously established weight: volume
relationships of the particular materials. Use accurate gauge boxes. Allow for bulking of damp
sand.

311 BATCHING WITH LIGHTWEIGHT AGGREGATES


 Mix proportions: Specified by volume.
 Batching: Use accurate gauge boxes.

330 MIXING
 Water content: Minimum necessary to achieve full compaction, low enough to prevent excessive
water being brought to surface during compaction.
 Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency. Mixes other than no-fines must be mixed
in a suitable forced action mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall drum type mixer.
 Consistency: Use while sufficiently plastic for full compaction.
 Ready-mixed retarded screed mortar: Use within working time and site temperatures
recommended by manufacturer. Do not retemper.

335 IN SITU CRUSHING RESISTANCE (ISCR)


 Standards and category: To BS 8204-1, table 5.
- For testing of bonded screeds refer to Annex C.
- For testing of floating screeds refer to Annex D.

Class Service Indentation


conditions depth

A Heavy use 3 mm
B Normal use 4 mm

C Light use 5 mm

340 ADVERSE WEATHER


 Screeds surface temperature: Maintain above 5°C for a minimum of four days after laying.
 Hot weather: Prevent premature setting or drying out.

LAYING

345 LEVEL OF SCREED SURFACES


 Permissible deviation: ±10 mm from datum (allowing for thickness of coverings).

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 253 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

350 SCREEDING TO FALLS


 Minimum screed cover: Maintain at the lowest point.
 Falls: Gradual and consistent.
- Gradient (minimum): As indicated on approved final design drawings.

351 SCREEDING TO RAMPS


 Screed cover: Maintain consistent screed depth.
 Falls: Gradual and consistent.

355 FLATNESS/ SURFACE REGULARITY OF FLOOR SCREEDS


 Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
 Deviation of surface: Measure from underside of a 3 m straightedge (between points of contact),
placed anywhere on surface using a slip gauge to BS 8204-1 or - 2 (or equivalent).
 Surface regularity standards:
- SR1: 3 mm high standard.
- SR2: 5 mm normal standard.
- SR3: 10 mm utility standard.

365 FLATNESS/ SURFACE REGULARITY OF ROOF SCREEDS


 Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
 Deviation of surface: Measure from underside of a 2 m straightedge (between points of contact),
placed anywhere on surface.
- Permissible deviation (maximum): 6 mm.

375 COMPACTION OF SCREEDS


 General: Compact thoroughly over entire area.
 Screeds over 50 mm thick: Lay in two layers of approximately equal thickness. Roughen surface of
compacted lower layer then immediately lay upper layer.

382 STAIR SCREEDS


 Bonding: As clause 260 to treads, risers and landings.
 Risers: Form using fine finish formwork.
 Wearing screed surfaces: Make good with compatible cement:sand mix. Wood float. When
hardened remove laitance.

386 COVED IN SITU SKIRTINGS


 Background: Concrete/ masonry walls.
 Mix: To BS 8204-3, table 2. Aggregate size adjusted as necessary to suit skirting thickness.
 Construction joint: Form at base.
 Rendering: Apply bonding agent. Render skirting while bonding agent is still wet. Achieve a good
bond. Allow each coat to set before applying subsequent coats. Render to true lines with a fine
finish and an even consistent appearance.
 Dimensions:
- Thickness of each coat (maximum): 10 mm.
- Height: 100 mm.
- Cove radius: 30 mm.
- Top edge: Square.

392 GENERAL REINFORCEMENT


 Type to BS 4483, table 1: D98.
 Installation: Place between the two layers of screed and lap edges minimum 100mm. Tie securely
with steel wire. Continue through daywork-joints.
 Corners: Avoid a four layer build at corners.

395 STRIP REINFORCEMENT


 Location: Across day joints.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 254 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Type: To BS 4483, table 1: D98.


- Width of strips: 400 mm.
 Installation: Place between the two layers of screed and centre over joints. Lap ends minimum 100
mm.

405 JOINTS IN LEVELLING SCREEDS GENERALLY


 Laying screeds: Lay continuously using 'wet screeds' between strips or bays. Minimize defined
joints.
 Day work joints: Form with vertical edge.

406 BAY JOINTS IN LEVELLING SCREEDS


 Screed type: All types of levelling screed listed above.
 Bay sizes:
- Area (maximum): 20 m².
- Length (maximum): 6 m.
 Location of bay joints: Coordinate with those required for base slab and floor covering.

415 BAY JOINTS IN BONDED WEARING SCREEDS


 Bay sizes:
- Area (maximum): 15 m².
- Length: Breadth ratio (maximum): 3:2.
 Location of bay joints: Submit proposals.

435 FORMED JOINTS IN WEARING SCREEDS


 Temporary forms: Square edged with a steel top surface and in good condition.
 Placing screed: Compact thoroughly at edges to give level, closely abutted joints with no lipping.

440 CRACK INDUCING GROOVES IN LEVELLING SCREEDS


 Groove depth: At least half the depth of screed.
 Cutting grooves: Straight, vertical and accurately positioned. Select from the following:
- Trowel cut as screed is laid.
- Saw cut sufficiently early after laying to prevent random cracking.

445 CRACK INDUCING GROOVES IN WEARING SCREEDS


 Groove dimensions:
- Depth: At least half the depth of wearing screed.
- Width: 6 m.
 Cutting grooves: Straight, vertical and accurately positioned. Saw cut sufficiently early after laying to
prevent random cracking.

450 SEALANT FOR SAWN JOINTS IN WEARING SCREEDS


 Type: Two part polysulfide-based. Shall comply with DM/DDA Green Building regulation.
 Preparation and application: As section Z22.

460 STRIP MOVEMENT JOINTS GENERALLY


 Manufacturer: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer's Representative
approval.
- Product reference: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
- Size: 10 mm unless otherwise indicated on the contract drawings.
 Installation: Set securely into screed to exact finished level of floor. Extend joints through to base.
- Secure fixing to base: To manufacturer's recommendation.

468 SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS WITH METAL EDGINGS GENERALLY


 Edging material: Aluminium angle unless otherwise indicated on the approved final design
drawings.
- Size: To suit the floor finish thickness.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 255 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Bedding: 1:3 cement: sand.


 Installation: Centre over joints in base. Set to exact finished level of floor.
- Secure fixing to base: Stainless steel screws at 300 mm centres.
 Joint width: To match that of structural movement joint in base.
 Sealant:
- Product reference: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range.
- Preparation and application: As section Z22.

476 METAL SECTION MOVEMENT JOINTS GENERALLY


 Manufacturer: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
- Product reference: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
- Colour of insert: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's
standard range.
 Bedding: 1:3 cement: sand.
 Installation: Centre over joint in base. Set to exact finished level of floor.
- Secure fixing to base: Stainless steel screws and washers at 300 mm centres.

FINISHING/CURING

510 FINISHING GENERALLY


 Timing: Carry out all finishing operations at optimum times in relation to setting and hardening of
screed material.
 • Prohibited treatments to screed surfaces:
- Wetting to assist surface working.
- Sprinkling cement.

520 WOOD FLOATED FINISH


 Finish: Slightly coarse, even texture with no ridges or steps.

530 SMOOTH FLOATED FINISH


 Finish: Even texture with no ridges or steps.

540 TROWELLED FINISH TO LEVELLING SCREEDS


 Floating: To an even texture with no ridges or steps.
 Trowelling: To a uniform, smooth but not polished surface, free from trowel marks and other
blemishes, and suitable to receive specified flooring material.

550 TROWELLED FINISH TO WEARING SCREEDS


 Floating: To an even texture with no ridges or steps.
 Trowelling: Successively trowel at intervals, applying sufficient pressure to close surface and give a
uniform smooth finish free from trowel marks and other blemishes.

560 DEWATERED TROWELLED FINISH TO WEARING SCREEDS


 Dewatering: Immediately after compaction of wearing screeds, remove water using a vacuum
process.
 Floating: Without delay, power float to an even texture with no ridges or steps.
 Trowelling: Successively trowel at intervals, applying sufficient pressure to close surface and give a
uniform smooth finish free from trowel marks and other blemishes.
600 POWER GROUND FINISH TO WEARING SCREEDS
 Floating: To an even surface with no ridges or steps. Immediately commence curing.
 Grinding: When concrete is sufficiently hard for sand particles not to be torn from surface, remove 1
- 2 mm from surface to give an even glass-paper texture, free from blemishes and trowel marks.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 256 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Cleaning: Remove dust and wash down. Resume curing without delay.

650 CURING
 General: Prevent premature drying. Immediately after laying, protect surface from wind, draughts and
strong sunlight by closely covering with polyethylene sheeting.
 Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 305 g/sq. m
when dry.
 Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist with water or absorptive cover, water
saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover screed surfaces and edges with 300-mm lap over
adjacent absorptive covers.
 Curing period: Seven days moisture curing.
 Drying after curing: Allow screeds to dry gradually. Do not subject screeds to artificial drying
conditions that will cause cracking or other shrinkage related problems.

670 ROOF SCREEDS


 Protection: Cover screeds during wet weather. When weathertight coverings are laid, screeds must be
as dry as practicable.

680 SURFACE SEALER TO WEARING SCREEDS


 Manufacturer:
- Product reference: Epoxy based paint as section M60 unless otherwise indicated on the
concept drawings.
 Preparation: Clean cured screed surface to remove dirt, grease, oil and other surface
contaminants.
 Moisture content of screed: As recommended by sealer manufacturer. Test relative humidity to BS
8203, Annex A if required to verify suitability to receive sealer.
 Application: Evenly to dry surfaces using sufficient coats to form an effective seal but without a
glossy finish.

690 SLIP RESISTANCE TESTING OF WEARING SCREEDS


 Test:
- To the relevant parts of BS 7976-1 and BS 7976 -2 using a TRL Pendulum.
- Make arrangements for test to be witnessed/ certified by: The Employer’s Representative
 Report: Submit. Include slip resistance values in the wet and dry states.

700 ABRASION TESTING OF WEARING SCREEDS

 Test method : To BSEN 13892-

4 705 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

 Mix Sample Sets: At point of placement, independent testing and inspecting agency shall take a set
of 3 moulded-cylinder samples from the screed mix for the first 90 sq. m plus 1 set of samples for
each subsequent 460 sq. m of screed, or fraction thereof, but not less than 6 samples for each day's
placement. Samples shall be tested according to BS 4551-1 for compliance with compressive
strength requirements.
 In-Situ Crushing Strength: Comply with the following:
- Test Method: As specified
- Test Frequency: Levelling Screeds: Not less than 3 tests per each 100 square meters, and at 20
meters intervals of corridors and Roof Screeds: Not less than 3 tests per each 200 square
meters.

***End of Section M10***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 257 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION M12
RESIN FLOORING

Page 258 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

M12 RESIN FLOORING

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions

TYPES OF FLOORING

110C RESIN FLOORING: Pump room, telephone room, electrical room and other utility rooms.
 Product reference: Jotafloor EPC 300 from Jotun or a comparable product of one of the
specified manufacturers. Product shall also comply with local authority green building
regulations.
 Product description: High build, solvent free epoxy resin floor coating with total DFT not less
than 400microns. It shall be moisture, abrasion resistant and shall exhibit high
resistance to fuel, oil and chemicals. To comply with the following properties:-
 Spread of flame: Non- flammable and complying with DCD regulation.
 Adhesion: Excellent adhesion to concrete and screed.
 Chemical properties: Resistant to wide range of chemicals including acids,
diesel, petrol and oils.
 Surfaces: Floated concrete slabs unless otherwise indicated on the contract drawings.
 Preparation: As clause 400 in addition to the following:
- Prior to preparation, the floor surface is generally to be reviewed. Floors that require
repairs shall be repaired before the general preparation is undertaken.
- Prepare the substrate surface in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended
method (captive blasting or grinding).
- At free edges such as aisles and doorways the floor topping shall be terminated
properly by cutting a groove in the substrate along the line of termination. The groove to
be at least as deep as the thickness of the topping.
- The finished surface shall have the texture of medium sandpaper.
- Surface defects exposed during preparation, such as shrinkage cracks, blow holes,
minor honey combing, etc. shall be filled with a thixotropic two component surface
filler.
- When the floor preparation is complete, vacuum the area to remove all dust and
debris in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
 Initial coat: One Coat of Jotafloor EPC 300, a two component seamless solvent free
pigmented high build epoxy coating applied at DFT not less than 200microns
- Part mixing of components is not acceptable. The individual components should be
thoroughly stirred to disperse any settlement and then mixed together until a
homogeneous mix is obtained.
 Finishing coat: One Coat of Jotafloor EPC 300, a two component solvent free pigmented high
build epoxy coating applied at DFT not less than 200microns.
- Generally, allow 24 hours before allowing foot traffic.
- Generally allow 5 days before traffic markings.
- Colors: Gray unless otherwise selected by the Employer.
 Other requirements:
- Coved concrete skirting to be provided generally at all junctions along the walls, up
stands, parapets, etc.
- Floor finish to be extended 100mm above the finished floor level.

200 WARRANTY

 Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which coating manufacturer agrees to


repair or replace coatings that deteriorate during the specified warranty period. Warranty does
not include deterioration or failure of coating due to unusual weather phenomena, fire, vandalism,
or abuse by maintenance equipment, and truck traffic.

- Deterioration of coatings includes the following:

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 259 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

a. Adhesive or cohesive failures.


b. Abrasion or tearing failures.
c. Surface crazing or spalling.
d. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into deck
substrate.

- Warranty Period: Five years from date of Taking over of Works.

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES

210 TESTING MOISTURE CONTENT OF SUBSTRATES


 Drying aids: Remove minimum four days prior to test.
 Test: To BS 8203, Annex A using an accurately calibrated hygrometer.
- Location of readings: Corners, along edges, and at various points over the test area.
 Relative humidity before laying resin floors (maximum) 75% or as per manufacturer’s
requirement to suit the type of coating selected.

220 SURFACE HARDNESS OF SUBSTRATES


 General: Substrates must restrain stresses that occur during setting and hardening of resin.
 Test for surface hardness: To BS EN 12504-2 using a rebound hammer.
 Test results: Submit.
 Areas of non compliance: Submit remedial proposals.

230 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES GENERALLY


 Chases/ Saw cuts: Cut/ break out at skirting, free edges, movement joints, etc. for termination of
resin flooring.
 Blow holes, cavities, cracks, etc: Fill with repair product recommended by resin flooring
manufacturer.
 Cleanliness: Remove surface contaminants, debris, dirt and dust.
 Surface texture: Suitable to accept resin flooring and achieve a full bond over the complete
area.
 General: Resin manufacturer’s written instructions shall be followed for the surface preparation
and random inspection by their representative shall be arranged.

240 EXISTING SUBSTRATES


 Preparation: Remove surface imperfections, ingrained contaminants, coatings and residues.
- Contaminated areas: Submit proposals for removal and repair.

250 EXISTING TILE/ SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS


 Preparation: Remove coverings, residual adhesive, bedding, grouting and pointing.

260 METAL SUBSTRATES


 Cleaning: Shot blast to BS EN ISO 8501-1, grade Sa2½.
- Treated surfaces: Clean. Free from visible oil, grease and dirt, mill scale, rust, paint coatings
and foreign matter.

LAYING FLOORING

310 WORKMANSHIP
 Operatives:
- Trained/ Experienced in the application of resin floorings and certified by the
manufacturer.
- Evidence of training/ experience: Submit before starting the works.
 Fillers and incorporated aggregates: Thoroughly mix in to ensure wetting. Avoid over-vigorous
mixing resulting in excessive air entrainment.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 260 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Scattered aggregates: Broadcast onto wet surface of resin.


- Appearance: Consistent.
 Curing: Allow appropriate periods between coats and before surface treatments and
trafficking/ use.
 Verification of thickness: Verify that wet film thickness of each component coat complies with
requirements every 9.0 Sqm. Verification shall be carried out by either an independent agency or
the coating system manufacturer’s authorized representative.

320 CONTROL SAMPLES


 Complete areas of finished work in the following locations:
- One bay of car park deck(if applicable)
- 5.0 sqm ramp( if applicable)
- One Island (if applicable)
- 3.0 sqm floor in utility rooms.
 Approval of appearance: Obtain before proceeding.
 Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Taking
Over; otherwise remove mockups and apply permanent works.

330 PRIMERS
 Application: Even to completely wet, penetrate and seal substrates.
 Coverage per coat (minimum): As per manufacturer’s written instruction
 Curing period (maximum): As per manufacturer’s written instruction

340 REINFORCEMENT
 Fabric: As per manufacturer’s instruction
- Locations: Submit proposal
- Laps (minimum): 50 mm.
- Bedding: Roll into preliminary thin layer of resin flooring.

350 COATED RESIN FLOORING


 Application: Even, of uniform thickness, surface finish and colour.

355 FLOW APPLIED COATED RESIN FLOORING


 Application: Evenly, of uniform thickness, surface finish and colour.
 Trapped air: Roll to release.

357 TROWEL APPLIED SCREEDED RESIN FLOORING


 Application: Even and thoroughly compacted, of uniform thickness, surface finish and colour.

360 SURFACE ABRADING/ POLISHING


 Surface on completion: Uniform, fine and dust free.

370 SURFACE GRINDING/ GROUTING/ ABRADING/ POLISHING


 Surface on completion:
- Grinding: Regular appearance to exposed aggregate and dust free.
- Grouting: Surface defects filled.
- Abrading/ Polishing: Uniform, fine and dust free.

380 SURFACE SEALER


 Application: Even to completely wet resin surface.

400 BOND STRENGTH OF RESIN FLOORING


 Contact surfaces: Substrate and fully cured resin flooring.
 Bond: In accordance with manufacturer's performance data.
 Test: To BS 8204-6, clause 11.4 and BS EN 1542. Carry out at least 4 tests by an independent
laboratory approved by Employer’s Representative.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 261 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

410 RESIN SKIRTINGS/ UPSTANDS


 Quality: Render grade resin.
 Colour: As flooring
 Profile: Radius cove.
 Top edge of skirting/ up stand: Tuck into chase
 Transition with resin flooring: Strip movement joint subject to approval

420 FREE EDGES OF RESIN FLOORING


 Transition to abutting floor finishes: Straight and smooth.
 Retention of resin edges: Chamfered edge chase in slab.

430 SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS GENERALLY


 Location: Centre over movement joints in substrate.
 Preparation and application: As section Z22.
 Retention of resin edges: Retaining chase in slab
 Joint width: Submit proposal
 Sealant: To suit the application and area of usage
- Colour: To client’s choice.

440 STRIP MOVEMENT JOINTS GENERALLY


 Location: Centre over movement joints in substrate.
 Retention of resin edges: chase in slab.
 Joint width: As per manufacturers instruction
 Strip:
- Manufacturer: Submit proposal
- Product reference: Submit proposal
- Insert: submit proposal
Colour: Submit proposal
- Fixing: Submit proposal

450 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

 Protect resin coating from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
 Clean spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended
by manufacturer of affected construction.

***End of Section M12 ***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 262 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION M20
PLASTERED/ RENDERED/ ROUGHCAST COATINGS

Page 263 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

M20 PLASTERED/ RENDERED/ ROUGHCAST COATINGS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with decorative and/ or
protective coatings of gypsum plaster, lime plaster, cement gauged render mortar, lime:sand render
mortar and other similar mixes, for new, repair and conservation work. Plasterboard and other
sheet backings are also included.

TYPES OF COATING

130 CEMENT: SAND (AIR ENTRAINED) INTERNAL RENDER


 Substrate: Concrete block wall /AAC block wall / reinforced concrete columns, walls, beams and
soffits of slabs.
- Preparation: As Clause 527 & 536 for concrete block walls and 531 & 536 for reinforced
concrete surface.

 Mortar:
- Type: Dry pre-mixed cement / sand render with suitable plasticizing admixtures
- Pigment: Not required

 Undercoats:
- Mix: 1 Part Portland cement, 5 parts sand, plasticizing admixtures as per manufacturer’s
recommendation.
- Cement type: Ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197-1, grey colour and strength class 42.5
- Thickness (excluding dubbing out and keys): 8 to 12mm

 Final coat:
- Mix: 1 part Portland cement, 4 parts sand, plasticizing admixtures as per manufacturer’s
recommendation.
- Thickness: 6 to 12mm to achieve on overall thickness of 15mm (excluding dash coat and
dubbing out).
- Finish: Plain floated finishes as clause 856 unless otherwise indicated on contract drawing.
- Cement type: Ordinary Portland Cement to BS EN 197-1 grey colour and strength class 42.5

 Other requirements: Mechanically mixed cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to
comply with applicable referenced application standard especially BS EN 13914-2 and BS8000-
0. Bonding agent in plaster mixes shall be used in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendation. Factory prepared Cement/ Sand render shall be mixed at site with clean
potable water to the manufacturer’s recommendation.

 Accessories: Provide proprietary render accessories as specified herein.

130A CEMENT: SAND (AIR ENTRAINED) EXTERNAL RENDER

 Substrate: Concrete block wall /AAC block / reinforced concrete columns, walls, beams and
soffits of slabs.
- Preparation: As Clause 527 & 536 for concrete block walls and 531 & 536 for reinforced
concrete surface.

 Mortar:
- Type: Dry pre-mixed cement / sand render with suitable plasticizing admixtures.
- Pigment: Not required

 Undercoats:
- Mix: 1 Part Portland cement, 5 parts sand, plasticizing admixtures, as per manufacturer’s
recommendation.
- Cement type: Ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197-1, grey colour and strength class 42.5
- Thickness (excluding dubbing out and keys): 8 to 12mm
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 264 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Final coat:
- Mix: 1 part Portland cement, 4 parts sand, plasticizing admixtures, as per manufacturer’s
recommendation.
- Thickness: 6 to 12mm to achieve on overall thickness of 20mm (excluding dash coat and
dubbing out).
- Finish: Plain floated finishes as clause 856 unless otherwise indicated on contract drawing.
- Cement type: Ordinary Portland Cement to BS EN 197-1 grey colour and strength class 42.5

 Other requirements: Mechanically mixed cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to
comply with applicable referenced application standard especially BS EN 13914-1 and BS8000-
0. Bonding agent in plaster mixes shall be used in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendation. Factory prepared Cement/ Sand render shall be mixed at site with clean
potable water to the manufacturer’s recommendation.

 Accessories: Provide proprietary render accessories as specified herein.

140 CEMENT: SAND (AIR ENTRAINED) SUBSTRATES TO RECEIVE RIGID TILES

 Backgrounds: Concrete block wall/AAC block /reinforced concrete columns, walls and beams.
- Preparation: As clause 531 & 536 for concrete and clause 536 for block work.

 Mortar:
- Type: Ready to use mortar pre-mixed in factory.

 Coats: For constituent material see clause 438 (cements), clause 439(sand) and clause 449
(admixtures).
- Mix: Cement: sand with air entraining admixture, group 2 mortar 1:3-4 and air entrained.
- Cement type: To BS EN 197-1, Portland cement, strength class 42.5
- Thickness (excluding dash coat and dubbing out): 15mm to be applied in one coat.
- Finish: Lightly combed, where ceramic tiles are to be bedded in cement: sand mortar and
wood float, where they are to be fixed using adhesive.
 Other requirements: Mechanically mixed cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to
comply with applicable referenced application standard especially BS EN 13914-2 and
BS8000-0. Bonding agent in plaster mixes shall be used in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendation. Factory prepared Cement/ Sand render shall be mixed at site with clean
potable water to the manufacturer’s recommendation

 Accessories: Provide proprietary plaster accessories, as specified herein.

150A PROPRIETARY WATERPROOF RENDER GENERALLY

 Backgrounds: Concrete block walls/AAC block/ reinforced concrete columns, walls, beams and
soffit of slabs.
- Preparation: As clause 527&536 for concrete block walls and clause 531&536 for
reinforced concrete surfaces.
- Product reference: Dry pre-mixed cement/ sand render with waterproofing additives
manufactured in factory to the requirements of BS EN 13914-1. The render is mixed at site
with clean potable water and is then spray applied to the selected background.
 Undercoats:
- Types: One coat.
- Thickness (excluding dubbing out): 8 to 12 mm.
 Final coat:
- Thickness: 8 to 12 mm to achieve an overall thickness of 20 mm (excluding dash coat and
dubbing out).

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 265 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Finish: Plain floated finish as clause 856 unless otherwise indicated on the contract
drawings.
 Accessories: Provide proprietary render accessories as specified herein.
 Other requirements: Where possible chases, holes and pockets should be avoided in surfaces to
be coated. Where necessary, they must be formed before waterproof rendering is applied.They
must be formed extra large to permit a full, continuous thickness of rendering in additionto the
fitting.

GENERAL

413 SAMPLES
 General: Provide representative samples of the following: All types of coating and constituent
materials specified in this section and applicable to the project.

418 CONTROL SAMPLES


 Complete sample areas, being part of the finished work, in locations as follows:
Field samples shall be at least 1.2m 2 of each type of finish indicated; in sets for each color, texture
and pattern specified.

419 SCAFFOLDING
 General: Prevent putlog holes and other breaks in coatings.

MATERIALS AND MARKING OF MORTAR

430 READY-TO-USE CEMENT GAUGED RENDER MORTARS


 Time and temperature limitations: Use within limits prescribed by mortar manufacturer
- Re-tempering: Restore workability with water only within prescribed time limits.
 Protection methods: Submit proposals.

438 CEMENTS FOR MORTARS


 Cement: To BS EN 197-1.
- Types: Portland cement, CEM I.
Portland slag cement, CEM II/ S.
Portland fly ash cement, CEM II/V or W.
- Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5.
 White cement: To BS EN 197-1.
- Type: Portland cement, CEM1.
- Strength class: 52.5.
 Sulfate resisting Portland cement: To BS 4027.
- Strength class: 42.5.
 Masonry cement: To BS EN 998-1

439 SAND FOR CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS


 Standard: To BS EN 13139.
- Grading generally: 0/2 or 0/4 (CP or MP); Category 2 fines.
- Grading for sand for undercoat/screed: 0.15 to 5mm BS Sieve
- Grading for sand for finishing coat: 0.15 to 2.36 mm BS Sieve
 Colour and texture: Consistent. Obtain from one source.

449 ADMIXTURES FOR CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS


 Suitable admixtures: Select from:
- Air entraining (plasticizing) admixtures: To BS EN 934-2 and compatible with other mortar
constituents.
- Other admixtures: Submit proposals.
 Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride and any admixture containing calcium chloride.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 266 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

450 CHLORIDE CONTENT OF MORTARS


 Chloride content (maximum): 0.1% by dry mass.

495 MIXING
 Render mortars (site prepared):
- Batching: By volume. Use clean and accurate gauge boxes or buckets.
- Mix proportions: Based on damp sand. Adjust for dry sand.
- Lime: sand: Mix thoroughly. Allow to stand, without drying out, for at least 16 hours before
using.
 For factory prepared mortar: Add water only; comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.
 Mixes: Of uniform consistence and free from lumps. Do not re-temper or reconstitute mixes.
Mixing shall be done with mechanical mixer.
 Contamination: Prevent intermixing with other materials.

496 COLD WEATHER


 General: Do not use frozen materials or apply coatings on frozen or frost bound substrates.
 External work: Avoid when air temperature is at or below 5°C and falling or below 3°C and
rising. Maintain temperature of work above freezing until coatings have fully hardened.
 Internal work: Take precautions to enable internal coating work to proceed without detriment
when air temperature is below 3°C.

PREPARING SUBSTRATES

510 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES


 Soundness: Free from loose areas and significant cracks and gaps.
 Cutting, chasing, making good, fixing of conduits and services outlets and the like: Completed.
 Tolerances: Permitting specified flatness/ regularity of finished coatings.
 Cleanliness: Free from dirt, dust, efflorescence and mould, and other contaminants
incompatible with coatings.
 Accessories: complete all metal corner reinforcement, corner beads, expanded metal lath,
plaster stop, external insulation on concrete surface, reinforcement to service chases, control
joints, plaster grooves and dash coat prior to starting plastering. Control joints shall be installed at
locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying with the following criteria and
approved by Employer’s Representative-:
- Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of construction directly behind
plaster membrane.
- Distance between Control Joints: Comply with requirements for standards referenced for
application.
- Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of
plaster membrane.
 Surface conditioning: Immediately before plastering, dampen concrete and concrete unit
masonry surfaces that are indicated for direct plaster application, except where a bonding
agent has been applied. Determine and apply amount of moisture and degree of saturation that
will result in optimum suction for plastering.

527 RAKING OUT FOR KEY


 Joints in existing masonry: Rake out to a depth of 13 mm (minimum).
- Dust and debris: Remove from joints.

531 ROUGHENING FOR KEY


 Substrates: Roughen thoroughly and evenly.
- Depth of surface removal: Minimum necessary to provide an effective key.

536 SPATTERDASH KEY


 Materials:
- Cement: To BS EN 197-1.
- Sand: Clean, coarse.
- Admixtures: Styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) or acrylic polymers only where

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 267 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

recommended by the plaster/ render manufacturer.


 Mix proportions (cement: sand): 1:1.5-2.
 Consistency: Thick slurry, well stirred.
 Application: Throw onto dampened background and leave rough.
- Thickness: 3-5 mm.
- Use dash coat on concrete surface indicated for direct plaster/render application and moist
cure dash coat for at least 24 hours after application and before plastering/rendering.
 Curing: Controlled to achieve a firm bond to substrate.

538 STIPPLE KEY


 Materials:
- Cement: To BS EN 197-1.
- Sand: Clean, coarse.
- Admixture: Styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) or acrylic polymers.
 Mix proportions (cement: sand): 1:1.5-2.
 Consistency: Thick slurry, well stirred.
 Application: Brushed and stippled to form deep, close textured key.
 Curing: Controlled to achieve a firm bond to substrate.

541 BONDING AGENT APPLICATION


 General: Apply evenly to substrate to achieve effective bond of plaster/ render coat. Protect
adjacent joinery and other surfaces.
 Material: Styrene-Butadiene co-polymer latex.

551 REMOVAL AND RENEWAL OF EXISTING PLASTER/ RENDER


 Location and extent: Agree, at least on a provisional basis, before work commences. Minimize
extent of removal and renewal.

556 REMOVING DEFECTIVE EXISTING RENDER


 Render for removal: Detached, hollow, soft, friable, badly cracked, affected by efflorescence or
otherwise damaged.
 Removing defective render: Cut out to regular rectangular areas with straight edges.
- Horizontal and vertical edges: Square cut or slightly undercut.
- Bottom edges to external render: Do not undercut.
- Render with imitation joints: Cut back to joint lines.
 Cracks:
- Fine hairline cracking/ crazing: Leave.
- Other cracks: Cut out to a width of 75 mm (minimum).
 Dust and loose material: Remove from exposed substrates and edges.

566 REMOVING DEFECTIVE EXISTING PLASTER


 Plaster for removal: Detached, soft, friable, badly cracked, affected by efflorescence or
otherwise damaged.
- Hollow, detached areas: As instructed.
 Stained plaster: Remove.
 Removing defective plaster. Cut back to a square, sound edge.
 Faults in substrate (structural deficiencies, damp, etc.): Submit proposals.
 Cracks:
- Fine hairline cracking/ crazing: Leave.
- Other cracks: Cut out to a width of 75 mm (minimum).
 Dust and loose material: Remove from exposed substrates and edges.

567 EXISTING DAMP AFFECTED PLASTER/ RENDER


 Plaster affected by rising damp: Remove to a height of 300 mm above highest point reached
by damp or 1 m above dpc, whichever is higher.
 Perished and salt contaminated masonry:

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 268 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Mortar joints: Rake out.


- Masonry units: Submit proposals.
 Faults in substrate (structural deficiencies, additional sources of damp, etc.): Submit proposals.
 Drying out substrates: Establish drying conditions. Leave walls to dry for as long as possible
before plastering.
 Dust and loose material: Remove from exposed substrates and edges.

BACKINGS/ BEADS/ JOINTS

630 BEADS/ STOPS FOR INTERNAL USE


 Material: Galvanized steel to BS EN 13658-1.
 Corner-beads: Corner beads shall be small nose corner-beads with expanded flanges of large
mesh diamond metal lath allowing full plaster encasement. Min 0.45mm thick.

636 BEADS/ STOPS FOR EXTERNAL USE


 Stainless steel: To BS EN 10088-1, grade 1.4301.
 Code reference: To comply with BS EN 13658-2
 Corner-beads: Corner beads shall be small nose corner-beads with expanded flanges of large
mesh diamond metal lath allowing full plaster encasement. Min 0.45mm thick.
 Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large-mesh, diamond-metal lath fabricated from
welded-wire mesh fabricated from 1.2-mm- diameter wire and specially formed to reinforce
external corners of render on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement.

637 EXTERNAL PLASTER GROOVES

 External plaster groove: Powder coated aluminum channel installed to the panel indicated on
drawing or approved shop drawing. Metal thickness shall be 1.0mm and thickness of durable
powder coating shall be Min 80 microns.

640 BEADS/ STOPS GENERALLY


 Location: External angles and stop ends except where specified otherwise.
 Corners: Neat mitres at return angles.
 Fixing: Secure, using longest possible lengths, plumb, square and true to line and level, ensuring
full contact of wings with substrate.
- Beads/ stops for external render: Fix mechanically.
 Finishing: After coatings have been applied, remove surplus material while still wet, from
surfaces of beads/ stops exposed to view.

646 CRACK CONTROL AT JUNCTIONS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR SOLID SUBSTRATES


 Locations: Where defined movement joints are not required. Where dissimilar solid substrate
materials are in same plane and rigidly bonded or tied together.
 Crack control materials:
- Isolating layer: Building paper to BS 1521.
- Metal lathing internal: Material as section M30, Z275 coating designation. Weight of
diamond mesh lath 1.8 Kg/sqm
- Metal lathing external: Stainless steel as section M30.
 Installation: Fix metal lathing over isolating layer. Stagger fixings along both edges of lathing. Fix
with long way of mesh at right angles to support and with all strands sloping in the same
direction.
 Protection: After fixing, paint nail heads, staples, cut edges and breaks with bitumen based
approved paint to protect from corrosion.
 Width of installation over single junctions:
- Isolating layer: 150 mm.
- Lathing: 300 mm.
 Width of installation across face of dissimilar substrate material (column, beam, etc. with face
width not greater than 450 mm):
- Isolating layer: 25 mm (minimum) beyond junctions with adjacent substrate.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 269 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Lathing: 100 mm (minimum) beyond edges of isolating layer.

653A SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS WITH STOP BEAD EDGINGS GENERALLY


 Stop beads: As clauses 630 and 636.
 Installation: Centered over joint in substrate.
- Joint width: To suit that of structural movement joint in background.
- Fixing: Stainless steel screws.
 Sealant:
Product reference: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval. Shall comply with Green building regulations.
- Preparation and application: As section Z22.

659 PLASTERBOARD JOINTS


 Joints and angles (except where coincident with metal beads). Reinforce with continuous
lengths of jointing tape.

673 PLASTERING OVER CONDUITS/ SERVICE CHASES


 General: Prevent cracking over conduits and other services.
 Services chased into substrate: Isolate from coating by covering with galvanized metal lathing, fixed
at staggered centers along both edges. Use stainless steel metal lathing for external surface.

INTERNAL PLASTERING

710 APPLICATION

GENERALLY
 Application of coatings: Firmly and in one continuous operation between angles and joints.
Achieve good adhesion.
 Appearance of finished surfaces: Even and consistent. Free from rippling, hollows, ridges,
cracks and crazing.
- Accuracy: Finish to a true plane, to correct line and level, with angles and corners to a right
angle unless specified otherwise, and with walls and reveals plumb and square.
 Drying out: Prevent excessively rapid or localised drying out.

715 FLATNESS/ SURFACE REGULARITY


 Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
 Deviation of plaster surface: Measure from underside of a straight edge placed anywhere on
surface.
- Permissible deviation (maximum) for plaster not less than 13 mm thick: Do not deviate
more than plus or minus 3 mm in 3 m from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as
measured with a 3-m straightedge placed at any location on surface.

718 JUNCTION OF NEW PLASTERWORK WITH EXISTING


 New plasterwork: Finish flush with original face of existing plasterwork to form a seamless
junction.

719 DUBBING OUT


 General: Correct substrate inaccuracies.
 New smooth dense concrete and similar surfaces: Dubbing out prohibited unless total plaster
thickness is within range recommended by plaster manufacturer.
 Thickness of any one coat (maximum): 10 mm.
 Mix: As undercoat.
 Application: Achieve firm bond. Allow each coat to set sufficiently before the next is applied.
Cross scratch surface of each coat.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 270 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

725 UNDERCOATS GENERALLY


 General: Rule to an even surface. Cross scratch to provide a key for the next coat. Brush down
each base coat to remove dust and loose particles and wet thoroughly before application of
finish coat.
 Undercoats on metal lathing: Work well into interstices to obtain maximum key.
 Undercoats gauged with Portland cement: Do not apply next coat until drying shrinkage is
substantially complete.

777 SMOOTH FINISH


 Appearance: A tight, matt, smooth surface with no hollows, abrupt changes of level or trowel
marks. Avoid water brush, excessive trowelling and over polishing.

778 WOOD FLOAT FINISH


 Appearance: An even overall texture. Finish with a dry wood float as soon as wet sheen has
disappeared.

782 TEXTURED/ PATTERNED FINISHES


 Appearance: Consistent and even. Carry out work on each surface as one continuous
operation.

EXTERNAL RENDERING

810 APPLICATION

GENERALLY
 Application of coatings: Firmly and in one continuous operation between angles and joints.
Achieve good adhesion.
 Appearance of finished surfaces: Even and consistent. Free from rippling, hollows, ridges,
cracks and crazing.
- Accuracy: Finish to a true plane, to correct line and level, with angles and corners to a right
angle unless specified otherwise, and with walls and reveals plumb and square.
 Drying: Prevent excessively rapid or localized drying out.

815 FLATNESS/ SURFACE REGULARITY OF RENDERING TO RECEIVE CERAMIC TILES


 Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
 Deviation of render surface: Measure from underside of a 3 m straight edge placed anywhere
on surface.
- Permissible deviation (maximum): Do not deviate more than plus or minus 3 mm in 3 m
from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured with a 3-m straightedge placed at
any location on surface.

820 DUBBING OUT FOR RENDERING


 General: Correct substrate inaccuracies.
 Thickness of any one coat (maximum): 16 mm.
- Total thickness (maximum): 20 mm, otherwise obtain instructions.
 Mix: As undercoat.
 Application: Achieve firm bond. Allow each coat to set sufficiently before the next is applied.
Comb surface of each coat.

830 ANCHORED MESH REINFORCEMENT


 Application of first undercoat: Through and round mesh to fully bond with solid substrate.

840 UNDERCOATS GENERALLY


 General: Rule to an even surface. Comb to provide a key for the next coat. Do not penetrate the
coat. Brush down each base coat to remove dust and loose particles and wet thoroughly before
application of finish coat.
 Undercoats on metal lathing: Work well into interstices to obtain maximum key.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 271 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

856 FINAL COAT - PLAIN FLOATED FINISH


 Finish: Even, open texture free from laitance.

861 FINAL COAT - SCRAPED FINISH


 Finish: Scraped to expose aggregate and achieve an even texture.

866 FINAL COAT - ROUGHCAST (HARLING) FINISH


 Finish: Left as cast with an even thickness and texture.

880 CURING AND DRYING


 General: Prevent premature setting and uneven drying of each coat.
 Curing coatings: Keep each coat damp by covering with polyethylene sheet and/ or spraying
with water.
- Curing period (minimum): 3 days.
- Final coat: Hang sheeting clear of the final coat.
 Drying: Allow each coat to dry thoroughly, with drying shrinkage substantially complete before
applying next coat.
 Protection: Protect from frost and rain.

881 OTHER REQUIREMENTS


 Application Standard: Apply plaster materials, composition, and mixes to comply with BS EN
13914-2 for internal plastering, and BS EN 13914-1 and BS 8000 for external plastering.
 Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, lumpy, dirty, or contaminated by foreign materials.
 Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials.
 Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base-
coat plaster material, and before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated
or required for fire-resistance rating, grout at least 150 mm at each jamb anchor.
 Coordinate plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that neither will
be damaged by installation of other.
 Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster
ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where interior plaster is not terminated at metalframe with
casing beads, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groovefinish coat at
junctures with metal.
 Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush with corner-
beads on interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior work.
 Metal Lathing: Apply dash coat to sufficiently coat lath and reduce interstices to the extent
necessary to provide an effective key for scratch coat, allow for drying out and hardening for at least
24 hours before applying scratch coat. Work scratch coat well into interstices to obtain maximum
key. Where access is possible apply scratch to back of lath after first front undercoat has set
thoroughly. Apply base and finish coats as specified.
 Combed Surface: Is to be carried out as the coating stiffens using a suitable comb to produce
evenly spaced wavy horizontal lines, approximately 20 mm apart and 5 mm deep to provide
key.
 Cutting and Patching: Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to
accommodate other work. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point-up finish plaster
surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace work to
eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar
defects. Repair or replace work as necessary to comply with required visual effects.
 Cleaning: Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of
plaster on other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other
surfaces not to be plastered. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during
plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers,
equipment, and plaster debris.
 Protecting: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer and Installer that ensures plaster work is without damage or deterioration at the time
of Taking Over.

***End of Section M20***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 272 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION M30
METAL LATHING/ ANCHORED MESH
REINFORCEMENT FORPLASTERED/ RENDERED
COATINGS

Page 273 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

M30 METAL LATHING/ ANCHORED MESH REINFORCEMENT FOR


PLASTERED/ RENDERED COATINGS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with expanded metal and
wire mesh laths fixed to framed or solid substrates to provide a base and key for plaster, render
and sprayed mineral fibre finishes.

TYPES OF LATH/ REINFORCEMENT

110 METAL LATH FOR PLASTERED/ RENDERED COATINGS ACROSS DISSIMILAR BACKGROUNDS
 Substrate: Concrete structure/ masonry walls.
 Metal lath: Galvanised steel internally and stainless steel externally.
 Additional requirements:
- Ensure that the dissimilar backgrounds are in the same plane and undulations or
projections are within the acceptable tolerances.
- Metal lath shall be fixed over building paper as clause 285.

PRODUCTS

215 METAL LATH


 Expanded and ribbed metal lath: To BS 1369-1.
 Galvanized steel: To BS EN 10327 and BS EN 10143.
 Stainless steel: To BS EN 10088-2, number 1.4301 (name X5CrNi18-10).
 Weight: 1.8 Kg/m2

225 MESH REINFORCEMENT


 Mesh: Welded 2.5 mm diameter stainless steel wire.
- Mesh size: 50 x 50 mm.

285 FIXINGS
 Nails: 38 x 2 mm galvanized steel clout nails to BS 1202-1.
 Staples: 32 x 2 mm galvanized steel.

EXECUTION

325 SUPPORTS
 Fixing: Secure, rigid and accurate, to safely carry lath and coatings and prevent subsequent
movement.

395 FIXING METAL LATH


 Plain expanded metal lath to metal: 1.2 mm wire ties.
 Ribbed metal lath to metal: 1.6 mm wire ties, or doubled 1.2 mm wire ties.
 Welded mesh and paper lath to metal: 1.2 mm wire ties.
 Fixing to runners: 1.2 mm wire ties.
 Wire ties: Twist ends tightly together, cut off surplus and bend ends of wire away from face of
coating.
 Fixing to timber: Select from nails or staples.

410 FIXING EXPANDED METAL LATH


 Requirement: Fixed securely to give a taut, firm base for plaster or render.
 Placement:
- Orientation: Long way of mesh at right angles to supports.
- Strands:
Horizontal lath: Sloping in same direction.
Vertical lath: Sloping downwards away from outer face.
 Laps:
- Sides (minimum): 25 mm.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 274 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Ends (minimum): 50 mm at supports. 100 mm between supports.


- Angles and bends: Do not locate laps within 100 mm of angles or bends.
 Fixing:
- Generally: 100 mm centres.
- Sides and ends at supports: 1.2 mm wire ties. Centres (maximum): 150 mm.
- Ends between supports: Two rows of 1.2 mm wire ties. Centres (maximum): 100 mm.

450 FIXING ANCHORED MESH REINFORCEMENT


 Dubbing out: Complete before placing mesh.
 Placement:
- Orientation: Horizontal wires outwards.
- Panels: Locate between movement joints.
 Fixing:
- Edges: Tie tightly together.
- Fasteners: Locate where wires cross.
- Spacers: 4 mm thick stainless steel or plastics washers on each fastener.
- Fixing mesh to fasteners: Select from: 1.2 mm stainless steel wire ties; or Cramp with
stainless steel washers placed on each fastener on the inner and outer faces of mesh.

460 FIXING METAL LATH ON SOLID SUBSTRATES


 Requirement: Fixed securely to give a taut, firm base for plaster or render.
- Length and frequency of fasteners: Increase as necessary in weak areas.
 Lath fixing generally: 150 mm centres.

***End of Section M30***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 275 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION M40
STONE/ CONCRETE/ QUARRY/ CERAMIC TILING/
MOSAIC

Page 276 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

M40 STONE/ CONCRETE/ QUARRY/ CERAMIC TILING/ MOSAIC

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with natural stone, cast stone,
agglomerated (composite) stone, concrete, quarry and ceramic tile, slab and mosaic coverings to
new and existing floors, walls and soffits.

TYPES OF TILING/ MOSAIC

105 PORCELAIN TILING TO FLOORS


 Tiles:
- Product reference: As indicated on finish schedule and BOQ.
- Properties: Maximum water absorption 0.5%, Min breaking strength 1500N, Min modulus
of rupture 40N/mm2, Resistance to surface PEI class 2-5,Resistant to chemicals. Resistance to
stains and Color resistance to UV light.
- Color: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
- Finish: Non-slip unless otherwise indicated on the finish schedule. Slip resistance: min R10 (ramp
test) and PTV value to be around 30.
- Size: As indicated on the finish schedule.
- Thickness: 8 mm (minimum) or 10 mm (min) as indicated on finish schedule or selected by
Employer’s Representative.
- Background/ Base: RC slab unless indicated otherwise on approved design drawing
- Preparation: As clause 370.
 Intermediate substrate: Latex- OPC bond coat shall be applied.
 Bedding: Semidry bed, as clause 730.
- Reinforcement: If applicable.
- Adhesive: Polymer-modified high performance water proof tile adhesive conforms to
EN12004, BS 5980 and ANSI 118.4. Pre-packaged dry-mortar mix with additive to which
only water must be added at Site.
 Joint width: Maximum 3 mm unless otherwise indicated on the approved shop drawings or
instructed by the Employer’s Representative.
 Grout: Stainless, chemical resistant, colored non-shrink polymer modified cementitious water
proof grout compatible with tile and adhesive (grout color shall be to the Employer’s
Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range). Product shall comply with EN
13888.
- Type/ classification: CG2.
 Movement joints: As approved on the contractor's shop drawings.
 Other requirements:
- All joints shall be continuous in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
- All joints shall be even and shall not exceed the specified width by using proprietary
spacer pegs.
- Where applicable, provide sit-on porcelain tile skirting as indicated on the finish schedule.
- Where applicable, provide granite thresholds/ divider joints as indicated on approved
shop drawings.
- Allow for all necessary coordination with the mechanical and electrical works.
- Where applicable, provide slopes as indicated on the contract drawings.
- Coordinate the finished floor level with the adjacent levels.
- Complete shop drawings shall be prepared for all tiled areas and shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for approval. Shop drawings shall be prepared at a suitable scale
as instructed by the Employer’s Representative.
- Adhesive Bedding for Fixing Tiles over Plywood and Steel Substrates: Shall be white, two-
component, urethane-based adhesive certified by manufacturer to be applicable for
exterior and interior applications and for setting ceramic tiles over plywood and steel
substrates. Tensile strength at break is to be 0.42 MPa minimum. Cured adhesive is to be
non-flammable and non-toxic. Grout is to be compatible material as recommended by

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 277 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

manufacturer and of color selected by the Employer’s Representative.


- Supply 1% of total tile quantity as spare upon completion of work including trim units. Extra
materials shall be packed with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.

111 CERAMIC TILING TO FLOORS


 Tiles:
- Product reference: As indicated on the finish schedule and BOQ and complying with ANSI
A 137.1.
- Composition: Ceramic blend
- Water absorption:<3%
- Breaking strength: Minimum 600N.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
- Finish: Unglazed with treatment to increase slip resistance, Slip resistance: min R10 (ramp
test) and PTV value to be around 30.
- Back: Keyed
- Size: As indicated on the finish schedule.
- Thickness: 8 mm, excluding keying ribs.
 Background/ Base: Reinforced concrete slab unless otherwise indicated on the approved
design drawings.
- Preparation: As clause 370.
 Intermediate substrate: Not required.
 Bedding: Semidry bed, as clause 730.
- Reinforcement: If applicable.
- Adhesive: Polymer-modified high performance water proof tile adhesive conforms to
EN12004, BS 5980 and ANSI 118.4. Pre-packaged dry-mortar mix with additive to which
only water must be added at Site.
 Joint width: 3 mm unless otherwise indicated on the contract drawings or instructed by the
Employer’s Representative.
 Grout: Stainless, chemical resistant, colored non-shrink polymer modified cementitious water
proof grout compatible with tile and adhesive (grout color shall be to the Employer’s
Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range). Product shall comply with EN
13888
- Type/ classification: RG.
 Movement joints: As approved on the contractor's shop drawings.
 Other requirements:
- All joints shall be continuous in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
- All joints shall be even and shall not exceed the specified width by using proprietary
spacer pegs.
- Where applicable, provide sit-on ceramic tile skirting as indicated on the finish schedule.
- Where applicable, provide thresholds/ divider joints as indicated on approved shop
drawings.
- Allow for all necessary coordination with the mechanical and electrical works.
- Where applicable, provide slopes as indicated on the approved shop drawings.
- Coordinate the finished floor level with the adjacent levels.
- Complete shop drawings shall be prepared for all tiled areas and shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for approval. Shop drawings shall be prepared at a suitable scale
as instructed by the Employer’s Representative.
- Adhesive Bedding for Fixing Tiles over Plywood and Steel Substrates: Shall be white, two-
component, urethane-based adhesive certified by manufacturer to be applicable for
exterior and interior applications and for setting ceramic tiles over plywood and steel
substrates. Tensile strength at break is to be 0.42 MPa minimum. Cured adhesive is to be
non-flammable and non-toxic. Grout is to be compatible material as recommended by
manufacturer and of color selected by the Employer’s Representative.
- Supply 1% of total tile quantity as spare upon completion of work including trim units.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 278 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Extra materials shall be packed with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.

112 PORCELAIN/CERAMIC TILING TO FLOORS IN WET AREAS


 Tiles:
- Product reference: As indicated on finish schedule and BOQ.
- Properties for porcelain: Maximum water absorption 0.5%, Min breaking strength 1500N,
Min modulus of rupture 40N/mm2, Resistance to surface PEI class 2-5.Resistant to
chemicals. Resistance to stains and Color resistance to UV light.
- Properties for Ceramic: Maximum water absorption 3%, Min breaking strength 1200N, Min
modulus of rupture 35N/mm2, Resistance to surface PEI class 2-5.Resistant to chemicals.
Resistance to stains and Color resistance to UV light
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
- Finish: Non-slip unless otherwise indicated on the finish schedule. Slip resistance: min R11 (ramp
test) and PTV value to be around 45.
- Size: As indicated on the finish schedule.
- Thickness: 8 mm (minimum) or 10 mm (min) as finish schedule.
 Background/ Base: Cement sand levelling screed as section M10.
- Preparation: As clause 320.
 Intermediate substrate: Latex- OPC bond coat shall be applied.
 Bedding: Thick bed adhesive - solid, as clause 710.
- Reinforcement: If applicable.
- Adhesive: Polymer-modified high performance water proof tile adhesive conforms to
EN12004, BS 5980 and ANSI 118.4. Pre-packaged dry-mortar mix with additive to which
only water must be added at Site.
- Adhesive for kitchen/pantry/medical/dining/utility/garbage rooms shall be highperformance
epoxy grout with average density 1,780 Kg/m3 and flexural strength 22N/mm2.
Master tile 550 from BASF or approved equivalent
 Joint width: 3 mm unless otherwise indicated on the approved shop drawings or instructed by
the Employer’s Representative.
 Grout: Stainless, chemical resistant, colored non-shrink polymer modified cementitious water
proof grout compatible with tile and adhesive (grout color shall be to the Employer’s
Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range). Product shall comply with EN
13888.
- Type/ classification: CG2.
 Grout for kitchen/medical/dining/utility/garbage rooms shall be high performance epoxy grout with
average density 1,780 Kg/m3 and flexural strength 22N/mm2. Master tile 550 from BASF or
approved equivalent.
 Movement joints: As approved on the contractor's shop drawings.
 Other requirements:
- All joints shall be continuous in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
- All joints shall be even and shall not exceed the specified width by using proprietary
spacer pegs.
- Where applicable, provide sit-on porcelain/ceramic tile skirting as indicated on finish
schedule.
- Where applicable, provide granite thresholds/ divider joints as indicated on the approved
shop drawings and as per Employer’s FM requirements.
- Allow for all necessary coordination with the mechanical and electrical works.
- Where applicable, provide slopes as indicated on the approved shop drawings. Slope for
bath room floor shall be Min 2% towards the drain.
- Coordinate the finished floor level with the adjacent levels.
- Complete shop drawings shall be prepared for all tiled areas and shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for approval. Shop drawings shall be prepared at a suitable scale
as instructed by the Employer’s Representative.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 279 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Adhesive Bedding for Fixing Tiles over Plywood and Steel Substrates: Shall be white, two-
component, urethane-based adhesive certified by manufacturer to be applicable for
exterior and interior applications and for setting ceramic tiles over plywood and steel
substrates. Tensile strength at break is to be 0.42 MPa minimum. Cured adhesive is to be
non-flammable and non-toxic. Grout is to be compatible material as recommended by
manufacturer and of color selected by the Employer’s Representative.
- Supply 1% of total tile quantity as spare upon completion of work including trim units. Extra
materials shall be packed with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.

113 CERAMIC TILING TO WALLS


 Tiles:
- Product reference: As indicated on finish schedule and BOQ and complying with ANSI A
137.1.
- Composition: Ceramic blend
- Water absorption: < 6%
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
- Finish: Satin glazed unless otherwise indicated on the finish schedule.
- Back: Keyed
- Size: As indicated on the finish schedule.
- Thickness: 6mm, excluding keying ribs.
 Background/ Base: Cement sand plastering/ rendering as section M20.
- Preparation: As clause 380.
 Intermediate substrate: Not required.
 Bedding: Thin bed adhesive - solid, as clause 651.
- Reinforcement: If applicable.
- Adhesive: Polymer-modified high performance water proof tile adhesive conforms to
EN12004, BS 5980 and ANSI 118.4. Pre-packaged dry-mortar mix with additive to which
only water must be added at Site.
 Joint width: 3 mm unless otherwise indicated on the approved shop drawings or instructed by
the Employer’s Representative.
 Grout: Stainless, chemical resistant, colored non-shrink polymer modified cementitious water
proof grout compatible with tile and adhesive (grout color shall be to the Employer’s
Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range). Product shall comply with EN
13888.
- Type/ classification: CG2.
 Movement joints: As approved on the contractor's shop drawings.
 Other requirements:
- All joints shall be continuous in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
- All joints shall be even and shall not exceed the specified width by using proprietary
spacer pegs.
- Tiled wall edges and corners shall be provided with proprietary coved ceramic accessoriesor
proprietary PVC trims. Stainless steel beads are also acceptable.
- Allow for all necessary coordination with the mechanical and electrical works.
- Complete shop drawings shall be prepared for all tiled areas and shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for approval. Shop drawings shall be prepared at a suitable
scale as instructed by the Employer’s Representative.
- Adhesive Bedding for Fixing Tiles over Plywood and Steel Substrates: Shall be white, two-
component, urethane-based adhesive certified by manufacturer to be applicable for
exterior and interior applications and for setting ceramic tiles over plywood and steel
substrates. Tensile strength at break is to be 0.42 MPa minimum. Cured adhesive is to be
non-flammable and non-toxic. Grout is to be compatible material as recommended by
manufacturer and of color selected by the Employer’s Representative.
- Supply 1% of total tile quantity as spare upon completion of work including trim units. Extra
materials shall be packed with protective covering for storage and identified with

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 280 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

labels describing contents.

115A NATURAL STONE TILING TO FLOORS

 Stone:
- Name (traditional): As indicated on the finish schedule or BOQ.
- Petrological family: As indicated on the finish schedule or BOQ.
- Colour: As selected by the Employer.
- Origin: As indicated on finish schedule/BOQ.
- Finish: As indicated on finish schedule/BOQ.
- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or other defects deleterious to
strength/ colour.
- Size: As indicated on the finish schedule.
- Thickness: As indicated on the finish schedule or 20mm.
- Other requirements: The exposed faces of all stone slabs/ tiles shall be free from scratches and
other defects. Concealed faces shall be treated throughout with a proprietary solvent based,
one part clear impregnating liquid containing siloxane water repellent.
 Background/ Base: Reinforced concrete slab unless otherwise indicated on the approved final
design drawings.
- Preparation: As clause 370.
 Intermediate substrate: Not required.
 Bedding: Semidry bed, as clause 730.
- Reinforcement: Not required.
- Adhesive: Contractor’s choice.
 Joint width: Butt joints for internal floors and 6 mm wide joints for external applications subject
to final approval of the shop drawing.
 Grout: Stainless, chemical resistant, coloured epoxy grout (grout colour shall be to the
Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range).
- Type/ classification: RG.
 Movement joints: As approved on the contractor's shop drawings.
 Other requirements:
- All stone slabs/ tiles shall be water jet cut square and true and shall be uniform in shapeand
thickness. Patterns and mouldings shall be accurately formed in accordance with thecontract
drawings.
- Where applicable, provide sit-on skirting as indicated on the contract drawings.
- Where applicable, provide thresholds/ divider joints as indicated on finish schedule.
- Allow for all necessary coordination with the mechanical and electrical works.
- Where applicable, provide slopes as indicated on approved shop drawings.
- Where applicable, all joints shall be even and shall not exceed the specified width by using
proprietary spacer pegs.
- Coordinate the finished floor level with the adjacent levels.
- A protective slurry of lime putty shall be applied to the finished natural stone floors until
completion of all construction works in these areas.
- Complete shop drawings shall be prepared for all tiled areas and shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for approval. Shop drawings shall be prepared at a suitable scale
as instructed by the Employer’s Representative.

116 NATURAL STONE TILING TO VANITY COUNTERS

 Stone:
- Name (traditional): As indicated on the finish schedule and BOQ.
- Petrological family: As indicated on the finish schedule and BOQ.
- Colour: As selected by the Employer.
- Origin: As indicated on the finish schedule/BOQ.
- Finish: As indicated on the finish schedule/BOQ.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 281 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or other defects deleterious to
strength/ colour.
- Size: As indicated on the finish schedule.
- Thickness: As indicated on the finish schedule or 30mm.
- Other requirements: The exposed faces of all stone slabs/ tiles shall be free from scratches and
other defects. Concealed faces shall be treated throughout with a proprietary solvent based,
one part clear impregnating liquid containing siloxane water repellent.
 Background/ Base: 18 mm thick marine plywood (moisture resistant) boards unless otherwise
indicated on the approved shop drawings.
- Preparation: As clause 390.
 Intermediate substrate: Not required.
 Bedding: Semidry bed, as clause 730.
- Reinforcement: Not required.
- Adhesive: Contractor’s choice.
 Joint width: Butt joints in flat areas and 5 mm bird's mouth joints at corner connections unless
otherwise indicated on the contract drawings or approved shop drawings.
 Grout: Stainless, chemical resistant, coloured epoxy grout (grout colour shall be to the
Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range).
- Type/ classification: RG.
 Movement joints: None.
 Other requirements:
- All stone slabs/ tiles shall be water jet cut square and true and shall be uniform in shapeand
thickness. Patterns and mouldings shall be accurately formed in accordance with the
approved shop drawings.
- Allow for all necessary coordination with the mechanical and electrical works.
- Coordinate the finished level with the adjacent levels.
- Complete shop drawings shall be prepared for all tiled areas and shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for approval. Shop drawings shall be prepared at a suitable scale
as instructed by the Employer’s Representative.

117 NATURAL STONE TILING TO WALLS

 Stone:
- Name (traditional): As indicated on the finish schedule and BOQ.
- Petrological family: As indicated on the finish schedule and BOQ.
- Colour: As selected by the Employer.
- Origin: As indicated on the finish schedule/BOQ.
- Finish: As indicated on the finish schedule/BOQ.
- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or other defects deleterious to
strength/ colour.
- Size: As indicated on the finish schedule.
- Thickness: As indicated on the finish schedule or 20mm.
- Other requirements: The exposed faces of all stone slabs/ tiles shall be free from scratches and
other defects. Concealed faces shall be treated throughout with a proprietary solvent based,
one part clear impregnating liquid containing siloxane water repellent.
 Background/ Base: Reinforced concrete/ masonry walls.
- Preparation: As clauses 370, 420 or 430 whichever is applicable.
 Intermediate substrate: Not required.
 Bedding: Cement: sand, as clause 690.
- Reinforcement: Not required.
- Adhesive: Not required.
 Joint width: Butt joints for internal walls, 6 mm wide joints for external applications and 5mm bird's
mouth joints at corner connections unless otherwise indicated on approved shop drawings.
 Grout: Stainless, chemical resistant, coloured epoxy grout (grout colour shall be to the
Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range).

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 282 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Type/ classification: RG.


 Movement joints: None.
 Other requirements:
- All stone slabs/ tiles shall be water jet cut square and true and shall be uniform in shapeand
thickness. Patterns and mouldings shall be accurately formed in accordance with the
approved shop drawings.
- Allow for all necessary coordination with the mechanical and electrical works.
- Coordinate the finished level with the adjacent levels.
- Where applicable, all joints shall be continuous in both the horizontal and vertical
directions.
- Where applicable, all joints shall be even and shall not exceed the specified width by using
proprietary spacer pegs.
- Complete shop drawings shall be prepared for all tiled areas and shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for approval. Shop drawings shall be prepared at a suitable scale
as instructed by the Employer’s Representative.

GENERALLY

210 SUITABILITY OF BACKGROUNDS/ BASES


 Background/ base tolerances: To permit specified flatness/ regularity of finished surfaces
given the permissible minimum and maximum thickness of bedding.
 New background drying times (minimum):
- Concrete walls: 6 weeks.
- Brick/ block walls: 6 weeks.
- Rendering: 2 weeks.
- Gypsum plaster: 4 weeks.
 New base drying times (minimum):
- Concrete slabs: 6 weeks.
- Cement: sand screeds: 3 weeks.
 Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of
work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.
 Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not
coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Employer’s Representative.
 Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to
determine that it is watertight.

215 FALLS IN THE BASES


 General: Give notice if falls are inadequate.

220 SWIMMING POOL TILING (Not used)


 Water tightness of pool base/substrate structure: Test and prove to be watertight.
 Time intervals between stages of the work (minimum):
- Completion (curing) of pool shell to start of rendering/ screeding/ tiling: 6 weeks
- Completion of rendering/ screeding to start of tiling: 3 weeks
- Completion of tiling to start of grouting: 3 days
- Completion of grouting and sealing of movement joints to filling of pool: 3 weeks.
 Filling, emptying and heating pool: Minimise stresses.
- Maximum filling and emptying rate: 750 mm/24 hour.
- Maximum rate of heating water: 0.25°C/hour.

250 SAMPLES

 General: Submit representative samples of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size
and construction indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include
Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected:-

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 283 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 300 mm
square, mounted on braced cementitious backer units, and with grouted joints usingproduct
complying with specified requirements and approved for completed work in color or colors
selected by Employer’s Representative.
- Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.
- Stone thresholds in 300-mm lengths.
- Metal edge strips in 300-mm lengths.
- Movement joint systems in 300-mm lengths.

260 CONTROL SAMPLES

 Mockups: Before installing tile and stones, construct mockups for each form of construction and
finish required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work:-
- Locate mockups in the location and of the size as selected by the Contractor and
approved by Employer’s Representative.
- Notify Employer’s Representative 7 days in advance of the dates and times when
mockups will be constructed.
- Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
- Obtain Employer’s Representative's approval of mockups before proceeding with final unit
of work.
- Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed work.
- Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition, as judged by the Employer’s
Representative, at the time of Taking Over may become part of the completed Works,
otherwise the Contractor shall demolish and remove from site mockups.

PREPARATION

310 EXISTING BACKGROUNDS/ BASES AND TILES GENERALLY


 Efflorescence, laitance, dirt and other loose material: Remove.
 Deposits of oil, grease and other materials incompatible with the bedding: Remove.
 Tile, paint and other nonporous surfaces: Clean.
 Wet backgrounds: Dry before tiling.
 Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-Portland cement
mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced of tile installation
standards for installations indicated. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds as per tile-
setting material manufacturer's written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions. Remove
protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
 Provide substrates for wall tile installed with dry-set or latex-Portland cement mortars that
comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced tile installation standards forinstallations
indicated. Use cement plaster, with expanded mesh reinforcement where necessary and
combed surface finish as specified in section M20 and M30 and patching compounds as
per tile-setting material manufacturer’s written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
 Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample
submittals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken
from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and
match approved samples. If not factory blended, either returns to manufacturer or blend tiles at
project site before installing.

 Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to
prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of tile
against adherence of mortar and grout by pre-coating them with a continuous film of

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 284 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

temporary protective coating indicated below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile
surfaces:
- Petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot.
- Grout release.
- Petroleum paraffin wax or grout release

320 EXISTING CONCRETE/ SCREEDS


 Loose or hollow portions: Cut out.
 Making good: 1:3 cement: sand mortar applied over cement slurry bonding coat.

330 EXISTING PLASTER


 Plaster which is loose, soft, friable, badly cracked of affected by efflorescence: Remove. Cut
back to straight horizontal and vertical edges.
 Making good: Use plaster or non shrinking filler.

370 NEW IN SITU CONCRETE


 Mould oil, surface retarders and other materials incompatible with bedding: Remove.

380 NEW PLASTER


 Plaster: Dry, solidly bedded, free from dust and friable matter.
 Plaster primer: Apply if recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

390 PLASTERBOARD BACKGROUNDS


 Boards: Dry, securely fixed and rigid with no protruding fixings and face to receive decorative
finish exposed.

420 RAKING OUT FOR KEY


 Soft joints in existing masonry: Rake out to a depth of 13 mm (minimum).

430 SPATTERDASHING FOR KEY


 Spatter dash mix:
- Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1 type CEM I/42.5
- Sand: Clean coarse.
- Proportions (cement: sand): 1-1.5:2.
- Admixture: Styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) or acrylic polymers only where recommended
by the plaster/ render manufacturer.
- Consistency: Thick slurry with no segregation.
 Application/finish: Thrown.
- Thickness: 3-5 mm.
 Curing/ drying: Keep damp until hardened. Dry out to provide securely bonded finish.

431 STIPPLING FOR KEY


 Stipple mix:
- Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1 type CEM I/42.5.
- Sand: Clean coarse.
- Proportions (cement: sand): 1-1.5:2.
- Admixture: Styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) or acrylic polymers.
 Application/ finish: Brush applied to a deep close texture.
 Curing/ drying: Keep damp until hardened. Dry out to provide securely bonded finish.

438 PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR FULLY BONDED BEDDING


 Surface cement: sand matrix: Remove to expose coarse aggregate.
 Surface preparation: Suitable to achieve a full bond with bedding. Select from:
- Keep well wetted for several hours. Remove free water then brush in a slurry bonding coat.
- Slurry: SBR polymer modified cement.
- Prepare, prime as necessary and apply a bonding agent. Bonding agent: BBA certified
SBR bonding agent.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 285 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

444 PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR PARTIALLY BONDED BEDDING


 Surface finish: Brushed with no laitance.
 Surface preparation: Suitable to achieve a full bond with bedding. Select from:
- Keep well wetted for several hours. Remove free water then brush in a slurry bonding coat.
- Slurry: SBR polymer modified cement.
- Prepare, prime as necessary and apply a bonding agent.
- Bonding agent: BBA certified SBR bonding agent.

450 PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR UNBONDED BEDDING - WITHOUT SEPARATING LAYER
 Surface finish: Smooth.
 Surface preparation: Before laying mortar bed, dampen lightly.

451 PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR UNBONDED BEDDING


 Separating layer: Polyethylene sheet, minimum 125 micrometres thick (500 gauge).
 Lap at joints: 100 mm.

460 SMOOTHING UNDERLAYMENT

 Type: Recommended by adhesive manufacturer.


 Condition: Allow to dry before tiling.

FIXING

510 FIXING GENERALLY


 Tile installation standards: Comply with BS 5385; Part 1 for internal wall installations, Part 2 for
external wall installations, Part 3 for floor installations and Part 4 for installations within water
tank.
 Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a
complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
 Fix ceramic tiles over plywood or metal substrates in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
 Install floor tiles using thin set mortar on cement sand screed. Provide slopes to floor drains in
screeds laid to receive floor tiles in areas of wet applications similar to toilets, laundries,kitchens,
balcony and bathrooms.
 Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
 Install wall tiles using thin adhesive fixing on Portland cement sand plaster base coat of
combed finish as specified in section M20.
 Color/ shade: Unintended variations within tiles for use in each area/room are not permitted.
- Variegated tiles: Mix thoroughly.
 Adhesive: Compatible with background/base. Prime if recommended by adhesive
manufacturer.
 Cut tiles: Neat and accurate.
 Fixing: Provide adhesion over entire background/base and tile backs.
 Final appearance: Before bedding material sets, make adjustments necessary to give true,
regular appearance to tiles and joints when viewed under final lighting conditions.
 Surplus bedding material: Clean from joints and face of tiles without disturbing tiles.

530A SETTING OUT


 Joints: True to line, continuous and without steps.
- Joints on walls: Horizontal, vertical and aligned round corners.
- Joints in floors: Parallel to the main axis of the space or specified features.
 Cut tiles: Minimise number, maximise size and locate unobtrusively.
 Joints in adjoining floors and walls: Align

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 286 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Joints in adjoining floors and skirtings: Align.


 Movement joints: If locations are not indicated, submit proposals.

540 LEVEL OF FLOOR TILING


 Permissible deviation in level from datum for floor tiling is ±2 mm in any 2 m.

550 FLATNESS/ REGULARITY OF TILING


 Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
 Deviation of surface: Measure from underside of a 2 m straightedge placed anywhere on
surface. The straightedge should not be obstructed by the tiles and no gap should be greater
than 2 mm.

560 LEVEL OF TILING ACROSS JOINTS


 Deviation (maximum) between tile surfaces either side of any type of joint:
- 1 mm for joints less than 6 mm wide.
- 2 mm for joints 6 mm or greater in width.

570 MORTAR BEDDING


 Bedding mix:
- Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1 type CEM I/42.5.
- Sand for walls: To BS 1199, type A.
- Sand for floors: To BS EN 13139.
- Grading limit: To BS 8204-1, table1.
 Batching: Select from:
- Batch by weight.
- Batch by volume: Permitted on the basis of previously established weight: volume
relationships of the particular materials. Use accurate gauge boxes. Allow for bulking of
damp sand.
 Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistence. Use a suitable forced action
mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall type mixer.
 Application: At normal temperatures use within two hours. Do not use after initial set. Do not re-
temper.

578 CRACK CONTROL REINFORCEMENT


 Type to BS 4483: D98.
 Installation: Place centrally in depth of bed. Lap not less than 100 mm and securely tie
together with steel wire.
 Corners: Avoid a four layer build at corners.

580 POROUS TILES


 Tiles to be bedded in cement: sand: Soak in clean water for at least 30 minutes. Fix as soon as
surface water has drained.

590 COVED TILE SKIRTINGS


 Sequence: Bed solid to wall before laying floor tiles.
 Bedding: Cement based adhesive.

600 SIT-ON TILE SKIRTINGS


 Sequence: Bed solid to wall after laying floor tiles.
 Bedding: Cement based adhesive.

610 MULTISTOREY EXTERNAL TILING


 Sequence: Start fixing at the highest level and work downwards. Protect exposed top edges.
 Copings, sills, etc.: Complete as soon as practicable.

650 THIN BED ADHESIVE - RIBBED (WALLS)

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 287 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Application: Apply 3 mm floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas of


approximately 1 m². Trowel to ribbed profile.
 Tiling: Press tiles firmly onto float coat.

651 THIN BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (WALLS)


 Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas of about 1m². Comb
surface.
 Tiling: Apply thin even coat of adhesive to backs of dry tiles. Press tiles firmly onto float coat.
 Finished adhesive thickness (maximum): 3 mm.

660 THIN BED ADHESIVE - MESH BACKED MOSAIC (WALLS)


 Application: Apply 3 mm floated coat of adhesive to dry background. Comb surface.
 Placing mosaic sheets: Hang in horizontal rows, working downwards. Stagger vertical joints.
Prevent slippage of sheets. Lightly beat mosaics into adhesive.
 Width, plane and alignment of joints between sheets: To match joints between mosaic tiles.

661 THIN BED ADHESIVE - PAPER FACED MOSAIC (WALLS)


 Application: Apply 3 mm floated coat of adhesive to dry background. Comb surface.
 Preparing mosaic sheets: Pregrout. Remove surplus before fixing.
 Placing mosaic sheets: Hang in horizontal rows, working downwards. Stagger vertical joints.
 Width, plane and alignment of joints between sheets: To match joints between mosaic tiles.
 Paper face: Before adhesive hardens completely, remove paper face. Complete grouting.
Wash off glue from face of mosaic.

670 THICK BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (WALLS)


 Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background. Comb surface.
 Tiling: Apply thin even coat of adhesive to backs of dry tiles. Press tiles firmly onto float coat.
 Finished adhesive thickness: Within range recommended by manufacturer.

690 CEMENT: SAND - (WALLS)


 Preparation: Dampen background.
 Application: Apply floated coat: 1:3 - 4 cement: sand mortar bedding.
- Thickness (maximum): 10 mm.
- Finish: Equivalent to wood float. Before tiling allow to stiffen slightly.
 Tiling: Without delay, apply 2 mm thick coat of 1:2 cement: fine sand mortar to backs of tiles,
filling keys. Press tiles firmly onto float coat. Tap firmly into position.

710 THICK BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (FLOORS)


 Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry base and comb surface.
 Tiling: Apply coat of adhesive to backs of tiles filling depressions or keys. Press tiles firmly onto
position.
 Finished adhesive thickness: Within range recommended by manufacturer.

720 CEMENT: SAND BED (FLOORS)


 Mortar bedding mix: 1:3 - 4 cement: sand.
- Consistency: Stiff plastic.
 Laying: Lay suitably small working areas of screeded bed. Compact thoroughly to level.
- Finished bed thickness: 15 - 25 mm.
 Tiling: Within two hours and before bedding sets, evenly coat backs of tiles with adhesive.
Press tiles firmly into position.
 Finished adhesive thickness: Within range recommended by manufacturer.

730 SEMIDRY CEMENT: SAND BED (FLOORS)


 Mortar bedding mix: 1:3.5-4 cement: sand.
- Water content: A film of water must not form on surface of bed when fully compacted.
 Preparation: Dampen base.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 288 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Laying: Lay suitably small working areas of screeded bed. Compact thoroughly to level.
- Finished bed thickness (minimum): 40 mm.
- Finished bed thickness (maximum): 100 mm.
 Tiling: Within two hours and before bedding sets, evenly coat backs of tiles with neat cement
slurry. Beat tiles firmly into position.

MOVEMENT JOINTS/ GROUTING/ COMPLETION

805 SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS WITH METAL EDGINGS IN FLOOR TILING

 Movement Joints: Shall be as defined in BS 5385 Part 3, including structural movement joints
(expansion joints), perimeter and intermediate flexible joints.
 Expansion Joints: Locate directly over expansion joints in underlying concrete slab and
cement screeds
 Edging material: Brass unless otherwise indicated on the finish schedule.
- Size: As indicated on the approved shop drawing.
- Bedding: Bed in 1:3 cement: sand.
 Installation: Centre over joints in base. Set to exact finished level of floor.
- Fixing to base: Stainless steel screws and plugs at 300 mm centres.
 Joint width: To match that of structural movement joint in base.
 Sealant: Multi-component, chemically curing, high performance polyurethane trafficable joint
sealant complying with green building regulations.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range and to match color of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints.
- Preparation and application: As section Z22.

815 SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS IN EXTERNAL FLOOR TILING


 Movement Joints: Shall be as defined in BS 5385 Part 3, including structural movement joints
(expansion joints), perimeter and intermediate flexible joints
 Joints: Extend through tiles and bedding to base/ background. Centre over joints in base/
background.
- Width: 10 mm.
 Sealant: Multi-component, chemically curing, high performance polyurethane trafficable joint
sealant complying with green building regulations.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range and to match color of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints.
- Preparation and application: As section Z22.

875 GROUTING
 General: Grout tile to comply with the requirements of appropriate parts of BS 5385.
 Sequence: Grout when bed/adhesive has set sufficient to prevent disturbance of tiles.
 Joints: 6 mm deep (or depth of tile if less). Free from dust and debris.
 Grouting: Fill joints completely, tool to profile, clean off surface. Leave free from blemishes.
- Profile: Slightly concave.
 Polishing: When grout is hard, polish tiling with a dry cloth.

885 COLOURED GROUT


 Staining of tiles: Not permitted
 Evaluating risk of staining: Apply grout to a few tiles in a small trial area. If discoloration occurs
apply a protective sealer to tiles and repeat trial.

890 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

 Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they are free of
foreign matter.
- Remove latex-Portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 289 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout
manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect
metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning.
Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
- Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer
that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it
from clogging drains.
 Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken,
unbounded, and otherwise defective tile work.
 Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Taking Over by the
Employer’s Representative.
- When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective
cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other
heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
- Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is
completed.
 Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile
surfaces.

***End of Section M40***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 290 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION M50
RUBBER/ PLASTICS/ CORK/ LINO/ CARPET
TILING/ SHEETING

Page 291 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

M50 RUBBER/ PLASTICS/ CORK/ LINO/ CARPET TILING/ SHEETING

To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions. This section deals with sheets and tiles of
rubber, plastics, cork, linoleum and carpet fixed with adhesive, mainly as flooring but also on stairs,
walls, columns, etc. It includes requirements for antistatic floor coverings for computer/server
rooms, operating, theatres, etc., Loose-laid carpet tiles are also included.

TYPES OF COVERING

110A ANTISTATIC VINYL TILING

 Location: As indicated on the finish schedule.


 Base: Raised access floor unless otherwise indicated on the finish schedule.
- Preparation: Uniform, smooth surface free from any blemishes.
 Fabricated underlay: Not required.
 Tiles: Polyvinyl chloride based synthetic floor covering, homogeneous to the requirements of
BS EN 649.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- BS EN 685 class: 33.
- Size: 600 x 600 mm.
- Thickness: 2.5 mm.
- Colour/ pattern: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's
standard range.
 Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): Low-emission and solvent-free
adhesive as clause 640. Adhesive shall comply with green building regulation.
 Accessories: PVC skirtings as clause 770.
 Finishing: Wash and test electrical resistance as clause 860.
 Other requirements:
- All tiles delivered to site shall have the same manufacturer's batch number.
- The application of adhesive shall be carried out using the trowel notch recommended by
the adhesive manufacturer.
- The laying of tiles shall be carried out in an ambient temperature of about 18°C and sub-
floor temperature of at least 15°C.
- A conductive primer shall be applied in accordance with the operating guidelines of the
manufacturer. Earthing of the flooring shall be connected to the raised access floor
structure and subsequently to the building structure.
- Product shall comply with the regulations of local fire department.
- Provide a 5 year non-prorated limited warranty against excessive surface wear and static,
delamination, edge ravel, zippering and backing resiliency loss. Warranty starts from date of
Taking over of the Works.

130 CARPET TILING

 Location: As indicated on the finish schedule.


 Base: Trowelled screed as section M10.
- Preparation: Uniform, smooth surface free from any blemishes.
 Fabricated underlay: Not required.
 Carpet tiles:
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Type: Loop pile unless otherwise indicated on the finish schedule.
- BS EN 1307 classification:
 Category: L.
 Level of use class: 4.
 Luxury rating class: LC4.
- Size: 600 x 600X8 mm unless otherwise indicated on the finish schedule or selected by the

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 292 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Employer’s Representative.
- Colour/ pattern: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's
standard range.
 Method of laying: Fully adhere all tiles with release adhesive recommended by tile
manufacturer. Adhesive shall comply with green building regulation.
 Accessories: Skirtings as clause 770.
 Other requirements:
- All tiles delivered to site shall have the same manufacturer's batch number.
- The laying of tiles shall be carried out in an ambient temperature of about 18°C and sub-
floor temperature of at least 15°C.
- Product shall comply with the regulations of local fire department.
- Provide a 10 year non-prorated limited warranty against excessive surface wear and static,
delamination, edge ravel, zippering and backing resiliency loss. Warranty starts from date of
Taking over of the Works.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

210 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

 Base condition after preparation: Rigid, dry, sound, smooth and free from grease, dirt and
other contaminants.
 Finished coverings: Accurately fitted, tightly jointed, securely bonded, smooth and free from air
bubbles, rippling, adhesive marks and stains.

220 SAMPLES

 Covering samples: Before placing orders, submit representative sample of each type.

230 CONTROL SAMPLES

 General: Complete areas of finished work in approved locations as follows, and obtain
approval of appearance before proceeding: All types of coverings specified in this section and
applicable to the project.

252 LAYOUT - PATTERNS

 Setting out: Before placing orders agree setting out for covering types M50/ 130 if applicable.

270 EXTRA MATERIAL

 Provision of extra material: At completion, hand to Employer’s Representative extra material of


each type of covering to extent of 2%.

330 COMMENCEMENT

 Required condition of works prior to laying materials:


- Building is weathertight and well dried out.
- Wet trades have finished work.
- Paintwork is finished and dry.
- Conflicting overhead work is complete.
- Floor service outlets, duct covers and other fixtures around which materials are to be cut
are fixed.
 Notification: Submit not less than 48 hours before commencing laying.

340 CONDITIONING
 Prior to laying: Condition materials by unpacking and separating in spaces where they are to
be laid. Maintain resilient flooring rolls in an upright position. Unroll carpet and keep flat on a

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 293 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

supporting surface.
 Conditioning time and temperature (minimum): As recommended by manufacturer with time
extended by a factor of two for materials stored or transported at a temperature of less than
10°C immediately prior to laying.

350 ENVIRONMENT

 Temperature and humidity: Before, during and after laying, maintain approximately at levels
which will prevail after building is occupied.
 Ventilation: Before during and after laying, maintain adequate provision.

PREPARING BASES

410 NEW BASES

 Suitability of bases and conditions within any area: Commencement of laying of coverings willbe
taken as acceptance of suitability.

420 EXISTING BASES

 Notification: Before commencing work, confirm that existing bases will, after preparation be
suitable to receive coverings.
 Suitability of bases and conditions within any area: Commencement of laying of coverings willbe
taken as acceptance of suitability.

430 NEW WET LAID BASES

 Base drying aids: Not used for at least four days prior to moisture content testing.
 Base moisture content test: Carry out in accordance with BS 5325, Annexure A or BS 8203,
Annexure A.
- Locations for readings: In all corners, along edges, and at various points over area being
tested.
 Commencement of laying coverings: Not until all readings show 75% relative humidity less.

440 SUBSTRATES TO RECEIVE THIN COVERINGS

 Trowelled finishes: Uniform, smooth surface free from trowel marks and other blemish.
Abrade suitably to receive specified floor covering material.

460 SMOOTHING/ LEVELLING UNDERLAYMENT COMPOUND

 Type: Latex cement.


 Selection: As recommended by covering manufacturer.

535 PARTICLEBOARD FLOATING FLOORING

 Substrate: Boards securely fixed and free from surface sealers and contaminants.
- Level: Sand to remove areas raised more than 1 mm.
- Gaps between boards: Not more than 1 mm.
- Priming: As required by covering adhesive manufacturer.
 Equilibrium moisture content at time of laying covering: As in service conditions.

LAYING COVERINGS

610 SETTING OUT TILES

 Method: Set out from centre of area/ room, so that wherever possible:
- Tiles along opposite edges are of equal size.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 294 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Edge tiles are more than 50% of full tile width.

620 COLOUR CONSISTENCY

 Finished work in any one area/ room: Free from banding or patchiness.

640 ADHESIVE FIXING GENERALLY

 Adhesive: Type to be as specified, recommended by covering/ underlay manufacturer as


approved.
 Primer: Use and type as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
 Application: As necessary to achieve good bond.
 Finished surface irregularities: Trowel ridges and high spots caused by particles on the
substrate not acceptable.

650 SEAMS

 Patterns: Matched.
 Joints: Tight without gaps.

670 BORDERS/ FEATURE STRIPS IN SHEET MATERIAL

 Application: Cut strips along length of sheet to prevent curl.


- Corners: Mitre joints.

680 SEAM WELDING COVERINGS

 Commencement: Not before a period of 24 hours after laying, or until adhesive has set
 Joints: Neat, smooth, strongly bonded, flush with finished surface.

700 LOOSE LAID CARPET TILES

 Areas of adhered tiles: Secure using double sided tape or peelable adhesive.
 Joints: Tightly butted.
- Perimeter joints: Accurately cut to match abutment and prevent movement.

720 DOORWAYS

 Joint location: On centre line of door leaf.

770 SKIRTINGS

 Types: PVC unless otherwise indicated on the contract drawings.


- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Fixing: Secure with top edge straight and parallel with floor.
- Corners: Mitre joints.

780 TRAFFICKING AFTER LAYING

 Covering types: All types of coverings specified in this section and applicable to the project.
 Traffic free period: Until adhesive is set.

COMPLETION

825 FINISHING NON-TEXTILE ANTISTATIC FLOORING

 Cleaning operations:
- Wash floor with water containing neutral (pH 6-9) detergent. If necessary, lightly scrub

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 295 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

heavily soiled areas.


- Rinse with clean water, removing surplus to prevent damage to adhesive. Allow to dry for
not less than 24 hours before testing.
830 FINISHING RUBBER FLOORING
 Cleaning operations:
- Wash floor with a cleaner recommended by covering manufacturer.
- Wet vacuum or mop up residue.
- Rinse with clean water. Wet vacuum or mop up and allow to dry.
 Final treatment: Follow recommendations of covering manufacture and spray buff with
wetting agent or dry burnish.

860A TESTING ANTISTATIC FLOORING

 Flooring to be tested: M50/ 110A.


 Test methods: In accordance with BS 2050, clause A.4.1.
 Required electrical resistance values:
- Upper limit:
Average value not more than 107 ohms.
- Lower limit:
Average value not less than 5 x 104.
 Electrical resistivity: Submit and agree date and time of test. Record and submit results
 Flooring details sign: Before fixing, agree location and submit details of a brass plate, size 50 x75
mm, engraved with the following details:

 The words 'ANTISTATIC FLOOR'.


 Manufacturer and reference of flooring.
 Name of flooring contractor.
 Date when laid.

880 WASTE

 Spare covering material: Retain suitable material for patching. On completion submit pieces
for selection. Hand over selected pieces to Employer’s Representative.

***END OF SECTION M50***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 296 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION M60
PAINTING/ CLEAR FINISHING

Page 297 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

M60 PAINTING/ CLEAR FINISHING

To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions. This section deals with preparing surfaces, and
decorative/ protective painting, staining, varnishing and sealing of new and previously coated
surfaces, both on and off site. Coatings which may be included are, Alkyd paints, Bituminous paints,
chlorinated rubber paints, Emulsion paints, Lacquers, Masonry paints, Multicolored paints, Polyurethane,
epoxy resin and other polymer based paints, Sealers, Stains, Textured paints, textured
compounds, Varnishes ,Special purpose coatings such as, insecticidal, fungicidal, luminous, etc,.

Each component of the paint system shall comply with Green Building regulation. Volatile Organic
Compounds (VOC) shall be within the allowable limit in accordance with DM/DS Green Building
Regulations.

COATING SYSTEMS

110 EMULSION PAINT TO INTERNAL WALLS


- Product reference: Factory formulated silk high quality acrylic copolymer water based
emulsion paint system with outstanding washability, hiding power and color retention
properties. Each component of the paint system shall comply with green building
regulations. Fenomastic My Home Smooth Silk paint system by Jotun or equal and
approved. VOC as per ISO 11890 EU should be 0 g/l.
 Surfaces:
- Plastered masonry walls.
- Plastered concrete walls/ columns.
- Fair faced concrete walls/ columns (superior finish).
 Preparation: As clause 400.
 Primer/ sealer: Fenomastic Emulsion Primer
- Type: Brush/ roller applied copolymer water based alkali resistant primer and with volume of
solids of 25+2%.
- Number of coats: 1.
 Filler: Stucco
- Type: Knife applied acrylic copolymer water based multipurpose good opacity filler and
with volume of solids of 50+2%.
- Number of coats: 2.
 Finishing coats:
- Type: Spray/ roller applied high quality acrylic copolymer water based emulsion paint with high
washability, hiding power and colour retention properties and with volume of solids of
40+2%.
- Finish: Smooth Silk.
- Number of coats: 2.

111 EMULSION PAINT TO INTERNAL CEILINGS


- Product reference: Factory formulated flat high quality acrylic copolymer water based
emulsion paint system with outstanding washability, hiding power and color retention
properties. Each component of the paint system shall comply with green building
regulations. Fenomastic pure colors Emulsion paint system by Jotun or equal and
approved. VOC as per ISO 11890 EU should be 16 g/l.
 Surfaces:
- Plastered concrete slabs.
- Fair faced concrete slabs (superior finish).
 Preparation: As clause 400.
 Primer/ sealer: PVA primer
- Type: Brush/ roller applied copolymer water based alkali resistant primer and with volume of
solids of 16+2%.
- Number of coats: 1.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 298 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Filler: Stucco
- Type: Knife applied acrylic copolymer water based multipurpose good opacity filler and with
volume of solids of 50+2%.
- Number of coats: 2.
 Finishing coats:
- Type: Spray/ roller applied high quality acrylic copolymer water based emulsion paint with high
washability, hiding power and colour retention properties and with volume of solids of
35+2%.
- Finish: Matt.
- Number of coats: 2.

112 ANTI BACTERIAL & ANTI FUNGAL EMULSION PAINT TO WET AREAS
- Product reference: Factory formulated flat high quality 100% pure acrylic water based
emulsion paint system offering resistance to bacteria & fungus and with outstanding
washability, hiding power and color retention properties. Each component of the paint
system shall comply with green building regulations. Fenomastic Hygiene Emulsion Matt
paint system by Jotun or equal and approved. VOC as per ISO 11890 EU should be 0 g/l.
 Surfaces:
- Plastered masonry walls
- Plastered concrete columns/beams
- Plastered concrete slabs.
- Fair faced concrete beams/slabs (superior finish).
 Preparation: As clause 400.
 Primer/ sealer: Fenomastic Emulsion Primer.
- Type: Brush/ roller applied copolymer water based alkali resistant primer and with volume of
solids of 25+2%.
- Number of coats: 1.
 Filler: Stucco
- Type: Knife applied acrylic copolymer water based multipurpose good opacity filler and
with volume of solids of 50+2%.
- Number of coats: 2.
 Finishing coats:
- Type: Spray/ roller applied high quality 100% pure acrylic water based emulsion paint
offering resistance to bacteria & fungus and with high washability, hiding power and colour
retention properties and with volume of solids of 33+2%.
- Finish: Matt.
- Number of coats: 2.

113 ANTICARBONATION PAINT TO: Inside the Generator room and fire pump room.
- Product reference: Jotashield colorxtreme silk paint system by Jotun or approved
equivalent. VOC as per ISO 11890 EU should be 0 g/l .Each component of the paint
system shall comply with green building regulations.
 Surfaces:
- Plastered masonry walls.
- Plastered concrete beams/columns
- Fair faced concrete beams/columns (superior finish).
 Preparation: As clause 400.
 Primer/ sealer: Acrylic Emulsion Primer
- Type: Brush/ roller applied superior quality acrylic copolymer water based environmental
friendly primer and with volume of solids of 32+2%.
- Number of coats: 1.
 Texture:
- Type for wall: Spray applied superior quality water based acrylic copolymer high build wall
coating for achieving spattered texture finishes and with volume of solids of 62+2%.
- Type for ceiling: Roller applied superior quality water based acrylic copolymer high build

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 299 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

wall coating for achieving fine texture finishes and with volume of solids of 62+2%.
- Number of coats: 1.
 Finishing coats:
- Type: Spray/ roller applied high quality 100% pure acrylic water based, highly reflective,
crack bridging, breathable, anticabonation coating with long lasting colour retention
property and with volume of solids of 35+2%
- Number of coats: 2.

115 EMULSION PAINT (DECORATIVE APPLICATION, where mentioned in finish schedule)


- Product reference: Factory formulated flat high quality acrylic copolymer based emulsion
paint system with outstanding washability, hiding power and color retention properties.
Each component of the paint system shall comply with green building regulations.
Fenomastic my home smooth Silk paint system by Jotun or equal and approved. VOC as
per ISO 11890 EU should be 0 g/l.
 Surfaces:
- Plastered masonry walls.
- Plastered concrete walls/ columns.
- Fair faced concrete walls/ columns (superior finish).
- Plaster board partitions/ bulkheads.
- Plastered concrete slabs.
- Fair faced concrete slabs (superior finish).
- Plaster board suspended ceilings.
 Preparation: As clause 400.
 Primer/ sealer: Fenomastic Emulsion Primer.
- Type: Brush/ roller applied copolymer water based alkali resistant primer and with volume of
solids of 25+2%.
- Number of coats: 1.
 Filler: Stucco
- Type: Knife applied acrylic copolymer water based multipurpose good opacity filler and
with volume of solids of 50+2%.
- Number of coats: 2.
 Finishing coats:
- Type: Spray/ roller applied high quality acrylic copolymer based emulsion paint with high
washability, hiding power and colour retention properties with volume of solids of 40+2%.
- Finish: Silk.
- Number of coats: 2.
 Decorative coat(s):
- Type: Sponge applied high quality acrylic copolymer based emulsion paint with high
washability, hiding power and colour retention properties.
- Finish: Silk.
- Number of coats: 1 or 2 depending on the colour combination selected by the Employer’s
Representative.

120 ALKYD BASED PAINT TO WALLS AND CEILINGS (Where mentioned in finish schedule)
- Product reference: Alkyd based, enamel, non-toxic, drying to a smooth, highly opaque
surface to produce a durable, flexible and water-resistant coating with excellent adhesion and
color retention. Each component of the paint system shall comply with green building
regulations. Fenomastic pure colors enamel gloss paint system by Jotun or equal and
approved. VOC shall be within the acceptable limits.
 Surfaces:
- Plastered masonry walls.
- Plastered concrete walls/ columns.
- Fair faced concrete walls/ columns (superior finish).
- Plaster board partitions/ bulkheads.
- Plastered concrete slabs.
- Fair faced concrete slabs (superior finish).

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 300 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Plaster board suspended ceilings.


 Preparation: As clause 400.
 Primer/ sealer: Fenomastic Emulsion Primer
- Type: Brush/ roller applied copolymer water based alkali resistant primer and with volume of
solids of 25+2%.
- Number of coats: 1.
 Filler: Stucco
- Type: Knife applied acrylic copolymer water based multipurpose good opacity filler with
volume of solids of 50+2%.
- Number of coats: 2.
 Finishing coats:
- Type: Spray/ roller applied high quality alkyd enamel paint with active fungicide, providing
high colour retention and durability and with volume of solids of 43+2%
- Finish: High gloss.
- Number of coats: 2.

146 PURE ACRYLIC BASED FINE TEXTURED BREATHABLE PAINT SYSTEM TO EXTERNAL
WALLS, PARAPETS AND CEILINGS
- Product reference: Alkali-resistant, exterior, flexible, 100% pure acrylic, weather-resistant, UV-
resistant and color stable, washable and resistant to repeated scribing, water vapor
permeable and of crack bridging capability. Each component of the paint system shall
comply with green building regulations. Jotashield Tex Ultra paint system by Jotun or
approved equivalent. VOC as per ISO 11890 EU should be 34 g/l.
 Surfaces:
- Plastered masonry walls.
- Plastered concrete walls/ columns.
- Fair faced concrete walls/ columns (superior finish).
- Plastered concrete slabs.
- Fair faced concrete slabs (superior finish).
 Preparation: As clause 400.
 Primer/ sealer: Penetrating primer
- Type: Spray/ roller applied, alkali-resistant, water based, exterior, acrylic-latex bonding
primer with high penetrating properties and with volume of solids of 34+2%.
- Number of coats: 1.
 Smoothening coat: One or two coats (if required) of single pack, acrylic based, high quality
exterior grade filler.
 Finishing coats:
- Type: Spray/roller applied pure acrylic semi-gloss finish coating to be flexible, breathable
and resistant to atmospheric pollution. Volume of solids of 42+2%
- Finish: Fine textured.
- Number of coats: 2.

161 DECORATIVE WOODSTAIN/ VARNISH/ PRESERVATIVE FOR EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS


- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection. Product shall comply with
green building regulations.
 Surfaces: External wood work where applicable.
 Preparation: As clause 400.
 Initial coats:
- Type: Spray / brush applied colourless penetrating preservative impregnation in organic
solvents. The base coat shall contain biocides against wood destroying and wood
discolouring and shall provide a full protection against wood destroying fungi, wood
destroying insects, blue stain fungi and surface moulds. The product shall not be thinned
and shall be suitable for application on wood with moisture content up to 18%. VOC shall
be within the acceptable limits.
- Number of coats: 1 for spray application and 2 for brush application.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 301 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Finishing coats:
- Type: Spray / brush applied alkyd based solvent borne low build translucent wood
protection coating.
- Shade: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from a colour chart prepared by the
manufacturer.
- Number of coats: 3.
 Other requirements:
- Hardwoods containing high levels of rosins, latex or natural oils affecting the performance,
drying, absorption and adhesion of finishes shall be wiped with a cloth soaked in an
organic solvent such as toluene or cellulose thinner.
- Ensure colour and finish are consistent for all areas receiving stain.
 All items to be factory stained and finished in a controlled environment. Only final touch-ups shall
be allowed on site.

191 SPECIAL COATING FOR NON-STRUCTURAL INTERNAL STEEL WORK

- Product reference: Alkyd based, oleo-resinous, non-toxic, drying to a smooth, highly


opaque surface to produce a durable, flexible and water-resistant coating with excellent
adhesion and color retention. Undercoat is to be suitable to receive further coatings.
Finish is to be semi-gloss. Product shall comply with green building regulations. Fenomastic
pure colors Enamel Gloss paint system by Jotun or other approved equivalent. VOC shall be
within the allowable limits.
 Surfaces: Non-structural internal steel work as specified in drawing/finish schedule.
- Preparation: As clause 400.
 Initial coats:
- Type: Spray/ brush / roller applied rust preventing primer based on special synthetic resin.
- Number of coats: 2.
 Under coats:
- Type: Spray/ brush / roller applied reinforced alkyd based semi-gloss.
- Number of coats: 1.

 Top coat:
- Type: Spray applied glossy alkyd based top coat.
- Number of coats: 1.

197 CONCRETE KERB MARKING PAINT


- Product reference: Product shall comply with green building regulations. Acrylic based
quick drying reflective paint by Jotun or other equal and approved.
 Surfaces:
- Concrete kerbs.
 Preparation: As clause 400.
 Initial and finishing coats:
- Type: Spray/ brush/ roller applied acrylic solvent based, quick drying reflective paint.
- Number of coats: 2(Min 120 microns DFT total).
- Colour: As indicated on the contract drawings.
- Reflective properties: N/A.

GENERALLY

210 COATING MATERIALS


 Selected manufacturer: Submit name before commencement of coating work.
 Green building regulation: All paint and protective coating system used in the project should
not exceed the allowable limits of Volatile organic compound and these paints and coating

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 302 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

must be accredited/certified from DCLD or any other source approved by DM/DDA.

215 HANDLING AND STORAGE


 Coating materials: Deliver in sealed containers, labelled clearly with brand name, type of
material and manufacturer's batch number.
 Materials from more than one batch: Store separately. Allocate to distinct parts or areas of the work.

220 COMPATIBILITY
 Coating materials selected by the Contractor:
- Recommended by their manufacturers for the particular surface and conditions of
exposure.
- Compatible with each other.
- Compatible with and not inhibiting performance of preservative/fire retardant
pretreatments.
- Comply with green building regulations and DCLD certification/accreditation.

230 ANCILLARY SURFACES


 The description of areas to be coated given in schedule of finishes, drawings, etc. is of
necessarily simplified. All ancillary exposed surfaces and features are to be coated to match
similar or adjacent materials or areas except where a fair faced natural finish is required or
items are completely prefinished. In cases of doubt obtain instructions from the Employer’s
Representative before proceeding.

240 SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED


 Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts
and labels.
 Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:-
- Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
- Light fixtures.
- Any other item specified to have factory applied colored paint or coating system.
 Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:-
- Utility tunnels or trenches
 Finished metal surfaces include the following:
- Anodized aluminum.
- Stainless steel.
- Chromium plate.
- Copper and copper alloys.
- Bronze and brass.
- Powder coated aluminum
- PVDF coated aluminum

 Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:-
- Valve and damper operators.
- Linkages.
- Sensing devices.
- Motor and fan shafts.
- Similar operating items
 Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates

250 SURFACES TO BE CLEANED BUT NOT COATED


 As decided by the Employer’s Representative during detailed design stage.

280A PROTECTION
 'Wet paint' signs and barriers: Provide where necessary to protect other operatives and
general public, and to prevent damage to freshly applied coatings.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 303 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Furnish and lay suitable plastic sheets and canvas cloths, in all areas where painting is
executed, to protect floors and all other surfaces from damage during the work.
 At completion of work in each area, remove all paint spots, spatter, oil and other stains from all
surfaces, leaving no evidence of such accidents or of work less than first class quality. Surfaces
which suffer irreparable damage shall be replaced.
 The contractor shall have the sole responsibility for the protection of finished surfaces,
equipment, fittings, etc. from any damage or staining by paint works of the adjacent surfaces.

290 SCAFFOLDING
 All scaffolds, staging and rigging required for completion of the work shall comply with all the
applicable laws and codes, as further specified in the contract documents.

291 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS


 Do not apply water based paints when the temperature of the surfaces to be painted and the
surrounding air are below 10°C, unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer.
 Do not apply solvent thinned paints when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the
surrounding air temperatures are below 7°C, unless otherwise permitted by the paint
manufacturer.
 Do not apply paint in rain, fog or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%, or to damp
or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer. Painting may be
continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosedand
maintained within the temperature limits allowed by the paint manufacturer during application
and drying periods.
 Do not apply final coats of external paints until the Employer’s Representative is satisfied with
weather conditions.

292 SAMPLES, COLOURS AND FINISHES


 Prior to commencing work, the Employer’s Representative shall approve a colour scheme for
each area. Colours shall be selected from the manufacturer's colour samples furnished by the
contractor for surfaces to be painted. Submit three Samples on the following substrates for
Employer’s Representative's review of color and texture only:
- Concrete: 100-by-150-mm Samples for each color and finish.
- Concrete Unit Masonry: 150-by-250-mm Samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the
center, for each finish and color.
- Ferrous Metal: 100-mm square Samples of flat metal and 200-mm long Samples of solid
metal for each color and finish.
 Final approval of colours shall be from samples applied on the actual building elements.
 Colour of each coat shall be darker than the coat underneath.
 The Employer’s Representative shall have an unlimited choice of colours without extra cost.
 Proprietary names used to designate colours or materials are not intended to imply that
products of the manufacturers are required to the exclusion of equivalent products of other
manufacturers.

293 MATERIALS
 Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings regularly manufactured by
approved paint manufacturers.
 Manufacturers shall be internationally recognised companies which have been regularly engaged
in large scale production of premium paints of the types specified for at least ten years.
 All paints shall be lead free and environmental friendly.
 Provide undercoat paint by the same manufacturer as the finishing coats. Use only thinners
approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only within the recommended limits.
 Provide paints of durable and washable quality. Do not provide paint which will not withstand
normal washing as required to remove pencil marks, ink, ordinary soiling etc. without showing
discolouration, loss of gloss, staining or other damage.
 Provide finishing coats which are compatible with priming paints used. Review other clauses of
this section in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of coating

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 304 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

systems for various substances.


 Site mixed paints will not be permitted.
 The product shall be thoroughly mixed and ground. It shall not be settled, caked or thickened to
such a degree that it cannot be mixed easily with a paddle by stirring to a good uniform
brushing consistency.
 The product shall show no evidence of cracking, chipping or flaking.
 The products odour shall not be particularly pungent, offensive or disagreeable.
 Drying time shall be less than 48 hours under normal conditions but not of such short duration
that the paint cannot be properly worked.

310A SUPERVISED CONTROL SAMPLES


 General: Carry out 1500mm square sample areas of finished work, including preparation, for
each item specified in this section and applicable to the project.
 Give notice: When each stage is ready for inspection.
 Approval of appearance: Obtain before commencement of general coating work.

320 INSPECTION BY COATING MANUFACTURERS


 General: Permit manufacturers to inspect work in progress and take samples of their materials
from site if requested.

321A INSPECTION OF WORK STAGES


 General: Submit a programme for inspection of all the above mentioned control samples.
 Give notice: When each stage is ready for inspection.

322 APPLICATOR QUALIFICATION

 Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced(minimum five years) in applying


paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project,
whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

PREPARATION

400 PREPARATION GENERALLY


 Standard: To BS 6150, Section 4.
 Suspected existing hazardous materials: Prepare risk assessments and method statements
covering operations, disposal of waste, containment and reoccupation, and obtain approval
before commencing work
 Preparation materials: Types recommended by their manufacturers and the coating
manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared.
 Substrates: Sufficiently dry in depth to suit coating.
 Efflorescence salts: Remove.
 Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If
surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this
condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
 Dirt, grease and oil: Remove.
- Give notice if contamination of surfaces/ substrates has occurred.
 Joints, cracks, holes and other depressions:
- Fill with stoppers/ fillers. Work well in and finish off flush with surface.
- Abrade to a smooth finish.
 Water based stoppers and fillers:
- Apply before priming unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer.
- If applied after priming: Patch prime.
 Oil based stoppers and fillers: Apply after priming.
 Surface irregularities: Abrade to a smooth finish.
 Dust, particles and residues from abrasion: Remove.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 305 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Doors, opening windows and other moving parts:


- Ease before coating.
- Prime resulting bare areas.

425 IRONMONGERY
 Before commencing work: Remove ironmongery from surfaces to be coated.
 Hinges: Do not remove.
 On completion of coating work: Refix.

440 PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES GENERALLY


 Preparation standard: To BS 6150, Clause 11.5.
 Removing coatings: Do not damage substrate and adjacent surfaces or adversely affect
subsequent coatings.
 Loose, flaking or otherwise defective areas: Carefully remove to a firm edge.
 Alkali affected coatings: Completely remove.
 Discovery: Give notice of:
- Coatings suspected of containing lead.
- Substrates suspected of containing asbestos.
- Significant rot, corrosion or other degradation of substrates.
 Retained coatings:
- Thoroughly clean to remove dirt, grease and contaminants.
- Gloss coated surfaces: Abrade provide a key.
 Partly removed coatings:
- Additional preparatory coats: Apply to restore original coating thicknesses.
- Junctions: Abrade to give a flush surface.
 Completely stripped surfaces: Prepare as for uncoated surfaces.

451 PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES - BLAST CLEANING


 Operatives:
- Trained/ experienced in blast cleaning.
- Submit evidence of training/ experience on request.
 Dust and nuisance: Minimize.

461 PREVIOUSLY COATED TIMBER


 Degraded or weathered surface timber: Abrade to remove.
 Degraded substrate timber: Repair with sound timber of same species.
 Exposed resinous areas and knots: Apply two coats of knotting.

471 PREPRIMED TIMBER


 Defective primer: Abrade back to bare timber.
 Bare areas: Reprime.

481 UNCOATED TIMBER


 General: Abrade to a smooth, even finish with arises and moulding edges lightly rounded or
eased.
 Heads of fasteners: Countersink sufficient to hold stoppers/fillers.
 Resinous areas and knots: Apply two coats of knotting.

490 PREVIOUSLY COATED STEEL


 Defective paintwork: Remove to leave a firm edge and clean bright metal.
 Sound paintwork: Abrade to provide key for subsequent coats.
 Corrosion and loose scale: Abrade back to bare metal.
 Residual rust: Treat with a proprietary removal solution.
 Bare metal: Apply primer as soon as possible.
 Remaining areas: Degrease.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 306 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

500 PREPRIMED STEEL


 Defective primer, corrosion and loose scale: Abrade back to bare metal.
 Bare areas: Reprime as soon as possible.

511 GALVANIZED, SHERARDIZED AND ELECTROPLATED STEEL


 White rust: Remove.
 Pretreatment: Apply one of the following:
- 'T wash'/ mordant solution to blacken whole surface.
- Etching primer recommended by coating system manufacturer.

521 UNCOATED STEEL - MANUAL CLEANING


 Oil and grease: Remove.
 Corrosion, loose scale, welding slag and spatter: Abrade to remove.
 Residual rust: Treat with a proprietary removal solution.
 Primer: Apply as soon as possible.

531 UNCOATED STEEL - BLAST CLEANING


 Oil and grease: Remove.
 Blast cleaning:
- Atmospheric conditions: Dry.
- Abrasive: Suitable type and size, free from fines, moisture and oil.
- Surface finish: To BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade Sa 2½.
 Primer: Apply as soon as possible and within four hours of blast cleaning.

541 UNCOATED ALUMINIUM/ COPPER/ LEAD


 Surface corrosion: Remove and lightly abrade.
 Pretreatment: Etching primer if recommended by coating system manufacturer.

552 UNCOATED PVC-U


 Dirt and grease: Remove. Do not abrade.

560 UNCOATED CONCRETE


 Release agents: Remove.

570 UNCOATED MASONRY/RENDERING


 Loose and flaking material: Remove.

580 UNCOATED PLASTER


 Nibs, trowel marks and plaster splashes: Scrape off.
 Over trowelled 'polished' areas: Abrade lightly.

590 UNCOATED PLASTERBOARD


 Depressions around fixings: Fill with stoppers/fillers

601 UNCOATED PLASTERBOARD - TO RECEIVE TEXTURED COATING


 Joints: Fill, tape and feather out with materials recommended by textured coating
manufacturer.

603 GRC FABRIACTION AND MOLDINGS


 Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

611 WALL COVERINGS


 Retained wall coverings: Check that they are in good condition and well adhered to substrate.
 Previously covered walls: Wash down to remove paper residues, adhesive and size.

622 ORGANIC GROWTHS


 Loose growths and infected coatings: Scrape off and remove.
 Treatment biocide: Apply appropriate solution to growth areas and surrounding surfaces.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 307 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Dead growth: Scrape off and remove.


 Residual effect biocide: Apply appropriate solution to inhibit re-establishment of growths.

640 EXTERNAL POINTING TO EXISTING FRAMES


 Defective sealant pointing: Remove.
 Joint depth: Approximately half joint width; adjust with backing strip if necessary.
 Preparation and application: As section Z22.
 Sealant:
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection and complying with
Green Building regulation.

645 POINTING TO INTERNAL MOVEMENT JOINTS


 General: Apply to junctions of walls and ceilings with architraves, skirtings and other trims.
 Preparation and application: As section Z22.
 Sealant: Water based acrylic.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection and complying with
Green Building regulation.

APPLICATION

711 COATING GENERALLY


 Application standard: To BS 6150, Clause 9.
 Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple
coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but
provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
 Conditions: Maintain suitable temperature, humidity and air quality during application and
drying.
 Surfaces: Clean and dry at time of application.
 Thinning and intermixing of coatings: Not permitted unless recommended by manufacturer.
 Over painting: Do not paint over intumescent strips or silicone mastics.
 Priming coats:
- Thickness: To suit surface porosity.
- Application: As soon as possible on same day as preparation is completed.
 Finish:
- Even, smooth and of uniform colour.
- Free from brush marks, sags, runs and other defects.
- Cut in neatly.
 Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface deterioration.
- The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by
manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
- If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film
thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
- Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause
undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 308 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
- Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate
size for surface or item being painted.
- Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
- Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
 Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated, unless higher thickness is
recommended by manufacturer. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by manufacturer but not less dry film thickness specified.
 Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or
repaint work not complying with requirements.

720 PRIMING JOINERY


 Preservative treated timber: Retreat cut surfaces before priming.
 End grain: Liberally coat, allow soaking in and then recoating.

730 WORKSHOP COATING OF CONCEALED JOINERY SURFACES


 General: Apply coatings to all surfaces of components.

751 STAINING TIMBER


 Primer: Apply if recommended by stain manufacturer.
 Stain:
- Apply in flowing coats.
- Brush out excess stain before set.
- Produce uniform depth of colour.

760 VARNISHING TIMBER


 First coat:
- Thin with white spirit.
- Brush well in and lay off avoiding aeration.
 Subsequent coats: Rub down lightly between coats along the grain.

770 EXTERNAL DOORS


 Bottom edges: Prime and coat before hanging doors.

780 BEAD GLAZING TO COATED TIMBER


 Before glazing: Apply first two coats to rebates and beads.

800 GLAZING
 Etched, sand blasted and ground glass: Treat or mask edges before coating to protect from
contamination by oily constituents of coating materials.

810 WATER REPELLENT


 Application: Liberally flood surface, giving complete and even coverage.

815 CLEANING
 Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from Project site.
- After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.

816 GUARANTEE

 External 100% pure acrylic based paint system shall be guaranteed for 05 years from the date
of Taking over of the Works.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 309 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 External acrylic copolymer based paint system shall be guaranteed for 03 years from the dateof
Taking over of the Works.
 Internal pure acrylic based hygiene emulsion system shall be guaranteed for 03 years from the
date of Taking over of the Works.
 Internal acrylic co-polymer based emulsion system shall be guaranteed for 01 years from the
date of Taking over of the Works.

***End of Section M60***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 310 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION M61
INTUMESCENT COATINGS FOR FIRE
PROTECTION OF STEELWORK

Page 311 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

M61 INTUMESCENT COATINGS FOR FIRE PROTECTION OF STEELWORK

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions

SCOPE OF SECTION

This section deals with preparing surfaces, priming, and application of intumescent coatings, on and
offsite to new steelwork, and on site to existing steelwork.

PROTECTIVE COATING SYSTEMS

110 ON SITE COATING TO PRIMED STEEL-Where fire proof coating is required.


 Use/ location: Structural steel works where fire proofing is required as per detailed design or as
per recommendation of fire and life safety consultant or as per authority regulation.
 Fire resistance to BS 476-21: As per latest local authority regulation.
 Preparation and priming: By steelwork contractor, as section G10.
- Generally: Blast cleaning to BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade Sa 2½
- Welds/ edges/ areas with surface imperfections: To BS EN ISO 8501-3, preparation grade
P3.
 Primer: Epoxy Zinc Phosphate that compatible with the intumescent coating system.
- Dry film thickness: 75 micrometers
 Intumescent coat:
- Site intermediate coat: High performance, solvent based, high solids acrylic intumescent fire proof
coating system.
- Dry film thickness: DFT shall be confirmed by the manufacturer according to type of steel
structure, size and required fire ratings.
 Site top coat: Single component water borne acrylic based coating with excellent resistance to
surface flame spread and weathering and shall be compatible with the intumescent coating system.
Also the top coat shall be suitable for the exposure category of the structural steel works.
- Dry film thickness: DFT shall be confirmed by the manufacturer according to type of steel
structure, size and required fire ratings.
- Color: As per Employer’s Representative’s approval
 Bolt head/ nut protection: As per manufacturer’s recommendation.
 Special requirements: Details of proposed coating system shall be submitted along with the Tender.
Intumescent coating system shall have approval from authority having jurisdiction especially Dubai
Civil Defense. Life expectancy of the paint system shall be minimum 10 years. Coating system shall
comply with Green Building regulations.

160 OFF SITE COATING TO PRIMED STEEL-Where fire proof coating is required.
 Use/ location: Structural steel works where fire proofing is required as per detailed design or as
recommended by fire and life safety consultant or as per authority regulation.
 Fire resistance to BS 476-21: As per latest local authority regulation.
 Preparation and priming: By steelwork contractor, as section G10.
- Generally: Blast cleaning to BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade Sa 2½
- Welds/ edges/ areas with surface imperfections: To BS EN ISO 8501-3, preparation grade P3.
 Primer: Epoxy Zinc Phosphate that compatible with the intumescent coating system.
- Dry film thickness: 75 micrometers
 Intumescent coat:
- Shop intermediate coat: High performance, solvent based, high solids acrylic intumescent
fireproof coating system.
- Dry film thickness: DFT shall be confirmed by the manufacturer according to type of steel
structure, size and required fire ratings.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 312 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Shop top coat: Single component water borne acrylic based coating with excellent resistance to
surface flame spread and weathering and shall be compatible with the intumescent coating system.
Also the top coat shall be suitable for the exposure category of the structural steel works.
- Dry film thickness: DFT shall be confirmed by the manufacturer according to type of steel
structure, size and required fire ratings.
- Color: As per Employer’s Representative’s approval
 Bolt head/ nut protection: As per manufacturer’s recommendation.
 Special requirements: Details of proposed coating system shall be submitted along with the Tender.
Intumescent coating system shall have approval from authority having jurisdiction especially
Dubai civil Defense. Life expectancy of the paint system shall be minimum 10 years. Coating
system shall comply with Green Building regulations.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

205 VALIDATION OF MATERIALS


 Project specific evaluation of intumescent coating materials:
- Standard: To BS 8202-2, clause 4 and local regulation.
- Test results: Submit on request.

210 WORKING PROCEDURES


 Standard: To BS 8202-2.
 Give notice: Before commencing surface preparation and coating application.
 Quality control: Record project specific procedures for surface preparation and coating
application.

215 WORKING CONDITIONS


 General: Maintain suitable temperature, humidity and air quality during coating application and
drying.
 Surfaces to be coated: Clean and dry at time of coating application.

220 APPLICATOR'S PERSONNEL


 Operatives: Trained/ experienced in anticorrosive and intumescent coatings.
 Evidence of training/ experience: Submit on request.

250 SPRAYED COATING APPLICATION


 Spray drift: Minimize.
 Masking: Protect designated adjacent surfaces.
- Designated surfaces: As per approved structural steel shop drawings.

260 CONTROL SAMPLES


 General: Carry out sample areas of finished work as follows:
At least one structural steel column and rafter.
 Approval of appearance: Obtain before commencement of general coating application.

270 INSPECTION
 Permit intumescent coating manufacturer to:
- Inspect work in progress.
- Inspect quality control records.
- Take dry film thickness and other measurements.
- Take samples of coating products.
 Intumescent coating manufacturer's inspection reports: Submit within 48 hours after their
inspection.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 313 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

280 OFF SITE COATED STEEL


 Handling and erection: Use methods and devices designed to minimise damage to intumescent
coatings.

PREPARATION OF SURFACES

315 NEW STEEL - BLAST CLEANING


 Preparation: Remove oil and grease.
 Blast cleaning:
- Atmospheric condition: Dry.
- Abrasive: Suitable type and size, free from fines, moisture and oil.
- Finish: To BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade SA2½, with an average profile
of approximately 75 micrometres.
- Abrasive residues and moisture: Remove.
 Primer: Apply as soon as possible after cleaning and before gingering or blackening appears.

320 EXISTING STEEL - BLAST CLEANING


 Preparation: Remove oil and grease.
 Blast cleaning: Remove existing coatings.
- Atmospheric condition: Dry.
- Abrasive: Suitable type and size, free from fines, moisture and oil.
- Finish: To BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade SA2½, with an average profile
of approximately 75 micrometres.
- Abrasive residues and moisture: Remove.
 Primer: Apply as soon as possible after cleaning and before gingering or blackening appears.

330 EXISTING STEEL - MANUAL CLEANING


 Preparation: Remove oil and grease.
 Finish: To BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade St2. Leave a clean but unpolished dry surface.
 Primer: Apply as soon as possible after cleaning and before gingering or blackening appears.

340 EXISTING STEEL - OVERCOATING


 Preparation: Remove oil and grease.
 Loose or unsound coatings: Remove to a firm edge.
 Exposed steel finish: Manually clean to BS EN ISO 8501-1, grade St2. Leave a clean but
unpolished dry surface.
 Existing coatings finish: Abrade to give a good key. Leave a clean, dry surface.
 Primer: Apply one brush coat to bare steel areas. Remove coating edges that lift as result of
priming, and re-prime.

APPLICATION OF COATINGS

410 INTUMESCENT DRY FILM THICKNESS (DFT)


 Required DFT: Determine for every steel member to give specified period of fire resistance in
accordance with current authority regulation. Use intumescent coating manufacturer's current
published loading tables.
- Special sections and partial fire exposure conditions: Obtain required DFT in writing from
manufacturer.
 Schedule and drawings: Submit at least two weeks before starting work.
- Schedule content: Member sizes, weights/thicknesses, loading conditions, etc showing, for
each variant, the exposed perimeter/ sectional area (Hp/A) ratio and required DFT.
- Drawing content: Steelwork drawings marked in colour to show required DFT for each
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 314 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

member.

420 MEASUREMENT OF INTUMESCENT DFT


 Primer DFT: Determine average DFT (for deduction from total DFT after application of
intumescent).
 Intumescent DFT: Determine at:
- 500 mm centres along each coated plane of universal sections (8 planes), and rectangular
hollow sections (4 planes).
- 125 mm centres along coated circular hollow sections, spread evenly around
circumference.
 Acceptance standard:
- Average intumescent DFT: Not less than required DFT (exclusive of primer and top sealer).
- Local intumescent DFT: Not less than 80% of required DFT. Areas greater than 100 mm
equivalent diameter with a DFT of less than 80% of required DFT must be brought up to
thickness.

440 BASIC FINISH


 Definition: Reasonably smooth and even. Orange peel, other texture, minor runs and similar
minor defects are acceptable.

450 NORMAL DECORATIVE FINISH


 Definition: Good standard of cosmetic finish generally, when viewed from a distance of 5 m or
more. Minor orange peel or other texture is acceptable.

460 HIGH DECORATIVE FINISH


 Definition: High standard of evenness, smoothness and gloss when viewed from a minimum
distance of 2 m.

490 TOP SEALER COAT


 Application: To achieve DFT recommended by manufacturer and to give an even, solid, opaque
appearance, free from runs, sags and other visual defects.

520 COMPLETION OF OFF SITE COATED STEEL


 Exposed unprotected areas, including fixings: Following erection of steelwork, apply
intumescent coating locally.
 Unscheduled additional connections to erected steelwork: Remove and reinstate intumescent
coating locally.

530 RECORDS OF COATED STEEL


 On completion of intumescent coating work, submit:
- Accurate surface preparation and coating application records.
- Fire resistance certificates.
- Intumescent coating manufacturer's recommendations for maintenance and over-coating.

****END OF SECTION M61****

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 315 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION N10
GENERAL FIXTURES/ FURNISHINGS/ EQUIPMENT

Page 316 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

N10 GENERAL FIXTURES/ FURNISHINGS/ EQUIPMENT

To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions. This section deals with furnishings, fittings and
equipment, fixed to the building fabric or provided loose within the building, and general in the sense that
they may be found in a wide variety of buildings. Also includes fixed vanity furniture, external covered
car parking shades, entrance matting, refuse trolleys etc.

PRODUCTS

145 VANITY/ WASHROOM FURNITURE

- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.


 Material: 18mm thick PVC wrapped moisture resistant MDF boards.
 Dimensions: As indicated on the concept drawings or as per approved shop drawing.
 Supports:
- Material: Red Meranti supporting frame or as recommended by the manufacturer to the
Employer’s Representative's approval.
- Finish/ Colour: Painted with 2 coats alkyd based flat primer/undercoat.
- Edge: Straight or as recommended by the manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
 Doors/ Drawers/ Shelves:
- Material: 18mm thick PVC wrapped moisture resistant MDF boards.
- Finish/ Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
- Edge: Shaped to the Employer’s Representative's approval.
 Worktops:
- Material: 30mm thick good quality granite.
- Finish/ Colour: As approved by Employer’s Representative.
- Edge: As per approved shop drawings.
- Splash back: 20mm thick, 100mm high marble to match work top.
 Skirting: Skirting for bottom cabinets must be PVC or Aluminium ( MDF or wooden panel not
accepted)

151 FITTED KITCHEN UNITS (Not used)

 Standard: To BS 6222.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Shutters: Aluminium profile frame with 5.5mm HPL sheet.
 Carcasses: Aluminium profile frame with 3.5mm HPL sheet
 Doors/ Drawer fronts:
- Drawer unit as per drawing with 5.5mm HPL and knobs and handles.
 Side panels/ Shelves:
- 5.5mm HPL sheet.
 Plinths:
- Type: Removable for under unit inspection/ cleaning.
- Material: PVC.
- Finish/ Color: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
- Height: As per design.
 Top fascia:
- Material: Same as carcasses and shutter specified above.
- Finish/ Color: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.
- Edge: Shaped to the Employer’s Representative's approval.
- Height: As per design.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 317 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Worktops:
- Material: 30mm thick polished good quality granite unless otherwise selected by the
Employer’s Representative
- Edge: 10mm fillet unless otherwise indicated on the approved shop drawings.
- Splash back: 20mm thick, 100mm high granite to match worktop.
 Accessories:
- Handles: Grade 316 satin stainless steel long handles to the Employer’s Representative's
approval
- Legs: 150mm high, water resistant adjustable reinforced PVC
- Door Hinges: 165/180 degree concealed type, self-closing, zinc die-cast nickel plated to suit the
opening directions indicated on the contract drawings and to prevent hitting the adjacent doors.
 Sink units: As section N13.
 Mixer: As section N13.
 Other requirements:
- The contractor to submit shop drawings showing the cabinet doors in both the open and
closed positions to ensure that doors are not hitting each other.
- Provide drawers with powder coated metal guides and PVC runners, all to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
- Provide a built-in refuse bin for every kitchen unit.
- Where the provision of built-in appliances is required, the size of cabinets shall be coordinated to
suit the selected appliances
- Where the provision of built-in appliances is required, the contractor shall provide polyester
powder coated aluminium ventilation grilles as recommended by the manufacturer.

160 EXTERNAL COVERED CAR PARKING

 Manufacturer: Submit proposal for approval.


- Product reference: Structural steel and covered with shade cloth.
 Structural steel: Refer section G10.
 Structural steel coating system: 3 coat epoxy based system but the top coat shall be suitable for
external exposed application and with 10 years warranty starting from date of Taking over of the
Works.
 Shade cloth: Knitted UV stabilized HDPE with UV stabilized clear PE coating. Commercial 95 WP or
approved equivalent. High UV block and excellent light transmission with reliable waterproof coating.
Mass 435gsm and UV block up to 97%.
 Color of shade cloth: Light color as approved by the Employer. SRI index shall comply with Green
Building regulation.
 Solar panel on roof: The design of car park shall take into consideration of future solar panels. All
required provision shall be provided and the substructure and superstructure shall be designed to
take the loads of roof mounted solar panel. A load of 25Kg/m 2 can be considered for solar panel
plus supports. All required MEP provisions for the solar panel also shall be provided.
 Substructure: Reinforced concrete with galvanized anchor bolts.
 Accessories:
- Anchor bolts: Galvanized
- Other bolts: SS steel non-corrodible grade
- Provide all accessories as per the approved detailed design drawings.
 Sink units: As section N13.
 Other requirements:
- Design drawing and calculation shall be submitted for approval.
- Shop drawing shall be submitted for approval.
- Material samples shall be submitted for approval.
- Shall comply with Green Building regulation.
- Shall comply with all Authority regulation.
- Requirements for people of determination shall be complied with.
- Shade fabric shall be warrantied for 10 years from the date of Taking over of the Works.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 318 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

300 ENTRANCE MATTING

 Manufacturer: Refer approved / equivalent.


- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's
standard range.
 Color: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range.
 Size: As per design and complying with Green Building regulation.

EXECUTION

710 MOISTURE CONTENT


 Temperature and humidity: During delivery, storage, fixing and to handover maintain conditions to suit
specified moisture contents of timber components.
 Testing: When instructed, test components with approved moisture meter to manufacturer's
recommendations.

720 INSTALLATION GENERALLY


 Fixing and fasteners: As section Z20.

740 TAPS
 Fixing: Secure, watertight seal with the appliance.
 Positioning: Hot tap to left of cold tap as viewed by user of appliance.

750 WASTES/ OVERFLOWS


 Bedding: Waterproof jointing compound.
 Fixing: With resilient washer between appliance and backnut.

760 SEALANT POINTING


 Material: Silicone based to BS 5889, Type B with fungicide.
 Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's
standard range and in compliance with Green Building regulation.
 Application: As section Z22.

770 TRIMS
 Lengths: Wherever possible, unjointed between angles or ends of runs.
 Running joints: Where unavoidable, obtain approval of location and method of jointing.
 Angle joints: Mitred.

780 COMPLETION
 Doors and drawers: Accurately aligned, not binding. Adjusted to ensure smooth operation.
 Ironmongery: Checked, adjusted and lubricated to ensure correct functioning.
REFUSE DISPOSAL SYSTEM

805 THE SPECIALIST CONTRACTOR


The refuse disposal system shall be designed, supplied, installed, commissioned and maintained by a
nominated specialist contractor who has a minimum of 5 years experience in the design, manufacture
and installation of such equipment.

810 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


 The specialist contractor shall be responsible to deliver a complete functional system and shall
include for all necessary items whether explicitly mentioned or not. The specialist contractor shall also
be responsible for correct setting out of the work.
 In general, all materials and components, whenever possible, shall be the product of one

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 319 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

manufacturer.
 Under no circumstances, shall the chute be used for construction waste.
 Opening through floors for garbage shuts shall be separately enclosed by fire barrier walls.
 All regulations/guide lines of Dubai civil defense shall be complied with.

815 WORKS TO BE COORDINATED BY THE SPECIALIST CONTRACTOR AND CARRIED OUT


MAIN CONTRACTOR
 All embeds to be cast in concrete or fixed into masonry walls are to be provided by the specialist
contractor and installed by the main contractor.
 After installation of the chute by the specialist contractor, the main contractor shall be responsible for
filling the voids between the chute and slab edges with concrete.
 Water lines with non-return valves at each connection point are to be provided by the main
contractor for cleaning and fire fighting systems. All the subsequent pipe work shall be provided by the
specialist contractor.
 The building services contractor shall provide a suitable isolator in the main refuse room. All the
subsequent wiring work shall be provided by the specialist contractor.

840 REFUSE TROLLEYS


- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: Top loaded unless otherwise required as per approved detailed design.
 Material: Hot dipped galvanised steel.
 Capacity: As per approved detailed design.
 Number: As per approved detailed design in compliance with Employer’s requirement and
Authority regulation.
 Other requirements:
- The refuse trolleys shall be provided with suitable heavy duty wheels and foot pedal brakes.
- The refuse trolleys shall be compatible with the selected compactor (if applicable).
- The refuse trolleys shall be compatible with the municipality refuse collection vehicles.

***End of Section N10***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 320 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION N13
SANITARY APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS

Tend er | V olu me 2 – S peci ficat ions


Page 321 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

N13 SANITARY APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS

To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions. This section deals with:-


 Sanitary appliances, e.g. WCs, wash basins, urinals, shower unit, cleaner sink and accessories.
 Waste fittings and traps.
 Proprietary pre-plumbed panel systems.
 Sanitary fittings and accessories, e.g. soap dispensers, hand driers, paper holder, robe hooks
etc.
 Small scale macerator and pumping units (for a single WC and/ or a small number of sanitary
appliances).

22 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

 The contractor shall examine all other sections of the specifications for requirements which
affect or are affected by this section.
 The contractor shall coordinate all trades affected or affecting this section to assure steady
progress of all work. All necessary power connection required for proximity sensors shall be
provided by the Contractor based on the actual location.
 Sanitary wares and fittings shall comply with Green Building requirements.
 Mirrors shall be as specified in section L40.
 All products shall be delivered to the job site in original factory shipping containers clearly
marked with the manufacturer's name and model number.
 All products shall be new, prime quality, free from defects and with structural properties to
sustain safety or withstand strains and stresses to which they are normally subjected.
 Plumbing fixtures and trim specified hereinafter shall be provided free of flaws and defects of any
sort in material and workmanship, and shall operate perfectly when installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's directions. The manufacturer shall agree to replace all or any part of the fixtures
which show flaw or defect due to faulty manufacture.
 In the event of damage, the Contractor shall immediately make all necessary replacements to the
approval of the Employer’s Representative.
 Furnish complete schedules with brochures and technical data of all items. No partial
submission of brochures will be accepted. The brochures shall be bound in loose leaf, hard cover
booklets with an index page at the front. Each item shall have a preceding page givingthe correct
item symbol, model, accessory numbers and service connection requirements.
 Following the Employer’s Representative's approval of schedules, the Contractor shall submit
complete shop drawings indicating the exact location of each item. No installation shall take
place prior to the approval of the shop drawings.
 At completion, provide the following:
- Maintenance data for all items.
- Any special tools required for accessing, assembly, disassembly or removal of appliances,
fittings or Accessories.

32 SPARES

 General: At completion

PRODUCTS

300 WCS AND CISTERNS GENERALLY

 WC standard: To DEFRA WC suite performance specification or approved by relevant local


Authority and comply with green building requirements.
 Type: Floor or wall mounted with close coupled cistern as approved by Employer’s
Representative.
 Pan:
- Standards: To BS EN 33 and BS EN 997.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 322 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.


- Material: Vitreous china.
 Seat and cover:
- Standard: To BS 1254.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Material: Moulded plastic, color to match pan.
 Pan connector:
- Standard: To BS 5627.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Colour: To match pan.
 Cistern:
- Standard: Submit.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Material: Vitreous china.
- Colour and finish (exposed cisterns): To match pan.
 Flushing arrangement: Dual flush, plastics diaphragm type float operated valve and siphon, to
BS 1212-3 and float to BS 2456.
- Product reference: As per green building requirement or MEP detail.
- Operating control: Push button, chrome plated.
- Water supply connection: Bottom.
- Flush volume: 6 liters for full flush and 3 liters for part flush.
 Flush pipe: Not required.
- Product reference: If applicable.
- Material: If applicable.
 Accessories: Cistern support brackets.

302 WCS AND FLUSHING VALVES GENERALLY

 WC standard: To DEFRA WC suite performance specification or approved by relevant local


Authority and complying with green building requirements.
 Type: Floor or wall mounted as approved by the Employer’s Representative.
 Pan:
- Standards: To BS EN 37 and BS EN 997.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Material: Vitreous china.
 Seat and cover:
- Standard: To BS 1254.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Material: Moulded Plastic, colour to match pan.
 Pan connector:
- Standard: To BS 5627.
- Product reference: To Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Colour: To match pan.
 Flushing valve: Dual flush, concealed.
- Product reference: As per green building requirement or MEP detail.
- Operating control: Push button.
- Finish: Chrome plated.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 323 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Flush volume: 6 liters for full flush and 3 liters for part flush.
 Flush pipe: Included with the flushing valve.
 Accessories: Concealed powder coated steel support frame.

315 URINALS AND AUTO FLUSHING CISTERNS GENERALLY

 Urinals:
- Standard: To BS 5520.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Material: Vitreous china.
 Wastes: Grated, flush.
- Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Size: DN 40.
- Material: Brass, chrome plated.
- Tail: Unslotted.
 Traps: Bottle.
- Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Size: DN 40.
- Material: Brass, chrome plated.
- Depth of seal (minimum): 75 mm.
 Cistern, complete with automatic siphon, lid, supports and fixings: Concealed.
- Standard: To BS 1876.
- Product reference: As per green building requirement or MEP detail.
- Material: Stainless steel, satin.
- Flush volume: 2 liter per flush or water less
- Operating control: Proximity sensor.
- Flush pipe: Concealed.
- Material: Stainless steel.
 Accessories:
- Back inlet spreader.
- Concealed steel hangers.
- Proprietary vitreous china urinal dividers
- Surface-mounted urinal sensor with solenoid, servicing valve and float switch.

331 SINKS TO PANTRIES

 Standard: To BS EN 13310.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Size: As per approved shop drawing.
 Material: Stainless steel gauge 18, satin.
 Tap/ Chainstay/ Overflow holes: Tap hole, chainstay hole, overflow hole.
 Taps: Pillar type single lever mixer suitable for kitchen sink application in compliance with
green building regulation. Maximum flow rate shall not exceed 6 liters per minute.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Wastes: Plug waste(s) with rubber plug(s) and ball chain(s).
- Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Size: DN 40.
- Material: Brass, chrome plated.
- Tail: Slotted.
 Traps: Bottle.
- Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Size: DN 40.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 324 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Material: Plastic.
- Depth of seal (minimum): 75 mm.
 Accessories: Galvanised steel supporting brackets or as proposed by the contractor to the
Employer’s Representative's approval.

332 CLEANERS SINKS

 Type: Vitreous china with metal pedestals.


 Taps: Bib Tap (fixing height as recommended by the sink manufacturer for proper operation in
compliance with green building regulation)
 Waste: Plug waste with rubber plug and ball chain.
 Trap: Plastic bottle trap.
 Other accessories: Chrome plated grating.
 Sealing: As clause 755.

335 WASH BASINS GENERALLY

- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.


 Size: To the Employer’s Representative's selection (wash basin type to be under-counter)
 Material: Vitreous china.
 Tap/ Chain stay/ Overflow holes: Tap hole, centre, no chain stay hole, overflow hole.
 Water supply fittings: single lever SS mixer taps with flow rate not exceeding 6 liters per
minute.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Operation: Manual/Proximity sensor as per drawing/schedule.
 Wastes: submit proposal.
- Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Size: DN 40.
- Material: Brass, chrome plated.
- Tail: Unslotted.
 Traps: Bottle.
- Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Size: DN 40.
- Material: Plastic in concealed locations and chrome plated brass in exposed locations.
- Depth of seal (minimum): 75 mm.
 Accessories: All accessories necessary for the successful functioning of wash basins.

375 SHOWER UNITS GENERALLY

 Tray: Cast acrylic/tile drop as per concept.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 325 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.


- Size: As per approved shop drawings.
- Material: Cast acrylic/ceramic tile.
 Shower fittings: Concealed wall mounted type single lever shower mixer complete with overhead
shower and bath spout. Maximum flow rate for shower head shall not exceed 8 liters per minute.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Finish: Chrome plated.
- Operating control: Lever.
 Wastes: Grated.
- Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Size: DN 40.
- Material: Brass, chrome plated.
- Tail: Unslotted.
 Traps: Tubular, P type.
- Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Size: DN 40.
- Material: Plastics.
- Depth of seal (minimum): 50 mm.
 Enclosure: Proprietary type HPL shower cubicles with non-corrodible accessories and supports.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Accessories: Not required.

429 CLOTHES HOOKS GENERALLY

- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's


standard range.
 Material: Grade 316 stainless steel unless otherwise selected. Provide concealed mounting
 Finish: Polished/ satin unless otherwise selected.

436 HANDRAILS AND GRAB BARS GENERALLY

- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's


standard range.
 Material: Grade 316 stainless steel, 1.3mm thick unless otherwise selected.
 Finish: Polished/ satin No.4 unless selected otherwise.
 Outer diameter: 38mm
 Configuration and length: Straight, 914mm long.

442 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS

- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's


standard range.
 Material: Grade 316 stainless steel unless selected otherwise.
 Finish: Satin No.4, unless selected otherwise.

456 SOAP DISHES GENERALLY


 Manufacturer:
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's
standard range.
 Material: Vitreous china unless selected otherwise.
 Finish: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range.

458 LIQUID SOAP DISPENSERS GENERALLY


Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 326 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Manufacturer:
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's
standard range.
- Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form.
- Mounting: Deck mounted on vanity, spout to extend over lavatory
- Capacity: 430 Cm3 approximately
- Lockset: Tumbler Type
- Refill Indicator: Window type
 Material: Stain less steel.
 Finish: Polished unless selected otherwise.

462 TOILET PAPER HOLDERS GENERALLY

 Manufacturer:
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's
standard range.
 Material/ finish: Vitreous china unless selected otherwise.
 Finish: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range.

466 TOWEL RAILS GENERALLY

 Manufacturer:
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's
standard range.
 Material: Chrome plated brass unless selected otherwise.
 Finish: Polished unless selected otherwise.

468 TOWEL RINGS GENERALLY

 Manufacturer:
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's
standard range.
 Material: Chrome plated brass unless otherwise selected.
 Finish: Polished unless otherwise selected.

471 HAND SPRAYS

 Type: Chrome hand shower with trigger control.


 Manufacturer:.
 Product reference: In compliance with green building regulation.
 Other accessories:
- Double interlock brass hose.
- Chrome plated wall shower holder.
- Angle valve ½”

472 WARM AIR HAND DRIERS GENERALLY

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 327 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Manufacturer: A&J washroom accessories, Bobrick Washroom equipment, Bradley


Corporation, Excel Dryer Corporation or approved equivalent.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's
standard range.
 Operation: Electronic sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch. Operation time 30 to 40
seconds.
 Cover Material and Finish: SS, No.4 finish(Satin)
 Electrical Requirements: 208-240V, 9-10 A, 1900-2300 W or as per manufacturer’s instruction.
 Mounting: Recessed

580 SEALANT FOR POINTING

 Standard: To BS EN ISO 11600.


- Class: F20 HM.
 Type: Silicone based, with fungicide.
- Manufacturer:
- Product reference: In compliance with green building regulation.
 Color: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range.

EXECUTION

610 INSTALLATION GENERALLY

 Assembly and fixing: Surfaces designed to falls to drain as intended.


 Fasteners: Nonferrous or stainless steel.
 Supply and discharge pipework: Fix before appliances.
 Fixing: Fix appliances securely to structure. Do not support on pipework.
 Jointing and bedding compounds: Recommended by manufacturers of appliances, accessories
and pipes being jointed or bedded.
 Appliances: Do not use. Do not stand on appliances.
 On completion: Components and accessories working correctly with no leaks.
 Labels and stickers: Remove.

613 COMPATIBILITY OF COMPONENTS

 General: Each sanitary assembly must consist of functionally compatible components obtained
from a single manufacturer.
- Exceptions: Water supply fittings, wastes and traps.

620 NOGGINGS AND BEARERS

 Noggings, bearers, etc. to support sanitary appliances and fittings: Position accurately. Fix
securely.

625 FRAMING FOR PREPLUMBED PANEL SYSTEM

 General: Position accurately. Fix securely.

630 TILED BACKGROUNDS OTHER THAN SPLASHBACKS

 Timing: Complete before fixing appliances.


 Fixing appliances: Do not overstress tiles.

650 INSTALLING WC PANS

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 328 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Floor mounted pans: Screw fix and fit cover caps over screw heads. Do not use mortar or other
beddings.
 Seat and cover: Stable when raised.

660 INSTALLING SLAB URINALS

 Waterproofing of walls and floor (specified elsewhere): Completed before fixing urinal
components.
 Gap between components: 3 mm.
 Space behind channels and slabs: Grout with 1:5 cement: sand grout.
 Pointing: Rake out joints to 10 mm depth. Point flush with waterproof jointing compound
recommended by urinal manufacturer.

670 INSTALLING CISTERNS

 Cistern operating components: Obtain from cistern manufacturer.


- Float operated valve: Matched to pressure of water supply.
 Overflow pipe: Fixed to falls and located to give visible warning of discharge.
- Location: Agreed, where not shown on drawings.

710 INSTALLING TAPS

 Fixing: Secure against twisting.


 Seal with appliance: Watertight.
 Positioning: Hot tap to left of cold tap as viewed by user of appliance.

720 INSTALLING WASTES AND OVERFLOWS

 Bedding: Waterproof jointing compound.


 Fixing: With resilient washer between appliance and back nut.

755 SEALANT BEDDING AND POINTING

 Bedding: As required for each appliance.


 Pointing: Joints between appliances and splash backs, walls and floors.

***END OF SECTION N13***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 329 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION N14
GENERAL SIGNAGE SYSTEM

Page 330 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

N14 GENERAL SIGNAGE SYSTEMS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

SCOPE OF SECTION

This section deals with general signage and external signage systems.

GENERAL

140 ROAD SIGNAGE SYSTEM for Access, parking, Yards and other external areas.
• Standard: To BS EN 12899-1
- Piercing of signs: Follow RTA standard
- Sign edges: Follow RTA standard
- Surface protection: Follow RTA standard
• System manufacturer: Shall be an RTA approved manufacturer subject to
Employer’s Representative’s approval.
- Product reference: As per drawing and Employer’s Representative’s approval.
• Layout and dimensions: As per detailed design and complying with RTA regulation and
DDA guide lines.
• Lettering:
- Language: Arabic and English.
- Font: As per RTA standard or DDA guidelines.
- Colour: As per RTA standard or DDA guidelines.
- Size: As per RTA standard or DDA guidelines.
• Symbols and graphics: As per RTA standard.
- Colour: As per RTA standard
- Size: As per drawing and RTA standard.
• Background colour: As per RTA standard.
• Sign type: As per detailed design and RTA standard.
- Manufacturing process: Sign panels shall be panels of one piece construction made
fromsheet aluminium and which have the face side reflectorized.
• Supports/ Fixings: Post mounted or wall mounted as per detailed design.
• Accessories: Lag screws, washers, clip angles, shear plates, U bolts, clamps, bolts,
nuts a
nd other fasteners shall be SS grade 316 or aluminum alloy non corrodible. Also
shall be
compatible both galvanically and physically to the sign material.

145 TOTEM SIGN AT ENTRANCE/EXIT.


• Standard: As per DDA regulation
• Reference: Refer to the image and drawing attached to Volume V of Tender documents.
• Layout and dimensions: Refer to the image and drawing attached to Volume V of
Tenderdocuments.
• Lettering:
- Language: Arabic and English.
- Font: As per DDA guidelines.
- Colour: As per DDA guidelines.
- Size: As per DDA guidelines.
• Symbols and graphics:
- Colour: As per DS guidelines
- Size: As per DS guidelines.
• Background colour: As per DS guide lines.
• Supports/ Fixings: Post mounted as per the drawing.
• Accessories:
- Lag screws, washers, clip angles, shear plates, U bolts, clamps, bolts, nuts and other
fasteners shall be SS grade 316 or aluminum alloy non-corrodible.
- All necessary MEP connection shall be provided( Totem sign shall be illuminated)
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 331 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

150 INTERNAL SIGNAGE.


• Standard: As per DDA guide lines.
• Reference: Refer to the image and drawing attached to Volume V of Tender documents.
• Layout and dimensions: Refer to the image and drawing attached to Volume V of
Tenderdocuments.
• Lettering:
- Language: Arabic and English.
- Font: As per DDA guidelines.
- Colour: As per DDA guidelines.
- Size: As per DDA guidelines.
• Symbols and graphics:
- Colour: As per DS guidelines
- Size: As per DS guidelines.
• Background colour: As per DS guide lines.
• Supports/ Fixings: As per approved shop drawings.
• Accessories:
- Screws, washers and other fasteners shall be SS grade 316.
- All necessary MEP provision shall be provided for backlit signs.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


• Signage system: Complete to BS 559, including facing information, components,
inserts, accessories and fixings necessary to complete the system.
- Comply with the requirements of: Dubai Road and Transport Authority and DDA.
• Geometric shapes, colours and layout: In accordance with BS 8501.
• Design standard for disabled people: In accordance with BS 8300.
• Proposals: Submit drawings, schedules, technical information, calculations a
ndmanufacturer's literature.

220 ROAD SIGNAGE REQUIREMENTS

• Signage system: Complete in accordance with relevant parts of BS 12899-1,the Dubai


Road and Transport Authority regulations and DDA guidelines.
• Product testing standard: To BS 8442.
• Proposals: Submit drawings, schedules, technical information, calculations and
manufacturer's literature.
 Permanent traffic signs, direction signs and place identification signs shall be located where
directed by the Employer’s Representative and shall conform to Dubai south, DM, Dubai
Police and RTA standards.
 All stiffners, whether plates or extrusions, shall be of similar material to the sign plate and
shall be bonded to the sign plate by either rivets or a manufacturer supplied adhesive film.
 All exposed surfaces shall be painted the same color as the area surrounding the part
exposed.
 Embedded portion of the pipe shall be wrapped with denso tape with 100% overlap.

230 STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE


• Wind loads:
- Standard: Refer to structural drawing for the wind speed.

240 FIRE REACTION


• Non flammable surface:
- Standard: Follow DCD and RTA regulation.

280 DESIGN LIFE


Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 332 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

• Duration: As per RTA standard and DDA conditions of Contract.


- Subject to reasonable wear and tear.
• Environment: Shall be suitable for Dubai Climatic conditions.
• Condition of use: Subject to regular maintenance.

290 SIGNAGE SAMPLES


• Sign type: All signs required for the project.
- Action: Submit labelled samples.
- Conformity: Retain samples on site for the duration of the contract or until instructed
to remove.
- Delivered product: To conform to labelled samples.

295 SIGNAGE SAMPLES BOARD


• Samples board: Submit.
- Content: Selected labelled signs, showing methods of fixing.
- Conformity: Retain samples on site for the duration of the contract or until instructed
to remove.
- Delivered product: To conform to labelled samples.

PRODUCTS

305 PRODUCTS GENERALLY


• Standard: To BS 559 and RTA regulations.

310 ADHESIVE VINYL FILM


• Manufacturer: As approved by RTA and Employer’s Representative.
- Product reference: High intensity film 3M engineering grade.
• Component thickness: 3M engineering grade.
• Finish: As drawing/RTA standard.

320 ALUMINIUM SHEET


• Manufacturer: As approved by RTA and Employer’s Representative.
- Product reference: Conform to ASTM B209, alloy 6061-T6.
• Component thickness: 3mm
• Finish: Reverse side of signs shall be polyester powder coated in grey color.
• Perimeters: To be protected as per RTA standard.
 Other requirements: The manufacturer’s name and date of manufacture shall be
stampedonto the rear face of the sign.

420 POSTS FOR ROAD SIGNS


• Standard: To BS 873-7.
• Manufacturer: As approved by RTA and Employer’s Representative
- Product reference: To Employer’s Representative’s selection.
• Material: Aluminium or steel as per RTA standard. Aluminium shall conform to ASTM
B221, alloy 6061-T6. Steel post shall conform to ASTM A499 and galvanized to ASTM
A123.
• Size: 75mm OD for steel or as per RTA standard.
• Finish: Polyester powder coated.
• Colour: Grey.
• Base: With 300x300x10mm base plate welded. 1000mm embedded below pavement
levelafter wrapping with denso tape.

EXECUTION

610 FIXING SIGNS GENERALLY


• Installation: To BS 559.
- Secure, plumb and level.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 333 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

• Strength of fasteners: Sufficient to support all live and dead loads.


• Fasteners and or adhesives: As section Z20.
• Fixings showing on surface of sign: Must not detract from the message being displayed.

620 FIXING SIGNS FOR THE VISUALLY IMPAIRED


• Protection of users:
- Fasteners for tactile/ Braille signs must not have sharp edges or protrusions
that would cause confusion or injury to users.

630 FIXING ROAD SIGNS


• Protrusion of post top above sign: Not permitted unless supporting a luminaire.
• Drilling of components:
- Ferrous components: Drilled before the application of any finish.
- Plastics sheeting: Apply clear lacquer recommended by plastics sheet manufacturer to
edges of holes to prevent ingress of moisture damaging the lamination.
• Erection: In accordance with the DFT 'Traffic signs manual,' Chapter 1 and RTA standard.
• Fixing: Austenitic stainless steel fasteners recommended for the purpose by the
signManufacturer.

640 FOUNDATIONS FOR EXTERNAL POSTS


• Type: As per detailed design.
• Size: As per detailed design.
• Concrete: To BS 8500-2.
- Designated type: C30
- Admixtures: Submit proposals.
- Prohibited: Calcium chloride and admixtures containing calcium chloride.
• Consistence class: Contractor's choice.
• Other requirements: Follow RTA standard.

650 SETTING EXTERNAL POSTS INTO EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURES


• Pockets in structure:
- Condition: Clean and free of water immediately before filling.
• Concrete fill: To BS 8500-2.
- Designated mix: Not less than GEN 4. Admixtures prohibited.
- Depth beneath post: As per detailed design.
- Top surface: Flush with structure.

660 EXPOSED CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS TO POSTS


• Finish: Compact until air bubbles cease to appear on the upper surface, then weather to
shedwater and trowel smooth.

670 ELECTRICAL AND DATA SERVICES


• Services connection required: As per detailed design.
• Standard: To BS 7671.
• Coordinate with services trades.

COMPLETION
910 DOCUMENTATION
• Submit:
- Manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
- Guarantees, warranties, test certificates, record schedules and log books.
920 SPARES
• Supply as follows:
- Type: As per Employer’s requirements.
- Quantity: As per Employer’s
requirements 930 SPECIALIST TOOLS
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 334 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

• Supply as follows: Nil

WARRANTY

990 WARRANTY

The signage system specified under clause 140, 145 and 150 shall have a warranty of five (05) years
starting from the date of Taking over of the Works.

****END OF SECTION N14 ****

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 335 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION P10
SUNDRY INSULATION/ PROOFING WORK

Page 336 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

P10 SUNDRY INSULATION/ PROOFING WORK

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with sundry insulation/
proofing work not covered in other sections, including:-
 Large cavity barriers formed from slabs, boards, mats or coated mesh.
 Thermal and acoustic insulation:
 Mineral wool, plastics bead and cellulose loose fill thermal insulation laid between, under or
over joists and rafters, etc.
 Polyurethane foam sprayed between rafters/ studs.
 Flexible fire protection to steelwork, usually in the form of a blanket.

TYPES OF INSULATION

257 RIGID BOARD INSULATION FOR ROOFS (optional item)


 Material: Cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed from polystyrene base resin by an
extrusion process using HCFCs as blowing agents, complying with BS EN 13164 (Density:
Minimum 35 Kg/m3).
 Thickness: Minimum 100 mm subject to HVAC requirements and green building regulations. U
value of roof shall not exceed 0.3W/m2 0 K. Thickness shall be increased if required to comply
with final design and authority regulation.
 Supports: To be loosely laid on the waterproofing membrane.
 Installation requirements:
 Joints: Closely butted, no gaps.
 Other requirements:
- Coordinate all trades affected or affecting this section to assure steady progress of all
work.
- The insulation boards shall be provided with tongue and groove edge treatment.
- The insulation material shall be compatible with the waterproofing membrane.
- Insulation material shall be manufactured without the use of CFC’s
- Insulation material shall be non toxic and not release toxic fumes during combustion
- Insulation material shall have 0.05 PPM or less of added formaldehyde.
- Insulation material shall have a threshold limit value (TLV) of 0.1 or less of individual
volatile organic compound (VOC).
- Insulation material shall be noncombustible, fire propagation and surface spread of flame
shall be within the limits in accordance with the requirements of DCD and BS 476.
- Insulation material shall have accreditation/certificate from DCLD.
- Insulation Material shall achieve all the requirements of the approved specification by DM.
- Ensure that the waterproofing system has been tested and certified prior to proceeding
with these works.

258 RIGID INSULATION FOR EXTERNAL CONCRETE SURFACE


 Material: A system that is acceptable to Authority having jurisdiction (AAC cut blocks, mineral
wool insulation boards or similar EIFS).
 Manufacturer: Submit for approval.
 Thickness: As per detailed design as required per site condition and authority requirement. U
value for external walls shall not exceed 0.35W/m2 0 K.
 Supports: Contractor shall submit shop drawing showing type of insulation, fixing method,
details of adhesive, details of mesh, details of mechanical fixing etc for approval.
 Installation requirements:
- Joints: Closely butted, no gaps.
- Adhesive: Purpose made dry pre mix, thin bed adhesive mortar specially formulated
(Conmix insubond, Cresit CT 85 from Henkel, Capatect 185 from Caparol or approved
equivalent)
- Metal sheet lath: Shall be provided over the entire insulation with at least 300mm
projection from the edge of insulation. Metal sheet lath shall be stainless steel to BS
EN10088 and weight 1.8 Kg/m2.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 337 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Other requirements:
- Coordinate all trades affected or affecting this section to assure steady progress of all
work.
- The insulation boards shall be provided with out any gap at the joints.
- The insulation material shall be compatible with the plaster/ concrete/stone cladding.
- Suitable fixing method, with non corrosive (stainless steel grade 316) accessories, shall be
followed and the system shall be guaranteed against surface cracking.
- Insulation material shall be manufactured without the use of CFC’s
- Insulation material shall be non toxic and not release toxic fumes during combustion
- Insulation material shall have 0.05 PPM or less of added formaldehyde.
- Insulation material shall have a threshold limit value (TLV) of 0.1 or less of individual
volatile organic compound (VOC).
- Insulation material shall be noncombustible, fire propagation and surface spread of flame
shall be within the limits in accordance with the requirements of DCD and BS 476.
- Insulation material shall have accreditation/certificate from DCLD.
- Insulation Material shall achieve all the requirements of the approved specification by DM.

330 GEOTEXTILE MEMBRANE FOR ROOFS


 Material: Non-woven fabric manufactured from polypropylene with thermally bonded
continuous filaments.
 Supports: To be loosely laid on the rigid board thermal insulation.
 Other requirements:
- The membrane shall have a weight of 200gr/m2.
- The membrane shall be laid with 300mm (min.) overlap at edges.

432 MINERAL WOOL SLAB CAVITY BARRIERS


 Cavity width: As per detailed design/required as per regulation.
 Fire resistance: Minimum 60 minutes subject to DCD regulation.
- Product reference: Mineral fibers of regular color, bonded with resin binders in the form of
rigid slabs and shall conform to the general requirements of BS3958: part 5.
- Density Min: 64 Kg/m3
- Facing material: Foil scrim or Class-1 fire retardant vinyl or polyethylene.
 Thickness: As per detailed design or required as per design or authority regulation.
 Installation requirements:
- Installed: Continuous, with minimum joints.
- Fasteners: As recommended by the manufacturer to the Employer's approval.
 Other requirements:
- Fire and smoke seals shall be installed in order to maintain an effective barrier against
flame, smoke and gases between different fire zones / compartments as per detailed design.
- The fire stopping material shall be installed with the fibres running parallel to the slab edge.
- The fire stopping material shall be compressed to 50% in the nominal joint width.
- The fire stopping material shall be asbestos-free.
- An integral smoke seal shall be provided on top of the fire seal. The smoke seal shall be
made of galvanised steel sheets with sealed joints or an approved acrylic fire stopping
sealant.
- Material shall fully comply with the regulations/guide lines of green building and DCD.

450 INSTALLATION

 Examination: Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other
conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 338 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

have been corrected.


 Preparation: Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations and vapor retarders,
including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with
insulation attachment.
 Installation, General:-
- Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
- Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposedat
any time to ice and snow.
- Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that
interfere with placement.
- Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls,
coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and
insulation encapsulates piping.
- Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

 Installation of perimeter and under-slab insulation


- On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
- If not indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 600 mm below exterior grade line.
- Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by
applying protection board. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written
instructions.
 Installation of general building insulation
- Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction where indicated on Drawings according to
curtain-wall manufacturer's written instructions.
- Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window
frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold
insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of
dimension indicated between insulation and glass.
- Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to prevent insulation
from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire-containment system

460 PROTECTION

 Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and
other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse
and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.

***End of Section P10***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 339 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION P12
FIRE STOPPING
SYSTEM

Page 340 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

P12 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEMS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

GENERAL

100 SUBMITTALS

 Product Data:
Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions and material safety data sheets for all
specified products.
 Shop drawings:
For each fire protection system required, provide drawings indicating the following:
- Design designation of testing agency.
- Documentation including illustration applicable to the construction configuration.
- Where project conditions require modifications to tested assemblies, manufacturer-
approved drawings of modified configuration.
 Samples:
Submit selection and verification samples for all materials to be used.
 Quality assurance/ control:
For each fire protection system, submit the following:
- Test reports from recognised and approved laboratories.
- Manufacturer's statements of compliance with the project specifications and contract
documents.
- Manufacturer's written approval of the installer.

101 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

 All fire stopping systems and assemblies shall be capable of stopping the passage of fire, smoke
and water through fire rated wall and floor penetrations, cladding and expansion joints for the
specific designed fire ratings required as per detailed design and Authority regulation.
 All fire stopping systems and assemblies shall exhibit the minimum designed fire resistant
properties when tested to UL standards. The contractor shall provide all necessary certification of
the above for the Employer’s Representative's approval.
 For the applications where no UL tested systems are available, an engineering judgement issued
from the manufacturer's Head Quarter (normally at the country of origin), signed by an
"International Firestop Council_ degreed fire protection Employer’s Representative and derived
from similar UL system designs shall be submitted to the authority having jurisdiction for
approval prior to installation.
 All fire stopping materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements of the authority having
jurisdiction. Any approvals required from the local authorities shall be obtained by the
manufacturer/ applicator.
 All products shall have a minimum expected life of 30 years when tested to recognised
international standards.
 Generally, fire stopping shall be applied by a specialised applicator having demonstrated
experience on projects of similar size and complexity. The applicator shall be trained and
authorised by the manufacturer for the application of the specified products. All necessary
supporting documents shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative for approval.
 Fire stopping works around building services shall be carried out by the building services
contractor under the supervision of the main contractor and in accordance with his construction
programme all to the Employer’s Representative's approval. In case the floor/ wall openings are
required to be filled with concrete after installation of the building services, sealing works shallbe
carried out by the main contractor.
 Fire stopping works at junctions of curtain walling with fire compartment walls and floors shall be
carried out by the cladding and curtain walling contractor under the supervision of the main
contractor and in accordance with his construction programme all to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 341 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Fire proofing works shall not proceed unless the environmental conditions are favorable and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for each type of application.
Adequate temperature and ventilation conditions shall be maintained to ensure proper
application and curing of the fire stopping system.
 A physical mock-up shall be prepared for each fire proofing system at a location agreed with the
Employer’s Representative. The mock-ups may be retained as part of the finish work.
 The Employer may engage a qualified independent testing agency to inspect installation of fire
proofing systems and to prepare test reports. In the event work is found to be non-compliant, it
shall be removed and replaced at the contractor's cost.
 At all stages of the project, the firestop material manufacturer's technical representatives shall
provide all the necessary assistance and advice to the installer and shall attend at site on regular basis.
As a minimum, the firestop material manufacturer's technical representative’s attendance is required
during the first day of installation for each major type of firestop material.
 All polyurethane based materials shall be FM approved.
 All fire stopping systems and assemblies shall achieve a minimum of 54 dB sound reduction.

102 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

 Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers


with identification labels intact. Labels shall include date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, qualified
testing agency classification marking, curing time and mixing instructions. Materials not fulfilling the
manufacturer’s recommendations for shelf life shall not be used.
 Delivered materials shall be protected from exposure to harmful environment conditions and at
temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
 Pallets shall not be stacked.

110 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM AT JUNCTIONS OF CURTAIN WALLING WITH FIRE


COMPARTMENT WALLS AND FLOORS

 Panel material or joint filler: Mineral wool (minimum density: 100 Kg/m³).
 Sealant: Firestop joint spray as clause 400.

130 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM TO INDIVIDUAL SERVICES PENETRATIONS: NON-METALLIC PIPES


UP TO 75mm NOMINAL DIAMETER

 Joint filler: Mineral wool (minimum density: 100 Kg/m³) or sealant backing material as
appropriate.
- Size or thickness: As required to achieve the specified fire resistance.
- Pipe outside diameter: As per detailed design drawings.
 Sealant: Intumescent sealant as clause 342.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.

131 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM TO INDIVIDUAL SERVICES PENETRATIONS: NON METALLIC


PIPES GREATER THAN 75mm NOMINAL DIAMETER

 Joint filler: Mineral wool (minimum density: 100 Kg/m³) or sealant backing material as
appropriate.
- Size or thickness: As required to achieve the specified fire resistance.
-Pipe outside diameter: As per approved detailed design drawings.
 Sealant: Intumescent wrap as clause 375 or firestop jackets as clause 380 when the gap between
the pipe and the sleeve is too small.

132 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM TO INDIVIDUAL SERVICES PENETRATIONS: INSULATED METALLIC


PIPESAND DUCTS

 Joint filler: Mineral wool (minimum density: 100 Kg/m³) or sealant backing material as

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 342 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

appropriate.
- Size or thickness: As required to achieve the specified fire resistance.
- Pipe outside diameter: As per approved detailed design drawings.
 Sealant: Intumescent sealant as clause 342.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.

133 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM TO INDIVIDUAL SERVICES PENETRATIONS: NON INSULATED


METALLICPIPES AND DUCTS

 Joint filler: Mineral wool (minimum density: 100 Kg/m³) or sealant backing material as
appropriate.
- Size or thickness: As required to achieve the specified fire resistance.
- Pipe outside diameter: As per approved detailed design drawings.
 Sealant: Fire resisting silicone as clause 390.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.

134 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM TO INDIVIDUAL SERVICES PENETRATIONS: SINGLE OR BUNCHED


CABLES

 Joint filler: Mineral wool (minimum density: 100 Kg/m³) or sealant backing material as
appropriate.
-Size or thickness: As required to achieve the specified fire resistance.
 Sealant: Intumescent sealant as clause 342 applied on one side for floor crossings and on both
sides for wall crossings. Other fire stopping materials such as intumescent foams or putties are
also acceptable.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.

140 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM TO MULTIPLE SERVICES PENETRATIONS GENERALLY

 Panel material: Mineral wool intumescent coated rigid batts as clause 365.
- Thickness: As required to achieve the specified fire resistance.
- Number of layers: As required to achieve the specified fire resistance.
- Framing: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
 Finish: Intumescent coating.
 Sealant: Fire resisting silicone.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.

150 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM TO ELECTRICAL BUS BAR PENETRATIONS GENERALLY

 Joint filler: Mineral wool (minimum density: 100 Kg/m³).


- Size or thickness: As required to achieve the specified fire resistance.
 Sealant: Intumescent foam as clause 335 or intumescent mortar as clauses 340 and 341 applied
on one side for floor crossings and on both sides for wall crossings.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard
range.

160 MOVEMENT JOINTS GENERALLY

 Soffit profiles: As per approved detailed design drawings.


 Joint width or height (minimum): 10 mm.
 Joint filler: Mineral wool (minimum density: 100 Kg/m³).
 Sealant: Fire resisting silicone as clause 390 applied on both faces of the joint.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 343 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard


range.
190 TEMPORARY FIRE STOPPING GENERALLY

 Panel material or joint filler: Intumescent pillows.


- Panel or board thickness: If applicable.
- Intumescent pillow size: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
 Sealant: Not required.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

210 DESIGN

 Design: A specialist shall carry out design of the fire stopping system.
 Proposals: Submit drawings, technical information, calculations and manufacturers' literature.

240 FIRE RESISTANCE OF FIRE STOPPING SYSTEMS

 Fire resistance:
- Rating to BS 476-20: 120/120 or as per DCD.
- Rating to BS EN 13501-2: EI 120 or as per DCD.
 Surface spread of flame to BS 476-7: Class 0 or as per DCD.
 Smoke resistance:
- Air leakage rate (maximum): As per Authority regulation.

PRODUCTS

305 PRODUCT CERTIFICATION

 Certification: For products specified generically, submit evidence of compliance with the
specification.
 Acceptable evidence: UL certification.

335 INTUMESCENT FOAMS

- Product reference: Expanding type fire seal for use in small to medium size openings with
single or multiple penetrations.

340 INTUMESCENT MORTARS

- Product reference: Pre-packaged, dry pre-mixed cement based firestop mortar with thermal
insulating properties for use in medium to large size openings with single or multiple
penetrations.

341 HIGH STRENGTH STRUCTURAL GRADE INTUMESCENT MORTARS

- Product reference: Pre-packaged, dry pre-mixed, high strength, fire-resistant gypsum based
firestop mortar with thermal and acoustic insulating properties for use in medium to large size
openings with single or multiple penetrations.

342 INTUMESCENT SEALANTS

- Product reference: Graphite based, one part high pressure exerting (5 bars minimum)
intumescent paste unaffected by water or moisture when cured and containing no solvents,
inorganic fibres, or silicone compounds.
345 INTUMESCENT PILLOWS
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 344 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Composition: Sealed polyethylene bags containing graphite and vermiculite granules treated
with fire activated chemicals.
 Integral reinforced eyelets: Required.
 Linking cable: Non-corrosive cotton-coated wire.
- Length: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
- Product reference: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.

350 INTUMESCENT PUTTIES

- Product reference: Ready to use, intumescent flexible plugs based on two-component


polyurethane foam for use on small size circular floor and wall openings with single or
bunched cables.

351 INTUMESCENT BRICKS

- Product reference: Ready to use, intumescent flexible bricks based on two-component


polyurethane foam with graphite for use in small to medium size openings with multiple
penetrations.

360 MINERAL WOOL RIGID BATTS

 Standard: To BS 3958-5.
- Product reference: High Density mineral fibre batts (minimum density: 160 Kg/m³).

365 MINERAL WOOL INTUMESCENT COATED RIGID BATTS

 Uncoated batts: To BS 3958-5.


- Product reference: High Density mineral fibre batts (minimum density: 160 Kg/m³) pre-
coated with a non shrinking water based intumescent coating.

370 PIPE COLLARS - CONCEALED INTUMESCENT

- Product reference: Ready to use firestop jacket made of galvanised steel housing,
intumescent inserts and the required number of fastening hooks exerting an expansion
pressure of 2 bars.

375 PIPE COLLARS - INSULATED WRAP

- Product reference: High performance intumescent endless wrap, unaffected by water, frost or
ultra violets and exerting an expansion pressure of 2 bars.

380 PIPE COLLARS - SURFACE MOUNTED INTUMESCENT


- Product reference: Ready to use firestop jacket made of galvanised steel housing,
intumescent inserts and the required number of fastening hooks exerting an expansion
pressure of 2 bars.
381 PIPE COLLARS CAST-IN ASSEMBLIES

- Product reference: Injected polypropylene body containing an insert of intumescentmaterial.


The assembly shall be provided with an elastic sealing membrane to ensure water and smoke
tightness at different pipe diameters.

385 SEALANT BACKING MATERIAL

- Product reference: One component, ready to use, polyurethane based adhesive expanding
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 345 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

sprayed foam.

390 SEALANTS - FIRE RESISTING SILICONE

 Standard: To BS 5889 Type A.


- Product reference: One part, low modulus, low flammability, moisture activated silicone
sealant capable of withstanding high movement (±25%) in compression and extension.

395 SEALANTS - ONE-PART FIRE RESISTING ACRYLIC

- Product reference: Silicone free, acrylic firestop sealant (movement capability ±10%).

400 FIRESTOP JOINT SPRAY

- Product reference: Sprayable acrylic based mastic with 50% movement capability suitable
for construction/ movement joints as well as curtain wall to floor/ wall junctions.

401 FIRESTOP CABLE COATING

- Product reference: Ready to use, water based, intumescent cable coating (brush/ spray
applied).

EXECUTION

620 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

 Gaps: Seal gaps between building elements and services, to provide fire resistance and resist the
passage of smoke.
 Adjacent surfaces: Prevent overrun of sealant or mortar on to finished surfaces.

660 INSTALLING INTUMESCENT FOAM

 New joints: Remove builder's debris, mortar droppings, grease, and the like.
 Old joints: Clean and remove existing sealant from the joint.
 Priming: Lightly moisten substrate with water.
 Application: Fill joint to approximately half its depth, allowing foam to expand to face of joint.
 Trimming: Do not trim or cut the face of the cured foam.

670 APPLYING INTUMESCENT MORTAR


 Sequence: Install mortar after services are permanently installed.
 Loose dust and combustible materials: Remove from the opening.
 Shuttering: Install suitable shuttering panels to the faces of the opening.
 Temperature: Do not apply mortar when it could be damaged by frost.
 Powder: water ratio: As recommended by the manufacturer.
 Mortar cure: Do not disturb mortar before final set has taken place.
 Shuttering: Remove after mortar has cured.

680 INSTALLING INTUMESCENT PILLOWS

 Number of pillows (per m² of opening): As necessary to achieve the specified fire resistance.
 Orientation of bags: Lay perpendicular to plane of element containing opening.

690 APPLYING INTUMESCENT PUTTY

 Sequence: Install putty after services are permanently installed.


Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 346 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Loose dust and combustible materials: Remove from the opening.

710 INSTALLING BATTS

 Installing batts: Fit tight into void between the floor or wall and the penetrating services.
 Face of batts: Flush with the surface of wall, floor or soffit.
 Joints: Sealed with fire resisting sealant.
 Gaps between services and bulkhead: Seal with fire resisting sealant.

730 FIXING PIPE COLLARS

 Collar fixing: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s Representative's


approval.
 Gap around collar: As recommended by the contractor subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
 Length of wraps: If applicable.

740 INSERTING SEALANT BACKING MATERIAL

 New joints: To full depth of joint leaving sufficient depth to apply sealant.
 Old joints: If applicable.

750 APPLYING SEALANT TO JOINTS

 De-greasing: Cleaner by sealant manufacturer (where required).


 Priming: Primer by sealant manufacturer (where required).
 Depth of sealant: As recommended by sealant manufacturer.
 Temperature: Do not apply water based sealants when they could be damaged by frost.

COMPLETION

910 CLEANING

 Masking tapes: Remove.


 Cleaning: Clean off splashes and droppings. Wipe down finishes.

920 INSPECTION

 Notice for inspection (minimum): 3 days.


925 IDENTIFICATION OF FINISHED INSTALLATIONS

All finished installations shall be clearly and uniquely identified (on both sides of the assembly) with a
reference label that includes the following information:
 Unique reference information:
Each fire stopping system shall be identified with a unique reference number that can be traced
back through the installer's reference system. The label shall also include the date of the
installation, inspection and handing over.
 Manufacturer's information:
Manufacturer's name, address and contact details.
 Installer's information:
Installer's name, address and contact details.
 System's information:
Fire rating of the system as installed including the integrity and insulation values.

****End of Section P12***


Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 347 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION P20
UNFRAMED ISOLATED TRIMS/ SKIRTINGS/
SUNDRY ITEMS

Page 348 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

P20 UNFRAMED ISOLATED TRIMS/ SKIRTINGS/ SUNDRY ITEMS

To be read with Preliminaries/General Conditions.

TRIMS/ CASINGS

120 HARDWOOD FRAMING MEMBERS Generally

 Quality of wood and fixing: To BS 1186-3.


- Species: Red Meranti or equivalent approved by the Employer’s Representative.
- Class: 2.
 Moisture content at time of fixing: 9 to 13%.
 Preservative treatment: As section Z12.
 Profile: As per approved shop drawings.
- Finished size: As per approved shop drawings.
 Finish as delivered: Natural.
 Fixing: Screwed as required.

130 HARDWOOD ARCHITRAVES TO DOOR FRAMES

 Quality of wood and fixing: To BS 1186-3.


- Species: To match the door frame.
- Class: 1.
 Moisture content at time of fixing: 9 to 13%.
 Preservative treatment: As section Z12.
 Profile: As per approved shop drawings.
- Finished size: As per approved shop drawings.
 Finish as delivered: Factory primed and finished by the manufacturer to match the door frame
finish.
 Fixing: Polyurethane foam fixed.

140 HARDWOOD SKIRTINGS

 Quality of wood and fixing: To BS 1186-3.


- Species: As per material approval.
- Class: 1.
 Moisture content at time of fixing: 9 to 13%.
 Preservative treatment: As section Z12.
 Profile: As per approved shop drawings.
- Finished size: As per approved shop drawings.
 Finish as delivered: Factory primed and finished by the manufacturer.
 Fixing: Screwed and pelleted.

155 PVC TRIMS FOR TILED WALL EDGES


 Material: PVC.
 Standard: To BS 5750.
- Thickness: To match the wall tiling thickness.
 Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection from the manufacturer's standard range.
 Fixing: Adhesive fixed.

180 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES


- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Material:
- Frame: Extruded aluminium unless selected otherwise.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 349 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Gasket: Smooth thermoplastic unless selected otherwise.


 Joint width: As per approved detailed design.
 Size: As per approved detailed design.
 Type of movement: As per approved detailed design.
 Fixing: Screw fixed to the background.

BOARD MATERIALS

240 PLYWOOD BACKING BOARDS IN DRY AREAS


 Thickness: Minimum 18mm.
 Face ply species: To Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Appearance class to BS EN 635: N/A.
 Bond quality to BS EN 314-2: Class 1.
 Edges: Straight.
 Support/ Fixing: As per approved shop drawings.

241 MARINE PLYWOOD BACKING BOARDS IN WET AREAS


 Thickness: Minimum 18mm.
 Face ply species: To Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Appearance class to BS EN 635: N/A.
 Bond quality to BS EN 314-2: Class 2.
 Edges: Straight.
 Support/ Fixing: As per approved drawings.

242 MARINE PLYWOOD DOOR SUB-FRAMES


 Thickness: 18mm.
 Face ply species: To Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Appearance class to BS EN 635: N/A.
 Bond quality to BS EN 314-2: Class 2.
 Edges: Straight.
 Support/ Fixing: Screw fixed at 450mm centres.

SUNDRY ITEMS

420 BRACKET SUPPORTS FOR BENCHES, COUNTERS AND MISCELLANEOUS JOINERY


 Material: Galvanised steel.
- Finish: Galvanised.
- Colour: N/A.
- Size: As required for the stability and durability of the installation to the approval of the
Employer’s Representative.
 Fixing: Bolted into RC/ Masonry unless otherwise indicated on approved shop drawings.

FABRICATION- IMPACT RESISTANT PROTECTION SYSTEM

430 FABRICATION GENERALLY


 Fabricate impact-resistant wall and door protection systems to comply with requirements
indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including thicknesses of
components.
 Pre-assemble components in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.
Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
 Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free
of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and
fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 350 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and
anchors for interconnecting members to other construction.
 Provide inserts and other anchoring devices for connecting components to concrete or
masonry. Fabricate anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. Coordinate anchoring
devices with the supporting structure.

INSTALLATION

510 INSTALLATION GENERALLY


 Joinery workmanship: As section Z10.
 Metal workmanship: As section Z11.
 Methods of fixing and fasteners: Unless specified as section Z20.
 Straight runs: To be in one piece, or in long lengths with as few joints as possible.
 Running joints: Location and method of forming to be agreed where not detailed.
 Joints at angles: Mitre unless shown otherwise.
 Position and level: To be agreed where not detailed.

520 INSTALLATION- IMPACT RESISTANT PROTECTION SYSTEM

 Install impact-resistant wall protection system components level, plumb, and true to line
without distortions.
 Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in
the finished Work.
 Install aluminum/GI retainers, mounting brackets, and other accessories according to the
manufacturer's written instructions.
 Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 6.1 m, splice aluminum retainers and
plastic covers at different locations along the run.

***End of Section P20***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 351 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION P21
DOOR/ WINDOW IRONMONGERY

Page 352 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

P21 DOOR/ WINDOW IRONMONGERY

To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions. This section deals with the specification of
components of metal, plastics and other materials used to hang, fasten, close and/ or open, doors
and windows, and supplied separately for the purpose, whether fixed on or off site.

PRE-TENDER

10 QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS


 Quantities and locations of ironmongery are to be verified. Contractor is deemed to check and
satisfy the quantities as part of his design and build responsibility.
 Fixing: As sections L10 and L20.

GENERALLY

122 IRONMONGERY FROM LISTED PROPRIETARY RANGES


 Notification: Submit details of selected range, manufacturer and/ or supplier.
 Principal material/ finish: As indicated hereunder.
 Items unavailable within selected range: Submit proposals.
 Certification: Hardware installed must be “CERTIFIRE” approved and CE labelled.

130 APPROVED SUPPLIERS


 Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and
who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of
the Work to consult with Contractor, Employer’s Representative, and Employer about door
hardware and keying.
 Notification: Submit details of selected supplier.

132 INSTALLER QUALIFICATION


 An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a
record of successful in-service performance.

135 SUBMITTALS & GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


 Ironmongery Schedule: The supplier/contractor shall prepare detailed schedules for the
Employer’s Representatives approval, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well
as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames,
and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
 Master key system: Master key required for minimum three (03) levels. Grouping of level 3 shall be
discussed and agreed during the execution stage.
 Security lock system: Shall be as per the project requirement.
 Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Employer’s
Representative's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and
index each key set to unique door designations.
 Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.
 Ironmongery shall be supplied complete with all mounting fittings.
 The supplier shall offer full technical support and shall have suitably qualified staff able to
prepare/amend proper ironmongery schedules and advise on technical matters, including master
key systems, specification, installation and operation.
 Ironmongery for fire resisting doors must not compromise the fire performance of the door and
must be approved for the purpose by the door manufacturer.
 The supplier/contractor shall consider the differences in door thickness and ensure the
compatibility of each cylinder with the door it is provided for.
 The contractor shall provide a weatherproof storage facility for storage of the ironmongery

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 353 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

delivered to the job site. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final
Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
 The contractor shall check the ironmongery on installation for correct operation and maintaineach
item as recommended by the manufacturer. The contractor shall also be responsible for the
protection against damage by other trades.
 Ironmongery shall not be fixed until backgrounds are complete.
 Access control doors shall unlock upon loss of power.

141 SAMPLE BOARDS


 General: Before placing orders with suppliers submit a sample board, containing labelled
samples of ironmongery and showing methods of fixing. Samples shall be in specified finish, full
size. Tag with full description for coordination with the Door Hardware Schedule. Submit
samples before, or concurrent with, submission of the final Door Hardware Schedule.
 Range: Include all items to be supplied for the project like Handles, Hinges, pivots,
locks&latches, bolts, exit devices, cylinders&keys, closers, stops&holders, door gasketing, and
miscellaneous items.
- Conformity: Retain board on site in an approved location for the duration of the contract.Ensure
conformity of ironmongery as delivered with labelled samples.

145 COORDINATION
 Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and
other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop
Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
 Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardwarewith
connections to power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devices.

151 GUARANTEES
 General Warranty: Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this
section. Such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which
manufacturer and contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the contract
documents.
 Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace
components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:-
- Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
- Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.
- Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering
 Warranty Period: 05-10 years from the date of Taking over of Works.

155 MAINTENANCE SERVICE


 Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Employer’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
 Maintenance Service: Beginning at date of Taking over of Works provides six months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive
maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and
adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies as used
in the manufacture and installation of original products.

170 IRONMONGERY FOR FIRE DOORS


 Relevant products: Ironmongery fixed to, or morticed into, the component parts of a fire
resisting door assembly.
 Compliance: Ironmongery included in successful tests to BS 476-22 or BS EN 1634-1 on door
assemblies similar to those proposed.
- Certification: Submit evidence of successful testing by UKAS accredited laboratory. Subject to
the approval of relevant local authority concerned.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 354 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Melting point of components (except decorative non functional parts): 800°C minimum.

180 CATEGORY OF DUTY FOR DOOR IRONMONGERY


 Standard: To DD 171.
- Category of duty of doors: Heavy duty.
 General: Durability of ironmongery components to be compatible with stated category of duty of
each door leaf.
- Exclusions: Ironmongery with specific duty or 'category of use' defined elsewhere.
 Documentation: Before placing orders with suppliers submit documentation showing product
compliance with stated category of duty.

DOOR HANGING DEVICES

315 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION FOR SINGLE AXIS DOOR HINGES GENERALLY


 Standard: To BS EN 1935.
- Hinges to doors on escape routes and fire/ smoke control doors: UL listed.
 Minimum classification grades:
- Category of use: 3.
- Durability: 7.
- Test door mass: 80 kg or suitable for door size and weight.
- Suitability for use on fire/ smoke doors: 1.
- Safety: 1.
- Corrosion resistance: 3.
- Security - Burglar resistance: 1.
- Hinge grade: 11.
 Type: Double ball bearing butt, low friction, fully lubricated and corrosion and maintenance
free type.
 Size: 102 x 102mm.
 Material/ finish: Grade 316 polished/ satin stainless steel.
 Other requirements: Radiused corners.

WINDOW HANGING DEVICES

365 SINGLE AXIS WINDOW HINGES GENERALLY


 Standard: To BS EN 1935.
 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: Washered butt.
 Size: 102 x 102mm.
 Material/ finish: Polyester powder coated aluminium.
 Hinge grade: 3.
 Other requirements: Radiused corners.

DOOR OPERATING DEVICES

412 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION FOR OVERHEAD DOOR CLOSERS GENERALLY


 Standard: To BS EN 1154.
- Door closing devices to fire/ smoke control doors: UL listed
 Minimum classification grades:
- Category of use: 3 for non- fire rated and 4 for fire rated doors.
- Durability: 8.
- Door closer power size: Adjustable 3 to 6.
- Suitability for use on fire/ smoke doors: 1.
- Safety: 1.
- Corrosion resistance: 3.
 Type: Face fixed for ware house and concealed fixed for office.
 Other functions: Controlled closing, latching, overload.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 355 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Casing finish: Grade 316 polished/ satin stainless steel.


 Operational adjustment:
- Variable power: Matched to the sizes and weights of doors.
- Latched doors: Override latches and/ or door seals when fitted.
- Unlatched doors: Hold shut under normal working conditions.
- Closing against smoke seals of fire doors: Positive. No gaps.
 Other requirements:-
- Door closing devices shall be fully adjustable, hydraulic check types, including mechanical and/or
electromagnetic stand open and delayed closing and with a ten year guarantee foruse in local
ambient conditions, including exposed positions and, in the case of back check closers, even
with no stop fitted.
- All closers for fire rated doors shall be shown, by testing to EN 1154 Category of Use 4, to
close a door and positively latch doors from up to 180 degrees.
- Where indicated, provide special function closers. If stand open type is specified on non- fire
rated doors, provide suitable special arms. Back-check and/or delayed closing, where
specified, shall be to EN 1154.
- Surface closers shall have visually pleasing plain rectangular, solid aluminium or stainless
steel bodies (not removable covers), 50 mm maximum projection, with no permanent,
visible markings (except as required by relevant standards) and finished identically to other
items on the door. They shall suit doors of either hand.
- Surface closers, except to service areas accessible only to maintenance staff, shall achieve Class
4-8-5/2-1-1-3, power adjustable for doors 750 - 1250 mm wide and 20 -100 kg mass,
or equivalent grade to Table 2 of EN 1154 for doors of greater or lesser width/mass.They shall
incorporate adjustable, hydraulic back-check.
- Surface closers to service areas accessible only to maintenance staff shall achieve Class 4- 8-3-
1-1-3, for doors 850 – 950 mm wide and 40-60 kg mass or equivalent grades to
Table 2 of EN 1154 for doors of greater or lesser width/mass.
- Door mounted overhead concealed closers shall achieve Class 3-8-3-1-1-2, for doors 850
– 950 mm wide and 40 – 60 kg mass, or equivalent grades to Table 2 of EN 1154 for
doors of greater or lesser width/mass.
- Floor springs shall be heavy duty, adjustable, hydraulic check types, with thermo-constant
stabilizing fluid. Visible components and accessories shall match other hardware. Floor
springs shall have built-in levelling device and micro-adjustable toe-in and centering device.
- Floor springs for main circulation routes, reception and other heavy use locations shall
achieve Class 4-8-6/2-1-1-3, power adjustable for doors 750-1400 mm wide and 20- 120
kg mass, or equivalent grade to Table 2 of EN 1154 for doors of greater or lesser
width/mass. They shall incorporate adjustable, hydraulic back-check.
- Floor springs for light use locations shall achieve Class 4-8-3-1-1-3, fixed power for doors
850 – 950 mm wide and 40 – 60 kg mass, or equivalent grades to Table 2 of EN 1154 for
doors of greater or lesser width/mass. They shall incorporate hydraulic back-check
operation.
- Electromagnetic fire hold closers shall be to BS EN 1155 and be of the same design, finish
and standards as other closers but shall allow the door to: Hold open electromagnetically
when set and, on receipt of a signal from a central fire alarm or other device, automatically
release and properly close. And Close immediately if physically pushed to, if an integral fire
officer test button is pressed, or if power fails.
- Wiring to electromagnetic fire hold closers shall be carried between frame and door leaf by
conductor hinges or concealed fixing flexible metal cable loops.
- Power sources for fire hold closers shall be Class II Safety Isolated Transformers to BS
3535. If fire alarm systems do not incorporate clean contacts, transformers shall
incorporate relay control interfaces.
- If both leaves of a pair of doors have closers and one must close first, due to rebated stiles,
latch-bolts etc, provide suitable matching selectors which do not obstruct hardware or affect
fire ratings.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 356 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

DOOR SECURING DEVICES


515A DOOR LOCKS GENERALLY
 Standard: To BS EN 12209.
 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: Heavily sprung mortice lockcase suitable for euro profile cylinder operating a 16mm
double throw antisaw dead bolt and latch bolt.
 Backset: 70 mm or as per approved final design drawing.
 Material/ finish: Lock forends and strike plates to be grade 316 satin stainless steel.
 Keying: In master keyed suite.

520 DOOR LOCKS FOR TOILETS AND BATHROOMS


 Standard: To BS EN 12209.
 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: Heavily sprung mortice lockcase suitable for bathroom turn operating an antisaw single
throe bolt and latch bolt.
 Backset: 60 mm.
 Material/ finish: Lock forends and strike plates to be grade 316 satin stainless steel.
 Additional requirements: Every bathroom door lock shall be designed to allow opening of the
locked door from outside in an emergency as per DCD regulation. The opening device shall be
readily available.

540 DOOR LATCHES GENERALLY


 Standard: To BS EN 12209.
 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: Horizontal case mortice latch.
 Backset: 70 mm.
 Material/ finish: Cast steel polished nickel plated.
 Latch spring strength: Select to prevent unsprung lever handles drooping.

550 LOCKING CYLINDERS GENERALLY


 Standard: To BS 1303.
 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: Euro double cylinder fitted with 6 anti pick mushroom pins.
 Material/ finish: Polished chrome or stainless steel.
 Additional requirements: Provide 3 cylinder change keys, 2 master keys and 1 grand master
key. Keys shall be made of stain less steel
 Master key suiting: All cylinders shall be suited under a grand master key for the areas as
Employer’s requirements. The master key system shall not compromise the security standards.
Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal.
 Key Control System: system to include key-holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-
locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers.
Contain system in metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish-:
- Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with key-holding
panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock.
- Capacity: Able to hold keys for 150 percent of the number of locks.
- Cross-Index System: Set up by key control manufacturer, complying with the following:-
o Card Index: Furnish four sets of index cards for recording key information. Include
three receipt forms for each key-holding hook.

560 LOCKING CYLINDER WITH THUMBTURN GENERALLY


 Standard: To BS 1303.
 Manufacturer: As clause 130.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 357 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.


 Type: Euro cylinder with thumbturn fitted with 6 anti pick mushroom pins.
 Material/ finish: Grade 316 polished/ satin stainless steel.
 Additional requirements: Provide 3 keys with each cylinder.
 Master key suiting: All cylinders shall be suited under a grand master key for the areas as per
Employer’s requirements. The master key system shall not compromise the security standards.

577 PANIC EXIT DEVICES GENERALLY


 Standard: To BS EN 1125.
- Panic exit devices for locked doors on escape routes: UL listed.
 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Panic latches: Shall have mortice type latches as specified for heavy duty/high security locks.
- Horizontal bar operated panic exit devices to single leaf doors in service areas accessible only
to maintenance staff may be standard projection, push bar type to EN 1125 Grade 3- 6-6-
1-1-2-1-A.
- Fire Exit Devices: Complying with BS EN 1125 that are listed and labelled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to the Employer’s Representative, for fire and panic
protection, based on testing according to BS 476, or other equal international standards.
- Where devices without automatic re-latching and/or dogging mechanism are submitted for
use on fire-rated door assemblies, the manufacturer shall submit test report and datato
demonstrate that latch-less assemblies have been successfully fire rated.
- Where required, panic exit devices shall incorporate local alarm, remote monitoring and/or motor
operation.
 Type: Push bar.
 Material/ finish: Powder coated steel, colour to match door furniture.
 Additional requirements: Opening the door from the outside provided by lever handle and
single profile cylinder. Panic exit device shall comply with DCD regulation.

582 DOOR BOLTS GENERALLY


 Standard: To BS EN 12051.
 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: Lever action flush bolts. Flush bolts designed for mortising into door edge, with
projecting slides where escape may be required and lever action in other locations.

 Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labelled firedoor
requirements, and as follows:
- Fire-Rated Surface Bolts: Minimum 25-mm throws; listed and labelled for fire-rated doors.
- Mortise Flush Bolts: Minimum 19-mm throw
 Material/ finish: Grade 316 polished/ satin stainless steel.
 Additional requirements:
- Provide dust proof floor sockets of the same material and finish.
- Provide bolts at top and bottom of one leaf of a locking double door. Top bolts shall have
suitable plates or keeps and bottom bolts shall have dirt excluding or easy-clean sockets.
Unless otherwise approved, top bolts shall be 300 mm long and bottom bolts 228 mm
long.

WINDOW SECURING DEVICES

590 WINDOW ESPAGNOLETTE BOLTS GENERALLY


 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: Roller bolt.
 Size: As recommended by the window manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 358 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Backset: As recommended by the window manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's


approval.
 Material/ finish: Electro-galvanised steel.
 Additional requirements: Window lever handles as clause 910.

DOOR FURNITURE

610 LEVER HANDLES GENERALLY


 Standard: To BS EN 1906.
 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Style: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Size: 19mm (Min).
 Material/ finish: Grade 316 polished/ satin stainless steel.
 Mounting: Sprung rose with bolt through fixing.
 Additional requirements: Fixing bolt to be suitable for door thickness between 35mm and
55mm.

641 PULL HANDLES (LONG TYPE)


 Standard: To BS 8424.
 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Shape: As approved.
 Diameter: As approved.
 Distance between centres: As recommended by the manufacturer.
 Material/ finish: Grade 316 polished/ satin stainless steel.
 Mounting: secret face fixing / bolt through fixing as relevant.
 Additional requirements: Corrosion proofed bolt cups, bolts, washers and locking patches.

645 COMBINED PULL HANDLE AND PLATE


 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
 Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Size: Nominal 175 x 175mm.
 Handle shape: D shape.
 Handle diameter: Nominal 14mm.
 Material/ finish: Grade 316 polished/ satin stainless steel.
 Mounting: Screw fixed.
 Additional requirements: All screws to be flush countersunk type located 5mm from plate
edge/corner.

670 PUSH PLATES GENERALLY


 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Size: As approved.
 Material/ finish: 1.5mm thick, grade 316 satin stainless steel.
 Mounting: Screw fixed.
 Additional requirements: All screws to be flush countersunk type located 5mm from plate
edge/corner. Rounded edges and radiused corners.

680 MIDRAIL PLATES GENERALLY


 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Size: As approved.
 Material/ finish: 1.5mm thick, grade 316 satin stainless steel.
 Mounting: Screw fixed.
 Additional requirements: All screws to be flush countersunk type located 5mm from plate

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 359 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

edge/corner. Rounded edges and radiused corners.

690 KICK PLATES GENERALLY


 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Height: As follows:-
- 300 mm for kick plates.
- 900 mm for trolley plates.
- 150 mm for mop plates
 Width: Kick plates and trolley plates fixed on stop side of the door are to be 30 mm less than
door width with equal clearance (15 mm) from edge at both stop and hinge stiles of the door.
Kick plates on pull side of the door are to be of width equal to width of the door.
 Material/ finish: 1.5mm thick, grade 316 satin stainless steel.
 Mounting: Screw fixed with 200mm maximum intervals on center between adjoining screws in
the same row.
 Additional requirements: All screws to be flush countersunk type located 5mm from plate
edge/corner. Rounded edges and radiused corners.

710 ESCUTCHEONS GENERALLY


 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Material/ finish: Grade 316 polished/ satin stainless steel.
 Keyhole type: Euro profile cylinder.
 Usage: To all locks.

720 DOOR STOPS


 Manufacturer: As clause 130
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: As approved.
 Usage: To all doors.

760 DOOR HOLDERS GENERALLY


 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: Foot operated holder.
 Size: As recommended by the manufacturer for every door type to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
 Material/ finish: Light metal lacquered case with stainless steel kicking bolt and rubber plug.

811 DOOR MOUNTED COAT HOOKS GENERALLY


 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: Concealed fixing.
 Material/ finish: Grade 316 polished/ satin stainless steel.

850 THRESHOLD WEATHERSTRIP TO EXTERNAL DOORS


 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: Domed neoprene in low profile metal carrier.
 Size: 45mm wide to the full door width.
 Material/ finish: Anodized aluminium metal carrier, colour to the Employer’s Representative's
selection from the manufacturer's standard range.

855 WEATHERSTRIP TO DOOR HEAD AND JAMBS GENERALLY


 General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke,
light, or sound gasketing on interior doors.
 Manufacturer: As clause 130.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 360 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.


- Fire-Labelled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with requirements of BS 9999 that are listed
and labelled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to the Employer’s
Representative, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to BS 476, or other
equal international standards
 Type: As recommended by the door manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
 Size: As recommended by the door manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's approval.
 Material/ finish: As recommended by the door manufacturer to the Employer’s
Representative's approval. Colour to match the door frame finish from the manufacturer's
standard range.

860 DOOR SEALS FOR SMOKE PROOFING GENERALLY


 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: Draught seals to seal cold smoke, rate for the period indicated and
satisfy smoke leakage rates of BS 9999.
 Type: Fixed to the door rebate.
 Size: 10 x 5.5mm.
 Material/ finish: Soft PVC, colour to match the door frame finish from the manufacturer's
standard range.

870 DOOR SEALS FOR SOUND PROOFING GENERALLY


 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: Fixed to the door rebate.
 Size: 10 x 5.5mm.
 Material/ finish: Soft PVC, colour to match the door frame finish from the manufacturer's
standard range.

890 DOOR VIEWERS GENERALLY


 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Angle of vision: 180 Degree.
 Material/ finish: Polished chrome.
 Viewer body diameter: 10mm.
 Door thickness: 55mm or as per final selection.

WINDOW FURNITURE

910 WINDOW LEVER HANDLES GENERALLY


 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: As recommended by the window manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
 Material/ finish: Nylon coated aluminium unless selected otherwise.
 Features: N/A.

960 WEATHERSTRIP TO WINDOWS GENERALLY


 Manufacturer: As clause 130.
- Product reference: EPDM to Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Type: As recommended by the window manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
 Size: As recommended by the window manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
 Material/ finish: As recommended by the window manufacturer to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 361 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

FABRICATION

 Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's


name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in
conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Employer’s
Representative.
- Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
 Base Metals: Produce door ironmongery units of base metal, fabricated by forming method
indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness.
Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door ironmongery units and
finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from
specified standard.
 Fasteners: Provide door ironmongery manufactured to comply with published templates
generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat- head
screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
- Concealed Fasteners: For door ironmongery units that are exposed when door is closed,
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of
securely attaching the door ironmongery. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and
frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
- Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For fire rated applications for mortise hinges to doors,
Strike plates to frames and Closers to doors and frames.
- Steel Through Bolts: For fire-rated applications, unless door blocking is provided, for
surface hinges to doors and closers to doors and frames.
 Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors.

PREPARATION

 Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labelled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
 Doors and Frames, General: Comply with manufacturers’ instructions.
- Surface-Applied Door ironmongery: Drill and tap doors and frames according to
Templates furnished by manufacturers at locations indicated on referenced standards or
approved by the Employer’s Representative.

INSTALLATION

 Mounting Heights: Mount door ironmongery units at heights indicated on shop Drawings or in
accordance with requirement/standards.
 Install each door ironmongery item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting
and fitting are required to install door ironmongery onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work specified in section M60. Do not install surface-
mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
- Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
- Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
 Key Control System: Place keys on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as
determined by final keying schedule.

ADJUSTING
 Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door ironmongery and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 362 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 363 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.


- Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door
will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 75 mm from the latch, measured to the
leading edge of the door.
 Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Taking Over, Installer shall
perform the following:-
- Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of
doors, door ironmongery, and electrified door hardware.
- Consult with and instruct Employer’s Representative's personnel on recommended
maintenance procedures.
- Replace door ironmongery items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design,
materials, or installation of door hardware units.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION


 Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door ironmongery installation.
 Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
 Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without
damage or deterioration at time of Taking over of the Works.

***End of Section P21***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 364 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION P30
TRENCHES/ PIPEWAYS/ PITS FOR BURIED
ENGINEERINGSERVICES

Page 365 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

P30 TRENCHES/ PIPEWAYS/ PITS FOR BURIED ENGINEERING SERVICES

To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.

GENERALLY

110 ROUTES OF SERVICES BELOW GROUND


 Locations of new service runs and pipeducts: Submit proposals.
 Temporary marking: Indicate new service runs and pipeducts with 75 x 75 mm softwood posts
painted white and projecting not less than 600 mm above ground level, or with clearly visible
waterproof markings on hard surfaces.

120 IN SITU CONCRETE


 In situ concrete for buried engineering services:
- Standard: To BS 5328-1, -2, -3 and -4, or to BS 8500-1, 2 and BS EN 206-1.
- Mix: As section E10.
- Equivalent or better mix: Submit proposals.
- Different mixes may be used for different parts of the work.

130 TRENCHES
 Width: As small as practicable.
 Trench sides: vertical.
 Trench bottoms: Remove mud, rock projections, boulders and hard spots and well compact
Trim level.
 Give notice: To inspect trench for each section of the work.

PIPEDUCTS

206 PIPEDUCTS FOR UNDERGROUND SERVICES


 Types and sizes: As recommended by service undertaker. Unless specified in MEP specification.

220 LAYING PIPEDUCTS


 General: Lay straight to line, true to gradient or level on an even continuous bed.
 Bedding thickness: 100mm minimum.
 Clearance between pipeducts where they cross (minimum): 50 mm or as per the requirement
of relevant service Authority.
 Drawlines: During laying, thread through pipeducts.
- Material, strength and length: As specified by service undertaker or as per the requirement of
relevant service Authority.
 Protection: Protect from ingress of debris. During construction, temporarily seal all exposed
ends.
 Inspection: Before backfilling, allow service undertakers to inspect installation.
 Surround material: Lay and compact to 150 mm (minimum) above pipeduct crown.

231 BEDDING/ SURROUND FOR PIPEDUCTS - GRANULAR MATERIAL


 Bedding: Single size 10 mm granular material to BS 882. Compact uniformly in 100mm
maximum layers.
 Surround: As bedding.

245 CONCRETE SURROUND FOR SHALLOW PIPEDUCTS UNDER BUILDINGS


 Locations: Where pipeduct crowns are less than 300 mm below underside of slab.
 Timing: Excavate trench after hardcore has been laid and compacted.
 Concrete blinding: 75 mm thick over full width of trench. Allow to set.
 Pipeducts:
- Temporary support: Folding wedges of compressible board. Prevent flotation.
- Height above blinding (minimum): 100 mm.
 Surround: Cast integral with slab. Extend surround to within 150 mm of nearest flexible joint.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 366 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

255 CONCRETE SURROUND FOR PIPEDUCTS


 Concrete blinding: 75 mm thick over full width of trench. Allow to set.
 Pipeducts:
- Temporary support: Folding wedges of compressible board. Prevent flotation.
- Height above blinding (minimum): 100 mm.
 Surround, to full width of trench:
- Depth: To 150 mm above crown of pipeduct.
- Vertical construction joints: At face of flexible pipeduct joints using 18mm thick
compressible board precut to pipeduct profile.
- Socketed pipeducts: Fill gaps between spigots and sockets with resilient material to
prevent entry of concrete.

257 PIPEDUCT RUNS NEAR FOUNDATIONS


 Concrete surround as clause 255: Provide in locations where bottom of trench is lower than
bottom of foundation. Measurements are horizontal clear distances between nearest edges of
foundations and pipe trenches.
- Trenches less than one metre from foundations: Top of concrete surround not lower than
bottom of foundation.
- Trenches more than one metre from foundations: Top of concrete surround not lower than
D mm below bottom of foundation, where D mm is horizontal distance of trenchfrom
foundation, less 150 mm.

BACKFILLING

260 BACKFILLING GENERALLY


 Backfill from top of pipeduct surround: Material excavated from the trench. Subject to
compliance with suitable fill material requirement.
 Backfilling: Lay and compact in 300 mm maximum layers. Do not use heavy compactors before
backfill is 600 mm deep.

265 BACKFILLING UNDER ROADS AND PAVINGS


 Backfill from top of pipe duct surround: Granular sub-base material as per Clause 211A of
section Q20.
 Backfilling: Lay and compact in 150 mm maximum layers.

270 FOAMED CONCRETE BACKFILL


 Preparation: Repair damaged drainage or ducts and seal off cavities in or adjacent to the
excavation which are not to be filled.
 Backfill:
- Density (minimum): 1050kg/m³.
- 28 day compressive strength (maximum): 10 N/mm².
- Ground conditions to BS 8500-1: X0.
 Backfilling: To British Cement Association publication 46.044, 'Foamed Concrete -
Specification for use in the reinstatement of openings in highways'.

275 TEMPORARY BRIDGES


 Construction traffic: After backfilling, provide temporary bridges over trenches to prevent
damage to pipe ducts or services.

280 WARNING MARKER TAPES


 Type: Continuous colour coded, heavy gauge polyethylene identification tapes to the approvalof
relevant service Authorities.
 Wire detection aid: Not required.
 Installation: During backfilling, lay along the route of all underground services runs.
 Location, depth, colour and markings: To requirements of service undertaker / concerned
Authority.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 367 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

ACCESS CHAMBERS/ FITTINGS/ DRAWPITS

300 ACCESS/ INSPECTION CHAMBERS FOR BUILDING SERVICES


 Bases: Minimum 150 mm thick reinforced concrete. To provide suitable protective coating.
 Wall: Use reinforced concrete walls as per detailed design and as per authority
requirements/guidelines and intended usage. To provide suitable protective coating for both
internal and external surface. All sewage and storm water manholes and holding tanks shall
have internal GRP lining and external membrane type water proofing as specified.
Electrical/telephone service manholes shall have suitable internal protective coating and external
membrane type water proofing.
 Step irons:
- Location: Chambers over 900 mm deep and as per authority regulations.
- Type: Galvanized ferrous to BS 1247-1.
- Bedding: In joints.
- Spacing: Bed in joints at 300 mm vertical centres, stagger 300 mm horizontally. Lowest
step 300 mm above base. Top step 450 mm below top of cover.
 Cover slabs:
- Thickness As per detailed design.
- Type: Reinforced concrete.
- Precast type: Bed solid in 1:3 cement: sand mortar.
- Openings: To suit access covers.
- Reinforcement: As per detailed design.
 Access covers and frames: Ductile iron and painted with epoxy coating system.
- Standard: To BS EN 124
- Manufacturer: As indicated in the building services specifications.
- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Types: Heavy duty with inscription suitable for respective services.
- Frame bedding: As clause 440.

440 BEDDING OF FRAMES FOR ACCESS COVERS AND SURFACE BOXES


 Bedding: Solid in 1:3 cement: sand mortar, centrally over opening, level with surrounding
finishes and square with joints in surrounding finishes or with building.
- Frames in soil or grassed areas: Haunch back edge of bedding so that it is not visible.

***End of Section P30***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 368 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION P31
HOLES/ CHASES/ COVERS/ SUPPORTS FOR
SERVICES

Page 369 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

P31 HOLES/ CHASES/ COVERS/ SUPPORTS FOR SERVICES

To be read with Preliminaries/General Conditions.

110 CO-ORDINATION
 Locations and dimensions of holes and chases for services: Submit details of the following:
- Any penetrations required through structural elements.
- Any penetrations through block walls or other decorative surfaces clashing with or below the
proposed suspended ceilings or enclosures. Allow two weeks for the provision of
alternative locations and dimensions.

150 HOLES AND CHASES IN IN SITU CONCRETE


 Cast in: Holes larger than 10 mm diameter and chases.
 Cutting and drilling:
- Permitted for holes not larger than 10 mm diameter.
- Not permitted for holes larger than 10 mm diameter.

160 HOLES AND CHASES IN PRECAST CONCRETE


 Cutting and drilling: Not permitted except as approved in writing.

170 HOLES IN STRUCTURAL STEELWORK


 Cutting and drilling: Not permitted except as approved in writing.

185 HOLES, RECESSES AND CHASES IN MASONRY


 Locations: To maintain integrity of strength, stability and sound resistance of construction.
 Sizes: Minimum needed to accommodate services.
- Holes (maximum): 300 x 300 mm.
 Walls of hollow or cellular blocks: Do not chase.
 Walls of other materials:
- Vertical chases: No deeper than one third of single leaf thickness, excluding finishes.
- Horizontal or raking chases: No longer than 1 m. No deeper than one sixth of the single
leaf thickness, excluding finishes.
 Chases and recesses: Do not set back to back. Offset by a clear distance at least equal to the
wall thickness.
 Cutting: Do not cut until mortar is fully set. Cut carefully and neatly with a mechanical saw.
Avoid spalling, cracking and other damage to surrounding structure.

220 PREFORMED HOLES IN MASONRY


 Holes bigger than 400mm or one block wide: Submit proposals for bridging over for the
Employer’s Representative's approval.

310 PIPE SLEEVES FOR BUILDING SERVICES


 Material: As indicated on the approved detailed design drawing and Contract specification.
 Sleeves: Extend through full thickness of wall or floor. Position accurately.
- Clearance around service (maximum): 20 mm or diameter of service, whichever is the
lesser.
- Installation: Bed Solid.
 Space between service and sleeve: Seal with appropriate material as clause 340.
 Where exposed to view. Finish bedding and sealing neatly.

340 SEALING AROUND SERVICES


 Service: All building services.
 Location: Floors, walls and ceilings.
 Sealing material: As per Authority regulation and Contract specifications.
 Method: As per Contract specifications and manufacturers printed instructions.
 Requirement: These works shall be carried out by the building service contractor in order to

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 370 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

provide moisture and vapour control, airtightness and barrier against insect ingress.

345 SEALING AROUND SERVICES IN FIRE RESISTING FLOORS, WALLS AND CEILINGS
 Service: All building services.
 Location: Fire resisting floors, walls and ceilings.
 Sealing material: All penetrations through fire barriers or floors and ceiling such as fire dampers,
cable trays, piping etc shall be provided with penetration seals(fire stops) having a fire protection
rating consistent with the designated fire resistance rating of the barrier..
 Method: As per authority regulation and Contract specifications.
 Requirement: These works shall be carried out by a specialist contractor in order to provide fire
resistance as indicated on the approved fire compartmentation drawings.

350 FIRE RESISTING BARRIERS FOR MULTISERVICE OPENINGS


- Product reference: As recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the
Employer’s Representative.
 Type: Proprietary system to suit the application and to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
 Sizes: Cut to size of openings.
 Fixing/Special requirements: As recommended by the system manufacturer and approved by
the Employer’s Representative.
- Fixing must not incorporate plastics materials.
 Fire resistance: As indicated on the approved fire compartmentation drawings.
 Integrity: Fit tightly and accurately to structure and services to maintain fire resistance. Fill gaps
with intumescent material.
 Requirement: These works shall be carried out by a specialist contractor in order to provide
fire resistance as indicated on the approved fire compartmentation drawings.

***End of Section P31***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 371 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION Q10
KERBS/ EDGINGS/ CHANNELS/ PAVING
ACCESSORIES

Page 372 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Q10 Kerbs/ Edgings/ Channels/ Paving Accessories

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with:-


• Kerbs, edgings and channels in stone, concrete and brick.
• Proprietary external drainage channel systems.
• Road marking and retro reflecting studs (‘cats eyes’).
• Concrete foundations and haunching for kerbs, edgings, channels and accessories.
• Proprietary traffic calming accessories, e.g. surface fixed speed humps or precast speed
cushions.

TYPES OF KERBS/ EDGINGS/ CHANNELS

110 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS


 Standard: To BS EN 1340.
- Product reference: Hydraulically pressed and complying with the requirements of BS EN
1340. Minimum cement content in the concrete mix shall be 400Kg/m3.
 Type: Half battered types HB1, HB2 or HB3 as appropriate for each application.
 Size (width x height x length): 150 x 305 x 915 mm, 150 x 255 x 915 mm or 150 x 125 x
915mm depending on the selected type.
 Special shapes: As per approved detailed design, if any.
 Finish: As cast.
 Colour: Natural.
 Joints:
- Dry, 2 mm (minimum) gap.
- Movement joints as clause 650 at every 6 m.
 Other requirements:
- Concrete foundation: As clause 530.
- Mortar bedding: As clause 540.
- Kerbs shall receive paint finish as specified in section M60.
- Where applicable, dropped sections shall be provided.
- Transverse strength and water absorption shall be verified by independent testing lab. At
least 4 samples taken from site delivery for each type of kerbs shall be tested.

111 PRECAST CONCRETE CHANNELS


 Standard: To BS EN 1340.
- Product reference: Hydraulically pressed, to the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Type: CS1, CS2 or CD as appropriate for each application.
 Size (width x height x length): 255 x 125 mm or 150 x 125 mm depending on the selected
type.
 Special shapes: Not required.
 Finish: As cast.
 Colour: Natural.
 Joints:
- Dry, 2 mm (minimum) gap.
 Other requirements:
- Concrete foundation: As clause 530.
- Mortar bedding: As clause 540.

180 DRAINAGE CHANNEL SYSTEMS WITH GRATINGS (If required)


- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Size: As per approved detailed design drawings.
 Type of fall: Integral continuous fall.
 Accessories: Provide support chairs, cast in anchors and any other accessories required to
install the system complete.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 373 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Joints: Bituminous mastic jointing.


 Other requirements:
- Concrete foundation: As clause 530.
- Mortar bedding: As clause 540.
 Cover gratings: Cast iron, slotted.
- Fixings: Anti-vandal security catches.
- Loading grade: Class F900 to BS EN 124.
- Other requirements: Colour: Black.

250 MATERIAL SAMPLES


 Samples representative of colour and appearance of designated materials: Submit for
approval before placing orders.
- Designated materials: All types of kerbs/ edgings/ channels or accessories specified in this
section and applicable to the project.

ROADS/ PAVING ACCESSORIES/ MARKING

315 TRAFFIC CALMING HUMPS (If required)


- Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
 Material: Moulded tough high impact rubatype composition with surface channels for drainage
and grip.
 Method of fixing: As recommended by the manufacturer to the Employer’s Representative's
approval.
 Other requirements:
- Height shall be 75mm unless required otherwise.
- Length shall be as required.
- Middle sections shall be made of modular sectional pairs (one black and one yellow) from
the manufacturer's standard sizes.
- End sections shall be of black colour rounded modules from the manufacturer's standard
sizes.

330 PRECAST CONCRETE WHEEL STOPPERS


- Product reference: Hydraulically pressed and complying with the requirements of BS EN
1340. Minimum cement content in the concrete mix shall be 400Kg/m3.
 Size: As per design requirements.
 Finish: As cast.
 Colour: Natural.
 Joints: Dry, 2 mm gap.-
 Other requirements:
- Provide holes for fixing dowel bars.
- Provide concrete foundations as clause 530 where stoppers are not fixed to a structural
concrete slab.
- Mortar bedding: As clause 540.
- Wheel stoppers shall receive paint finish as specified in section M60.

395 ROAD MARKING (THERMOPLASTIC) (For access, drive ways, car park, yard areas)
Standard: Road Safety Markings Association standard specification document for road marking
and road studs (Stan Spec), Dubai RTA and Dubai South regulation.(RTA regulation shall
prevail in case of any conflict)
Colour: As per RTA/DDA guide lines.
Retroreflectivity: Class R2 to BS EN 1436.
Material for pavement markings shall consist of an approved hot applied sprayed or screeded
thermoplastic material complying generally with BS 3262 with the following amendments and
additions:

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 374 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

(i) Reflectorised markings are required


(ii) The approximate composition of the material as laid shall be:

Constituent % by

Weight

Aggregate 40

Solid glass beads (in the mix) 10

Solid glass beads (sprayed on the surface) 10

Pigments and Extender 20

Binder 20

(iii) Solid glass beads incorporated in the mixture shall comply with the Class A
Category of BS EN 1423. Solid glass beads sprayed onto the surface of the line
shall comply with the Class B Category of BS EN 1423.

(iv) The softening point shall be at least 95oC.

(v) In the flow resistance test the specimen shall be maintained at a temperature of
40oC plus or minus 2oC for 48 hours.

The application of the material shall be in accordance with BS 3262, RTA


standard and the manufacturer's instructions. Markings shall be free from
raggedness at the edges, uniform and free from streaks. The performance of the
material shall be as given in BS 3262.

LAYING

510 LAYING GENERALLY


 Cutting: Neat, accurate and without spalling. Form neat junctions.
- Long units (450mm and over) minimum length after cutting: 300 mm.
- Short units minimum length after cutting: The lower of one third of their original length or50
mm.
 Bedding of units: Positioned true to line and levelled along top and front faces, in a mortar
bed on accurately cast foundations or, where clause 547 applies, on a race of fresh concrete.
 Securing of units: After bedding has set, secured with a continuous haunching of concrete or,
where clause 547 applies, backing concrete cast monolithically with fresh concrete race.

520 ADVERSE WEATHER


 Conditions: Do not construct if the temperature is below 3°C on a falling thermometer or 1°Con
a rising thermometer. Adequately protect foundations, bedding and haunching against frost and
rapid drying by sun and wind.

530 CONCRETE FOR FOUNDATIONS, RACES AND HAUNCHING


 Standard: To BS 5328-1, 2, -3 and -4, or to BS 8500-1, -2, and BS EN 206-1.
 Designated mix: Not less than GEN0 or Standard mix ST1.
 Workability: Very low.

540 MORTAR BEDDING


 General: To section Z21.
 Mix: (Portland cement: sand): 1:3, Portland cement: Class CEM I 42.5 to BS EN 197-1, Sand:
Grade M or F to BS 882, or to BS EN 12620, grade 0/4 or 0/2 (MP).
 Bed thickness: 12-40 mm.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 375 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

547 BEDDING/ BACKING OF FRESH UNITS ON FRESH CONCRETE RACES


 Standard: To BS 7533-6, clause 4.2.

550 KERB DOWELS


 Dowels: Steel bar to BS 4482.
- Size: 12 mm diameter, 150 mm long.
 Installation of dowels: Vertically into foundation while concrete is plastic.
- Centres: To suit holes in kerbs.
- Projection: 75 mm.
 Grouting of holes in kerbs: Filled with 1:3 cement: sand mortar finished flush.

560 HAUNCHING DOWELS


 Dowels: Steel bar to BS 4482.
- Size: 12 mm diameter, 150 mm long.
 Installation of dowels: Vertically into foundation while concrete is plastic.
- Centres: 450 mm.
- Distance from back face of kerb: 50 mm.
- Projection: 75 mm.
 Haunching: Rectangular cross section, cast against formwork, fully enclosing and protecting
dowels.

570 CHANNELS
 Installation: To an even gradient, without ponding or backfall.
 Lowest points of channels: 6 mm above drainage outlets.

590 DRAINAGE CHANNEL SYSTEMS WITH BUILT IN FALL


 Installation: Top of channels level, installed in correct sequence to form an even gradient
without ponding or backfall. Commence laying from outlets.
 Other requirements:
- Brace sides during installation.
- Provide support chairs, cast in anchors and any other accessories required to install the
system complete.
 Silt and debris: Removed from entire system immediately before handover.
 Washings and detritus: Safely disposed without discharging into sewers or watercourses.

600 RADIUS KERBS/ CHANNELS


 Usage: Radii of 12 m or less.

610 ANGLE KERBS


 Usage: Internal and external 90° changes of direction.
 Cutting of mitres: Not permitted.

620 ACCURACY
 Deviations (maximum):
- Level: ± 6 mm.
- Horizontal and vertical alignment: 3 mm in 3 m.

630 NARROW MORTAR JOINTS


 Jointing: Ends of units buttered with bedding mortar as laying proceeds. Joints completely
filled, tightly butted and surplus mortar removed immediately.
- Joint width: 3 mm.

640 TOOLED MORTAR JOINTS


 Jointing: Ends of units buttered with bedding mortar as laying proceeds. Joints completely
filled and tooled to a neat flush profile.
- Joint width: 6 mm.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 376 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

641 TOOLED COLOURED MORTAR JOINTS


 Jointing: Ends of units buttered with bedding mortar as laying proceeds. Joints completely
filled and raked out to a depth of 10 mm for pointing.
- Joint width: 6 mm.
 Pointing: Joints refilled and tooled to a neat flush profile.
- Pointing mortar: 1:3 cement: sand.
- Pigment colour: As approved by the Employer’s Representative to match kerbs.

650 SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS


 Joint filler: Compressible cellular rubber or plastics compatible with specified sealant.
 Filler installation: Built in as work proceeds, extending through haunching and foundation.
Filler positioned accurately to fully support sealant at the recommended depth below exposed faces
of units.
 Joint width 10 mm
 Sealant: High modulus silicone complying with green building regulation.
- Colour: As approved by the Employer’s Representative to match kerbs.
 Sealant application: As section Z22.

***End of Section Q10***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 377 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION Q20
GRANULAR SUB-BASES TO ROADS/ PAVINGS

Page 378 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Q20 GRANULAR SUB-BASES TO ROADS/ PAVINGS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with:-


 Preparation of subgrades.
 Subgrade improvement layers.
 Granular sub-bases.
 Aggregate road base.
 Blinding to sub-bases.

110 THICKNESSES OF SUB-BASE/ SUBGRADE IMPROVEMENT LAYERS


 Thicknesses: See sections:
- Q24 Interlocking brick/ block roads/ pavings.

120A CHECKING CALIFORNIA BEARING RATIO (CBR) OF SUBGRADES


 Subgrade variation: If material appears to vary from that stated in the site investigation report, or
if there are extensive soft spots, test subgrade CBR to BS 1377-4 or BS 1377-9. Contractor shall
submit proposal based on Geo technical engineer’s recommendation. Minimum CBR for the sub-
grade shall be 15% unless higher value is required as per detailed design. If subgrade
improvement is required, then the Contractor shall carry out the same as part of his design and build
responsibility.

140 EXCAVATION OF SUBGRADES


 Final excavation to formation/ subformation level: Carry out immediately before compaction of
subgrade.
 Soft spots and voids: Shall be rectified by the Contractor as per Geo technical agency’s
recommendation. .
 Old drainage and service trenches: Excavate to remove soft or damaged material, then backfill with
specified granular material and compact.
 Wet conditions: Do not excavate or compact when the subgrade may be damaged or
destabilized.

145A PREPARATION/ COMPACTION OF SUBGRADES


 Timing: Immediately before placing sub-base.
 Soft or damaged areas: Excavate and replace with sub-base material, compacted in layers
250mm (maximum) thick.
 Compaction: Thoroughly, by roller or other suitable means, adequate to resist subsidence or
deformation of the subgrade during construction and of the completed roads/ pavings when in
use. Take particular care to compact fully at intrusions, perimeters and where local excavation and
backfilling has taken place. Sub grade shall be compacted to minimum 95% of the MDD
determined in accordance with BS 1377 part 4 method 3.6.

150 SUBGRADES FOR VEHICULAR AREAS


 Preparation and treatment: To Highways Agency 'Specification for highway works', clauses 616
and 617.

180 NOTICE
 Give notice: After preparation and compaction of subgrades.
 Period of notice: 24 hrs.

205A HIGHWAYS AGENCY TYPE 2 GRANULAR MATERIAL


 Material: Refer to Clause 211A.
 CBR (minimum): 30%.
 Testing: One field density test for every 250m2 area / layer and one test each for MDD & CBR
for every 1,000m3 of material.

211A GRANULAR MATERIAL


 Quality: Approved non-plastic soil obtained from excavations within the Works, or from
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 379 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

borrow pits approved by the Engineer. It shall not contain an excess of fines or organic matter,
and shall have the following properties:-

i. Soaked CBR (96 hours) at least 15% at 95% MDD according to BS 1377 Part 4 Test 7
generally and 30% at 95% MDD for yard, traffic areas and parking when used as sub base
under the road base layer.

ii. Liquid limit less than 35% according to BS 1377, Part 2 ,Test 4.5

iii. Plasticity Index less than 6 according to BS 1377 Part 2, Test 5.4

iv. Chloride and Sulphate content shall be less than 3.3% and 2% respectively when
determined in accordance with BS 812 part 117 and 118.

v. Maximum particle size shall be 60mm

vi. Maximum passing sieve Size 0.075mm shall not exceed 10% when determined according
to BS 1377 Part 2 1990 Clause 9.2.

vii. Organic matter content (BS 1377 Part 3 (Method 3) shall be less than 0.15%

 Filling: Spread and levelled in 150 mm maximum layers, each layer thoroughly compacted to
95% of MDD.

230 PLACING GRANULAR MATERIAL GENERALLY


 Preparation: Loose soil, rubbish and standing water removed.
 Structures, membranes and buried services: Ensure stability and avoid damage.

235 AGGREGATE ROAD BASE MATERIAL


 Quality: shall be free from dirt, shale or other delirious matter and shall be of such quality that it
will bind readily to form a stable road base. Road base shall consist of uniform mixtures of gravel
and/or crushed gravel with sand, silt and clay conforming to the specified gradation limits.
 The requirements for aggregate road base are:

Liquid Limit BS 1377: Part 2: Test 4.5 25% maximum


Plasticity Index BS1377: Part 2: Test 5 6 maximum
Sand Equivalent ASTM D-2419 40% minimum
Loss by Abrasion ASTM C-131 or C-535 40%
maximumFlakiness Index (BS812 Part 105.1) (Coarse Aggregate) 35 maximum
Elongation Index (BS812 Part 35 maximum
105.2)(Coarse Aggregate)
Soundness (ASTM C88) (Magnesium 12% maximum
Sulphate) 5 cycles

Organic Impurities (BS 1377 Part 3 Method 3) 0.2% maximum

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 380 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Acid Soluble Chlorides (BS 812 Part 117)


(CombinedAggregate)
Acid Soluble Sulphates (BS812 Part 118) (CombinedAggregate)
Maximum Dry Density BS 1377: Part 4: Test 3.6
CBR on Remoulded Samples after 4 days soaking at 95%of the maximum dry density (BS
1377:Part 4: Test 7)1% maximum

Sampling method to be in accordance with ASTM D75

 The gradation limits when tested in accordance with BS 1377: Part 2: Test 9.2 shall be as
follows:

Sieve Size (BS) Percent Passing

50 mm 100
37.5 mm 70 - 100
28 mm 55 - 85
20 mm 50 - 80
10 mm 40 - 70
5 mm 30 - 60
2.36 mm 20 - 50
0.425 mm 10 - 30
0.075 mm 5 – 15

241 LAYING GRANULAR SUB-BASES FOR VEHICULAR AREAS, YARD AND PARKING
 Proposals: Well in advance of starting work submit details of:
- Maximum depth of each compacted layer.
- Type of plant.
- Minimum number of passes per layer.
 General: Spread and levelled in layers. As soon as possible thereafter compact each layer.
 At drainage fittings, inspection covers, perimeters and where local excavation and backfilling
has taken place: Take particular care to compact fully.
 Sub-base surface after compaction and immediately before overlaying: Uniformly well closed
and free from loose material, cracks, ruts or hollows.

250 LAYING GRANULAR SUB-BASES FOR PEDESTRIAN AREAS


 General: Spread and levelled.
 Compaction:
- Timing: As soon as possible after laying.
- Method: By roller or other suitable means, adequate to resist subsidence or deformation of
the sub-base during construction and of the completed paving when in use. Take
particular care to compact fully at intrusions, perimeters and where local excavation and
backfilling has taken place.

252 LAYING AGREGATE ROAD BASE FOR VEHICULAR AREAS, YARD AND PARKING
 Aggregate road base shall be machine laid in layers not exceeding 150mm in compacted
depth.
 Segregation shall be avoided and avoid rutting of sub base during spreading of aggregate road
base materials.
 Road base shall be compacted to 98% of MDD with suitable approved compaction equipment.
Moisture content of the road base shall be adjusted prior to compaction to +2% of the OMC.
 The contractor shall program his operations to avoid the drying out of the road base during
construction. The surface on completion shall be well closed, free from movement under the

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 381 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

compaction plant, cracks or loose material.

255 TESTING OF SUB BASE / ROAD BASE


 One sample every 1,000 cub.m shall be tested in an approved independent laboratory for
grading, Atterberg limits, MDD, chloride and sulphate and CBR. If the total quantity is less than
1,000 cub.m at least one sample shall be tested as minimum requirement. Three in situ field
density test shall be carried out on every unit of sub base / road base laid (one unit being
1,500 sq.m). All test shall be carried out in accordance with relevant British Standards.

310 ACCURACY
 Permissible deviation (maximum) from required levels, falls and cambers:
Roads Footways
Parking areas Recreation areas
Subgrade + 20 mm ± 20 mm
- 30 mm
Sub-base ± 20 mm. ± 12 mm.

Road-base + 00 mm +00mm
- 10mm - 10mm

320 BLINDING
 Locations: Surfaces to receive sand bedded interlocking brick or block paving to sections Q24
and Q25.
 Material: Sand, fine gravel, PFA or other approved.
 Finish: Close, smooth, compacted surface.

340 PROTECTION
 Sub-bases: As soon as practicable, cover with subsequent layers, specified elsewhere
 Subgrades and sub-bases: Prevent damage from construction traffic, construction operations
and inclement weather.

***End of Section Q20***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 382 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION Q24
INTERLOCKING BRICK/ BLOCK ROADS/
PAVINGS

Page 383 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Q24 INTERLOCKING BRICK/ BLOCK ROADS/ PAVINGS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with:-


 Blocks and pavers (of concrete, clay or natural stone), laid on a sand bedding (laying course),
with joints of 2–5 mm filled with dry sand and vibrated to produce an interlocking flexible
pavement. Many concrete blocks, although marketed as setts (imitating natural stone), are laid in
this way.
 Permeable paving using concrete blocks or clay pavers.
 Integral purpose-made mortar-bedded accessories, such as kerbs, edge and intermediate
restraints, solid drainage channels and traffic calming components.

TYPES OF PAVING

110 CONCRETE BLOCK PAVING TO STAFF/VISITOR CAR PARKING AREAS


 Granular sub-base & road base: As clause Q20/ 211A and 235.
- Thickness: Minimum 150 mm for sub base and 150mm for road base unless
morethickness is required as per Contractor’s design.
 Bedding: As clause 455, compacted by the most suitable method, as clause 475. Use only one
method for each area of paving.
- Nominal thickness after compaction: 50 mm.
 Blocks: To BS EN 1338: and DM advisory note no.006.
- Weathering resistance class W1
- Abrasion resistance class A2
- Slip/ skid resistance class: S3.
Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Sizes: 200 x 100 x 80 mm unless more thickness required as per Contractor’s design.
- Special blocks: As per approved shop drawings where applicable.
- Colour/ Finish: As per approved shop drawings.
 Jointing material: Dry sand as clause 510.
 Setting out:
- Bond: As per approved shop drawings or as directed by the Employer’s Representative.
- Features: As per approved shop drawings where applicable.

112 CONCRETE BLOCK PAVING TO FOOTPATHS


 Granular sub-base: As clause Q20/ 211A.
- Thickness: 150 mm.
 Bedding: As clause 455, compacted by the most suitable method, as clause 475. Use only one
method for each area of paving.
- Nominal thickness after compaction: 50 mm.
 Blocks: To BS EN 1338: and DM advisory note no.006.
- Weathering resistance class W1
- Abrasion resistance class A2
- Slip/ skid resistance class: S2.
Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.
- Sizes: 200 x 100 x 60 mm unless otherwise approved.
- Special blocks: As per approved shop drawings where applicable.
- Colour/ Finish: As per approved shop drawings.
 Jointing material: Dry sand as clause 510.
 Setting out:
- Bond: As per approved shop drawings or as directed by the Employer’s Representative.
- Features: As per approved shop drawings where applicable.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 384 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

GENERAL

211 COLOUR BANDING


 General: Unless premixed by manufacturer, select blocks/ pavers/ setts vertically from at least 3
separate packs in rotation, to avoid colour banding.

220 SAMPLES AND TESTING


 General: Before ordering, submit samples of all types of blocks/ pavers/ setts that are
representative of colour and appearance for approval.
 Testing: Testing by independent laboratory shall be arranged by the Contractor for verifying
compressive strength and water absorption for paving blocks. Two blocks shall be drawn from
each group of 1,000 blocks for sampling 10 blocks every designated 5,000 block section.

230A CONTROL SAMPLES


 General: Carry out sample area of finished work:
- Types of paving: All types of paving specified in this section and applicable to the project.
- Location: As agreed with the Employer’s Representative.
- Size (minimum): 1.5 x 1.5 m.
- Features to be included: Kerbs, channels, recessed lights, recessed manhole covers or other
features where applicable.
 Give notice: When ready for inspection.
 Timing: Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.

242 ADVERSE WEATHER (SAND BEDDED AND JOINTED PAVING)


 Stockpiled bedding material: Protect from saturation.
 Exposed areas of sand bedding and uncompacted areas of paving: Protect from heavy rainfall.
 Sand bedding that becomes saturated before laying paving: Remove and replace, or allow to
dry before proceeding.
 Damp conditions: Brush in as much jointing sand as possible. Minimize site traffic over paving.
As soon as paving is dry, top up joints and complete compaction.

248 BEDDING LAYER TOLERANCES AFTER FINAL COMPACTION


 50 mm nominal thickness: +10 to -10 mm.

260 LEVELS OF PAVING


 Permissible deviation from specified levels:
- Generally: ±6 mm.
 Height of finished paving above features:
- At drainage channels and kerbs: +3 to +6 mm.

270 REGULARITY
 General: Where appropriate in relation to the geometry of the surface, variation in gap under a 3
m straight edge placed anywhere on the surface (maximum) to be 6 mm.
 Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
 Difference in level between adjacent blocks/ pavers/ setts (maximum): 2 mm.

PREPARATION/ LAYING

360 CONDITION OF SUB-BASES/ ROAD BASES BEFORE LAYING SAND BEDDING COURSE
 Granular surfaces:
- Sound, clean, smooth and close-textured enough to prevent migration of sand bedding
into the sub-base/ overlay during compaction and use.
- Free from movement under compaction plant and free from compaction ridges, cracks
and loose material.
 Prepared existing and new bound bases (roadbases): Sound, clean, free from rutting or major
cracking and cleared of sharp stones, projections or debris.
 Bound base (roadbase) surface tolerance: +0 to -10 mm.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 385 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Levels and falls: Accurate and within specified tolerances.


 Drainage outlets: Within +0 to -10 mm of required finished level.
 Edge restraints, manhole covers, drainage outlets and the like: Complete, to required levels, and
adequately bedded and haunched in mortar that has reached sufficient strength.
 Haunching to gullies, manhole covers and inside face of edge restraints: Vertical, so that pavings
do not 'ride up' when compacted.

445 GEOTEXTILE PATCHES OVER DRAINAGE HOLES


- Product reference: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to the Employer’s
Representative's approval.
 Laying: Lay geotextile patches 750 x 750 mm square, on the base, centred over each hole.

455 SAND FOR BEDDING


 Type: Sharp black sand to BS 882 with a particle size of 4mm containing not more than 3% silt
and/or clay by weight.
 Purity: Free from deleterious salts, contaminants and cement. Permissible sulphate and chloride
contents shall not exceed 0.4% and 0.06% respectively (expressed only as SO 3 and Cl by
weight).
 Procurement: Obtain from one source and ensure consistent grading.
 Moisture content: Maintain even moisture content that will give maximum compaction. Sand
squeezed in the hand should show no free water and bind together when pressure is released.
Sand shall be allowed to drain before use, and shall be covered with suitable sheeting to
minimize moisture changes.

465 LAYING BEDDING GENERALLY


 Site trial: Determine by trial the depth of loose bedding material needed to ensure specified
bedding course thickness after final compaction of paving.
 Bedding materials: Do not deliver to working area over uncompacted paving.
 Bedding course prepared area: 1 m (minimum) to 3 m (maximum) in advance of laying face,
and 1 m (maximum) at end of working period.
 Protection of prepared bedding course: Do not allow traffic or leave exposed. Fill, rescreed and
recompact areas disturbed by removal of screed rails or trafficking. Lay blocks/ pavers/ setts
immediately.

475 LAYING BEDDING (PARTIALLY PRECOMPACTED)


 General: Spread, in a loose uncompacted layer, approximately the required final thickness of
bedding material and compact with a plate compactor. Spread a further loose layer
approximately 15 mm thick, and screed to levels.

485 LAYING BLOCKS/ PAVERS/ SETTS


 General: Commence from an edge restraint using propose made starter blocks. Vibrate to
produce thoroughly interlocked paving of even overall appearance with regular joints and
accurate to line, level and profile.
 Bedding of units: Firm, so that rocking or subsidence does not occur or develop.
 Working face: Lay blocks/ pavers/ setts hand tight. Maintain open non castellated working face.
Do not use mechanical force to obtain tight joints.
 Joint width: 2-5 mm.
 Placing: Squarely with minimum disturbance to bedding.
 Supply to laying face: Deliver over newly laid paving but stack at least 1 m back from laying
face. Do not allow plant to traverse areas of uncompacted paving.
 Alignment: Continually check with string lines as work proceeds to ensure maintenance of
accurate bond.
 Infill at edge restraints: Complete as work proceeds. Cut units accurately and maintain specified
joint width. Avoid very small infill pieces at edges by breaking bond on the next course in from
the edge, using cut blocks/ pavers/ setts not less than 1/3 full size.
 Cut edges: Turn inwards where possible; do not position against edge restraints or other
features.
 In situ mortar infill: Do not use.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 386 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

495 OBSTRUCTIONS
 Cutting: After laying full paving units, trim blocks/ pavers/ setts neatly around drainage fittings and
other obstructions. Cut units accurately and maintain joint width within specified range. Do not
reduce thickness of blocks/ pavers/ setts.
 In situ concrete surrounds:
- Locations: Where agreed on site.
- Standard: To BS 8500 &BS EN 206, Grade C35 air entrained, maximum aggregate size 10
mm.
- Shape and size: Rectangular, 100 mm (minimum) all round obstruction.
- Thickness (minimum): Combined depth of blocks/ pavers/ setts and sand bedding.
- Colour: To the Employer’s Representative's selection.

500 CUTTING BLOCKS/ PAVERS/ SETTS


 General: Cleanly and accurately, without spalling.
- Do not mark or damage visible surfaces.
 Other requirements: Cut blocks using a masonry saw only.

510 SAND FOR JOINTING


 Type: Clean free flowing dried silica sand with particle size of 0.3mm.
- Do not use sand that will stain paving units.
 Purity: Free from deleterious salts, contaminants and cement.

520 COMPACTING AND JOINTING


 Timing:
- After edge restraint/ kerb haunchings have matured.
- As laying proceeds, but after infilling at edges. Do not leave uncompacted areas of pavingat
end of working periods.
 Compacting:
- Standard: To BS 7533-3, Annex F, site category III and IV.
- General: Thoroughly compact blocks/ pavers/ setts with vibrating plate compactor to
achieve specified bedding course thickness. Apply same compacting effort throughout. Do
not damage kerbs and adjacent work.
- Neoprene sole plate: Use throughout.
 Areas not to be compacted:
- Within 1 m of working face.
- Within 1 m of unrestrained edges.
 Surface levels: Check frequently. Lift and relay areas not at specified level.
 Jointing: Where jointing material is specified, brush into joints, revibrate surface and repeat as
necessary to completely fill joints.

COMPLETION

615 COMPLETION OF PAVING WITH SAND FILLED JOINTS


 Sand dressing: Leave a thin layer of dry jointing sand over the paving, sweep clean before
practical completion.
 Vacuum cleaning machines: Do not use.

***End of Section Q24***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 387 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION Q40
FENCING

Page 388 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Q40 FENCING

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. The Contractor shall comply with Guide lines and
specific requirements of DDA and shall refer to fencing guidelines and details attached as part of
Volume V of Tender Documents and the images as per Volume IV of tender documents.

FENCING SYSTEMS

110 CHAIN LINK FENCING- Generally


 Standard: To BS 1722-1, and DDA guide lines. Reference is made to fencing guide lines
and drawings attached as part of Volume V of Tender documents.
 Finish:
- All Metals shall be hot dipped galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M and then coated
with polyester resin to a total resin thickness of 300 microns.
- All wires and fence shall be galvanized plus extruded polyvinyl chloride coated
except barbed wire.
- Barbed wire shall be galvanized.
- All nuts, bolts, washer shall be SS304 black passivated.
- Eye bolts and turn buckles shall be SS304.
 Height: 2400mm plus barbed wires.
 Mesh and wire:
- Chain-link fence fabric 50x50mm mesh with 3.76/4.88mm diameter wire
galvanizedplus extruded PVC coated. 2.55m height and 175mm buried in concrete
belt.
- Line wire 4.00/5.00 mm diameter wire galvanized plus extruded PVC coated- 5 rows.
- Stirrup wire 2.50/3.55 mm diameter wire galvanized plus extruded PVC coated.
- Tie wire 1.80/2.60 mm diameter wire galvanized plus extruded PVC coated.
- Barbed wire 2.5 mm diameter wire galvanized, 2 ply- 3 rows.
 Posts and struts:
- Intermediate post 60.3mm OD steel tube with 3.91mm wall thickness.
- Strainer posts 73 mm OD steel tube with 5.16mm wall thickness with 2 no
horizontalsupport.
- End posts 73 mm OD steel tube with 5.16mm wall thickness with 1 no
horizontal support.
- Corner posts 73 mm OD steel tube with 5.16mm wall thickness.
- Top rail 42.2mm OD and 3.56mm thick.
- Horizontal support 48.3mm OD and 3.68 mm thick.
- Treatment for post and struts: Hot dipped galvanized and then coated with
polyester resin to a total resin thickness of 300 microns.
 Centers of posts (maximum):
- Straining posts: 68 m in straight runs and at all ends, corners, changes of direction
and acute variations in level.
- Intermediate posts: 2.4 m.
 Method of setting posts and struts:
- Straining/end posts: Concrete base 500x500x750mm.
- Struts: Concrete base 300x600x600mm.
- Intermediate posts: Concrete base 300x300x750mm.
- Anchor plate: 150x150x3mm MS plate welded at bottom of all posts.
- Concrete belt: Continuous concrete belt 150(W) x 225(H) mm belt.
 Accessories:
- Provide all accessories like turn buckles M10x7” long, Heavy duty extension
arm, expansion sleeves, post caps with provision for connecting barbed wire
extension arm and fitting.
- Stretcher bar 25x5mm.
- Truss rod 10mm dia.
- 6mm dia galvanized steel bars cast in concrete @600mm c/c threaded through
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 389 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

thebottom row of mesh.


 Conformity: Submit manufacturer's and installer's certificates, to BS 1722-1.
 Other requirements: Mesh should be carried 150mm below ground level and the
firststraining wire should be 60mm above ground level.
Note: The given images (Volume IV and V of Tender documents) shall be referred to for fencing, iefree
zone fence, plot fence and neighbor side fence.

GATES, POSTS AND STILES

510 FIELD GATES AND POSTS


 Standard: To BS 3470.
- Product reference: Manually operated sliding gate.
 Size: As drawings. Min overall height shall be 1800mm from finished gate level.
 Materials: Mild steel grade S275JR and bolts grade 8.8.
- Treatment: Hot dipped galvanized and durable polyester powder coated. Color
to Employer’s Representative’s approval.
- Main frame: RHS 120x80x5mm subject to final approval as per approved
shopdrawing.
- Infill: SHS 50x50x3mm subject to final approval as per approved shop drawing.
- Main vertical post: SHS 100x100x5mm subject to final approval as per
approvedshop drawing.
- Bracket support: SHS 100x100x5mm subject to final approval as per approved
shopdrawing.
- Top guiding wheel: 50mm dia Teflon
- Bottom Gate wheel: 80mm dia GI
- Bottom rail: 25mm dia GI rod( bottom rail shall not be recessed type to
avoidaccumulation of debris)
- Bottom rail guide: 100x6mm steel
 Fittings: Submit shop drawings for approval.
 Method of setting posts: Embedded in reinforced cement concrete.
 Accessories: All accessories required for the smooth operation shall be provided.
Necessary RCC columns, concrete base, guide system, stopper etc shall be provided.

ACCESSORIES

635 GATE OPENERS ELECTRIC MOTOR


 Manufacturer: Submit proposal for approval.
- Product reference: To Employer’s Representative’s approval based on the
detaileddesign proposed by the Contractor.
 Type: To Employer’s Representative’s approval.
 Mechanism: As per approved detailed design.
 Number of transmitters: As per approved detailed design.
 Accessories: As per approved detailed design.

EXECUTION

710 INSTALLATION GENERALLY


 Set out and erect:
- Alignment: Straight lines or smoothly flowing curves.
- Tops of posts: Following profile of the ground.
- Setting posts: Rigid, plumb and to specified depth, or greater where necessary
to ensure adequate support.
 Fixings: All components securely fixed.

715 COMPETENCE
 Operatives: Contractors must employ competent operatives.
 Qualifications: Submit certification of training.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 390 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

720 SETTING POSTS IN CONCRETE


 Standard: To BS 8500-2.
 Mix: Designated concrete not less than grade M30.
 Alternative mix for small quantities: Submit proposal.
 Admixtures: Do not use.
 Holes: Excavate neatly and with vertical sides.
 Filling: Position post/ strut and fill hole with concrete to not less than the specified
depth,well rammed as filling proceeds and consolidated.
 Backfilling of holes not completely filled with concrete: Excavated material, well rammed
and consolidated.

730 EXPOSED CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS


 Filling: Compact until air bubbles cease to appear on the upper surface.
 Finishing: Weathered to shed water and trowelled smooth.

766 ARRIS RAILS


 Fixing:
- Rail end section: Shaped to adequately fill the post mortice or recess.
- Recessed posts: Rails bolted to each post.
- Top rails: Fixed at both ends using purpose made accessories.
 Rails with split ends: Replace.

780 DAMAGE TO GALVANIZED SURFACES


 Treatment of minor damage (including on fasteners and fittings): Low melting point
zinc alloy repair rods or powders made for this purpose, or at least two coats of zinc-rich
paint to BS 4652.
 Thickness: Apply sufficient material to provide a zinc coating at least equal in thickness
to the original layer.

790 SITE PAINTING


Timing: Prepare surfaces and apply finishes as soon as possible after fixing.
COMPLETION
910 CLEANING
 General: Leave the works in a clean, tidy
condition. Surfaces: Clean immediately before
handover.

920 FIXINGS
 All components:
Tighten. Timing:
Before handover.

930 GATES
 Hinges, latches and closers: Adjust to provide smooth operation. Lubricate where
necessary.
- Timing: Before handover.

***END OF SECTION Q40***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 391 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION Q41
BARRIERS/GUARDRAILS

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 392 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Q41 BARRIERS/ GUARDRAILS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with:-


 Pedestrian and vehicular barriers/ guardrails including associated gates, located externally or
within certain structures, e.g. sports grounds, car parks. Fixing to structures and ground
mountings are covered, including excavation, concreting and backfilling.
 Traffic control items such as vehicle flow plates, traffic ramps where not an integral part of the
surfacing and height restrictors.

 Specialist subcontractor (appointed by the main contractor) shall be responsible for the supply,
installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance of vehicle control barrier system and
access controls.
 Main contractor shall be responsible for coordination, foundation, excavation, laying of conduits,
all general builders’ works, providing storage space and providing temporary water and electricity
for works and testing. Main contractor/MEP contractor shall be responsible for providing
permanent power supply including supply and fixing of W/P isolator, interfacing with FA control
panels and supply of ducts and conduits.

TYPES OF BARRIERS/ GUARDRAILS

190 VEHICLE CONTROL BARRIERS


 Product reference: To the Employer’s Representative's Selection.
 Boom span: Max 3 m unless otherwise required as per detailed design. Barrier arm
should have light strips or red reflectors to be visible at night.
 Method of operation: Vertical lifting pole.
 Control system:
a. For HGV entrance: Gate barrier should be controlled using proximity card access
control system for entrance and exit. The security guard should be able to operate the
gate barrier system with remote control and switch from the security room.
b. For staff/visitor parking: Gate barrier should be controlled using access control
system used for the facility for entrance and exit. All staff shall be using proximity cards
for entry and exit through the barrier, however the supply and installation of card
reader and proximity cards shall be in tenant’s scope of work and the D&B
contractor shall make all provisions for the same (power, containment, space etc).
The recepcenist should be able to communicate and operate the gate barrier
system remotely from the office reception for visitors.
 Fixings/ Foundations: Expanding anchors grouted into reinforced concrete foundation. Fixing
details to be submitted for the Employer’s Representative's approval. The gate barrier machine and
control unit shall be protected by a bollard mesh to prevent damage from vehicle. Thereshall be
a speed breaker before and after the gate barrier.
 Other requirements:
 The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.
 The equipment shall be CE certified.
 The vehicle control system shall be designed for at least 10 years of continuous
operation.
 The vehicle control barrier(s) shall be able to operate in ambient temperatures of -30
degree C to +50 degree C and shall be able to withstand humidity up to 99% non -
condensing.
 The vehicle control barrier(s) shall be manufactured of durable, non-corrosivematerials
(Grade 316 satin stainless steel for the column, impact resistant synthetic material for
the top section and glass fibre reinforced plastic for the arm).
 The housing shall conceal any service doors or key locks.
 Both ends of the arm shall be fitted with light collecting polycarbonate cover caps and an
internal halogen lamp.
 The vehicle control barrier(s) shall be connected to the BMS if provided.
 The vehicle control barrier(s) shall use a geared torque motor rated for continuous
operation in a high volume traffic environment of at least 70 vehicles per hour. The
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 393 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

system should be purely electro-mechanical and any related hydraulic system shall be
avoided.
 The barrier arm shall complete its descend by 2 seconds. The arm should commence
the descend within one second on leaving the tail of the vehicle. A photo sensor to
detect passing vehicle or loop below the barrier shall be provided for safety.
 The barrier arm shall smoothly operate without any jerks and shall not vibrate at the
end stop points.
 The barrier shall retract if it comes into contact with any opposing force or
obstruction.
 The vehicle control barrier(s) shall trigger an alarm upon detaching of the arm.
 In case of power failure, the vehicle control barrier(s) shall open automatically and
remain open until power is restored.
 The vehicle control barrier(s) shall be interfaced with the fire alarm system in order to open
automatically in case a fire is detected in the car park. The barrier(s) shall remain open
until manually reset.
 For HGV barriers- the required number of remote control shall be provided by the
Contractor in addition to the switch operation.
 For Staff and visitors- the supply of proximity cards shall be in end user’s scope.

INSTALLATION

410 WORK ON OR ADJACENT TO HIGHWAYS


 Requirement: Comply with the local authority regulations especially Road and Transport
Authority regulations and Dubai Municipality regulations.

420 ALIGNMENT
 Erection: Fences/ barriers to present a flowing alignment. Tops of posts to follow ground
profile.
 Tolerance: ±30 mm of prescribed alignment and, within any 10 m length, ±15 mm from the
straight or required radius

430 ERECTION GENERALLY


 Protection: Coat all internal and external surfaces of aluminium and steel posts below and upto
150 mm above ground level, with two coats of bituminous paint to BS 6949 type 2, unless other
applied surface finish is specified.
 Prevention of electrolytic corrosion: Isolate dissimilar metals.
 Steel components: Do not drill, cut or weld after galvanizing.

480 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS FOR POSTS


 Excavations: To have vertical sides. Dispose of all arisings. Blind excavation bottoms with a
50mm layer of concrete.
 Concrete mix: To BS 8500-2, designated mix not less than GEN 4 or Standard mix not less than
ST5. Do not use admixtures.
 Placing concrete: Fill holes to the specified depth and fully compact. Do not backfill for at least
four days.
 Temporary support to posts: Provide for a at least four days after placing concrete.

***End of Section Q41***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 394 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION Q50
SITE/STREET FURNITURE/EQUIPMENT

Page 395 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Q50 SITE/ STREET FURNITURE/ EQUIPMENT

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

120 STEEL GATE

Refer Clause 510 of section Q40.

190 BOLLARDS for internal and external use


 Manufacturer: Submit proposal.
- Product reference: To Employer’s Representative’s selection. Diameter shall be as per
employer’s requirement or as approved in detailed design stage.
 Material: Steel
- Finish: Galvanized and epoxy painted.
- Colour: To Employer’s Representative’s selection.
 Height above ground: Min 1.5m subject to confirmation during detailed design.
 Special features: External bollards shall conform to RTA standards.
 Method of fixing: Embedded in concrete base.

SITE AND STREET FURNITURE

240 LITTER BINS

 Manufacturer: As per Employer’s Representative’s choice


- Product reference: As per Employer’s Representative’s choice.
 Material: As per Employer’s Representative’s choice
- Finish: As per Employer’s Representative’s choice.
- Colour: As per Employer’s Representative’s choice.
 Accessories/ Special requirements: As per Employer’s Representative’s choice.
 Method of fixing: As per Employer’s Representative’s choice.
320 FLAG STAFF (Not used)
 Manufacturer: Submit proposal for approval.
- Product reference: Aluminium poles suitable for hoisting national flag and company’s flags.
Flag pole shall be designed to withstand a wind speed of min 45m/s. Pole shall be cone
tapered shape with factory welded base plate.
 Height: 10 m from top of flag pole foundation.
 Material: 6063-T6 aluminium alloy seamless extruded tube.
- Finish: Polyester powder coated to a color subject to Employer’s Representative’s
selection.
 Accessories: All accessories shall be provided. Internal halyard system with heavy duty
nylon rope.
 Method of fixing: Mounted on concrete flag pole foundation with anchor bolts and
levelling nuts. Metal anchorages shall be stain less steel non-corrosive grade.

INSTALLATION
510 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS GENERALLY
 Standard: To BS 8500-2.
 Mix: Designated concrete not less than M30.
 Admixtures: Do not use.
 Foundation holes: Neat vertical sides.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 396 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Depth of foundations, bedding, haunching: Appropriate to provide adequate support


and to receive overlying soft landscape or paving finishes.
515 SETTING COMPONENTS IN CONCRETE
 Holes: As per approved shop drawing.
 Components: Accurately positioned and securely supported.
 Concrete fill: Fully compacted as filling proceeds.
 Concrete foundations exposed to view: Compacted until air bubbles cease to appear on
the upper surface, then weathered to shed water and trowelled smooth.
 Temporary component support: Maintain undisturbed for minimum 48 hours.
540 BUILDING IN TO MASONRY WALLS
 Components being built in: Accurately positioned and securely supported. Set in mortar
and pointed neatly to match adjacent walling.
 Temporary support: Maintain for 48 hours (minimum) and prevent disturbance.
545 ERECTION OF TIMBER AND PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES
 Checking: 5 days (minimum) before proposed erection date, check foundations, holding
down bolts, etc.
 Inaccuracies or defects in prepared bases or supplied structures: Report immediately.
Obtain instructions before proceeding.
550 DAMAGE TO GALVANIZED SURFACES
 Minor damage in areas up to 40 mm² (including on fixings and fittings): Make good.
- Material: Low melting point zinc alloy repair rods or powders made for this purpose or
at least two coats of zinc-rich paint to BS 4652.
- Thickness: Sufficient to provide a zinc coating at least equal to the original layer.
560 SITE PAINTING
Timing: Prepare surfaces and apply finishes as soon as possible after fixing.

****END OF SECTION Q50****

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 397 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION X12
VERTICAL PLATFORM LIFT SYSTEMS

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 398 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

X12 VERTICAL PLATFORM LIFT SYSTEMS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.


Elevators shall be supplied, installed, tested, commissioned and maintained by a specialist elevator
contractor appointed by the Design and Build Contractor.

15 RELATED DOCUMENTS
 Drawings and general provisions of the contract, general and supplementary conditions and
section A of specification applies to this section.

 Elevator Contractor to submit sectional drawings of the elevator and hoist way dimensions.

 Sectional drawings of pit depth, pit access ladder(s), clear overhead, including overhead hoisting
or machine beams, hoist way ventilation and any other information necessary for a complete
elevator installation should be provided.

 Hoist way enclosures shall have a fire resistance as per the regulation and Dubai Civil Defense
approval.

 Machinery spaces shall be enclosed with construction having a fire resistance rating of the hoist
way enclosure served by the machinery.

 Openings shall be protected with assemblies having a fire resistance rating of not less than that
required for the hoist way enclosure doors. Hoist way and machine room doors with shaft
enclosures having a fire resistance rating as per regulation.

 Hoist ways and elevator machine rooms protected with automatic sprinklers shall be
constructed in a way to disconnect automatically the main power supply to the affected
elevator prior to the release of water. (To be connected and integrated with the BMS).

 When sprinklers are installed in the hoist way, all electrical equipment located less than (50”)
above the pit floor shall be weather proof (NEMA 4), and wiring shall be identified for use in wet
locations in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70.

20 SCOPE
 This section includes electric traction passenger elevator for office.

 Scope of Work;
- Specifications covers the complete supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the
elevators as specified in schedules to be used in this project as manufactured by an
approved manufacturer, in accordance with the drawings, to the satisfaction of the
Employer’s Representative and Employer and subject to his approval.
- A building permit inspection and Certification to the satisfaction of the representative of
the Dubai Civil Defence as applicable.
- Compliance with the special requirements of local authorities and other requirements set
out in the Building Permit.
- Provision of any necessary isolation to minimize the transmission of vibration and noise to
other parts of the building, as prescribed by codes.
- A third party inspection and certification shall be carried out on conclusion of the
installation to check for compliance with the agreed supply and final specification. Elevator
contractor shall arrange for the Third Party inspection and certification subject to
Employer’s Representative’s approval.
- Training of the Employer’s and end user’s personnel shall also be included and shall be
sufficient to train a minimum of 4 personnel on 2 separate occasions in the operation and
safety and emergency procedures associated with all Vertical Transportation equipment/s.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 399 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

25 DEFINITIONS
 MC is the “Design and Build Contractor” and refers to works to be under taken by the
main contractor.
 EC is the “Elevator Contractor” and refers to the works to be under taken by the
elevator contractor.
 OT is “Other” trades and refers to other trades to undertake the work specified
 Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions;
performance below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials
or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and
similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions, poor ride quality.

30 SUBMITTALS AND SAMPLES


 The EC shall provide the following to the MC for the purpose of gaining approval. Scaled layout
drawings, A1 size, giving all relevant shaft, machine room and elevator information including but
not limited to

- Reactions, rail loads, fixings points, steel work, support/elevator points.


- Entrances, equipment arrangement, signalisation cut outs.
- Power requirements, acceleration / full load current, regenerative loads for applicable
motors and power conversion units.
- Car design drawing with Car Operating Panel layout and lighting.
- Levelling Accuracy +/- 3 mm under all load conditions.
- Builders Work drawing in conjunction with latest architectural, structural and MEP
drawings.

 Samples of each of the following (three pieces of each) as applicable


- Hall push buttons, hall lanterns with indicator, fire mans switches.
- Car push buttons, alarm button, door open button and key switches.
- Car interior finishes (as applicable) 150mm x 200mm and fittings (handrails, mirror etc).
- Car Design drawing with car operating panel layout and lighting.
- Lighting fixture.
 Starting within 2 to 3 weeks of Contract Award, submit detailed shop drawings
showing complete layout of elevator equipment including the following:-
- Location of machinery and apparatus and its relation to adjacent structural
components of the building including grid line reference.
- Loads to be carried on structure.
- Design of car enclosure including elevations showing all signage, signals and operating
controls.
- Design of shaft entrances showing location of all signals in elevation.
- Design of all hall and car operating controls and signals.
- Design of remote control panels.
- Separate structural general arrangement drawing showing the builder’s scope of work in
machine room, entrances, detailed holes and cut outs etc.
- General arrangement drawings must be submitted in A1 or A0 size with scale of
1:20, 1:25, 1:30, 1:40 or 1:50. Detailed drawings shall be in scale of 1:10 or 1:5

 Continuing Maintenance Proposal (EC to submit to the client directly): Fully comprehensive
annual service agreement cost for a period of 4 years after the Defects Liability Period.
 EC shall comply with Dubai Municipality and Dubai South Green Building
regulations/requirements.

35 QUALITY ASSURANCE
 Code Compliance & General Specifications: Regulations and Regulatory Bodies (but not limited
to)
- BSEN 81-1:1998+ A3:2009, EN81 70:2003
- EN 12015:2004- Electromagnetic Compatibility(Emission)

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 400 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- EN12016:2004+A1:2008- Electromagnetic Compatibility(Immunity)


- ASME A 17.1 for fire man’s operation for Elevators.
- EN 81-73:2005- Behaviour of Lifts in case of fire.
- Dubai Civil Defence requirements for elevator’s as applicable.
- Fire Mans use as per DM/DCD requirements.
- Dubai Municipality requirements for elevators as applicable.
- DDA regulations
- Seismic Risk Zone Requirements as per local municipal and civil Defence requirements.
- Building Movement Report, Fire Strategy/Evacuation report(As applicable)
- All applicable local, national and international, building standards, codes, regulation,
ordinances and by-laws which may govern the requirements of the installation.

 DEVIATIONS / CLARIFICATIONS:
- Any and all deviations and/or clarifications to the specifications must be clearly stated in
the tender offer with details of the deviation/clarification and reason. Details of
alternatives are to be provided at the time of tendering making reference to the page
number, clause and sub-clause for ease of cross reference. Failure to comply with this
requirement will imply compliance with the specifications and any works found to be not
in compliance will have to be replaced to meet requirements without any additional cost
to the Employer.
- The contractor who shall carry out the installation must have technical qualification of at
least five years experience, trained supervisory and installation personnel, and facilities to
install specified items.
- Contractor shall submit a list of his previous installations, including names and addresses to
the Employer’s Representative for approval. Also a detailed compliance statement shall be
provided against each items of this specification along with the tender submission.
- It is the responsibility of EC to ensure all related work to be provided by others or
modification required in the architectural/structural drawing is correctly shown in their
tender submission at the time of bid. All re-arrangements to suit EC’s requirement not
identified in writing and accepted by EC prior to or at the time of bid, will be at the
expense of EC.
- The major elevator components shall be the products of one manufacturer of established
reputation, either wholly or part of another manufacturer of established reputation
provided such items are employered and produced under coordinated specifications.

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

The Elevator Contractor shall manufacture, deliver, install, test / commissioning and hand over
the complete elevators as specified and in accordance with BS EN 81 Elevator Safety Code as
applicable. This work shall be done in accordance with local codes which may govern the
requirements.

- Where applicable type tested certificates, in English, are to be supplied.


- The specific requirements of the elevators and particular specifications are given in the
Schedules following.
- The Elevator Contractor shall commence the electrical installation from the circuit
breakers provided for this purpose by the MC. All the works shall be co-ordinated with the
other contractors prior to installation, so that there will be no areas of incompatibility. The
Elevator Contractor shall provide clear and specific power requirements to MC
- The elevator system shall be equipped with gearless PMSM and associated equipment,
elevator cars, latest solid state control systems and all other equipment and accessories
required to provide a complete, modern, durable and efficient vertical transport system.
- All the electrical equipment shall be compatible with the available electrical system of the
building, as specified under electrical section.
- All the components shall be selected to provide satisfactory operation under prevailing
environment condition at site.
- As Installed Drawings and Services Manuals: On completion of the elevators installation and
at least one week prior to the date of inspection, the EC shall hand over to the MC as-
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 401 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

installed elevator installation drawings, in accordance with the Employer’s


Representative’s requirements.
- Three sets of printed and bound instruction manuals for general running and maintenance
are to be provided. Soft copies also shall be provided.
- Provide minimum 3 sets of keys for all keyed switches.
- EC shall provide emergency release training covering all aspects needed for the manual
release of passengers trapped in the elevator.

40 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


 Deliver, store and handle materials, components and equipments in manufacturer’s protective
packaging.
 Store materials, components, and equipment off the ground, under cover, and in a dry
location. Handle according to manufactures written recommendations to prevent damage,
deterioration or soiling.

45 COORDINATION
 Coordinate sequence of elevator installation with other work to avoid delaying work.

 Main Contractor Provisions: Related builder’s works, including but not limited to;
- Entire Civil Work including Chipping, grouting, finishing, painting except wire mesh
partition, rail guard/mesh/safety chain where applicable. And third party certified steel
scaffolding in the lift shaft.
- Temporary and permanent power supply for installation and testing purposes up to the
head of the shaft as applicable with breakers and the EC is to give full details of
requirement with the tender.
- Third party certified Hoisting hooks / hoisting beams in the elevator shaft/machine
room as applicable.
- Sufficient weather proof lockable storage accommodation to store the elevator
materials at ground floor near elevator shaft. In case of limited space, additional off site
storage is to be provided by the MC.
- Crane facility for lifting materials to the various floors.
- Entire decorative finishing in car for passenger elevators if necessary. Especially flooring
like marble, granite or corian.
- All necessary wall openings, pipe sleeves, closure with fire sealant and related civil works
including chipping, grouting, finishing, and painting except elevator material.
- Providing survey in case of any apparent deviations in civil works and corrective works
as necessary.
- Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors
and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment.
Furnished templates, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors and installation
instructions and deliver to project site in time for installation.
- Pit ladder, steel ladder in machine rooms
- Handrails for the elevator machine slab.
- MEP contractor Provisions
- Air conditioner of suitable capacity in the machine room.
- Permanent 3 phase 400V 50 Hz and 1 PH 230V 50Hz TPN + SPN circuit breakers of
required capacity etc. at the head of the shaft as applicable
- Emergency standby generator of required capacity to run the elevators in the event
of power failure all in accordance with electrical specifications & drawings.
- Normally, closed type voltage free sensing contacts (rating of contact 125 V DC 5A) with
wiring from AST / Generator panel to elevator control panel.
- Provision of conduits with draw wire between elevator shaft and security / reception
for elevator interphone supervisory panel if applicable.
- Remote installation of remote wiring to the BMS room, CCTV, card reader etc. All
cabling and wiring to be provided by the MEP contractor.
- Normally open free sensing contacts with wiring from fire alarm panel to elevator
shaft, if automatic recalling of elevators during fire is required.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 402 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Elevator Monitoring System wiring to BMS Room

 Elevator Contractor Provisions: including but not limited to;


- Installation task lighting, power cables for hand tools, temporary works
requirement within the shaft.
- All landing entrance and protection during installation with safety lock facility.
- Temporary site office and equipment as required by the EC to fulfil his works.
- Guide rail fixing and anchor bolts.
- Pit separation screens to a height of 2500mm from the pit floor as applicable.
- All metal work associated with the support of all ropes and diversion frames/pulleys.
- Controller earth protection mats in the machine room.
- All guarding of elevator equipment.
- CCTV Co-axial cable between control room/head of shaft and car as applicable.
- Emergency Landing doors / Access at every 11 meters for Blind Shafts.
- Counter weight safety gear if required.
- All separator beams and sill support angles within elevator shaft.
- Permanent shaft lighting.
- Electro/mechanical contact for all emergency exit doors or car to car rescue system.
- Emergency exits as required.
- Building movement sensors/wind sensor/earth quake sensors.
- 24/7 monitoring interface as per DCD requirements.
- Third party inspection and certification.
- Fascia plates if required.

50 WARRANTY
 Special Manufactures Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which the manufacturer
agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period.
 The EC shall provide a warranty for a period of Twelve months from the date of Taking over
of the project.
 The EC will be responsible for the immediate replacement of any and all defective equipment
throughout this period.
 Additional Warranty: EC to provide additional warranty / maintenance of (24 or 48 months, as
deemed by owner / Operator). To include full maintenance service, replacement of any parts
with original manufacturer’s spares and to keep the elevator in excellent working condition,
other than the 12 months warranty period mentioned above. This shall begin at the end of the
warranty period of 12 months stated above. (Cost of such additional warranty period could be
submitted alongwith the Tender.)

105 ELEVATORS GENERALLY


 General: Elevator description
 Safe Carrying Capacity: Each elevator shall have a safe carrying load inclusive of weight of
complete car cable and ropes and in accordance with the attached Schedules. An Allowance of
minimum 350kgs for additional car interior finishes and car flooring is to be allowed.
 Speed m/s: The rated speed of the elevators shall be as specified in the Tender Specification
and rated in metres per second.
 Load kg: The rated load of the elevators shall be as specified in the Tender Specification and
rated in kilograms.
 EC to provide a detailed compliance statement along with tender deliverables.

115 SCHEDULE OF ELEVATOR.


 Specifications for Elevators:
- Elevator Reference : For offices.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 403 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- No of Elevators : 01
- Type : Passenger
- Capacity in Persons : 15 persons
- Capacity in Load : 1,150Kg
- Travel : As per drawing
- Floors Served : G and M.
- Floor Denominations : As approved by Employer.

 General:
- Speed : 1 m/s
- Machine Type : Gearless traction machine PMSM
- Drive System : AC VVVF
- Machine Room : With Machine room.
- Shaft Size (internal) : As per detailed design
- Pit Depth : As per requirement.
- Over-head : As per requirement.
- Control : 1 Car – Up and down
- Power Supply Main : 415V, 3Phase, 50Hz
- Power Supply Lighting : 230V, 1Phase, 50Hz
- Car & Landing Entrance Type : Two panel front, center opening
- Car & Landing Entrance Sizes : 1100 mm Wide x 2100 mm High (Clear)

 Car Door Operation:


- Door Operator Type : AC VVVF (closed loop)
- Door Protection : Pressure Sensitive Contact Switch
: Full height Curtain of lights
: Mechanical edge, Door reversal on contact,
buzzer

 Car & Landing Entrance Finishes:

- Car Door Panels & Frame : Brushed stainless steel


- Landing Dr. Panels & Frames : Brushed stainless steel
- Frames : Brushed stainless steel (full wall thick)
- Sill : Extruded Hard Aluminium
- Architraves : Brushed stainless steel
Car Internal Dimensions : 2000 mm Wide x 1400 mm Deep x 2300mm
High (Canopy). Provide maximum as possible

 Car Enclosure Finishes:


- Front Wall : Brushed SS
- Side Walls : Brushed SS
- Rear Wall : Brushed SS
- Skirting : Brushed Stainless Steel

 Ceiling:
- Type : Suspended ceiling with fully operational Trap
Door Above
- Finish : SS with LED lights
- Lighting : Auto on / off

 Handrail:
- Type / Finish : 30 mm round diameter, brushed SS
- Position : 3 sides
- Flooring : 30 mm recess. Marble flooring.
- Ventilation Fan : One – Discreet In Blowing

 Mirror:
- Type / Finish : 6mm thick Safety glass / Silver
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 404 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Frame : Full width, half height


- Location : Rear wall above handrail

 Car & Landing Signalization:


- Model Type : Manufactures Standard (Provide brochure)

 Car - Car Operating Panel:


- Position : Front Wall
- Type : Full Height
- Finish : Brushed SS
- Push button Type - Finish : Micro-movement with tactile button in SS
- Position Indicators : Dot Matrix with Direction Arrows
- Key Switches : Independent Service (all elevators)

 Landing - Push Button Station:


- Lowest & Upper Most Floors : Single push button with call registered light
- Intermediate Floors : N/A
- Call Station Faceplate Finish : Chosen from manufactures standard range
- Push button Type - Finish : Micro-movement with tactile button in SS

 Hall Lanterns:
- Main Floor : Combined Up/Down Arrows indicating
direction of travel with LED Dot-Matrix
Position Indicators
- Other Floors : As main floor.
- Gong : One Up / Two Down with volume control at
all landing entrance.
- Faceplate Finish : Brushed SS / provide brochure.

*Above details are indicative only and subject to final selection by the Employer

Features to be Included:
- Three station two-way intercom system
- CCTV camera provision
- Card reader access provision
- 3 station, two-way intercom system.
- Car emergency lighting(Min 2 hours)
- Independent key switch within car operating panel.
- Hoist way access switches.
- Door Nudging, over load and By-pass load function.
- Stuck-button supervision, car light supervision.
- Fire detection, motor protection, phase failure.
- Fully operational trap door above ceiling.
- Fire emergency operation(Phase 1, phase 2 and alternate floor fire recall)
- Regenerative Drive system.
- Automatic fan/light off (during idle period of 5 Min or more)
- Extended time feature including door open and close button.
- Provide Earth Quake Emergency Operation.
- Shall provide all safety features as per DCD and also comply with DM/DDA green building
regulation.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
220A SYSTEM PERFORMANCE GENERALLY
General: Provide manufactures standard elevator systems. Where components are not
otherwise indicated, provide standard components published by manufacturer as included
in standard pre-engineered elevator systems and is as required for the complete system.
Harmonics produced shall be within permitted IEC at the point-of-common-coupling of the

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 405 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

power supply feed. Special care shall be taken to incorporate into the design of the lift cars,
aspects to ensure that during rapid ascent or descent, car air-pressure variations do not
produce an unpleasant effect (Nausea) for the passengers.

225 TRACTION MACHINE


 The traction machine will be of the Machine Room less Type.
 The traction machine should be securely fixed and isolated by isolation pads.
 Elevators must be provided with controls to reduce energy demands. The elevator shall be
equipped with variable voltage and variable frequency controlled gear less motors, having
step-less, smooth speed time characteristics.
 The system shall combine the latest VVVF control utilizing vector control and IGBT
transistors. The traction sheave shall be made of suitable material to provide good wearing
properties of both ropes and sheaves.

 DC operated electromagnetic double independent brakes shall be provided. The brake


shoes being electrically held off the brake drum or disc and mechanically applied by
compression springs. A manual break release shall be provided to facilitate hand movement
of the elevator.

 Preference shall be for permanent magnet synchronous motor to provide highest possible
efficiency. The permanent magnet synchronous motor efficiency shall be 92 - 95% and have
a zero slip factor.

 Motor shall have protection against overheating and burning by the use of thyristor. If the
hoisting motor starts to overheat, the elevator car is driven to the nearest floor where the
doors will be opened to let the passenger out of the car. After the motor cools down the
elevator will resume normal operation. In the event of a motor over heating, provide in the
car operating panel a display which will illuminate advising persons to leave the car in this
event. At the same time this must be signalled to the building BMS.

 The winding insulation levels of the motors shall be of insulation Class ‘F’ and the motors
shall meet the requirements of BSEN 81.

 Motor Drive: The variable voltage, variable frequency motor drive {VVVF} unit will control
the motor speed using a microprocessor. The VVVF system will be provided with a
converter which performs AC - to - DC conversion and an inverter which is designed to
invert DC to three phase variable frequency AC. The inverter will give an output of
sinusoidal current by application of pulse width modulation technology. The inverter will
control voltage and frequency continuously and accurately in accordance with speed
command signal, which is performed by a microprocessor in the elevator controller.

 The VVVF drive unit will be capable of keeping the elevator service under the following
condition;

- Supply Line Voltage Fluctuation: 10% + 5 % from the rated


voltage Frequency Variation - + 2% from the rated frequency.
- The VVVF drive unit will be provided with contactors for removing the power from
themotor of the traction machine. The Contactors will open each time the car stops.
- The brakes of the traction machine will be applied while the contacts dropout.
- A pulse rotary encoder will detect the actual speed of the car. The difference between
the speed command signal and the actual speed measured by the pulse rotary
encoder will control the motor speed while the car is accelerating, decelerating and
landing.
- Protective devices will ensure to open the main circuit between the VVVF unit and the
motor of the traction machine to stop the elevator when one of the following
conditions occurs:

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 406 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Phase reversal; phase failure.


 Failure of supply voltage.
 Over current.
 Overheating of thyristors and transistors.
 Operation of any safety device.

230 SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM


 The control system will consist of the VVVF motor drive unit and a computerized controller.
 A computer controlled regulator will control the car speed by comparing the actual car
speed detected by a pulse – rotary encoder with an ideal speed pattern generated by a
microprocessor.
 While the car is accelerating the ideal accelerating pattern will be generated by
the microprocessor to obtain the smooth and optimum acceleration.
 While the car is decelerating the microprocessor will calculate and provide the ideal speed
pattern to obtain the comfortable and stable riding performance.
 At landing a smooth landing pattern will be generated by microprocessor and as soon as
the car has stopped the mechanical brakes will be applied to hold the car.
 Levelling accuracy under all load conditions must be +/-5mm
 Minimum/Maximum motor acceleration and jerk rates are to be acceleration 1.0m/s2 and
jerk 1.3 m/s3.
 Maximum Lateral Quaking [gal] 11.8 minimum and 21.8 maximum accepted for
ride comfort class.
 Maximum vertical Vibration [gal] 16.3 minimum and 26.6 maximum accepted for ride
comfort class.
 Acceleration component of side to side or front to back or vertical vibration measured by
PMT EVA-625 elevator vibration analysis system, shall not exceed 8 milli(g) for elevators
with rated speeds of 4.0mps or less.
 Car interior noise levels shall not exceed 52dBA, under all conditions of travel and during
door operation the noise level shall not exceed 55dBA.

235 OPERATIONS SYSTEMS


 General: Provide manufacture’s latest standard microprocessor operating system as required
to provide type of operation system indicated.
 Operation & Control: Group Selective Collective Operation: Where there is more than one
car in the group the operation will be of the selective collective type as mentioned in the
schedule for each elevator and group of elevators. The operating equipment will consist of a
series of micro touch buttons in each car, number to correspond to the various landings, a
riser of “UP” and “DOWN” buttons at the intermediate landings and single button at the
terminal landings, all connected electrically with the microprocessor governing floor selection
and direction of travel to supply the operation described below:-
 Group of two cars- One riser
 Group of three cars- Two riser etc.
 One car will be normally parked with doors closed at the main floor and other/s will be a
“FREE” car/s which park with doors closed at the last call floor. Each car will answer its “car
calls” for all floors respectively. The microprocessor calculates penalty values for such timings
as by-passing reversal and response by distantly positioned elevators and assigns the call to
the elevator that will minimize the total penalty value. Response to hall calls will be on the
basis of same direction priority response, nearest long waiting time prevention, car bunching
prevention etc. The control system is to be designed to optimise “Peak Period” service and be
able to automatically detect and responds to all peak demands. EC to provide full
description of the control systems offered for each single & group with description of the
features included as standard.
 Elevator Monitoring System (EMS): Provide a microprocessor based interactive monitoring
system which is to be located in the BMS room with CPU, SVGA monitor and keyboard. The
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 407 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

system shall be capable of monitoring, changing and storing each elevators group’s
performance, elevator status, tabular display, security features, landing lock out and fire mans
access to the designated Fire Mans elevator. Through the EMS the fire man shall be able to
gain access to all the floors.
 The EC is to provide details of their own system including basic monitoring parameters
provided and ensure it can be integrated with the buildings central BMS system.
 Safety Equipment: The gradual type over speed safety gear, comprising of a close loop
roping system, over speed centrifugal governor, safety gear equipment etc under the car shall
be provided. The operation of the system shall be such that if the car over speeds in the
downward direction, the governor jaws shall trip, operating the safety gear. It shall, in
sequence cut off the motor power supply, apply normal brakes and engage the safety gear
jibs. When the safety gear jibs engage with the car guides it shall apply a constant retarding
force to bring the car to a gradual and smooth stop within defined limits. Re-setting of the
safety devices shall be possible by moving the car in upward direction. The complete system
shall comply with the relevant sections of JIS/ BSEN 81 elevator safety code.
 Over Travel Limit Switches: Over travel limit switches shall be provided at the top and
bottom of the terminal landings to disconnect the power supply and apply the brakes to
bring the car to a safe stop in the event of an over travel in either direction.
 Evacuation Devices: Provision shall be made to move the car manually from the machine room
to a nearest landing in either direction to facilitate evacuation of passengers during a power
failure. In accordance with the requirements of the Civil Defence an automatic, battery
operated, drive system will bring the car to the next landing to allow passengers toleave
the car provided all the safety circuits are operational.
 If the car is overloaded it shall be prevented from starting. The car operating panel will
incorporate the overload indicator and buzzer and shall signal the overload condition to the
passengers. The car should not move until the load is reduced to a required capacity.
 Emergency Alarm Bell to be located at the main landing inside the shaft. (Not on the car top)
 Fireman’s Operation as per the Local Civil Defence requirement.

240 DOOR OPERATOR AND REOPENING DEVICES


 The door operator shall be a heavy duty variable speed controlled AC motor with VVVF
control suitable for the specified duty.
 The inverter shall include high speed switching device which in turn shall provide a smooth
sine curve of output current to assure smooth, quiet and precise door control.
 The opening and closing speeds of the doors shall be adjustable.
 The landing and car doors shall operate in full synchronism.
 Safety Features: Emergency unlocking key from landing side for evacuation.
 Pressure sensitive door reversal device is to be fitted to the car door operator.
 Full height electronic multi beam curtain of light with minimum 36 beams shall be fixed to
the sill of the car doors (not the car door panel) to reverse the doors if there is any
obstruction when closing.
 Retractable safety edge is acceptable in case of use in conjunction with the above.
 Door nudging feature will operate when the doors are impeded from closing. After a
predetermined time the doors will close at slow speed and sound a warning buzzer. If the
obstruction fails to move the doors will re open and repeat the operation until the
obstruction is removed.
 Electrical interlock to operate in conjunction with the car and landing doors, so that elevators
cannot operate unless doors are fully closed.
 Door Load Detector: When an object is caught in opening/closing doors, the doors will
reverse its direction when an excess load is detected. For example, when a pebble becomes
lodged in the door track, rather than force itself open/close, the reverse cycle is to be
repeated until the problem is eliminated.
 Automatic door open time adjustment: The system judges the situation whether each car
stops responding to a car call or a hall call and controls the time of the doors stay open
accordingly. The time spent waiting for the elevator is thereby shortened and operating
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 408 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

efficiency is increased.
 Door Operation Feature: In the event of any door safety device malfunction, a temporary
override function is to be automatically engaged to close the doors, thereby preventing a
fault in elevator operation. Once the doors close completely, the override has to be cleared
and normal operation resumes.
 Door Nudging Feature: In the event of the doors being continually obstructed or the door
open button is continually activated for a given period a buzzer will repeat until the
obstruction is removed.

245 FINISH MATERIALS


General: Provide materials to the highest quality for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car
doors, hoist way entrances doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated in clause 115.
250 CAR ENCLOSURES
 General: Provide car enclosure to receive removable wall panels, where applicable, and to the
requirements of Clause 115.
 Elevator Car: The size of the car, interior design and decorations, ceiling and lighting and other
facilities shall be as called for in clause 115.
 The car shall be of rigid steel framework with sound isolation designed and manufactured all
in accordance with relevant sections of BSEN81-1.
 The car call buttons, alarm buttons and key switch operation shall be as described in the
relevant section of the specification. The following facilities shall be provided for each car, in
addition to the items already specified.
 Ventilation: A quiet electric ventilation fan mounted on car roof with hidden vents at high and
low level is to be provided. The fan shall be in blowing and substantially suitable to maintain a
regular change of air.
 Emergency Lighting: A self contained, automatic, battery operated emergency light to
BSEN81.
 A battery trickle charger shall be provided.
 The light to be located in the car operating panel or ceiling with a minimum two hour
duration. A battery trickle charger to be provided.
 Car and Landing Doors: The car and landing doors shall be fully automatic sliding doors. The
type and finish shall be as specified in clause 115.
 Car Operating Panel: The Car Operating Panel of each elevator shall be located in the side
wall and/or the front wall in accordance with BSEN81 or as per clauses 115 and contain the
following:

- Load plate and instructions.


- Large Size bright colour Dot matrix display for car position indicator with direction arrows.
- Tactile operating buttons numbered to correspond to the landing served with call
acceptance light for each button. Braille to be included as or adjacent to operating
buttons.
- Emergency Alarm call button. The button is to have a raised outer ring and tactile alarm
symbol to aid location by partial sighted persons.
- Features to be Included:-
 Door open button
 Door Close Button
 Re-open with hall call button/s
- Hands free Intercom station connected to the alarm button.
- Overload indicator with buzzer.
- Engraved “No Smoking” symbol.
- Working Area: A working area, complying with JIS/BS EN 81 shall be provided on the roof
of the car.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 409 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Lifts sharing an elevator shaft must be separated via a fixed screen to protect
maintenance personnel.
- Car and Landing Sills: Self cleaning sills manufactured in hard aluminium shall be securely
fitted at every landing entrance and on the car platform for the entire width of the
door opening. These sills shall be with integral grooves to act as guide for the bottom
of the door panels. Door guide shoes should be simple to replace when worn. The car sill
shall be securely fitted to the car platform and the landing sills securely fitted to the
entrance threshold. Sills shall be flushed with the finished floor level. The sills shall be
designed to provide adequate strength to support the loads exerting on them, in
addition to the safety and decorative entrance plate appearance.
- Operational and Special Features for ALL Elevators;
 Car Call cancelling: When a car responds to the final car call in up or down
direction, the system automatically checks and clears the remaining calls from
memory thus keeping operating efficiency high.
 Car Call Erase: In case a passenger enters an incorrect call it should be possible to
delete the call if the button is pressed again. EC to provide their own operational
description for the feature.
 Emergency Car Lighting: Turns on immediately when normal power fails,
providing illumination of minimum 10 lux within the car.
 Energy efficient lights inside the elevator including controls to turn lights off when
the elevator has been inactive for a period of maximum of five(5) minutes.
 Hand – winding operation for emergency purposes.
 Automated Voice Announciator for Passenger elevators if required.
 The EC shall provide a description, details and literature showing all the landing
and car signalisation offered.
 Finishing for car operating panel shall be of satin Stainless Steel(wet polished 4N
AISI 304) and/or mirror finish as per the Employer’s Representative’s request as
per manufacturer’s range of designs.

255 SHAFT(HOISTWAY) AND ENTRANCES


 General: Provide manufacturer’s standard horizontal-sliding, door and frame hoist way
entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills and accessories. Provide frame size
and profile to coordinate with hoist way construction.
 Materials and Finishes: Provide manufacturer’s standards, but not less than the specified.
 Hoist way door and frame: provide Manufacturer’s standard horizontal-sliding, door and
frame hoist way complete with track systems, hardware, sills and accessories. Provide frame
size and profile to coordinate with hoist way wall construction.
 All landing entrances including the landing doors shall be a minimum of 2.0 hours certified
fire rated where four stories or more and 1 hour when less than four floors. Fire test
certificate is to be supplied with the tender.
 EC to supply and Install emergency entrances for blind shaft of 11 meters or more.
 Any gap between the entrance frame and landing wall finishes/returns to be made good by
the MC except where as noted below:
 Where the sealing of the gap is required as a part of the certified fire rated entrance will be
the responsibility of EC to provide.
 Hoist way and Car Equipment: Guide Rails: For smooth running of the counterweight and the
elevator car, guide rails with steel tee sections shall be installed, covering the entire height of
the elevator shaft. The rails shall rest on the hoist way pit to prevent exerting any physical
forces on hoist way ceiling or walls of the building and shall be suitable for the speed / load
of the elevators. Proper expansion joints shall be provided to withstand forces created by
temperature variations.
 Car & Counterweight Guide Shoes: Both the car and counterweight shall be fitted as a
minimum with correctly sized slipper / roller type guide shoes as applicable.
 Hoisting Ropes: Bright steel wire ropes with fibre cores of adequate cross section

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 410 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

manufactured to BSEN81-1 or Steel wire ropes with adequate cross – section, manufactured
to BSEN81-1. Rope certification is to be provided.
 Governor Rope: These shall be manufactured similar to hoisting ropes. The two ends shall be
securely linked to the car and attached to the safety gear operating level. The governor ropes
shall be tensioned by a weight-loaded device located in the pit. Rope certification is to be
provided.
 Counterweight: Cast iron blocks enclosed in a steel framework shall be provided to balance
the weight of the car and the specified capacity. Blocks are to be painted and any sign of rust
should be removed and repainted with rust inhibiting paints.
 Buffers - Car and Counter-weight: For speeds of 1.60 m/s or higher oil type buffers shall be
fitted in the hoist way pit beneath both the car and counterweight. They shall be securely
mounted to steel plates on the pit floor. The plunger shall be of mild steel, accurately
machined and designed to provide very high safety factor. A toughened rubber bumper shall
be fitted to the top of the plunger to withstand the impact of the steel buffer plates
mounted on the underside of the car and the counterweight. An oil gauge shall be provided
to check the oil level.
 Travelling Cables: The travelling cables shall be 450/750V grade multi-core with stranded high
conductivity copper conductors, especially designed for elevator duty and manufactured
to JIS / BSEN 81. These cables shall be properly supported by retaining straps and individual
cable clamps. An additional 10% spare ways to be allowed for future use.
 CCTV co-axial cable between machine room or controller at the head of the shaft and cab as
applicable.

260 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT: Operating Panels, Signalisation & Indicators


 General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that lights when activated and remain lit until
call has been served. Fabricated lighted elements with long life bright colour LEDs.
 Landing Position Indicator & Hall Lantern: A Dot Matrix type car position indicator shall be
provided at all the landing entrance on sides of each door of each elevator incorporated in
the Hall Lantern. As the elevator travels through the hoist way, its position shall be indicated
by the illumination of the numeral/letter corresponding to the landing at which the elevator
is stopped or passing. Provide optional price for LED display.
 Indicators shall be properly designed for easy recognition with colour filters to provide
full contrast.
 All Face plated to be with bevelled edge and discreet fixing (and stainless steel wet polished
4N AISI 304 unless specified elsewhere).
 Travel direction arrows shall also be included in this indicator.
 Provide dot matrix/LCD (as stated in schedule) position indicator at all landing entrances as
applicable.
 An electronic gong sounds to inform waiting passengers of the car arrival and shall be part of
the landing signalization, which shall be fixed at all floors above the door. Gong for up is to
be different to down. Volume to be adjustable
 Gong is to sound prior to the arrival of the car to allow sufficient time for the passengers
to move to the arriving car.
 An arrival gong on car top only is not acceptable
 Landings Push Buttons and Indicators (in Braille)

- Tactile/Braille up and/or Down Buttons with indicator lights to show that the call has been
registered.
- Fire call-switch at the main landing for the Fireman’s elevator.
- Intercommunication System: Intercommunication system between the car, BMS room and
the elevator controller shall be provided. The pressing of the Alarm button in the car shall
activate a hands free transmitter / receiver. The Elevator Monitoring System is to also give
warning of the alarm bell being operated, location of intercom as per Employer’s
Representative’s requirements.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 411 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

265 FIREMAN’S EMERGENCY SERVICE: PHASE I & II


 Provide all elevators with automatic Phase I (recall) and Phase II (in –car) controls. Elevators
shall be arranged to operate in accordance with NFPA, ASME 17.1 and any other
requirements of authorities having local jurisdiction.
 Provide alternate level recall capacity for all cars, in the event that signal from the building
fire alarm system indicates fire in on the primary recall level.

266 MANUFACTURER’S TRADE MARK


 Manufacturer’s name shall not appear in the elevator cars except as required by regulations
where it may be displayed on the car operation panel face plate only. It may not appear on
entrances, remote control panels, elevator landing still plates, or any other location visible to
the general public or as dictated by the Client.

267 ENGRAVING
 All key switches, signage and signal / control device engraving shall be filled in black colour,
except where required by Code to be filled red or other specific color. Engraving filer shall
consist of permanent adhesive epoxy paint. Provide engraved identification and instructions
on car operating panels and on all elevator signal equipment including the remote control
panel to Employer’s Representative / Client approval.

268 EARTH QUAKE EMERGENCY OPERATION


 In the event of an earthquake all the elevators will respond as follows;-

- Elevators will immediately slow down and stop where ever they are in the shaft. The
elevator will travel at slow speed to the nearest landing. The elevator shall always move
in the opposite direction to the counterweight. The elevator will stop at the landing with
its doors open and switch off. A notice will illuminate with the following text. “Leave the
Elevator Immediately”.
- The elevator to be manually reset after being checked and approved for use by the
qualified elevator specialist.

EXECUTION
615 EXAMINATION
 Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with the requirements for
installation tolerances and the conditions affecting performance. Examine hoist ways, hoist
way openings, pits and machine rooms as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and
examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be
installed.

 For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing that dimensional
discrepancies and conditions were found to be satisfactory.

 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected

625 INSTALLATION
 Comply with manufacturers written instructions.
 The elevators shall be installed by the EC to the approval of Client and consultant. Sub-
letting the installation is not acceptable.

 The work will be carried out concurrently with the work of the building contract and in
line with the approved program of works.

 The MC will be required to carry out certain work in connection with the EC contract.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 412 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Builders Work and Attendance: The MC will allow for builders work as per requirements of
the EC as approved in connection with the elevator installation.

 The EC must provide full details of attendances required and to be undertaken by the MC
which are not as detailed in the attached MC attendances.

 If scaffolding is required for the installation of the elevators then the MC must provide this as
a part of his works. All scaffolding including entrance protection must be installed, adjusted
and maintained to the satisfaction of the safety officer.

 Where scaffold free installation is used the EC is required to provide all his own entrance
protection and temporary platforms within the elevator shafts for the purpose of the
installation. This includes any pit or machine room scaffolding required during the
installation.

 Electrical Installation of Elevators: General wiring throughout the installation shall be carried
out as specified in the electrical specifications. Earthing of all the equipment shall be carried
out as specified in electrical specification and as per IEE regulations. All wirings in the
elevator shaft will be protected by either high impact plastic or metal trunking throughout
the length of the elevator shaft. Horizontal wiring to the respective push buttons and
signalisation shall be securely fastened to the elevator shaft wall. All exposed wiring either in
the elevator shaft or motor room that could be subject to damage shall be enclosed in metal
conduit or trunking. Wiring shall not be run on any part of the motor room floor where
people will walk. Wiring run at high level must be securely supported on cable tray or similar.
Distribution equipment shall contain all protection equipment for motors and circuits. These
shall include overload protection, short – circuit protection, single phasing protection as
appropriate.

COMPLETION
910A TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
 Acceptance Testing: On completion of the elevator installation and before permitting use
(either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and
recommended by BS EN 81 and by governing regulations and agencies.

 Testing: On completion, in accordance with BS EN 81 a thorough test of the elevators under


the normal working conditions shall be carried out in the presence of and to the approval of
the Employer’s Representative. All materials used must be of the highest quality and best of
their respective kinds and must comply with the relevant BS EN 81. All weights necessary to
carry out the full load and overload tests must be provided by the EC and removed after
use.

 The tests will include but not be limited to the following:


- No load current and voltage readings both on “UP and “DOWN” circuits
- Full load current and voltage readings both on ‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ circuits Stalling
current and voltage and time taken to operate overload.
- Overload protection.
- Gate sequence relays, if provided and installed.
- All interlocks.
- Collective control and priority sequences, if installed.
- Safety gear mechanism.
- Speeds on up and down travel with loading and empty.
- Measurement of levelling accuracy as per BS EN 81-1

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 413 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Door contacts.
- Final terminal stopping device.
- Normal terminal stopping device.
- Insulation and earth continuity.
- Measurement of harmonics generated by the lift machines and control system as
measure at the power input point for each lift.
- Measurement of car vibrations, comfort during acceleration and jerking during
start up and stop.

 On completion of the test a full set of test results duly certified by the third party testing
agency will be provided to the Employer’s Representative with the manuals.

950 PROTECTION
 Temporary Use: Comply with the following requirements for each elevator used for
construction.
- Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished
car, to protect finishes from damage.
- Provide strippable protective film on entrances and car doors and frames.
- Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame faces.
- Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs and procedures as needed to
protect elevator and elevator equipment
- Do not overload elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. Overload features to
be active.
- Provide full maintenance service during construction time use.
- Restore elevator to full operation and final finishes after construction time use in time
for the handover.
- Perform condition check with owner’s representative on completion of construction time
use to establish condition and any damage caused.
- Repair / replace and damaged equipment / finishes so no evidence remains of correction
to Owners representative satisfaction.

955 AUTOMATIC RESCUE AND LEVELLING DEVICE


 Provide self-levelling device to maintain car levelling accuracy within 5mm of landing floor,
irrespective of load, without “hunting”. This device shall automatically and independent of other
devices, correct for over-travel, under travel and rope stretch.
 Provide battery operated automatic rescue device to next floor for all elevators.

975A TRAINING
 Engage a manufacturer authorised representative to train Employee’s maintenance
personnel to operate the elevators and perform rescue of entrapped passengers in the event
of an emergency.
 Check operation of each elevator with Employer’s personnel present and before date of
Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning
correctly.
 Check operation of each elevator with Employee’s personnel present not more than one
month before end of Warranty Period. Determine that operation systems and devices are
functioning correctly.
 EC shall be held responsible for the additional cost of subsequent re-inspections performed by
the consultant for deficiencies which were not completed at the time of initial re-inspection
and to correct all deficiencies.
 Separate training shall be provided for Employer as well as End User’s FM team.

980A MAINTENANCE SERVICE


 The EC shall be responsible for the complete inclusive maintenance of the elevator for a
period of twelve months from the date of Taking over of the project.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 414 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Include for inspection, cleaning and lubrication of the elevator and all the associated
equipment at periods of one month and to include the replacement of any part due to fair
wear and tear.
 Attend to all emergency calls within 1 hour due to the failure of the elevator/s to operate
normally throughout 24 hours of the day. The EC shall also give notice that any fault notified
will receive prompt attention on the day of the notification. In the event of a trapping the
EC shall respond immediately(Within 15 to 30 minutes)
 The Maintenance shall not be transferred or assigned to a third party.
 A monthly inspection sheet shall be submitted to the Employer’s representative immediately
after each monthly inspection. The report is to clearly state work done during the visit,
condition of the equipment and any parts fitted/to be fitted.
 At the end of 12month warranty the EC to be responsible for having the elevator certified by
a third party inspector and provide the operator with certificate proving compliance.
 Submit with Tender, written maintenance service proposal, substantiating and detailing
services to be provided, under the maintenance contract. Maintenance contract proposal shall
include the following provisions:-
- The maintenance contract shall be subject to termination by either party with forty five
(45) days written notice to the other party, forty five (45) days prior to the end of the
initial or any renewal period.
- The Employer may terminate the Contract at any time by written notice to the
maintenance company if a professionally qualified third party, retained by the Employer,
whose decision shall be final, judges the maintenance performed on any unit is not
according to the terms of Contract and fifteen (15) days written notice is given to the
maintenance company to correct the problem, and the problem has not been corrected
within fifteen (15) days.
- Maintenance shall include systematic examination, adjustment and lubrication of all
elevator equipment and apparatus, and repair or replacement of electrical and
mechanical parts of equipment and apparatus. Repair and replacement of damaged or
worn out parts shall be with parts of equivalent or better material and strength to the
original manufacturer’s design.
- Replace all wire ropes as often as necessary to maintain adequate factor of safety.
Changes of cables, both wire ropes and conductor cables as found necessary, based on
inspection standards of CEMA standard wire rope inspection. Examining and equalizing
tensions of all hoist and compensation ropes shall be included and performed on regular
basis.
- Renewals or repairs, necessitated by reason of misuse, accidents or negligence beyond the
reasonable control of the maintenance contractor shall not be included. Renewals or
repairs, necessitated by improper maintenance services, ordinary wear and tear or
components defects, shall be included.
- Supply all necessary lubricants, cleaning materials and repair parts required to keep
installation in good working order.
- Relays, resistors, solid state components, condensers, transformers, contact, leads and
microprocessor components shall be kept in good operating condition.
- Machines and motor static drive units shall be kept in good working condition with
particular attention being given to machine brake operation, and variable voltage variable
frequency control elements being in good condition. Bearings shall be checked
periodically for vibration, heat, wear, and kept lubricated.
- Safety circuits shall always be kept in proper adjustment.
- Include for re-lamping of all pit and shaft lighting.
- Maintenance coverage shall include for the servicing, lubrication, cleaning, repair and
replacement of elevator car ventilation fans.
- Equipment performance figures, as specified in this specification shall be maintained,
unless subsequently modified in writing by the Employer.
- Machine room equipment shall be kept clean and painted. Shaft, tops and bottoms of
cars, as well as elevator and machinery spaces shall be kept in clean condition.
- Guide rails shall be kept clean properly aligned. When necessary, guides and car and
counterweight guide rails shall be renewed, readjusted, or realigned as required to insure
smooth and quite operation. All oil reservoirs shall be kept properly sealed to prevent
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 415 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

leakage. Safety devices and governors shall be periodically examined and tested.
- Should it become necessary to work on elevators with hall or landing doors held open
proper safety barricades shall be erected to protect people from all hazards.
- Should Employer request work be performed on equipment covered by, but not included
in the terms of this Maintenance Contract, then such work shall be based on rates
included in Contract for time and materials (as modified by defined price index contained
in Contract).
- All work on equipment shall be registered in Employer’s log book, including time of arrival,
nature of work or problem, and action taken. Log book shall be kept in the respective
elevator machine room or alternatively in a location specified by the Employer.
- Maintenance program shall be set up and followed to meet or exceed the minimum
equipment maintenance frequencies. Program shall be designed to minimise shutdowns
and call backs. No two elevators in the same group shall be shut down at the same time
for maintenance purposes without the Employer’s prior approval. Shutdowns shall be
scheduled only after prior notification to Employer and with Employer’s consent.
- Maintenance shall include an annual test, conducted after hours, to ensure proper
operation of all emergency and life safety circuits.
 Adequate stock of spare parts shall be maintained locally and technicians shall be available at
such places to ensure fulfilment of service without unreasonable loss of time in reaching
Building location.
 Work under this maintenance provision shall be performed by personnel under supervision
and in direct employ of the OEM / company.

***End of Section X12***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 416 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION Z10
PURPOSE MADE
JOINERY

Page 417 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Z10 PURPOSE MADE JOINERY

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

110 FABRICATION
 Standard: To BS 1186-2.
 Sections: Accurate in profile and length, and free from twist and bowing. Formed out of solid
unless shown otherwise.
- Machined surfaces: Smooth and free from tearing, wooliness, chip bruising and other
machining defects.
 Joints: Tight and close fitting.
 Assembled components: Rigid. Free from distortion.
 Screws: Provide pilot holes.
- Screws of 8 gauge (4mm diameter) or more and screws into hardwood: Provide clearance
holes.
- Countersink screws: Heads sunk at least 2 mm below surfaces visible in completed work.
 Adhesive: Compatible with wood preservatives applied and end uses of timber.

120 CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF TIMBER


 General: Dimensions on drawings are finished sizes.
 Maximum permitted deviations from finished sizes:
- Softwood sections: To BS EN 1313-
1:- Clause 6 for sawn sections.
Clause NA.2 for further processed sections.
- Hardwood sections: To BS EN 1313-
2:- Clause 6 for sawn sections.
Clause NA.3 for further processed sections.

130 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD


 Cutting and machining: Completed as far as possible before treatment.
 Extensively processed timber: Retreat timber sawn lengthways, thicknessed, planed, ploughed,
etc.
 Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and/or drilling: Treat with two flood coats of a solution
recommended by main treatment solution manufacturer.

140 MOISTURE CONTENT


 Wood and wood based products: Maintained within range specified for the component during
manufacture and storage. Moisture content of internal and external purpose-made joinery to be
11% at time of manufacturing and fixing.

210 LAMINATED PLASTICS VENEERED BOARDS/ PANELS

 Fabrication: To British Laminated Plastics Fabricators Association Ltd (BLF) fabricating


standards.
 Balancing veneer: From decorative veneer manufacturer and of similar composition. Applied to
reverse side of core material.
 Finished components: Free from defects, including bow, twist, scratches, chipping, cracks,
pimpling, indentations, glue marks, staining and variations in colour and pattern.
 Joints visible in completed work: Tight butted, true and flush.

215 LAMINATED PLASTICS

 Decorative laminated plastics shall comply with BS 3794.


 Thickness:
- 1mm (min.) for horizontal work finish.
- 0.8mm (min) for vertical work finish.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 418 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Bending grade: 0.6mm.


 Post-forming grade: 1.1mm.
 Other requirements:
- Scratch-proof.
- Washable with soap and water.
- Non-fading colour in direct sunlight.
- Non-deforming under extreme weather conditions.
- Conforms to fire requirements as applicable
- Where required by the drawings, provide fire rated laminates in thickness and installation
methods required by UL and local authority.

220 WOOD VENEERED BOARDS/ PANELS

 Conditioning: Core material and veneers conditioned before bonding.


 Setting out: Veneer features and grain pattern aligned regularly and symmetrically unless
instructed otherwise.
 Balancing veneer: Applied to reverse side of core material.
- Moisture and temperature movement characteristics: As facing veneer.
 Veneer edges: Tight butted and flush, with no gaps.
 Finished components: Free from defects, including bow, twist, scratches, chipping, splits, blebs,
indentations, glue marks and staining.
 Surface finish: Fine, smooth, free from sanding marks.

240 WORKMANSHIP
 All work shall be trued and shall have perfectly level horizontal and plumb vertical lines. All joints
shall be glued and mortised interlocked or dowelled type. Where required, joints shall be
reinforced with countersunk wood screws of the proper size. No corrugated fasteners, metal
splines, metal corner reinforcing or other patented fastening devices shall be used without the
approval of the Engineer.
 Hardwood veneer shall be 1mm thick (minimum).
 Exposed joints shall be tight and formed as to conceal shrinkage. Stiles and rails of louvred units
shall be joined with either mortise or tenon or dowelled connections. All joints shall be glued.
 All fastenings shall be hidden to the extent possible. Fasteners to walls and other sub structures shall
be screw type of approved size and design. Nails may be used only for fastening trim boards
to blocking. Where nailing of boards is required, finish nails of the smallest size compatible
with the work shall be used, set below the surface and puttied so as to be nearly invisible as
possible, showing no hammer marks.
 Cut all holes in counters, cabinets and blocking to allow for the passage of electrical and
plumbing equipment and for the attachment of all fittings and accessories of all trades as
required.
 All edging, lipping and framing to decorative panelling over 15 mm in thickness shall be cross
tongued and glued to the panelling. The edging and framing shall be mitred and cross tongued
at corners.

250 FINISHING
 Joinery surfaces: Smooth, even and suitable to receive finishes.
 Arises: Eased unless shown otherwise on drawings.
 End grain in external components: Sealed with primer or sealer as section M60 and allowed to
dry before assembly.

***End of Section Z10***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 419 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION Z11
PURPOSE MADE
METALWORK

Page 420 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Z11 PURPOSE MADE METALWORK

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

310 MATERIALS GENERALLY


 Grades of metals, section dimensions and properties: To appropriate British Standards. When
not specified, select grades and sections appropriate for the purpose.
 Prefinished metal: May be used if methods of fabrication do not damage or alter appearance of
finish, and finish is adequately protected.
 Fasteners: To appropriate British Standards and, unless specified otherwise, of same metal as
component being fastened, with matching coating or finish.

320 STEEL LONG AND FLAT PRODUCTS


 Hot rolled structural steels (excluding structural hollow sections and tubes): To BS EN 10025-1.
 Fine grain steels, including special steels: To BS EN 10025-3 and -4.
 Steels with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance: To BS EN 10025-5.

330 STEEL PLATE, SHEET AND STRIP


 Plates and wide flats, high yield strength steel: To BS EN 10025-6.

340 HOT ROLLED STEEL PLATE, SHEET AND STRIP


 Flat products, high yield strength for cold forming: To BS EN 10149-1, -2 and -3.
 Carbon steel sheet and strip for cold forming: To BS EN 10111.
 Narrow strip, formable steel and steel for general engineering purposes: To BS 1449-1.8 and
BS 1449-1.14.

350 COLD ROLLED STEEL PLATE, SHEET AND STRIP


 Steel sections: To BS EN 10162.
 Flat products, high yield strength micro-alloyed steels for cold forming: To BS EN 10268.
 Carbon steel flat products for cold forming: To BS EN 10130 and BS EN 10131.
 Uncoated carbon steel narrow strip for cold forming: To BS EN 10139 and BS EN 10140.
 Narrow strip steel for general engineering purposes: To BS EN 10132-1, -2, and -3.
 Carbon steel flat products for vitreous enamelling: To BS EN 10209.

360 COATED STEEL FLAT PRODUCTS


 Hot dip zinc coated carbon steel sheet and strip for cold forming: To BS EN 10327 and BS EN
10143.
 Hot dip zinc coated structural steel sheet and strip: To BS EN 10143 and BS EN 10326.
 Hot dip zinc-aluminium (za) coated sheet and strip: To BS EN 10326 and 10327.
 Hot dip aluminium-zinc (az) coated sheet and strip: To BS EN 10327.
 Organic coated flat products: To BS EN 10169-1.

370 STEEL STRUCTURAL HOLLOW SECTIONS (SHS)


 Non alloy and fine grain steels, hot finished: To BS EN 10210-1 and -2.
 Non-alloy and fine grain steels, cold formed welded: To BS EN 10219-2.
 Weather resistant steels, hot finished: To BS 7668.

380 OTHER STEEL SECTIONS


 Equal flange tees: To BS EN 10055.
 Equal and unequal angles: To BS EN 10056-1 and -2.
 Wire, carbon steel for general engineering purposes: To BS 1052.
 Wire and wire products, general: To BS EN 10218-2.
 Tubes:
- Seamless circular: To BS EN 10297-1.
- Seamless cold drawn: To BS EN 10305-1.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 421 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Welded and cold sized square and rectangular: To BS EN 10305-5.


- Welded circular: To BS EN 10296-1.
- Welded cold drawn: To BS EN 10305-2.
- Welded cold sized: To BS EN 10305-3.

400 STAINLESS STEEL PRODUCTS


 Chemical composition and physical properties: To BS EN 10088-1.
 Sheet, strip and plate: To BS EN 10088-2.
 Semi-finished products bars, rods and sections: To BS EN 10088-3.
 Wire: To BS EN 1088-3.
 Tubes:
- Welded circular: To BS EN 10296-2.
- Seamless circular: To BS EN 10297-2.

410 ALUMINIUM ALLOY PRODUCTS


 Designations:
- Designation system, chemical composition and forms: To BS EN 573-1, -2, -3 and -5.
- Temper designations: To BS EN 515.
 Sheet, strip and plate: To BS EN 485-1 to -4.
 Cold drawn rods, bars and tubes: To BS EN 754-1 and -2.
 Extruded rods, bars, tubes and profiles: To BS EN 755-1 and -2.
 Drawn wire: To BS EN 1301-1, -2 and -3.
 Rivet, bolt and screw stock: To BS 1473.
 Structural sections: To BS 1161.

420 COPPER ALLOY PRODUCTS


 Sheet, strip, plate and circles for general purposes: To BS EN 1652.
 Sheet and strip for building purposes: To BS EN 1172.
 Rods: To BS EN 12163.
 Profiles and rectangular bars: To BS EN 12167.
 Wire: To BS EN 12166.
 Tubes: To BS EN 12449.

FABRICATION

515 FABRICATION GENERALLY


 Contact between dissimilar metals in components: Avoid.
 Finished components: Rigid and free from distortion, cracks, burrs and sharp arrises.
- Moving parts: Free moving without binding.
 Corner junctions of identical sections: Mitre.

518 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY


 For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work, which are exposed to view in the finished areas,use
only materials, which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, trademarks or roughness.
 Verify measurements and dimensions at site and ensure proper co-ordination and
programming of the work of this section with the work related trades especially the installation of
items embedded in concrete and masonry.
 Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1mm unless otherwise indicated on the
contract drawings. Form bend metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain
separation or other impairing work.
 Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Exposed threaded portion of bolts and screws shall be cut off flush with the
adjacent metal. Cut, drill, punch and tap as required for the installation and attachment of other
work to miscellaneous metal work.
 Metal work built in with concrete or masonry shall be formed for anchorage, or be provided

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 422 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

with suitable anchors, expansion shields or other anchoring devices shown or required to
provide support for the intended use. Furnish such metal work in ample time for setting and
securing in place.
 Make joints as strong and rigid as the adjoining sections. Make welds continuous along the
entire line of contact, except where spot welding is indicated. Grind exposed welds flush and
smooth to match and blend with the adjoining surfaces.
 Where welding is performed, comply with following:
- Remove dirt, grease, moisture and oxide from edges to be welded.
- Remove scale and residue from arc and powder cutting by machining or hand grinding.
- Ensure accurate fit using clamps and jigs where practical.
- Use tack welds for temporary attachment where jigging is not practical.
- Make joints with parent and weld metal fully fused throughout with no inclusions, holes,
porosity or cracks.
- For stainless steel, use double bevel butt welds, backing bars to remove heat, jigging, tack welds
and any other measures necessary to minimise distortion. Remove slight distortion by light
hammering taking care not to damage the surface finish.
- Prevent weld spatter falling on surfaces of materials which will be self-finished and visible in
the completed work.
- Ensure complete removal of flux residues and slab.

520 COLD FORMED WORK


Profiles: Accurate, with straight arrises.

525 ADHESIVE BONDING


 Preparation of surfaces of metals to receive adhesives:
- Degrease.
- Abrade mechanically or chemically etch.
- Prime: To suit adhesive.
 Adhesive bond: Form under pressure.

527 WELDING OF STEEL.


 Welding procedures:
- Method and standard: Metal arc welding to BS EN 1011-1 and -2.
- Welding Procedure Specification (WPS): Submit.
 Preparation:
- Joint preparation: Clean thoroughly.
- Surfaces of materials that will be self-finished and visible in the completed work: protect
from weld splatter.
 Jointing:
- Joints: Fully bond parent and filler metal throughout with no inclusions, holes, porosity or
cracks.
- Dissimilar metals: If applicable.
- Strength requirements: Welds to achieve design loads.
- Heat straightening: Obtain approval.
- Complex assemblies: Agree priority for welding members to minimize distortion caused by
subsequent welds
- Tack welds: Use only for temporary attachment.
- Jigs: Provide to support and restrain members during welding.
- Filler plates: Obtain approval.
- Lap joints: Minimum 5 x metal thickness or 25 mm, whichever is greater.
- Weld terminations: Clean and sound.

527A WELDING OF STAINLESS STEEL.


 Welding procedures:
- Method and standard: TIG welding to BS EN 1011-3.
- Welding Procedure Specification (WPS): Submit.
 Preparation:
- Joint preparation: Clean thoroughly.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil
Page 423 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- Surfaces of materials that will be self-finished and visible in the completed work: protect
from weld splatter.
 Jointing:
- Joints: Fully bond parent and filler metal throughout with no inclusions, holes, porosity or
cracks.
- Dissimilar metals: If applicable.
- Strength requirements: Welds to achieve design loads.
- Heat straightening: Obtain approval.
- Complex assemblies: Agree priority for welding members to minimize distortion caused by
subsequent welds
- Tack welds: Use only for temporary attachment.
- Jigs: Provide to support and restrain members during welding.
- Filler plates: Obtain approval.
- Lap joints: Minimum 5 x metal thickness or 25 mm, whichever is greater.
- Weld terminations: Clean and sound.

527B WELDING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS


 Welding procedures:
- Method and standard: TIG or MIG welding to BS EN 1011-4.
- Welding Procedure Specification (WPS): Submit.
 Preparation:
- Joint preparation: Clean thoroughly.
- Surfaces of materials that will be self-finished and visible in the completed work: protect
from weld splatter.
 Jointing:
- Joints: Fully bond parent and filler metal throughout with no inclusions, holes, porosity or
cracks.
- Dissimilar metals: If applicable.
- Strength requirements: Welds to achieve design loads.
- Heat straightening: Obtain approval.
- Complex assemblies: Agree priority for welding members to minimize distortion caused by
subsequent welds
- Tack welds: Use only for temporary attachment.
- Jigs: Provide to support and restrain members during welding.
- Filler plates: Obtain approval.
- Lap joints: Minimum 5 x metal thickness or 25 mm, whichever is greater.
- Weld terminations: Clean and sound.

530 STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATION


 Guillotining or punching: Do not use for metal thicknesses greater that 10 mm.
 Thermal cutting:
- Carbonation in the heat affected zone: Remove, after cutting.
 Bending:
- Plates or bars: Cold ending radius not less than material thickness.
- Tubes: Cold bending radius not less than 2 x tube diameter.
 Welding: In addition to general welding requirements:
- Protect adjacent surfaces from weld spatter.
- Pickle all welds before post fabrication treatments.
 Protection: Provide protection to fabricated components during transit and on site.

555 BRAZING
 Standard: To BS EN 14324.
 Testing:
- Destructive testing: To BS EN 12797.
- Nondestructive testing: To BS EN 12799.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 424 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

FINISHING
710 FINISHING WELDED AND BRAZED JOINTS VISIBLE IN COMPLETE WORK
 Standard: To BS EN ISO 8501-3.
 Butt joints: Smooth, and flush with adjacent surfaces.
 Fillet joints: Neat.
 Grinding: Grind smooth where indicated on drawings.

745 PREPARATION FOR APPLICATION OF COATINGS


 General: Complete fabrication, and drill fixing holes before applying coatings.
 Paint, grease, flux, rust, burrs and sharp arrises: Remove.

750 LIQUID ORGANIC COATING FOR ALUMINIUM ALLOY COMPONENTS


Standard: To BS 4842.

760 ZINC AND CADMIUM PLATING OF IRON AND STEEL SURFACES


 Zinc plating: To BS EN 12329.
 Cadmium plating: To BS EN 12330.

770 CHROMIUM PLATING


Standard: To BS EN 12540.

780 GALVANIZING
 Standard: To BS EN ISO 1461.
 Preparation:
- Vent and drain holes: Provide in accordance with BS EN ISO 14713. Seal after sections
have been drained and cooled.
- Components subjected to cold working stresses: Heat treat to relieve stresses before
galvanizing.
- Welding slag: Remove.
- Component cleaning: To BS EN ISO 8501-1.
 Grade: St 2 ½.

790 VITREOUS ENAMELLING


 Standard: To BS EN 14431.
 Substrate metal: Carbon steel or cast iron.

795 ANODIZING
 Standards:
- Internal applications: To BS EN 12373-1.
- External applications: To BS 3987 or BS EN 12373-1.
 Certificate of compliance: Submit.

COMPLETION

910 DOCUMENTATION
 Submit:
- Manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
Guarantees, warranties, test certificates, record schedules and log books.

920 COMPLETION
 Protection: Remove.
 Cleaning and maintenance: Carry out in accordance with procedures detailed in fabricators'
guarantees.

***End of Section Z11***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 425 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION Z12
PRESERVATIVE/ FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT

Page 426 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Z12 Preservative/ Fire Retardant Treatment

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

110 TREATMENT APPLICATION


 Timing: After cutting and machining timber, and before assembling components.
 Processor: Licensed by manufacturer of specified treatment solution.
 Certification: For each batch of timber provide a certificate of assurance that treatment has been
carried out as specified.
 All wood and all rough timber (except Teak) shall be pressure-treated by an approved method
and all such wood shall be accompanied upon delivery with a certificate from the timber
treatment company certifying the kind of preservative.
 Treat ends of all pieces cut on the job with identical material to that used in pressure
treatment.

120 COMMODITY SPECIFICATIONS


 Standard: Current edition of the British Wood Preserving and Damp-proofing Association
(BWPDA) Manual.

130 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT SOLUTION STRENGTHS/ TREATMENT CYCLES


 General: Select to achieve specified service life and to suit treatability of specified wood species.
Creosote products are not considered suitable for exposed wood work.

140A COPPER-ORGANIC PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT


 Solution:
- Product reference: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to the Engineer's
approval.( Chromate copper arsenate preservative to a retention of not less than 5.6Kg of
preservative per cubic meter of wood)
 Application: High pressure impregnation.
 Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: Not more than 28%. After treatment, allow
timber to dry before using.

165 WATER BASED MICROEMULSION PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT


 Solution:
- Product reference: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to the Engineer's
approval.
- Application: Double vacuum + low pressure impregnation.
 Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: As specified for the timber/component at time of
fixing. After treatment, timber to be surface dry before use.

210 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT


 Solution type: Interior.
- Product reference: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to the Engineer's
approval.
- Application: Vacuum + pressure impregnation.
 Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: As specified for the timber/component at time of
fixing. After treatment, timber to be redried slowly at temperatures not exceeding 65°C to
minimize distortion and degradation.

220 LEACH RESISTANT FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT


 Solution:
- Product reference: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to the Engineer's

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 427 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

approval.
- Application: Vacuum + pressure impregnation.
 Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: As specified for the timber/component at time of
fixing.

***End of Section Z12***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 428 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION Z20
FIXINGS/ADHESIVES

Page 429 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Z20 FIXINGS/ ADHESIVES

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

22 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper design, utilization and installation of the fixing
system.
 All adhesives, adhesive bonding primers, adhesive primers used in the project shall not exceed the
allowed limits of VOC as per green building regulation. These products must be
accredited/certified from DCLD or any other source approved by DM.
 To avoid damage to the reinforcement in the structural concrete, anchors supported directly by
the concrete shall be cast-in-place during casting of concrete.
 The fixing system, including the cast-in-place connections to the concrete structure shall perform
in a manner capable of sustaining forces generated by gravity loads, wind loads, and stresses
induced by thermal movement, acting separately or in combination with one another.
 Allow for the loads due to facade cleaning and maintenance equipment in the engineering and
manufacture of the fixing system.
 Engineer, detail, fabricate and install the fixing system of curtain walling or stone cladding to the
building structural frame making allowances for the following:
a) Fabrication and erection tolerances.
b) Structural deflections from applied loads.
 The contractor shall submit all the structural calculations, shop drawings, manufacturer's
product data and other documents required for the Engineer's approval.
 Materials shall be delivered to the project site in original factory packages.
 Components delivered to the project site shall be stored in a safe, dry and enclosed area to
avoid corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage.
 Remove and replace damaged items with new units.
 The contractor shall provide manufacturer's guarantee indicating products are of good quality, free
from defects and conform to current published technical data.
 Anchor embedments, accessories, and support brackets shall be manufactured by a company
that has been in the business of producing items required by this Specification for a minimum of
5 years.
 Pre-installed concrete anchor embedments shall be provided with foam fillers to prohibit concrete
from entering the area designed to receive inserts.
 The contractor shall protect all components of the fixing system from damage. Materials that are
damaged shall be replaced.

PRODUCTS

310 FASTENERS GENERALLY


 Materials: To have:
- Bimetallic corrosion resistance appropriate to items being fixed.
- Atmospheric corrosion resistance appropriate to fixing location.
 Appearance: Submit samples on request.

320 PACKINGS
 Materials: Noncompressible, corrosion proof.
 Area of packings: Sufficient to transfer loads.

330 NAILED TIMBER FASTENERS


 Nails:
- Steel: To BS 1202-1 or BS EN 10230-1.
- Copper: To BS EN 1202-2.
- Aluminium: To BS 1202-3.

340 MASONRY FIXINGS


 Light duty: Plugs and screws.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil Page 430 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Heavy duty: Expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

350 PLUGS
 Type: Proprietary types to suit substrate, loads to be supported and conditions expected in
use.

360 ANCHORS
 Types:
- Expansion: For use in substrate strong enough to resist forces generated by expansion of
anchor.
- Adhesive or chemical:
For use in substrate where expansion of anchor would fracture substrate.
For use in irregular substrate where expansion anchors cannot transfer load on anchor.
- Cavity: For use where the anchor is retained by toggles of the plug locking onto the inside
face of the cavity.

370 WOOD SCREWS


 Type:
- Wood screws (traditional pattern).
Standard: To BS 1210.
- Wood screws.
Pattern: Parallel, fully threaded shank or twin thread types.
Washers and screw cups: Where required are to be of same material as screw.

380 MISCELLANEOUS SCREWS


 Type: To suit the fixing requirement of the components and substrate.
- General standard: Coach screw BS1494:part 2, self-tapping screw BS4174
- Pattern: Self-tapping, metallic drive screws, or power driven screws.
- Washers and screw cups: Where required to be of same material as screw.

390 ADHESIVES GENERALLY


 Standards:
- Hot-setting phenolic and aminoplastic: To BS 1203.
- Thermosetting wood adhesives: To BS EN 12765.
- Polyvinyl acetate thermoplastic adhesive: To BS 4071.

410 POWDER ACTUATED FIXING SYSTEMS


Types of fastener, accessories and consumables: As recommended by tool manufacturer.

EXECUTION

610 FIXING GENERALLY


 Integrity of supported components: Select types, sizes, quantities and spacings of fixings,
fasteners and packings to retain supported components without distortion or loss of support.
 Components, substrates, fixings and fasteners of dissimilar metals: Isolate with washers/
sleeves to avoid bimetallic corrosion.
 Appearance: Fixings to be in straight lines at regular centres.

620 FIXING THROUGH FINISHES


Penetration of fasteners and plugs into substrate: To achieve a secure fixing.

630 FIXING PACKINGS


 Function: To take up tolerances and prevent distortion of materials and components.
 Limits: Do not use packings beyond thicknesses recommended by fixings and fasteners
manufacturer.
Locations: Not within zones to be filled with sealant.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 431 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

640 FIXING CRAMPS


 Cramp positions: Maximum 150 mm from each end of frame sections and at 600 mm
maximum centres.
 Fasteners: Fix cramps to frames with screws of same material as cramps.
Fixings in masonry work: Fully bed in mortar.

650 NAILED TIMBER FIXING


 Penetration: Drive fully in without splitting or crushing timber.
 Surfaces visible in completed work: Punch nail heads below wrot surfaces.
 Nailed timber joints: Two nails per joint (minimum), opposed skew driven.

660 SCREW FIXING


 Finished level of countersunk screw heads:
- Exposed: Flush with timber surface.
- Concealed (holes filled or stopped): Sink minimum 2 mm below surface.

670 PELLETED COUNTERSUNK SCREW FIXING


 Finished level of countersunk screw heads: Minimum 6 mm below timber surface.
 Pellets: Cut from matching timber, match grain and glue in to full depth of hole. Finished
level of pellets: Flush with surface.

680 PLUGGED COUNTERSUNK SCREW FIXING


 Finished level of countersunk screw heads: Minimum 6 mm below timber surface.
 Plugs: Glue in to full depth of hole.
Finished level of plugs: Projecting above surface.

690 USING POWDER ACTUATED FIXING SYSTEMS


 Powder actuated fixing tools: To BS 4078-2 and Kitemark certified.
Operatives: Trained and certified as competent by tool manufacturer.

700 APPLYING ADHESIVES


 Surfaces: Clean. Adjust regularity and texture to suit bonding and gap filling characteristics of
adhesive.
 Support and clamping during setting: Provide as necessary. Do not mark surfaces of or distort
components being fixed.
Finished adhesive joints: Fully bonded. Free of surplus adhesive.

****End of Section Z20*****

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 432 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION Z21
MORTARS

Page 433 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Z21 MORTARS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS

110 CEMENT GAUGED MORTAR MIXES


 Specification: Proportions and additional requirements for mortar materials are specified
elsewhere.

120 SAND FOR SITE MADE CEMENT GAUGED MASONRY MORTARS


 Standard: To BS EN 13139.
 Grading: 0/2 (FP or MP).
- Fines content where the proportion of sand in a mortar mix is specified as a range (e.g.
1:1: 5-6):
Lower proportion of sand: Use category 3 fines.
Higher proportion of sand: Use category 2 fines.
 Sand for facework mortar: Maintain consistent colour and texture. Obtain from one source.

131 READY-MIXED LIME/ SAND FOR CEMENT GAUGUED MASONRY MORTARS


 Standard: To BS EN 998-2.
 Lime: Nonhydraulic to BS EN 459-1.
- Type: CL 90S.
 Pigments for coloured mortars: To BS EN 12878.

160 CEMENTS FOR MORTARS


 Cement: To BS EN 197-1.
- Types: Portland cement, CEM I.
Portland slag cement, CEM II /B-S
Portland fly ash cement, CEM II / B-V.
- Strength class: 42.5 or 52.5.
 White cement: To BS EN 197-1.
- Type: Portland cement, CEM I.
- Strength class: 52.5.
 Sulfate resisting cement: To BS 4027.
- Strength class: 42.5.
 Masonry cement: To BS EN 413-1.
- Class: MC 12.5 (with air entraining agent).

180 ADMIXTURES FOR SITE MADE CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS


 Air entraining (plasticizing) admixtures: To BS EN 934-3 and compatible with other mortar
constituents.
 Other admixtures: Submit proposals.
 Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride, ethylene glycol and any admixture containing calcium
chloride.

190 RETARDED READY TO USE CEMENT GAUGED MORTAR


 Standard: To BS EN 998-2.
 Lime for cement: lime: sand mortars: Nonhydraulic to BS EN 459-1.
- Type: CL 90S.
 Pigments for coloured mortars: To BS EN 12878.
 Time and temperature limitations: Use within limits prescribed by mortar manufacturer.
- Retempering: Restore workability with water only within prescribed time limits.

200 STORAGE OF CEMENT GAUGED MORTAR MATERIALS


 Sands and aggregates: Keep different types/ grades in separate stockpiles on hard, clean, free-
draining bases.

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 434 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Factory made ready-mixed lime: sand/ ready to use retarded mortars: Keep in covered
containers to prevent drying out or wetting.
 Bagged cement/ hydrated lime: Store off the ground in dry conditions.

210 MAKING CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS


 Batching: By volume. Use clean and accurate gauge boxes or buckets.
- Mix proportions: Based on dry sand. Allow for bulking of damp sand.
 Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency, free from lumps.
- Mortars containing air entraining admixtures: Mix mechanically. Do not overmix.
 Working time (maximum): Two hours at normal temperatures.
 Contamination: Prevent intermixing with other materials.

***End of Section Z21***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil


Page 435 of 442
Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION Z22
SEALANTS

Page 436 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Z22 SEALANTS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with general specification
requirements for joint sealants (pourable and gun grade sealants and preformed strips and tapes).It
is invoked by reference in other sections to avoid excessive repetition. The design work is to be
completed by the Contractor and this design work may entail anything from selection of a product, to
full system design against specified performance criteria.

170 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


 Submit sample board showing all the materials proposed for application.
 All sealants, sealant primers used in the building shall not exceed the allowed limits of VOC.
These materials must be accredited/certified from DCL or any other source approved by DM.
 Submit the manufacturer's printed installation and maintenance instructions for each type of
sealant.
 Deliver materials to the project site in the original package with seals unbroken and with the
manufacturer's name stamped clearly thereon.
 All materials utilised shall be from new cartridges with shelf life valid until completion of the
installation.
 Colour of sealants shall be to the Engineer's selection from the manufacturer's standard range.
 The sealant applicator must examine the location, size and surfaces of joints as well as the
backing and anchorage of units forming the joint. The Engineer must be notified in writing of
any conditions affecting the proper completion of works or the performance of the sealant. Work
shall not be carried out until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable
to the sealant applicator and Engineer.
 Multi-component sealants shall be mixed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
 Do not overfill joints, or allow sealants to spill onto adjacent surfaces. It is necessary to achieve a
neat finish and therefore adjoining surfaces should be masked.
 Except when otherwise recommended by the manufacturer or specified by the Engineer fill the
sealant joint to just below the adjoining surfaces.
 Installed gun-grade sealants must be tooled to expel trapped air, force the sealant into firm
contact with the joint faces and achieve a neat finish.
 Install smooth faced, closed cell polyethylene foam sealant backing rod at the compression and
depth recommended by the sealant manufacturer unless otherwise indicated on the contract
drawings.
 Install bond breaker tape wherever indicated on the contract drawings or recommended by the
sealant manufacturer.
 Clean and remove stains from surfaces of all materials adjoining sealed joints. Remove excess of
sealant on adjoining surfaces in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's instructions.

180 WARRANTIES
 Works under this section shall be covered by a written warranty valid for three (03) years from the
date of Taking over of Works, supported by the manufacturer's product warranty for the same
period of time.

PRODUCTS

310 JOINTS GENERALLY


 Primer, backing strip, bond breaker: Types recommended by sealant manufacturer.

EXECUTION

610 SUITABILITY OF JOINTS


 Pre-sealing checks:
- Joint dimensions: Within limits specified for the sealant.
- Substrate quality: Surfaces regular, undamaged and stable.
 Joints not fit to receive sealant: Submit proposals for rectification.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 437 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

620 PREPARING JOINTS


 Surfaces to which sealant must adhere:
- Remove temporary coatings, tapes, loosely adhering material, dust, oil, grease, surface
water and contaminants that may affect bond.
- Clean using materials and methods recommended by sealant manufacturer.
 Vulnerable surfaces adjacent to joints: Mask to prevent staining or smearing with prime or
sealant.
 Backing strip and/ or bond breaker installation: Insert into joint to correct depth, without
stretching or twisting, leaving no gaps.
 Protection: Keep joints clean and protect from damage until sealant is applied.

630 APPLYING SEALANTS


 Substrate: Dry (unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer) and unaffected by frost, ice
or snow.
 Environmental conditions: Do not dry or raise temperature of joints by heating.
 Sealant application: Fill joints completely and neatly, ensuring firm adhesion to substrates.
 Sealant profiles:
- Butt and lap joints: Slightly concave.
- Fillet joints: Flat or slightly convex.
 Protection: Protect finished joints from contamination or damage until sealant has cured.

***End of Section Z22***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 438 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

SPECIFICATION Z31
POWDER COATINGS

Page 439 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

Z31 POWDER COATINGS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. This section deals with general specification requirements
for super durable powder coatings to aluminium and steel.

120 POWDER COATING MATERIALS


 Type of coating: Super durable powder coating.
 Selected manufacturer: Submit details before commencement of powder coating.

210 WORKING PROCEDURES


 Requirement: Comply with:
- BS 6496 for aluminium alloy backgrounds.
- BS EN 13438 for galvanized steel backgrounds.
- British Coatings Federation: Code of safe practice - Application of thermosetting powder coatings by
electrostatic spraying.
- Powder coating manufacturer’s guarantee.

220 POWDER COATING APPLICATORS


 Applicator requirements:
- Approved by powder coating manufacturer.
- Currently certified to BS EN ISO 9001.
- Comply with quality procedures, guarantee conditions, standards and tests required by powder
coating manufacturer.
- Each applicator to use only one plant.
 Selected applicator: Submit details before commencement of powder coating.

222 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POWDER COATING APPLICATORS


 The applicator must issue a certificate to the Engineer before delivery of work to site, confirming
that coatings are in accordance with this specification (Declaration of conformity).
 The applicator must issue a completed quality control report for each batch of coated material (Certificate
of compliance).

225 GUARANTEES
 Powder coating manufacturer and applicator guarantees:
- Submit sample copies before commencement of powder coating.
- Submit signed project specific copies on completion of work.
- Validity: Ten years from date of Taking over of Works.

230 CONTROL SAMPLES


 Sequence: Prior to ordering materials for the works, obtain approval of appearance for:
- Powder coated samples: Of various grades and forms of background metal to be used, showing any
colour, texture and gloss variation.
- Fabrication samples: Showing joint assembly, how powder coating is affected and how any cut metal
edges are protected.
 Samples to include the following information:
- Product reference.
- Colour:
- Reference number.
- Name.
- Gloss level.

235 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AT PLANT


 Requirement: Contractors/ suppliers of the following designated components mustcommission an
approved Independent Inspection Authority to carry out acceptance inspections to confirm that
powder coating application complies with this specification.
- Designated components: All items specified to be powder coated.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 440 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

 Acceptance inspections: Carry out for each variation of colour and finish of each component
work package at applicator's plant prior to any fabrication of units, in accordance with the
following:
- Where three or more production runs are required for application of coatings, not less
than three acceptance inspections must be carried out in accordance with BS 6001-1,
general inspection level 2, with an acceptance quality limit of 1%.
- Where less than three production runs are required for application of coatings, one
acceptance inspection must be carried out in accordance with BS 6001-2, with a limiting
quality of 5% where the probability of acceptance is 10%.
 Components failing inspection: Reprocess or replace and reinspect.
 Inspection reports: Independent Inspection Authority must submit copies.

241 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION ON SITE


 Requirement: Where coating specification compliance at plant is unresolved, contractors/
suppliers must commission an approved Independent Inspection Authority to carry out site
acceptance inspections.
 Acceptance inspections: Carry out in accordance with BS 6001-2 with a limiting quality of 5%
where the probability of acceptance is 10%. Each component of a fabricated unit will be
assessed as an individual part for sampling procedures.
 Components failing inspection: Remove and reprocess/ replace.

250 COMPONENT DESIGN


 Condition of components to be powder coated:
- To comply with relevant recommendations of BS 4479-1, -3, and -4.
- Of suitable size to fit plant capacity.
- Of suitable thickness to withstand oven curing.

310 PRETREATMENT
 Condition of components to be powder coated:
- Free from corrosion and damage.
- Free from inpurities including soil, grease, oil.
- Suitable for and compatible with the pretreatment and powder coating process.
 Process: Cleaning, application of conversion coat, conditioning, rinse in demineralized water,
drain and dry components in accordance with the powder coating manufacturer’s
requirements and the pretreatment supplier’s recommendations.

430 EXTENT OF POWDER COATINGS


 Application: To visible component surfaces, and concealed surfaces requiring protection.
Coated surfaces will be deemed 'significant surfaces' for relevant BS 6496/ BS EN 13438
performance requirements.

435 APPLICATION OF POWDER COATINGS


 Surfaces to receive powder coatings: Free from dust or powder deposits.
 Completion of powder coatings: Within 48 hours of pre-treatment of components.
 Jig points: Not visible on coated components.
 Curing: Controlled to attain metal temperatures and hold periods recommended by powder
coating manufacturer.
 Stripping and recoating of components: Only acceptable by prior agreement of powder
coating manufacturer. Stripping, pretreatment and powder coating are to be in accordance
with manufacturer’s requirements.
 Overcoating of components: Not acceptable.

440 PERFORMANCE AND APPEARANCE OF POWDER COATINGS


 Standard: To BS 6496/ BS EN 12206-1.
450 ALUMINIUM ALLOY FABRICATIONS
 Units may be assembled:
- Before powder coating.
Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 441 of 442


Proposed G+M Warehouse and G+M1+M2 Office Facility on plot no 5330165, DIC, Dubai. UAE

- From components powder coated after cutting to size.


- Where approved, from components powder coated before cutting to size.
 Exposure of uncoated background metal: Not acceptable.
 Assembly sealants: Compatible with powder coatings and complying with Green buildingregulation. Obtain
approval of colour if sealants are visible after fabrication.

460 STEEL FABRICATIONS


 Unit assembly: Wherever practical, before powder coating.
 Exposure of uncoated background metal: Not acceptable.
 Assembly sealants: Compatible with powder coatings and complying with Green buildingregulation. Obtain
approval of colour if sealants are visible after fabrication.

470 FIXINGS
 Exposed metal fixings: Powder coat together with components, or coat with matching repair paint system applied
in accordance with the powder coating manufacturer's recommendations.

480 FABRICATION DAMAGE REPAIR/ REPLACEMENT


 Inspection: Check all components before delivery to site for damage to powder coatings. Submit proposals for
repair or replacement.

510 PROTECTION
 Powder coated surfaces of components: Protect from damage during handling and installation, or by subsequent site
operations.
 Protective coverings: Must be:
- Resistant to weather conditions.
- Partially removable to suit building in and access to fixing points.
 Protective tapes in contact with powder coatings: Must be:
- Low tack, self adhesive and light in colour.
- Applied and removed in accordance with tape and powder coating manufacturers' recommendations. Do
not use solvents to remove residues as these are detrimental to the coating.
 Inspection of protection: Carry out monthly. Promptly repair any deterioration or deficiency.

530 SITE DAMAGE REPAIR/ REPLACEMENT


 Damage to powder coatings: Rectify immediately the damage caused during handling and installation, or by
subsequent site operations. Submit proposals for extensive repair or replacement.

535 DOCUMENTATION
 Submit the following information for each batch of powder coated components:
- Supplier.
- Trade name.
- Colour.
- Type of powder.
- Method of application.
- Batch and reference number.
- Statutory requirements.

540 COMPLETION
 Protection: Remove
 Cleaning and maintenance of powder coatings: Carry out in accordance with procedures detailed in powder
coating manufacturer and applicator guarantees.

***End of Section Z31***

Tender | Volume 2B – Specifications Civil

Page 442 of 442

You might also like